a i 5 nt aia teste Hs Aiteret aaMa cere cua ae a fei aa aan . ee ve naiionnieree aa aa ies ats} Parry Rae thas a heal ms * vaeeune an * fhebiy 4 SEeOe tri Hise ) etna Su tye BAERS, ey mS vA aaah nc eysAciySur pet Pers ig etatetoteke nny taibaiseAalh fests be aRuesiradah eta deias st obaR, uA SSeS Ae iach sthidnsilal o ? : aru nsiaby iol Suna ih wy gin v Pinta ag Ee asia H i Hs ¥ seam tena g ay ately te tngs “(h welts Y 3 p " : OR vty Bo eee web ray ie Ve vranaap tae Ce 4 Fat, i Lrteaute te ea cacti ta ‘tinge tdtieaga ates pasablea eters Meee oy tne! + inng Ung Rew Ma can et pia tm dere oped eo ny gph ' ee | oe aA | P Bp letins of mericgdit ) ear Poy eer Pye wie © At weal” ON ee & aay a me Begun in 1895 VOLUME 109, NUMBER 349 MARCH 5, 1996 Stromatoporoids from the Emsian (Lower Devonian) of Arctic Canada by Eric Prosh and Colin W. Stearn Paleontological Research Institution 1259 Trumansburg Road : Ithaca, New York, 14850 U.S.A. EMeadity PIG Pies fi AA A eee é vi x PALEONTOLOGICAL RESEARCH INSTITUTION Officers PRESIDENT (so eee SN TE ee JOHN C. STEINMETZ VAGE-PRESTDEN I eee sa aed ean One Pe a ro RICHARD E. PETIT SEGRETARIV6 eye yee hee EOI CTE oN en eeetiore ol epee Cee HENRY W. THEISEN FREASURERS 3 Nr nae coc eras on Tn een ieee Bn eee PAMELA WAIT DIRECTOR ay Fe rt ee ee ey Ae Cee re: WARREN D. ALLMON Trustees R. TUCKER ABBOTT (to 6/30/96) RICHARD E. PETIT (to 6/30/96) Bruce M. BELL (to 6/30/96) EDWARD B. Picou (to 6/30/98) CARLTON E. BRETT (to 6/30/98) GARY ROSENBERG (to 6/30/96) WILLIAM L. CREPET (to 6/30/97) CONSTANCE M. SoJA (to 6/30/97) J. THOMAS DuTRO, JR. (to 6/30/96) JAMES E. SORAUF (to 6/30/97) SHIRLEY K. EGAN (to 6/30/98) JOHN C. STEINMETZ (to 6/30/97) ANTON J. EGNER (to 6/30/97) SUSAN B. STEPHENS (to 6/30/96) M. G. HARASEWYCH (to 6/30/98) HENRY W. THEISEN (to 6/30/98) HARRY G. LEE (to 6/30/97) MARY KANE TROCHIM (to 6/30/98) Amy R. McCCUNE (to 6/30/97) PAMELA WAIT (to 6/30/96) SAMUEL T. PEES (to 6/30/98) THOMAS C. WHITELEY (to 6/30/97) Trustees Emeritus Harry A. LEFFINGWELL ROBERT M. LINSLEY RAYMOND VAN HOUTTE WILLIAM P. S. VENTRESS BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY and PALAEONTOGRAPHICA AMERICANA WARRENDID A BEMON ore erence scr Oke eta cate cer tei net eee EDITOR Reviewers for this issue BARRY D. WEBBY CARL W. STOCK A list of titles in both series, and available numbers and volumes may be had on request. Volumes 1-23 of Bulletins of American Paleontology are available from Periodicals Service Company, 11 Main St., Germantown, New York 12526 USA. Volume | of Palaeontographica Americana has been reprinted by Johnson Reprint Corporation, 111 Fifth Ave., New York, NY 10003 USA. Subscriptions to Bulletins of American Paleontology may be started at any time, by volume or year. Current price is US $62.50 per volume. Numbers of Palaeontographica Americana are priced individually, and are invoiced separately on request. for additional information, write or call: Paleontological Research Institution 1259 Trumansburg Road Ithaca, NY 14850 USA (607) 273-6623 FAX (607) 273-6620 © This paper meets the requirements of ANSI/NISO Z39.48-1992 (Permanence of Paper). Begun in 1895 VOLUME 109, NUMBER 349 Stromatoporoids from the Emsian (Lower Devonian) of Arctic Canada by Eric Prosh and Colin W. Stearn SRI SONIA ~ , MAR 29 1996 LIBRARIES Paleontological Research Institution 1259 Trumansburg Road Ithaca, New York, 14850 U.S.A. MARCH 5, 1996 ISSN 0007-5779 ISBN 0-87710-440-9 Library of Congress Catalog Card Number: 95-071054 Printed in the United States of America Allen Press, Inc. Lawrence, KS 66044 U.S.A. Abstract Introduction Acknowledgements Stratigraphy Introduction Eids Formation Blue Fiord Formation Bird Fiord Formation Disappointment Bay Formation Unnamed Formation Conodont Biostratigraphy Dehiscens and Gronbergi Zones Inversus Zone Serotinus Zone Undifferentiated Patulus Zone Stromatoporoid Biostratigraphy and Paleogeography Southwestern Ontario and North-Central United States Northern Asia Australia and China Discussion Systematic Paleontology Introduction Systematics Order Actinostromatida Family Actinostromatidae Genus Actinostroma Genus Plectostroma Genus Aculatostroma Order Clathrodictyida Family Clathrodictyidae Genus Clathrodictyon Genus Gerronostroma Genus Petridiostroma Genus Atelodictyon Family Tienodictyidae Genus Anostylostroma Genus Pseudoactinodictyon Genus Schistodictyon Order Stromatoporellida Family Stictostromatidae Genus Stictostroma Genus Stromatoporella Genus Clathrocoilona Family Hermatostromatidae Genus Trupetostroma Order Stromatoporida Family Stromatoporidae Genus Stromatopora Genus Ferestromatopora Genus Glyptostromoides Family Syringostomellidae Genus Syringostromella Genus Salairella Order Syringostromatida Family Syringostromatidae Genus Atopostroma Genus Habrostroma Genus Parallelopora Appendix 1. Collection Localities Appendix 3. Collecting locations and stratigraphic positions References cited Plates Index Appendix 2. Catalogue of Type Numbers and Locations .. CONTENTS LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS Text-figure Page I. .Position:of:collecting localities: in @Ganadianvarcticslamds:, acs. phiesesekiesc, o.0escicue iste) siereteve ss sesesane pele eee ee eheielejereter siesta eeetoe en epee 7 2.. Correlation chart of formations: from: which stromatoporoids: were collected: 5.666. a je oie wee ev se 2 45 0 6 0, 010 bie 0nd 1010 ore wisi o eisyeutleiolers cleueke 8 3. Stratigraphic ranges of Lower and lower Middle Devonian stromatoporoids. .............00000 000s c eee cece eee eee eens 12 LIST OF TABLES Table Page .., (Comparative measurements of Stictostromna BOrri@nSeStEAaTDs, © 24. 6:66 00.0 50.e epeiig Hee bw hig gw waa 8's WEA) Soa, Bib SAI eee TS Avaya w oreuae Re eene tee 75) STROMATOPOROIDS FROM THE EMSIAN (LOWER DEVONIAN) OF ARCTIC CANADA Eric C. PROSH AND COLIN W. STEARN Earth and Planetary Sciences, McGill University, Montreal, Canada ABSTRACT Early Devonian limestones of Ellesmere, Bathurst, and smaller islands between them in the Canadian Arctic Archipelago contain a diverse fauna of stromatoporoid sponges. This fauna provides the best evidence in North America of the early recovery phase of this reef-building group from a diversity low at the Silurian/Devonian boundary, a recovery that lead to its diversity peak in Givetian time. Stromatoporoids from the lower member of the Blue Fiord Formation locally form large reefal masses. Well preserved stromatoporoids also occur less abundantly: 1. in the top of the underlying Eids Formation, 2. in the upper member of the Blue Fiord Formation, 3. in the Disappointment Bay Formation, which is correlative of the upper Blue Fiord, and, 4. in the overlying Bird Fiord Formation, and a correlative unnamed formation, both of which span the Lower/Middle Devonian boundary. The stratigraphic distribution of these stromatoporoids can be accurately determined according to conodont biostratigraphy as spanning the dehiscens to partitus (Emsian to basal Eifelian) conodont zones. Common occurrences of Stro- matoporella perannulata, Stictostroma gorriense, Habrostroma proxilaminatum, and Parallelopora campbelli in the arctic fauna and southern Ontario and the adjacent United States, indicate that the Detroit River Group is of similar Emsian age, and that the Eastern Americas realm was open to migration from the Arctic. Similarity of species with the Emsian faunas of Russia, Australia and China suggests the cosmopolitan and equatorial distribution of stromatoporoids in Emsian time and opens possibilities for using the group in correlation. The fauna is therefore important in establishing both the evolution of the order and also its geographic distribution in Early Devonian time. Twenty-five species (assigned to 22 genera) are described. The species concept used is a broad one and the range of variation in each taxon is documented. New species described are: Gerronostroma septentrionalis, Anostylostroma anfractum, Pseudoac- tinodictyon conglutinatum, Stictostroma? nunavutense, Clathrocoilona vexata, Stromatopora hensoni. The morphologic limits of the following genera are considered in the description of species: Plectostroma, Aculatostroma and Atelodictyon, Clathrocoilona, Salairella and Syringostromella. The range of Trupetostroma is extended downward into Emsian strata. INTRODUCTION Rocks of earliest Devonian age cover a relatively small area of the North American platform because this was a time of worldwide regression at the close of the Tippecanoe sequence. Reef faunas of this age are restricted in their distribution and of low diversity. In North America the Kaskaskia transgression appears to have started in the north and, spreading southward in shallow seas across the platform, brought with it a reef- building fauna rich in stromatoporoids. The first reef complexes of regional extent built in this sea were in the area that is now the Canadian Arctic Archipelago and are contained within the Blue Fiord Formation. This study describes the elements of this resurgent reef fauna. In eastern and arctic North America the growth of the reef fauna in subsequent Middle and Late De- vonian time was progressively inhibited by siliciclastic input, but in the Western Canada Sedimentary Basin reefs thrived through the middle part of the period and their growth culminated in giant Frasnian reef com- plexes. This study expands and refines earlier work by Stearn (1983) on the Emsian stromatoporoids of southern Ellesmere Island. Stearn described a fauna collected from the lower 100 m (lower Emsian, dehiscens Zone) of the Blue Fiord Formation in the type area between Eids and Sor Fiords (Text-fig. 1A). Of the 11 species described by Stearn (1983), eight are recognized in this study: Clathrodictyon ellesmerense Stearn, 1983, Ger- ronostroma septentrionalis n. sp., Clathrocoilona vex- ata n. sp., Stromatopora polaris, Stearn, 1983, Stro- matopora cf. S. hupschii (Bargatzky, 1881), Glyptos- tromoides simplex (Yang and Dong, 1979), Salairella prima Khromych, 1971, and Atopostroma distans (Ripper, 1937b). The three species that do not occur in the collections studied here, which were made by Gary Smith and Eric Prosh, are all represented in Stearn’s (1983) collections by single specimens. These include Gerronostroma cf. G. immemoratum Bogo- yavlenskaya, 1977, Amphipora sp., and Labechia sp. No amphiporids were found in these larger collections. The single poorly preserved specimen referred to La- bechia sp. has been tentatively identified as Syringo- dictyon tuberculatum (Nicholson) by St. Jean (1986). ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS We are grateful to Gary P. Smith who, in the prep- aration of his doctoral dissertation (Smith, 1984), col- 6 BULLETIN 349 lected most of the specimens on which this study is based. The field work of Smith (in 1978, 1979, and 1980) and of Prosh (in 1983 and 1992) was made pos- sible by the logistic support of the Polar Continental Shelf Project of Natural Resources Canada. Smith’s field work was funded by Natural Resources Canada, the Natural Science and Engineering Council, and the McGill Centre for Northern Studies and Research. The research of Eric Prosh and Colin Stearn is funded by grants from the Natural Sciences and Engineering Re- search Council, Canada to Stearn. For critical com- ments that have improved the manuscript we are grate- ful to Barry Webby, Carl Stock, and Warren Allmon. STRATIGRAPHY INTRODUCTION The Emsian and basal Eifelian stromatoporoids de- scribed in this study were collected from the Eids, Blue Fiord, Disappointment Bay, Bird Fiord, and an un- named formation. The great majority of specimens were collected by Gary Smith and Colin Stearn from the Blue Fiord Formation (lower to upper Emsian) of Ellesmere Island. Most of the Blue Fiord specimens were collected along a broad outcrop belt extending from Blue and Bird fiords in the west to Sér Fiord in the east (Text-fig. 1A). Because this outcrop belt in- cludes the type section of the Blue Fiord Formation, localities within the belt are referred to in the text as within the “type area” or in the “‘vicinity of the type section”. Supplementary collections from the Eids and Bird Fiord formations, which respectively underlie and overlie the Blue Fiord Formation (Texi-fig. 2), were also included in the study. Collections of Smith and Stearn from the Blue Fiord Formation northeast of the type area in the vicinty of Vendom Fiord (Text-fig. 1B) and by Smith from southwestern Ellesmere Island at Muskox and Goose Fiords (Text-fig. 1C) were also studied. The location of the collections studied and the stratigraphic sections measured by Smith (1984) are plotted on Text-figure | and listed by latitude and lon- gitude in Appendix 1. The geology of this southern coast of Ellesmere Island has been described recently by Mayr et al. (1994). The Disappointment Bay Formation of Bathurst, Cornwallis, and adjacent islands is a correlative of the middle-to-upper Blue Fiord Formation of Ellesmere Island (Text-fig. 2). Small collections from the Dis- appointment Bay Formation on Truro Island (Text- fig. 1, loc. 34) made by Eric Prosh in 1983 and 1992 and from Lowther Island (Text-fig. 1, loc. 33) in 1983 are also described here. On Bathurst Island and neighbouring islands, the uppermost Emsian and Eifelian are represented by an unnamed limestone that has been referred to incor- rectly as the Blue Fiord Formation. Stromatoporoids were collected from this unnamed formation on Bath- urst Island by Smith and on nearby Truro Island by Prosh. Ermps FORMATION The Eids Formation (Text-fig. 2) consists mostly of calcareous siltstone and shale, with less limestone, silt- stone and sandstone. It conformably underlies the Blue Fiord Formation in southern and central Ellesmere Island (Trettin, 1978). West of S6r Fiord it reaches a thickness of 767 m (Uyeno, 1990). With the exception of the uppermost beds transitional to the Blue Fiord Formation, the Eids Formation is poorly fossiliferous. It ranges in age from Lochkovian to earliest Emsian. Silty carbonates on Bathurst and adjacent islands as- signed by Kerr (1974) to the Eids Formation are much younger than the Eids on Ellesmere Island. Stromatoporoid specimens identified in this study as from the Eids Formation come from the upper 100 m in the Blue and Sor fiords areas of Ellesmere Island. In these areas the upper Eids consists of dark gray, calcareous siltstone and mudstone with interbeds of fossiliferous lime wackestone and isolated bioherms (Smith, 1984). BLUE FIORD FORMATION The Blue Fiord Formation is an important and wide- ly distributed cliff-forming unit in the arctic islands. The best exposed sections occur on southern Ellesmere Island and adjacent islands. The type section was des- ignated by McLaren (1963) between Blue Fiord and Eids Fiord (Text-fig. 1A). The typical Blue Fiord is predominantly a dark fossiliferous limestone spanning most of the Emsian Stage (Smith, 1984). The Blue Fiord Formation has been recorded from the arctic islands west of Ellesmere Island (Thorsteins- son and Tozer, 1962) and from the subsurface (Mayr, 1980) in the Bent Horn oilfield (a short distance west of the northwest tip of Bathurst Island and just off Text- fig. 1C). Much of what has been referred to the Blue Fiord Formation in the western arctic islands, how- ever, is of Eifelian age, and should ultimately be re- ferred to a new, as yet undescribed formation (see un- named Formation below). Studies of Blue Fiord macrofossils include those of Brice (1982) and Jones and Boucot (1983) on brachio- pods, Ormiston (1967) on trilobites, and Pedder (1982, 1983) on corals. In the type area of the Blue Fiord Formation, McLaren (1963) recognized two members: a lower limestone and shale member and an upper brown lime- stone member. The lower member is about 700 m thick DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN 7 Eids Fiord [ee eS, Bird Fiord = feooee See er Mil >i Text-figure 1.—Position of collecting localities in Canadian arctic islands. Precise positions by longitude and latitude for the numbered localities are given in Appendix 1. A. Blue Fiord-Sér Fiord area. B. Vendom Fiord area. C. Localities outside A and B. The stippled boxes show the positions of maps A and B. Truro Island—34, Lowther Island—33. (689 m; Uyeno, 1990) and consists of brownish gray to brown nodular limestones and lesser interbedded gray calcareous mudstones and shales (McLaren, 1963). The lower member is cliff-forming, abundantly fossil- iferous and contains large stromatoporoid-bearing bioherms. Smith (1984), and Smith and Stearn (1982, 1987a) recognized a variety of lithologic units within the lower member: interbedded lime mudstone and shale, argillaceous fossiliferous wackestone, skeletal grainstone to packstone, coral-stromatoporoid bound- stone. The upper brown limestone member is 572 m thick in a section near the type section (Uyeno, 1990) and consists of brown and brownish gray, bioclastic, coarse-grained limestone but contains relatively few fossils. On the west side of Vendom Fiord (Text-fig. 1B) the Blue Fiord Formation consists of about 1200 m of limestone and minor siltstone. Two informal units are 8 BULLETIN 349 Conodont zones undiff. patulus Blue Fiord Dolomitic Facies (Muskox & Goose Fiords) inversus gronbergi dehiscens Z, < = DN =. = PRAGIAN SOUTHERN ELLESMERE ISLAND Bird Fiord Fm. BATHURST, TRURO, LOWTHER ISLANDS unnamed formation Disappointment Bay Fm. Fiord Fm. Eids Fm. Text-figure 2.—Correlation chart of formations from which stromatoporoids were collected. recognized: 1) a lower carbonate member about 900 m thick consisting of gray limestone with dolostone interbeds and dark grayish-brown limestone, and 2) an upper siltstone-carbonate member of greenish silt- stones, calcareous siltstones and limestone interbeds overlain by a resistant grayish-yellow limestone and dolostone (Uyeno, 1990). The upper siltstone-carbon- ate member is the same unit provisionally assigned to the Bird Fiord Formation by Jones (1982). To the north and east of the type area as far as central Ellesmere Island, Blue Fiord lithologies represent pro- gressively more restricted depositional environments (Kerr, 1976; Trettin, 1978). On southernmost Elles- mere Island at Goose Fiord and adjacent Muskox Fiord, the formation is mostly dolomitic and deposition be- gan later than in the type area, in Late Emsian time (Text-fig. 2)(Mayr et al., 1994). This platformal dol- omitic facies also occurs on adjacent parts of Devon Island (Kerr, 1977; Prosh et al., 1988). Lithologically the dolomitic Blue Fiord consists of vuggy dolostone, vuggy lime mudstone, and dark fossiliferous lime wackestones and dolowackestones (Smith and Stearn, 1987b). The dolomitic Blue Fiord records a period of late Emsian transgression and platform inundation; it is approximately correlative with the upper member of the type Blue Fiord. Smith and Stearn (1987b) pro- posed that the dolomitic facies of the Blue Fiord be assigned to the Disappointment Bay Formation, but the term Blue Fiord is retained for these beds here (Prosh et al., 1988). DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN 9 BIRD FIORD FORMATION The Bird Fiord Formation overlies the Blue Fiord Formation conformably, and reflects in its lithology a transition to siliciclastic depositional conditions. It is widely distributed on southwestern Ellesmere Island, northwestern Devon Island and the Bathurst Island group (Goodbody, 1989). It ranges in age from latest Emsian to Eifelian. In the type area on Ellesmere Island it is over 800 m thick (Goodbody, 1989). A few stromatoporoid specimens were studied from the lower Bird Fiord Formation in the type area on the north side of Bird Fiord. These beds (the Norwe- gian Bay Member of Goodbody, 1989) consist of bio- clastic sandy limestone and calcareous siltstone with minor shale and argillaceous siltstone. DISAPPOINTMENT BAY FORMATION This late Emsian formation (Text-fig. 2) has been studied on Cornwallis Island, eastern Bathurst Island, and intervening smaller islands (Kerr, 1974; Thor- steinsson, 1980, 1986). It is mostly dolostone but lo- cally on Bathurst, Truro, and Lowther islands (Text- fig. 1C), rare limestones (low in the formation) are abundantly fossiliferous. On Truro Island, the Disappointment Bay Forma- tion consists mostly of light-colored, massive, vuggy, microcrystalline dolostone with subordinate laminated dolostone. It is about 200 m thick (Kerr, 1974). On the northeastern tip near the base of the formation, small reef knolls occur. Kerr (1974) and Thorsteinsson (1986) do not indicate this occurrence on their maps. Stromatoporoid specimens were collected from these reef knolls of dark gray-brown, bituminous, fossilif- erous packstone. The small knolls are lithologically similar to coeval larger knolls in the Disappointment Bay Formation on Lowther Island (Thorsteinsson, 1980; Prosh, 1989). UNNAMED FORMATION An unnamed unit consisting of limestone and minor dolostone and shale conformably overlies the Disap- pointment Bay Formation on eastern Bathurst, Corn- wallis, and intervening small islands (map unit D-1 of Thorsteinsson, 1986). On Bathurst Island it incorpo- rates most or all of what Kerr (1974) erroneously re- ferred to as the Blue Fiord Formation. Kerr’s Bathurst Island “‘Eids Formation’’, a distal equivalent of his “Blue Fiord Formation’’, probably also belongs to the unnamed formation (Thorsteinsson, pers. comm., 1992). The unnamed formation spans the Emsian—Ei- felian boundary and is 20-100 m thick (Thorsteinsson, 1986) (Text-fig. 2). Stromatoporoids used in this study were collected from the lower 100 m of the formation at the north- easternmost end of Bathurst Island and at Dyke Ack- land Bay on the southern coast (Text-fig. 1C, locs. 35, 36). On the western coast of Truro Island (Text-fig. 1C, loc. 34) 4-6 m of the unnamed formation contain a coral-stromatoporoid biostrome locally up to 6 m thick. Stromatoporoids from this biostrome are in- cluded in this study. CONODONT BIOSTRATIGRAPHY In this study we have been able to relate the strati- graphic ranges of stromatoporoids directly to an es- tablished conodont zonation, in other words to the standard Emsian zonal scale (Text-fig. 2). This is in great measure due to the excellent work of Uyeno (1990) who has documented the conodont zonation of the Devonian of southern Ellesmere Island. Many of the stromatoporoids used in this study come from local- ities identical or closely comparable to those of Uyeno and Klapper (1980) and Uyeno (1990). In the following paragraphs, the biostratigraphic framework is outlined and the stratigraphic intervals bearing stromatopo- roids are placed in the standard conodont zonation. DEHISCENS AND GRONBERGI ZONES These zones comprise the lower Emsian. In a mea- sured section in the type area of the Blue Fiord For- mation, Uyeno and Klapper (1980) and Uyeno (1990) have recognized the dehiscens Zone in the lower 267 m of the lower member. The gronbergi Zone is rec- ognized by the first appearance of Polygnathus aff. P. perbonus as Polygnathus gronbergi itself does not oc- cur. In this section the gronbergi Zone is recognized in the 267 to 393 m interval of the lower member. Be- cause P. gronbergi is absent and the gronbergi Zone here spans a relatively small stratigraphic interval, we commonly combine the dehiscens and gronbergi zones in dating. Consequently, stromatoporoids occurring exclusively from the lower 250 m or so of the formation of the type area Blue Fiord are assigned to the dehiscens Zone. Stromatoporoids occurring through the lower member up to about 400 m are assigned to a combined dehiscens/gronbergi Zone. In the Vendom Fiord area, conodont zones in the lower member of the Blue Fiord Formation cannot be as precisely placed as in the type area (Uyeno, 1990). Conodonts and macrofossils associated with the de- hiscens Zone occur low in the formation. The dehiscens and gronbergi zones probably occur in the lower two thirds of the lower member here: P. inversus first ap- pears high in the lower member. Stromatoporoids from low in the lower member at Vendom Fiord are assigned to the dehiscens Zone; those from low to medial parts of the member to the combined dehiscens/gronbergi Zone. 10 BULLETIN 349 In the S6r Fiord area, Uyeno and Klapper (1980) have identified P. dehiscens from the uppermost beds of the Eids Formation. The full extent of its occurrence in this formation is not known, but presumably the base of the Emsian is near the top of the formation. Stromatoporoids from the highest beds of the Eids Formation are assigned to the dehiscens Zone; those 50 or more meters below the top of the Eids are pos- sibily uppermost Pragian. INVERSUS ZONE This zone is widely and readily recognized in arctic Devonian strata. In the Blue Fiord type area, the in- versus Zone spans the interval from 393 to 1104 m, the upper half of the lower member and much of the upper member (Uyeno, 1990). At Vendom Fiord the inversus Zone ranges from the upper part of the lower member through much of the upper member of the Blue Fiord Formation. In both the type and Vendom Fiord areas, in the upper member of the formation, stromatoporoids are relatively rare and are assigned to a combined /nversus/serotinus Zone. On southernmost Ellesmere Island, the dolomitic facies of the Blue Fiord Formation ranges in age from the inversus to serotinus zones (Smith and Stearn, 1987b). Stromatoporoids from this dolomitic facies from Muskox Fiord and Goose Fiord areas, are all from low in the formation and assignable to the in- versus Zone. Although the lower Disappointment Bay Formation is firmly dated as inversus Zone, the upper part is dol- omitic and evaporitic and unfossiliferous. Stratigraph- ic relations suggest that the formation spans the full serotinus Zone as well. Stromatoporoids from the lower Disappointment Bay Formation at Truro and Lowther islands occur within the inversus Zone (Thorsteinsson, 1980). SEROTINUS ZONE In a section 2.5 km east of the type section of the Blue Fiord Formation the serotinus Zone is identified in the interval of the upper member from 1104 m to the top of the formation at about 1260 m (Uyeno, 1990). At Vendom Fiord the zone is recognized in the uppermost part of the Blue Fiord upper member. Al- though P. serotinus itself ranges up into the overlying Bird Fiord Formation, the overall faunal and strati- graphic context suggests that the zone ends at the top of the Blue Fiord Formation in the type area (Uyeno, 1990). UNDIFFERENTIATED PATULUS ZONE The Emsian-Eifelian boundary is placed at the boundary between the patu/us and partitus zones (Zie- gler and Klapper, 1985). Because in the arctic islands the nominal conodonts of neither of these zones has been recognized, this interval must be dated by other fossil occurrences and by stratigraphic context. For dating stromatoporoid occurrences, we treat this in- terval as the undifferentiated patulus Zone (i.e., com- bined patulus and partitus zones). Two formations that contain stromatoporoids span this interval: 1) the low- er Bird Fiord Formation of Ellesmere Island, and 2) the lower unnamed formation of Truro and eastern Bathurst Islands. 1) Uyeno (1990) placed the Lower—Middle Devo- nian boundary at or near the base of the Bird Fiord Formation at its type section. Although diagnostic con- odonts are absent, brachiopods and corals from higher in the formation suggest Eifelian and Dalejan (late Em- sian) ages (Uyeno, 1990). Goodbody (1989) considerd the basal Bird Fiord to be included in the patulus Zone. On this basis we date the stromatoporoids that have been collected from the lower Bird Fiord Formation on Ellesmere Island as coming from the undifferen- tiated patulus Zone. 2) Similar uncertainty in dating applies to the un- named formation of Truro and Bathurst islands. Kerr (1974) considered the lower unnamed formation (Blue Fiord of Kerr) as Eifelian and possibly latest Emsian in age, largely on the basis of its trilobite fauna. A sample of the unnamed formation analyzed for con- odonts by T. T. Uyeno yielded no specimens (Uyeno, pers. comm. 1993; GSC internal report 02-TTU-93). The age of the unit underlying the unnamed for- mation is important in estimating the age of the for- mation. In the area of Cornwallis, Truro and Lowther islands, the Disappointment Bay Formation is dated as inversus Zone (Thorsteinsson, 1980) on the basis of diagnostic conodonts recovered from rare limestones low in the formation. The upper Disappointment Bay Formation is assumed to span most, or all, of the ser- otinus Zone and the transition to limestones of the unnamed formation is assumed to begin at about the patulus Zone. This conclusion is based on correlation of the transition from Blue Fiord to Bird Fiord for- mations on Ellesmere Island with that between the Disappointment Bay and unamed formation in the Cornwallis Island area suggested by Thorsteinsson (1986). Stromatoporoids collected from the unnamed for- mation come from the base at Truro Island and from the lower 100 m of the formation on eastern Bathurst Island. In both areas they are probably of latest Emsian age (patulus Zone). Due to the uncertain dating of this interval, however, they are assigned to the undiffer- entiated patulus Zone. The stromatoporoid fauna offers some clue as to the DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN sal age of the lower unnamed formation (Text-fig. 3). Some faunal turnover is apparent between the the Blue Fiord (dehiscens to serotinus zones) and the unnamed for- mation (undifferentiated patu/us Zone) collections, but a significant number of species range through both as- semblages. This suggests that no hiatus separates the Blue Fiord and younger assemblages. STROMATOPOROID BIOSTRATIGRAPHY AND PALEOGEOGRA PHY In this study stromatoporoid ranges have been pre- cisely dated, allowing meaningful comparisons of the arctic Emsian fauna to coeval faunas world-wide and the assessment of the biostratigraphic usefulness of stromatoporoids (Text-fig. 3). Of the 25 taxa described in this study, 13 have been recorded from other places and supply information on the distribution of stro- matoporoid faunas in Emsian time. These regions are, in decreasing order of similarity and importance: 1) north-central United States and southwestern Ontario, 2) Russian Asia, 3) southeastern Australia, and 4) Chi- na. When localities sharing species with the Arctic Em- sian fauna are plotted on a reconstruction of the con- tinental configurations of Early Devonian time, such as that of Scotese (Stock, 1990), they are distributed throughout the tropical world of that time. On a broad scale the Emsian stromatoporoid fauna appears to have been a cosmopolitan one and stromatoporoids must have propagated along the tropics with little impedi- ment. SOUTHWESTERN ONTARIO AND NORTH-CENTRAL UNITED STATES Four species known only from this mid-continent region, Stromatoporella perannulata Galloway and St. Jean, Stictostroma gorriense Stearn (=mamilliferum Galloway and St. Jean), Habrostroma proxilaminatum (Fagerstrom), and Parallelopora campbelli Galloway and St. Jean, have been identified in the arctic Emsian fauna. In addition the arctic Trupetostroma sp. and Pseudoactinodictyon conglutinatum n. sp. are closely comparable to species from southwestern Ontario (Fa- gerstrom, 1982). This sharing of species has led Prosh and Stearn (1993) to conclude that the Detroit River Group of southern Ontario is entirely of Emsian age. The reasoning that led to the reinterpretation of the correlation of the Detroit River Group is presented elsewhere (Prosh and Stearn, 1993). The identity of species indicates a dispersal of stromatoporoids along an open seaway connection from the Arctic to the mid- continent during serotinus Zone time and perhaps as early as during inversus Zone time. That the isolation of the Eastern Americas Realm of Oliver (1976b) based on the distribution of rugose corals (Oliver, 1976a; Oliver and Pedder, 1989) and on stromatoporoids (Stock, 1990) was not as absolute as proposed, has already been suggested by Stearn (1983) and is fully supported by this study. The migration route of stro- matoporoids across the present site of Hudson Bay may have been closed to rugose corals by ecological barriers. Evidence is accumulating that environments favorable to stromatoporoids and tabulate corals may have been different from those that favored rugose corals (Mallamo et a/., 1993). In any case, the paleo- geographic reconstructions of Oliver (1976b), Oliver and Pedder (1989), and Witzke (1990) need to be mod- ified to show an open seaway connection between the Arctic Islands and southwestern Ontario. NORTHERN ASIA Plectostroma salairicum (Yavorsky) is known in the Arctic from the unnamed formation (Bathurst Island) and from the Kuznetsk Basin of central Russia (Ya- vorsky, 1930). The age of both these occurrences is virtually identical, at or near the Emsian-Eifelian boundary. Aculatostroma cf. A. kaljanum (Bogoyav- lenskaya) from the lower Emsian part of the Blue Fiord Formation is known (as Coenellostroma kaljanum Bo- goyavlenskaya) from the eastern slope of the northern Urals and from lower Emsian strata (Bogoyavlenskaya, 1977; Khodalevich et al., 1982). Gerronostroma cf. G. immemoratum Bogoyavlenskaya, described by Stearn (1983) from the lower Blue Fiord, also was originally described from this fauna. Atelodictyon cf. A. solidum Khromych (Blue Fiord Formation, inversus Zone) was previously recorded (A. cylindricum solidum Khro- mych) from probable mid-to-late Emsian rocks in northeastern Siberia (Khromych, 1971, 1976). Two other arctic species are also recorded from Russia, but appear to be longer ranging. Syringostromella zintch- enkovi Khalfina occurs in the upper Lochkovian of the Salair, southcentral Russia (Khalfina, 1961) and Sa- lairella prima Khromych from probable Pragian rocks in Severo-Vostok, eastern Siberia (Khromych, 1971, 1976). Both of these species also occur in Australia (see below). AUSTRALIA AND CHINA Affinities with the Early Devonian faunas of Victoria (Webby et al., 1993) are indicated by the cosmopolitan species Syringostromella zintchenkovi Khalfina, Stro- matopora polaris Stearn, Atopostroma distans (Ripper) and Salairella prima Khromych. The arctic Emsian fauna shares 7 genera in common with the 11 taxa described by Webby and Zhen (1993) from the Jesse Limestone of New South Wales. At the specific level Atopostroma distans and Salairella prima occur in both faunas. BULLETIN 349 yjaqduvs v40doja]|vi0d wnjounuppixo1d DUWOISOAQDH supisip vuosjsodoly Duildd DjjJa11Dj0$ MOYUIYIIUIZ DIJIWOLISOSULLAS xajdus saplowosjsojdajH moyluuadnsy “yf “JD DAOdOIDUWOAJSALIY nyosdny “§ ‘9 v«OdOJDWUWO.LIS luosuay DAOdOJDWOLIS suupjod vlodojowo.s ‘ds pwo.sjsojadn] DIDXAA _DUOI1OIOLYIDID asuajnaDUNU {DUOLISOIDNG aSUalldO8 DUOAISOJING pivjnuupsad vjJasodowwUo.slsy ‘ds (uodio1poisiyos wnyoulnjsuod UuodJIIpOUuLjovOpNasd unjoo.fud DUOLISO]AISOUP wnpyos “py ‘jo uodjIpojaly ‘ds DWOAJSOIP1A ad syDUOLJUaIdas DUOLISOUOLII) ISUALIUISA]]A UOAIIIPOLYIVID wunuvijvy ‘vy “Jo DUOAISOJOINIy WNI1AIDIDS DUOAISOJIA] y ‘ds nwousouyopy costatus partitus serotinus inversus gronbergi dehiscens NVITH41a Text-figure 3.—Stratigraphic ranges of Lower and lower Middle Devonian stromatoporoids. DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN 13 The species Glyptostromoides simplex (Yang and Dong) is common to the Emsian of the south China continental plate and the arctic Emsian. DISCUSSION This synthesis demonstrates that the stromatopo- roids have more biostratigraphic value than has been conventionally attributed to them. A prerequisite for the confident use of these fossils in correlation is that dating of occurrences be precise as in this study of the Emsian of the Arctic. Such dating has generally been lacking in classical studies of stromatoporoid system- atics in part because rigorous, internationally accepted standards of dating postdate many of these studies. Stromatoporoids have been conventionally regarded as poor candidates for correlation in the belief that the species are too long ranging and too provincial. Con- servative taxonomic philosophies, species defined without clear appraisal of range of variation within skeletons or between specimens, and oversplitting of taxa have made recognition of species across national boundaries difficult. The recognition of the world-wide distribution and narrow stratigraphic range of some species in this study demonstrates that the biostrati- graphic and paleogeographic value of this group is po- tentially great. Some genera in which taxonomic prob- lems at the species level persist, such as Stromatopora and Clathrocoilona, may be poor candidates for cor- relative purposes, but other genera, such as Stictostro- ma and Stromatoporella, where species are better de- fined, have great biostratigraphic potential. The chronologic development of stromatoporoids in Early Devonian time has recently been reviewed by Webby et al. (1993). The diversity and wide distri- bution of the Emsian world fauna shows that the rapid diversification of stromatoporoids to form the better- known reef complexes of Middle and Late Devonian time was well underway in Early Devonian time. SYSTEMATIC PALEONTOLOGY INTRODUCTION Stromatoporoids are an extinct class of sponges al- lied to the extant coralline sponges (Stearn, 1972, 1975a). Little can be gleaned from the distant stro- matoporoid-sponge relationship, however, to assist in setting limits to extinct stromatoporoid species. Most of the classical systematic studies of stromatoporoids (pre- 1960s) employed a species concept that by current standards would be considered narrow. Sample suites were often limited in size and geographic scope, and as a result new species were plentiful. Many of these have since been combined in synonymy. In more re- cent years, larger samplings have been collected, and more attention has been paid to morphometric analysis (e.g., Fagerstrom, 1982), and a much broader concept of the stromatoporoid species has ensued. The species concept we apply here is a relatively broad one (Stearn, 1989a). Many stromatoporoid species demonstrate signifi- cant structural or morphometric variability. In many species a large proportion of the range of variability may be expressed within a single skeleton. In general, a grouping of specimens may be confidently considered a unique species when the range of variability (however broad) is continuously expressed across the full col- lection, with no major gaps or discontinuities. An ob- vious precondition for recognizing the range of vari- ability is a relatively large number of specimens. A good indication of the broad species concept as applied herein is shown by a comparison of total species di- versity with generic diversity. The Arctic Emsian stro- matoporoid fauna comprises 25 species in 22 genera; only two genera are represented by more than a single species. A consequence of a broad species concept is that, in our opinion, the notion of subspecies is generally in- applicable to stromatoporoids. Because variability within a species is already great, rarely (if ever) will a given population consistently demonstrate character- istics deserving subspecies rank. Species synonymies listed are meant to be all-inclu- sive, listing all species considered identical to the spe- cies being described. Those species described as confere (cf.) to an earlier description have the compared ref- erences listed in the synonymy (following cf). Confere (cf.) is the only nomenclatorial qualifier employed here. It is used for described species that closely resemble those described elsewhere. Reservation may be due to minor morphologic differences, too small a sampling to assure that the full range of variability is present, or inadequacies in the original description. Expanded study of such species may ultimately demonstrate that they are the named species (delete cf.) or, much less likely, that they are separate but closely related species. Species-level taxa are distinguished by letters (e.g., Actinostroma sp. A) when we judge that a distinctive morphology is exhibited that is likely to result ina new species being described when more and better speci- mens have been studied. If the material is sufficient for a generic identification only, the generic name is modified only by sp. (7rupetostroma sp. = a species of Trupetostroma). In the course of this study, approximately 800 thin- sections were examined. The preservation of identified specimens is graded according to the scale: exception- ally well preserved; well preserved; moderately well preserved; mediocre; poor. These categories are ap- proximate and subjective, but in general imply the 14 BULLETIN 349 following. Exceptionally well preserved specimens pre- serve all macrostructure and especially microstructure in very fine detail, uniformly throughout the specimen; specimens of this quality are exceedingly rare. Well preserved specimens show little or no diagenetic al- teration; macrostructural details are fully preserved, and original microstructures are preserved over most of the specimen. Moderately well preserved specimens show some diagenetic alteration; macrostructure is largely unaffected, but microstructural detail may be obscured, although it is generally preserved at least locally. Most identified specimens are either well or moderately well preserved. Mediocre preservation ap- plies to specimens in which macrostructural details are obscured, at least partly, and no original microstruc- tural detail remains; specimens so preserved remain identifiable on macrostructural grounds only. Poorly preserved specimens preserve no microstructural de- tail, and macrostructures are largely obscured. In gen- eral, poorly preserved specimens cannot be confidently assigned (to species) in isolation, but can be identified in the context of the full collection studied. The value of classifying the preservation of speci- mens (in combination with the number of specimens identified) is that it allows the reader to gauge inde- pendently the confidence of the species identifications/ descriptions. This is particularly true for newly de- scribed species. Morphological measurements provided are in met- ric units, commonly centimetres (cm), millimetres (mm), or micrometres (um). Most measurements are derived from thin-section examination. Most fre- quently cited morphological parameters are laminar and pillar spacing, and laminar and pillar thickness. Laminar and pillar spacing are conventionally ex- pressed as number of laminae/pillars occurring per 2 mm distance, commonly cited as an average of n mea- surements with a minimum and maximum range of values per specimen or species. Morphological terminology follows the established literature on stromatoporoid systematics. Definitions of recently introduced terms may be found in such papers as Stearn, (1989b, 1991, 1993) and Stock (1989). Introductory glossaries appear in older papers such as Galloway and St. Jean (1957). In this report, we deviate from the normal terminology only for the following morphological feature. Where astrorhizae in tangential section are without walls and defined only by areas devoid of structural elements, the term ‘canal’ or “‘tube”’ is inapproporiate; we use the term “‘astrorhizal path” or “path”. Type specimens designated in this report are housed in the Type Collection at the Geological Survey of Canada, Ottawa, Ontario, and are identified with a six- digit number with the prefix GSC (e.g., GSC 108863). The locations from which these specimens were col- lected are listed in Appendix 2. The precise location of collections is recorded by latitude and longitude in Appendices | and 2 because very few geographic names are available in the High Arctic. Appendix 3 is a catalog of the other specimens identified in this study with their collection localities referenced to Appendix | and Text-figure 1. These specimens are in the general col- lections of the Geological Survey in Ottawa marked with a prefix number 110, 111, 120, or 129 followed by a hyphen and a second number (e.g., 1 10-286). The few types referred to by the prefix ROM are from the collection of the Royal Ontario Museum, Toronto, On- tario, Canada. SYSTEMATICS Class STROMATOPOROIDEA Nicholson and Murie, 1878 Order ACTINOSTROMATIDA Bogoyavlenskaya, 1969 Family ACTINOSTROMATIDAE Nicholson, 1886 Genus ACTINOSTROMA Nicholson, 1886 Type species. — Actinostroma clathratum Nicholson, 1886. Actinostroma sp. A Plate 1, figures 1-3 Description. —Skeleton large, hemispherical; surface bearing low mamelons closely and regularly spaced; no astrorhizae visible on surface. Vertical section: Laminae thin, flat or very gently undulate, consistently parallel, commonly passing lat- erally into a series of dots; thickness 0.02-0.04 mm, where poorly preserved may thicken to 0.06—0.08 mm; spaced 7 to 10 per 2 mm, average 8.3 (n=30). Lati- lamination absent, although successive spacing phases (vertical gradations of distantly to closely spaced lam- inae) 0.4-0.5 mm thick generally present. Pillars reg- ularly spaced, 9 to 10 per 2 mm, average 8.9 (n=30); thickness variable, 0.04—0.08 mm, average 0.06 (n=30); apparent vertical length limited, commonly span | to 5 laminae; maximum observed length 3 mm, long pil- lars generally slightly bent, rarely straight. Astrorhizae uncommon, inconspicuous, defined by zones of gentle laminar doming, interlaminar dilation, and upward- divergent pillars; apparent vertical canal width 0.3-0.5 mm. Dissepiments scattered. Skeletal microstructure compact. Tangential section: In interlaminar areas, pillars form isolated dots, 0.04-0.06 mm diameter, a few joined by or bearing partial colliculi; towards and into laminar DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN 1S bands, pillars colliculate, forming polygonal network; colliculi 0.01—0.02 mm thick. Preservation of colliculi variable, poorly or unpreserved in much of specimen. Dissepiments log, arcuate lines joining several pillars. Astrorhizae small, ill-defined, indicated by vague paths of absent skeletal elements at and near mamelon sum- mits; lateral path width approximately 0.2 mm. Material. —Large fragment of a single specimen ca. 40 cm basal diameter by 20 cm high. Hypotype GSC 108852. Well preserved. Discussion. —This specimen probably represents a new species of Actinostroma, but, despite locally ex- cellent preservation, one specimen is insufficient ma- terial to establish the species. Since Fligel’s (1959) monographic treatment of the genus Actinostroma, many species have been added, still others removed to Plectostroma and Densastroma. Nonetheless, the basic species groupings recognized by Fliigel (1959) remain valid. Of the three main Devo- nian Actinostroma species-groups outlined by Fluigel (A. clathratum, A. hebbornense, and A. stellatum spe- cies-groups), this Arctic species shows closest affinity to species of the A. hebbornense group: thin laminae and pillars, both spaced about 5 per mm. Species from all three of these Devonian groups are most plentiful in the Givetian and Frasnian, but one Eifelian species, A. perspicuum Poéta, 1894, shows interesting parallels to Actinostroma sp. A. Actinostroma perspicuum has similar thin laminae and thin, relatively short pillars, but it is markedly cystose and has commonly conver- gent laminae. Although the Bohemian 4. perspicuum (Chote¢é Limestone) and the Arctic specimen do not therefore appear to be closely related, both are char- acterized by very thin structural elements, primitive representatives of a general trend towards elemental thickening exhibited by later Givetian and Frasnian species (Fliigel, 1959). Occurrence. —Truro Island, unnamed limestone for- mation; highest Emsian/basal Eifelian (undifferentiat- ed patulus Zone). Genus PLECTOSTROMA Nestor, 1964 PLECTOSTROMA SALAIRICUM (Yavorsky, 1930) Type species.—Actinostroma intertextum Nichol- son, 1886. Plate 1, figures 4,5 Actinostroma salairicum Yavorsky, 1930, p. 489-490, pl. II, figs. 1-3. Plectostroma salairicum (Yavorsky, 1930). Fliigel and Fligel-Kahler, 1968, p. 376. ? Actinostroma salairicum Yavorsky. Khromych, 1984, p. 113-114, pl. VI, fig. 1. Description. —Skeleton laminar to weakly domed, up to 10 cm diameter. Surface smooth; astrorhizae inconspicuous in hand-specimen. Vertical section: Dense network of pillars and sub- ordinate colliculate laminae. Pillars 0.03-0.05 mm thick; spaced 6 to 8 per mm, average 7.0 per mm (n=20, combined specimens); vertical extent variable 0.3-1.5 mm, commonly 0.5 mm; commonly thicker/ more opaque than colliculi; irregular thin phases of very dark pillars grossly resemble latilaminae, but true latilaminae absent. Colliculi thin 0.02—0.03 mm; com- monly arched (between neighbouring pillars), fewer straight/horizontal; dominantly arise at uniform levels to impart horizontal fabric to skeleton, locally network irregular; where colliculate laminae occur, spacing 7 to 9 per mm, commonly 7 to 8 per mm, specimen GSC 108853 average 7.8 range 7 to 9, GSC 108854 average 7.7 range 7 to 9 (each n=10). Skeletal microstructure compact. Astrorhizae prominent, vertically persistent; axial canal 0.20-0.30 mm diameter, canal walls 0.04— 0.05 mm thick; lateral canals branching downward from axial canal; astrorhizal tabulae (resembling enlarged colliculi) abundant, one for every three to five colli- culate laminae. Dissepiments absent. Tangential section: Pillars dark, solid dots 0.02-0.04 mm diameter; either isolated, or tightly linked by col- liculi into network; four, less commonly five, colliculi arise from each pillar. Astrorhizae simple, single axial canal surrounded by a few simple lateral canals, 0.12- 0.20 mm wide average 0.15 mm; center-to-center spac- ing 5 to 7 mm. Material.—Two specimens. Hypotypes GSC 108853, 108854. Well preserved. Discussion. — Yavorsky’s (1930) original description and illustrations of Plectostroma salairicum closely match the Arctic specimens, and only a minor differ- ence in pillar spacing distinguishes the two (5 to 6 per mm for Yavorsky’s specimens, 6 to 8 per mm for those herein). The astrorhizal systems of the Arctic and Ya- vorsky’s specimens, however, are identical. Yavorsky (1930, p. 489) noted the locality of P. sa- lairicum as “‘“Kuznetsk Basin, Kara-Chumysh River, in beds with Pentamerus pseudobaschkiricus Tschern.” (now referred to Zdimir pseudobaschkiricus). The Zdi- mir pseudobaschkiricus—Megastrophia uralensis Zone includes mixed elements of both the patulus and par- titus Zones (conodonts), and is therefore uppermost Emsian and/or lowest Eifelian (Rzhonsnitskaya, 1988). This matches the age of the Bathurst Island unnamed formation, as currently understood (undifferentiated patulus Zone). Differences of opinion persist as to the assignment of species such as P. salairicum to the genera Plecto- stroma or Actinostroma. As noted by Nestor (1964, 16 BULLETIN 349 p.109), in the generic definition of Plectostroma, “the difference consists (sic) in the connective processes, which in Plectostroma are distributed irregularly, but in Actinostroma they occur on definite levels and form regular, concentric laminae.” Various species, how- ever, demonstrate differing degrees of collicular irreg- ularity versus alignment. At one extreme, the type spe- cies of Plectostroma, P. intertextum (Nicholson, 1886), shows random distribution of colliculi. Other species, such as P. necopinatum Nestor, 1964, show rare col- licular alignment. Near the opposite extreme, species such as P. salairicum have many more colliculi in alignment than are not, a fact that has prompted Khro- mych (1984) to retain P. salairicum in the genus Ac- tinostroma (but see below). Still, a strictly statistical distinction between Plectostroma and Actinostroma (on the basis of proportions of aligned versus unaligned colliculi) would obscure important relationships be- tween species that are clearly related and intergrada- tional in nature. As Stock (1979) has noted, Plecto- stroma represents a useful grouping of species inter- mediate in skeletal element size and spacing between Actinostroma and Densastroma (this latter with a very fine skeletal network). This broader approach follows that of Fligel and Fliigel-Kahler (1968) and Flugel (1974), who initially reassigned Actinostroma salairi- cum Yavorsky to Plectostroma. The assignment by Khromych (1984) of specimens to Actinostroma salairicum Yavorsky is questionable. Khromych’s Siberian specimens have more distantly spaced and thicker structural elements than either Ya- vorsky’s (1930) or those herein (3 to 4 pillars per mm; 5 “laminae” per mm; pillars 0.12—0.15 mm thick; “laminae” 0.08—0.10 mm thick; Khromych, 1984). Fliigel (1974, p. 178) tabulated the major morpho- logic features of six Devonian species of Plectostroma, including P. salairicum. An additional five Devonian species from the former Soviet Union are listed by Bogoyavlenskaya and Khromych (1985). Occurrence. — Bathurst Island, Dyke Ackland Bay; unnamed limestone, lower 100 m; uppermost Emsian/ basal Eifelian (undifferentiated patu/us Zone). Genus ACULATOSTROMA Khalfina, 1968 Type species. —Syringostroma verrucosum Khalfina, 1961. Aculatostroma cf. A. kaljanum (Bogoyavlenskaya, 1977) Plate 2, figures 1-5 cf. Coenellostroma kalianum Bogoyavlenskaya, 1977, p. 15, Pl. 4, figs. la, 1b. Description. —Skeleton laminar to gently wavy, up to 10 cm. Vertical section: Laminae colliculate, mostly contin- uous, very gently undulate; on a fine scale, ragged not smooth; locally inflected into shallow impersistent ma- melons; thin, 0.02-0.04 mm, commonly diagenetically thickened to 0.05-—0.06 mm; spaced regularly, 8 to 11 per 2 mm, average 9.7 (n=10). Pillars short, confined to interlaminar interval, generally offset between suc- cessive laminae, rarely superposed; 0.04-0.06 mm thick, locally thickened to 0.08 mm; spaced regularly, 8 to 11 per 2 mm, average 9.4 (n=10). Colliculi arise sharply off pillars, forming vaulted cell-shaped galler- ies. Skeletal microstructure compact. Astrorhizae abundant, poorly formed; axial canals vertically im- persistent, roughly 0.6-0.8 mm diameter, many in- clined, may or may not be accompanied by impersis- tent mamelons; astrorhizal tabulae abundant, crowd- ed, thin 0.01-0.02 mm (but may be greatly thickened by diagenesis), dominantly sub-horizontal, flat or broadly convex, locally concave; lateral branches and tributaries indicated by lenticular or irregular zones of tabulae. Dissepiments (smaller than tabulae) in skeletal galleries, common not abundant. Latilaminae 3-4 mm thick, may be floored by thin band of sediment and thick (1-1.5 mm) basal layer of disordered skeletal material; thick root-like basal layer forms floor of spec- imen GSC 108855. Tangential section: Laminae diffuse meandering bands. Pillars vermiform or cateniform, locally linked into network; 0.04—0.06 mm thick; about one-quarter of pillars dot-like, 0.04—0.06 mm diameter; commonly linked by finer elements, either partial colliculi or dis- sepiments, 0.01—0.02 mm thick. Astrorhizae scattered, discontinuous, irregularly branching segments, ca. 0.6 mm diameter; tabulate, or locally empty; generally, not exclusively, at mamelon summits. Material.—Two fragmentary specimens, one well preserved, one poorly preserved. No growth surfaces preserved. Hypotype GSC 108855. Second specimen 110-132. Discussion. —This species demonstrates similarities to Aculatostroma kaljanum (Bogoyavlenskaya) from the karpinskii horizon (Emsian, gronbergi—inversus Zones; Khodalevich ef a/l., 1982), eastern slope of the northern Urals. Bogoyavlenskaya’s (1977) description is sketchy, and precludes thorough comparison. Lam- inar spacing of 4. kaljanum is noted as 4 per mm, laminar width 0.07—0.1 mm, and pillar thickness “‘does not exceed 0.1 mm” (Bogoyavlenskaya, 1977, p.15). The cited thicknesses exceed those of the Ellesmere specimens, but Bogoyavlenskaya’s illustration (1977; Plate 4, fig. 1) suggests laminae and pillars approxi- mately 0.05 mm thick. Significantly, Bogoyavlenskaya (1977, p.15) describes the astrorhizae as ‘““numerous and simple”, and “‘astrorhizal tabulae numerous, ar- DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN 17 ranged parallel to laminae’, the same condition as in the Ellesmere specimens. Additionally, Bogoyavlen- skaya noted the occurrence of an “epitheca”’ (0.5 mm thick) on the undersurface of some specimens; a po- tentially similar structure, a digitate, root-like basal phase of disordered skeletal material, is present in one of the Ellesmere specimens (GSC 108855). This last feature, while interesting, is of negligible taxonomic value because it is an abnormal growth phenomenon. Considerable uncertainty has surrounded the generic assignment of species to either of Aculatostroma or Atelodictyon, and whether Aculatostroma itself is an actinostromatid (colliculate laminae) or a clathrodic- tyid (continuous laminae) (see Stearn, 1991). For the most part the fine structure of Ellesmere 4culatostroma cf. A. kaljanum is diagenetically obscured, but a few thin zones of one or two laminae (occurring beneath sediment interlayers) preserve skeletal elements in ex- treme detail. Plate 2, figures 4 and 5 depict the colli- culate pillars found in such a zone; note how the col- liculi arise sharply, parasol-like, off the short pillars. The astrorhizae of Aculatostroma cf. A. kaljanum are unusual in their disordered arrangement, abun- dance of near-horizontal tabulae or cysts, and apparent facultative association with mamelons. It is possible that they instead represent intergrowths of commensal or parasitic organisms. Plate 2, figure 3 presents sup- plementary evidence to suggest that the tubes are in- deed astrorhizal canals, albeit aberrant ones; on this slabbed, tangential surface, the tubes can be seen to radiate from a central area, branching dichotomously and slightly thinning outward. Such a horizontal pat- tern is inconsistent with the commensal habit of a foreign organism (such as Syringopora), and the abun- dant horizontal tabulae mitigate the possibility of an invading borer. The common occurrence of these tubes in the arctic specimens and those from the Urals [A. kaljanum (Bogoyavlenskaya)] implies that the struc- tures are intrinsic to the stromatoporoid, rather than a the product of a chance guest or invading organism. The preservation of the Ellesmere specimens de- serves some additional mention. As noted in the de- scription, skeletal elements (laminae, pillars, dissepi- ments, tabulae) are commonly thickened, in some specimens by as much as 10 times the original thick- ness. Periodic, thick (0.5—1.0 mm), dark bands parallel the laminae in specimen GSC 108855, and they are confluent with, and appear to be composed of, the same material as the skeletal elements. The dark bands, of diagenetic origin, occur at the same periodicity as la- tilaminar boundaries (elsewhere indicated by thin sed- iment interlayers). In thin section, ghosts of skeletal elements are discernable within the thick bands, i.e., the bands are not part of the original skeletal archi- tecture. Rather, they appear to be preferentially nucle- ating at latilaminar bases. Where the bands are thickest (especially within the basal layer), their crystalline hab- it is bundled, and their optical characteristics suggest fascicular-optic calcite (sensu Kendall, 1977). This lat- ter is generally considered strictly a void-filling fabric, but in this instance it appears to be displacive (replace- ment). A second specimen, not as well preserved as the one described and illustrated is also assigned to this species. In the second specimen, laminar spacing is slightly closer than in GSC 108855, 7 to 9 per 2 mm, and it displays slightly fewer astrorhizal canals, although equally poorly formed. Occurrence. —Blue Fiord Formation, lower 100 m; Vendom Fiord (GSC 108855), Eids Fiord (one speci- men); lower Emsian (dehiscens Zone). Order CLATHRODICTYIDA Bogoyavlenskaya, 1969 Family CLATHRODICTYIDAE Kihn, 1927 Genus CLATHRODICTYON Nicholson and Murie, 1878 Type species. —Clathrodictyon vesiculosum Nichol- son and Murie, 1878. Clathrodictyon ellesmerense Stearn, 1983 Plate 3, figures 1-3 Clathrodictyon ellesmerense Stearn, 1983, p. 545, 547, fig. 3A—3E; 1989a, fig. 1A. Material.—Twenty-one specimens; poorly to mod- erately well preserved. Hypotypes GSC 108856 to 108858. Other specimens at Geological Survey listed in Appendix 3. Discussion. — This species was established by Stearn (1983) for specimens collected from the lower Blue Fiord Formation in the vicinity of the type section. The majority of specimens of Clathrodictyon elles- merense in this study come from equivalent localities on Ellesmere Island, ranging from dehiscens to gron- bergi Zones (lower Emsian). Additional specimens of C. ellesmerense from the Bird Fiord Formation of Ellesmere Island and from Bathurst Island extend the stratigraphic range of this species to lowest Eifelian. The additional specimens of this study expand the morphological parameters of Clathrodictyon ellesmer- ense from the original description of Stearn (1983). The new specimens demonstrate a greater range of laminar spacing than do those in the original collection (about 11.5 per 2 mm; Stearn, 1983); pillar spacing and the thickness of the skeletal elements are within 18 BULLETIN 349 the originally cited ranges. In the additional specimens, laminar spacing ranges from about 10 to 15 per 2 mm, with the majority of specimens measuring 10 to 12 laminae per 2 mm. Specimens with especially closely spaced laminae may demonstrate these distinctive features: 1) repeated variations in laminar spacing (=successive phases); and 2) local development of vertically impersistent papil- lae. Of the 13 specimens of Clathrodictyon ellesmer- ense from the lower Blue Fiord Formation, two display successive phases of growth in which laminar spacing changes from a minimum of 8 per 2 mm progressively up to 16 per 2 mm, over vertical distances of 3 to 5 mm (PI. 3, fig. 1). Such rhythmic changes may indicate seasonal variation in growth rate (Stearn, 1989a). An- other two of the Blue Fiord specimens of C. ellesmer- ense display discrete protuberances measuring 1-2 mm wide by 2-3 mm high (PI. 3, fig. 3). They are formed as small domal inflections of the laminae and are ver- tically limited and not associated with astrorhizal ca- nals. In thin section, no distributional pattern of the protuberances is readily apparent within the skeleton, but one hand-specimen suggests they occur at growth interruptions, and may be an intrinsic response to un- favourable environmental conditions. As noted earlier by Stearn (1983), some specimens of Clathrodictyon ellesmerense display dense inter- growths of syringoporid corals. Occurrence. — Blue Fiord Formation; lower 100 m, type area (15 specimens); lower member, Vendom Fiord (two specimens); lower Emsian (dehiscens-gronbergi Zones). Blue Fiord Formation, upper member, Ven- dom Fiord (one specimen); Disappointnient Bay For- mation, Truro Island (one specimen); inversus Zone. Bird Fiord Formation, Ellesmere Island, type area (one specimen); Northeastern Bathurst Island, unnamed limestone formation (one specimen); highest Emsian- basal Eifelian (undifferentiated patu/us Zone). Genus GERRONOSTROMA Yavorsky, 1931 Type species.—Gerronostroma elegans Yavorsky, 1931. Gerronostroma septentrionalis, new species Plate 3, figures 4, 5; Plate 4, figures 1-4 Gerronostroma sp. A Stearn, 1983, p. 547-548, figs. 4A, 4B. Diagnosis. —Thin laminae, closely but variably spaced 9 to 18 in 2 mm; pillars thin, spaced regularly and closely, 11 to 20 in 2 mm; dissepiments uncom- mon. Description. —Skeletal form variable, laminar to weakly domical, commonly irregular, rarely bulbous. Surfaces poorly exposed, apparently bearing numer- ous, small mamelons. Latilaminae common, thickness 0.7-1.0 cm. Vertical section: Laminae continuous, flat or gently undulate, less commonly highly undulate-to-irregular; thin, 0.03 to 0.04 mm, rarely to 0.05 mm; in specimens with syringoporids, deflected slightly downward at cor- allite margins. Laminar spacing very close, but highly variable; species range 9 to 18 per 2 mm, commonly 13 to 16 per 2 mm; holotype GSC 108859 average 15.2 (n=20) range 13 to 18, paratype GSC 108860 average 15.5 (n=10) range 13 to 17, paratype GSC 108862 average 14.2 (n=10) range 13 to 16. Successive phases of laminar spacing common, 1.5 to 2.0 mm thick, or about four to five phase-cycles per latilamina; where closely spaced, rare pairs of laminae may be tightly adpressed, separated by gap of 0.01 to 0.02 mm. Basal phase of stringy material 0.2 to 0.3 mm thick at base of latilaminae, also as thin lenses irregularly through- out skeleton; some latilaminar surfaces show minor erosion (truncated or missing upper laminae). Pillars thin, 0.02-—0.04 mm; generally superposed through in- terval of 2 to 10 laminae, although readily lost to dia- genesis; dominantly simple, straight, rod-shaped; a few slightly thickened or apparently split upward; spacing variable, generally very close and regular, species range 11 to 20 per 2 mm, commonly 13 to 17 per 2 mm, holotype average 16.5 (n=20) range 14 to 20, paratypes GSC 108860 average 15.0 range 13 to 17, GSC 108861 average 13.5 range 12 to 15, GSC 108862 average 15.1 range 13 to 17 (all n=10); tending to be closer where laminae closely spaced. Astrorhizae variably present, common or abundant in most specimens, in a few rare or absent, consisting of central bundle of few vertical canals 0.1 to 0.2 mm diameter, and many smoothly curved lateral branches merging into galleries; asso- ciated with shallow mamelons, vertically persistent up to full latilaminar height; pervasive lateral branches as small circular gaps 0.2 mm diameter or short tubes locally interrupting laminae, abundant near axis and along certain levels; absent or imperceptible in speci- mens with commensal syringoporids. Dissepiments uncommon except in areas of skeletal repair. Skeletal microstructure compact, minutely speckled; some specimens irregularly fibrous. Tangential section: Laminae dense meandriform bands. Pillars commonly small dots, 0.02-0.04 mm diameter, or short vermiform strands; closely spaced, about 0.04 mm apart. Astrorhizae axial bundle of three to five canals and surrounding dense array of outward- branching lateral canals; canal width 0.1 to 0.2 mm; complexity and density highly variable between spec- imens, closest center-to-center spacing about 5 mm. Material.—Twenty-four specimens, mostly well- DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN 19 preserved. Seven specimens with commensal syrin- goporids, seventeen without. Holotype GSC 108859; paratypes GSC 108860 to 108862. Other specimens listed in Appendix 3. Discussion. —Gerronostroma septentrionalis n. sp. demonstrates extremely broad variation in laminar and pillar spacing, astrorhizal arrangement and abundance, and overall growth form. It is the same species rec- ognized earlier by Stearn (1983) as Gerronostroma sp. A (also from the lower Blue Fiord Formation, Elles- mere Island). Minor differences between the earlier description and this one are attributable to the broad specific variation of G. septentrionalis n. sp., not fully represented in the small collection of Stearn (1983). The earlier description noted the astrorhizae as being inconspicuous and latilamination as not prominent, which by the present species-concept are more excep- tions than the norm. The pillar spacing cited by Stearn (1983), 11 to 12 per 2 mm, is within the range of G. septentrionalis n. sp., although low; laminar spacing for G. sp. A Stearn, 1983, is 16 to 18 per 2 mm. The new specimens of G. septentrionalis n. sp. demonstrate roughly a one-to-one ratio of pillar to laminar spacing (for any specimen or uniform region within a speci- men). The apparent disparity exhibited by the speci- mens of Stearn (1983) is due to preferential diagenetic loss of pillars, a feature consistently evident in both collections. Some specimens show partial or complete removal of pillars, leaving only the closely spaced lam- inae intact. Another specimen referred by Stearn (1983) to Ger- ronostroma cf. G. immemoratum Bogoyavlenskaya is not conspecific with Gerronostroma septentrionalis n. sp. Its laminar and pillar spacings are well outside the range of G. septentrionalis n. sp. and, moreover, its skeletal element thicknesses are much greater. Consid- ering the geographic and stratigraphic similarity of the collection of Stearn (1983) and those herein, the ab- sence of new specimens similar to G. cf. G. imme- moratum is puzzling. Still, the species appears to be valid, and the paleogeographic relationship to the east- ern Urals suggested by G. cf. G. immemoratum is sup- ported by the present evidence (see under occurrence of Aculatostroma cf. A. kaljanum, p. 17). G. septentrionalis n. sp. shows little similarity to other known species of Gerronostroma. Two lower Em- sian species are described by Lessovaya (1970) from the Zeravshan Range, Uzbekistan: Gerronostroma is- tekense schirdagica Lessovaya has much thicker skel- etal elements, more widely spaced, than G. septentrion- alis n. sp.; and Gerronostroma uralicumforme Lesso- vaya appears more reasonably to belong to Atopostro- ma Yang and Dong. Of the three upper Lochkovian species of Gerronostroma described by Stearn (1990) from the Stuart Bay Formation, Bathurst Island, none is closely comparable to G. septentrionalis n. sp. About one-third of the specimens of Gerronostroma septentrionalis n. sp. exhibit dense intergrowths of a syringoporid coral (e.g. Pl. 4, fig. 3). The intergrown corallites are either very abundant or completely ab- sent, i.e., there is no intermediate condition of just a few intergrown corallites. This implies that the rela- tionship between the coral and G. septentrionalis n. sp. is neither accidental nor parasitic, for which a grada- tion of intergrowth densities should occur. Mutualism is unlikely, as Gerronostroma specimens without the coral are abundant and show no obvious signs of lesser growth than those with the coral. Rather, strict com- mensalism on the part of the coral is indicated. Gerronostroma septentrionalis n. sp. is commonly found competitively overgrowing other stromatopo- roid species (primarily Stromatopora polaris Stearn and Stictostroma? nunavutense n. sp.). A third of the spec- imens demonstrate this overgrowth, and of these, three specimens (including the holotype) show intimate in- terfingering of the competing stromatoporoids. In the holotype (GSC 108859), at least five such interfingering episodes occur within one latilamina of G. septentrion- alis n. sp. (PI. 4, fig. 4). The overtopping/recolonization by Gerronostroma is in each instance clearly defined by a characteristic mat of basal stringy tissue. By the end of the latilaminar event, the competing species appears to have been excluded from the holotype spec- imen, and indeed in each example observed Gerron- ostroma ultimately overgrows the other in vertical suc- cession. Etymology. —Latin septentrionalis, of, or from the north. Occurrence.—Blue Fiord Formation, lower mem- ber; Ellesmere Island, vicinity formation type area (21 specimens), Vendom Fiord (two specimens); lower Emsian (dehiscens Zone). Uppermost Eids Formation, Eids Fiord, Ellesmere Island (one specimen); lower Emsian (dehiscens Zone). Genus PETRIDIOSTROMA Stearn, 1992, (nom. subst. pro Petrostroma Stearn, 1991 non Petrostroma Doderlein, 1892) Type species. —Simplexodictyon simplex Nestor, 1966. Petridiostroma sp. Plate 5, figures 1-2 ? Anostylostroma laxum Nicholson. Stearn, 1990, p. 503-504, figs. 3.3-3.5. Description. —Skeleton laminar to irregular. Lati- laminae about 5 mm thick evident in some specimens. 20 BULLETIN 349 Vertical section: Laminae continuous, gently un- dulate; 0.04-0.06 mm thick, commonly 0.05 mm thick; spaced 6 to 8 per 2 mm, specimen averages 7.5 (GSC 108863), 6.3 (GSC 108864) (each n=10); microstruc- ture compact. Pillars simple, commonly rod-shaped, some slightly thickening upward to meet overlying lamina, rarely branching upward; 0.04—0.08 mm thick, average 0.055mm (GSC _ 108863; n=20); variably spaced, 7 to 11 per 2 mm, specimen averages 8.8 (GSC 108863), 8.5 (GSC 108864) each n=10; arrangement between successive laminae irregular, random, pillars neither consistently staggered nor superposed; locally absent for lengths up to 1.0 mm. Dissepiments com- mon, broadly convex; thin 0.02 mm. Tangential section: Pillars solid dots 0.04-0.08 mm diameter; rarely incomplete small circles with clear center, diameter up to 0.12 mm. Dissepiments con- spicuous, shallow arcs or irregular segments bridging pillars. Astrorhizae absent. Material. —Three specimens, ranging from poorly to moderately well preserved. Hypotypes GSC 108863, 108864. Other specimen 111-1. Discussion.—These few specimens from Ellesmere Island are best assigned to the genus Petridiostroma (Stearn, 1992) on the basis of their planar laminae and predominantly simple pillars. They are quite similar to specimens from the upper Lochkovian of Bathurst Island (“Stuart Bay” Formation) referred to Anosty- lostroma laxum by Stearn (1990). The Bathurst Island specimens have more distantly spaced laminae (ten- count average of 5.5 in 2 mm in one specimen, 7.1 in the other) and pillars (ten-count average of 5.5 in 2 mm in one specimen, 6.2 in 2 mm in the other) than do those described here, but they are otherwise closely comparable. In light of recent study (Stearn, 1991), Anostylostroma should be restricted to species in which the majority of pillars branch-upward irregularly and complexly. As such, the Lochkovian specimens re- ferred to Anostylostroma laxum by Stearn (1990) should be reassigned to Petridiostroma. These Lochkovian specimens show a predominance of simple pillars, and only a few are Y-shaped (Stearn, 1990). Re-examina- tion of the specimens reveals that less than one per cent of the pillars branch, a proportion comparable to the Ellesmere Island Petridiostroma sp. specimens. Tangential sections are especially diagnostic, for al- though the few branched pillars appear prominent in vertical section, tangentially the overwhelming major- ity of pillars are dots. Nonetheless, more specimens of the Ellesmere Island Petridiostroma sp. are needed to support a definite relationship to the Lochkovian spec- imens. Anostylostroma laxum (Nicholson, 1887) itself (cf. e.g., Fagerstrom, 1982; Bjerstedt and Feldmann, 1985) is best assigned to the genus Schistodictyon (pil- lars branch upward dichotomously) (Stearn, 1991). Occurrence. —Blue Fiord Formation, Ellesmere Is- land; Goose Fiord, dolomitic facies (one specimen), mid-Emsian (inversus Zone); Vendom Fiord, near base of upper member (two specimens), lower Emsian (in- versus Zone). Genus ATELODICTYON Lecompte, 1951 Type species. — Atelodictyon fallax Lecompte, 1951. Atelodictyon cf. A. solidum Khromych, 1976 Plate 5, figures 3,4 cf. Atelodictyon cylindricum solidum Khromych, 1976, p. 48, pl. IV, figs. 4a, 4b, 4c. Description. —Fragmentary; skeleton laminar. Vertical section: Laminae thin, 0.02—0.03 mm, lo- cally thickened to 0.05 mm; mostly continuous, but locally broken, due either to poor preservation or pen- etration by astrorhizal canals; spaced 4 to 5 per 2 mm; irregularly undulate, interlaminar spaces locally swol- len or pinched out. Coenosteles complex, thin; dom- inantly vertical, but irregularly sinuous, crumpled. Two types of coenosteles occur (with numerous intergra- dational forms): dominantly 1) thin, 0.02-0.04 mm, tightly crowded, paired or in interwoven _hairlike bunches, commonly splaying upward to meet overly- ing lamina; subordinately 2) thicker, up to 0.10 mm, thickening or splitting upward to meet lamina. Coe- nostele spacing 8 to 11 per 2 mm, average 9.5 (n=10), but locally tightly crowded and individuallly indis- cernable. Astrorhizae large, extensive, composed axi- ally of vertical bundles of canals, each 0.4-0.5 mm wide, spread laterally like buttressed roots of a tree; astrorhizal tributaries widely scattered, form hollow circles or short tubes, commonly truncating laminae. Dissepiments uncommon, thin, broadly convex, most- ly preservationally obscured. Microstructure probably compact. Tangential section: Coenosteles vermiform to net- like; thickness variable, 0.03-—0.08 mm; rarely dots 0.02-0.05 mm diameter; rarely irregularly ring-shaped; where netlike, enclosing galleries 0.2-0.5 mm across. Astrorhizae large, very prominent, axial canal diam- eter 0.4-0.5 mm; at optimal height of section forming rosettes, comprising a central bundle of 5 to 6 vertical canals, surrounding array of long ramifying lateral ca- nals extending up to 1.5 cm; tributary canal segments 0.2-0.3 mm diameter scattered throughout skeleton; central canal margins generally well-defined, tributary canals less defined, merge into skeletal network. Dis- tance between astrorhizal centres about 1.0 cm. Material.—Two specimens, one moderately well DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN Dil preserved (GSC 108865), one poorly preserved (120- 6). Discussion. —These few but distinctive specimens compare favorably with Atelodictyon solidum Khro- mych, 1976, known from the Emsian of the Ulakhan- Sis Range, northeastern Siberia. Khromych (1976) not- ed the following characteristics of 4. solidum: laminae 0.05 mm thick, spacing 5 to 10 per 2 mm; pillars 0.04— 0.07 mm thick, spacing 10 per 2 mm; astrorhizal canals 0.55 mm wide, distance between neighboring astro- rhizae 9.1 mm. Morphometric differences between this and the Ellesmere specimens are therefore minor, with the possible exception being the more closely spaced laminae of Siberian 4. solidum. Shared features of pri- mary importance are the nature and disposition of the coenosteles, and particularly the large, pervasive as- trorhizae, which are identical in the Siberian and Elles- mere Island specimens. Any reservation expressed in the assignment of the Ellesmere specimens is princi- pally due to the limited material available, rather than to morphologic differences, which are within an ac- ceptable range of specific variability. Atelodictyon solidum was originally described as a subspecies A. cylindricum solidum Khromych, 1976. Atelodictyon cylindricum Khromych, 1971 is an un- usual species with a cylindrical or spherical growth form; it occurs in the Lower Devonian (?Lochkovian- Pragian) Nelyudimskaya Suite of the Omulevski Mountains, northeastern Siberia. In consideration of age and morphologic differences, we elevate A. c. so- lidum Khromych, 1976 to species level. The exact age of Atelodictyon solidum Khromych is uncertain. Khromych (1976, p. 48) lists it as “‘Eifelian stage, lower Tababastaakhskaya Subsuite, Ulakhan-Sis Range.” Traditionally Soviet geologists have set the Lower—Middle Devonian boundary much lower than in the West, in what is now considered Emsian. Only relatively recently have Soviet/Russian stratigraphers adopted international boundary-placements (cf. Rzhonsnitskaya, 1988). An additional complication with the northeast-Siberian material is that Khro- mych’s (1974, p. 71-73; 1976, p. 40) correlations are based almost entirely on stromatoporoids alone, un- supported by other fossil groups. Allowing for these uncertainties, the age of the Tababastaakhskaya sub- suite appears to be Emsian, probably mid-to-late Em- sian, therefore comparable to the inversus Zone prov- enance of the Ellesmere specimens. Due to the apparent incompleteness of the laminae of Atelodictyon cf. A. solidum, consideration was given to an assignment to the actinostromatid genus Acu- latostroma (which also has vermiculate to cateniform pillars in tangential section; cf. Stearn, 1991). As noted in the description above, discontinuities in the laminae of this species are attributable to preservation (see be- low) and, moreover, to interruption by the pervasive astrorhizal system. Most importantly, the coenosteles (pillars) in vertical detail show no evidence of becom- ing colliculate at their tops; they mostly either splay apart into fine strands, or thicken to meet the lamina above, against which they are sharply abutted. Atelodictyon cf. A. solidum exhibits unusual pres- ervation, although common for other stromatoporoids from the same locality (the shallow-platform, dolo- mitic facies of the Blue Fiord of southwesternmost Ellesmere Island). Intraskeletal galleries of A. cf. A. solidum are filled with early-stage, opaque calcite ce- ment, which is poorly transparent in thin-section. When viewed in transmitted light, skeletal elements and ce- ment-filled galleries are nearly equally opaque, and in- distinguishable. Examination and illustration of this species therefore had to be done in reflected light, which accounts for the murkier appearance of Pl. 5, figs. 3 and 4 compared to others. Occurrence. — Blue Fiord Formation, Muskox Fiord, Ellesmere Island; mid-Emsian (inversus Zone). Family TIENODICTYIDAE Bogoyavlenskaya, 1965 Genus ANOSTYLOSTROMA Parks, 1936 Type species. — Anostylostroma hamiltonense Parks, 1936. Anostylostroma anfractum, new species Plate 6, figures 1-5 Diagnosis. —Laminae thin, spaced 7 to 10 in 2 mm; pillars variable, complexly upwardly branched or joined, distinctive in form in tangential section as short chains, geniculate strands, and triskelions. Description. —Skeleton laminar to slightly domed. Vertical section: Laminae continuous, gently un- dulate; thin, 0.03—0.04 mm, locally thickened to 0.05- 0.06 mm; regularly spaced, 7 to 10 per 2mm, specimen averages 9.2, 8.6, 9.5, 7.2 (GSC 108866 to 108869; each n=10); microstructure transversely fibrous or lo- cally transversely porous. Pillars highly variable, most- ly upward-branching, either irregularly or simply (Y- shaped); a few upward-thickening or rod-shaped; com- monly confined to single interlaminar interval, a few superposed over 2 to 4 laminae. Pillar thickness 0.03- 0.08 mm, commonly 0.05—0.06 mm; may thicken up- ward to as much as 0.20 mm at overlying lamina; spaced 7 to 10 per 2 mm, specimen averages 7.6, 8.8, 8.5, 9.0 (GSC 108866 to 108869; each n=10). Dissep- iments common, generally not abundant; thin, 0.02 mm; long, broad, sub-horizontal, gently convex. La- tilaminae absent, but thin (0.5—1.0 mm) basal phases 22 BULLETIN 349 of unordered skeletal material may occur overlying growth interruptions. Tangential section: Laminae moderately dark bands, mostly 0.1-0.2 mm wide; gently meandering. Pillars isolated or interconnected strands, uniformly thick 0.02 mm diameter; strands commonly geniculate, com- posed of short straight portions (about 0.2 mm long) turning sharply at obtuse angles; shapes commonly ap- proach a triskelion; a few strands interconnected, but not for great lengths; some isolated oblique or circular dots, 0.02 mm diameter, may be locally abundant; very rarely form irregular rings. Pillar microstructure trans- versely fibrous. Astrorhizae absent. Material. —Four fragmentary specimens. Preserva- tion mediocre to moderately well preserved. Holotype GSC 108866. Paratypes GSC 108867 to 108869. Discussion. — Anostylostroma anfractum n. sp. is most clearly distinguished in tangential section by its pillars, which appear as angular, geniculate strands forming triskelions, short chains, or isolated masses. It has the most complex pillar arrangement of any species of An- ostylostroma, which typically exhibit short vermiform pillars in tangential section. The pillars of Anostylos- troma confluens Galloway and St. Jean, 1957, from the Givetian of Indiana, approach this form, but are not as interconnected as those of 4. anfractum n. sp. The cross sections of the pillars of A. confluens cut in tangential section are short, vermiform or coalescing, and without the geniculate form of 4. anfractum n. sp. The regularity of pillars in tangential section belies the extreme variability of pillars in vertical sections of A. anfractum n. sp. Two factors complicate character- ization of pillars in vertical aspect: generally mediocre preservation, and variation in proportions of different pillar types between specimens. In vertical section, two of the paratypes (GSC 108868 and 108869) exhibit the commonest pillar arrangement, dominated by com- plexly branching, irregular, commonly inclined pillars. A third paratype (GSC 108867) in contrast displays a more orderly arrangement of pillars, in which simple rods are comparatively common (PI. 6, fig. 3). The holotype (GSC 108866) represents an intermediate case, with complex and simple pillars occurring in near equal proportions. Etymology. — Latin anfractum: bending, winding, or circuitous. Describes the pillars in tangential section. Occurrence. —Northeastern Bathurst Island; un- named limestone formation, lower 100 m; highest Em- sian/basal Eifelian (undifferentiated patu/us Zone). Genus PSEUDOACTINODICTYON Fliigel, 1958 Type species. —Pseudoactinodictyon juxi Fligel, 1958. Pseudoactinodictyon conglutinatum, new species Plate 7, figures 1-4 Diagnosis. —Laminae thick, compounded of fusion of adjacent thin laminae, locally split like those of Sim- plexodictyon, widely spaced 2 to 4 in 2 mm; pillars robust, spooled or dividing upward, dotlike of sausage- shaped in cross section. Description. —Skeleton domal to hemispherical, up to 10 cm diameter. Surface irregular, without percep- tible mamelons or astrorhizae. Vertical section: Laminae undulate; spacing wide, inconsistent, 2 to 4 per 2 mm, holotype (GSC 108870) average 3.3 (n=10); distance between successive lam- inae variable, commonly 0.30-1.40 mm, holotype (GSC 108870) average 0.65 mm range 0.40-1.00 mm (n=30), paratype (GSC 108871) average 0.76 mm range 0.35- 1.35 mm (n=30), locally as much as 2.0 mm. Laminae compound, formed by fusion of adjacent thin laminae, either completely or incompletely; completely fused laminae thick 0.14—0.28 mm average 0.20 mm (n=20, combined GSC 108870 and 108871), no axial zone; incompletely fused twin laminae separated by thin gap ca. 0.02 mm, locally swollen forming flat-bottomed vacuities, lower twin lamina generally thinner 0.04— 0.06 mm than upper twin 0.12-0.16 mm; laminae lo- cally perforate, perforations/foramina occluded by dis- sepiments at or near laminar level. Pillars commonly simple spool-shaped, or upward-dividing Y-shaped; thick 0.12-0.20 mm, holotype (GSC 108870) average 0.13 mm paratype (GSC 108871) average 0.17 mm (each n=10); spacing variable, range 4 to 8, commonly 5 to 7 per 2 mm, holotype (GSC 108870) average 5.5 per 2 mm (n=20), paratype (GSC 108871) average 6.6 per 2 mm (n=10). Dissepiments common, locally abundant. Microstructure compact. Astrorhizae ob- scure, indicated only by vaguely defined zones of downturned laminae, inwardly inclined pillars, dense concentrations of dissepiments and laminar perfora- tions. Tangential section: Pillars solid dots 0.10-0.14 mm diameter, or thicker, irregular, sausage-shaped or con- fluent (toward upper laminae). Dissepiments common, locally abundant, linking just less than half of pillars. Interlaminar gaps and vacuities scattered but promi- nent, more prevalent/conspicuous than in vertical sec- tion. Material. —Three partial skeletons, moderately well preserved. Holotype GSC 108870, paratype GSC 108871, specimen 111-19. Discussion. —Compared to Middle Devonian spe- cies of Pseudoactinodictyon, P. conglutinatum n. sp. displays generally thicker structural elements and wid- er laminar spacing. The most closely comparable spe- cies are P. juxi Fliigel, 1958 from the Givetian of Sauer- DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN 23 land, Germany (Fliigel, 1958), and P. vagans Parks, 1936 from the Detroit River Group (probably Emsian) of Ontario and Ohio (Fagerstrom, 1982). The spacing of both laminae and pillars is roughly one and one- half times denser in P. vagans than in P. conglutinatum n. sp., and skeletal elements are finer (P. vagans lam- inae 0.05—0.07 mm, pillars 0.05—0.10 mm thick). Pillar thickness of P. juxi is comparable to P. conglutinatum n. sp., and ranges of laminar thicknesses overlap (0. 10- 0.20 mm vs. 0.14—-0.28 mm); spacing of skeletal ele- ments is somewhat closer in P. juwxi (4 to 6 laminae, 6 to 8 pillars in 2 mm). The most noteworthy feature of Pseudoactinodictyon conglutinatum n. sp. is the arrangement of successive laminae, either fused to form thick compound laminae, or separated by a gap of irregular thickness. Such an arrangement suggests a growth pattern in which each successive unit, composed of thin upper and lower laminae joined by pillars, is separated by an interrup- tion in growth. The succeeding thin lower lamina is lain atop the upper lamina of the previous growth unit, and either “welded” to it, or remains separated by a gap. This unusual growth pattern is also known in (and characteristic of) the genera Simplexodictyon (formerly Diplostroma; cf. Nestor, 1976; Stearn, 1991) and Nur- atodictyon (known from only one specimen; Lesso- vaya, 1972, Stearn, 1980). The significance of such gaps between the laminae is further discussed by Stearn and Pickett (1994). Mori (1968) first recognized that the “‘split” laminae of Simplexodictyon indicate pauses in growth, the gaps being devoid of skeletal elements and often incorporating trapped sediment or encrust- ing organisms. No trapped sediment or encrusting or- ganisms are present within the interlaminar gaps of Pseudoactinodictyon conglutinatum n. sp. Another dif- ference from Simplexodictyon is that in this latter ge- nus divergent laminae are much more common than fused laminae, but in P. conglutinatum n. sp. gaps are distributed sporadically: in the paratype (GSC 108871) gaps are much rarer than in the holotype (GSC 109970). Stearn (1980, 1991) proposed the Family Simplex- odictyidae (formerly Diplostromatidae) for species demonstrating the interrupted growth pattern diag- nostic of Simplexodictyon and Nuratodictyon. Recog- nition of this unusual growth pattern outside these two genera, as is the case here, may require reevaluation or some redefinition of the Family Simplexodictyidae. Simplexodictyon grandiosum Lessovaya, 1970 from the upper Emsian (Favosites regularissimus Zone) of Uzbekistan (Lessovaya, 1970), shows certain similar- ities to Pseudoactinodictyon conglutinatum n. sp. from Ellesmere Island, and may be related. Simplexodictyon grandiosum is very robustly built (laminae and pillar spacings 4 to 5 per 2 mm), and has thick (0.2—0.4 mm), “bipartite” laminae with an axial light-coloured zone (Lessovaya, 1970; p. 87). Lessovaya’s description and illustrations do not however indicate any divergence or gaps between the compound or “‘bipartite”’ laminae; the pillars of S. grandiosum are thick, simple and spool- shaped. It appears unlikely that Pseudoactinodictyon conglutinatum n. sp. and Simplexodictyon grandiosum are the same species, but that the central Asian species may be another Lower Devonian form of Pseudoac- tinodictyon, allied to Pseudoactinodictyon conglutina- tum n. sp. An earlier suggestion by Stearn (1991) that Simplexodictyon grandiosum should be reassigned to the genus Petridiostroma is probably incorrect. Etymology. —From the Latin conglutinatus, bound or glued together; describes the fused twin laminae. Occurrence. —Blue Fiord Formation, Ellesmere Is- land; formation type section, upper member, from a unit lying 200-400 m below the top of the formation (two type specimens); upper Emsian (inversus-serotin- us Zones). Bird Fiord Formation, near base of for- mation; Bird Fiord, Ellesmere Island (one specimen); uppermost Emsian/basal Eifelian (undifferentiated pa- tulus Zone). Genus SCHISTODICTYON Lessovaya, 1970 Type species. —Schistodictyon posterius Lessovaya, 1970. Schistodictyon? sp. Plate 7, figures 5,6 Description. —Skeleton apparently laminar. Vertical section: Laminae thin 0.03-0.04 mm, reg- ular, continuous, flat or gently undulate; spacing reg- ular, 7 to 10 per 2 mm, average 8.6 (n=10); micro- structure compact, locally weakly transversely fibrous. Pillars very variable: simple spool-shaped (44%), up- ward-thickening to meet overlying lamina (28%), up- ward-bifurcating Y-or V-shape (26%); doubly upward- dividing (2%) (n=100); dominantly vertical, but com- monly inclined; spaced 7 to 9 per 2 mm, average 7.7 (n=10); thickness 0.04-0.06 mm, up to 0.10 mm at junction with overlying lamina; rarely superposed. Tangential section: Laminae form thin, diffuse, me- andering bands. Pillars dominantly simple dots 0.04— 0.08 mm diameter, may be vermiform or linked to- ward laminae; irregular rings rare. Dissepiments rare. Astrorhizae absent. Material.—A single specimen, GSC 108872. Well preserved. Discussion. —This single specimen is questionably assigned to the genus Schistodictyon on the basis of its Y-and V-shaped pillars (a few of which are doubly bifurcating). Ideally, Schistodictyon is characterised by 24 BULLETIN 349 a predominance of bifurcating pillars (Stearn, 1991), as demonstrated by S. papillatum (Parks) (cf. Stearn, 1991, fig. 2.2). In vertical sections of Schistodictyon? sp. from Ellesmere Island, only about one-quarter of the pillars are bifurcating; about one-half are simple rods and the remainder are intermediate in nature (/.e., upward-thickening). Specimens such as this, which show characteristics intermediate between Schistodic- tyon and related genera such as Petridiostroma and Anostylostroma, are not unusual. Because the true mor- phological range of this species cannot be understood from a single specimen, the generic assignment must remain equivocal. Vertical sections of Schistodictyon? sp. are similar to those of Petridiostroma sp. (also from the Blue Fiord Formation, Ellesmere Island). The main difference is the proportion of bifurcating pillars (which are rare in Petridiostroma sp.). Tangential sections more clearly show this distinction, but the possibility cannot be dismissed that the single specimens separately assigned to Schistodictyon? sp. and Petridiostroma sp. are con- specific. Many more specimens are needed before these problems can be meaningfully resolved. Specimens from the Emsian of eastern Australia as- signed to Schistodictyon sp. by Webby and Zhen (1993) are quite similar to the Blue Fiord specimen, but again too little material is available from which to draw firm conclusions. Occurrence. — Blue Fiord Formation, lower 100 m; vicinity type section; lower Emsian (dehiscens Zone). Order STROMATOPORELLIDA Stearn, 1980 Family STICTOSTROMATIDAE Khalfina and Yavorsky, 1973 Genus STICTOSTROMA Parks, 1936 Type species. —Stictostroma gorriense Stearn, 1995. Stictostroma gorriense Stearn, 1995a Plate 8, figures 1-5 non Stromatopora mammillata Nicholson, 1873, p. 94, pl. 4, fig. 4. Stictostroma mammillatum (Nicholson). Parks, 1936, p. 78-81, pl. 14, figs. 3-6. Stictostroma mamilliferum Galloway and St. Jean, 1957, p. 125- 127, pl. 6, figs. 4a,b; Galloway, 1957, pl. 31, fig. 6, pl. 33, fig. 9; St. Jean, 1962, p. 188-189, pl. 31, figs. 1-5; Fagerstrom, 1982, p. 40-41, pl. 8, figs. 6,7; Prosh and Stearn, 1993, figs. 3c, 3d. Stictostroma mccannelli Fagerstrom, 1961, p. 7, pl. 2, figs. 7-9; 1982, p. 40-41. Stictostroma gorriense Stearn, 1995a, p. 26, figs. 1.6, 1.7, 2.5, 2.6; 1995b, p. 1-3. Description. —Skeleton weakly domical to thick- laminar with ragged edge; rarely encrusting or inter- grown. Surfaces bearing abundant, small, very regu- larly spaced mamelons, ca. 1 mm high, 1-2 mm di- ameter, 4-5 mm center-to-center distance. Latilami- nae moderately well developed, 2-4 mm thick. Vertical section: laminae continuous, flat or very gently undulate, consistently parallel; regularly spaced, commonly 13 to 15 per 2 mm, specimens GSC 108873 average 14.3 range 12 to 17, GSC 108177 average 14.2 range 12 to 16, GSC 108176 average 14.0 range 13 to 15, GSC 108874 average 13.8 range 12 to 15 (alln=10); thickness 0.03-0.06 mm, commonly 0.04-0.05 mm; microstructure ordinicellular, transverse tubules and intervening skeletal material both about 10-15 wm wide, grading locally to tripartite or with median row of cellules; diagenetically altered laminae tripartite, with median pale band 0.02—0.04 mm thick and dark ex- terior bands 0.01 mm thick, vaguely transversely fi- brous. Pillars stout, spool-shaped, 0.04—0.08 mm thick, thickening and merging into laminae; very rarely formed by up-arching and merger of lower lamina (in the manner of Stromatoporella); irregularly offset be- tween successive laminae, rarely superposed; spaced irregularly 7 to 12 per 2 mm, specimens GSC 108873 average 9.2 range 7 to 11 (n=20), GSC 108177 average 9.6 range 8 to 11 (n=10), GSC 108176 average 9.7 range 9 to 11 (n=10), GSC 108874 average 10.1 range 9 to 12 (n=10); locally absent for lengths up to 1 mm; microstructure poorly preserved, generally suggesting cellules or vertically-aligned tubules. Dissepiments broadly convex, very thin, 5-10 um, commonly oc- cupying uppermost portion of galleries; easily lost dia- genetically, probably originally common. Mamelons variably and only sparingly evident (despite promi- nence on exposed surfaces), apparent in some speci- mens and not in others; mostly shallow, vertically im- persistent, with no or very weak astrorhizal canals; less commonly may be vertically persistent up to 5 mm height, with poorly developed astrorhizae, central ca- nal 0.15 mm wide. Intergrown organisms (corals, algae) common. Tangential section: laminae thick diffuse bands. Open gallery space generally comprises less than half total area. Pillars subcircular, isolated, numerous, crowded, 0.04-0.10 mm diameter; ring-pillars absent; micro- structure cellular (sectioned transverse tubules), cellule diameter 10-15 um, but fine-structure only very rarely preserved, commonly compact. Astrorhizae comprise few, short, poorly-defined canals, 0.10 mm diameter; about half of all mamelon centers without astrorhizae. Material. —Eight specimens; one complete skeleton, 7 partial (2 of which are encrusting). Moderately well to well preserved. Hypotypes GSC 108873 to 108875, 108176, 108177. Other specimens listed in Appen- dix 3. Discussion. — Stictostroma gorriense has been widely recognized from southern Ontario; the most thorough synonymy to date was provided by Fagerstrom (1982, DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN 25 Table 1.—Comparative measurements of Stictostroma gorriense Stearn. lamin. lamin. pillar pillar mam. mam. mam. lati. spac’g/ thick. spac’g/ thick. h’ght' diam. spac’g. Spac’g Species 2mm* mm* 2mm mm mm mm mmc-c astrorhizae mm Blue Fiord specimens 13-15 .04-.05 7-12 -04-.08 1 1-2 45 some, poor 24 S. gorriense (12-17) (.03-.06) Galloway and St. Jean (1957) 11-13 .03-.06 4-7 .02-.2 2 3-7 7-12 none 1-2 S. mamilliferum Fagerstrom (1982) 9-14 +10 variable 1-3 as S. mamilliferum Fagerstrom 1961 as 11-13 0.1 .O1-.2 5-2 4-6 6-8 short 1-3 S. mecannelli = S. mamilliferum Parks (1936) 12 .04 .02—.16 8 none as S. mammillatum * Average spacing and range ( ) are given. Abbreviations: /amin.—laminar, spac’g—spacing, thick.—thickness, mam.—mamelon, h'ght—height, diam.—diameter, mam. spac’g mm c-c—mamelon spacing millimeters center-to-center, /ati.—latilaminar. p.40). Major morphologic measurements of previously described occurrences and of the Blue Fiord specimens are shown in Table 1. The Blue Fiord specimens fall within the specific range of variation for most criteria, with the spacing of their laminae falling at the closely- spaced extreme. Narrowly spaced laminae distinguish S. gorriense from the closely related species S. prob- lematicum and S. anomalum (see Fagerstrom, 1982). As is apparent in Table 1, there is considerable vari- ation in morphometric ranges between described oc- currences. Some of this variation may be due to geo- graphic variability, but most, as noted by Fagerstrom (1982), is artifactual, due to excessively small sample sizes. A feature of considerable importance is the devel- opment of numerous, close-set mamelons. In contrast to previous descriptions, the mamelons of Blue Fiord S. gorriense are smaller and more crowded, but oth- erwise similar in terms of form and arrangement. Al- though numerous (on exposed growth surfaces), the mamelons of Blue Fiord S. gorriense are narrow and mostly impersistent, so that their expression in vertical thin-section is often severely muted. Development of astrorhizae is similarly highly variable. Although Gal- loway and St. Jean (1957) diagnosed S. mamilliferum = gorriense as without astrorhizae, Fagerstrom’s (1982) analysis of a large sampling revealed weak astrorhizae in some specimens. The same irregular development of astrorhizae occurs in the Blue Fiord specimens, roughly half with and half without astrorhizae. The Arctic occurrence of this species is of biostrati- graphic significance, relating the Blue Fiord Formation (Emsian) to North American midcontinent occur- rences of uncertain chronostratigraphy. Stictostroma gorriense has been recorded from the lower Detroit River Group of southern Ontario (Parks, 1936; Gal- loway and St. Jean, 1957; Fagerstrom, 1961, 1982). A correlation using this species and Stromatoporella per- annulata suggests that the Detroit River Group is fully Emsian in age (Prosh and Stearn, 1993). Occurrence. —Blue Fiord Formation, Ellesmere Is- land; lower member, vicinity type section (six speci- mens), lower Emsian (dehiscens Zone); upper member, Vendom Fiord (two specimens), upper Emsian (inver- sus—serotinus Zones). Stictostroma? nunavutense, new species Plate 9, figures 1-5 Diagnosis. —Thick, regularly spaced extensive lam- inae of microtubulate to ordinicellular microstructure with two to three internal tubules within thickness of lamina. Vertical elements rarely irregular post-pillars, commonly coenosteles, thick. Astrorhizal systems dif- fuse, pervasive, interrupting the lateral regularity of the structure. Description. —Skeleton hemispherical to irregular, up to 10 cm diameter; surface rough, without ma- melons or visible astrorhizae. Latilaminae crude, ir- regular, 0.5—1.0 cm thick. Vertical section: Laminae thick 0.15—0.20 mm, gent- ly undulate to irregular; variably continuous, locally interrupted by abundant foramina; spacing very reg- ular, 6 to 8 per 2 mm, specimen GSC 108876 (holo- type) average 7.0 range 6 to 8, GSC 108877 average 6.9 range 6 to 8 (each n=10). Laminar microstructure microtubulate to ordinicellular; lateral tubules com- monly 2 to 3 within the thickness of laminae, 0.02 mm wide; microstructure commonly diagenetically altered to transversely fibrous or compact. Pillars and coe- nosteles variable in form; most commonly as thick as laminae, 0.10-0.20 mm; stout, uniformly thick or slightly expanding to meet overlying lamina; randomly offset, locally superposed over three or four laminae; thin pillars fewer, rod-shaped, as thin as 0.05 mm; 26 BULLETIN 349 microstructure of thick pillars tubulate to fibrous, of thin pillars compact. Galleries variable, commonly cir- cular 0.10-0.15 mm diameter, some laterally elongate, vermicular. Locally where interrupted by astrorhizal systems, macrostructural framework tends toward amalgamate. Dissepiments rare, very fine, 0.01 mm thick. Astrorhizae vague, indicated only by upward- doming of laminae, interruption of laminae by vertical canals, and zones of disordered lateral canals 0.15 mm diameter merging intimately with galleries. Tangential section: Thick, labyrinthine network with little open gallery space. Dominantly closed labyrin- thine network of coenosteles 0.15—0.20 mm across; isolated pillars subordinate, either subcircular dots (post-pillars) or short vermiform segments 0.10-—0.15 mm diameter. Microstructure clotted, grading to ir- regularly tubulate in thick labyrinthine elements and laminae. Astrorhizae common, defined by short, branching astrorhizal paths between coenosteles, weakly ordered radial zones of short irregular canals 0.15 mm diameter, grading rapidly into labyrinthine gallery space. Astrorhizal centres spaced about 6 mm apart. Material. —Six specimens, ranging from poorly to well preserved. Holotype GSC 108876; paratypes GSC 108877 and 108878. See Appendix 3 for other speci- mens. Discussion. —Stictostroma? nunavutense n. sp. is characterized by thick, regularly spaced laminae, gen- erally equally thick pillars that are either offset or ir- regularly superposed, and tubulate microstructure. It is an unusual new species not readily assignable to known genera. Compared to most species of Sticto- stroma, the skeletal elements of S.? nunavutense are much thicker and less regularly arranged. It is tenta- tively assigned to Stictostroma on the basis of its con- tinuous laminae, non-superposed pillars, and similar microstructure. Numerous stromatoporellid species (of Stromatoporella, Stictostroma, and Clathrocoilona) have previously been described as microtubulate (e.g., Birkhead, 1967; Zukalova, 1971). The astrorhizae of Stictostroma? nunavutense n. sp. are unusually diffuse and apparently pervasive. They do not form discrete structures, but rather considerably modify the structural architecture of the stromatopo- roid at intervals; in this indirect way they are diag- nostic. In vertical section the astrorhizae per se are difficult to locate, defined by zones of vertically elon- gate canals that intimately merge into the gallery net- work. In tangential section they are more easily iden- tified, forming clusters of canals that again merge ra- dially into galleries. Tangential sections indicate the astrorhizae are abundant and very closely spaced (about 6 mm apart). In vertical section, therefore, the astro- rhizae may simply appear as zones where complex galleries occur and laminae may be discontinuous, and the skeleton itself may verge on an amalgamate struc- ture. The “background” architecture of the stroma- toporoid, as it were, is continuous thick laminae, dom- inantly circular galleries; the astrorhizal systems are so integrated into the skeleton, however, that this un- modified structure occurs in only about half the vertical view. All specimens of this species show variably irregular growth form, and none of the specimens is uniquely composed of this species. All show varying degrees of intergrowth with other stromatoporoid species, most commonly Gerronostroma septentrionalis n. sp. and Stictostroma gorriense Stearn, 1995. Etymology. —For Nunavut, the territory of the east- ern Canadian Arctic; in the language of the Inuit, “‘land of the people.” Occurrence. — Blue Fiord Formation, lower member, lower 100 m; Ellesmere Island, Eids Fiord; lower Em- sian (dehiscens Zone). Genus STROMATOPORELLA Nicholson, 1886 Type species.—Stromatoporella granulata Nichol- son, 1886 Stromatoporella perannulata Galloway and St. Jean, 1957 Plate 10, figures 1,2 Stromatoporella cellulosa Parks, 1936, p. 108-110, pl. 4, figs. 6,7; non Clathrodictyon cellulosum Nicholson and Murie, 1878, p. 221, pl. 2, figs. 6-10. Stictostroma eriense Parks. Lecompte, 1951, pl. XX, figs. 2, 2a, 2b. Stromatoporella perannulata Galloway and St. Jean, 1957, p. 142- 144, pl. 9, figs. 3a,b; St. Jean, 1986, p. 1043-1045, figs. 5.45.6; Prosh and Stearn, 1993, Figs. 3a,3b. Stromatoporella eriensis (Parks). Galloway and St. Jean, 1957, p.145- 147, pl.10, figs. 2a,b. Stromatoporella perannulata(?) Fagerstrom, 1982, p. 38-39, pl. 7, figs. 2-4. Stromatoporella eriense(?) (Parks). Fagerstrom, 1982, p. 39, pl. 7, fig. 5. Description. —Skeleton laminar, thick, only gently undulate. Surface bears few small low-relief mamelons, 0.1 mm high, 0.2 mm diameter, irregularly spaced 1- 2 cm apart, without astrorhizae; surface visibly fine granular. Latilaminae moderately to poorly developed, up to 1.0 cm thick. Vertical section: Laminae continuous, generally con- sistently parallel, rarely merging laterally, gently to moderately undulant; extremely crenulate on a fine- scale; very thin 0.02-0.04 mm, but commonly thick- ened and obfuscated diagenetically; regularly spaced, 7 to 10 per 2 mm, specimens GSC 108175 average 8.5 range 8 to 10, GSC 108879 average 7.7 range 7 to 8, GSC 108880 average 7.7 range 7 to 9 (all n=10); mi- DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN Dal crostructure finely transversely porous or fibrous, lo- cally altered to compact, not tripartite. Pillars either rings or simple posts, continuous lateral count of 100 complete pillars (GSC 108175) 51% rings 49% posts; rings extend fully to overlying lamina, central lumen 0.03-0.06 mm across, walls as laminae 0.02-0.04 mm thick; posts simple, may very gently thicken at laminae, 0.02-0.05 mm thick; no pattern of distribution rings and posts, although either may cluster 3 or 4 consec- utive, certain interlaminar spaces may display more of one than another; never superposed, fairly consistently offset; spaced 6 to 9 per 2 mm, specimens GSC 108175 average 7.3 range 6 to 9, GSC 108879 average 7.3 range 6 to 8, GSC 108880 average 7.4 range 6 to 9 (all n=10); microstructure of rings transversely fibrous, continu- ous with laminae, of posts vaguely fibrous or compact. Galleries subequally elongate-rectangular or subcir- cular; subcircular where ring-pillars abundant, locally forming short bead-like chains; elongate galleries up to 2 mm long locally present where pillars absent. Dis- sepiments only locally abundant, very broadly convex, thin 0.02 mm. Mamelon columns rare (present only GSC 108175), up to 1.5 cm high; one thin section (of GSC 108175) preserves short segment (2.0 mm) cen- tral astrorhizal canal, without lateral tributaries; as- trorhizae otherwise absent. One specimen (110-236) with abundant commensal corals. Tangential section: Laminae forming meandering thin bands or lines, highly scalloped (linked partial- ring pillars) or confluent with ring-pillars. Ring-pillars abundant, either half total pillars (GSC 108175) or fewer than half (GSC 108879, 108880); most common within or adjacent to laminae, less commonly within interlaminar spaces; wall thickness 0.02-0.04 mm, central lumen 0.04—0.12 mm diameter; roughly 0.10- 0.12 mm apart center-to-center; microstructure trans- versely porous or fibrous. Post pillars small, irregular dots, 0.03-0.08 mm diameter; many intergrading shapes between ring and post pillars. Mamelon col- umns marked by sectioned laminae forming bull’s- eyes, roughly 1-2 mm apart center-to-center; no as- trorhizae. Material.—Six specimens, ranging from poorly to exceptionally well preserved. Hypotypes GSC 108175, GSC 108879, GSC 108880. Other specimens listed in Appendix 3. Discussion. —Stromatoporella perannulata is widely documented from the North American midcontinent. The type specimens of Galloway and St. Jean (1957) come from the Jeffersonville Limestone near Louis- ville, Kentucky. Many more specimens are recorded from southern Ontario and vicinity. Fagerstrom (1982) listed many occurrences from the Formosa Reef Lime- stone (Amherstburg Formation) and the Detroit River Group of Ontario, and from the Columbus Limestone near Marblehead, Ohio. St. Jean (1986) described S. perannulata from the Port Colborne area (Niagara Pen- insula) of Ontario, in rocks of uncertain assignment (Bois Blanc Formation or lower Onondaga Limestone). The Port Colborne specimens of St. Jean (1986) are strikingly similar to those from the Blue Fiord For- mation (compare Plate 10, figures 1 and 2 herein to figs. 5.4 to 5.6 of St. Jean, 1986). Stromatoporella eriensis (Parks) does not objectively differ from S. perannulata, and most references to S. eriensis should be transferred to S. perannulata. As noted by Fagerstrom (1982), the presumed difference, that S. perannulata has mamelons and S. eriensis has none, is untenable. Larger collections of specimens (of Fagerstrom, 1982, and herein) demonstrate variable development of mamelons in S. perannulata. In given specimens mamelons may be weakly developed or lo- cally absent, and therefore present in some thin-sec- tions and absent in others. The synonymy herein in- cludes all references to Stromatoporella eriensis exclu- sive of the type specimens of Parks, 1936 (originally referred to Stictostroma eriense). Examination of Parks’ types reveals specimens unlike S. perannulata. Parks’ holotype 2610.D (ROM 13190) shows more widely spaced laminae (6 to 8 per 2 mm) that are at least twice as thick (0.05—0.10 mm) as those of S. perannulata. Also the strong crenulation of laminae into the pillars of S. perannulata is poorly developed in Parks’ types (2601.D, 2602.D, 2603.D). Although assignable to Stromatoporella, Parks’ types represent a species other than S. perannulata. The species Stromatoporella er- iensis (Parks) therefore appears to be uniquely confined to Parks’ (1936) types, but all subsequent references to S. eriensis belong to S. perannulata. In the Arctic, S. perannulata is confined to the Em- sian Blue Fiord Formation (dehiscens to inversus Zones). The presence of S. perannulata and Stictostroma gor- riense in both the Blue Fiord Formation and the De- troit River Group of Ontario suggests these units are time-correlative, 7.e., the Detroit River Group is Em- sian (Prosh and Stearn, 1993). Occurrence. — Blue Fiord Formation, Ellesmere Is- land; lower member, Eids Fiord (one specimen), Sor Fiord (2 specimens), Vendom Fiord (one specimen), lower Emsian (dehiscens—gronbergi Zones); platformal dolomitic facies, Goose Fiord, Muskox Fiord (one specimen each), mid-Emsian (inversus Zone). Genus CLATHROCOILONA Yavorsky, 1931 Type species. —Clathrodocoilona abeona Yavorsky, 1931. Clathrocoilona Yavorsky, 1931, p. 1394-1395, 1407; Kossareva, 1976, p.21; Stock, 1982, p. 670-673; synonymies therein. 28 BULLETIN 349 Discussion. —Yavorsky’s original diagnosis of the genus, based uniquely on the type Clathrocoilona abeona, stressed strictly macrostructural details, prin- cipally the abundant astrorhizal foramina, thick con- tinuous laminae, and non-superposed pillars. He char- acterized the microstructure as compact, but noted the presence of a white median line in the laminae. Sub- sequent authors placed greater emphasis on micro- structure, and differing assessments of the composition of Clathrocoilona resulted in divergent suprageneric assignments. Galloway (1957) and Galloway and St. Jean (1957) considered Clathrocoilona to be “coarsely maculate” (although with thick, tripartite laminae), and hence assigned Clathrocoilona to the Stromatoporidae. Although Lecompte (1951) did not recognize Clath- rocoilona as valid, many species he placed in Stro- matoporella were later reassigned to Clathrocoilona (Fliigel and Fligel-Kahler, 1968; Kossareva, 1976). Still, Lecompte’s emphasis on the tripartite laminae of these species helped influence subsequent workers to include Clathrocoilona with the Stromatoporellidae (Zukalova, 1971) or Stromatoporellida (Stearn, 1980). Most recently, Stock (1982) placed Clathrocoilona in the Stromatoporidae, interpreting its microstructure as “originally microreticulate or melanospheric, but may be altered to compact” (p. 671), and noting the com- mon occurrence of tripartite laminae. Kossareva (1976) advanced understanding of Clath- rocoilona with a redescription of the genus and a de- tailed microstructural analysis of Yavorsky’s types (re- grettably unillustrated). Kossareva described the lam- inae of Clathrocoilona as composite, made up of 2 to 4 microlaminae joined by micropillars. In Kossareva’s concept the multilayered laminae appear to bear | to 3 light median bands, in places preserving the micro- pillars and appearing cellular, elsewhere appearing continuous or hollow. Commonly the tissue is per- meated by small pores. For much of the skeleton, Kos- sareva described the elements as having a “felted ap- pearance’’, implying a disordered microstructural net- work, producing a tangle of microlaminae and light bands. The foregoing brief history illustrates the variety of suprageneric assignments proposed for Clathrocoilona, and how interpretation of its complex microstructure has influenced its assignment. Similarly, Clathroco- ilona vexata n. sp. (described below) demonstrates a bewildering variety of microstructures, that has prompted one of us (ECP) to interpret them as dia- genetic modifications of microreticulation (hence fa- voring assignment to Order Syringostromatida), the other author (CWS) as variability in the original skel- etal microstructure. Owing to these uncertainties, and to the subjectivity of interpreting microstructure, we retain Clathrocoilona in the Order Stromatoporellida. Clathrocoilona vexata, new species Plate 10, figures 3, 4; Plate 11, figures 1-8; Plate 12, figures 1,2 Clathrocoilona cf. C. saginata Lecompte. Stearn, 1983, p. 549, 551, figs. SG, 5H. Diagnosis. — Skeletal elements in alternately thick and thin successive phases; very closely spaced laminae and pillars. Description. —Skeletal form variable, commonly thin encrusting, some irregular, rarely small hemispheres. Surface irregular; small mamelons abundant, astro- rhizae imperceptible. Latilaminae 2—3 mm thick. Vertical section: Alternating zones or phases of thin and thick skeletal elements (laminae and pillars). Lam- inae very irregular, undulate, discontinuous, inter- rupted by abundant foramina and coalescing laterally; sharply inflected into shallow mamelons confined to single latilamina; spaced 9 to 14 per 2 mm, holotype GSC 108881 average 10.7 range 9 to 12, paratype GSC 108882 average 13.0 range 11 to 14 (each n=10); thick laminae 0.06—0.15 mm; thin laminae as thin as 0.02 mm; commonly thick laminae (and pillars) at base latilamina, grade to thin at top. Pillars spool-shaped, thick 0.05-0.14 mm, or thin to 0.03 mm; commonly randomly offset between successive laminae, a few su- perposed over 2 to 4 laminae; spaced 8 to 13 per 2 mm, holotype GSC 108881 average 9.3 range 8 to 11, paratype GSC 108882 average 11.4 range 9 to 13 (each n=10); locally absent. Microstructure complex, highly variable; porous/cellular, fibrous, vermiculated, or compact; pores/cellules scattered, subspherical or ver- tically elongated, 15-20 wm diameter, where juxta- posed intervening microelements 5—15 um thick. As- trorhizae poorly formed; rare short irregular vertical canals 0.10 mm diameter; subcircular or ovoid foram- ina ubiquitous, 0.3-0.6 mm lateral diameter. Dissep- iments common, abundant in areas of skeletal repair; broadly convex, thin 0.01 mm. Included organisms (gastropods, brachiopods, ostracodes, worm tubes) common. Tangential section: Laminae dense meandriform bands, discontinuous. Pillars isolated dots 0.04-0.10 mm diameter, or short thick 0.08-0.10 mm gently curved vermiform strands. In holotype (GSC 108881) about half visible area free laminae and pillars (thin element zones); remainder dense, clotted, amalgamate, little open gallery space (thick element zones). Astro- rhizae common, widely dispersed; form rare irregularly branched aggregates; main/axial canals 0.25—0.30 mm diameter, secondary canals commonly 0.08-0.15 mm DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN 29 diameter; tabulae present, poorly preserved. Micro- structure porous/tubulate, vermiculated, fibrous, ir- regularly melanospheric, or compact; pores scattered, locally clustered, circular to oval, 10-20 um diameter, where section oblique plunge into shallow tubules. Material.—Nine specimens, four of them well pre- served. Holotype GSC 108881, paratypes GSC 108882, 108883. Other specimens listed in Appendix 3. Discussion. —Thirty to 40 species of Clathrocoilona are previously known; the tally is imprecise because some species are probably redundant, others misas- signed to genera such as Stromatoporella. The char- acteristic, extreme structural variability of Clathroco- ilona species makes comparison and identification dif- ficult. Clathrocoilona vexata n. sp. is distinguished by very narrowly spaced skeletal elements, 9 to 14 lam- inae and 8 to 13 pillars per 2mm; most Clathrocoilona species average around 5 to 6 laminae and pillars per 2mm. Only Clathrocoilona saginata (Lecompte, 1951) (Frasnian; Belgium) displays comparable spacing, with 9 to 14 laminae and 6 to 10 pillars per 2 mm. C. saginata differs from C. vexata n. sp. in its more reg- ularly arranged laminae, fewer astrorhizal foramina, and much more pronounced and persistent mamelons. This new species was earlier referred to Clathrocoilona cf. C. saginata by Stearn (1983). Another distinctive feature of C. vexata n. sp. is the alternation of zones of thin versus thick skeletal ele- ments (laminae and pillars). Similar thickness alter- nation is also exhibited by Clathrocoilona solida Ya- vorsky, 1955, C. solida (Hall and Whitfield, 1873, re- described by Stock, 1984) and C. saginata (Lecompte), and to a lesser degree by C. crassitexta (Lecompte, 1951), C. crassum (Yavorsky, 1963), C. obliterata (Le- compte, 1951), and C. spissa (Lecompte, 1951) (but strongly present in C. spissa of Zukalova, 1971). In C. vexata n. sp. and these other species the thickness al- ternation is pronounced, yet similar variation can be found in many, if not most species of Clathrocoilona. Areas of good preservation in tangential sections of C. vexata n. sp. show small circular voids 10-20 wm across and distributed randomly (PI. 11, fig. 1). One of us (ECP) postulates that these, among other criteria, are evidence that the microstructure is irregularly mi- croreticulate, a microstructure described by Stock (1989) as akosmoreticulate. The other (CWS) would call this microstructure largely cellular, but the dis- tinction between the two is mostly semantic. The voids or pores in tangential section would then be described by the former as microgalleries and by the latter as cellules. This porous skeletal material does not appear to have been secreted uniformly but originally was separated by skeletal elements of compact tissue. A much wider range of microstructures occurs, however, in C. vexata n. sp. This range (from cellular to melan- ospheric to tubulate to ordinicellular to tripartite to fibrous to compact) can be interpreted as caused by: 1) diagenetic filling of the voids that define the micro- structure, or 2) to an original broad range of secreted skeletal material, or 3) to a combination of both. Vertical sections (Pl. 11, figs. 2, 3) may show ver- tically elongate or tubular voids separated by similar fine skeletal tissue that would be called micropillars by one of us (ECP). Fine horizontal elements cross these voids, but whether they are solid plates (microlaminae) or rods (microcolliculi) is uncertain. Certain states in- terpreted as diagenetic by ECP exhibit a tangled mass of tubular voids and intervening skeletal material (PI. 11, fig. 4). This is the microstructure recognized by Kossareva (1976) as “felted” (referred to as vermicu- lated herein). Further diagenetic alteration is postu- lated to result in coarsely fibrous microstructure and ultimately compact skeletal material (Pl. 11, fig. 5). In another diagenetic state, the vermiculated microstruc- ture becomes “blocky” and in tangential section ap- pears to be composed of melanospheres (PI. 11, figs. 6, 7). In the opinion of CWS these myriad micro- structures may not all be derived from originally akos- moreticulate microstructure, but indicate that the skel- etal material as originally secreted may have locally been cellular or ordinicellular, locally compact or fi- brous, and locally tubulate. Very locally the laminae of this species are tripartite or ordinicellular (Pl. 11, fig. 8). In C. vexata n. sp. cellular or akosmoreticulate microstructure only de- velops in the skeletal elements thicker than 40 um. Only laminae of about this thickness or greater can accommodate a single row of cellules/microgalleries 20 um high. Where the slim partitions between the cellules are not preserved, the laminae appear to be tripartite. In the opinion of ECP, this local develop- ment of tripartite structure is fortuitous and a chance result of microreticular alignment, and therefore not analagous to the tripartite laminae of the Stromato- porellida. A wide range of microstructures has been ascribed to other species of Clathrocoilona. Galloway (1957) and Galloway and St. Jean (1957) described the genus as coarsely maculate with thick tripartite laminae. The tangential section of C. fibrosa (Galloway and St. Jean, 1957; pl. 22, fig. 3b) shows a porous microstructure similar to that of C. vexata n. sp. The “‘coarse irregular maculae”’ of Galloway and St. Jean are areas of altered tubulate microstructure. Kossareva’s (1976) descrip- tion of C. abeona indicates a wide range of micro- structures as noted above. Kossareva described lami- nae as cellular or joined by micropillars, apparently similar to the ordinicellular laminae of C. vexata n. 30 BULLETIN 349 sp. Zukalova (1971) described microstructures as finely tubulate or cellular/porous; her illustrations resemble the tubulate tissue of C. vexata n. sp. Tubulate micro- structures are also noted by Stock (1982) in C. involuta Stock, 1982 and Birkhead (1967) in C. subclathrata and in species he assigned to Stromatoporella (eg., S. indubia Birkhead), which should be transferred to Clathrocoilona. The microstructure of C. vexata n. sp. suggests that the genus includes species with a very broad range of microstructures. One of us (ECP) attributes this range to diagenetic modification of an originally pervasive akosmoreticulate microstructure; the other (CWS) at- tributes it to variability in the original pattern of skel- etal secretion. In recognition of this variability (re- gardless of origin), we both of us agree that microstruc- ture should not be used as a taxonomic criterion in assigning species to Clathrocoilona. The example of the range of microstructures found in C. vexata n. sp. can be used as a guide in interpreting the variety of skeletal material that may occur in other species of this genus. The macrostructural criteria on which Clath- rocoilona is defined are fully satisfactory in assigning species. Etymology.—Latin vexata, vexacious or trouble- some; referring to the confounding structural vari- ability characteristic of species belonging to this genus. Occurrence. — Blue Fiord Formation, lower member, Ellesmere Island; vicinity type section (seven speci- mens), Vendom Fiord (two specimens); lower Emsian (dehiscens Zone). Family HERMATOSTROMATIDAE Nestor, 1964 Genus TRUPETOSTROMA Parks, 1936 Type species. — Trupetostroma warreni Parks, 1936. Trupetostroma sp. Plate 12, figures 3,4 Description. —Skeleton laminar, highly undulate. Surface not preserved, but apparently bearing large, broad mamelons. Vertical section: Laminae thick, tripartite, contin- uous, broadly undulate, consistently parallel; aggregate thickness 0.10-0.16 mm, consisting of median clear (hollow) zone 0.04-—0.06 mm thick, bordered above and below by microlaminae 0.03-0.05 mm thick, ex- terior locally thickened; spaced very regularly, 5 to 6 laminae per 2 mm, average 5.5 (n=10); rarely inter- rupted by small foramina about 0.1 mm across; a few (generally thicker) laminae display third median mi- crolamina over limited lengths. Pillars commonly spool-shaped, thick 0.06-0.15 mm (commonly 0.08- 0.10 mm), spreading and thickening broadly to meet laminae; mostly randomly offset between successive laminae, locally superposed over 2 to 4 laminae; spaced variably, 5 to 8 per 2 mm average 6.3 (n=20), locally missing for lengths up to 0.1 cm; skeletal material gen- erally solid (?compact microstructure), but a few pillars appear to be hollow (as laminae), vaguely vacuolate, or as if composed of vertical fibrils. Dissepiments com- mon, not abundant, small, shallowly convex, very thin 0.01 mm, probably mostly removed by diagenesis; commonly bridging laminar foramina, towards ma- melon axes, or within anomalously large galleries. Ma- melons large, broad, vertically persistent; indicated in part by pillars crowding, thickening and becoming more strongly superposed; astrorhizal canals undefined. Mi1- crostructure ambiguous (due to poor preservation), probably compact. Rare, small vacuoles may occur at pillar-lamina junctions, or at thickened regions of ex- ternal microlaminae. Tangential section: Mamelons prominent, marked by large, well-defined bull’s-eyes of concentric laminae; astrorhizae imperceptible. Laminae thick, dense, ir- regular bands with scattered vacuoles. Pillars short, thick (0.08-0.20 mm across), isolated vermiform strands or dots (mostly irregular), rarely linking or co- alescing. Microstructure apparently compact. Astro- rhizae absent. Material.—Two specimens, one partially dolomi- tized, the second severely dolomitized (Bathurst Is- land), identified as 7rupetostroma sp. and represented by hypotype GSC 108884 (PI. 12, figs. 3,4). Two ad- ditional specimens, poorly preserved and identified as Trupetostroma sp.?, are questionably assigned to this species and represented by hypotype GSC 108885 (not illustrated). Discussion.—The basic concept of 7rupetostroma embraces species with thick, pronouncedly tripartite laminae, thick, spool-shaped, superposed pillars, gen- erally vacuolate microstructure, and common cyst-like dissepiments (cf. Parks, 1936; Stock, 1982). Bathurst Island Trupetostroma sp. herein departs somewhat from the norm by demonstrating poor pillar superposition and comparatively wide laminar spacing. Its mamelon development is comparatively strong, and the total absence of definable astrorhizal canals is unusual. Both dissepiments and skeletal vacuoles are comparatively few, but their scarcity may be due to diagenetic loss. Trupetostroma dominantly occurs in rocks of Give- tian to Frasnian age (e.g., Lecompte, 1952; Galloway and St. Jean, 1957; Zukalova, 1971; Stearn, 1975b). Only a few species are known from Eifelian strata (e.g., T. spatiosum, T. cf. schelomense , T. ramulosum of Yavorsky, 1963; Kuznetsk Basin, Mamontovo Hori- zon, mid-Eifelian). No definitively Lower Devonian species are previously known. Two species described by Lessovaya (1970) as T. globosum and T. magnifica, DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN 31 from the Bursykhirmanian Horizon (lowest Lochko- vian) of Uzbekistan, are incorrectly assigned to 7ru- petostroma; they show a definite microreticulate mi- crostructure, and more plausibly belong to either Par- allelostroma or Coenostroma. A species quite similar to 7rupetostroma sp. herein is Trupetostroma(?) sp. of Fagerstrom (1982), from the lower Detroit River Group, southwestern Ontario. The Arctic and Ontario species have very similar laminar and pillar spacings, both lack obvious astrorhizae, and in both pillar-vacuoles and dissepiments are poorly developed. Dissimilarities include stronger pillar su- perposition in the Ontario species, and more promi- nent mamelons and thicker compound laminae in the Arctic form. For both the Arctic and Ontario species, the material presently known is too scarce and poor to draw firm conclusions, but from the available evidence aclose relationship is plausible. The correlation of Prosh and Stearn (1993) suggests that the Detroit River Tru- petostroma(?) sp. of Fagerstrom (1982) is Late Emsian (probably serotinus Zone). Two additional, poorly preserved specimens from the Upper Emsian portion of the Blue Fiord Formation at Vendom Fiord, Ellesmere Island, are questionably included here as Trupetostroma sp.? The Vendom Fiord specimens display similar laminar dimensions and spacing to the younger Bathurst Island Trupetostroma sp., but have substantially thickened pillars and, con- sequently, very little open gallery space. In both the Bathurst Island and Vendom Fiord forms, the material is too poor and meager to determine if the they are conspecific variants or separate species. For biostrati- graphic purposes (Text-fig. 3), the Vendom Fiord oc- currence is treated as a questionable range extension of Trupetostroma sp. down into the upper Emsian (in- versus-serotinus Zones). Occurrence. —Northeastern Bathurst Island, un- named limestone formation, lower 100 m; highest Em- sian/basal Eifelian (undifferentiated patu/us Zone). Trupetostroma sp.?: Vendom Fiord, Ellesmere Island, Blue Fiord Formation, upper member; upper Emsian (inversus-serotinus Zones). Order STROMATOPORIDA Stearn, 1980 Family STROMATOPORIDAE Winchell, 1867 Genus STROMATOPORA Goldfuss, 1826 Type species. —Stromatopora concentrica Goldfuss, 1826. Stromatopora polaris (Stearn, 1983) Plate 14, figure 5 Ferestromatopora jacquesensis Galloway. Stearn and Mehrotra, 1970, p. 20, pl. 5, figs. 5, 6. Ferestromatopora polaris Stearn, 1983, p. 551-552, figs. SA-C, SE; 1989, fig. 1D. Stromatopora polaris Stearn, 1990, p. 507, fig. 3.8. 2Stromatopora aff. polaris Stearn. Webby, Stearn and Zhen, 1993, p. 158, 161, figs. 5F, 23A—-F, 24A. Material. — Thirty-six specimens, ranging from poor to well preserved. Hypotype GSC 108886. Other spec- imens listed in Appendix 3. Discussion. —Stromatopora polaris has been previ- ously recorded in the Arctic Islands from the lower Blue Fiord Formation (Stearn, 1983) and from Upper Lochkovian reefal blocks in the Stuart Bay Formation, Bathurst Island (Stearn, 1990). The species is described in full in Stearn (1983). The new specimens of S. polaris recognized here, from the Blue Fiord and Disappointment Bay for- mations, extend the species’ range through most of the Emsian Stage, up to the serotinus Zone. Specimens from the upper Eids Formation, Ellesmere Island, are lowest Emsian, possibly uppermost Pragian. The full species range in the Arctic is therefore upper Loch- kovian to upper Emsian. Specimens from the unnamed formation on Truro and Bathurst Islands (undifferentiated patulus Zone; highest Emsian/basal Eifelian), identified as Stroma- topora hensoni n. sp., are similar to S. polaris, and probably represent a descendant species. Occurrence. —Eids Formation, upper 100 m; Elles- mere Island, Sér Fiord (five specimens); lowest Emsian (dehiscens Zone), possibly uppermost Pragian. Blue Fiord Formation, lower member; Ellesmere Island, vi- cinity type section (10 specimens), Eids Fiord (nine specimens), Vendom Fiord (two specimens), Sor Fiord (one specimen); lower Emsian (dehiscens Zone). Dis- appointment Bay Formation, reefs low in formation, Truro Island (five specimens); mid-Emsian (inversus Zone). Blue Fiord Formation, upper member; Elles- mere Island, vicinity type section (four specimens); upper Emsian (serotinus Zone). Stromatopora cf. S. hupschii (Bargatzky, 1881) Plate 13, figures 1,2 cf. Caunopora hupschii Bargatzky, 1881, p. 290. cf. Stromatopora hupschii (Bargatzky). Nicholson 1886, pl. 10, figs, 8, 9; 1891, p. 176; Lecompte, 1952, p. 268, pl. 52, figs. 2, 2a, 2b; Yavorsky, 1955, p. 106, pl. 56, figs. 3, 4. Stromatopora cf. S. hupschii (Bargatzky). Galloway, 1960, p. 627- 628, pl. 74, figs. 2a, 2b; Stearn, 1983, p. 552-553, figs. 5D, SF. Description. —Skeleton domal to hemispherical, up to 15 cm diameter. Surface undulate, but without de- fined mamelons or perceptible astrorhizae. Vertical section: Thick, dominantly cassiculate structural elements; common thin latilaminae. Skeletal elements variable thickness, 0.15—0.30 mm, common- Ww i) ly 0.20 mm; specimen averages 20.6 (GSC 108887, n=20), 19.9 (GSC 108888, n=10), 20.9 (GSC 108889, n=10) mm; network dominantly cassiculate, a merging of short vertical or sub-vertical segments, rare oblique segments, and rare, slightly thicker horizontal seg- ments; short, coalescent coenosteles may occur very locally; coenostroms absent. Galleries circular to ir- regularly vermiform. Dissepiments uncommon, may be locally clustered at specific levels, or about incon- spicuous astrorhizae. Latilaminae conspicuous, 2—4 mm thick, defined by darkened elements or thin sed- iment interlayers. Microstructure coarsely cellular, cel- lules 0.02-0.04 mm diameter. Astrorhizae inconspic- uous. Tangential section: Skeletal elements form tightly- closed, amalgamate network; element thickness 0.15—- 0.25 mm, commonly 0.20 mm; microstructure cellu- lar. Galleries labyrinthine, slightly thinner than ele- ments; rarely circular to sub-circular. Astrorhizae rare, ill-defined clusters of short canal segments, 0.30-0.40 mm diameter. Material.—Six specimens, moderately well pre- served. Hypotypes GSC 108887 to 108889. Discussion. —The systematic assignment of this spe- cies is unchanged from that of Stearn (1983), despite the additional six specimens from the Blue Fiord and Eids Formations. The species Stromatopora hupschii remains no more than a convenient receptacle for spec- imens such as these, with thick structural elements but few other distinguishing features. Occurrence. —Eids Formation, upper 100 m; Elles- mere Island, Sor Fiord (one specimen); lowest Emsian (dehiscens Zone), possibly uppermost Fragian. Blue Fiord Formation, lower member, Ellesmere Island; Eids Fiord (four specimens), Vendom Fiord (one specimen); lower Emsian (dehiscens Zone). Stromatopora hensoni, new species Plate 13, figures 3-5 Diagnosis. —Conspicuously latilaminate; alternating phases of dominantly cassiculate structure and phases with abundant microlaminae; abundant, vertically per- sistent astrorhizae. Description. —Skeleton domical, up to 15 cm di- ameter; surface smooth. Vertical section: Skeletal elements cassiculate; thick- ness variable 0.10-0.25 mm, commonly 0.15 mm, ho- lotype GSC 108890 average 0.16 range 0.10-0.25 (n=20); microstructure finely cellular. Galleries cir- cular to vermiform, 0.10-0.25 mm diameter. Alter- nating phases of cassiculate versus microlaminar struc- ture, subequally thick 3-5 mm, but commonly cassi- BULLETIN 349 culate phases thickest/dominant; latilaminae promi- nent, thick 0.5—1.0 cm, composed of paired cassiculate plus microlaminar phases. Microlaminae thin 0.01 mm, incomplete; variably densely spaced, to as much as 10 to 15 per mm; rare to absent in cassiculate phases; generally poorly preserved. Dissepiments rare to ab- sent. Astrorhizae large, vertically persistent; axial canal 0.40-0.60 mm diameter; lateral canals turning grad- ually to horizontal, 0.20-0.30 mm diameter. Parasitic borings common. Tangential section: Meandriform bands of alternat- ing 1) thicker, darker, labyrinthine elements (cassicu- late phases), and 2) thinner, lighter-toned, diffuse struc- ture (microlaminar phases). Skeletal elements labyrin- thine to vermiform, 0.10-0.20 mm thick; microstruc- ture finely cellular; galleries vermiform to subcircular, occupy less than half total area. Astrorhizae moder- ately large, well-formed; comprise central disordered bundle of axial canals 0.20 mm diameter, extensive radial network of thicker lateral canals 0.30 mm di- ameter; center-to-center spacing roughly 1.0 cm. Material.—Three specimens, moderately well to well preserved. Holotype GSC 108890; paratypes GSC 108891 and GSC 108892. Discussion. —In terms of its structural elements, this new species is similar to Stromatopora polaris (Stearn, 1983). The size and disposition of cassiculate structural elements in both species is very similar, and in S. polaris periodic microlaminae impart banding to the skeleton in vertical section. Stromatopora hensoni n. sp. is distinguished from S. polaris by the gross ar- rangement of its skeletal elements, into alternating phases of cassiculate structure (like S. polaris) and sub- ordinate phases with abundant microlaminae. Its well developed and persistent astrorhizae are also unlike S. polaris, in which astrorhizae are poorly developed. This comparison suggests that S. hensoni n. sp. 1s an im- mediate descendant of S. polaris. This conclusion is supported by the stratigraphic distribution of these spe- cies: S. polaris is last known from the serotinus Zone (Blue Fiord Formation), and S. hensoni n. sp. appears in the succeeding undifferentiated patu/us Zone. Etymology. —To honor Matthew Henson, Arctic ex- plorer, companion of Peary. Occurrence. —Unnamed formation; southeastern Bathurst Island (Dyke Ackland Bay) (two specimens), Truro Island (one specimen); highest Emsian/basal Ei- felian (undifferentiated patu/us Zone). Genus FERESTROMATOPORA Yavorsky, 1955 Type species. — Ferestromatopora krupennikovi Ya- vorsky, 1955. DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN 33 Ferestromatopora cf. F. krupennikovi Yavorsky, 1955 Plate 14, figures 1,2 cf. Ferestromatopora krupennikovi Yavorsky, 1955, p. 109-110, pl. LVIII, figs. 1-5; Yang and Dong, 1979, p. 58, pl. 28, figs. 1, 2. non Ferestromatopora krupennikovi Yavorsky. Fischbuch, 1969, p. 176-177, pl. IX, figs. 1-5. ?Ferestromatopora krupennikovi Yavorsky. Khromych, 1974, p. 52, pl. XIII, figs. 2a, 2b. Description. —Skeleton domal, up to 8 cm diameter. Growth surfaces irregular, but without noticeable ma- melons. Vertical section: A highly irregular network of ver- tical-to-inclined elements and dissepiments, bounded by paralaminae. Paralaminae mostly continuous, un- dulate, thin 0.03-0.04 mm; spaced irregularly 0.3-1.4 mm apart, commonly 0.6—0.8 mm apart. Interlaminar network chaotic, consisting of short, vertical or in- clined elements, 0.06—0.08 mm thick, merging with or bridged by abundant, convex dissepiments, 0.01—0.02 mm thick; where vertical elements abundant, spaced roughly 10 per 2 mm. Microstructure indeterminate. Galleries commonly squarish, arch-roofed, or irregular or sub-round; well-formed galleries 0.25—0.40 mm lat- eral diameter; galleries generally randomly offset, but immediately adjacent to paralaminae may align lat- erally. Basal layers thin, composed of stringy, sinuous, discontinuous vertical elements, and discontinuous paralaminae. Astrorhizae obscure; vertical systems im- perceptible; lateral canals roughly 0.30 mm wide; dis- sepiments large and abundant within astrorhizae. Tangential section: A tightly linked, cassiculate net- work; elements 0.03-0.06 mm thick, only rarely as isolated dots 0.03 mm diameter. Microstructure vaguely cellular. Paralaminae form thin, meandering bands, weak concentric arrangement. Astrorhizal ca- nals numerous, appear as short, straight or simply branched segments, 0.20-0.35 mm wide; canals clus- tered, but otherwise without definable pattern. Material.—One specimen, preservation mediocre. Hypotype GSC 108893. Discussion.—This Blue Fiord specimen resembles Ferestromatopora krupennikovi Yavoysky, 1955 in a number of ways. Its cassiculate structural elements are similar in size and arrangement, and the wide range of spacing of paralaminae is identical. In the original de- scription of the species, Yavorsky (1955) emphasized the cellular shape of the galleries, and characterized their arrangement relative to each other as “‘chess-like order’, in other words alternately offset. In contrast, the galleries of the Blue Fiord specimen are more ran- domly arrayed, and a bit larger than in F. krupennikovi. The astrorhizal systems of the Blue Fiord specimen differ considerably from the type description, having somewhat wider canals, little discernable pattern, and no evident vertical component. Of the few valid species of Ferestromatopora known (Stearn, 1993), all are Middle Devonian. F. krupen- nikovi, the type species of the genus, comes from the Givetian of the Kuznetsk Basin, Russia (Yavorsky, 1955). Therefore the Blue Fiord occurrence consider- ably extends the range of the genus to the lower Emsian. Occurrence. —Ellesmere Island, Eids Fiord; Blue Fiord Formation, lower member; lowest Emsian (de- hiscens Zone). Genus GLYPTOSTROMOIDES Stearn, 1983 Type species. —Glyptostroma simplex Yang and Dong, 1979. Glyptostromoides simplex (Yang and Dong, 1979) Plate 14, figures 3, 4 Glyptostroma simplex Yang and Dong, 1979, p. 66, pl. 36, figs. 7, 8. Glyptostromoides simplex (Yang and Dong). Stearn, 1983, p. 553, 555, figs. 6A-6C. Discussion. —The Blue Fiord Formation occurrence of this species has been described by Stearn (1983). Blue Fiord Glyptostromoides simplex displays a wide range of morphologies, as noted by Stearn (1983). Mor- phological variables include areas of cassiculate versus coenostromal structure, considerable variation in spac- ing of thick coenosteles, and abundance of dissepi- ments. The eleven specimens of G. simplex referred to by Stearn (1983) came from strata low in the Blue Fiord Formation, in the vicinity of the type section. These strata are now regarded as lowest Emsian (dehiscens Zone) (Uyeno, 1990). Addition of the specimens con- sidered here extends the range of Arctic G. simplex up to the serotinus Zone (upper Emsian). Material.—Twelve specimens, moderately well to poorly preserved. Hypotypes GSC 108894, 108895. Other specimens listed in Appendix 3. Occurrence. —Eids Formation, near formation top; Ellesmere Island, Eids Fiord (two specimens); lower Emsian (dehiscens Zone). Blue Fiord Formation, lower member, Ellesmere Island; vicinity type section (seven specimens), Eids Fiord (one specimen); lower Emsian (dehiscens Zone). Blue Fiord Formation, high in upper member; Ellesmere Island, vicinity type section; upper Emsian (serotinus Zone) (one specimen). Blue Fiord Formation, upper member, Vendom Fiord (Ellesmere Island), upper Emsian (inversus + serotinus Zones) (one specimen). 34 BULLETIN 349 Family SYRINGOSTROMELLIDAE Stearn, 1980 Genus SYRINGOSTROMELLA Nestor, 1966 Type species.— Stromatopora borealis Nicholson, 1891. Syringostromella zintchenkovi (Khalfina, 1961) Plate 15, figures 1-3 Stromatopora aff. hupschii (Bargatzky). Ripper, 1937a, p. 186, pl. 8, figs. 7-8. Stromatopora zintchenkovi Khalfina, 1960, p. 327-328, pl. D-3, figs. la, 1b. Syringostromella zintchenkovi (Khalfina). Webby, Stearn and Zhen, 1993, p. 163, figs. 23E-F, 24A-C. Description. —Skeleton laminar, thick; up to 15 cm lateral diameter. Surface not preserved. Vertical section: Thick, persistent coenosteles, abun- dant dissepiments. Coenosteles vertically persistent, parallel to one another, straight or gently sinuous; may branch and coalesce vertically, but not commonly; thick, 0.20-0.40 mm, GSC 108896 range 0.21-0.35 mm average 0.27 mm (n=20), GSC 108897 range 0.20- 0.40 mm average 0.27 mm (n=20); spacing 3 to 6 per 2mm, commonly 4 to 5 per 2 mm, GSC 108896 range 3 to 4 average 3.8 per 2 mm (n=10), GSC 108897 range 4 to 6 average 4.7 per 2 mm (n=10). Short coe- nostromal segments locally present, up to 0.5 cm long, 0.25—0.30 mm thick. Dissepiments very abundant, thin, 0.02 mm; horizontal to gently convex, commonly spanning vertical galleries between coenosteles, but lo- cally up to 0.5 mm long; commonly aligned laterally; vertical spacing 5 to 8 per mm. Microstructure finely cellular. Astrorhizae inconspicuous. Tangential section: Coenosteles form tightly linked, labyrinthine network; galleries sausage-shaped rarely subcircular. Coenosteles 0.20-0.40 mm thick; micro- structure finely cellular. Astrorhizae inconspicuous, evident only as short canal segments, 0.30 mm wide. Material.—Two specimens. Hypotypes GSC 108896, 108897. Moderately well preserved. Discussion. —Syringostromella zintchenkovi (Khal- fina, 1961) is previously known from the Salair of south- central Russia, Krekovski horizon (upper Lochkovi- an). The Blue Fiord Formation specimens conform very closely to the original description of Khalfina (1961): coenosteles 0.17-0.32 mm, commonly 0.21- 0.29 mm thick, rarely thicker, spacing 2 to 3 per mm. Khalfina (1961) characterized the “‘zooidal tubes”’ (in- tercoenostele galleries) as somewhat narrower than the coenosteles themselves, the same condition as in the Blue Fiord specimens. Although Khalfina (1961) gave dimensions for the astrorhizae, they are described as small and poorly-defined; in the Blue Fiord specimens astrorhizae are scarcely apparent. Syringostromella zintchenkovi may be confused with certain specimens of Salairella prima Khromych, 1971, which both occur in the lower Emsian portion of the Blue Fiord Formation. In vertical section, the coeno- steles of Salairella prima are generally thinner and more vertically coalescent, but a few specimens of S. prima have coenosteles approaching the condition of Syringostromella zintchenkovi, and if dissepiments are unusually abundant, the species may be difficult to distinguish. Ultimately, Syringostromella and Salai- rella must be discriminated in tangential section; Syringostromella forms a tight labyrinthine network, and in Salairella round coenotubes predominate. Blue Fiord Syringostromella zintchenkovi 1s similar to Syringostromella labyrinthea Stearn, 1990 from Lochkovian reefal blocks on Bathurst Island (Stearn, 1990). In S. labyrinthea, however, the coenosteles are thinner and more closely spaced. Stearn (1990) syn- onomized S. /abyrinthea and S. cf. zintchenkovi tenuis Khalfina, 1961 of Khromych (1976), a form found in the Emsian of eastern Siberia. S. zintchenkovi tenuis itself was established by Khalfina (1961), for specimens younger than S. zintchenkovi s.s, from the Maloba- chatski horizon (Pragian, overlies the Krekovski ho- rizon), and with thinner and more closely spaced coe- nosteles than S. zintchenkovi. It therefore appears that in the arctic Lower Devonian, older Syringostromella has the thinner elements, and in Siberia the opposite occurs, with thinner elements in younger forms of Syr- ingostromella. As such, this Syringostromella zintch- enkovi-labyrinthea assemblage of species is of dubious biostratigraphic value. Syringostromella zintchenkovi has also recently been recognized from the lower Pragian Lilydale Limestone of Victoria, Australia (Webby ef a/., 1993). Occurrence.—Blue Fiord Formation, lower mem- ber; Ellesmere Island, formation type area (one spec- imen), Sér Fiord (one specimen); lower Emsian (de- hiscens Zone). Genus SALAIRELLA Khalfina, 1961 Type species. —Salairella multicea Khalfina, 1961. Salairella prima Khromych, 1971 Plate 15, figures 4, 5; Plate 16, figures 1-5 Salairella prima Khromych, 1971, p. 132, pl. 36, figs. la, 1b; Stearn, 1983, p. 555-556, figs. 6D-6G; Webby and Zhen, 1993, p. 342, 344, figs. 9C-E, 12A, B. Material. — Twenty-nine specimens. Hypotypes GSC 108898 to 108901. Other specimens listed in Appendix 3. Poor to exceptionally well preserved. Discussion. —The Blue Fiord Formation occurrence of this species is described by Stearn (1983). The new specimens of Salairella prima recognized herein allow for some broadening of the concept of this species. Of the 29 specimens assigned to S. prima, 22 DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN 35 of them conform to the description of Stearn (1983). Four of the new specimens exhibit a greater abundance of dissepiments, but in all other features conform to the earlier description (Stearn, 1983). In vertical sec- tion (Pl. 16, fig. 1), the abundant dissepiments are ar- ranged like tabulae, ascending the vertical galleries be- tween the coenosteles. The dissepiments are small and very thin, so that in many specimens their scarcity may be due in some degree to diagenetic removal. As noted by Stearn (1983), the majority of specimens of S. prima demonstrates only obscure and inconspic- uous astrorhizae. Two of the new specimens, however, exhibit well formed, although widely scattered astro- rhizae (Pl. 16, fig. 2). In these rare specimens the as- trorhizae form radiating lateral branches 0.20-0.25 mm across. Specimens of S. prima in the original collection of Stearn (1983) came from low in the Blue Fiord For- mation, in lower Emsian strata (dehiscens Zone). The new specimens extend the species’ range in the Arctic up to the upper Emsian (serotinus Zone). The type of S. prima is from the Neludimskaya suite in the Omu- levski Range of Severo-Vostok, eastern Siberia (Khro- mych, 1971). Although Khromych (1971) indicated the age of these rocks as Middle Devonian (reiterated in Stearn, 1983), in a later publication (Khromych, 1976) the Neludimskaya suite is shown to be Early Devonian (probably Pragian) in age. S. prima has re- cently been described (Webby and Zhen, 1993) from the Jesse Limestone, New South Wales, Australia, where it is Emsian, probably early Emsian age. A few of the new specimens of S. prima preserve microstructure in very fine detail (Pl. 16, figs. 3-5). For the most part, the microstructure of S. prima is finely cellular (e.g. Pl. 16, fig. 3). In some specimens (most notably GSC 108898, Pl. 16, fig. 5), however, the “‘cel- lules” are strongly aligned at certain levels, such that the microstructure becomes orthoreticulate. Stearn (1983) made a similar observation, noting the micro- structure of S. prima as cellular with local traces of microreticulation. Webby and Zhen (1993) have also studied the microstructure of S. prima, suggesting that it is probably microreticulate rather than cellular. The distinction between skeletal tissue in which the cellules are aligned vertically and that in which micropillars and microcolliculi define the microarchitecture is a subtle one. In the recent phylogeny of the Stromato- porida proposed by Stearn (1993) microreticulate gen- era are grouped in the Order Syringostromatida and cellular genera are placed in the Stromatoporida. Sa- lairella is placed here in the Stromatoporida because the microstructure of most of its species is dominantly cellular. If Salairella prima is interpreted as typically microreticulate, then its ancestry would be interpreted by Stearn (1993) as within the Syringostromatida and distant from that of the Stromatoporida. The species appears to show both microreticulate and cellular mi- crostructure. If microstructure is taken as the sole cri- terion of membership in the Syringostromatida and the species is dominantly microreticulate, then S. pri- ma should be transferred to the genus Parallelopora Bargatzky within this order. The ambiguity of the microstructure of S. prima is made no clearer when specimens are viewed in tan- gential section (Pl. 16, figs. 3,4). Stearn (1993) has sug- gested that microreticulate and cellular microstructure may be discriminated when viewed in tangential sec- tion, by noting the character of microelements at the edge of skeletal (macro)galleries. Coenosteles with pro- truding microcolliculi at gallery edges should produce a ragged boundary; in contrast, coenosteles of cellular microstructure should have smooth gallery edges. Un- fortunately such ragged edges may be easily corroded in diagenesis. Specimens of Salairella prima exhibit both these features in tangential section (Pl. 16, figs. 3,4), implying the genuine coexistence of both mi- crostructures. Detailed assessment of the classification of the Stro- matoporida and the position of Salairella prima in it is beyond the scope of this study. If S. prima can be shown to be basically more microreticulate than cel- lular, then it should be transferred to a genus within the Syringostromatida. If, on the other hand, the sug- gestion of microreticulation is the result of occasional superposition of cellules (rather than a basic post-and- beam microarchitecture) then it can be retained within the Stromatoporida. Occurrence. —Eids Formation, upper 100 m; Elles- mere Island, Eids Fiord (one specimen), S6r Fiord (five specimens); lower Emsian (dehiscens Zone), possibly uppermost Pragian. Blue Fiord Formation, Ellesmere Island; lower member, lower 150 m; vicinity type sec- tion (10 specimens); Eids Fiord (five specimens); S6r Fiord (two specimens); Vendom Fiord (three speci- mens); lower Emsian (dehiscens Zone). Disappoint- ment Bay Formation, reefs near base of formation; Truro Island (one specimen), Lowther Island (one specimen); mid-Emsian (inversus Zone). Blue Fiord Formation, upper member, near top; Ellesmere Island, vicinity type section; upper Emsian (serotinus Zone) (one specimen). Order SYRINGOSTROMATIDA Bogoyavlenskaya, 1969 Family SYRINGOSTROMATIDAE Lecompte, 1951 Genus ATOPOSTROMA Yang and Dong, 1979 Type species.—Atopostroma tuntouense Yang and Dong. 1979. 36 BULLETIN 349 Atopostroma distans (Ripper, 1937b) Plate 18, figure 5 Actinostroma stellulatum var. distans Ripper, 1937b, p. 12, pl. 2, figs. 1,2. Trupetostroma cf. T. ideale Birkhead. Stearn and Mehrotra, 1970, p. 16-17, pl. 5, figs. 1, 2. Atopostroma tuntouense Yang and Dong. Stearn, 1983, p. 548-549, figs. 4E-H. Atopostroma distans (Ripper). Webby and Zhen, 1993, p. 346-348; figs. 11A-D, 12E; Webby, Stearn and Zhen, 1993, p. 171, 173, figs. 27F, 28A-D. Material. — Four specimens. Hypotype GSC 108902. Preservation mediocre to moderately well preserved. Discussion. —The Blue Fiord Formation occurrence of this species has been previously described by Stearn (1983) as Atopostroma tuntouense Yang and Dong, 1979. The four specimens of Atopostroma distans re- corded here, including one from the Bird Fiord For- mation, display the following measurements: laminar spacing 7 to 11 per 2 mm (averages n=10 each spec- imen: 8.4, 8.4, 9.5, 9.9); pillar spacing 8 to 10 per 2 mm (averages n=10 each specimen: 9.2, 8.6, 8.7, 9.0); laminar thickness 0.02—0.04 mm:; pillar thickness 0.08— 0.10 mm. Blue Fiord specimens earlier assigned to Atopostro- ma tuntouense by Stearn (1983) have been referred to Atopostroma distans (Ripper) (Webby and Zhen, 1993). In Australia, 4. distans is known from the Emsian Jesse Limestone, New South Wales (Webby and Zhen, 1993), and from the Buchan’s Cave Limestone, Victoria (bas- al Emsian) (Webby et al., 1993). As noted in Webby and Zhen (1993) and Webby et al. (1993), specimens referred to Atopostroma tuntouense from the upper Lochkovian Stuart Bay Formation of Bathurst Island (Stearn, 1990) are not conspecific with Blue Fiord spec- imens. Occurrence. — Blue Fiord Formation, lower member, Ellesmere Island; Eids Fiord (two specimens), vicinity formation type section (one specimen); lower Emsian (dehiscens Zone). Bird Fiord Formation, near forma- tion base; Ellesmere Island, Bird Fiord (near type lo- cality) (one specimen); uppermost Emsian/basal Eife- lian (undifferentiated patu/us Zone). Genus HABROSTROMA Fagerstrom, 1982 Type species. —Stromatopora proxilaminata Fager- strom, 1961. Habrostroma proxilaminatum (Fagerstrom, 1961) Plate 17, figures 1-5 Stromatopora proxilaminata Fagerstrom, 1961, p. 8, pl. 1, figs. 4-6. Habrostroma proxilaminata (Fagerstrom). Fagerstrom, 1982, p. 13- 15, pl. 1, figs. 7, 8. Description. —Skeleton hemispherical to subspheri- cal, up to 10 cm diameter. Growth surfaces with barely perceptible mamelons of very low relief, astrorhizae present. Vertical section: Structure a network of microlam- inae and much thicker, diffuse pillars. Microlaminae continuous, very gently undulate, may coalesce later- ally; 0.01-0.03 mm thick; readily obscured by diagen- esis, may locally appear as a chain of fine dots or beads; spacing variable, 10 to 20 per 2 mm, average 14.6 (n=11). Latilamination irregular, marked by dark per- ithecal layers following growth interruption, thickness very variable, 2 mm to 2 cm. Pillars stout, 0.10-0.15 mm thick; mostly column-like, or may expand gently upward to coalesce at overlying microlamina, forming coenostroms; mostly vertical, some gently inclined; commonly confined to interlaminar space, irregularly offset, less than half total pillars superposed over two coenostroms, rarely superposed over 3 to 4; spaced 7 to 11 per 2 mm, average 8.4 (n=17). Pillar microstruc- ture orthoreticular to clinoreticular, but preservation generally poor. Galleries commonly circular or oval (long-axis horizontal), mostly 0.2—0.3 mm across, rare- ly horizontally elongate to 0.5 mm or more. Astrorhizal systems well developed, large and vertically persistent; no axial canal, lateral canals 0.15—0.20 mm wide; in- clined tabulae common along lateral branches, other- wise absent in skeleton. Tangential section: A tangled, irregular network ex- hibiting very little open gallery space. Laminae (coe- nostroms) thick, diffuse, concentric bands. Microlam- inae imperceptible. Pillars form irregular, intercon- nected chains, 0.10-—0.15 mm thick; only very rarely as isolated irregular dots between laminae. Microstruc- ture cellular (=irregular microreticular). Astrorhizae conspicuous, common; canals 0.20-0.25 mm diame- ter; comprised of about 8 to 10 radiating lateral canals, no axial canal; center-to-center distance fairly consis- tent, about 6 mm; present at mamelon summits, but not confined to them. Material. —Seventeen specimens, moderately well to poorly preserved. Hypotypes GSC 108903 to 108905. Other specimens listed in Appendix 3. Discussion. —Habrostroma proxilaminatum is pre- viously known from the Devonian of southwestern Ontario (Fagerstrom, 1961, 1982), and the Arctic spec- imens differ very little from Fagerstrom’s descriptions. Fagerstrom (1982) distinguished H. proxilaminatum from two similar species (H. densilaminatum and H. jformosense) primarily on the basis of microlaminar spacing, recognizing a continuum of variation between the three species, with H. proxilaminatum interme- diate in position, having microlaminar spacing on the order of 15 to 22 per 2 mm. The spacing of the Arctic specimens falls slightly lower (10 to 20 per 2 mm, DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN Bi/, average 14.6), thus approaching the field of H. densi- laminatum. The poorer preservation of the Arctic specimens suggests some diagenetic loss of microlam- inae, biasing the measurements towards artificially low values. Fagerstrom’s (1961) original description of the species cites a wider pillar spacing (2 to 3 per 1 mm), but his photographs (1961, 1982) demonstrate pillar spacing comparable to that of the arctic specimens. In all other significant features the arctic and southern Ontario specimens are identical: pillar thickness and arrangement; gallery shape, size, and disposition; as- trorhizal size, abundance, spacing, lack of axial canal, and exclusivity of tabulae. In the Devonian of Ontario, H. proxilaminatum is long-ranging, occurring in the Detroit River Group through the upper Dundee Formation, and possibly in the underlying Bois Blanc Formation (Fagerstrom, 1982). In the Arctic, H. proxilaminatum is known to occur at two localities, in the lower Disappointment Bay Formation on Truro Island, in strata of mid-Em- sian age, and in the lower unnamed formation on Bath- urst Island, in strata spanning the Emsian—Eifelian boundary. Its observed range in the Arctic is therefore from the inversus Zone through the undifferentiated patulus Zone (Text-figure 3). The Arctic occurrence of H. proxilaminatum further strengthens the Blue Fiord- to-Detroit River correlation of Prosh and Stearn (1993), in which common stromatoporellid species are inter- preted to give an inversus-age for the Bois Blanc For- mation, and a serotinus-age for much of the Detroit River Group. By this correlation, the inversus—patulus range of Arctic H. proxilaminatum corresponds to the Bois Blanc through Detroit River interval of its range in Ontario. Also, the addition of H. proxilaminatum to the correlation indicates that a major migration of Arctic stromatoporoids to the midcontinent took place during late Emsian time. Oddly, H. proxilaminatum is absent from our large Blue Fiord Formation collections, yet at Truro Island one-half of the specimens collected are H. proxilami- natum. That this is no sampling artifact is show by the large discrepancy in abundance of samples. It is inter- preted to indicate a clear environmental preference. The depositional setting of Truro Island is quite unlike the large, shelf-margin reefs of the type Blue Fiord on Ellesmere Island; rather, very small reef knolls in a restricted, platformal setting are indicated for the Dis- appointment Bay Formation on Truro Island. Fager- strom (1961) noted that H. proxilaminatum is the most abundant stromatoporoid species in the Formosa reefs (lower Detroit River Group) of southern Ontario. Occurrence.—Truro Island; Disappointment Bay Formation, small reef knolls near base of formation; mid-Emsian (inversus Zone) (15 specimens). Bathurst Island, Dyke Ackland Bay; unnamed limestone for- mation, lower 100 m; highest Emsian/basal Eifelian (undifferentiated patulus Zone) (two specimens). Genus PARALLELOPORA Bargatzky, 1881 Type species.—Parallelopora ostiolata Bargatzky, 1881. Parallelopora campbelli Galloway and St. Jean, 1957 Plate 18, figures 1-4 Parallelopora campbelli Galloway and St. Jean, 1957, p. 208-210, pl. 19, figs. 3a, b. Description. —Skeleton tabular, up to 10 cm diam- eter. Growth surface undulating, but without defined mamelons. Vertical section: An irregular network of branching and anastomosing coenosteles, with only short, dis- continuous coenostroms. Coenosteles 0.05-0.15 mm thick, most commonly 0.10 mm thick; mostly verti- cally aligned, continuous over | to 4 coenostromal bands, or branching and coalescing; locally in small areas of irregular network vertical fabric is suppressed; spacing regular, 7 to 10 per 2 mm; specimen GSC 110314, 7 to 10 per 2 mm average 8.3 (n=20); spec- imen GSC 110315, 7 to 9 per 2 mm average 7.7 (n=10); specimen GSC 110316, 7 to 10 per 2 mm average 8.4 (n=10). Coenostele microstructure orthoreticulate, mi- crogalleries 0.04 mm diameter. Horizontal fabric sup- pressed; locally coenosteles may merge laterally to pro- duce short coenostromal segments about 5 mm long, 0.10-—0.20 mm thick; where partial coenostroms occur in sequence, spacing roughly 6 to 8 per 2 mm. Dis- sepiments present, not abundant; common within and adjacent to astrorhizae; elsewhere dissepiments very flat, joining laterally over short lengths locally sug- gesting microlaminae. Latilaminae absent, although 3 to 5 mm thick bands of strongly aligned coenosteles alternating with cassiculate network suggest growth pe- riodicity. Galleries subequally vertically elongate, roughly 0.15 mm wide by 0.30-0.40 mm long, or round, 0.15—0.25 mm diameter. Astrorhizae irregular, verti- cally persistent; canals wide, 0.25—0.40 mm; unasso- ciated with any structural deflection within skeleton. Tangential section: A dense network with little open gallery space. Horizontal fabric imperceptible, little suggestion of concentric banding apparent. Coeno- steles chainlike, joined, not separate; thickness highly variable, 0.05—0.25 mm, commonly 0.10 mm, locally fused into thick clumps; occuping over half total area. Microgalleries 0.04 mm diameter. Galleries either short vermiform areas, 0.10 mm wide, or round coenotubes 0.10 mm diameter. Astrorhizae common; inconsis- 38 BULLETIN 349 tently formed, may consist of a loose central bundle of a few axial canals, surrounded by 3 to 6 irregular radiating lateral canals; lateral canal width variable, 0.20-0.30 mm; center-to-center spacing 5-8 mm. Material.—Five specimens, moderately well pre- served. Hypotypes GSC 110314 to 110316. Discussion. —Parallelopora campbelli is previously known from the Devonian of Indiana and Ohio (Gal- loway and St. Jean, 1957). It is, unfortunately, known from only a few specimens, and Galloway and St. Jean’s description is based on the unique holotype. Despite this, the Arctic specimens are identical to Galloway and St. Jean’s description in every significant regard. Pillar thickness and spacing are identical in both the Arctic specimens and the holotype, and they have com- parable microstructure. The discontinuous coeno- stroms of the Arctic specimens compare to what Gal- loway and St. Jean (1957, p. 209) described as “‘vari- able and discontinuous” laminae, and thicknesses and spacings are the same. Similarly, Galloway and St. Jean (1957, p. 209) noted ‘‘discontinuous microlaminae and curved plates”, described as dissepiments herein. In tangential section, the holotype and Arctic specimens show the same subequal distribution of vermicular and round galleries (= coenotubes). Of particular note are the odd astrorhizae and complete lack of mamelons. In their systematic description of the species, Gal- loway and St. Jean (1957, p. 210) mentioned the oc- currence of only the holotype, from the Jeffersonville Limestone near Kent, Indiana. Elsewhere (p. 80) they noted its rare occurrence in the ““Columbus limestone” at Kelleys Island, Ohio. This latter mention is impor- tant, because it permits a more precise appraisal of the age of P. campbelli. In a detailed study of the stro- matoporoids of Kelleys Island, Bjerstedt and Feld- mann (1985) indicated that Galloway and St. Jean’s “Columbus” stromatoporoids in fact come from the upper Lucas Formation (Detroit River Group). P. campbelli is not recorded in Fagerstrom’s (1982) large Detroit River Group collections. P. campbelli therefore constitutes another element in a major exchange of stromatoporoid species between the Arctic and the midcontinent during the late Em- sian. The limited occurrence of P. campbelli in both the Arctic and midwest precludes precise correlation, but the ages of these known occurrences are closely comparable. Following from the stromatoporellid- based correlation of Prosh and Stearn (1993), the upper Lucas Formation is either of serotinus or more prob- ably patulus Zone assignment. The Arctic specimens come from one locality dated as undifferentiated pa- tulus Zone (patulus + partitus Zones; cf. Text-fig. 3), but on the basis of regional stratigraphy (Prosh and Stearn, 1993), believed most probably to be of patulus- age. The foregoing suggests that the Arctic and midwest specimens are of identical age, but too much uncer- tainty remains concerning their respective stratigraph- ic ranges. It is also quite possible that the range of Arctic P. campbelli extends down into the serotinus Zone; the Blue Fiord Formation at this level is dolo- mitic and poorly fossiliferous, and we have few stro- matoporoids collected from this interval. Occurrence. — Bathurst Island, Dyke Ackland Bay; unnamed formation, lower 100 m; highest Emsian/ basal Eifelian (undifferentiated patulus Zone). Appendix 1.—Collection localities. Num- ber on text- fig. 1 location of sections* latitude N longitude W 1 AD e202" 86°49'31” 2 AA 77°20'2” 86°46'26” 3 AB Te2012" 86°41'11" 4 AC 77°19'56” 86°36'26" 5 BC 77°14'21" 86°19'3” 6 CA THATS 85°45'28” 7 CB TI S!0" S525 15127 8 (Be TILVG29” 85°47'9” 9 CD TALIS" 85°47'37” 10 CF 77°14'28" 85°51'26” 11 CH 77°16'7" 85°51'26” 12 IA 77°16'59” 86°1'26” 13 IB ISOM 85755157" 14 IC 77°16'59” 86°7'8” 15 ID TITAS 85°57'9” 16 Castle bioherm 77°16'0” 85°45'0” Ly EA TSM E2 8 85°7'8" 18 EC 77°17'34" 85°9'31" 19 K Dell eleo a 85°8'34” 20 Bird Fiord Type 77°12'30" 86°35'20” 21 (no section) 77°16'0" 85°54'0" 22 ED 77°29'41” 83°54'17" 23 U-9 77°20'0" 86°36'26” 24 FA 77°36'19” 88°29'3” 25 KB 76°37'36" 87°38'48” 26 GA 77°44'28" 83°29'3” 27 GB 77°42'42" 83°30'0” 28 HA 76°35'2” 83°42'23” 29 HB 77°31'59” 83°48'6” 30 Loc. 43 TVASDT3S. 83°45'43” 31 Vendom | 77°39'45” 83°31'0” 32 Vendom 4 T7235" 83°45'93” 33 Lowther Island 74°33'30" 97°29'30” 34 Truro Island 75°23'45” 97°13'10" 35 B22 (Bathurst I.) 76°29'14” 98°14'42” 36 B42A (Bathurst I.) UBssve 4 99°8'37” * Letters (e.g., AD) designate measured sections in Smith (1984). DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN 39 Appendix 2.— Catalogue of type numbers and locations of type specimens. Specimens in type collection of the Geological Survey of Canada, Ottawa. GSC # 108175 108176 108177 108852 108853 108854 108855 108856 108857 108858 108859 108860 108861 108862 108863 108864 108865 108866 108867 108868 108869 108870 108871 108872 108873 108874 108875 108876 108877 108878 108879 108880 108881 108882 108883 108884 108885 108886 108887 108888 108889 108890 108891 108892 108893 108894 108895 108896 108897 108898 108899 108900 108901 108902 108903 108904 108905 110314 110315 110316 species name Stromatoporella perannulata Stictostroma gorriense Stictostroma gorriense Actinostroma sp. A Plectostroma salairicum Plectostroma salairicum Aculatostroma cf. A. kaljanum Clathrodictyon ellesmerense Clathrodictyon ellesmerense Clathrodictyon ellesmerense Gerronostroma septentrionalis Gerronostroma septentrionalis Gerronostroma septentrionalis Gerronostroma septentrionalis Petridiostroma sp. Petridiostroma sp. Atelodictyon cf. A. solidum Anostylostroma anfractum Anostylostroma anfractum Anostylostroma anfractum Anostylostroma anfractum Pseudoactinodictyon conglutinatum Pseudoactinodictyon conglutinatum Schistodictyon? sp. Stictostroma gorriense Stictostroma gorriense Stictostroma gorriense Stictostroma? nunavutense Stictostroma? nunavutense Stictostroma? nunavutense Stromatoporella perannulata Stromatoporella perannulata Clathrocoilona vexata Clathrocoilona vexata Clathrocoilona vexata Trupetostroma sp. Trupetostroma sp.? Stromatopora polaris Stromatopora cf. S. hupschii Stromatopora cf. S. hupschii Stromatopora cf. S. hupschii Stromatopora hensoni Stromatopora hensoni Stromatopora hensoni Ferestromatopora cf. F. krupennikovi Glyptostromoides simplex Glyptostromoides simplex Syringostromella zintchenkovi Syringostromella zintchenkovi Salairella prima Salairella prima Salairella prima Salairella prima Atopostroma distans Habrostroma proxilaminatum Habrostroma proxilaminatum Habrostroma proxilaminatum Parallelopora campbelli Parallelopora campbelli Parallelopora campbelli type hypo hypo hypo hypo hypo hypo hypo hypo hypo hypo holo para para para hypo hypo hypo holo para para para holo para hypo hypo hypo hypo holo para para hypo hypo holo para para hypo hypo hypo hypo hypo hypo holo para para hypo hypo hypo hypo hypo hypo hypo hypo hypo hypo hypo hypo hypo hypo hypo hypo formation Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord unnamed unnamed unnamed Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord unnamed unnamed unnamed unnamed Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord unnamed Blue Fiord Disappointment Bay Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord unnamed unnamed unnamed Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Blue Fiord Disappointment Bay Disappointment Bay Disappointment Bay unnamed unnamed unnamed interval lower 100 m lower 100 m 75.9 m 70 m 86 m 103.4 m base lower 100 m 91.2 m 5.9m 163.4 m base upper mem. ca. 200 m lower 100 m lower 100 m lower 100 m lower 100 m 120 m lower 100 m lower 100 m 157.4m 157.4m 11.4m 29.4m 11.4m lower 100 m upper mem. basal 33.9m 29.4m 11.4m base lower 100 m lower 100 m 140 m upper mem. 1403 m 117m 34.5m 5.9m 137.9m lower 100 m 29.4m 102 m basal basal basal lower 100 m lower 100 m lower 100 m loca- tion — WNWoOmMhHhWWWAW INN Www HOH Ww WNW sh lat. north 77°20'2" 77°16'27" 77°16'27" 75°17'0" 75°3'51" 75°3'51" 77°42'42" TATA. TPP 77°44'28" 77°20'2" 77°19'56" 77°42'42" 77°17'9" 76°36'19" 77°39'45" 76°37'36" 76°29'14" 76°29'14" 76°29'14" 76°29'14" 77°14'21" 77°14'21" UI Oe TING 20" 77°16'27" Tee Oued TI20/24 GA N9S62 TAOS CY 77°17'34" 77°17'34" Wie2 02s 1f°20124 M2028 76°29'14” 77°39'45” Tar23\45< 77°20'2” 77°20'2” qi-2012" 75°17'0" 753/510 Uesayey TAS20'25 77°39'45" 77°14'21" 77°17'34" TRS! FAM Cidesliali2 Me2le SS Tie20y Wie20n7 75°23'45" 75°23'45" 75°23'45" Ussevonly ISON TS23151e long. west 86°49'31” 85°47'9” 85°47'9” OTANW3OF 99°8'37" 99°8'37" 83°30'0" 85°45'28”" 85°57'9” 83°29'3” 86°41'11" 86°36'26”" 83°30'0" 85°55'57” 88°29'3” 83°31'0" 87°38'48" 98°14'42” 98°14'42" 98°14'42" 98°14'42” 86°19'3” 86°19'3” 85°51'12" 85°47'9" 85°47'9” 86°41'11" 86°41'11" 86°36'26" 86°36'26" 8529/31" 85°9'31" 86°41'11" 86°46'26" 86°41'11” 98°14'42" 83°31'0" 97°13'10" 86°41'11” 86°46'26” 86°41'11" 97°11'30" 99°8'37”" 99°8'37" 86°46'26” 83°31'0" 86°19'3” 85°9'3 1” 8525779" 85°55'57” 85°8'34” 83°45'43” 86°46'26" 86°46'26" 97°13'10" 97°13'10" 97°13'10" 99°8'37” 99°8'37" 99°8'37" 40 BULLETIN 349 Appendix 3.—Collecting locations and stratigraphic position of specimens identified in this study (other than type specimens). Specimens in general collections of the Geological Survey of Canada, Ottawa. Species specimen no. formation interval location Aculatostroma cf. A. kaljanum 110-132 Blue Fiord 76-89 m 1 Clathrodictyon ellesmerense 110-115 Blue Fiord 11.4m 3 Clathrodictyon ellesmerense 110-119 Blue Fiord 67.7 m 2 Clathrodictyon ellesmerense 110-142 Blue Fiord 29.4 m 2 Clathrodictyon ellesmerense 110-263 Blue Fiord Om 28 Clathrodictyon ellesmerense 110-267 Blue Fiord Om 28 Clathrodictyon ellesmerense 110-289 Blue Fiord 5.9m 13 Clathrodictyon ellesmerense 110-176 Blue Fiord 35m 6 Clathrodictyon ellesmerense 110-286 Blue Fiord 44.5m 15 Clathrodictyon ellesmerense 110-135 Blue Fiord 8.9m 2 Clathrodictyon ellesmerense 110-177 Blue Fiord near base 2 Clathrodictyon ellesmerense 110-248 Blue Fiord 39.6 m 12 Clathrodictyon ellesmerense 110-212 Blue Fiord near base 2 Clathrodictyon ellesmerense 110-288 Blue Fiord 12m 14 Clathrodictyon ellesmerense 110-x Blue Fiord near base 1 Clathrodictyon ellesmerense 111-15 Blue Fiord upper mem. 31 Clathrodictyon ellesmerense 129-10 Disappointment Bay basal 34 Clathrodictyon ellesmerense 111-24 Bird Fiord near base 20 Clathrodictyon ellesmerense 110-372 unnamed lower 100 m 36 Gerronostroma septentrionalis 110-128 Blue Fiord lower 100 m 9 Gerronostroma septentrionalis 110-172 Blue Fiord near base 4 Gerronostroma septentrionalis 110-179 Blue Fiord near base 4 Gerronostroma septentrionalis 110-189 Blue Fiord near base 4 Gerronostroma septentrionalis 110-191 Blue Fiord near base 4 Gerronostroma septentrionalis 110-238 Blue Fiord 124.3 m 18 Gerronostroma septentrionalis 110-241 Blue Fiord 64.4 m 13 Gerronostroma septentrionalis 110-272 Blue Fiord 44.5m 15 Gerronostroma septentrionalis 110-327 Blue Fiord 21m 9 Gerronostroma septentrionalis 110-204 Blue Fiord 17m 6 Gerronostroma septentrionalis 110-309 Blue Fiord 13m 9 Gerronostroma septentrionalis 110-361 Blue Fiord 13m 9 Gerronostroma septentrionalis 110-363 Blue Fiord 77.1m 10 Gerronostroma septentrionalis 110-364 Blue Fiord 77.1m 10 Gerronostroma septentrionalis 110-221 Blue Fiord 124.3 m 18 Gerronostroma septentrionalis 110-247 Blue Fiord 64.4 m 13 Gerronostroma septentrionalis 110-264 Blue Fiord 39.6 m 12 Gerronostroma septentrionalis 110-156 Blue Fiord 11.4m 3 Gerronostroma septentrionalis 110-342 Blue Fiord lower 100 m 27 Gerronostroma septentrionalis 110-308 Eids uppermost 23 Petridiostroma sp. 111-1 Blue Fiord base upper mem. 27 Atelodictyon cf. A. solidum 120-6 Blue Fiord +100 m 25 Pseudoactinodictyon conglutinatum 111-19 Bird Fiord near base 20 Stictostroma gorriense 110-195 Blue Fiord Om 8 Stictostroma gorriense 111-1 Blue Fiord upper mem. 27 Stictostroma gorriense 111-17 Blue Fiord upper mem. 27 Stictostroma? nunavutense 110-111 Blue Fiord +20 m 2 Stictostroma? nunavutense 110-180 Blue Fiord lower 100 m 4 Stictostroma? nunavutense 110-190 Blue Fiord lower 100 m 4 Stromatoporella perannulata 110-236 Blue Fiord 73.5m 22 Stromatoporella perannulata 120-3 Blue Fiord 163 m 24 Stromatoporella perannulata 120-7 Blue Fiord 175m 25 Clathrocoilona vexata 110-152 Blue Fiord 11.4m 3 Clathrocoilona vexata 110-182 Blue Fiord 35m 6 Clathrocoilona vexata 110-322 Blue Fiord 70.3 m Ait Clathrocoilona vexata 110-331 Blue Fiord 70.3 m 27 Clathrocoilona vexata 110-356 Blue Fiord 104.7 m 10 Clathrocoilona vexata 110-362 Blue Fiord 104.7 m 10 Stromatopora polaris 110-117 Blue Fiord +100 m 2 Stromatopora polaris 110-120 Blue Fiord +100 m 2 Stromatopora polaris 110-129 Blue Fiord 29.4m 2 DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN 41 Appendix 3.—Continued. Species specimen no. formation interval location Stromatopora polaris 110-139 Blue Fiord 154.4 m 2 Stromatopora polaris 110-143 Blue Fiord +10m 3 Stromatopora polaris 110-153 Blue Fiord 63.2 m 3 Stromatopora polaris 110-160 Blue Fiord 63.2 m 3 Stromatopora polaris 110-184 Blue Fiord +15m 1 Stromatopora polaris 110-202 Blue Fiord 86.7 m 8 Stromatopora polaris 110-213 Blue Fiord 71.8 m 6 Stromatopora polaris 110-225 Blue Fiord 1403.3 m 5 Stromatopora polaris 110-231 Blue Fiord 1200.3 m 5 Stromatopora polaris 110-233 Blue Fiord 64.4 m 13 Stromatopora polaris 110-251 Blue Fiord 39.6 m 12 Stromatopora polaris 110-252 Blue Fiord 21 Stromatopora polaris 110-274 Blue Fiord 1403.3 m 5) Stromatopora polaris 110-286 Blue Fiord 44.5m 15 Stromatopora polaris 110-299 Blue Fiord 1200.3 m 5 Stromatopora polaris 110-305 Blue Fiord 85.6 m 10 Stromatopora polaris 110-314 Blue Fiord 137.9 m 19 Stromatopora polaris 110-317 Eids 78.8 m below top 17 Stromatopora polaris 110-318 Eids 67.2 m below top 17 Stromatopora polaris 110-320 Blue Fiord 79.1 m 10 Stromatopora polaris 110-324 Blue Fiord 75.9 m 27 Stromatopora polaris 110-333 Blue Fiord 70.3 m 27 Stromatopora polaris 110-338 Eids 65 m below top 17 Stromatopora polaris 110-343 Eids 67.2 m below top 17 Stromatopora polaris 110-347 Blue Fiord 53.8 m 11 Stromatopora polaris 110-354 Blue Fiord 79.1 m 10 Stromatopora polaris 110-367 Eids 85.4 m below top 17 Stromatopora polaris 110-368 Blue Fiord 53.8 m 11 Stromatopora polaris 129-2 Disappointment Bay basal 34 Stromatopora polaris 129-6 Disappointment Bay basal 34 Stromatopora polaris 129-7 Disappointment Bay basal 34 Stromatopora polaris 129-22 Disappointment Bay basal 34 Stromatopora cf. S. hupschii 110-166 Blue Fiord 63.2 m 3 Stromatopora cf. S. hupschii 110-291 Blue Fiord 66.2 m 29 Stromatopora cf. S. hupschii 110-304 Eids 71.7 m below top 17 Glyptostromoides simplex 110-113 Blue Fiord 8.9m 7) Glyptostromoides simplex 110-201 Blue Fiord 77.1 m 7 Glyptostromoides simplex 110-319 Blue Fiord 146.6 m 10 Glyptostromoides simplex 110-329 Blue Fiord 146.6 m 10 Glyptostromoides simplex 110-341 Eids uppermost 23 Glyptostromoides simplex 110-353 Eids uppermost 23 Glyptostromoides simplex 110-357 Blue Fiord 146.6 m 10 Glyptostromoides simplex 110-358 Blue Fiord +50 m 9 Glyptostromoides simplex 110-359 Blue Fiord 66.3 m 11 Glyptostromoides simplex 110-371 Blue Fiord 21.0 m 9 Salairella prima 110-112 Blue Fiord 46.6m 2 Salairella prima 110-125 Blue Fiord 11.4m 3 Salairella prima 110-131 Blue Fiord 50.5 m 9 Salairella prima 110-134 Blue Fiord 154.4m 2 Salairella prima 110-183 Eids 98.4 m below top 4 Salairella prima 110-188 Blue Fiord 154.1 m 1 Salairella prima 110-214 Blue Fiord 71.8 m 6 Salairella prima 110-237 Blue Fiord 86m 15 Salairella prima 110-250 Blue Fiord 86m 15 Salairella prima 110-254 Blue Fiord 86m 15 Salairella prima 110-271 Blue Fiord +100 m 18 Salairella prima 110-301 Blue Fiord 1403.3 m 5 Salairella prima 110-309 Blue Fiord 21m 9 Salairella prima 110-316 Blue Fiord 146.6 m 10 Salairella prima 110-334 Blue Fiord 70.3 m 27 Salairella prima 110-337 Blue Fiord 70.0 m 6 Appendix 3.—Continued. BULLETIN 349 Species specimen no. formation interval location Salairella prima 110-339 Eids 60.6 m below top 17 Salairella prima 110-345 Eids +65 m below top 17 Salairella prima 110-348 Eids 60.6 m below top 17 Salairella prima 110-349 Eids +65 m below top 17 Salairella prima 110-365 Blue Fiord +50 m 9 Salairella prima 110-366 Blue Fiord +100 m 32 Salairella prima 110-367 Eids 85.4 m below top 17 Salairella prima 129-28 Disappointment Bay basal 34 Salairella prima Lowther Disappointment Bay lower 50 m 33 Atopostroma distans 110-116 Blue Fiord basal 2 Atopostroma distans 110-175 Blue Fiord basal 16 Atopostroma distans 111-25 Bird Fiord basal 20 Habrostroma proxilaminatum 129-3 Disappointment Bay basal 34 Habrostroma proxilaminatum 129-4 Disappointment Bay basal 34 Habrostroma proxilaminatum 129-5 Disappointment Bay basal 34 Habrostroma proxilaminatum 129-8 Disappointment Bay basal 34 Habrostroma proxilaminatum 129-12 Disappointment Bay basal 34 Habrostroma proxilaminatum 129-14 Disappointment Bay basal 34 Habrostroma proxilaminatum 129-15 Disappointment Bay basal 34 Habrostroma proxilaminatum 129-17 Disappointment Bay basal 34 Habrostroma proxilaminatum 129-19 Disappointment Bay basal 34 Habrostroma proxilaminatum 129-23 Disappointment Bay basal 34 Habrostroma proxilaminatum 129-24 Disappointment Bay basal 34 Habrostroma proxilaminatum 129-27 Disappointment Bay basal 34 Habrostroma proxilaminatum 110-215 unnamed lower 100 m 36 Habrostroma proxilaminatum 110-226 unnamed lower 100 m 36 Parallelopora campbelli 110-244 unnamed lower 100 m 36 Parallelopora campbelli 110-278 unnamed lower 100 m 36 REFERENCES CITED Bargatzky, A. 1881. Die Stromatoporen des rheinischen Devons. Decheniana, Verhandlungen Naturhistorischer Vereins der Preussisch- en, Rheinlande Westfalens, vol. 38, pp. 233-304. Birkhead, P. K. 1967. Stromatoporoidea of Missouri. Bulletins of American Pa- leontology, vol. 52, pp. 19-110. Bjerstedt, T. W., and Feldmann, R. M. 1985. Stromatoporoid paleosynecology in the Lucas Dolostone (Middle Devonian) on Kelleys Island, Ohio. Journal of Paleontology, vol. 59, pp. 1033-1061. Bogoyavlenskaya, O. V. 1965. Predstaviteli stromatopor iz Clathrodictyidae i Actinos- tromatidae v silure i devona Urala. Paleontologicheskii Zhurnal, 1965, no. 1, pp. 39-43. 1969. K postroeniyu klassifikatsii stromatoporoidei. Paleonto- logicheskii Zhurnal, 1969, no. 4, pp. 12-27. 1977. Novye stromatoporaty rannego 1 srednego devona vos- tochnogo sklona Urala. in Novye vidy drevnikh rastenii 1 bespozvonochnykh SSSR, Akademiya Nauk SSSR, Pa- laeontologicheskii Institut, vol. 4. pp. 14-18, 168, 169. Bogoyavlenskaya, O. V., and Khromych, V. G. 1985. Ukazatel’rodov i vidov stromatoporat. Akademiya Nauk SSSR Sibirskoe otdelenie, Institut Geologii i Geofiziki, Trudy 545, 104 pp. Brice, D. 1982. Brachiopodes du Dévonien inférieur et moyen des for- mations de Blue Fiord et Bird Fiord des iles arctiques canadiennes. Geological Survey of Canada, Bulletin 326, 175 pp. Doderlein, L. 1892. Uber Petrostroma schulzei n. gen. n. sp. der Kalksch- wamme. Verhandlungen der Deutche Zoologischen Ge- sellschaft, vol. 2, pp. 143-145. Fagerstrom, J. A. 1961. The fauna of the Middle Devonian Formosa Reef lime- stone of southwestern Ontario. Journal of Paleontology, vol. 35, pp. 1-48. 1982. Stromatoporoidea of the Detroit River Group and adja- cent rocks (Devonian) in the vicinity of the Michigan Ba- sin. Geological Survey of Canada Bulletin 339, 81 pp. Fischbuch, N. R. 1969. Devonian stromatoporoids from central Alberta, Canada. Canadian Journal of Earth Sciences, vol. 6, pp. 167-185. Fligel, E. 1958. Pseudoactinodictyon n. gen. und Actinodictyon Parks (Stromatoporoidea). Senckenbergiana Lethaea, vol. 39(3/ 4), pp. 135-151. 1959. Die gattung Actinostroma Nicholson und ihre Arten (Stro- matoporoidea). Annalen des Naturhistorischen Museums in Wein, vol. 63, pp. 90-273. 1974. Stromatoporen aus dem Schwelmer Kalk (Givet) des Sauerlandes (Stromatoporen aus dem deutschen Palao- zoikum 1). Palaontologische Zeitschift, vol. 48, pp. 149- 187. Fligel, E., and Fligel-Kahler, E. 1968. Stromatoporoidea (Hydrozoa palaeozoica). Fossilium Ca- talogus, Pt. I: Animalia 115/116, W. Junk, s’Gravenhage, 681 pp. DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN 43 Galloway, J. J. 1957. Structure and classification of the Stromatoporoidea. Bul- letins of American Paleontology, vol. 37, pp. 345-480. 1960. Devonian stromatoporoids from the lower Mackenzie val- ley of Canada. Journal of Paleontology, vol. 34, pp. 620— 636. Galloway, J. J., and St. Jean, J. 1957. Middle Devonian Stromatoporoidea from Indiana, Ken- tucky and Ohio. Bulletins of American Paleontology, vol. 37, pp. 25-308. Goldfuss, G. A. 1826. Petrafacta Germaniae, 1. Arnz and Company, Diisseldorf, 252 pp. Goodbody, Q. H. 1989. Stratigraphy of the Middle Devonian Bird Fiord and equivalents, Canadian Arctic Archipelago. Bulletin of Ca- nadian Petroleum Geology, vol. 37, pp. 48-82. Hall, J., and Whitfield, R. P. 1873. Description of new species of fossils from the Devonian of Iowa. New York State Cabinet Annual Report, vol. 23, pp. 223-239. Jones, B. 1982. Lower Devonian brachiopods from the “Bird Fiord” For- mation of the Vendom Fiord area, southern Ellesmere Island, Arctic Canada. Journal of Paleontology, vol. 56, pp. 1375-1396. Jones, B., and Boucot, A. J. 1983. Spiriferids from the Lower Devonian strata of southwest Ellesmere Island, Arctic Canada. Journal of Paleontology, vol. 57, pp. 327-346. Kendall, A. C. 1977. Fascicular optic-calcite: a replacement of bundled asci- cular carbonate cements. Journal of Sedimentary Petrol- ogy, vol. 47, pp. 1056-1062. Kerr, J. W. 1974. Geology of the Bathurst Island Group and Byam Martin Island, Arctic Archipelago. Geological Survey of Canada Memoir 378, 152 pp. 1976. Stratigraphy of central and eastern Ellesmere Island, Part II]. Upper Ordovician (Richmondian), Silurian and De- vonian. Geological Survey of Canada Bulletin 260, 55 pp. 1977. Cornwallis fold belt and the mechanism of basement up- lift. Canadian Journal of Earth Sciences, vol. 14, pp. 1374— 1401. Khalfina V. K. 1961. Stromatoporoidea, Devonskaya sistema. in Biostratigra- fiya paleozoya Sayano-Altaiskoi gornoi oblasti, 2, Srednii paleozoi, Sibirskogo Nauchno-Issledovatel’skogo. L.L. Khalfin, ed., Trudy Instituta Geologii, Geofiziki Miner- al’nogo Syr’ya, vol. 20, pp. 245-256, 323-349. 1968. Onovykh rodakh stromatoporoidei iz devonskikh otlozh- enii yuz okrainy Kuzbassa i Altaya. in Novye materialy po stratigrafii i paleontologii nizhnego 1 srednego paleo- zoya Zapadnoi Sibiri. V.A. Ivaniya, ed.,Trudy Tomskogo Ordena Trudovogo Krasnogo Znameni Gosudarstven- nogo Universiteta im V. V. Kuibysheva, Seriya Geologi- cheskaya, vol. 202, pp. 147-152. Khalfina, V. K., and Yavorsky V. I. 1973. Klassifikatsiya stromatoporoidei. Paleontologicheskil Zhurnal, 1973, no. 2, pp. 19-34. Khodalevich, A. N., Breivel’ M. G., Antsygin, N. Y., Bogoyavlen- skaya, O. V., Breivel’, I. A., Zenkova, G. G., Nasedkina, V. A., Petrova, L. G., Shurygina, M. V. and Yanet, F. E. 1982. O granitse nizhnego i srednego devona na vostochnom sklone urala. in Biostratigrafiia Pogranichnykh Otlozhenii Nezhnego i Srednego Devona. B.S.Sokolov and M.A.Rzhonsnitskaya, eds., Trudy polevoi sessii mezh- dunarodnoi podkomissii po stratigrafi1 devona. Samar- kand, USSR (1978), Akademiia Nauk SSSR, pp. 148-151. Khromych, V. G. 1971. Ostromatoporoideiakh neludimskoi svity (Severo- Vostok SSSR). in Rugosy in stromatoporoidei paleozoya SSSR. V.A.Ivanovsky, ed., Trudy Il, Akademiya Nauk SSSR, Sibirskoi otdeleniya, Vsesoyouznogo simpoziuma po izucheniiu iskoraymyck korallov SSSR, pp. 125-134. 1976. Stratigrafiya devonskikh otlozhernii i stromatoporoidei Khrebta Ulakhan-Sis. Akademya Nauk SSSR, Sibirskoe Otdelenei, Trudy Instituta Geologii i Geofiziki, vol. 302, 104 pp. 1984. Klass Hydrozoa, podklass Stromatoporata. in Paleozoi yugo-vostoka Zapadno-Sibirskoi plity. A.V.Kan’gin, ed., Akademia Nauk SSSR, Sibirskoe Otdelenie, Trudy Insti- tuta Geologii i Geofiziki 568, pp. 113-122, 192-194, 210- Di3% Kossareva, E. G. 1976. K revizii rodov Clathrocoilona 1 Synthetostroma (Stro- matoporoidea). Paleontologicheskii Zhurnal, 1976, no. 1, pp. 19-26. Kuhn, O. 1927. Zur Systematik und Nomenklatur der Stromatoporen. Zentralblatt Mineralogie Geologie und Paldontologie, Ab- teilungen B, pp. 546-551. Lecompte, M. 1951. Les stromatoporoides du Dévonien moyen et supérieur du Bassin de Dinant. Part 1, Institut Royal des Sciences Naturelles, Belgique, Mémoire 116, pp. 1-215. 1952. Les stromatoporoides du Dévonien moyen et supérieur du Bassin de Dinant, Part 2, Institut Royal des Sciences Naturelles, Belgique, Mémoire 117, pp. 219-359. Lessovaya, A. I. 1970. Stromatoporoidei devona Zeravshanskogo khrebta. in Biostratigrafiya osadochnykh obrazovanii Uzbekistana. T.S.Shayakubov, ed., Ministerstvo Geologii UzSSR ‘*‘Tashkentgeologiya”’ vol. 9, pp. 74-109. 1972. Novye siluriiskie i nizhnedevonskie stromatoporoidei Yuzhnogo Tyan’-Shanya. in Novye dannye po faune pa- leozoya i mesozoya Uzbekistana. A. S. Masumov and R. N. Abdullaev, eds., Akademya Nauk Uzbekskoi SSR, In- stitut Geologii i Geofiziki, Tashkent, pp. 46-52. Mallamo, M., Stearn, C. W. and Geldsetzer, H. H. J. 1993. Nutrients, oceanic upwelling and paleoproductivity: pos- sible influences on late Devonian stromatoporoid platform reefs. SEPM 1993 Meeting, Stratigraphic Record of Global Change, Abstracts with Program, State College, Pennsyl- vania. Mayr, U. 1980. Stratigraphy and correlation of Lower Paleozoic forma- tions, subsurface of Bathurst and adjacent smaller islands, Canadian Arctic Archipelago. Geological Survey of Can- ada Bulletin 306, 52 pp. Mayr, U., Packard, J. J., Goodbody, Q. H., Okulitch, A. V., Rice, R. J., Goodarzi, F. and Stewart, K. R. 1994. The Phanerozoic geology of south Ellesmere Island and north Kent Island, Canadian Arctic Archipelago. Geolog- ical Survey of Canada Bulletin 470, 288 pp. McLaren, D. J. 1963. Southwestern Ellesmere Island between Goose Fiord and Bjorne Peninsula. in Geology of the north-central part of the Arctic Archipelago, Northwest Territories (Operation 44 BULLETIN 349 Franklin). Y.O. Fortier et al., eds., Geological Survey of Canada, Memoir 320, pp. 310-338. Mori, K. 1968. Stromatoporoids from the Silurian of Gotland, Part 1. Stockholm Contributions in Geology, vol. 19, 100 pp. Nestor, H. 1964. Stromatoporoidei ordovika 1 llandoveri Estoni. Akade- miya Nauk Estonskoi SSR, Institut Geologii, Tallinn, 112 pp. 1966. Stromatoporoidei venloka 1 ludlova Estonii Academiya Nauk Estonskoi SSR, Institut Geologii, Tallinn, 87 pp. 1976. Rannepaleozoiskie stromatoporoidei basseina reki Moiero (Sever Sibireskoi platformy). Akademiya Nauk Estonskoi SSR, Institut Geologii, Tallinn, 95 pp. Nicholson, H. A. 1873. On some new species of Stromatopora. Annals and Mag- azine of Natural History, Series 4, vol. 12, pp. 89-95. 1886. A monograph of the Britsh stromatoporoids, part 1. Monograph of the Palaeontographical Society, vol. 39, pp. 1-130. 1887. On some new and imperfectly known species of stroma- toporoids. Annals and Magazine of Natural History, series 5, vol. 19, pp. 1-17. 1891. A monograph of the British stromatoporoids, part 3. Monograph of the Palaeontographical Society, vol. 44, pp. 159-202. Nicholson H. A. and Murie, J. 1878. On the minute structure of Stromatopora and its allies. Linnean Society, Journal of Zoology, vol. 14, pp. 187- 246. Oliver, W. A. 1976a. Noncystimorph colonial rugose corals of the Onesque- thaw and Lower Cazenovia stages (Lower and Middle De- vonian) in New York and adjacent areas. United States Geological Survey, Professional Paper 869, 156 pp. 1976b. Biogeography of Devonian rugose corals. Journal of Pa- leontology, vol. 50, pp. 365-373. Oliver, W. A., and Pedder, A. E. H. 1989. Onigins, migrations, and extinctions of Devonian Rugosa on the North American plate. Association of Australasian Palaeontologists Memoir 8, pp. 231-237. Ormiston, A. R. 1967. Lower and Middle Devonian trilobites of the Canadian Arctic Islands. Geological Survey of Canada, Bulletin 153, 147 pp. Parks, W. A. 1936. Devonian stromatoporoids of North America, part 1. Uni- versity of Toronto Studies, Geological Series, vol. 39, 125 pp. Pedder, A. E. H. 1982. New Zlichovian (Early Devonian) rugose corals from the Blue Fiord Formation of Ellesmere Island. Current Re- search, Part C, Geological Survey of Canada, Paper 82- 1C, pp. 71-82. 1983. New Dalejan (Early Devonian) rugose corals from the Blue Fiord Formation of southwestern Ellesmere Island, North- west Territories. Current Research, Part B, Geological Sur- vey of Canada, Paper 83-1B, pp. 223-236. Pocta, P. 1894. Bryozoaires, Hydrozoaires et partie des Anthozoaires. in Systéme Silurien du centre de la Bohéme I, Recherches Paléontologiques, J.Barrande, ed., vol. 8, Prague, pp. |- 230. Prosh, E. C. 1989. A Lower Devonian reef sequence and fauna, Disappoint- ment Bay Formation, Canadian Arctic Islands. unpub- lished Ph. D. thesis, University of Western Ontario, Lon- don, ON., 446 pp. Prosh, E. C., Lesack, K. A., and Mayr, U. 1988. Devonian stratigraphy of northwestern Devon Island, Dis- trict of Franklin. Current Research, Part D, Geological Survey of Canada, Paper 88-1D, pp. 1-10. Prosh, E. C., and Stearn, C. W. 1993. Early Devonian age of the Detroit River Group, inferred from Arctic stromatoporoids. Canadian Journal of Earth Sciences, vol. 30, pp. 2465-2474. Qi, Wentong, and Stearn, C. W. 1993. Stromatoporoids from the Slave Point Formation (Give- tian) at Evie Lake, northeast British Columbia, Canada. Acta Scientarium Naturalium (Peiching ta hsueh hsueh pao), vol. 29, pp. 715-728. Ripper, E. 1937a. The stromatoporoids of the Lilydale Limestone, Part 2, Syringostroma, Stromatopora, and other genera. Royal Society of Victoria Proceedings, vol. 49, pp. 178-205. 1937b. On the stromatoporoids of the Buchan district, Victoria. Royal Society of Victoria Proceedings, vol. 50, pp. 11-45. Rzhonsnitskaya, M. A. 1988. Buiostratigraphic scheme of the Devonian of the Russian Platform. in Devonian of the World. Proceedings of the 2nd International Symposium on the Devonian System. N.J. McMillan, et a/., eds., vol. III, Canadian Society of Petroleum Geologists Memoir 14, pp. 691-701. St. Jean, J. 1962. Micromorphology of the stromatoporoid genus Stictostro- ma Parks. Journal of Paleontology, vol. 36, pp. 185-200. 1986. Lower Middle Devonian Stromatoporoidea from Empire Beach, southern Ontario, Canada. Journal of Paleontol- ogy, vol. 60, pp. 1029-1055. Smith, G. P 1984. Stratigraphy and paleontology of the Lower Devonian se- quence, southwest Ellesmere Island, Arctic Archipelago. unpublished Ph. D. Thesis, McGill University, Montreal, 328 pp. Smith, G. P., and Stearn, C. W. 1982. The Devonian carbonate-clastic sequence on southwest Ellesmere Island, Arctic Canada. in Arctic Geology and Geophysics. A.F.Embry and H.R. Balkwill, eds., Canadian Society of Petroleum Geologists, Memoir 8, pp. 147-154. 1987a. Anatomy and evolution of a Lower Devonian reef com- plex, Ellesmere Island, Arctic Canada. Bulletin of Cana- dian Petroleum Geology, vol. 35, pp. 251-262. 1987b. The Devonian Disappointment Bay Formation of Elles- mere Island, Arctic Canada. Bulletin of Canadian Petro- leum Geology, vol. 35, pp. 460-468. Stearn, C. W. 1972. The relationship of the stromatoporoids to the sclero- sponges. Lethaia, vol. 5, pp. 369-388. 1975a. The stromatoporoid animal. Lethaia, vol. 8, pp. 89-100. 1975b. Stromatoporoid assemblages, Ancient Wall reef complex (Devonian), Alberta. Canadian Journal of Earth Sciences, vol. 12, pp. 1631-1667. 1980. Classification of the Paleozoic stromatoporoids. Journal of Paleontology, vol. 54, pp. 881-902. 1983. Stromatoporoids from the Blue Fiord Formation (Lower Devonian) of Ellesmere Island, Arctic Canada. Journal of Paleontology, vol. 57, pp. 539-559. DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN 45 1989a. Intraspecific variability and species concepts in Palaeo- zoic stromatoporoids. Association of Australasian Pa- laeontologists, Memoir 8, pp. 45-50. 1989b. Specks in the microstructure of Palaeozoic stromato- poroids. Association of Australasian Palaeontologists, Memorr 8, pp. 143-148. 1990. Stromatoporoids from the allochthonous reef facies of the Stuart Bay Formation (Lower Devonian), Bathurst Island, Arctic Canada. Journal of Paleontology, vol. 64, pp. 493- 510. 1991. A revision of Anostylostroma, Atelodictyon, and related genera (Paleozoic Stromatoporoidea). Journal of Paleon- tology, vol. 65, pp. 611-622. 1992. Petridiostroma, a new name for Petrostroma Stearn, 1991, not Petrostroma Déderlein, 1892. Journal of Paleontology, vol. 66, p. 531. 1993. Revision of the order Stromatoporida. Palaeontology, vol. 36, pp. 201-229. 1995a. The type species of Stictostroma Parks, 1936 (Porifera, Stromatoporoidea). Journal of Paleontology, vol. 69, pp. 20-27. 1995b. Stictostroma Parks, 1936 (Porifera Stromatoporoidea): proposed conservation and designation of S. gorriense Stearn, 1995 as the type species. Bulletin of Zoological Nomenclature, vol. 52, pp. 18-20. Stearn, C. W., and Mehrotra, P. N. 1970. Lower and Middle Devonian stromatoporoids from northwestern Canada. Geological Survey of Canada Paper 70-13, 43 pp. Stearn, C. W., and Pickett, J. 1994. The stromatoporoid animal revisited: building the skel- eton. Lethaia, vol. 27, pp. 1-10. Stock, C. W. 1979. Upper Silurian (Pridoli) Stromatoporoidea of New York. Bulletins of American Paleontology, vol. 76, pp. 289-389. 1982. Upper Devonian (Frasnian) Stromatoporoidea from north- central Iowa: Mason City Member of the Shell Rock For- mation. Journal of Paleontology, vol. 56, pp. 654-679. 1984. Upper Devonian (Frasnian) Stromatoporoidea of north- central Iowa: redescription of the type specimens of Hall and Whitfield (1873). Journal of Paleontology, vol. 58, pp. 773-788. 1989. Microreticulate microstructure in the Stromatoporoidea. Association of Australasian Palaeontologists Memoir 8, pp. 149-155. 1990. Biogeography of Devonian stromatoporoids. in Palaeo- zoic Palaeogeography and Biogeography. W.S.McKerrow and C.R.Scotese, eds., The Geological Society Memoir 12, pp. 257-266. Thorsteinsson, R. 1980. Stratigraphy and conodonts of Upper Silurian and Lower Devonian rocks in the environs of the Boothia uplift, Ca- nadian Arctic Archipelago, Part 1, Contributions to Stra- tigraphy. Geological Survey of Canada Bulletin 292, 38 pp. 1986. Geology of Cornwallis Island and neighbouring smaller islands, District of Franklin, Northwest Territories. Geo- logical Survey of Canada, Map 1626A, Scale 1:250,000. Thorsteinsson, R., and Tozer, E. T. 1962. Banks, Victoria and Stefansson Islands, Arctic Archipel- ago. Geological Survey of Canada Memoir 330, 85 pp. Trettin, H. P. 1978. Devonian stratigraphy: west-central Ellesmere Island, Arctic Archipelago. Geological Survey of Canada Bulletin 302, 119 pp. Uyeno T. T. 1990. Buiostratigraphy and conodont faunas of Upper Ordovician through Middle Devonian rocks, eastern Arctic Archi- pelago. Geological Survey of Canada Bulletin 401, 211 pp. Uyeno, T. T., and Klapper, G. 1980. Summary of conodont biostratigraphy of the Blue Fiord and Bird Fiord formations (Lower-Middle Devonian) at the type and adjacent areas, southeastern Ellesmere Island, Canadian Arctic Archipelago. Current Reseach, Part C, Geological Survey of Canada Paper 80-1C, pp. 81-93. Webby, B. D., Stearn, C. W., and Zhen, Y. Y. 1993. Lower Devonian (Pragian-Emsian) stromatoporoids from Victoria. Royal Society of Victoria, Proceedings, vol. 105(2), pp. 113-186. Webby, B. D., and Zhen, Y. Y. 1993. Lower Devonian stromatoporoids from the Jesse Lime- stone of the Limekilns area, New South Wales. Alcheringa, vol. 17, pp. 327-352. Winchell, A. 1867. Stromatoporidae: their structure and zoological affinities. American Association for the Advancement of Science, Proceedings, vol. 15, pp. 91-99. Witzke, B. J. 1990. Paleoclimatic constraints for Palaeozoic palaeolatitudes of Laurentia and Euramerica. in Palaeozoic Palaeogeography and Biogeography. W.S.McKerrow and C.R.Scotese, eds., The Geological Society Memoir 12, pp. 57-74 Yang, J-Z., and Dong, D-Y. 1979. Devonian stromatoporoids from central and eastern parts of Guangxi, China. Palaeontologia Sinica, vol. 157, New Series B (vol. 14), 98 pp. Yavorsky, V. I. 1930. Actinostromatidae iz devonskikh otlozhenii okrain Kuz- netskogo basseina 1 Urala. Izvestiya Geologishkovo kom- iteta, vol. 49(4), pp. 473-496. 1931. Nekotorye devonskie Stromatoporoidea iz okrain Kuz- netskogo basseina, Urala i drugikh mest. Izvestiya vse- soyuznogo geologo-razvedochnyi obedineniya, vol. 50, pp. 1387-1415. 1955. Stromatoporoidea Sovetskogo Soyuza, Part 1. Trudy vse- soyuznogo nauchno-issledovatel’skogo, geologicheskogo instituta, novaya serlya, vol. 8, 173 pp. 1963. Stromatoporoidea Sovetskogo Soyuza, Part 4. Trudy vse- soyuznogo nauchno-issledovatel’skogo geologicheskogo instituta, novaya seriya, vol. 87, 160 pp. Ziegler, W. and Klapper, G. 1985. Stages of the Devonian System. Episodes, vol. 8, pp. 104— 109. Zukalova, V. 1971. Stromatoporoidea from the Middle and Upper Devonian of the Moravian Karst. Ustredniho tstavn Geologichého, Rozpravy, Srazek 37, 143 pp. 46 BULLETIN 349 EXPLANATION OF PLATE | Figure L=3S ACHNOSEFOME SP RAS Paes od ie cerossepced, eee Sete CoN eee OR ena Reo (6 1a or HEE OTC TOI oo] EERSTE T ORCRO EEE ee T CI STeTa en n cae Specimen GSC 108852. 1. Vertical section; x 10. 2. Vertical section, detail of pillars diverging from low mamelon; ~ 10. 3. Tangential section; x 10. 4=5\. Plectostromaisalairicumi(Mavorskywl930)sn ae eens en eee cee en EOC Eee One eee eee eet ees 15 Specimen GSC 108853. 4. Vertical section; x 10. 5. Tangential section; x 10. PLATE | BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY, VOLUME 109 & ae eee aor “py se ee ee rs BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY, VOLUME 109 PLATE 2 DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN EXPLANATION OF PLATE 2 Figure 1-5. Aculatostroma cf. A. kaljanum (Bogoyavlenskaya, 1977). ..... Specimen GSC 108855. 1. Vertical section; x 10. Tangential section; x 10. Hand-specimen, slabbed surface; x 2. Note pattern and distribution of astrorhizae. Vertical section, detail of colliculate pillars. Same view at x 100 (Fig. 4) and x 250 (Fig. 5). Dr 3. 4,5. 47 48 BULLETIN 349 EXPLANATION OF PLATE 3 Figure 1=3: ‘Glathrodictyoniellesrmerense:Stearn, 1983" |. eens saeco ane Pee eee eae eee eee eee eee ee ean 1. Vertical section; x 10. Specimen GSC 108857. Note successive phases of growth (rhythmic variation of laminar spacing). 2. Vertical section; x 10. Specimen GSC 108856. 3. Vertical section; x6. Specimen GSC 108858. Note the impersistent protuberances, unlike mamelons. 4-5. |\Gerronostroma/septentrionalis MEwiSpeClESs ace peice eerie ciel laser here erro ere tact tee eee eee Paratype GSC 108860. 4. Vertical section; x 10. 5. Tangential section; x 10. 18 BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY, VOLUME 109 SP. ae 2 Hoe i: bel? ay eee Od 3 = 2 By LEP EER at mtn arene > © eA ne 6 RSOrer are. Aue
S
ie)
oO
a
ie)
&
Z
ie)
Ww
J
<
Ay
Z
<
S
m%
sat
=
<
by
(2)
n
g
=
eat
4
=)
=)
[ea]
a '
a) al etn.
PLATE 16
BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY, VOLUME 109
é
2,
n
2
Figure
l=Sssalairellajprima Khromychy 97 nn... nee ee eee
I
. Tangential section; x 10. Specimen GSC 108899.
. Tangential section; x 25. Specimen GSC 108899. Note the smooth termination of cellules bordering skeletal galleries.
. Tangential section; x 25. Specimen GSC 108901. Note the ragged termination of cellules bordering skeletal galleries.
. Vertical section; x 25. Specimen GSC 108898. Note the local development of microreticulate microstructure.
mb wWhy
DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN 61
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 16
Vertical section; x 10. Specimen GSC 108900.
62 BULLETIN 349
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 17
Figure Page
1=5: “Habrostroma proxilaminatum (Fagerstrom) 1196)))5 3... arene eter ee ee hia) ieee eee crete ie eee 36
1. Vertical section; x 10. Specimen GSC 108903.
. Tangential section; x 10. Specimen GSC 108904.
Vertical section, detail of astrorhiza; x 10. Specimen GSC 108905.
Vertical section, detail of microstructure; x 25. Specimen GSC 108903.
Tangential section, detail of microstructure; x 25. Specimen GSC 108903.
we wr
BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY, VOLUME 109 PLATE 17
key Pisa Pes ‘
ot
BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY, VOLUME 109 PLATE 18
AS
SS . 7
* ” Rt oii
tee alesy e
DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 18
Figure
lt. emealdlonona cena Clloniy ancl Qi, Vea, WODTs socsaccsspncoansscnacanes sa raohbonn sobogusoDeueesducgcaogasoaduer
1. Vertical section; x 10. Specimen GSC 110314.
2. Tangential section; x 10. Specimen GSC 110316.
3. Vertical section, detail of microstructure; x 25. Specimen GSC 110314.
4. Tangential section; detail of microstructure; x 25. Specimen GSC 110316.
5, Atonostirona Gisians (Xess, IOSD), soascovasoccgdcnsdvcecdovogroon ube sono osAoDDaG Gd0dD0 oo UnenDGRD DOD OO DU eAOUDECHaDOO
Vertical section; x 10. Specimen GSC 108902.
64 BULLETIN 349
INDEX
Note: Page numbers in italics indicate the location of the taxonomic description. Plates are indicated by the page numbers of their captions
in boldface. Authors are indexed only where their name appears in the text discussion, not in references. The abstract and bibliography are
not indexed. Names appearing on text figures are indexed by page and figure number (eg. 7-Fl = page 7, figure 1).
A CLINOSET OMG) ens seinvaxtne aera ie eiB ase Never ena erate 14, 15, 16
Clathranliee eee eee eee ee saineen pasa LS
hebbornense .... Eee Se GeO OURO On oon 15
EPLLCTLOXTULINAR ayar wide eo dat ano eas Favs aoe va dav eehais erse oheter oe 15, 39, 46
salairicum REGS aE aA eACoa Maa 15, 16
SDPAG tere cacti be eh B ee as 12-F3, 14, 15, 39, 46
SLCIIUIGIUMIUNV Als GISLAMS! 1s scsi oorusterer eee None Cee 36
stellulatum Tyraatus 6s SePeNCS pea SUES ae Vales othe este aN 15
Actinostromatidar inca o ovwietn caster tein tetas geet 14-17
AClInOStrOMAatIdAe AS Aer neo ference arte 14-17
PA CUIQLOSTFOVIGLY torte ck fone oO ee not EOS 16-17
chpAiKalianum™ casera. 11, 12-F3, 16-17, 19, 39, 40, 47
kaljanum amides aes Se ce ADs centration cs 16
akosmoreticulate microstructure ...................005. 29, 30
ANTI OF WV stay sce hous eae ere Ma eee TR A RD nee Pe 6
VATADH IDOL DSP Warn es MELEE ERR Ee ORO COE EO ee eS 5
SANOSLYLOSTFOING Wate geet CO oe ee 21, 24
GN[TACIUNT weneer eee eR nen 12-F3, 2]-22, 39, 51
CONCEP re ice clmnciorn soe tans aerenseetstel cers costs Lames BA metce mace oneseearEe 20
CONPIUCTS I POO Ee OEE 22
NOMINONENSE ran mate ot er ee RE ee ee 21
TOXIN a A ee CR oe oe eas cor oie 19, 20
Arctic Archipelago tiers savcyit cictisietisens sacieeusic cctenyeueete caren 5
NCTE TiAl i onieae ls ohcetcie gen Oe wert AA ae Ee oe ee WD 11
astrorhizaevextraordinaty® «sce. secion e tiss face pete nae 17
fastrorhizalipath ears cre ae een coterie eee 14
ALCLOAIGLYO mae ai ack cee Te Oe Oe Sy eae 17, 20-21
ChrASOlIdUING ase onc Seen e 11, 12-F3, 20-21, 39, 40, 50
GylindKiCuUmmESOLGUING xvas. cise avis oer hrn cere rahe 11, 20-21
{QIU eect TA RCRA. stants At ere acicss eco ee Te 20
AL ODOSINOINGF ecatyae isco Gis ere a een Ie ieee 19, 35-36
GISTANS Np Ny erratic 5, 11, 12-F3, 36, 42, 63
LUTLOUCNS Cpa rere ee Ere Ce ree 35, 36
Australia es chee he rt en ee 11, 24, 34, 35, 36
Basaliphasemeeeeresaamacte ee eee eee ee 17, 18, 19
Bathurstilsland se: eck here ee oe 65° 7-F 159) 10; 11,15;
SHEER eee ts 165.17; 185195, 205.22.30. 311, 325,34; 36237; 38
BentiHornyoilfielditaee cites sacks ete eee eee 6
IBiQhe@ rms rs srg terry ers aotare en eons Ne aptlee 7
Biostratigraphy, stromatoporoid ....................... 11-13
BIOStTOMEe eee oe ee ee nee 9
Bir GhRiordyeic cient circ eee ESET re ete ee 9, 36
Bird Fiord Formation ........ 6, 8-F2, 9, 10, 17, 18, 23, 40, 42
Birkhead wPKy rs trace ree ei eee CE oes 30
Bersted teal aWirmemcecs st Gceraapten ie Seti er Oar eee 38
BluciHhiordgescsssmer tri: has hear err ome 6, 7-F1, 10
Blue Fiord Formation ........... 6, 8-F2, 8, 10, 17, 18, 19, 20,
te ee 21, 23,24; 25, 26, 27, 30; 31, 32: 33, 34, 35; 36, 39-42
Bogoyavienskayay | OVimerer eeee enter 17, 18
Bois Blanc Formation .............. vapderAoacoseaaae 21S)
Brachiopodseercaeee hee eer ern ee tee ee eee 6, 10
Buchans Cave Limestone, Australia ....................... 36
Bursykhirmanian horizons sane seen eee 31
Galcitesfascicular-optici ia nance eee eee een ily)
GCastleibiohermi penis nai tee ener eer e eee ee 38
Eaunoporahupschite were eect Le Cee eee ee ee 31
Cellulammicrostructuresnens eee eee neon 29-30
China’ (4. 24.2: Serta yee eae OO OE CEE Cee Wi
Glathrocoilonay a. sane ae PAE eRe 27-30
GQDEONG? fe. SA OOS Re eee 27, 28
CEC isagzinataly, sea sr: once eee Cease OEE 28
Correlation s2-cninn wise GORE een eee OEE 13
CNASSUIN Sc. ns Petes cisgi eae an Rete ee Le CEE 29
ICT ASSILOXL Gs aan es spetoevtane, Seath e cobe e, Jars entree echeberetevatete Conte Ree 29
HIDFOSP ay srayo hale SSR eee EE ORO 29
LLVOLULGN sesh NE A OR eR eR ER ae eS Sonos 30
ODIILELALA ee Ape os CANA NOE LOCO 29
SQRINAIA See ee ER ates CRC EO Ee 29
SOlid ak scteshcks, 2h eee a eT COCO 29
SDISSQ) 5.5155, Bhararachucisrereti yp ertion teks SOI eee eee Se OOO 29
subclathrata .... BSE RO aE GEOR OO RO Dabs nas 0-0 30
VEXALGEr eA ee 5, 12-F3, 28-30, 39, 40, 55, 56, 57
Clathrodictyidau sarastcooe ieee eee tt 17-26
Glathrodictyidaes ja c-t eta ateccatsecraier aes erence nner 17-21
Clathrodictyon ree tecptcensra reactors ae ee eke ate 17-18
COLIMMOSTIN Rs. ters a es OO Ee Oe 26
CLICSINCrENSE meee ena 5, 12-F3, 17-18,39, 40, 48
VESICUIOSUIN as ehjaneir vase eh ee ee eee 17
Goenellostroma)kaljanumi ac... ata chess nen oe cee 11, 16
GOCNOSITOMOM. a2 ate kale ea OO OEE CRORE 31
Columbus Limestoness.-....0-se eee eee EE eee 27, 38
Commensalorganisms) “sea ere eee leer 17, 19, 27
confere (CE)? Ais tittcn noe cir ee eT ee Cee 13
GConodontibiostratigraphy, 7. se secon eee eee ee 9-11
Gonodont:zonesaaee eee eens e 8-F2, 9-11, 12-F3
Corals Ae ery. eer Sea eee ete 6, 10, 11
Cormwallistislandy aaa naee ec aoe ee 6, 7-F1, 9, 10
ENISCENNZONC ER CCM eee F2, 9-10, 11
DENSAStOMAS Ree ee ee Eee 15, 16
Detroit:!River‘'Group: jiaca-sccaceee eee 1235275 31 S7a38
Devonislandivee ree erne heer eee eee eee 7-F1, 8,9
IIE 3 1 Gee Seb oem a ia aoe arenas tear tro. ocean be Me ado 17
Diageneticialterationy sosac-cemecee anton ee eee 14
Diplostroma, Aaajyan fete skee eee CEE Ce Ee 23
Disappointment Bay Formation ................. 6, 8-F2, 8, 9,
ORME Une aaa Tau Ee oo DOMeaHe 10, 18, 31, 34, 35, 37, 39, 41, 42
Dundee} Formation. ea. scene ee aoe cee eee S37/
Dyke/Ackland)Bay) aactacettrs cio cine toniei rack 9, 16,32; 375,38
EasternyAmericassRealml cece tian or neice eee 11
Eidsihiordaeee rece ere eee Sp 7-El, lis 27,315 3233 5905050
Eids Formation ......... 6, 9, 10, 19, 31, 32, 33, 35, 40, 41, 42
Ellesmerejlslandeanner rere 5, 65 7-F 1,8, 105 179195
SF OA EN AGA DE REST ATI aca DTC 20), 235, 253,2:7-30.3)1533
Emsian-Eifehaniboundary/ 4..ceaciectiet cate te ict 9, 10, 11
Fagerstrom J An sacri cries scare er 255337,
FeldmannysRe (Mie. ic cinssarsioweestayd cerns sete eects 38
iFerestrOomalopora eee eee eee CEE Lee ene 32-33
(SOW a GIA ON cobossoonddcounss4souo0s 12-F3, 33, 39, 59
WT ACQUESENSIS Mats, toronto Se OO OCG 31
DEVONIAN CANADIAN STROMATOPOROIDS: PROSH AND STEARN
ICFUDEMIUK OVEN ce cvarsiere eo eisleuaicioks Hasieeiaeiare cea eee 32533
iQallikt dese oaemee DUO STO COD OCHO RE RAED CTR RGOMAeTOE Cate 31
llth coosouaeesosousuaboasae ooscoonooboocdoaneECoDE 15
Rormosa! Reelseimestonemspeseerecice ones oe A
Galloway Ie Uo nececrcm re earns Sisies seus sacle Sees 28, 29, 38
(GeologicalllSurveyzofiCanadaye-reyiaras cae ete iets eels 14
(GETTONOSTROING, Fe cites ere ie wiclenein es aistateels outeees so iseste ers 18-19
GEG AMRGMOGINUE coooosoosganacunensoadendase Seal)
GGTHS aceon aguranes. coo p06 andonnoane papenetGreanone 18
ASE CA MM CIGIGel sonadoonesagaesdnaddacuaddosusnose 19
septentrionalis ........... 5, 12-F3, 18-19, 26, 39, 40, 48, 49
Gols Ne Boe een on SEDe ae ae apo a Ooo Db Oe atic cps tre mcrae 18, 19
Maan guadducdooasSee oor aooomanead dances aeeeAS 19
(GU HONTOULOTES so0gc cnocsosdabodaoDEdoocdseHueeDoopneT 33
Gila en nousopopaaas CoD aa Daa S5l2-=F35 1135333395 .41)59
Goodbody sO meee Tach hee ect Cine eee 10
Gooselbiordaese te cece eines 6, 7-F1, 8-F2, 8, 10, 20, 27
PONDER ZONE seer race ieiioe levee eieieeie eerie 8-F2, 9-10
Growth Competitive -irecsreiciers aes eicteveverreeeicrcra = aeiiols 19
(GOD CIS gmecs eouooo Sebo Rand Soe ed omens cerecres 18
eGR OIRO! aa epee D OE Ooo DOOR TO OED IOCO DUO Mh ie! 36-37
GENSIIGININAIU/ Perr ere cere ace eles 36
HOT IMOSENS Cie sere eLIe ystevy eats chera cia ave. tous Saya ayae weaker 36
DON QIMINGLIUIN ae eee eee 11, 12-F3, 36-37, 39, 40, 62
Elermatostromatidacr secre tie ciistrckeiscie ei erelerae sera 30-31
ETWOSONSBAY! 5 crovevsycres cr arsvanepecere siet ot 8i e155) oye) cb as eiaye euch erensierecslenenstetass 11
IhYetEE) Seve ce cco no oF Ca DEER OSE Cr Eran oe eer 22, 38
HOE LOIG soc daun ceca co moc cmond Gonninenorcinnoe 10, 11
Veftersonvallesesimestoneiermee cia sierkcieereis cero eral 27, 38
yessesbimestone vyAustrallamciseeeicieiieetieen a aes 11, 35, 36
Rceprrea= OH ra TN SET ote cote os cesesavave, ens tageusvotevs tere scschosev islet) cuz. 15
MAT pINnSkiGhONZON! chy cm. e< mis crore cis oie tieiscoe eA at see G Mee Eee 16
IeaskaskiaitranSeresslom fre. cvaevertee railarere el aeecrater cise caste 5
KeelleysiIsian Girne sent cette oeiteercsiacasiaciuteseh esi rereris 38
IORI U WW iranre ay svat sysnera ves seey Sees bpei 2 slioves oT eed mursiece seu Susu euesepentyea = 10
Rela firs § Views siete ara ysheray ave feccqarsncrerscs eiscacsy ncuron ete oaaeaentesreneber 34
SAT OMNY Ch SAV op Gri recnys icy ovate icisnes/eis es bsnuslnynisteiere suas hee 16, 21, 34
Tapers Grae rset ete aise alors ceneiers cer 8) cisras cyey @ #18 hapten or cers Sy agensersvecs) arar 9
[KORE VREN EIS 18 (C9 ees oe ols cr SC in On ROE Ren oe exec roe 28, 29
KerekOvskiWhOri Zone 4iscoytseyeistoron eas ates Secs eres cae ores oe cacieveyane 34
RIZE TSK DASLIN ayers yore oie cre aver ench ahslese Covers cust severev a) 11, 15, 30, 33
TEQDECHIGSSD’ sexist CONS To Oe OS Shaye loss vse IS SET 5
laminae, compound, discussion ......................00-5. 23
latilaminaesGiscusSIOnsceee EEE eerie terrence erie 17
MESCOMPtENINUS, oye fs tetsu ay-usvorstsiciorarorovaws svorsisyersco aoe teeer aol 28
MEESSOV AV aA cil Carers e.siavets ayes revere eu csevey eitee fey Nee iaTee ete eee ever Shack 31
MeilydaleszimestoneyAustraliauee enya rar eter rtt ra 34
WochkovianstalNay sorte ey reir tein chee ale ere torte olay ave 6
Wowthermlsland yc issn.ecism ate noe eae 6; 7=BIS 9310535538
WeuCAS A ROKIMALIOMN Ye erases cyccne cite eats ceases ante etsy rseeats 38
MalobachatskishonZoner eae raanieebinicere: bec cere 34
Mamontovoyhonzonier neice creer: erence ieee cise 30
Marblehead @hiotarrrtatcicrs conto aisaesieieiare lecoiteecerenderycleuscsance 27
IME CIEAr ens) spl types eerste yan is voie <8 Gt ene nle a raeel a sistemas aia ets 6
micasurements:;MOLpholopic!= sem series ee i-ytsiels sessile relelel- 14
microstructure, discussion
akosmoreticulatencry-einsy x aeons einiaee aera erraerse 29, 30
NM ua ears Peseta ze tates ia ayonass feels Tea ope oi oonsyerey tase Avouand ehoees 29-30
65
classificationuserrcomoccncrcoecyecomeee noeeisc rs raeiaeee 35
(GClathrocoilondgeee.. cae ee Coe ee Coe eee neers 28-30
MUCTOLUDULATEL, cecasyeteiovsasicieyscevs eretyeus eiseatarsuats wis oaparsiateieiere tate 26
orthoreticulatest msc ceesr er Oe ees eee 35
phylogeny poor create cs phate woe re aussie a vevenen ore 35
oitet=i nie 10(0) Nl oan entered Serre ite UO MD Dota cin noe tae 14
Microtubulate:microstructure! fsa. --cre a> selec = cei 26
Mori Kelis, sa seech cin circa ocr manovoaiance sisnaisinraiee euctnvesnlone me nvere 23
Morphologic variability’; .- sans sean aceon eo 13
IMiiISkOxeRiord setts nels scien 6, 7-F1, 8-F2, 8, 10, 21, 27
Mutualism: Gehry -rscic ck cis, Stes) is teexetenns elt. eievausvai shee eats 19
Natural Sciences and Engineering Research Council ......... 6
INeludimskayalsuite eens se tetera eeeisisvercters 211, 35
INonwegianiBayyMem betese ce err eetttie eerie rrr e 9
INPIOCHAMOUD socoocs bhae tus adaoddda as cuen cman arannrNnse 23
(O)ctlole RSE AMANO aE eae eO OO Gate pmo imetren 23, 27, 38
(Olitee Wee vinodede cndsosodeesnoSa oon cooUoneeoocddepUbOS 11
@mulevski Mountains; Siberia) ~.2e- cose 6 citer et 21, 35
@nandagavkimestoneseeer ee eerie eee Eero 27
@ntaniOs Aeros eet eet ashevsen sstansaeteen stoke renin coon Wil, Ze 7
Baleageographys sicsecyscescie: topstcdensserstenoestevsyasin eke sss) sie 11-13, 38
PArallelopOnde. gence nen 1A sn PRA Ca OE 35.37
iW souneanscwancssossbe% 11, 12-F3, 37-38, 39, 42, 63
Rar allelostromay. cates. tee Ae ERO ERS 31
RarasitigiorganiSms') sence certs setace facies ere 17
DATLILUSEZ ONEY sevice Nast st cree erst Sree tee nT EOE 10, 15
patulus: ZONE ny ets Aceh ek oka Le EEE 10-11, 15
Pentamerus pseudobaschkiricus beds ................++++++ 15
REL IGIOSUL OIG Ene eee 19-20, 23, 24
SD sper hirs Raae comin ecoees tiavetectomie ee 12-F3, 19-20, 39, 40, 50
TP CLFOSEVOVNG er hots donate One ME RAI SO ORO OEE: 19
Phases
Dasa ae ae ee ane ets eer er ee eee Seedy enka 17, 18, 19
SUICCESSIVIE§ sisieesa cheery oe Hees aT er HENS STOO eso e/onaror UPA 18
Ricketts TEA W ate racers oe ieee eee ao, ea ere 23
Platform NorthvAmernicanteeeecnarie erie ersten 5
JA GOOIOLLE: 1s coe oa O US Ue eo aIa SoD Olnte Oo IDO Bae 6 15, 16
(GISCUSSIOM esrererey yy ieee eee anaes eee ee aoe eevee esr SUS aI EPO 16
Ua tt 211) OO OORT GO menreia ce a eta onc 16
ME CODINALUIN mame ias aoe elector eter 16
SCUDIFICUING Re ER erie 11, 12-F3, 15—16,39, 46
RolarContinentaliShelfmProyectse eee) eee eee 6
Polyonathusiatts Py PErOONnuS cre eee eieieieie eestor 9
Roly gnathusiaeniscensme see eres eet eer 10
IRAN DD SOMERY? caanaacocosnaocesbseagecenancqoooues 9
Poly SnathusinVersusmenre serene eae serie terre 9
ROLY SNALRUSISELOLINUS eee eeciaeeie eeeee sie eee 10
PortiColbornes Niagara area nee eee 27
IPLESERV ALLO gy ccesz se rcrane: Bre cue tet aie car ava ee Roe e/a SEROTONIN: 17
TAGES) 2, syere sei sispsicce ic sey ss decays levedersverd lalapuiaatcs aheyeerey comer eer 13-14
IROCIEGHPOCHEDOL one cacanacovosoo0pocespesucoopacas 22-23
NB horses pe oR a poe Ol Gers eeE ey ORI T FOTO ci OCIS RIGO 22
CONSIULINATUMI eee eee 11, 12-F3, 22-23, 39, 40, 52
Reef
PUM aes perete crac are ccs ate ches sea ssey aber sworn ae esis acres egey poy wie yee ecelshers 5
eFASNIAN COM PIO KES > ye. see see cis s st ck cvotecn ove pains orstarsss ate seuersialelsts 5
MTN OLS Rese cress svar etna ote csv ere Sov snon uakouo ve vale tysy ere) eee etsis spevelsuetstate sper 9
RES OLU LEMMING WW lisetetssss ctetanciensa fy syeeaysy svencrsteycvave iarersteteyavaveieta crayevevare 7-Fl
RoyalkOntarioyMuscumpesere seer en entice rity eter 14
Russia, see specific districts
66 BULLETIN 349
S@eTeans ey eee ere A ease eee 5, 28, 29, 38
Salar VRUSsiayccevagcarntarronert ssvsiece trees cee mee Oey heals 11, 34
Salairellal peepee eee esas nein seo ee 34
PTILILICCOMPt yi eta oie Nee eee 34
[QML Re bo6 Re Oe : 5, 11, 12-F3, 34-35, 39, 41, 42, 60-61
SauerlandaGenmanyiirere cee cet hicieine cee ener 22
ISCHISLOGICLYOMI ere ice aise ete I 20, 23-24
papillatum ...... Sei CRONE PARRA CAPO BEBE cACO 24
[RO AA) Doe aoa ee ambon omc tak tn bi oddoc bag dc 23
SCHISLOGICLYON USD sae ee ei eee 12-F3, 23-24, 39, 52
pelcle) Chic GA Panne B OOOO MOORES On OSC Oas cmap eonb dec 11
SCNOLINUSIZONE, Aaeajniaiiar cr eta. sae neers 10, 11
Severo-VostokSiberiaaw poke eee eee ee 115.35
SiberiaywiNE ma. a5 tice Goines eee hae ee ee: 11, 35
Simplexodictyidaeticoncept. 2.154. een eee ee eee 23
ISUIDIEXOGICLVON Sere ee eee OO 23
STANGIOSUIM aR Oo ee ne eee 23
SUMMUBEI as Bu 8s canne Metro ODOUR ES ane CONS CDH Bt ose abe a: 19
SmithiGar error een Cer Oe OL EOC eee. 5, 6, 7, 38
Sombiordaererceae cee 5, (6s7=F ll, MOS 27 31132. 3 4535)
Speciesiconcep tee weiss. een eee Eee rote ieee 13
SLIGLOSENOIMA TA crys chron era Sooyeyehe lessee eM one Toxic ae 24-26
MUMVADI eosabeas cobeibs Sdodnok shuanas Sbadasoawene de 25
Correlation oo cry dace tee errs eect se ope 13
(iD SEARS ERATE EET TORE RID ee cioecos as 26
gorriense ....... at 11, 12-F3, 24-25, 26, 39, 40, 53
HieM UAL 66 eng mmcndb ben be pad nocnmoapaoe DaaenN 24, 25
AUN AVI: soo cwncondacenbe odo uD0 Kane anne os 1124525
WHAT: cracction wee SRR CO DODDADRDaneiniRotoouee 24, 25
iDrODIEMALiCUIT Ree ee eee eee 25
Stictostroma? nunavutense ........ 12-F3, 19, 25-26, 39, 40, 54
Slictostromatidacl ay. eee ent: 24-30
Stocks SMW messes eben cence merci saber sees 6, 16, 28, 29
Stratigraphiciranges® nym ascec rine sie ce eee cee 12-F3
SULOMALODON Aen ene Acro ae reo 31-32
Chay Stunupschiliene ae eee 5, 12-F3, 31-32, 34, 39, 41, 58
EME Safa) Leda cannices GOS Retr Ite TET Aab OME OE OR aay ORG eS oe tcc 31
DOK COLIS re Nees ER AP ER rey EEC Te 34
CONCENET ICE tailed creates a Shee RTE ee Bee ae ee 31
COITEIATION(, a sselcmiosicisercioons ee terra Re Ter ne 13
ENSON ATA Aree eee 12-F3, 31, 32, 39, 58
UDSCHIE Ray aati RRR Oe 32
INGINMIUUlAtdeee ay ee ees OO OEE 24
OLED canoeoncennooor 5, 11, 12-F3, 19, 31, 32, 39, 40, 41, 59
ovale delved “ .peaganes hAboosonobkonndacondnapsadoeoe 36
ZINICNENKOVIS xse ae SARC eOE ene 34
StrOmMaLOpOrellaweN. aan ae ee 26-27, 29
CELLOS GN AD aac pense OR RCO Oe 26
(ong thle) «even ee eet nick ce orem ein Comocpnnictcam Gea? 6 13
ENLEMSIS: mranescre teins 26521 atyperspecimeny sere 27
RTL MICHE oonhenadconvuagaaeoe 11, 12-F3, 26-27, 39, 40, 55
Stromatoporellidassa.eaeeee eee eee Rea 24-31
Stromatopondal...s acne ya cea Gee 31-35
Stromatoporidacken sean eee eee ene 31-33
StuarteBay Formation: 2-7 cere eerie 19, 20, 36
subspecies; concepts pomea eee acne reece tacit 13
synonymies; general’comments) 227-7345 02 cee. saci eee 13
Syringodictyonituber ulate > <4. 5
SYVINZOPON A. --everaceterecarte ices, SAVIO CLOT RTOS 17, 19,
Syringostromatiday <5)5.. sce csv Sasi cio 35-37
Syringostromatidaey taiaa-cmere eee eee 35-37
SPFiNZOStrOMGVerrucosum) een oc eee eee 16
SV TINZOSLTOMELIA een EEE EEC nee 33-34
LADY Finthede went ne cer ne OR Coe ee 34
ZINICRENKOVI steer ec 11, 12-F3, 34, 39, 60
ZINICRENKOVULENUISieemiccee ck ae Ores ee 34
Synmngostromellidae? acnceins sae ee cree eer ener 33-35
Systematicipaleontology) saicc.-acicreletrrieisoeee ieee 13-38
Tababastaakhskayaysubsuite: 2.7 ceyo vessel erecta eee 21
Terminology, morphologic... cern.) -te ieee ee ee eee 14
Thenodictyidaey te ae- hae eect arserccka 5 tke ook cron ee 21
TRIPPECANGE/ SEQUENCE ae cracks tersysiree Cee ere 5)
ADrslODIteS's eee cuexevasey dept ome hee OORT ne 6, 10
MUP CLOSIVOM Akervcsiernie erat oe C OO eC EE Oee 30-31
Chischelomenseé: =. sa. ier eee 30
CHT 1d aes... zie, rey acsnecensnctabanseaict Moe va OER Ee 36
PI ODOSUIN re. ater och ai CPA Shotokera HGS OOPS TOO eee 31
PAGS NIICO peice cer oct see OEE ere Cee 31
PATMULOS UII Pie ais estes iid gh PO CEE 30
SPA evclssausheyersrhcccaurntegnek water rae ere asics 11,,1:2=F35, 30539551
SD ALL OSUINs anc, cisvap aceon Gone ReraEeaieeatteet os nese eev eons Te 30
71714 (] PC a Cen incr eto orn aet.aito.da0-< 30
Truro Island ......... 6; 7-F1,,9;,10;, 15; 18; Sil) 32435537438
Type\specimens; repository, «-..-).05 sac eeicc ceils | eves eee 14
Wilakhan-Sis)Range\ Siberia -a5.4..44 26 eee 21
UnitedStates: north-central 24 450...0.. 4 ee eee 11
Unnamed: Formation: .. 0.0... 0.000. acne 6, :8-F2. 9) 10: iailse
Fees eve Poicichj ho ROO EAE 18, 32, 37, 38, 39, 40, 42
Wrals;Mountains jRussiat aascsns-cee ae eee 11, 16, 17
WI VOMOS TDs, oyuses attavatan ss scabavs ostca eubeavat stetanansa ar aretetel ete oR Tee Pere 9,10
Wizbekistanis 6 occ merece eee ee eee 19,23, 31
Wariability; morphologicy 15 sjeres0n creo vse seine etree 13
VendomtEiordien a aaecenermciiei aceite 6, 7-F1, 9, 10, 17, 18,
LER OO CiG OI eCcE ribe PreaerG Be 19; 205,25: 27, 30; 3:15 3253598
Victorias Australias 26 s:icprscsst scare aoaisrn acelomecaraal tetee ohehc tah ere 11
Webbys BD ie carstasicetncternicinara terrae cere tere ae 11, 13524535
Vavorskys Viola; Ayres debteca Sepa sisi ckehocce Saeco 15, 33
Zdimiripseudobaschkiricus beds ay 1--- eee eee 15
ZR TAV SHANURANGE Wi cee yeh orev ye ley sarees sue fateucheue ni 8G eee: ek eRe 19
VANE) a) Gl EE PENH GLber Rete co irtateer icei atc oo © 11, 24, 35
Zrkalova Vy cea acapecctatcontaaro erect Mook Ser eT ae 30
PREPARATION OF MANUSCRIPTS
Bulletins of American Paleontology usually comprises two or more sep-
arate papers in two volumes each year. The series is a publication outlet for
significant, longer paleontological monographs (/.e., more than approximately 50
printed pages), for which high quality photographic illustrations and the large
quarto format are required.
Submissions are welcome from any author, regardless of institutional or
organizational afhliation. Authors must, however, be members of the Paleonto-
logical Research Institution at time of publication; annual membership is currently
US$25.00. Publication costs of the Bulletins are heavily subsidized by the Insti-
tution, but authors are currently required to pay illustration charges at a rate of
$120.00 per plate and $35.00 per text-figure.
Important references for style and format are 1) Bulletins of American Pa-
leontology “Instructions for Authors” (volume 108, number 347, pages 149-153);
2) Chicago Manual of Style (fourteenth edition) 1993. Recent issues of the Bulletins
provide useful guides but note changes with the “Instructions for Authors” men-
tioned above.
Manuscripts must be typewritten, and double-spaced throughout (including
direct quotations, tables and references). All manuscripts should contain a table
of contents, lists of text-figures and/or tables, and a short, informative abstract
that includes names of all new taxa. Format should follow that of recent numbers
in the series. All measurements must be given in the metric system, alone or in
addition to their English system equivalents. The maximum dimensions for pho-
tographic plates are 178 mm x 229 mm (7 inches x 9 inches; outlined on this
page). Single-page text-figures should be drafted for reproduction as single column
(82 mm; 3'4 inches) or full page (178 mm; 7 inches) width, but arrangements can
be made to publish text-figures that must be larger.
Authors must provide three (3) printed copies of the text and accompanying
illustrative material. Authors are strong/y encouraged to prepare their manuscripts
on word processors, as this considerably expedites publication. On initial sub-
mission, however, only printed copies of the manuscript should be sent; the disk
copy should be retained so that revisions can be made after the review process.
The text and line-drawings may be reproduced xerographically, but glossy prints
at publication size must be supplied for all half-tone illustrations and photographic
plates. These prints should be identified clearly on the back.
Referenced publication titles must be spelled out in their entirety. Particular
care should be given to reference format. Consult the “Instructions for Authors,”
referred to above, as several changes have been introduced with that issue. Ci-
tations of illustrations within the text bear initial capitals (e.g., Plate, Text-figure),
but citations of illustrations in other works appear in lower-case letters (e.g., plate,
text-figure).
Format of systematic descriptions should follow that in any recent number
of the Bulletins.
Original plate photomounts should have oversize cardboard backing and
strong tracing paper overlays. These photomounts should be retained by the author
until the manuscript has been formally accepted for publication. The approximate
position of each text-figure in the text should be indicated. Explanations of plates
and text-figures should follow the References Cited.
Gilbert Dennison Harris
(1864 - 1952)
Founder of the Bulletins of American Paleontology (1895)
ISBN 0-87710-440-9
A
VOLUME 109, NUMBER 350 SEPTEMBER 16, 1996
Gilbert Dennison Harris:
A Life With Fossils
by
William R. Brice
Foreword
by
Frank H. T. Rhodes
Paleontological Research Institution
1259 Trumansburg Road
Ithaca, New York, 14850 U.S.A.
PALEONTOLOGICAL RESEARCH INSTITUTION
Officers
ISRESIDEN TE oases eater eee ee ye rE a en ee CONSTANCE M. SOJA
BIRST: VICE-PRESIDENT aieeoe ee ce ee oe iene JAMES E. SORAUF
SECOND) VICE-PRESIDENT annotate ei etre inves tere SHIRLEY K. EGAN
SEGRE TAR V0 ose Sele sate ahd PANS cwek Set re 2S Cetin aro esa HENRY W. THEISEN
IRREASURER GS E0001 hie ais Waray tee a ear Clonee eet epee atte HOWARD P. HARTNETT
DIRECTORS es eh elon eRe RAPES Lo che oa croteeat eared oe ae WARREN D. ALLMON
Trustees
BRUCE M. BELL (to 6/30/99) EDWARD B. PIcou (to 6/30/98)
CARLTON E. BRETT (to 6/30/98) GARY ROSENBERG (to 6/30/99)
WILLIAM L. CREPET (to 6/30/97) MEGAN D. SHay (to 6/30/99)
J. THOMAS DuTRO, JR. (to 6/30/99) CONSTANCE M. SojA (to 6/30/97)
SHIRLEY K. EGAN (to 6/30/98) JAMES E. SORAUF (to 6/30/97)
ANTON J. EGNER (to 6/30/97) JOHN C. STEINMETZ (to 6/30/97)
M. G. HARASEWYCH (to 6/30/98) HENRY W. THEISEN (to 6/30/98)
HOWARD P. HARTNETT (to 6/30/99) MARY KANE TROCHIM (to 6/30/98)
HARRY G. LEE (to 6/30/97) GREGORY P. WAHLMAN (to 6/30/99)
Amy R. MCCUNE (to 6/30/97) THOMAS E. WHITELEY (to 6/30/97)
SAMUEL T. PEES (to 6/30/98) DONALD L. WOLBERG (to 6/30/99)
Trustees Emeritus
HARRY A. LEFFINGWELL
ROBERT M. LINSLEY
RAYMOND VAN HOUTTE
WILLIAM P. S. VENTRESS
BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY
and
PALAEONTOGRAPHICA AMERICANA
MWWARIRENGID) se ANTSDENI@ Nise scr spas pte NT Sa sur. a EL EDITOR
A list of titles in both series, and available numbers and volumes may be
had on request. Volumes 1-23 of Bulletins of American Paleontology are available
from Periodicals Service Company, 11 Main St., Germantown, New York 12526
USA. Volume | of Palaeontographica Americana has been reprinted by Johnson
Reprint Corporation, 111 Fifth Ave., New York, NY 10003 USA.
Subscriptions to Bulletins of American Paleontology may be started at any
time, by volume or year. Current price is US $62.50 per volume. Numbers of
Palaeontographica Americana are priced individually, and are invoiced separately
on request.
for additional information, write or call:
Paleontological Research Institution
1259 Trumansburg Road
Ithaca, NY 14850 USA
(607) 273-6623
FAX (607) 273-6620
This paper meets the requirements of ANSI/NISO Z39.48-14992 (Permanence of Paper).
Begun in 1895
VOLUME 109, NUMBER 350 SEPTEMBER 16, 1996
Gilbert Dennison Harris:
A Life With Fossils
by
ce ONia
OCT U8 1996 \
LIBRARIES
William R. Brice
Foreword
by
Frank H. T. Rhodes
Paleontological Research Institution
1259 Trumansburg Road
Ithaca, New York, 14850 U.S.A.
ISSN 0007-5779
ISBN 0-87710-441-7
Library of Congress Catalog Card Number: 95-71055
Printed in the United States of America
Allen Press, Inc.
Lawrence, KS 66044 U.S.A.
CONTENTS
Page
ID a DKA OCOINT SS.o cca. co068 oD othe 6 GO DETTE ORO DS Ian oO en ees CR CRIT eer aE R CRT CRSA ee Sener ro ee F 4
ROREW ORD bysbrankge ley RIROGES! tercriekercie ss cco rcte sicas tei recede ef arah eevee Fei et os sor ayarecone\ he oie syste evesove Scie eee: « is ied ets savave svapcveyerere 5
INESTIRUACUP oo GS ects a eo -oces CCHORR Bree CREA Che CUI Ue EE RIE EET TS co RON CTL COT EN SC PCS nh Se ae eee 8
AWiiHORESiNOMESIAINDIAGKINOWIEEDGMIEINGLS acetone are sicteressue yous eieceretepere te beveteeie cle rotetetoia olen svereieveie «eve sis ote ieleleieieie wale sversieversieiniers 8
CHAPTEROI Fs lmEMSIHERELOFORE. BU VAGUELYIKNOWING) Gaon cciscicisieciecrs = cteis «elles o1oo1eis ysyevovel ele lorersicler=/«/eyersin’ayeversie ele 9
leh? LINES Gvaval JREWTANIN? orn ite Scent Cees Oke 6 Oe ace CU alo.o eer cte Cacecee oR OE EEL Stcaci OR Snares a hsoiso Ma Teteot ote ONT RERe Grea as bes 9
GollegesDaysrath@ormelly ye ree eccrcts cys crs fe caray syste yc coin wsysisea eee eae atencss oy avy ntsbensyStouais sav alerecdleredswebever or suazant oat pssors ab evaaitecs faustus scares naneiecaetiaeaaLeuetopors 11
GeologicaliSunvevz Activity men sece ern cr tre tetera rere cre mic cieirsrsy cee eesti ciceenchs Tare ier ersrec ese Eee CRITI oe eer maa mae 12
Washinetonw»!Czand)Separationsrom hisikamtly/ weyers erie vs seiarels sievarerste iene tevsvycieiciereme ear sis cision sie el acre ercicizieiermeeretel ce eieeieicia rs 14
(GlaratStonemankandiGillbert Vanni Sere sates crartit ccs cusyatehs caer neue) aps iver oiira,«. ous genahsroPae whale Rorotaho ws eect asnere sicker elds. Sattar eaten Ook ete eters 16
CUYNMNDR 2, IVANOMIN MOM GNSS INTC NO]S Ike arcades piotakra oth Maeiamde cern cickiac bio stone padebcoue pacoR orators sacccre ranean 22
GHAPTERS; RETURN TO'GORNELL, .......:- Fed OS COOL COINS FORO RTH ONG CUO ODUCT OR SER E EC COUe Cee emo Leena croton SEED 36
Prntemand Publishem a. asa. s. eee oe PRE acc fe tn ac oy ian wearer te SCOR vcs aes cities Siete fe aie Poneay We eA eee Fer cneger TTS 38
BIAGIO Tamme retort toca seca rarer tecs aed ence S OS Sa ogs Sc te at cocicorcue atte er ened obch nceharererasoe we vepaceeevtesu ays forece alay Tere ence cee vopapetntiehs ss8) asatele we epavere eee e sews 42
WORE SUGGS. ostoatosecunoAG sous 0 once Een ner re Sanu ne oar oa SS here cM mnmr nt aad Ono co Amaro aed ac occoMettiT 45
ieldkCamprand Boats: merece ey yxcciss oc rerere Pete ace cree os ee os etare ueessns Ce axeTeL ok eaet at ares a Per hve toy Stet tah aged Ses, ea ckele (en iNRedee sae EOE LOR Ee 46
ballerina rs AO GNCer Nee gec ue amet Mee ckooitie Aa OOM o COLO DODIRO ro Mae ARTI Gan TECTED BDAC Rn ran a ATO Anca ate mera 49
CRUANPIN 4h ICI OU SS ea eee ere Se ooo adU ee PD UaD OO aoOb DU aC oon neon AD HED Anema eeOnoS uD nonaoimnnoroceee sfepevecovehels ae eed 55
CHARTERS se VEE OT © WTS TAINIAVS WIR IVIE Wane tepscactcevcnctetctci ntsc steven weveretehevteelopcke ner etever suey esate fevers ei ceteneVebnisheiepeispoter state te yao NSeT mote ete iekecsus eevee 63
CISUNP TIER Oy (COINS ON ETON Gall ne opera cecick oie atte Gacy ence tien erie Siete aT ORSIDIOS SISSON GLAMIS GaSe RR OR iS Dia aint Mia Slama ee 71
(CIBUNPIN BIR Fe (CANO OUM UUs GNU CS con neers etharicat ho Saco BOE N Ccah +6 on Orroroo nen DoS cudie da ciaas oa oc o USO REAG c 89
(CHRUNP TNS EGE COMINGS DIL (COU DSN ClO) ES Cements o Ronee ced nd RECO Oar co boon DEG Den ae ino mou eG pcdind DE oooro cEticta baeob cee oe 106
EN aban (CECI co ters pero itera 6.00 cd Oinen Oe ance 6 Dad CoE TR One OUI DOR GC COCOA Gris Pe DOME CeO Cn MOOT heer 106
RAN Vo)o) Qivovel cookie Nari phates 6 Deeks No OUATATOT On ote ty ty Die Oia'o cere DEP BOD F GPDTOIEND Lie DE COT One CATE Gre 5 cal A ENSAIG CIPI oe Oo che G Pracclmainee 106
RTO NII CG RI CS prema cetan ey cya searsia Ue fer tushc rete coteu Neu AU che cous bahs ne SySsseoNaL = yee VRP PANT aS IG erat enas OE Cua Soe es cateOTege oie lepene ohape SiMe Ete censor EAE 107
Lnieroiny Sparel ere NAMEN aS edi ear Caers Oro a aes aISIe ye ola Sia ai ei Gio iso oS SGC oi cinta aaah sig ee IO A aE tN tkCSei Mane AEM ts Aneel 108
(QLIDY ORI JSREO Ys sacaetnet ints oie as oS Recta ects mca pater a Pernice ies rs ra er CR Scere er cs aa ARS a ene ae 114
ISQEUHENSVTVSLENY | gan cr-o-c Sc.ct to tee ohare Eeo Lr peer oie Sar RRO IES nota Cea tr nat t tee oh cto Oana earn Re een re crc ercie Rare Ricca ireks secre tetia oo 115
CHAPTER 9. “SOME ROOMY APARTMENT”: POST-RETIREMENT AND THE PALEONTOLOGICAL RESEARCH
ONGSLEMTOMMEOIN IY iiss 6 acd go abo SSO Ca POE AO Bn DIETS Re OCI IOI aC tte Raa erea cto ORE En ERIC COE An Aen ttn ae Rees 116
CIBUN PIN WL TaMINEN EN MOVRIDIS”. Sis Bath. c dla cittet elope pene setene ee eR cae ate oLe Ein rae mene ee Oi AIS Oe eden naboman nase 130
RIBBEIREIN GE Sie tye rset ter fee cores cree er overahe cecrecransnat ake ch coS Sas erate) SumcadaKOeTe. elavaces thes aiout everetzashiaas hava sdeerane cera ehee Svar otateve ovexe widisieiea orate 131
TRILANINIES _ 5.3 o.c’ata Re aro aii Sas cyto wo biti o aria Olek IE EGR RCCE I CNIICNO Lan Rr cl acc neo tun ON, 2 OR Bs ee ORC A 137
DEDICATION
TO THE LOYAL MEMBERS, SUPPORTERS, AND BENEFACTORS
of
THE PALEONTOLOGICAL RESEARCH INSTITUTION
for
KEEPING THE DREAM ALIVE
Leaves may fall and wither and be hidden by a blanket
of snow; yet they have in their infinitesimal way modified the stream of life for all time to come.
Each human life in like small measure deflects the current
of intellect through the ages even after firm granite
has crumbled to dust.
Things unseen alone are immortal.
(G. D. H. 735)!
' Untitled poem written by Gilbert D. Harris in 1935 and found among his papers in the Harris Archives at the Paleontological Research
Institution, Ithaca, NY (hereafter abbreviated HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY).
FOREWORD
FRANK H. T. RHODES
President Emeritus
Cornell University
Ithaca, New York 14850
There is a certain fitness in the fact that the man
who founded the Paleontological Research Institution
— surely one of the most improbable and even quirky
of all scientific institutions—and who himself printed
all its publications for more than half a century, should
be memorialized within the pages of those publica-
tions. For it is altogether appropriate that the memory
and identity of this man should be preserved within
the very publication that he used to preserve, identify,
and describe so many long-vanished genera and spe-
cies. William Brice records in this remarkable volume
the life and times of Gilbert Dennison Harris with care
and comprehensive thoroughness that do justice to his
topic.
Harris was born on a farm near Jamestown, New
York, in 1864. After winning a scholarship, he entered
Cornell as an undergraduate in 1883 and graduated
with a Ph. B. degree in 1886, remaining in Ithaca for
a year of further studies. Harris joined the Arkansas
Geological Survey in 1888 and, a year later, began work
with the U.S. Geological Survey, only to lose that po-
sition in 1892 asa result of the depression. He worked
briefly with the Texas Geological Survey and was ap-
pointed to Cornell in 1894, being offered an instruc-
torship in paleontology at a salary of $1,000 a year
with possible subsequent promotion to the rank of
Assistant Professor. It says much for Harris’s early self-
confidence that he bargained Cornell President Jacob
Gould Schurman up from $1,000 to $1,400 for an
initial starting salary. Schurman himself was no mean
bargainer.
Within his eighty-eight years Harris lived a remark-
ably productive life. In fact, this biography, consum-
mately careful and excruciatingly comprehensive in its
detail, gives us an account of not one life but of five.
There is first Harris the pioneer Tertiary paleontol-
ogist. Harris devoted his life to a study of the rocks
and fossils of the Cenozoic Era, first in Arkansas, Lou-
isiana, and Texas, and later in Europe and various parts
of South and Central America and the Caribbean. In
association with his students, Harris piled up speci-
mens and was the author of definitive studies of many
Tertiary species.
There is also a splendid picture here of a second life:
Harris the scientific entrepreneur. Though he was a
professor at Cornell, Harris never ceased to be inter-
ested in economic geology and throughout virtually
the whole of his career served the University on only
a half-time basis. Under this arrangement, he was
granted leave during the spring term in exchange for
teaching field studies during the summer term, together
with a normal teaching load during the fall term. Dur-
ing the early part of the year he devoted his time to
consulting, either working as a member of the Geo-
logical Survey of Louisiana or accepting consulting work
with a growing number of oil companies in various
parts of the world. This combination of activities
proved to be a very beneficial one, bringing as it did
hundreds of specimens to Ithaca from every corner of
the globe and providing access to geological informa-
tion that would otherwise have been unobtainable. This
proved of significant scientific interest, not only in pa-
leontology, but also, for example, in economic terms,
reflected in the fact that Harris was among the first to
identify a relationship between salt domes and oil and
gas accumulation. This consulting arrangement also
raised at an early date a topic that continues to be
controversial in the academic world today: conflict of
interest. Conflict surfaced in a particularly acute form
in this case when Harris and one of his former students
were working for competing companies.
The third life in these pages is that of Harris the
faculty member, during the formative period of both
Cornell University and the Department of Geological
Sciences there. It was, I think, Mary McCarthy who
once observed that academic politics are so vicious
because so little is at stake. One is tempted to remem-
ber also Woodrow Wilson’s comment on becoming
President of the United States when he said that he
learned his politics as President of Princeton Univer-
sity and then went to Washington to practice among
the amateurs. Harris was not a model professor. He
was described as a “wonderfully poor” instructor in
lecture classes, who had no set method of instruction,
had a poor delivery, was seldom prepared, and was
known to arrive at his class with lantern slides still
dripping wet from the developing process. Yet he was
at his best with small groups of students, especially
graduate students, and never more so than in the ge-
ology summer field camps that he organized in the
6 BULLETIN 350
Helderberg School of Field Geology, as it was called
in the first decade of the century. The students who
were enrolled in these summer programs developed a
lasting respect and affection for Harris. During four
summers, he undertook extended boat journeys, two
of them extending over three thousand miles, to study
Tertiary rocks and fossils, in each case in launches that
he, himself, had commissioned. The accounts of these
early trips — along Cayuga Lake and through the Erie
Canal, to the Chesapeake Bay and beyond, are vivid
and revealing.
Harris was particularly sympathetic towards the in-
terests of women students in geology and not only
enrolled them in field camp before this was generally
accepted, but also supervised their graduate studies
when few other faculty would do so. His relations with
them were not always harmonious, but he was clearly
an early advocate of women’s interests.
Harris’s career at Cornell was marked by repeated
controversy and dissension. At one stage there were,
in fact, four separate departments of earth science at
the University, one under Heinrich Ries in economic
geology, one under A.C. Gill in mineralogy and pe-
trography, one under R.S. Tarr in physical geography
and dynamic geology, and one under Harris in pale-
ontology. The total complement at the time was four
professors, each with his own department, and each
tending to communicate with the others only by letter.
Except with Gill, Harris’s relations with his colleagues
were rarely harmonious. Yet his association with Cor-
nell spanned a period of forty years.
It was, among other things, this sense of growing
distrust between Harris and his colleagues, as well as
arguments with the President of the University over a
professional conflict of interest and his subsequent con-
duct, that was a major factor in the creation of the
Paleontological Research Institution. This provides the
fourth life: Harris the founder. Harris wanted to be
sure that, once he retired from the University, his mas-
sive collections of Tertiary fossils would be appropri-
ately preserved and curated. He also had a horror of
the hazards of fire in McGraw Hall where they were
originally housed and, in spite of repeated requests,
the University proved unable to offer alternative fire-
proof accommodation. It is also clear that Harris was
convinced that his own field of paleontology, and par-
ticularly his personal contributions to the science, were
not adequately appreciated and recognized by his col-
leagues at Cornell.
For these reasons, he slowly developed the idea of
establishing an institution, free-standing and wholly
independent of Cornell, which would house his col-
lections and provide a basis for continuing research
and study. The germ of this idea had, in fact begun in
1895 when he started his own printing operation be-
cause he had had difficulty in finding copies of older
paleontological publications and in getting his own work
published in a timely manner. And so there was a fifth
life: Harris the printer. He founded two journals, Bul-
letins of American Paleontology in 1895, and Palaeon-
tographica Americana in 1916. He printed them on
his own presses, and they continue to be published
today. At first, much of the work that appeared in the
journals was his own and that of his students, though
in subsequent years the journals came to represent a
wider range of authors and topics. It was around this
that the Paleontological Research Institution gradually
grew, housed first in a small cinderblock building that
Harris constructed on the grounds of his home in Uni-
versity Heights, and later moved to the present PRI
building on the west shore of Cayuga Lake. The pro-
visional charter of PRI was approved by the New York
State Board of Regents in 1933, a year before his re-
tirement, and a permanent charter granted in 1936.
While he was well into his eighties, Harris was still
operating the presses of the institution he created.
Behind these five interwoven stories there stands the
enigmatic and complex character of Harris himself. He
was evidently a man of contradictory characteristics,
kind and gentle on occasions, yet at other times mean
and vindictive. Devoted to his students in general, he
could be petty and hard with individuals. It was, in
fact, a dispute with one of his most distinguished stu-
dents, Carlotta Maury, that led to serious charges of a
conflict of professional interest and a growing strain
between himself and the Cornell administration. De-
voted as he was to advanced students, he had little
time for the general student body. Of the faculty mem-
bers in the Geology Department, he was the only one
who refused to participate in student advising. He even
refused to teach laboratory sections. Yet Harris was
loyal and caring toward his advanced students, who
occupied responsible geological positions in many parts
of the world. He was painstaking in assisting them in
the study of material they had collected and the sub-
sequent publication of their work, a wonderful mentor
and a lasting friend for many. His later years were
marked by loneliness and, perhaps, a growing measure
of isolation. His wife, Clara, died two years before his
retirement, after a marriage of forty-two years.
Looking back on his life, the remarkable institution
that he created, the Paleontological Research Institu-
tion, owing its founding partly to pique and partly to
fear of fire, is, perhaps, his best memorial. Its collection
of type and illustrated specimens now numbers well
over 30,000 and it houses more than 1.5 million other
fossils and Recent specimens. Its publications continue
to be consulted by paleontologists around the world.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 7
William Brice brings enviable qualifications to writ-
ing this biography. A Cornell Ph. D. in geology, he is
Professor of Geology at the University of Pittsburgh
at Johnstown. He has taught summer courses at Cor-
nell for more than twenty years. A historian of geology,
he is also in one sense a descendant of Harris, for his
interest in geology was stimulated in classes taught by
the late Professor Johnnie Wells, who was himself one
of Harris’s students. Brice has also previously written
the definitive history of geology at Cornell. All those
interested in the history of paleontology will salute him
on this latest publication.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: A LIFE WITH FOSSILS
By
WILLIAM R. BRICE
Geology and Planetary Science, University of Pittsburgh at Johnstown,
Johnstown, Pennsylvania 15904
ABSTRACT
Few people did more to unravel the mysteries of the early Tertiary geology of the United States than Gilbert D. Harris (1864—
1952). In 1888, two years after graduating from Cornell University, he began his life-long study of the Tertiary, first as a member
of the Arkansas Geological Survey tracing the Cretaceous-Tertiary boundary from Louisiana into Arkansas, and then with the
U. S. Geological Survey and the Texas Survey. After travelling to Europe to study the Tertiary epochs there, he returned to
Cornell as a faculty member in 1894.
Difficulties in locating copies of Timothy Abbott Conrad’s early nineteenth century descriptions of Tertiary shells prompted
Harris to start his own printing operation. He later founded two journals, Bulletins of American Paleontology (1895) and
Paleontographica Americana (1916), which he printed on his own presses. Both of these journals continue to be published today
by the Paleontological Research Institution, the organization Harris founded in 1932.
Harris believed that students learned best by doing actual geological investigations. From 1899-1909 he was involved with
two undertakings that facilitated this belief and engaged students in actual geological research; (1) he was Geologist in Charge of
the Louisiana Geological Survey, and (2) he conducted a summer field camp in the Helderberg area of New York. For the latter,
he supplied boats for transportation in which the students travelled to the camp and from which they did geological field work
along canals, lakes, and rivers. Using his boats, Harris and his students made at least four trips from Ithaca to the Southern
Coastal Plain collecting fossils and studying the geology they passed at five miles per hour.
Gilbert Dennison Harris, paleontologist, teacher, and printer, through his students, his journals, his own research, and the
Institution that he founded, made a lasting mark on the field of paleontology.
AUTHOR’S NOTES AND ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
My first encounter with G. D. Harris came when I
began my graduate studies at Cornell University in
1967. At that time the Department of Geological Sci-
ences was housed in McGraw Hall, where it had been
in Harris’ time, and there were many photographs of
former faculty on the office walls. I distinctly remember
seeing a picture of a small, gray-haired man bending
over a machine. That photograph turned out to be of
Harris at the age of 85 working on his printing press
(Plate 14). As I started my 30 year association with
the Department of Geological Sciences, I took classes
from two of Harris’ former students, Drs. Storrs Cole
and John Wells, not realizing at the time how much
of my life would be entwined with the Cornell de-
partment and its faculty. In 1976 I began teaching the
summer geology classes at Cornell and the summer of
1995 marked my 20th year at this endeavor. Each time
I used a fossil for my classes, I was reminded of Harris
via Cole and Wells. In 1981 I was asked to prepare a
history of the department for the opening of their new
quarters, Snee Hall, in 1984. Once again I came in
contact with Harris and his contribution as I traced
the department’s long and distinguished record (Brice,
1989).
As part of the Paleontological Research Institution
(PRI) 61st anniversary celebration and reunion held
in August of 1993, while dressed in a costume appro-
priate for the time of early geologic exploration, I pre-
sented a brief description of the life of G. D. Harris
and the founding of PRI. The following year, 1994,
one year before the 100th anniversary of the Bulletins
of American Paleontology, 1 was writing a short paper
on Harris’ field camp in the Helderbergs (Brice, 1994a,
1995), and the subject of a Harris biography came into
a conversation with Dr. Warren Allmon, Director of
PRI. Suddenly the short paper grew into what you have
before you; a tribute to and celebration of the life and
work of Gilbert D. Harris to be published in obser-
vance of the 100th year of the journal which he founded
in 1895.
No work such as this can be created in isolation, and
I wish to thank and acknowledge the assistance and
support of several people: Warren Allmon, Director,
Paleontological Research Institution, who suggested the
original idea and who has served as editor and proof-
reader; the staff at PRI, who were very helpful in lo-
cating various items for me; Gould P. Colman and the
staff in the Rare and Manuscripts Department, Kroch
Library, Cornell University, who assisted me with ar-
chive material; the Department of Geological Sciences
at Cornell University for allowing me access to their
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 9
historical records and their permission to use some of
the material; Nancy Brunberg, Administrative Assis-
tant, Division of Natural Sciences, University of Pitts-
burgh at Johnstown, for typing a portion of the manu-
script, and, lastly, I acknowledge the support of my
wife, Heather, for her critical reading of the draft, and
for living through yet another manuscript. All of these
people served to greatly improve the final product, but
I bear sole responsibility for any errors or omissions
that still exist.
Ithaca, New York August 1995
CHAPTER 1. “ITEMS HERETOFORE BUT VAGUELY KNOWN”
In 1952 a small, gray haired gentleman died at his
home on Kelvin Place in Ithaca, New York, just a short
walk from Cornell University where he had spent more
than half his life. As he had been a very active man,
far more active than many, during the last few months
of his life it was heart-wrenching to all who knew and
loved him to watch a debilitating illness slowly sap his
strength and vitality. But on the 4th of December, two
months and two days past his 88th birthday, Gilbert
Dennison Harris, who began his life during the Amer-
ican Civil War, breathed his last. He and his wife had
only one daughter, but through his teaching he left
many “children” who carried on his legacy.
EARLY LIFE AND FAMILY
Gilbert Dennison Harris was born about three miles
from Jamestown, New York on October 2, 1864. As
he liked to say, he came from “strong English stock”
(Anonymous, 1934), for his family came originally from
England. The Harris family Bible (Lopus and Ingham,
1977) indicates that an ancestor, Walter Harris, died
in England December 6, 1654, followed by Gabriel
Harris (no information) and William Harris (died in
London). The family appears to have emigrated to the
British Colonies in the early 1700s, for one Samuel
Harris, born March 5, 1697, died at Fort Edwards,
New York in 1758. His son, Job (died 1814), moved
to Connecticut where his son John was born in Reston
April 22, 1766. As a teenager John served as a private
in the Revolutionary Army (Downs and Headley 1921,
p. 466-467), and then returned to live in Vermont
where Gilbert’s grandfather, Jonathan Harris (died
Portland, May 13, 1877), was born in Halifax?. Jon-
athan married Lucy Miller and the couple raised their
seven children in the Halifax and Bennington area of
Vermont. Of the three boys and four girls, Gilbert D.
Harris’ father, Francis E. Harris, was the third son.
The second son in this family, who was killed in the
Civil War Battle of the Wilderness, also carried the
? Jonathan Harris’ birth date in the copy of the family Bible is
illegible, but appears to be June 4, 1790 or 1796 (Lopus and Ingham,
1977).
name Gilbert, a name which Francis bestowed on his
second son.
Francis E.? Harris was born in Marlboro, Vermont,
November 29, 1830. He had little opportunity for for-
mal education, something he regretted all his life, and
he made certain that would not happen to his children.
Francis Harris’ mother died when he was young and
his father remarried to one Jane Bruce of Bennington,
Vermont; this union produced four step-siblings for
Francis. At the age of eleven, Francis was hired out by
his father to local farmers. Few in the family took much
interest in the young motherless boy, except to get all
the work out of him they could. But Francis was bright
and resourceful and by the age of 17 he was engaged
in his own contracting business and employing men
much older than himself.
In 1852 Francis followed his older brothers Oscar
and Gilbert and several sisters to Chautauqua County,
New York and settled near Jamestown. At first he
worked as a carpenter and builder, but after his mar-
riage in Salem, March 29th, 1856, to Lydia Helen
Crandall he moved to a farm in the town of Ellicott.*
Lydia Crandall was born in Kinderhook, New York,
February 21, 1832 and was only four years old when
her mother and father, Stephen and Christina (Ben-
jamin) Crandall travelled with their nine children from
Albany to Buffalo on the Erie Canal, a journey that
took two weeks to complete. Eventually the Crandall
family settled in the Jamestown area (Downs and
Headley, 1921).
Francis and Lydia Harris were the parents of six
children, four girls and two boys (Downs and Headley,
1921; Lopus and Ingham, 1977); Cora Ethel (b. Ran-
dolph, New York, April 6, 1857; d. Falconer, New
York, February 22, 1946), Ida Christiana (b. Ran-
* The E. appears to be for Eugene because the son of his daughter,
Ida Harris Petersen, was named Francis Eugene Petersen (Lopus and
Ingham, 1977).
4+ A map of Ellicott in 1881 shows F. E. Harris owning two pieces
of land, lot 112a, section 10; and lot 5la, section 10 (Anonymous,
1881). This reference is in the private collection of Mr. Michael
Anzalone, Chautauqua, NY, and I am indebted to him for the loan.
10 BULLETIN 350
dolph, New York, November 18, 1858; d. Jamestown,
New York, August 15, 1919), Rollin Arthur (b. Ran-
dolph, New York, April 18, 1863; d. Washington, D.C.
January 20, 1918), Gilbert Dennison (b. Ellicott, New
York, October 2, 1864: d. Ithaca, New York, Decem-
ber 15, 1952), Jennie May (b. Ellicott, New York, May
5, 1870; d. Ellicott, New York, March 17, 1872), and
Floy Bell (b. Ellicott, New York, February 11, 1875;
d. Falconer, New York, October 13, 1968).°
Francis and Lydia Harris made certain their children
had an opportunity to gain an education, and with the
exception of Jennie May (who died in infancy) and Ida,
all of them attended college. Three of them, Rollin
(Ph.B. °85, Ph.D. ’88), Gilbert (Ph.B. ’86), and Floy
(A.B. °97), graduated from Cornell University, and Cora
graduated from Fredonia State Normal School (now
SUNY-Fredonia). After graduation Cora taught for
several years and produced a volume of children’s sto-
ries entitled, ‘““Half a Hundred Stories” (Downs and
Headley, 1921). Floy attended Cornell from 1894-1898,
receiving the A.B. degree in 1897. Downs and Headly
(1921) indicate she studied Romance Languages and
taught in Upstate New York, New Jersey, and
California’ before returning to spend part of her career
as a teacher in New York City. In 1914 she returned
to the Jamestown area and spent the rest of her days
in the small town of Falconer, not too far from the old
family farm. Gilbert’s older brother, Rollin Arthur
Harris, received his Ph.D. in mathematics from Cor-
nell in 18888 and was a Fellow in Mathematics at Clark
University in Worcester, Massachusetts until 1890
when he joined the Tidal Division of the United States
Coast and Geodetic Survey. His position was “Math-
ematician”’ and he was to do mathematical calcula-
tions; in other words, he served as a “‘computer”’ before
such work was taken over by machines. He amassed
tidal information from various sources and devised
’ Florence is in parentheses next to Floy in the family Bible and
Florence is on the gravestone in Allen Cemetery, Poland, New York.
Also, in a letter written in 1953 by Harris’ youngest sister to Kath-
erine Palmer, then Director of the Paleontological Research Insti-
tution, was signed ‘Florence B. Harris.” In this letter she was thank-
ing Dr. Palmer for sending her brother’s memorial. Therefore, she
must have used ‘Florence’ in professional and formal settings, but
within the family she was ‘Floy.” (Florence B. Harris to Katherine
Vv. W. Palmer, November 2, 1953. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY).
° Listing for Florence Belle Harris of Jamestown in The Ten-year
Book of Cornell University, IV, 1868-1908 (Anonymous, 1908, p.
268), and in Hewett (1905, Vol. IV, P. 274).
’ From a postcard she sent her brother, Floy Harris was teaching
in California in 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
8 Listing for Rollin Harris; attended 1882-85, 1886-88; Ph.B. 1885,
Ph.D. 1888, in The Ten-year Book of Cornell University, IV, 1868-
1908 (Anonymous, 1908. p. 268; also Anonymous, 1915b).
methods of reducing these data into a useful form. His
work eventually appeared as the ““Manual of Tides”
which was published in the Superintendent’s Reports
through 1907. The entire “‘Manual”’ encompasses over
1200 pages and received praise from mathematicians
and scientists from all over the world. A similar mono-
graph,“Arctic Tides”, followed in 1911. Rollin was
active in professional societies and presented papers
at various meetings (R. Harris, 1898a, 1898b)?. Rollin
would frequently join his brother, Gilbert, when he
and his students were on one of their boat trips to the
Chesapeake Bay region, and also worked with him on
part of the Louisiana Geological Survey activities (R.
Harris, 1902). Rollin eventually became Chief Math-
ematician and continued working with the Coast and
Geodetic Survey until his untimely death from heart
disease in 1918.
Gilbert spent his early childhood on a farm near
Jamesville at what was known as ‘‘Peck Settlement”
(Lopus and Ingham, 1977 p. 92) and he *.. . walked
three miles to attend the nearest high school .. .”!°
(Anonymous, 1934) which was then called the James-
ville Union School and Collegiate Institute (Palmer,
1953c). Two older sisters and an older brother pre-
ceded him at the high school and as Rollin went on to
be a teacher in the local area for a short time after his
high school graduation and he then received a schol-
arship to attend Cornell University, young Gilbert had
quite a family legacy to continue. As a young boy, he
showed a keen interest in and talent for science and
mathematics, and he had quite a talent for drawing; a
skill that was to be of great benefit to him later. Based
upon what must be his first field notebook, Harris was
making systematic recordings of observations and in-
formation about animals and birds at the age of 10.
Several of the entries noted both the generic and spe-
cific names along with the common name:
“RABBIT (LEPUS CUNICULUS) ITS BODY IS 16
INCHES TAIL 2 IT IS ALSO CALLED CONY RABBITS
DO NOT DIG AS LONG HOLES AS THE WOOD-
CHUCK ITS YOUNG ARE BROUGHT FORTH IN
JUNE 4 OR 6 IN A LITTER Rabbits are sometimes used
for food” (p. 9) [Capital letters as in the original; no punc-
tuation in original.]
“(PROCYON LOTOR) RACCOON Its body is 22 1/2
inches long tail 8 1/4 These animals frequent brooks which
abound in minnows and crabs He is a savage fighter when
° Because there will be many quoted references for Gilbert D.
Harris, those will be cited hereafter as just “Harris.”’ For citations
for any other Harris, either first names or initials will be added.
'0 According to Palmer (1953c), the distance was four miles each
way. In either case, in the winter it must have seemed like far more
than this for young Rollin and Gilbert.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 11
attacted [sic] by dogs He inhabits the wooded districts of
the U.S: A-? (p21)
Many of the pages are covered with very life-like
sketches of the creatures being described; field mice,
different kinds of fish, birds, etc. Except for the fish,
most of the animals are portrayed in some living ac-
tivity. In the last section of the notebook are systematic
records of each animal he saw and the date on which
he saw it. He also recorded the dates on which he saw
particular species of migrating birds in the spring as
they returned to the area:
“1878
Robin March 1, 1878
Blue Bird iy ae B
Hawks u” Us uv
Flicker u NS 7 hoy, SKS
Even though Harris was growing up among some of
the finest Devonian fossil beds in the country, these
fossils apparently escaped his notice at the time he was
making these early observations, for not one entry
mentions seeing a fossil. He must have been too busy
discovering the world of the living to cast his attention
toward animals no longer with us; that was to come
later.
After completing high school, Gilbert followed his
brother Rollin’s example and won a scholarship to
attend Cornell University. First however, also like his
brother before him, Gilbert taught for a brief time in
a small country school, the Dry Brook District School,
near his home; teaching by day and trying to keep warm
in an attic room with only a kerosene lamp for heat
(Palmer, 1953c). Rollin was still a student at Cornell
when Gilbert entered in 1883.
Among Gilbert’s classmates in geology at Cornell
were Charles David White, who later became Director
of the United States Geological Survey (U.S.G.S.), and
Robert T. Hill, later of the Texas Geological Survey
and U.S.G:S. It has been reported that another member
of the Class of °86 was David Starr Jordan, later a
famous ichthyologist and the first President of Stanford
University'? (Brice, 1989). But actually Jordan had
graduated with his MS. (he skipped the B.S.) in 1872
11 Small field notebook with front cover missing. No name visible,
but it was found among items known to belong to G. D. Harris and
the handwriting looks similar to items written by Harris. Earliest
date in the small notebook is May 8, 1875. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
'2 Field notebook of G. D. Harris, 1875-1878. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
13 Class list of the Class of 1886 compiled for the 35th reunion.
HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
and was a classmate of another accomplished geologist,
John C. Branner. The confusion of Jordan with Harris’
class of 1886 apparently arose because Jordan received
an honorary LL.D. that year (Jordan, 1922). So tech-
nically he was part of the class of 1886, but not really
a classmate of Harris. According to his autobiography
(Jordan, 1922) however, Jordan did have an indirect
connection to the Geology Department, for he helped
dig the foundation of McGraw Hall which was the
home of the Geology Department for almost 100 years.
According to Palmer (1953c), Harris came to Cornell
undecided on a course of study, except that he knew
it would be in science!*. The purchase of James D.
Dana’s Manual of Geology ... (Dana, 1880) helped
him make up his mind (Palmer, 1953a; and personal
communication, July 28, 1982). Little did he realize
that in a few short years he would assist Dana in pre-
paring the 4th Edition (1895) of the very book which
kindled the flames of geological fire in him.
COLLEGE DAYS AT CORNELL
At the time Harris came to Cornell, the Department
of Geology was headed by Samuel Gardner Williams.!°
It was under Professor Williams, who is remembered
more as a teacher than as a scholar, that Harris began
his geological work. Many years later Harris had the
opportunity to examine some of the same areas his old
professor had described and remarked on the dura-
bility and significance of the earlier work:
“|. it may be stated that a similar study was undertaken
by Prof. S. G. Williams and his results were published in
the American Journal of Science, 1886, vol. 31, p. 139-
145. Subsequent investigations have shown that this au-
thor was scarcely warranted in his general conclusions re-
garding the age and proper correlation of the great mass
of limestone between the gypsum beds and Oriskany in
central New York, for he believed them to be locally mod-
ified Helderbergian deposits, and hence above the Manlius
series. But this much must be said in his behalf, viz. that
he alone has seemed to grasp the true stratigraphic rela-
tions of the various deposits about Union Springs, and he
alone has emphasized the importance of the Oriskany Falls
section in elucidation of Manlius and Helderbergian stra-
tigraphy.”’ (Harris 1904, p. 55)
Even later, in his Annual Report for 1927-28, Harris
had even stronger language concerning S. G. Williams’
ability as a geologist:
'4 Statistics for the Class of °86 list Harris as ‘21 years old, 163
pounds, 5’6 1/2” tall, 7 1/4 hat size, and his future occupation is
listed as “undecided.”
'S Refer to Brice (1989) for further details on the Cornell Geology
Department.
‘‘Here it may be remarked that the good sense of Hartt!®
made Brazilian geologic investigations possible and put us
in the advanced ranks of geologic departments, then the
reign of S. G. Williams put us below zero.””!”
In December of 1885, S. G. Williams left the Geology
Department to become the first Professor of Science
and the Art of Teaching at Cornell,'* and Henry Shaler
Williams, one of Ithaca’s native sons, took control of
the Geology Department just as Harris was completing
his undergraduate work. Harris received the Bachelor
of Philosophy in 1886 and was elected to Phi Beta
Kappa (1885) and Sigma Xi (1887)!° (Downs and
Headley, 1921).
This new Williams was a better geologist than his
predecessor, and the change in department leadership
may have led to Harris’ decision to remain at Cornell
for another year of study. In this he was, again, fol-
lowing the lead of his brother, Rollin, who was con-
tinuing his studies at Cornell as well.
H. S. Williams had graduated from Yale where he
studied under James D. Dana, and had been at Cornell
since 1879 (Brice, 1989). Working with Williams at
that time was Charles S. Prosser (B.S. 83, M.S. °86,
Ph.D. ’07)*°, who served as Williams’ assistant in the
Devonian Laboratory at Cornell. Williams directed the
'e Charles Frederic Hartt (1840-1878), first professor of geology
at Cornell, 1868-1875 (Brice, 1989).
'7 Annual Report by G. D. Harris to Heinrich Ries, May 8, 1924,
p. 2. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/1/5/691, Box 2, File 2-4, Rare and
Manuscripts Collections, Kroch Library, Cornell University, Ithaca,
New York 14853 (hereafter abbreviated as RMC-KL, Cornell).
'8 Ithaca Daily Journal, May 21, 1900, p. 3.
'°“T quite approve of the idea of your getting the @ 8 K and © X
keys.”’ Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, September 20, 1890. These
personal letters were discovered at a garage sale near Ithaca, NY in
1984. They were being sold for the old postage stamps on the en-
velopes, but I recognized the name of the addressee, Gilbert Harris,
and purchased them for $5.00. They are now housed in the Harris
Archives (HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY). These letters are hereafter referred
to as ‘Private collection, WRB, now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.” The
awards and dates are also listed in a letter to Cornell President
Schurman by Gilbert D. Harris, May 1907, HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
20 Charles Smith Prosser (1860-1916). From 1888 to 1892 he
served as assiant paleontologist in the Paleobotany Division of the
United States Geological Survey at the time Harris was working
there in the late 1880s. Later Prosser was a Professor of Geology at
Washburn College in Topeka, Kansas, and spent most of his career
at Ohio State University. (Cumings, 1916). There is an interesting
twist of fate here, for Prosser, one of his teachers while Harris was
a graduate student, later returned to Cornell to do his Ph.D. (1907)
under Harris’ direction. He apparently returned to Cornell in 1900;
“Prof. Prosser, of Columbus, Ohio, takes his Ph.D. in the department
this spring.” Annual Report of the Department of Paleontology and
Stratigraphic Geology; 1899-1900 by G. D. Harris, p. 5. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
5) BULLETIN 350
laboratory for the U.S.G.S. while he taught half-time.
As Ithaca is located in one of the world’s greatest ex-
posures of Devonian age rocks, it was fitting that the
U.S.G.S. Devonian research effort be situated there.
Through very careful and detailed study of these De-
vonian rocks, Williams was able to show that there
were exceptions to a widely held belief of the time that
a distinct set of fossils characterizes each and every
geological formation. He found, for example, that the
fauna of the Hamilton Formation was repeated in the
Ithaca Formation, which at that time was an important
discovery.
Surrounded as he was by H. S. Williams and his
Devonian work at Cornell and the rich Devonian ma-
terial found in the rocks around Ithaca, it is not sur-
prising that Harris had not yet turned much attention
to the Tertiary. Later, after he focused on the Tertiary
material, he did not totally turn his back on the De-
vonian, for he published a wonderful series of little
handbooks on the fossils and geology of the Cayuga
Lake area (e.g., Harris, 1899a).
In his memorial, Cleland (1918), described H. S.
Williams as an “investigator” (a ‘“‘researcher” in to-
day’s language), “rather than a teacher.”” Williams felt
that the key to good paleontological work lay in careful
and patient collecting (Cleland, 1918). This was a les-
son that all of Williams’ students learned well. Those
students included H. E. Gregory, Stuart Weller, Charles
Prosser, Charles David White, and, of course, Gilbert
D. Harris. And it was upon the H. S. Williams model
of helping students search for answers by careful anal-
ysis of the facts available that Harris built his own
teaching techniques. According to one of his students,
Harris was at his best when sitting around a table with
a small group of students working on a set of fossils
(Plates 9, 10).2! More will be said about his teaching
and his students in a later section.
GEOLOGICAL SURVEY ACTIVITY
After the extra year at Cornell, Harris joined the
Geological Survey of Arkansas in 1888 (Palmer, 1953a,
1953b, 1953c; Olsson, 1954). The choice of positions
may have been influenced by the fact that the head of
the Arkansas Survey was another Cornellian, John C.
Branner. Branner had been a student of Charles Fred-
eric Hartt in the early days of Cornell and had worked
with Hartt on the first Imperial Geological Survey of
Brazil (Brice 1989; Figueirda, 1994). Branner’s assis-
tant, Frederick W. Simonds, was another Cornell grad-
uate who had studied with Hartt (Heroy, 1942; Brice,
1989).
*! Katherine Palmer, personal communication, July 28, 1982.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 13
When Harris began working in Arkansas, the Geo-
logical Survey under the leadership of Branner had
only been in operation about a year (Branner and Co-
ville, 1891). According to Olsson (1954), it was on this
first trip to Arkansas that Harris received his first good
introduction to the Tertiary strata of the southern
United States. Unless Harris worked at two different
locations during that time, however, he could not have
been working on Tertiary rocks on this first trip to
Arkansas. He was assigned to work with Frederic Si-
monds in Washington County, and the geologic map
for that county which is part of the published report
(Harris, 1891b; Simonds, 1891) has no rocks mapped
on it younger than Carboniferous; no Tertiary strata
occur in the county. The work with the Tertiary-Cre-
taceous boundary thus did not come until his second
trip to Arkansas in 1892:
“The first part of September, 1892, was spent in reviewing
work done along the Cretaceous-Tertiary boundary.”
(Harris, 1894b, p. 6).
Part of this initial work appeared in an Arkansas
Survey report on the geology of Washington County.
Harris prepared chapter 18, the portion for the Fay-
etteville-Huntsville area (Harris 1891b). It is interest-
ing to note that in Branner’s introduction to the pub-
lication, he listed a total of four people assisting Si-
monds with the work in Washington County, Harris
and three others, but Harris was the only one to get
his name on a chapter heading. That, plus the letter
from Simonds quoted below, suggests that the work
Harris did was of very high quality.
It seems, however, that Frederic Simonds, his su-
pervisor and co-worker on his Arkansas project, was
not totally pleased with the final publication of the
work, and did not feel Harris received the recognition
he deserved:
“As you may already possibly know that Washington Co.
Report [Simonds, 1891] is now out. It isn’t so bad after
all, but if I had it to do over again I would do a better job.
I hardly think that as much credit is given you as ought
to have been given. I gave you more but in ‘passing thro’
[sic] the press’ all that was eliminated. I was very particular
in the matter myself and had your name on the map-proof
which I sent back [from Austin, Texas] to Little Rock. But
I did not see the page-proof and did not correct the errors
until it was all printed. I speak of this at length for I don’t
want you to think me greedy.”’*?
Although his work with the Arkansas Survey started
with great promise, a severe illness brought it to a
22 Frederic Simonds to Gilbert D. Harris, September 17, 1891.
HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
sudden halt almost before it began. According to Ols-
son (1954), it took Harris several years to recover fully.
No mention 1s made in his memorials (Palmer, 1953a,
1953b, 1953c; Olsson 1954) as to the nature of the
illness, but malaria seems quite likely for it was not
uncommon at that time (see a letter from his sister
quoted below), and recovery was not an easy process.
Apparently another equally unknown incident, aside
from the illness, must have happened while Harris was
in Arkansas that could have ended his career early, for
ona post card from his sister, Floy, in 1913, she wrote:
“It was Prof. Seth [illegible] of Chicago Univ. who helped
save your life in Arkansas I'll wager. How queer the two
sisters should meet in S. Calif. to teach in the same H.S.”’?3
There is some confusion as to just when Harris joined
the United States Geological Survey (U.S.G.S.). Palm-
er (1953a) indicates it was in 1888, but in other me-
morials, she (1953b,c) gives the date as 1889, a date
supported by Downs and Headley (1921). Olsson (1954),
however, states that it was in 1890 that Harris started
working with William Healy Dall; and in this Olsson
is almost correct. The confusion results because, at
first, Harris was with the Paleozoic Division of the
Survey, no doubt on the strength of being a student of,
and having a recommendation from, H. S. Williams.
In fact, it appears he was actually working under H. S.
Williams, for in C. D. Walcott’s report for the ‘*Paleo-
zoic Division of Invertebrate Paleontology” in the
Eighth Annual Report of the Survey, is this small state-
ment in the section describing Williams’ activity for
the year ending June 30, 1887:
“Mr. C. S. Prosser assisted in the field work and Mr. S.
D. Harris added another station in Chautauqua county,
N.Y. to obtain data on the Upper Devonian.” (Powell,
1889, p. 174-175).
Mr. “S.” D. Harris must be “G.” D. Harris, especially
given the Chautauqua county reference. Also, the tim-
ing fits what has been reported by others mentioned
above.
It was after this initial work 1n the Paleozoic Division
of the U. S. G. S. that Harris worked with Dall at the
Smithsonian, but both men worked for the U.S.G:S.
Dall’s report for his Division for the year ending June
30, 1889 in the Tenth Annual U.S.G.S. Report said
this:
“... and, subsequently, Mr. Gilbert D. Harris .. . [was]
temporarily employed for some months.” (Powell, 1890,
p. 166).
3 Floy Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, September 1, 1913. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
14 BULLETIN 350
From Dall’s statement, it seems that Harris was being
engaged by Dall, at least temporarily, as early as 1889.74
At that time Dall was in the early stages of his work
on the Tertiary mollusks of Florida and the southern
Coastal Plain, and soon after both men would become
involved with a large Tertiary correlation project. It
was during the association with Dall that Harris really
became immersed in the study of the Tertiary that was
to occupy him for the rest of his days.
WASHINGTON, D.C. AND SEPARATION FROM
HIS FAMILY
Although this was not the first time Harris had been
away from home, those first few months in Washing-
ton, D. C. must have been difficult for him. Later Har-
ris would have the companionship of his brother, Rol-
lin, who began working there with the Coast and Ge-
odetic Survey in July 1890. In the meantime, there
was a Steady stream of letters from his family in the
Jamestown area keeping him apprised of family affairs
and the deteriorating condition of his father. In ad-
dition, sometime in 1889 or 1890, Harris became en-
gaged to Clara Stoneman who was living at Harmony,
near Jamestown. So young Gilbert, now age 24, was
separated from his fiancé and his family at a time when
much was happening. His father’s health was failing,
his mother was not well either, and they were appar-
ently trying to sell the family farm.’°
In March of 1890 Harris’ sister Floy wrote to him
about their father:
‘‘Pa walked to town and back Friday, and did not seem
to notice it. I weigh about a pound more than Ma, but she
is getting better... . I do not know whether Cora [oldest
sister and the first born child] will teach the summer term,
if she does I think I shall go and study Grammar, Physi-
ology, Physical Geography, and perhaps Algebra. Then
there will be a number of weeks to take music lessons. . . .
I do not see when I am going to learn Stenography and
Type-writing [sic]. I think that if I had a typewriter I could
practice considerable [sic] on it. The younger I could begin
>4 Harris was definitely working at the Smithsonian Institution by
June, 1890, because a letter from his Mother mentions his work
there. (Lydia Harris to Gilbert Harris, June 29, 1890. Private col-
lection, WRB, now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.)
25°" that Rollin will take up his abode in Washington.” A ref-
erence in a letter from Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, July 6,
1890. Private collection, WRB, now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
26 An interesting fact that has emerged from a study of the letters
written to Harris while he was in Washington, D. C. is the quality
of the mail service in 1890-92. It is not uncommon to see on the
envelopes, for example, a postmark for Jamestown with the date
March 4 at midnight and another on the back showing a Washington,
D. C. postmark for March 5 at 10:30 AM. Apparently one and two
day service between Jamestown and Washington, D. C. was common
in 1890.
the better, it seems to me, but Pa keeps putting it off to
some future time ... Nellie Drummy and I went to a
{movie] matinee a few weeks ago. I never went to one
before’ <7..3°27
Whereas his brother, Rollin, who was completing
his studies at Clark University, could get home that
summer, Gilbert’s geological work required him to
spend the summer in the field. In May his sister Ida
noted this fact and passed along some family news:
“T think ma’s [sic] health is improving. She grows fleshy
a little and has a good appetite. Sometimes pa [sic] feels
a little blue because land does not sell higher, though he
rather thinks he can sell eight acres of the west end of this
farm for a thousand dollars, to a Swede man.... Rollin
writes he thinks to come home about the tenth of June. I
am afraid you will not be at home much this summer if
your are going in the field to work.”’?8
A few days later, Harris received a note from his oldest
sister, Cora:
**Ma feels so strong lately that she has to go and tear up
the earth in certain places around the currant bushes. Ida’s
being home enables her to do about as she pleases and I
guess she enjoys herself very well now. I think pa [sic] feels
a little disappointed in not selling more of his farm this
spring and does not feel as much interested in anything as
it is necessary to be for enjoyment.... I have not been
feeling very well lately I rather believe it is malaria for one
thing.’’??
A few weeks later while Harris was doing field work
around Yorktown, his father’s condition took a turn
for the worse. First from sister Ida and then from Cora:
“T have not very pleasant news to tell, but presume you
had rather receive it than no news. Pa has been running
down for several weeks, and Saturday night he was take
[sic] vomiting and has been sick since just as usual. We
sent for Dr. Scott this morning but it is now quite late in
the afternoon and he has not come yet.... Hoping you
are enjoying yourself in Yorktown .. .”°°
“‘Father is yet sick in bed. He has been up very little for
over a week. The doctor thought yesterday that he was a
little better. Dr. Scott the one employed now calls it ul-
ceration of the stomach, says he thinks that is what has
ailed him for 20 years. He thinks however that it will pass
away this time without breaking. I tended him last night.
He was 1n considerable pain. The Dr. thinks the particular
27 Floy Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, March 2, 1890. Private col-
lection, WRB, now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
?8 Tda Harris to Gilbert Harris, May 4, 1890. Private collection,
WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
2° Cora Harris to Gilbert Harris, May 11, 1890. Private collection,
WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
*° Ida Harris to Gilbert Harris, June 10, 1890. Private collection,
WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE i)
place of disease is in the pyloric canal a very delicate
place.””*!
As if all this was not enough, the family was full of
mixed emotions about Rollin, who was completing his
work at Clark University, because he had no “posi-
tion” before him, and he had been married on June
13, 1890. Even that event had not been without its
problems:
“We rather cotted [sic] on Rollin’s coming home to help
care for him [their father], but what do you suppose, I was
never more surprised in my life. There was a dreadful rain
here Thursday but about one o’clock Rollin came with his
feet wet having waded some large mud puddles on his way
from town. He could hardly stop for dinner and could not
change his socks so pressing was the business in getting to
Uncle Rob’s to tell Emily [Doty, Rollin’s fiancé] that the
wedding must be postponed until another day on account
of his being delayed on the train. Well he harnessed up
Bennie our new colt with some feelings of regret I suppose
that the carriage was not repainted [Rollin had sent home
several requests to have the carriage painted**] and took
her [Emily] riding to the Burg for a preacher Elder Stone.
On Friday afternoon Mr. Wright came over and invited
us all there Friday eve [sic]. The knot was to be tied at
half-past seven but Rollin didn’t start from here until eight
so we presume she [Emily] got a little fidgety. He [Rollin]
put on one pair of pants and found a hole in them so he
had to change and you know it generally takes him quite
awhile to get ready. Thats [sic] the last we have seen or
heard from him. He took the horse and carriage so we
suppose they [are] riding around the country somewhere.
R. [Rollin] says he intends to live over there and he’ll have
anice room. He does not talk as though he had any position
and we all think it is strange piece of business. None of us
attended the wedding[.] we [sic] had a good excuse on
account of pa’s [sic] sickness. I did not want to go. I always
trusted that he had sense enough not to marry till he at
least had some place in the world and as it appears now
I and the rest feel much disappointed. I should not think
that she would want to marry under the circumstances.’’*?
Gilbert heard this news from his mother as well.
Like many mothers, his had a problem understanding
that geological field work, especially in a coastal area,
was not necessarily a vacation. Note that in these let-
ters, and apparently always, his mother, Lydia Harris,
wrote without formal sentences:
“You have had quite a vacation the change will probably
do you good even if your work was as hard as at the
31 Cora Harris to Gilbert Harris, June 15, 1890. private collection,
WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
32 Cora Harris to Gilbert Harris, May 11, 1890. Private collection,
WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
33 Cora Harris to Gilbert Harris, June 15, 1890. private collection,
WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
{Smithsonian] Institution. I think you are having a nice
chance to see the country, and living in an atmosphere of
intelligence you must feel that you are improving all the
time. It was with a feeling of pride that I read the article
you put in the Journal** a few weeks ago and how I did
wish that Rollin could do something worthy of note. You
must know how we all feel about his marrying in his cir-
cumstances. I have nothing against Emily only marrying
under such circumstances, but we must hope for the best
he is willing to work and pa [sic] thinks of getting him
survaying [sic] instruments if he does not find any thing
to do... . It is about haying time. I don’t know how ours
will be done here . . . the prospect is not very encouraging
to farmers. Butter 12 cents a pound and [selling] slow at
that we used to think if we had a package of butter it was
the same as cash, but now they hardly want it at any price.
I don’t see how any one can pay for a farm if they run in
debt much now days. ... When do you think of coming
home?’’*>
While all the problems at home were coming to him
via the mails, Harris had prepared his first professional
publication, a one page paper on the fossil gastropod
genus 7erebellum (Harris, 1890). Although the actual
publication came a few months later, the dateline at
the close of his paper is April 3, 1890.
By late July, one family concern had resolved itself.
Rollin had a new position in Washington, but Francis
Harris was not improving and Gilbert was not able to
get home:
“Pa is worse. The Dr. was here last evening and this morn-
ing. Pa vommits [sic] and is in considerable pain, but he
rested some last night. Day before yesterday he walked
down to Mrs. Wrample’s and back, and he ate some steamed
fish, perhaps he over did and made him worse. . . Ida and
I milk the cows and do the rest of the chores when Ma
does not get ahead of us. I have been wishing we lived in
town so that I could go to school this fall without boarding
up town at some strangers’ house... . P.S. July 14, 1890-
Pa had a very bad night, but he is more quite [sic] this
morning. .. . Ma thinks Pa isa little better. The Dr. thinks
that he is troubled with the Catarrh of the Stomach now
more than the Ulceration of the Stomach.’’*°
“Pa is no better yet as far as we can tell and of course
we know he must grow poorer and weaker. He has not left
the bed-room [sic] for a week. He not even sits up to have
his bed made. We three [sisters] take turns 1n lying on the
lounge nights and do what little we can. More than half
34 The article referred to in the letter appears to be the professional
paper he published in The American Geologist on the fossil gastropod
genus 7erebellum (Harris, 1890), for nothing written by Harris could
be found in the Jamestown Evening Journal around this date. He
evidently sent a pre-print of his paper to his mother.
35 Lydia Harris to Gilbert Harris, June 29, 1890. Private collection,
WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
36 Floy Harris to Gilbert Harris, July 13-14, 1890. Private collec-
tion, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
16 BULLETIN 350
his nights in the past week have been spent in pain and
restlessness. The doctor comes every day but seems to do
little good as yet. We can do the work very well, that is I
mean the caring for pa [sic]. Ma gets quite discouraged
and nervous once in awhile [sic] but still she has a good
appetite. Of course I keep hoping each day may find him
a little better. Gene intended to do our haying but we hear
he has been unwell with a lame side so we are looking for
some-one [sic] else,... 1 do not worry about that any. I
hope you will make us the visit you intended to this sum-
mer. Pa would not expect you to work in haying if you
were here. Pa said to’day [sic], ‘Of course if I grow worse
and am liable to die it would best for him to come awhile
[sic] Of course we’re always glad to see you, but you must
time your visit when most convenient to you unless some-
thing happens to decide... . I think Rollin’s getting a po-
sition has given pa [sic] a great peace of mind.”’?’
Harris’ Mother wrote to him on July 29th with what
appeared to be some good news:
“T think he [Harris’ Father] is improving as fast as could
be expected after a fast of two weeks he sits up part of the
time and lies on the lounge the remainder of the day it
seems good to him to get out of his bedroom again how
long it will last we can’t tell but hope a long time as I have
not the strength to take care of him that I used to have
and it makes one feel so bad to see another suffering with
no power to help them he is now about the same as when
Rollin left... I think Rollin could not have found a nicer
girl [Emily Doty] any where [sic] and hope he will proove
[sic] worthy of her.... It has been a very discouraging
season for farmers the present our haying is not half done
it rains so much of the time they can’t work more than
one day in a week some of the time so some of it will be
poor quality. . .. Brother William [Harris’ Uncle] died quite
suddenly they called him to breakfast in the morning he
felt as well as usual until he went to get up he felt suffocated
and he grew worse until afternoon the same day he died
they called it influenza the day before he was in his shop
at work I suppose. ... You did not tell me when you are
coming home.’”**
Just 14 days after that letter was written, on August
12, 1890, Francis Harris died.*?
CLARA STONEMAN AND GILBERT HARRIS
In the midst of the anxiety caused by his father’s
failing health, Harris had the joy of his engagement to
Clara Stoneman. Judging by her surviving letters to
*’ Floy Harris to Gilbert Harris, July 20, 1890. Private collection,
WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
8 Lydia Harris to Gilbert Harris, July 29, 1890. Private collection,
WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
*° Funeral services were held on Wednesday, August 13, 1890, at
the Harris home on Buffalo Street. He was buried at the family plot
in Allen Cemetery. (Funeral notice, page 4, Jamestown Evening Jour-
nal, Friday, August 15, 1890.
him, the pair were deeply in love, and wrote to each
other almost every week when they were separated:
sometimes more often. In a letter to him on May 10th,
1890, she says:
‘‘Marian wants to know how I am going to stand it after
I get to Washington, D. C. without a letter twice a week.
I guess I can manage to stand it some way.’’*°
In another letter after he had been home for a short
visit, probably for his father’s funeral, Clara wrote:
““When ever I close a letter I always wonder if you un-
derstand how much I mean it to mean when I say I am,
Yours truly, Clara’”™*}
There is little record of Clara’s early life or of her
family. The survey maps of 1881 (Anonymous, 1881.
p. 116-117) show that a ‘*B. Stoneman” owned prop-
erty on Chautauqua Lake, New York (adjacent lots
108a and 55a, section 3, and lot 233a in section 22)
near the town of Lakewood, not too far from James-
town. One “C. Stoneman” (possibly Clara’s uncle)
owned lot 100a, section 16. Some of these Stoneman
properties must have had magnificent pine trees on
them, for it is said that Gilbert was attracted to Clara
as much by the primeval pines on the family property
as by Clara’s beauty (Palmer, 1953c). Many years later
some of the timber on the old Stoneman property was
used in building the Harris home at 126 Kelvin Place
in Ithaca, New York. Even though some of Clara’s
letters came from Harmony, New York and she speaks
of their home there, the 1881 map of Harmony does
not list any property owned by the Stoneman family.
The family either rented a house there or purchased it
after 1881.*"
From information in several letters, Clara Stoneman
appears to have had at least one and possibly four
sisters. In one letter to Gilbert she said, **. . . if the girls
will keep still long enough I will try and write a few
words more.’’*3; from this We might conclude that
Clara was the oldest. There is one envelope, post-
marked at Gettysburg, Pennsylvania on June 25th,
1918, addressed to ““Miss Bertha Stoneman, Ph.D., in
care Prof. Harris, Cornell Heights, Ithaca, N.Y.’’, but
forwarded to “212 W. Falconer St., Falconer, NY.”
From another letter it appears that Bertha attended
#° Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, May 10, 1890. Private col-
lection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
+! Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, September 27, 1890. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
* The letters from Clara Stoneman begin on May 3rd, 1890 and
continue in groups until Jan 1892. I assume the gaps are when they
were together either in Washington, D. C. or in Jamestown.
+3 Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, September 27, 1890. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 17
Cornell for some of her college work, for from Bertha,
“*.. [Aunt Kate] wanted to learn the Cornell pronun-
ciation [of Latin]. . .”44 Alumni records show that Ber-
tha Stoneman did, indeed, attend Cornell from 1888-
1889 and again from 1891-1896. She completed two
degrees, the Bachelor of Philosophy (Ph.B.) in 1894
and the Doctor of Science (D.Sc., not a Ph.D.) in 1896
(Anonymous 1908, p. 507; 1922, p. 312; Hewett, 1905,
v. IV, p. 523). Her doctorate was among the earliest
earned by a woman at Cornell, for the very first one
was awarded in 1895 (Conable, 1977). These same
University records indicate that in the early part of
this century Bertha Stoneman was a lecturer at Hu-
guenot College in Cape Wellington Province, South
Africa*> about the same time one of Harris’ former
students, Carlotta Maury, was also a lecturer there;
there is no record of any communication between the
two, but Bertha Stoneman did stay in South Africa for
many years. In 1932 Harris wrote to a former student:
“We are expecting Mrs [sic] H.’s [sic] sister from S. Africa
in Feb. but fear she will be so wedded to the dark continent
that she will be returning after a few months’’*¢
In addition to mentioning Bertha in her letters, Clara
refers to a Marian, who was probably also a sister: “*. . .
but Basie and Marian soon came up [to her room]
..’47 In one letter she speaks of how cold her feet are
as she writes, but she will soon go to bed and “...
make Basie get them warm.’** Thus, Basie must have
been a sister or at least a cousin. But Basie may be the
familiar name of Bertha and not a separate person. It
seems she had no brothers, for in a letter to Gilbert
after describing some errands for her father she said:
“You see I have to be a son as well as a daughter in this
family. I generally manage to find something to do in the
house but when I can’t I can take a horse to be shod... .”’*°
Both families were engaged in farming, but the Sto-
nemans appear to have been more landowners than
actually working farmers:
44 Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, July 20, 1890. Private col-
lection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
45 This is confirmed by a letter from Harris to C. H. Stoelting,
February 23, 1914, in which he requests an item, “*. . . for my sister-
in-law Dr. B. Stoneman, Huguenot College . . .”
46 Gilbert D. Harris to Floyd Hodson, “Dear Hodsoni”, December
29, 1932. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
47 Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, September 27, 1890. Private
Collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
48 Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, May 17, 1890. Private col-
lection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
49 Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, September 24, 1890. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
‘‘As for the thrashers they have not made their appearance
yet. They will in due time however.’°°
In several letters she speaks of “hired hands” and “‘the
girl who works for us”, so her family must have been
reasonably well off financially. After 1881, the family
seems to have had homes in Harmony and near Lake-
wood, both of which are near Jamestown and Chatau-
qua Lake:
“*... when I went away from home [in Harmony] I had to
go to Lakewood... . Some weeks it would be much nicer
if I had my mail come to Lakewood .. .””>!
In one letter Clara speaks of “hard times’, but how
much is real and how much is a young girl’s attempt
at humor, is difficult to say:
“Yesterday and to day [sic] we entertained the thrashers.
We did not have a very hard time of it. They did not get
here until 4 o’clock yesterday and were through by ten this
morning. We had only 180 bu. of oats,-a very small quan-
tity in comparison with the [illegible] bushels some years.
I think we will have to shut up the house this winter and
take old Jim” and the rest of the horses and go ‘cousining’.
We have hardly enough potatoes to last until spring. It
looks as though we are on the verge of starvation! If the
wolf comes to the door we will have shoot him and eat
him. But I won’t cross that bridge until I come to it.”%3
From what Clara wrote Gilbert, her grandmother
Stoneman must have been quite a personality for her
time:
“Aunt R.[ebecca] says that Grandmother Stoneman was
the first woman in this county who dared to drive her own
horse to J-[amestown] and other places without a man
along. In those days it was considered a very disgraceful
thing to do so, but my grandmother did not mind what
the people thought about her and continued to do her own
driving. And now I suppose her spirit has cropped out in
mess2
As with most families of the time, the Stonemans
and the Harrises kept horses both for work and trans-
portation. In family letters, along with the sad news
5° Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, September 27, 1890. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
5! Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, October 12, 1890. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
52 Given the nature of the sentence the ‘“‘Jim” must be a horse,
but according to another letter she wrote to Gilbert Harris on No-
vember 8, 1890, there was a hired hand on the Stoneman farm named
Jim as well.
*3 Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, October 2, 1890, Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
°4 Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, October 19, 1890. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
18 BULLETIN 350
that Gilbert’s father was ill and not improving, there
was news about a sick horse as well:
. we have been quite excited over our sick colt for a
week past we had to dose him with powders and drops
the same as a person every hour the horse Dr. came five
times to see him he is improving very fast .. .””>>
“Our colt seems to fed [sic] pretty well but no one has
used him since he was sick to see if he stands it all right.
He and Belle run out to pasture together.’’*°
“Yesterday I got Jim shod and the buggy fixed’’®’
Mixed with the less than good news about his father
and family problems, Harris was receiving letters like
this from Clara who was then in Harmony, New York:
‘““Marian and I have been to Ashville this evening and got
a whole armful [sic] of mail, but nothing among it all
satisfied me as your letter did which I did not see at first
and and [sic] I was worried for fear it had not come. . . .””**
His fiance was also mindful to keep him abreast of any
events of geological interest in the Jamestown area,
even while he was in Yorktown, Virginia living in a
fisherman’s shack:
“T believe there is a gas well being drilled . . . if that is of
interest to you.... It is called the Chase Well.’”*?
And she related events not so geologic in character
while expressing her concern for him:
“T was glad to hear of your safe arrival at your destination
[Yorktown, Virginia], and I hope that you will enjoy your-
self and be sure and do not get sick. . . . [had a rather swell
ride the other day. I came home from Jamestown on the
[street] cars and started to walk up the R. R. track. I met
the men who work on the track and the boss told me that
I might ride up to our crossing on the hand car. So I got
on and I came up in a hurry. It was much better than
walking up in the sun.”’ [Emphasis in the original.]°°
Harris was in Yorktown in April and June, 1890 on
assignment for the U.S.G.S. to study the well known
Miocene beds of the Yorktown area. By this time, Har-
ris was well and truly into Tertiary work, for Dall’s
°° Lydia Harris to Gilbert Harris, June 29, 1890. private collection,
WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
°° Floy Harris to Gilbert Harris, July 20, 1890. Private collection,
WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
57 Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, September 24, 1890. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
*8 Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, May 3, 1890. Private col-
lection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
5° Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, May 17, 1890. Private col-
lection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
°° Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, June 7, 1890. Private col-
lection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
report to the Director of the U.S.G.S. for June, 1890,
lists Harris with a promotion, “Gilbert D. Harris, as-
sistant paleontologist’’, and Dall describes Harris’ trip
to Virginia:
‘““Mr. Harris has assisted in the routine work and has been
also able to give a few weeks to field work on the Yorktown,
Virginia, peninsula, all that our scanty allotment would
permit of undertaking. ... In the month of June Mr. G.
D. Harris was sent by me to the vicinity of Yorktown,
Virginia, to make some collections from the Miocene of
that region and verify some stratigraphic details which
were in doubt. He was absent about two weeks with sat-
isfactory results.”’ (Powell, 1891a, p. 109, 111).
Based on his Yorktown work, Harris prepared a
manuscript, complete with outcrop sketches and fossil
descriptions. This manuscript was not published in its
entirety, however, until 1993 when the Paleontological
Research Institution published a facsimile of Harris’
handwritten manuscript with annotations by Lauck W.
Ward (Ward, 1993). The failure to publish this work
is particularly puzzling in light of what Dall had to say
about Harris’ Yorktown study in the same report quot-
ed above:
“This work has been carried out in an exceptionally sat-
isfactory manner, geologically speaking and will be incor-
porated in the correlation essay.”’ (Powell, 1891a, p. 109).
Unless there were two different studies made, Dall must
have been referring to Harris’ Yorktown work.
Druid Wilson, a former student of Harris’ at Cornell
in the early 1930s and a paleontologist with the U. S.
Geological Survey for many years, kept the manuscript
in a file cabinet in his office. He thought it was part of
material he inherited from Julia Gardner, distin-
guished Cenozoic paleontologist and his predecessor
in that office. According to Wilson®!, even though the
manuscript had no name on it, everyone who saw it
recognized its value and most recognized Harris’ hand-
writing as well. In his mind, these two things preserved
it over the years.
As to why it was never published, Wilson felt that
based upon the writing style and the fact that there was
no name on it, there was never any intention to publish
it, at least not as it was. Wilson thought that the manu-
script represented notes that Harris put together for
Dall as they were preparing their large Neocene vol-
ume. Information from this 1890 manuscript was, in-
deed, used by Dall and Harris in their U. S. Geological
Survey Bulletin 84 (1892, p. 59-62). About 20 years
*! Personal communication, July 12, 1995, and comments in a
letter from Druid Wilson to John Pojeta, May 4, 1982, a copy of
which is in the HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 19
after this, Clarke and Miller (1912) also used some of
the information.
“The above section was prepared by G. D. Harris, who
made a careful study of the Yorktown cliffs for Dr. Dall.”
(Clark and Miller, 1912, p. 162).
In 1980, Ward and Blackwelder mentioned the York-
town work of Harris again:
“The first comprehensive treatment of the strata on the
York river in the vicinity of Yorktown, Va. was done by
Harris (1890 unpub. manuscript), Dall and Harris (1892)
described some of the beds in this area but made no at-
tempt to name them.” (Ward and Blackwelder, 1980, p.
28).
The eventual publication of Harris’ original report, as
annotated by Lauck Ward (1993), is not only histori-
cally valuable for the geological descriptions it contains
(many localities are no longer available for study); the
manuscript is also a good example of Harris’ beautiful
penmanship and skill at illustration. Even though orig-
inally Wilson did not feel the manuscript was intended
for publication in its original state, the annotations
added by Ward have made it, in Wilson’s opinion, a
very valuable addition to paleontological literature.°?
That opinion is shared by a reviewer of the volume
who wrote:
“Knowledge of the stratigraphic localities along the York
River would be lost but for the meticulous descriptions of
them by Harris as reproduced by Ward... .
“This book is recommended to serious students of strati-
graphic paleontology of the eastern United States.” (Moore,
El 995sps 113):
High praise, indeed, for a manuscript that was written
over 100 years earlier.
From the comments in Clara’s letters, Harris’ quar-
ters in a fisherman’s shack at Yorktown must not have
been very comfortable for him. She continued sending
the geological news:
“Tam glad to know that you are through with your present
work in Yorktown and are going to get back into more
comfortable quarters [in Washington, D. C.]. How dissa-
greeable [sic] it must be wherever you go to be troubled
with bed-bugs. . . . I was reading this morning that the N.
Y. State Geologist had been travelling through Missouri
and some of the Southern States inspecting fossils. I tried
to find out something about the Harmony oil well but did
not make out much. They are about ready to commence
drilling and I believe the name of the man who has charge
of it is Charles Dean... .”°
©? Personal communication, July 12, 1995.
®3 Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, June 15, 1890. Private col-
lection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
In one letter, written on July 20th, she enclosed an
undated newspaper clipping about ‘Searching for oil”
near Panama, New York and stated that they were:
“... down 1400 feet, and the drill is progressing at the
rate of 100 feet daily. It is hoped to reach 2000 feet by
Saturday night. As yet there are no indications of oil or
gas.’’°*
Then four days later on July 24th, there was a small
note enclosed with her letter with information from
the morning newspaper:
“1st. The J. E. Dean well near Panama [NY] has proved
a dry hole at a depth of 1500 ft. No signs of oil or gas.
2nd. The well that has been drilled by Dean & Co. near
Panama has been plugged up and a man left to watch it®.
It is believed by some that gas has been found.’’6°
Clara’s letters reflect how much in love they were
and how difficult it was for them to be separated:
““How I wish you could only be here even for a little while.
I would like to feel your dear arms around me and to put
my arms around your neck and be ever close, close to my
darling and receive one of your precious kisses and then
maybe I would let you go but it would be so hard. [signed]
Your Clara.’’®’
“I was sadly dissappointed [sic] last night not to receive
your regular letter which usually reaches me on Saturday
morning. What was the reason, dear one? I trust that it
was not because you are sick that you were unable to write,
yet I fear that that was the reason. It worries me so to be
so in doubt. I went to sleep last night with thoughts of my
Gilbert in mind and awoke this morning with a sense of
some trouble over me. But I have tried to think that ev-
erything was all right and to make myself believe that you
had some good reason for not writing. How I wish I was
with you then I would know. I received your letter of
Monday in good time and have had to make that do for
two.’°8
The closer the time came to their wedding, the harder
it was:
“T don’t know that I want the time to go by any faster but
I do wish this waiting was through and the time had at
°4 Clipping attached to a letter from Clara Stoneman to Gilbert
D. Harris, July 20, 1890. Private collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
®5 A small article about plugging a gas well near Harmony, NY
appeared on page 1, Jamestown Evening Journal, July 21, 1890.
°6 Note enclosed with a letter from Clara Stoneman to Gilbert
Harris, July 24, 1890. Private collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
®7 Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, June 18, 1890. Private col-
lection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
68 Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, July 20, 1890. Private col-
lection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
20 BULLETIN 350
last come where we could be together. Oh! I do wish it so
much.”’°?
“T can hardly realize that in so short a time there will
be no more of this uncertain communication. Then how
happy, happy we'll be.”’’”°
In her letters were repeated references to her fear of
illness. Any time there was a break in his schedule of
letters, Clara feared for his health:
““When she [Marian] came back [from the post office] she
said she had bad news to tell me, that there was no letter
from Wash. with your handwriting upon it. That worried
me somewhat for I feared that either there was no letter
from you or that you were sick and someone else had
written for you but as she looked rather pleasant I con-
cluded that nothing special had happened.” [Harris had
typed the address. At that time Clara had never seen a
typewriter.]’!
Her concern was not misplaced, for after returning to
Washington following his father’s funeral, Harris must
have injured his back:
“T am sorry for your lame back. It is not pleasant I am
well aware. I hope it is well by this time. I am afraid you
are trying to do to [s/c] much muscle work. You seem to
be so busy all the time. I am afraid it is not well for you.”’””
“T hope your lame back has ‘let up’ before this, but if it
has not I wish you would see if you could do something
to make it do so. ‘An ounce of prevention is worth a pound
of cure’ you know. Possibly though, you will not thank me
to quote such a worn out proverb as that for your bene-
the deaths of friends and relatives alike. This must
have had an effect on Harris, especially news about the
death of children as he was about to be married:
“Dr. Wellman has lately lost his little boy about two years
old’’’>
“One of the Forbes twins died Saturday night. It [sic]
had inflammation of the brain. They thought the cause of
its [sic] death was falling off the veranda and hitting its
[sic] head on a stone.”’’°
“Awhile ago I read that Blance Ames Weate had a
daughter born and this week I read again that her boy was
dead.”’”’
There was communication between the two families
and Clara was aware of Francis Harris’ condition, for
she wrote to Harris:
““Floy’s [Gilbert’s youngest sister] letter was very nice and
interesting. I was much amused at the way she described
some of the happenings. . . . It is too bad that your father
has to be sick so much and it seems strange that he can
stand so many sick spells. I wish I could go down to see
your folks but I cant [sic] see the way to do so soon.”’’8
“I am sorry to know that the state of affairs at your
home is not more cheerful and I would think your father
would be about discouraged. It is so bad for your mother
to have so much care upon her now. It is really too bad
neither of you two boys can be at home just when your
folks need you the most. But I suppose that is the way of
the world.”’’”
But all this constant correspondence was not without
fitee2/3
But all was well eventually:
“Tam glad to know that your back does not trouble you
now and hope it will not again.’’”*
Living as most of us do in modern urban settings
we forget what life was like in a farm community before
the advent of antibiotics and the modern medical care
that we enjoy today. Illnesses and injuries we do not
even consider important were often life-threatening in
1890. In several family letters there are references to
°? Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, October 23, 1890.
Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
7° Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, November 8, 1890. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
7! Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, October 2, 1890. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
7? Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, October 2, 1890. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
73 Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, October 5, 1890. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
74 Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, October 12, 1890. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
its difficulties for young Clara, especially when she con-
sidered that Gilbert was all alone in that big city [his
brother did not arrive until late July 1890], and that
he might not have his “position” renewed:
“The mosquitos are so thick I am afraid they will eat me
up so if this letter should stop suddenly in the middle of
a sentence you may know what has happened. I have the
ammonia bottle standing near. ... I was quite surprised
to learn that Rollin will take up his abode in Washington.
That will be very nice, especially if you can live with him,
although I should think you would dislike to leave Miss
Brown. But then I suppose if that ‘old maid’ (I would be
so polite as to say ‘elderly maiden’) entangles you by her
wiles you would then have to leave him [Rollin] anyway.
7 Ida Harris to Gilbert Harris, May 4, 1890. Private collection,
WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
7° Tda Harris to Gilbert Harris, June 10, 1890. Private collection,
WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
7’ Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, October 30, 1890. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
78 Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, June 28, 1890. Private col-
lection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
7? Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, July 28, 1890. Private col-
lection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 21
The ‘E.M.’ better ‘watch out’ or she may hear something
heavy drop some day and feel it too[.]... You did not
write whether you had received your appointment this year
or not so I concluded you did not know about it when you
wrote last. I suppose that will come around all right in
time.”’®°
The visit Gilbert’s mother wanted and Clara desired
came as a result of his father’s death in August of 1890.
His stay at home was a short one, however, for Clara’s
letters resume on September 13, 1890. Apparently he
and Clara had talked during their time together about
their future and his aspirations, and about their beliefs.
Gilbert, also, must have spent some time with his pro-
spective father-in-law, for Clara wrote:
“T would be very glad to help you with your writing when
I get to Washington, that is, if you think I can write good
enough but you know that socks are prone to holiness and
I am afraid that yours will be in that condition by the time
I get there. Maybe if I get up extra early in the morning I
can attend to both. . . . I presume that you think my father
is not very talkitive [sic], well he is not I must say, but
still if you give him time to collect his ideas he would
make quite a conversationalist ... I tell you all this to
show you that he is not dumb as you may hear some-
times. ... If staying away from church for a few weeks
throws you so far off the track what do you suppose I must
be who has not been to church from nearly a year’’*!
This reference to church gives a glimpse into the
spiritual side of Harris’ life, of which, unfortunately,
we otherwise know very little. There must have been
at least some family tradition of belief and church
going, for the family kept a large Bible in which im-
portant events were recorded (Lopus and Ingham,
1977), and family letters contain various religious ref-
erences:
“T am leading about as simple a life as the shepherds did
at Christ’s birth. This is some comfort to think that the
angel appeared to them first.’’*?
“Ida and I went to church®? to’day [sic], the first time
for months.’’*4
In their description of Harris, Downs and Headley
(1921, p. 467) state that, “*... in his religious views
[Harris was a] liberal.’’, but there is no indication what
80 Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, July 6, 1890. Private collec-
tion, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
8! Clara Stoneman to Gilbert D. Harris, September 13, 1890. Pri-
vate collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
82 Cora Harris to Gilbert Harris, May 11, 1890. Private collection,
WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
83 The actual church affiliation is not known, but Harris’ funeral
services were held at the Unitarian Church in Ithaca, NY.
84 Floy Harris to Gilbert Harris, July 20, 1890. Private collection,
WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
denomination or the source of the information®>. The
funeral services for his mother, Lydia Harris, who died
in 1918, were officiated by Reverend Walter Taylor of
the First Unitarian Church of Jamestown. Likewise,
in 1952, Rev. Ralph N. Helverson, of the First Uni-
tarian Church of Ithaca, officiated at Harris’ funeral.*°
There is, however, no record in the archives of the
First Unitarian Church of Ithaca to indicate that Harris
was a member of that church, at least not an active
member.®’ Judging by her letters, early in their rela-
tionship, certainly by the time Gilbert returned home
for his father’s funeral, if not before, Clara realized that
religion was important to him. Nevertheless, there are
few references to religion in any of Harris’ writings or
letters.
Clara’s family appears to have had about the same
kind of religious background, but one of her sisters was
more involved in attending church and participating
in its activities than Clara. In a letter to Gilbert, Clara
describes Basie’s work of teaching some Chinese work-
ers to read and explains how she and a friend felt that
after working all week, it wasn’t right for Basie and her
friend, Lillian Cook, to ride eight miles every Sunday
to give them English reading lessons:
“But you can’t make Basie think it is anything but right.
She would think she was not doing her Christian duty if
she did not keep at it as long as she had a breath left.’’88
Clara seemed a bit concerned about her own lack of
“church going’’. She said:
“This morning when I ought to have been writing to you
I was breaking the Sabbath by gathering hickory nuts.’’®?
“T suppose as it is the 5th of Oct., that you are enjoying
a sermon at ‘our’ not ‘your’ church this evening. It has
been so long since I have been to church that I fear I shall
not know how to behave myself when I do go.”°°
While preparing for his upcoming wedding and try-
ing to get his room in Washington, D.C. cleaned and
85 Statistics for the Class of ‘86 list Harris as “Unitarian” and
“Republican’’, but that he was, “not a church member.”
86 Ithaca Journal, December 5, 1952.
8” Harris was not listed in the “Outstanding Unitarian Laymen”
section of the booklet printed as part of the 75th Anniversary cel-
ebration of the church in Ithaca. Archives of the First Unitarian
Church of Ithaca. Number 4590, Box 5, File 5-43 (Church History).
RMC-KL, Cornell. Helverson did not recall Harris being a member
of his church; letter to W. R. Brice, July 15, 1995. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
88 Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, September 24, 1890. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
8° Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, October 5, 1890. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
°° Clara Stoneman to Gilbert Harris, October 5, 1890. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
22 BULLETIN 350
refurbished for his bride, Harris had not overlooked
his professional activity. In fact, he was very much
involved with the large report that Dall was preparing:
‘For the rest Mr. Harris has been busy collating and sifting
the geologic literature of the Plio-Miocene under my di-
rection, for the purposes of the prospective essay, which,
as elsewhere mentioned has been carried as far as Virginia
in the circuit of the coast. . . . In this matter [the correlation
paper literature review] I have had valuable assistance
from Mr. G. D. Harris, assistant paleontologist of the Di-
vision of Cenozoic Paleontology” (Powell, 189 1a, p. 109-
110, 112).
Then, as if he didn’t have enough to do with his
duties at the U.S.G.S. office, Harris prepared his sec-
ond publication using data he must have acquired when
he was at home for his father’s funeral. The news that
Clara sent him about the drilling activity in the area
apparently started him thinking and when he was home
he sought out the parties who were involved. He was
able to see not only the drilling logs, but the actual
samples as well because he wrote a description of the
stratigraphic section exposed in the well which ended
as a dry hole.
In writing the paper, he had the occasion to use the
work of Charles Prosser who had been H. S. Williams’
assistant the last year Harris was a student at Cornell.
Harris recognized the scientific value of the material
brought out of the hole during the drilling process:
“During the early part of the season, a well was sunk at
Jamestown, N. Y. to a depth of 3263 feet. For the pro-
prietors, the undertaking was somewhat unfortunate, since
neither oil nor gas—the objects sought— were met in pay-
ing quantities, to the geologist, however, the extensive suite
of drillings carefully preserved and labelled, are of uncom-
mon interest owing to the depth and peculiar location of
the well; it furnishes him data for determining the litho-
logical characters, thickness, and amount of dip in this
region of several formations penetrated, —items heretofore
but vaguely known from surface observations.”’ (Harris,
189 1a, pp. 164-165)
The date on the last page of this publication is De-
cember 1890, just before he left for Jamestown for a
very important engagement. Gilbert and Clara were
married on December 30, 1890”! at her parents’ home
in Lakewood. A small announcement in the local paper
datelined “‘December 30, Lakewood”’ said:
“Tuesday at 12 m. Miss Clara Stoneman at the home of
her parents, Byron Stoneman, was united in marriage to
Gilbert Harris of Washington, D. C. They left on train 12
for Washington where they will reside, carrying with them
best wishes of a host of friends for a happy and prosperous
journey on the matrimonial sea. Rev. E. B. Barrows was
the officiating clergyman.”’’*
°! Palmer (1953c) gives the date of their marriage as December
29, 1890, but the page of marriages in the family Bible (Lopus and
Ingham, 1977) has December 30, 1890. Also, the December 30 date
is consistent with the marriage notice in the newspaper.
22 Jamestown Evening Journal, Friday, January 2, 1891, p. 2.
CHAPTER 2. RETURN TO WASHINGTON
From the letters that survive, it appears that Clara
and her new husband stayed in Washington, D. C. at
a rooming house on 17th Street for a few months after
they were married. She must not have gone out very
much, however, because later, when she was at her
parents home, a person who had some knowledge of
Washington, D. C. commented about the buildings and
asked her opinion about them:
“The doctor who attends Pa was a soldier and has been
in Washington and knows something about the city and
surroundings. He was asking me if I had been to Arlington
and some other places. Of course I had to say I had not.
‘Well,’ he said, ‘you have been rather domestic, haven’t
you.’ Then he said that the public building, such as the
P.O. and Freemasonry, etc. were interesting places to visit.
I said, ‘Yes’, but I did not tell him I had not been there
either:
But their brief trial at domesticity came to a close when
field season began, for Harris had his geological activ-
ities and was off to the shore again to continue the
work from the previous year.
Exactly where Harris was and what he was doing
during this period are unclear for he was really moving
from place to place. After some time in Washington,
D. C., he went to Maryland, then Jamestown, New
York for the birth of his daughter, then to Arkansas,
‘Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, July 23, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 23
back to the Maryland shore, and finally back to Wash-
ington, only to lose his position with the U.S.G.S.
Dall’s report for 1890-1891 said this about Harris’
travels:
“In April [1891] Mr. G. D. Harris was detailed to accom-
pany the State Expedition, under the auspices of Johns
Hopkins University, directed by Prof. W. B. Clarke, which
visited many important Tertiary outcrops of the Maryland
shore.
“On the 26th of May [1891], Messrs. Harris and [Frank]
Burns were directed to proceed to Easton, Maryland, to
examine the Tertiary rocks and obtain specimens from
localities frequented by Conrad and other older paleon-
tologists. The results of this expedition, though satisfac-
tory, are not yet reported in detail, and a statement of
them is therefore impracticable at the present time.” (Pow-
ell, 1891b, p. 117).
Harris was working along the Bay shore of Calvert
County, tracing:
““.. every important stratum represented in these cliffs
from its northernmost outcrop to where its southern dip
carries it beneath time level.” (Harris, 1893a, p. 21).
Harris discovered that several observations made much
earlier by Conrad were not quite correct:
““Conrad doubtless examined this locality somewhat hast-
ily, insomuch as several fossiliferous beds occur in the sand
and clay regarded by him as ‘destitute of organic remains.’”
(Harris, 1893a, p. 22).
In the publication about the fossil strata of the Cal-
vert Cliffs that resulted from his labors in the springs
of 1891 and 1892, Harris said in a footnote:
“The field observations upon which this essay is based
were made under the auspices of the U.S. Geological Sur-
vey, April 23-30, 1891, and May 23-June 1, 1892. During
the latter period, the writer was accompanied by Mr. Frank
Burns, whose diligence and skill at collecting very mate-
rially aided in procuring the results here presented.” (Har-
ris, 1893a, Footnote, p. 21).
Harris left a diary describing the excursion of the
April, 1891.* In addition to the U.S.G.S., the expe-
dition included people from the State College of Ag-
riculture and Johns Hopkins University. The party left
Baltimore on April 23rd and travelled by the state
2 Miocene of Maryland (Cover title); Notes on a Geological Ex-
cursion in Western Maryland, by G. D. Harris, 1891 (Inside title
page); an unpublished manuscript describing the field excursion of
April 23-30, 1891, including many measured sections and fossil
lists. There is no indication of when Harris wrote the manuscript or
for what purpose. This manuscript is bound with typed copies of
fossils descriptions and illustrations from Volume VI, Part I (1829)
and Part II (1831), Journal of the Academy of Natural Sciences of
Philadelphia. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
police steamboat, Gov. P. F. Thomas, to Annapolis
where two schooners were taken in tow and the group
spent the first night lying off Fair Haven. As with most
of Harris’ descriptions of his journeys, he gets right to
the geology:
“Friday,a.m. April 24.—Breakfasted at an early hour in
the open air, and rowed to the Fair Haven wharf. Some
bluish clays of doubtful age were noticed just above the
wharf, but the main interest centered in the bluffs of Mio-
cene sands and clays and diatomaceous earth about a mile
below the wharf, or about one fourth mile below where a
creek makes into the Bay. . . . Having returned to the wharf,
our attention was called to a boulder lying upon the beach
about one fourth mile below the same. It contained nu-
merous casts of Mollusks, and was said by N. H. Darton
to be from the silicious layer that characterizes the very
base of the Miocene.’”?
According to Harris’ notes the group continued down
the Chesapeake Bay making stops along the way to
examine the exposures and collect fossils. By Saturday
evening, April 25th, the group had reached Jones Wharf
on the Patuxent River:
“Below this wharf the low bluffs afford some good fossils,
and during the forty minutes spent there no time was
squandered.’”*
At times Harris appears frustrated with the pace of the
excursion, not allowing him enough time to fully de-
scribe and explore an exposure:
“April 28, 1891. The wind which had been blowing from
the south during the fore part of the night had shifted by
morning to the northward and was rolling in a fairly heavy
sea upon us. Never-the less [sic] the row-boats were low-
ered and we were all safely landed at the base of Nomini
Cliffs. Below the place of landing, which was about mid
way of the cliffs, the writer made a section, but as the rest
of the party were going up stream he was obliged to hasten
away in the same direction without having made a col-
lection of any sort.” >
They collected fossils and examined the strata near
St. Mary’s, in the Pope Creek area, and along the banks
of the Potomac River. During the stop at Clifton Beach,
one of the party found what was described only as a
“‘saurian tooth” with a fragment of the lower jaw. After
a side trip to Mount Vernon, the group returned to
3 Miocene of Maryland (Cover title); Notes on a Geological Ex-
cursion in Western Maryland, by G. D. Harris, 1891 (Inside title
page); unpublished manuscript, p. 1. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
4 Miocene of Maryland (Cover title); Notes on a Geological Ex-
cursion in Western Maryland, by G. D. Harris, 1891 (Inside title
page); unpublished manuscript, p. 2. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
> Miocene of Maryland (Cover title); Notes on a Geological Ex-
cursion in Western Maryland, by G. D. Harris, 1891 (Inside title
page); unpublished manuscript, p. 3. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
24 BULLETIN 350
Washington, D. C. on Thursday, April 30. In Part II
of this manuscript, Harris provided drawings of the
sections with thicknesses of each major layer and he
gives a list of the fossils found at each site. Many of
the sites described in Part II are given site numbers,
e.g., the section at Nomini Cliffs mentioned above is
number 2344. These numbers appear to be U.S.G:S.
locality numbers which accompanied the fossils col-
lected at each site.
Apparently Dall sent Harris to do other field work
after he completed his investigation of the area at Cal-
vert Cliffs, for a letter Clara sent from Washington, D.
C., dated May 31, 1891, was sent to him at Easton,
Maryland. Thus he must have moved on to the Eastern
Shore of the Chesapeake Bay by the end of May. Ac-
cording to Clara’s surviving letters, he stayed at Easton,
Maryland at least through June | 2th.
In this letter she sent from Washington on May 31st,
Clara wrote that she had shared their secret with her
family:
“T have just finished a letter to Basie [her sister], in which
I enclosed a private note telling of a certain family matter.
I thought it better to tell them this early because I wanted
them to use a little discretion about informing inquiring
friends when I going to be at home. I am glad at any rate
that it is off my mind and I am anxious, too, to know what
they will say about it.’’°
The “it”, of course turned out to be their daughter,
Rebecca Stoneman Harris, born October 21st, 1891.
She was probably named after Clara’s Aunt Rebecca,
wife of her father’s brother, who died just a few weeks
before their daughter was born’. The “special news”’
did not surprise too many in her family, however:
“T received a letter from Basie yesterday written more
especially, I guess, because of the ‘private’ communication
which my last letter contained. She had not been home
yet so I do not know yet what Ma will have to say on the
subject. It seems, however, that the news was not at all
unexpected and I did not much think it would be. She did
not intimate, in the least, that the news was at all unwel-
come either, as I was afraid it would be.’’*
And later, after she had been visiting his home, she
discovered that Gilbert’s family was quite happy. “.. .
with the prospect of a new relation.’”?
® Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, May 31, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
7“We received a telegram today telling that Aunt Rebecca was
dead.” Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, September 10, 1891.
Private collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
® Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, June 5, 1891. Private col-
lection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
° Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, July 30, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
At this point they were living in a rooming/boarding
house at 1020 17th Street, N.W., for Clara mentioned
getting one of his letters, **... when I went down for
breakfast.”’. She also mentioned several other people
getting mail at the same time: “Theresa got some letters
and a bundle and Mrs. W. [the landlady] a letter. . .””!°
Their budget must have been somewhat limited, for
in one letter Clara said that she had been invited on
an excursion with some of the other boarders, but de-
clined the offer:
“They asked me if I would not go but I hardly think it
would be advisable either financially or physically.”!!
She was sending him money for his expenses while
doing the field work:
“IT hope that you have received my letter containing the
money before this time, and that my failure to send it
before has not caused you serious inconvenience.” !?
Their living expenses at the time seem modest:
“T paid Mrs. W. this morning for our board. It was $17.00,
or will be when I pay her the two dollars that I did not
have change for this morning. It was really $17.50 but she
said she wouldn’t take the $.50 as I staid [sic] here thro
[sic] the days and got my meals the best way I could.’’!3
For what period of time the $17.00 covered is un-
known. Also, whether from necessity or custom, Clara
was making some of her own clothes:
“T have finished my gingham dress, and let out the seams
in my black waist [blouse]. Does such feminine news in-
terest you?’’!*
“IT went down town this morning and bought me a white
waist to wear with my white dress skirt so that I might get
some good of that. I can also wear it with other skirts if I
want to. I also bought 20 yds. of bird’s-eye linen. Can you
guess what will be made of that?’ [Emphasis in the orig-
inal.]!°
But there must have been a little extra money available:
“Last Friday eve. we all went to see The Gondoliers. Miss
A., Theresa, May and myself went and left Mr. & Mrs. W.
at home but when we came out of the theater whom should
'0 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, June 5, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
‘Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, May 31, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY
'2 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, June 5, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
'3 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, June 10, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
'4 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, June 5, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
'S Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, June 6, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 25
we see waiting for us but Mr. & Mrs. W. Mrs. W., you
know, doesn’t approve of Jeannie Winston. For my own
part I did not see much to admire in her. I did not enjoy
her acting the part of a man because I could not forget
that she was a woman. Not that I was shocked in the least
but I could not see any reason for her taking that part.’’!°
“‘And I squandered 10 cents on a pint of cherries, which
was quite extravagant I suppose, but I was so thirsty and
they looked so cool I couldn’t resist the temptation.”’'”
While these prices seem trivial by the standards of 100
years later, they were not small at the time. The couple
must have been on a tight budget and money was a
constant worry. For example, money matters surfaced
in one of Clara’s letters to Gilbert while she was staying
with her parents before Rebecca was born. In a pre-
vious letter Clara had requested he send her some post-
age stamps (which he did); he apparently assumed she
was asking, in a roundabout way, for some spending
money:
“Your kind letter of August Ist containing the money
reached me without any accident on Monday P.M. I am
much obliged for the money although I had no great need
of it just now. I have not spent much of the $15 that I
brought with me [almost a month ago]. Today Pa paid me
back what I lent him to pay the men and now I have in
all $24.25. That, I think, ought to be enough for my wants
until you come and maybe longer so I do not believe you
will need to send any money unless something unusual
happens.”’!§
Rollin and Emily Harris were in Washington as well
and living close enough for Clara to visit with them
while Gilbert was away:
“Yesterday afternoon I went over to see if Rollin and
Emily had entirely melted in to grease spots. They were
usually well. Emily had been canning strawberries. She
was trying to keep as cool as possible by not wearing any
more clothing than the law requires. I staid [sic] to dinner
with them and had quite a visit.”!?
By July 14, 1891, Clara was with her parents in
Harmony, New York and Harris was back in Wash-
ington, D. C. This separation was especially difficult
for Clara as she was in the sixth month of pregnancy
and away from her husband for the first time since
their marriage:
‘e Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, May 31, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
'7 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, June 6, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
'8 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, August 5, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
'° Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, June 5, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
““Doesn’t it seem longer than two weeks since I left Wash-
ington. Ihaven’t had my back scratched since | came home.
It’s getting pretty itchy. Don’t you pity your poor wife?”
{Emphasis in the original.]?°
He, too, must have been expressing his feelings about
the difficulties of their separation, for in one of her
letters, Clara wrote:
““My poor boy, I know just how hard it is to be alone as
you are and I would be glad if I could get a letter to you
everyday but I can not [sic]. I am very sorry you have
worried so much about me. I am perfectly well and you
may be sure if anything unusual should happen you would
be informed as soon as possible. ... My darling I do ap-
preciate how much you love me and am very grateful.
Please don’t worry yourself sick.’’?!
There was reason for his concern because at one point
she complained of a bad rash on her feet that caused
strong itching and swelling:
“You ask in regard to the state of my health. My digestive
organs are in very good order... . Just now, however, I
am about distracted on account of my feet. They are quite
a good deal swollen and all along the sides of my foot and
toes especially little hard bumps swell up and burn and
itch terribly. The lumps on my toes are in ridges. They do
not come out like mosquito bites but seem to be under
the skin. My hands began to be the same this morning but
do not trouble me now. If they do not get better I shall
have to go to the Dr. I expect. They burn so now that I
can hardly keep still to write.’’??
Four days later her feet were still swollen:
“T sent with Basie yesterday and got me some cloth slip-
pers,—No. 6. Of course they will be too large when the
swelling goes down out of my feet.’
Clara, in fact, did little to allay his fears for her health,
and often included just enough information to really
start him thinking:
“I am feeling about as well as usual. My hands and feet
trouble me a little yet but now I am troubled some by
dizzy spells and I cannot read or do anything evenings
because I get so nervous and my head feels so. I guess it
is nothing very alarming. Only think there is only a little
Over one month more to wait!’’?4
20 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, July 26, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
*! Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, August 15, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
2 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, August 19, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
23 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, August 23, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
4 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, August 28, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
26 BULLETIN 350
Perhaps Harris had good reason to worry, for the in-
fection on her feet continued to trouble her well into
September:
“I feel well enough but the weather is so warm and my
feet still trouble me so that I feel decidedly uncomfortable
most of the time.’’”°
This sharing of illnesses was a two way street, however,
for in early September of 1891, Clara wrote:
“T do not like to hear of your recent sickness. I hope that
you will do all you can to prevent it becoming a serious
trouble. What is the cause of it??°
In an earlier letter Harris must have offered to hire
someone to look after her if only she would return to
Washington. Her reply:
“T hardly know how to begin to say what I want to say,
though first I know you will be dreadfully disapointed [sic]
if I say I do not believe it would be best for me to go back
to Washington as you want me to do. But really, Gilbert,
I do not think it would be best and it might be just the
thing that would make trouble for me. It hardly seems to
me it would be best to go to the extra expense hiring nurses,
etc. as long as Iam right here now where both our families
are. Of course I know that you would be willing to pay all
the extra cost and it would be very, very pleasant to be
with you again as you suggest and I know you could not
help being anything but the best of husbands, but only
think, dearest, I have already been here more than half
the time that will have to elapse before you can come
home, so it does not seem to me, at all, to be the best
policy to go back to Washington when everything is taken
into consideration. I told Ma that you wanted me to come
back to W. and she said, “Well you are not going.’ Don’t
worry about my having to work, it’s my own fault if I do
it because they all tell me not to and I have not done so
much this week .. .””*”
While visiting his mother and sisters outside of James-
town, Clara wrote:
“T have enjoyed my visit here so far and don’t feel home-
sick or lonesome only it doesn’t seem mght to be here
without you. I look towards the barn every once in awhile
and it seems as though that little door ought to open and
you come forth in your ‘regimentals’—blue ‘frock’ and
‘overalls’, muddy boots and military cap. But, alas I can
look as often as I will, I won’t see you.”’?8
25 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, September 25, 1891. Pri-
vate collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
6 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, September 2, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
2? Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, August 20, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
8 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, July 30, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
And added to her loneliness was the fact that her father
was quite ill:
“Oh! how I do wish I knew how you are this morning. I
am made aware by a certain feeling in my throat that I
can’t let my thought move in a certain direction or I would
be crying in short order and that wouldn’t do at all... . I
could be comparatively happy here [at home] if it were
not for the fact that Pa is very sick again. He is not as bad
off as he was at the worst last fall but I am afraid that some
of his symptoms are a great deal worse. I don’t like to
think of it but I am afraid he can’t possibly last much
longer.... I did not sleep much last night for just as I
would get to sleep Pa would begin to groan and that would
wake me up....I do hope you are well, my dearest one.
You may be sure I shall not forget you and that my thoughts
go back very, very often to that room at 1020 17 St. and
wish that I was there.”’?°
“*.. Pa requires a good deal of attention. I hardly know
whether to say that he is better or not. He does not seem
to be in quite as much pain, but he is still very weak and,
oh, so nervous. He likes to have somebody by him all the
time and especially when he awakes from a nap if he sees
that someone is sitting by him he does not get so weak
and nervous. I have staid [sic] by [him] all that I could
day times because I can’t do much work nor sit up
nights.... Pa’s mind wanders a great deal, although at
times it 1s as clear as ever. He talks about the [Civil] war
mostly. The other day he told Basie that there ought to be
lots of white lead on hand so that the hired men could
make bullets.’*°
“Pa continues about the same. He walks out a little but
is not able to attend to the work at all. He lies in bed most
of the time.””?!
In many of the letters Clara keeps referring to their
child as ‘“‘Robert.”
“This morning I weighted 143 lbs. Some of that may be
‘Robert’, however. ... Ma says I can’t have a ‘Robert’, I
must have ‘Bryon’... .”’ [her father’s name]*? “I think Rob-
ert is prospering.’’*?
As the time of birth drew near, however, Clara began
to acknowledge the possibility of a girl, perhaps twins,
and the name Rebecca is mentioned:
“Robert and I weigh /55 /bs. I don’t know but I ought to
say Robert and Rebecca. Basie says I ought. The other day
2? Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, July 14, 1891. Private
collection WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
3° Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, July 16, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI-Ithaca, NY.
3! Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, July 26, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
*2 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, July 16, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI-Ithaca, NY.
33 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, July 26, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI-Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE Di
she found an ear of green corn that had two small ears
growing with the same husk. She considered that a very
favorable omen of coming events.”’ [Emphasis in the orig-
inal.]**
The idea of twins struck a responsive chord with Clara
because several weeks later she wrote to Gilbert:
“This afternoon I went out to the corn farm to try Ma’s
standard of measurement. She said that the summer before
Basie was born she could get through the corn . . . [rows]
... as easily as could be. I could not begin to do so. What
if Robert would happen to have a brother or sister come
along to keep him company! Or possibly more than one!!
Then I guess you would have to stay at home evenings to
help hold him. You could not go to see ‘Sally’ as any one
else.” [Emphasis in the original.]?°
One can only wonder about the reference to “Sally.”
In many ways being at home again with her family
was good for Clara, but at the same time her status
had changed; now married and pregnant:
“Everything seems quite natural here although I do not
think it seems quite the same as it used to before I went
away and I expect the reason is because I am not able to
go ahead and work and drive [the horse and wagons] around
as I used to... . I soon remember that I am not expected
to do so and about every move I make either Basie or Ma
tells me to go and sit down, that I need not do that....
Pa evidently thought I might lend a hand ... [filling the
water wagon]... for when I went into his room he said,
‘I don’t want you to do any pumping.”’”*°
Upon her return home, however, some friction ap-
pears to have developed between Clara and her sister,
Basie. Perhaps with Clara gone, Basie was suddenly
cast in the limelight and liked the new role, and with
Clara back in the house Basie’s new position in the
family was threatened. In one letter Clara related to
Gilbert:
“This morning Basie said to Marian that the work had
seemed so short and I remarked that it had not seemed
so to me but that it had been a dreadful long time since
Monday. “Oh!” Basie said, ‘you old married woman you.
I wouldn’t be an old married woman for anything!’ ’’>’
“... I wouldn’t feel bad when going away. Basie said,
‘Feel bad about going away! Why I supposed you would
be so anxious to get home that you could hardly wait.’ She
was telling Ma this morning that she guessed I was thor-
34 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, August 30, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI-Ithaca, NY.
*5 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, September 13, 1891. Pri-
vate collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI-Ithaca, NY.
3° Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris; July 23, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca NY.
*’ Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris; July 16, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca NY.
oughly weaned. I know I ought to be ashamed of myself,
but if I had not a good reason for staying here I could cut
my visit pretty short.’’**
And at another time, Clara said:
“This morning I mentioned a certain thing that I must do
before going ‘home’ and Basie says, ‘Don’t you think you
are smart, don’t you’?
Apparently her sister felt that Clara should not refer
to Washington, D. C. as “home.” Even the sleeping
arrangements had changed. Whereas before her mar-
riage she shared a bedroom and bed with her sister
Basie, but now:
‘‘As for sleeping I think I told you that I sleep all by myself
in the ‘guest chambers’. I get up and go to bed when I
please.’’*°
Even Clara, herself, had difficulty adjusting to her new
status:
‘“‘At the grocery [store] the man asked me what my name
was and I told him ‘Stoneman.’ I did not think but what
it was until after I had said it and then I did not think it
best to explain matters.’’*!
In late July of 1891, Clara visited Gilbert’s home at
“Peck Settlement” for a few days and sent him several
letters from there. From her letters, it seems there were
street cars operating in the Jamestown vicinity, but not
everyone had adjusted to this new mode of transpor-
tation:
“T came from Lakewood on the boat and thence to Dex-
terville on the new electric cars. ... I can’t see that your
folks have bettered themselves on the horse question very
much because their horse is old and doesn’t go at a 2:40
gate especially away from home and is more afraid of the
[electric] cars, besides, than ‘Bennie’ was.”’*?
“Cora brought me over to D.[Dexterville] and I rode
from there to the boat landing on the street cars. They are
still a great novelty to the Jamestown people. They think
it very strange that they [the street cars] will not stop
anywhere except on a crossing and the teamsters seem to
think they have a perfect right to drive on to the track and
stand there until it suits their convenience to get off.’’**?
38 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris; July 21, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca NY.
3° Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, July 26, 1981. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
4° Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, July 23, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
4! Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, July 26, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
*2 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, July 26, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
43 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, August 2, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
28 BULLETIN 350
Based on a letter Clara wrote to Gilbert in August
of 1891, his position with the U.S.G.S. at the Smith-
sonian must have seemed fairly secure. He had just
completed another paper for publication (date on the
last page is August 1891; Harris, 1891c), and the Ar-
kansas material had been published or was about to
be published (Simonds’ letter about it, mentioned ear-
lier, was dated September 21, 1891). At this point, by
letter, they began discussing having a home in Wash-
ington. The strength of her character can be seen in
this excerpt, for it appears Gilbert had either hinted
or asked her directly to approach her father for a loan
(gift?) to assist them in getting a house:
“In regard to what you have written about your thoughts
and plans for a home in Washington you may be sure that
I will agree in wanting to have a home there as soon as
possible, but I can not [sic] say I would be willing to ask
my father for the money at the present anyway. If it was
very necessary, I could do it, but I would rather not be
obliged to do so. Of course I understand perfectly, Gilbert,
that you would not expect to ‘sponge’ the money so do
not think IJ hesitate on that account. In the first place Pa’s
money is all out in mortgages, at present, except that which
he needs for the various expenses which is no small
amount, —and then, I know to [sic] well how much trouble
it would make. I hope you will not be provoked at me for
not liking to do as you wish, but I thought it best to tell
you on the start just how I feel. By your letter of the 30th,
I understood you to mean you wanted to have a house
built so that we could go there to live this winter. Do you
think that would be possible and are you sure it 1s the best
plan to try to do so? And do you think it would be cheaper
and better to build a house than to buy one outright? Do
not think I ask these questions expecting you to think I
am opposed. I am not but I wish to understand the subject
a little better.’’*4
His reply must have been quite persuasive, and he must
have told his family about his plan for a house in
Washington and the need for money to finance it, for
in letter written only a few days after the one quoted
above, Clara said:
“T feel ashamed of myself to think I can’t do more to help
you in your plans for getting a home in Washington. As
long as I can’t or don’t do more as you would wish, I don’t
deserve your kindness in having the deed of such a lot as
you will get made out in my name. I would feel better
about it if it were not so. I have spoken to Ma and told
her something of what you have in mind and she told me
what I knew well enough before that all the money Pa has
is in mortgages. I believe he has a few hundred in the bank
but that he needs for paying taxes, hired men, etc. How-
*4 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, August 2, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
ever, if I have a chance when he is not too much worried
over other things, I will try and talk with him on the
subject.
“As I did not know what you had in mind while I was
at your mothers [sic] I had no occasion to talk with her
about your plans and I may not have another chance very
soon, maybe not before you come home, but if you have
already written to your folks I do not know what more I
could say that would have any influence. I suppose you
will be about discouraged and think I am pulling right
against you. I don’t wish too [sic] and if it seems so to you
it is not from obstinacy.’’*>
Their living arrangements after the birth of their
child were very much on Gilbert’s mind and he must
have communicated this concern to her. But once again,
Clara’s determination to say what she feels comes
through:
““... [this] brings me to the point of our housekeeping
arrangements for the coming year. You speak of my not
liking to live out of the city. I suppose it would be lonesome
at first but I would be perfectly willing to live wherever it
seemed best even though I did have to undergo some
discomfort. However, for the next year perhaps it would
be better for us to live a little nearer friends. It would be
more agreeable and safer perhaps in case of an emergen-
Cys
Apparently though, Gilbert was not to be deterred by
a simple refusal of his first few plans, for in a letter
about a week later, Clara responded to yet another
option from him about where to live after the baby
was born, and, again, she was quite firm about her
desire to stay with her parents in the meantime:
“As to renting a house with R & E. [Rollin and Emily, her
brother- and sister-in-law] that would suit me exactly. I
think we could manage to ‘live together in brotherly love.’
Now, darling, please do not scold me nor feel hurt because
I do not agree with you in this respect...
“I know I have not answered your letter satisfactory
[sic] but I hope you will try and be satisfied with my
decision [to stay at her parents until the baby is born]. . . .”’*’
Her decision not to rent a house with Rollin and Emily
seemed to have upset them, for later she wrote to Gil-
bert:
“Tam very sorry if I have been the means of dissapointing
[sic] R. & E. about renting the house you and they had in
45 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, August 5, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
46 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, August 12, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
#7 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, August 20, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 29
view but I did not see how I could do otherwise. I hope
you will forgive me, dear.’***
With their domicile for the next year still undecided,
Harris proposed the idea of buying a building lot in
an area outside of Washington, D. C. near Ft Meyer,
Virginia.*? He continued his attempts to persuade Cla-
ra to come back to Washington, even by telegram. She
replied:
“Gilbert, my dearest one, what has taken possession of
you? When I left Washington I thought it was fully un-
derstood by both of us that I was to remain north, either
at my own home or at yours during October and as long
after that as seems best. Now, my darling, why can you
not be contented with that arrangement? I certainly have
been more comfortable here where I could go as I pleased
in my old house clothes and where, if there was any cool
fresh air blowing I could have the full benefit of it. It does
not seem to me that I could possibly have stood it all this
time to have had to dress up and go to Ditto’s three times
a day to my meals. . ..1 would be glad if I could go to you
this very minute but I cannot, it would be entirely out of
the question.
“Your telegram was not received until 9 o’clock Friday
night. Julia brought it from Lakewood. It was answered
as soon as possible. You have probably received your an-
swer before this time and feel like shaking the whole Stone-
man tribe, your Mother-in-law in particular. She opposed
the idea of my going back from the very first. Pa was not
told anything about the telegram as he was altogether to
[sic] sick to be troubled in anyway.””°°
Thus it was; Clara did not return to Washington, but
Gilbert had still other plans afoot:
““Now my dear, I want to know about this new plan of
yours of going to Arkansas. That is an entirely new feature
of the case. Are you going with White*! or Prosser? I don’t
want you to go at all but I suppose it is for you to decide
whether you will or not. But, my dear, if you do go don’t
you see that it will be a great deal better for me to be here
where I can have the advice and help of both my mothers
than to be in Washington comparatively alone. And be-
sides, I have various things I want to do that I shall not
be able to do before Robert comes. By the way he is rather
lively today.’’*?
#8 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, August 28, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
4° Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, September 10, 1891. Pri-
vate collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
°° Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, August 23, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
5! Charles D. White, a former classmate of Harris’ and later di-
rector of the U. S. Geological Survey.
>»? Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, August 23, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
The Arkansas venture would mark Harris’ return to
that state, but his new venture differed from his first
one because this time he was employed by the U.S.G.S.
and was part of a cooperative agreement between the
state and federal surveys. In the Annual Report for
1891-92 of G. K. Gilbert, Chief Geologist, the follow-
ing items concerned the Arkansas work:
“The expense of this work [cooperative agreement with
the Arkansas Geological Survey] was shared by the state
survey and the national Survey, and it was executed by
Mr. G. D. Harris, assistant paleontologist, who was de-
tailed by the paleontological branch for that purpose. The
field work which occupied the months of November and
December 1891, and January, 1892, included supplemen-
tary determinations of stratigraphic sequences in Arkansas
and the collection of numerous fossils for comparative
study.” (Powell, 1892, p. 95)
Even while he was planning to leave, he was worried
about his wife and she was writing to reassure him: “‘I
wish I knew of some way to prevent you from worrying
yourself in to such a nervous state.’ Apparently his
worrying did not prevent him planning the field work
in Arkansas. Of course, as he was an employee of the
U.S.G.S., and based on the above quotations, it ap-
pears he may not have had too much choice in the
matter.
As it turned out Clara supported his decision and
found a good reason for him to do the Arkansas work:
“*... [I will] come to the ‘point’ and tell you what I think
of your plans. Under the circumstances I do not see how
they could be better. I imagine that the time will pass more
quickly with me to be here than it would to be in W. while
you are away and as long as I can not [Sic] very well go
back to W. much before Christmas any how I should think
the time would go sooner for you if you have a change of
scene and work. I hope you will not have to work as hard
as you did before though.’**
During this separation before the birth of their child,
while commenting about a professional meeting he
attended, Clara did not miss the opportunity to offer
additional support for her decision to stay at home:
“T am glad you are having such a good chance to see your
friends from the different parts of the country. Why does
not Prof. Simmonds [sic]°> attend the meetings? (I have
forgotten how his name is spelled, but you know whom I
mean.) It may be a good thing for you on one account,
3 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, August 23, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
4 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, August 25, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
°° Frederick W. Simonds, with whom Harris worked in Arkansas
in 1888 (Palmer, 1953c).
30 BULLETIN 350
that I am not in Washington just now. If I were I could
not attend the receptions, ... and for that reason I am
afraid I might prevent you from going whenever you would
like.”>5
At this time Harris and Dall were completing the
final portions of their Neocene volume which was pub-
lished in 1892. According to Palmer (1953c), in 1890-
91 J. W. Powell, Director of the U.S.G.S., had given
Dall the task of preparing a memoir on the Neocene
[now called Neogene] deposits of the U. S., and Dall
had assigned Harris part of the work. This was to be
one of a series of “Correlation Papers” the Survey was
producing which summarized the state of the strati-
graphic knowledge at that time. Previous work had
been published on the ““Carboniferous and Devonian”
(Williams, H. S., 1891), the work that led to the cre-
ation of the Mississippian and Pennsylvanian subdi-
visions of the Carboniferous strata in North America;
“Cambrian” (Walcott, 1891); ““Cretaceous” (White,
1891); and ‘“‘Eocene”’ (Clark, 1891). The work on the
Tertiary that Dall and Harris were doing was published
as the “Correlation Papers: Neocene’’, (Dall and Har-
ris, 1892). The division of labor is given in the intro-
ductory remarks in this paper:
“As regards the division of labor between the senior and
junior authors of this paper, it may be stated that the work
of searching the literature and bringing together the scat-
tered data relating to particular states or regions has been
largely performed by Mr. Gilbert D. Harris. For the re-
visions and correlation of this material and for the whole
of the chapters on Florida, British Columbia and Alaska,
and the general discussions embodied in the essay, Mr.
Dall is responsible. The list of formations, which, short as
it is, has cost much labor and correspondence with authors
who have proposed the names, has been prepared by Mr.
Harris, who has prepared the chapter on the Interior
regions.” (Dall and Harris, 1892, p. 17).
Harris’ chapter on the Interior region covered only
pages 280-317, thus Dall prepared most of the manu-
script, but Harris’ labor was extensive and did not go
unnoticed by Dall, or by G. K. Gilbert. In the /2th
Annual Report, Gilbert noted that Harris’ contribution
had been extensive and vital:
““Much of the labor of compilation was performed by Mr.
G. D. Harris, and the importance of his contribution has
been recognized by giving place to his name on the title
page as junior author.” (Powell, 1891b, p. 64).
Gilbert repeated this praise in the 1893 report as well:
“Dr. Dall was assisted in the work of literary compilation
and in many other ways by Mr. Gilbert D. Harris, and
°° Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, August 30, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
this assistance proved of such importance to the successful
prosecution of the work that he deemed it a matter of
justice to associate Mr. Harris’s name with his own on the
title-page of the book.” (Powell, 1893, p. 183).
The need for an extensive literature search evidently
made an impression on Harris, however, for many of
his subsequent works include a detailed literature re-
view, e.g., his paper on the Midway Stage (Harris,
1896a). Later as a teacher, he instilled the idea of a
thorough literature search in his students, and they
followed his model as can be seen, for example, in
Maury (1925), Olsson (1934), and Palmer (1937).
Based on Clara’s letter, Harris must have been quite
busy trying to complete the final work on the Neocene
volume and work on the Tertiary collections, all before
he left for Arkansas. She wrote to him:
““My dear you are trying to compress a good deal of work
into a few weeks! I thought that you said your plan of
arranging the Tertiary collection would take you several
years but now you say Dr. Dall wants you to do it before
you go away this fall.’’>’
As the time of fatherhood drew closer, Harris seemed
to have really taken the idea to heart and looked at
parenting as a real partnership. Ever the organizer, he
apparently set out a table of housekeeping duties he
was to do for her:
“After reading your letters I could not help but think how
lucky I am. When I go back to Washington I shall have
nothing to do but to fold my hands and enjoy myself
because I shall have a husband ‘to do my cook.’ I hope
you will become an expert at marketing. Your housekeep-
ing program seems to be very good so far as it goes but I
do not see any dishwashing [sic] number upon it. How
about that part?’ [Emphasis in the original.]°*
As to Harris’ movements around this time, some
letters help establish his whereabouts. A letter to Harris
at the Smithsonian from Frederic Simonds about the
Arkansas publication from the 1888-1889 work is dated
September 17, 1891 and postmarked in Washington,
D. C. on September 21st. Thus, in late September or
early October, Harris must have gone to the James-
town area to be with his wife during the last stages of
her pregnancy and the birth of Rebecca Stoneman Har-
ris, for her letters stop about this time and do not begin
again until after the birth. Also in September, Harris
published his fourth paper (Harris, 189 1c).
The fact that Rebecca’s birth on October 21, 1891,
occurred in Ellicott seems to indicate that the couple
57 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, September 13, 1891. Pn-
vate collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
58 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, September 6, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE Bh
stayed at his home. That is where the Harris family
lived and where Gilbert himself had been born (Lopus
and Ingham, 1977).
Harris must not have stayed with his wife and newly
born daughter very long, however, as he received mail
in Jamestown postmarked October 25th and October
26th, 1891, from two U.S.G.S. colleagues. The first
was from T. W. Stanton, informing him that, “Dr.
White was disposing of his library, .. .”, and he said,
also, ‘I hope you are enjoying your vacation.” Stanton
makes no mention of the fact that the real reason for
Harris being in Jamestown, the birth of his daughter.>*?
The second was from David White who did inquire
about Mrs. Harris:
“Why this silence for so long? What is the news? Neither
Mr. Prosser nor I have had a line from you for a long
time. ... How is Mrs. Harris? When do you leave for
Arkansas?’’©°
But on November |, Stanton sent another letter about
a book he had purchased for Harris. This one went to
Little Rock, Arkansas, in care of J. C. Branner, who
in turn forwarded it to Kingsland, Arkansas where Har-
ris was headquartered in November.°! Clara’s letters
were directed to him in Little Rock as well. In Decem-
ber one of her letters sent to Little Rock was re-directed
to Cleveland County, so he must have been moving
around.
From Clara’s letters to him during his time in Ar-
kansas it seems that once again, Harris was in poor
health. The last time he worked in Arkansas he had
also become quite ill. Despite all the ill health and
work, however, he was writing to her almost every
other day, and apparently he was not to stay in Ar-
kansas very long:
“T received your letter of the 12th [December 1891] on
Friday and those of the 14th and 16th this... morning... .
Letters are good in there [sic] place but I am so glad that
the time is near at hand when they will not be neces-
sary....
“They [his family] were somewhat worried I suppose
because they have not heard from you since the letter
saying that you were not well.”’®?
The last surviving letter from Clara during his Ar-
5° T. W. Stanton to Gilbert D. Harris, October 24, 1891. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
6° David White to Gilbert D. Harris, October 24, 1891, HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
61 T. W. Stanton to Gilbert D. Harris, November 1, 1891. Stan-
ton’s letter was sent from Washington, D. C. to Little Rock, Arkansas
and then forwarded to Kingsland. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
©? Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, December 20, 1891. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
kansas activity is dated January 12, 1892 and in it
Clara spoke of him delaying his departure, which, ap-
parently, did not exactly please her:
“Ma and Marian draw a long breath every time I get a
letter and you still keep putting off the time for coming
home. Not that they want you to stay away but they are
afraid that every week you will be swooping down and
carrying off ‘Betty’, as Ma calls Rebecca. She is just the
dearest little girl and I do wish you could be here to watch
her grow. I am afraid she will be ‘a great big woman like
her mother’ by the time you come home.’’®
A letter from his sister, Floy®’, also sent to Little Rock,
was dated January 17 and postmarked in Little Rock
on January 20, 1892, so he was receiving mail in Ar-
kansas during the closing weeks of January. A letter
from his sister Ida dated March 3rd, however, was sent
to their new residence at 1031, 8th Street, N.W. Wash-
ington, D.C. and the heading was, ““Dear Brother and
Sister,’’®> so they both must have been back in Wash-
ington, D. C. at that time.
Thus, Harris was in Arkansas from sometime in late
October 1891 until late February or early March 1892,
and he returned to Arkansas the following September:
“The winter of 1891-92 was spent by the writer in southern
Arkansas under the combined auspices of the United States
and Arkansas Geological Surveys. The first part of Sep-
tember, 1892, was spent in reviewing work done along the
Cretaceous-Tertiary boundary.” (Harris, 1894b, p. 6).
In his report for 1891-1892, Dall gave these dates for
the Arkansas work:
“From September, 1891, to March, 1892, Mr. Harris co-
operated with John C. Branner, State Geologist of Arkan-
sas, in the Southeastern part of the State.” (Powell, 1892,
p. 143-144).
As described above, however, from dates and address-
es on his letters, Harris must have spent part of that
time in Jamestown to be with Clara at Rebecca’s birth
before going to Arkansas.
It was during these field activities in Arkansas during
1891 and 1892 that Harris did his first real work with
Tertiary strata as he worked in a region south of the
Arkansas River. He worked his way south all the way
to the Louisiana state line and prepared a geologic map
of the area (Palmer, 1953c). In the preface to the Ar-
kansas report in which this work was published, J. C.
°3 Clara S. Harris to Gilbert D. Harris, January 12, 1892. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
°4 Floy Harris to Gilbert D. Harris January 17, 1892. Private
collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
®> Ida Harris to Gilbert D. Harris March 3, 1892. Private collec-
tion, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
Branner, Director of the Arkansas Geological Survey,
described the significance of Harris’ work:
“The task undertaken by Professor Harris was not an easy
one: the country with which he had to deal is one of low
topographic relief and heavily timbered, the rock expo-
sures that might otherwise have been expected are gen-
erally concealed by the disintegration and breaking down
of the original beds, while the marked paucity of marine
fossils throughout the entire region has added to the dif-
ficulty of the work. These obstacles, however, have been
so well overcome that the present report, besides dealing
with the general features and distribution of the Tertiary
geology of the State south of the Arkansas River, brings
out several new points of especial interest. Among other
things Professor Harris has shown:
1. That the Midway beds of the Alabama section are
the oldest of our Arkansas Tertiary rocks.
2. That the beds at Olsen’s Switch, Pulaski county, from
which Enclimatoceras ulrichi [a nautiloid] came are not
Cretaceous but Tertiary.
3. That the Cretaceous beds, although not known at the
surface, are penetrated by the wells at Beebe and Cabot.
4. That the Arkadelphia shales, referred by Hill to the
Tertiary, are of Cretaceous age.
5. That the Cretaceous-Tertiary border from Arkadel-
phia southwest lies south of the St Louis, Iron Mountain
and Southern Railway, and not north of it, as hitherto
believed.” (Harris, 1894b, p. XII-XIV).
The summer of 1892 found Harris back on the shores
of Chesapeake Bay (Palmer, 1953c) (presumably leav-
ing Rebecca and Clara in Washington). This is con-
firmed by Dall’s report for 1891-1892; Harris was in-
deed back at the Maryland shore:
“Mr. Harris paid a short visit to the localities in Maryland
for the purpose of reviewing the sections made by Conrad
nearly half a century ago, in which serious errors were
suspected, and on inspection were actually found to exist.”
(Powell, 1892,p. 145).
Perhaps the errors Harris discovered the year before
prompted this return visit. This work did not take him
very long; as indicated in an earlier quotation from the
Calvert Cliffs publication, he worked on the Chesa-
peake Bay shore from, May 23-June 1, 1892. And
around the middle of June he received a letter dated
June 13 which was sent to Washington, D. C.° The
work along the Bay which Harris started in 1891 and
completed in 1892 was published in 1893 as The Ter-
tiary Geology of Calvert Cliffs, Maryland (Harris 1893a).
He later used other portions of his observations in
66 A letter June 13, 1892 from [illegible] on Geological Survey of
Arkansas letterhead but dated Des Moines, Iowa sent to Gilbert D.
Harris addressed to Washington, D.C. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY. This
letter was found folded inside the Arkansas Survey Report for 1892
at PRI.
32 BULLETIN 350
Maryland in general paper about the Eocene beds of
Maryland and Virginia (Harris, 1894a).
But Harris’ days with the U.S.G.S. were numbered,
for the depression of 1892 forced the government to
reduce staff and Harris was one of these casualties. Or,
as Harris himself said, ‘*. . . curtailment in the affairs
of the federal survey necessitated employment else-
where of the younger members of that organization”
(Harris, 1919, p.3). Based on Dall’s year-end report
for 1892-93, dated July 1, 1893, Harris must have left
the U.S.G.S. shortly after he returned from the Ar-
kansas work:
‘*The report on the Arkansas Tertiary fossils for the state
survey was finished by Mr. Harris before he left Wash-
ington, forwarded to Little Rock, and, I am informed, will
shortly be printed.”’ (Powell, 1893, p. 257).
Harris may not have found the change entirely un-
welcome. Druid Wilson, a former student of Harris’,
recalled Harris telling him, with regard to his relation-
ship with Dall, that, “I [Harris] could not get along
with him [Dall], so I decided to get along without
him.”’°’ That feeling, however, did not keep the two
men from continuing a professional relationship that
appears to have bordered on friendship. In a short
paper he did about some of Dall’s interpretation of
Conrad’s publications (Dall, 1893a), Harris said this:
“There are, to be sure, several unsettled points relating to
this work [Conrad’s], but, no one is more capable of dealing
with them than is Dr. Dall.” (Harris, 1893d, p. 280).
And in a later publication, Harris was even more ef-
fusive:
“It is certainly fortunate for American Tertiary Paleon-
tology that there has been at the National Museum a man
of Dr. Dall’s erudition and sympathetic interests.” (Harris,
1919, p. 3).
Judging from the various letters from Dall to Harris
found in the Harris Archive at PRI, they continued to
correspond. Even toward the end of Dall’s life, there
was communication between the two men as evidenced
by a letter from Dall, at age 75, to Harris in 1920 which
certainly had a personal and friendly tone to it:
“Why don’t you come up to the mountain [in New Hamp-
shire] sometime next summer and study the turkey tracks
in the metamorphic schists? I say they are pseudomorphs
of some kind of reed, but some of the petrologists claim
they are after crystals. But I never heard of jointed crystals
sometimes three feet long with regular branches. Anyhow
come and see us.’’°*
°7 Personal communication July 12, 1995.
68 William H. Dall to Gilbert D. Harris, June 24, 1920. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 33
So, now with a young daughter as well as a wife,
Harris found himself unemployed. Yet he was not
without prospects. According to Harris, around this
time he received a recommendation from C. D. Wal-
cott, who was the Chief Paleontologist and later the
Director of the U.S.G:S.:
“In °92, during one of those pseudo-economic, or political
paroxysms that formerly afflicted our federal Geological
Survey, the writer, an employe of that organization, very
naturally found it necessary to seek other quarters where
his work in Tertiary Paleontology could be advantageously
continued. Through a recommendation of Chief Paleon-
tologist Walcott (now Secretary of The Smithsonian In-
stitution) such a haven was found on the State Geological
Survey of Texas,°’ then being ably administered by Mr.
E. T. Dumble.” (Harris, 1919, p. 3).7°
Apparently that recommendation, plus his recent
experience with the Arkansas Geological Survey, put
Harris in Texas sometime in 1892 and part of 1893,
““... as Tertiary paleontologist to the Geological [and
Mineral] Survey of Texas during the years 1892 and
1893, ...” (Harris, 1895a). As no letters have been
located from Clara to him during this period of time,
it is not known whether his new wife and daughter
accompanied him to Texas or not, but most likely, as
in previous separations, Clara and Rebecca returned
to her home at Harmony, New York while he worked
in Texas.
Given his successful work in Arkansas with Branner
both in 1888 and in 1892, it would been logical for
him to join the Arkansas Survey instead of the one in
Texas. Funding problems, however, were plaguing
Branner as well as his counterparts in Washington, but
for a different reason:
“Since the main reason for the re-establishment of the
survey [in 1887] was to ascertain the potential for gold
and silver in western Arkansas, it was essential that this
be one of the investigations conducted. Dr. Branner’s staff
made an evaluation of the gold and silver prospects open
at that time and showed that at least in case of the mines
then open, there was no validity in claims being made
about gold possibilities. This so irritated some people in
the State that funding for the geological Survey was with-
drawn, not to be re-established until 1923!” [Emphasis in
the original.] (Anonymous, 1988, p. 21.).
They were angry for him “standing in the way” of
progress and Branner was publicly castigated by mem-
bers of the legislature. One angry mob of potential
°° The full name at that time was the Geological and Mineral
Survey of Texas (Johansen, 1988).
7 Tn the Harris Archives is a small handwritten note, “as told
oraly [sic] by Harris to Palmer, 8/46” which states, ‘‘Walcott sug-
gested Harris for Texas Survey . . .” HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
speculators and miners actually burned him in efhigy
(Brice, 1989). Thus, Harris embarked on a series of
professional situations where his fate and the fate of
his work would be in the hands of politicians.
Harris arrived in Texas late in 1892 and stayed until
early 1893. While there, he was able to make com-
parisons between the fossils from Texas with ones in
the collections in Washington, D.C. He continued to
make more collections of his own as he travelled the
coast on his trips between Texas and Washington. He
found that the Paleocene Midwayan Stage extended
well into Texas, as did the Eocene Lower Claibornian
which had been described previously from Arkansas
and Alabama (Palmer, 1953c). These discoveries, al-
though seemingly minor today, were important pieces
of stratigraphic information for unraveling the biolog-
ical and geological history of the Coastal Plain, a study
which would occupy Harris for the remainder of his
career.
He returned to Texas again during the winter term
of 1926-27, toward the end of his teaching career, but
this time he went as a visiting professor at the Uni-
versity of Texas, invited there by his former student,
Professor Francis L. Whitney (Palmer 1953c).7!
In April 1891, a well was drilled near Galveston to
a depth of just over 3000 feet and Harris had an op-
portunity to examine the samples from this deep hole.
This work was briefly mentioned in the 4th Annual
Report of the Texas Survey for 1892 (Harris, 1893b)
and in a joint paper with E. T. Dumble (Dumble and
Harris, 1893). Harris eventually produced a 400 page
manuscript on the Tertiary geology and paleontology
of Texas. The manuscript was clearly state-of-the-art
for its time, but Harris experienced great difficulties
getting it into print. According to Johansen (1988), at
this point the entire Texas survey lost its funding. Ap-
parently it was:
“... the subject of a fight [no reason given] in the twenty-
third Legislature and was denied funding by the governor
in 1893.” (Johansen, 1988, p. 410).
This condition of no funding continued until this Surv-
ey’s official termination in 1901 when a new organi-
zation, the University of Texas Mineral Survey, was
created. Harris’ monograph, however, was not part of
the new Survey’s publishing agenda.
In a later publication of parts of the Texas mono-
graph by the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila-
delphia, Harris described the situation:
7! Annual Report by Heinrich Ries for 1926-27 states that Harris
was on leave from January to March, 1927 to give lectures in Texas.
Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 2, File 2-4. RMC-KL, Cornell.
“While employed as Tertiary paleontologist to the Geo-
logical Survey of Texas during the years 1892 and 1893,
the writer prepared a large monograph on the Tertiary
mollusca of the State with the intention of publishing it
in the 5th Annual Report of that Survey. For want of funds
the printing of this report has been indefinitely postponed
and accordingly the following facts and descriptions of new
species, taken from the monograph in question, have here
found an appropriate place for publication.” (Harris, 1895a,
p.45).
The State Geologist of Texas, E. T. Dumble, included
some of the stratigraphic data from Harris’ work in an
1893 paper in the Journal of Geology in which he stated
that the report was based:
**.. partly on that of other members of the survey, and
the paleontological studies of Cope, Harris, and Cragin,
the details of which have been given in previous publi-
cations or will appear in the Fifth Annual Report of the
Geological Survey.” (Dumble, 1894, p. 549).
Later, in 1895, Harris published another piece of the
monograph as No. 3 of volume | of the Bulletins of
American Paleontology, ““Neocene mollusca of Texas
or fossils from the Deep Well at Galveston” (Harris,
1895c). Most of the manuscript, however, was never
published. In 1937, Harris described the situation with
these words:
“Forty-four years ago the writer completed a monograph
on the Tertiary Mollusca of Texas for the Geological Sur-
vey of that State. The plates illustrating the fauna were
engraved and a few proof copies struck off, but the finances
of the Survey seemed at that time scarcely ample to war-
rant immediate publication. The Survey was soon discon-
tinued. Some of the new or otherwise interesting material
of this monograph was excerpted and published in the
Proceedings of the Philadelphia Academy (Nat. Sci.) for
1895, but the bulk of the material has remained unpub-
lished to this day.” (Harris, 1937a, Foreword dated April
10th, p. 3).
What was lost to the world of paleontology can be seen
from a description Harris (1895c) gave of the table of
contents of that typewritten monograph:
“Preliminary Remarks, pp. 1-5.
Part 1. Brief review of the literature on the Tertiary mol-
lusca of Texas, pp. 6-21.
Part 2. Eocene mollusca of Texas, pp. 22—352.—The name,
author, synonymy, original description, additional re-
marks, all known localities for each species in Texas,
important localities in other States, geological range, and
where the type specimen may now be found.
Addenda to Part 2. New or interesting Eocene mollusca
from other States, pp. 353-357,
Part 3. Neocene mollusca of Texas, or Fossils from the
Galveston deep well, pp. 358-397.—The name, etc. as
in Pt. 2, and the range in depth of each species.
34 BULLETIN 350
Part 4. Definition and correlation of the marine Tertiary
deposits of Texas, pp. 398—409.—Section I. Review of
the works and opinions of earlier writers. Sec. 2. Con-
clusions drawn from the present paleontological study.
“The last mentioned part is followed by (1) a detail [sic]
account of all the localities or stations whence the Tertiary
fossils were obtained, (2) a table showing at a glance the
geographical distribution of the Eocene molluscan species in
Texas and their geological range in this State and others
farther east, (3) a table showing the bathymetric distribution
of the Galveston well fossils, pp. 410-434, and (4) 36 large
octavo plates illustrating the species mentioned or described
in Parts 2 and 3.
“The article published by the Academy [of Natural Sci-
ences of Philadelphia] contained the description of the new
species of Part 2 and the figures belonging thereto; the ma-
jority of that part, and which alone is of present stratigraphic
value, still remains in manuscript.
“This Bulletin [Number 3] is practically a condensation of
Part 3. It seems advisable that this unique material should
no longer remain unpublished, for up to the date no other
marine Neocene fossils are known from the Gulf slope west
of Mississippi.”’ (Harris, 1895c, p. 85).
Unfortunately, it appears that most of this manuscript
no longer exists; only about 100 pages of the fossil
descriptions survive in the Harris Archives at PRI.
Harris must not have spent all of 1893 in Texas,
however, for it was in the spring of that year that he
embarked on his first private publishing venture, work-
ing with a printing company in Washington, D. C. He
must have spent at least some time in Washington to
oversee the final stages of this project.
As he delved more deeply into the world of Tertiary
fossils, Harris noted a scarcity of original copies of the
early works describing these fossils, especially the works
of Timothy Abbott Conrad’? which had been pub-
lished in the 1830s. In a footnote on page 5 of his
reprint, Harris described the location of the 16 known
copies in 1893. Especially bothersome was that their
rarity made taking copies of Conrad’s publications into
the field out of the question. Harris therefore set out
to remedy the situation, at least partially, by arranging
a reprint of Conrad’s Fossil Shells of the Tertiary For-
mations of North America (Conrad, 1832, 1833; Har-
ris, 1893c). Harris stated the reason for undertaking
such a venture in the Introduction to his reprint:
*““He who would become versed in the marine Tertiary
geology and paleontology of this country must first of all
have a thorough understanding of Conrad’s FOSSIL
SHELLS OF THE TERTIARY FORMATIONS OF
72 Timothy Abbott Conrad (1803-1877) was a famous pioneer
paleontologist who is remembered especially for his work with Ce-
nozoic fossils. See Wheeler (1935) for details of Conrad’s life and
work.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 35
NORTH AMERICA: it marks the beginning of systematic
research into this period of our continent’s history.” (Har-
ris, 1893c, p. 5).
Harris had 225 copies of the text and 200 copies of
the illustrations re-printed at his own expense; he then
sold copies, both in the U.S. and abroad, to recover
the costs. The printing was done in April, 1893, and
until November of that year the cost was $3.00, post-
paid in the U:S., but after that date, the price was $3.50.
This small advertisement was put in early editions of
the Bulletins of American Paleontology:
‘A few copies of our reprint of Conrad’s Fossil Shells of
the Tertiary Formations still remain unsold. Price: $3.50.
Address
Gilbert D. Harris, Ithaca, N.Y.
or,
Wm. Wesley & Son, 28 Essex Street, Strand, London,
England’?
He finally sold the last of these in the 1930s (Palmer,
1963). PRI re-issued this Conrad volume in 1963; it
was still available in 1995.
Harris was not alone in reprinting Conrad’s work.
Also in 1893, Dall arranged to reprint some of Con-
rad’s works (Dall 1893a, b). Harris published a short
paper about Dall’s work’* with Conrad’s publications
(Harris, 1893d) pointing out some errors Dall had made
in getting the proper publication dates for Conrad’s
works.
At the end of this small article Harris wrote: ““Wash-
ington, D.C. February 25, 1893”’, and it starts with the
words, “Upon my return to Washington from a sojourn
in Texas, ...”; thus by the end of February of 1893
he was back in Washington, D. C.’° According to Palm-
er (1953c), Harris had returned to the Smithsonian to
work on his own fossils.
But Harris’ life was about to take another major
twist. While he was exploring the rocks of southern
Texas, his Alma Mater had experienced some major
changes in its geology faculty. Henry S. Williams, who
had studied at Yale and had been Harris’ professor,
had been asked by James Dana to return to Yale as
his successor. This left no one at Cornell in paleon-
tology, for Ralph S. Tarr, who came to the department
73 Printed inside the back cover of Bulletins of American Pale-
ontology, No. 1 (May), 1895.
74 Dall, William Healey, Determination of dates of publication of
Conrad’s Fossils of the Tertiary Formation and Medial Tertiary:
Read before the Philosophical Society, November 12, 1892. This
information on Dall’s paper came from Harris, 1893d.
75 An interesting note about his paper on Dall’s Conrad material
is that on all reprint copies found at PRI, someone, probably Harris,
modified a word in the title, from “Collection” to “Collation.” There
must have been a typographical error in the printed title.
in January 1892, was a physical geographer. To be sure,
Tarr had worked with Permian rocks (Tarr, 1892) while
employed with the same Geological and Mineral Sur-
vey of Texas as Harris, but paleontology was not his
favorite part of geology. To remedy this situation, Cor-
nell’s President, Jacob Gould Schurman, approached
Harris about joining the faculty there (Brice, 1989).
Based upon a letter from J.C. Branner to Harris a
few months after he came to Cornell, it seems Schur-
man considered several other people, in addition to
Harris, for the position. Interestingly enough, Harris
gave Schurman a strong recommendation for one of
the other candidates, Charles Prosser, who had been
H. S. Williams’ assistant when Harris did the extra
year of graduate study before going to Arkansas the
first time:
““My dear Harris:
“Tam glad to see that the geol. dept. at Cornell is ‘getting
a move on.’...
“As for the Texas work—what can you expect? In Ark.
they block my work at every nook and corner, and in the
meantime howl because the reports are not out. They make
MessICKae ee
“In order to set Prosser right in regard to your appoint-
ment at Cornell, I wrote him since I came back this fall
telling him that I knew about your efforts in his behalf.
When he replied it was evident that he didn’t believe all
I told him, altho [sic] he said he wished you all success
and that sort of thing. He doesn’t know how you stood up
for him, and he won’t believe it for my telling him about
nig? BO
No doubt Harris received recommendations from J.
C. Branner and others, and eventually he was offered
the position as instructor ($1,000 per year) with pos-
sible promotion to assistant professor ($1,400-1,800
per year); this even though he had no teaching expe-
rience. Apparently Harris replied to Schurman’s first
offer with several questions and possibly some re-
quests, one of which apparently was for an appoint-
ment as a Professor, not Instructor, of Paleontology.
Schurman had these responses:
“Tt is not likely, however, that we shall either now or in
the near future appoint a full professor for this subject
[paleontology], as we are desirous of giving greater prom-
inence to geology proper.’’”’
and 10 days later:
76 Letter from J. C. Branner to Gilbert D. Harris, December 2,
1894. At this time Harris and his family were living at 60 Eddy
Street. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
77 Jacob G. Schurman to Gilbert D. Harris, November 15, 1893.
Jacob Gould Schurman Papers 3/4/6; Reel 8 (vol. 2, p. 43). RMC-
KL, Cornell.
36 BULLETIN 350
“Instead of getting a professor of general geology, I think
we are more likely to get a number of young men who will
specialize as instructors or assistant professors in pale-
ontology, mineralogy, petrography, physical geography and
other divisions of the general subject. At present I do not
know who the teachers will be in any of these branches;
but I had thought of you for paleontology. Your letter,
however, leaves me in uncertainty whether you desire such
a position.”’’®
A small handwritten note in the Harris Archives
indicates that when he was first offered the position at
the instructor rank, Harris said no, but he would come
at the higher rank.’? After this, Harris must have given
a more positive response to the offer, but he asked for
$1500. He indicated, however, that he would come for
less money if he received the rank of assistant profes-
sor. In December of 1893 Schurman wrote to him:
“After consultation with the Trustees, I have much pleas-
ure in informing you that we have virtually appointed you
assistant professor of Paleontology, for the usual term of
three years, at the usual salary of $1400 a year... .
““We propose to have three young men as assistant pro-
fessors in the department. One will take Dynamic Geology
’8 Jacob G. Schurman to Gilbert D. Harris, November 25, 1893.
Jacob Gould Schurman Papers 3/4/6; Reel 8 (vol. 2, p. 82). RMC-
KL, Cornell.
7? Handwritten note, “as told oraly [sic] by Harris to Palmer, 8/46.”
HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
and Physical Geography and probably also Economic Ge-
ology; the second, Paleontology, and the third, Mineralogy
and Petrography. Each of these men is to be independent
of the others; .. . your position would be that of assistant
professor of Paleontology.’’*°
The formal appointment by the Board of Trustees came
in January 1894:
“I congratulate you on the appointment; and am heartily
glad that you are to continue at your Alma Mater the work
so admirably done by Professor H. S. Williams.’’®!
And so, by January 1894, Harris had secured an
appointment to Cornell where he was to stay until his
retirement in 1934 (Plate 2). Yet from the beginning
a cloud was to be over his head, for one phrase in
Schurman’s letter quoted previously, ““Each of these
men is to be independent of the others; ...”, was to
echo through McGraw Hall for well over 70 years.
With that phrase, Schurman, perhaps unknowingly,
created three separate departments where there had
been one, and each of the three men interpreted Schur-
man’s word “independent” as literally as possible.
8° Jacob G. Schurman to Gilbert D. Harris, December 13, 1893.
Jacob Gould Schurman Papers 3/4/6; Reel 8 (vol. 2, p. 122). RMC-
KL, Cornell.
8! Jacob G. Schurman to Gilbert D. Harris, January 13, 1894.
Jacob Gould Schurman Papers 3/4/6; Reel 8 (vol. 2, p. 179). RMC-
KL, Cornell.
CHAPTER 3. RETURN TO CORNELL
From its beginnings in 1868 under the leadership of
Charles Frederic Hartt, paleontology was the major
emphasis 1n geology at Cornell. By 1874, the original
name, School of Geology, was changed to School of
Geology and Paleontology, reflecting this emphasis.
With Hartt’s departure for Brazil in 1874, followed a
year later by his assistant, Orville A. Derby, paleon-
tology was given less emphasis in the department until
Henry Shaler Williams joined the faculty in 1879. Wil-
liams once again put paleontology and stratigraphy
into the forefront of research activities and teaching at
Cornell. Even after the addition of mineralogy in 1887
when the name became School of Geology, Paleon-
tology, and Mineralogy, paleontology was still a major
part of the curriculum.
Upon the retirement of James Dana from Yale in
1892, H. S. Williams left Cornell to replace him and
paleontology was de-emphasized once again, a con-
dition that continued for several years because the De-
partment had no paleontologist. Williams gave his rea-
sons for leaving in a letter to C. K. Adams, President
of Cornell:
“Tam requested to accept the Professorship of Geology in
Yale college to succeed Professor J. D. Dana. This call
from my ‘Alma Mater,’ accompanied with a personal in-
vitation from Professor Dana, comes with a force difficult
to resist.””!
At about the time Williams was contemplating his
departure, R. S. Tarr was hired? as a replacement for
' Letter from H. S. Williams to C. K. Adams, March 23, 1892.
Reproduced as part of the Cornell University Board of Trustees
meeting minutes, June 15, 1892.
? Tarr was appointed Assistant Professor of Geology and Miner-
alogy for the balance of the 1891-92 academic year at a salary of
$1000. There is no mention of his being placed in charge of the
department; Cornell University Board of Trustees meeting minutes,
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE Sh7/
J. Francis Williams? (no relation to H. S. Williams) a
young petrographer who, in 1891 at the age of 29, died
expectedly from complications following an illness
contracted while doing field work in Arkansas. But
Tarr was only an acting assistant professor on an an-
nual contract. While he was a capable scientist, Tarr
was not a lover of fossils, nor was he a mineralogist
and he made repeated requests to the administration
for additional faculty. But nothing transpired until 1894
when two new assistant professors arrived; Adam Ca-
pen Gill to teach mineralogy and Harris to teach pa-
leontology. There is no record that Tarr and Harris
knew each other, except perhaps by reputation, even
though they had worked with the Texas Survey at the
same time. Harris was a member of one field party and
Tarr was with another.
When these two new assistant professors were hired,
Tarr’s status changed from temporary to regular*. There
is, however, no official record that Tarr was consulted
about either of the two appointments although he had
been acting as the unofficial head of the department
since H. S. Williams left to go to Yale. In fact, one
source suggests that Tarr actually had been appointed
department head:
“.. fin 1891-92] Ralph Stockman Tarr was elected as-
sistant professor of geology and placed in charge of the
department, .. .”’ [Emphasis added.] (Hewett, 1905, v. II,
p. 235).
No official record of this has been found.
But Tarr’s feelings can be determined from a hand
written note found in the margin of a newspaper article
announcing the arrival of the two new faculty members
in which he indicated that these appointments will
divide the department into three parts (Brice, 1989, p.
75), which is exactly what happened. For the 1894-95
academic year, the university budget lists three sepa-
rate line items for the department, Dynamical Geol-
ogy, Geological Mineralogy, and Paleontology (Brice,
1989, p.75). Thus, the department that Harris joined
in 1894 was vastly different from the one in which he
had studied eight years earlier.
Harris was mindful of the limitations of his expe-
December 15, 1891. He was reappointed Assistant Professor of Ge-
ology for 1892-93, salary $1400; Trustee minutes, August 18, 1892;
and Assistant professor of Geology and Paleontology for 1893-94,
salary $1700; Trustee minutes, May 9, 1893.
3 J. F. Williams was hired on June 9, 1891 and died on November
17, 1891; Cornell University Board of Trustees meeting minutes,
June 9, 1891.
4 He received a three year contract as an Assistant Professor of
Dynamic Geology and Physical Geography, salary $1700; Cornell
University Board of Trustees meeting minutes, January 9, 1894.
rience in world geology, especially in the nature of the
European type localities for the Tertiary, 7.e., the lo-
cations where the particular stratigraphic units were
first described. So he had important items on his agen-
da before he took up his duties at Cornell: to see and
study those original localities, to study museum col-
lections, and obtain specimens for his own collection
(Palmer 1953c).° This trip not only broadened his
knowledge of European stratigraphy, but it served to
introduce him to the paleontologists on that side of the
Atlantic, and he was elected to membership in the
Société Géologique de France (Palmer, 1953c). Ac-
cording to Harris’ memorial in the Cornell Faculty
Necrology (Herrick et a/., 1953), such memberships
were not awarded lightly; the person had to be worthy
of the honor, especially someone from the United
States.
As he knew Williams’ specialty was the Paleozoic
and that Cornell’s collection held little Tertiary ma-
terial, Harris sought to increase the collection of Ter-
tiary fossils in the department, and asked President
Schurman for support. Schurman expressed his pleas-
ure that Dall was donating a:
“., duplicate set of Tertiary fossils ... [and Schurman
was providing] ... $25 or so to pay for the selection of
themes
It was also at about this time that Harris established
a working relationship with James Dwight Dana at
Yale. Just what prompted this connection or who ini-
tiated it is unknown, but it probably developed because
of Harris’ work with Dall and the U.S.G.S Neocene
Correlation Project published in 1892. In any case,
some time in 1893 or 1894, Harris worked with Dana
on the Tertiary section of a new edition of Dana’s
enormously popular and influential Manual of Geology
(Dana, 1895). Although Palmer (1953c) indicated that
Harris traveled to New Haven to work in Dana’s office,
a letter from Dana indicates that they used the mails
for communication as well. Dana comments on the
work Harris had done:
“T enclose herewith the plates from old number of the
Proceedings of the Acad. N. Sci. Philad. which you very
kindly sent me for the benefit of my book. The publishers
having recently returned them to me.
“The printing of the index now will bring the book to
an end.
>In the Foreword to a later publication, Harris said “After col-
lecting fossils in France and England in 1894... .” (Harris, 1937a, p.
3)
© Jacob G. Schurman to Gilbert D. Harris, February 8, 1864. Jacob
Gould Schurman Papers; 3/4/6; Reel 8 (vol.2, p. 245). RMC-KL,
Cornell.
38 BULLETIN 350
“T thank you again for all your kindness and greatly
valued favor.
“You noticed that in one point I did not follow your
ms—that is in the use of the word epoch in connection
with the subdivisions other than those of the Atlantic and
Mexican Gulf borders. My reason was that the time for
continent is covered by one series of epochs, or should be:
after one series is recognized and established by /fossi/s for
without fossils, a series of beds cannot represent any time
division satisfactorily. The great purpose of study is the
correlation of the beds of other regions with those so rec-
ognized, in order to give unity to the history. Several sets
of epochs formulate this purpose. You know that Prof. W.
B. Clarke named the N.J. Tertiary subdivisions as epochs;
and made a hodge-poge of the matter, as the Ist and 2nd
[illegible] belong together, and perhaps also the Clay Marls
below; and the 3d [illegible] has not fossils enough to fix
its equivalency. The Clay marl stratum is worse off as to
fossils.
“T have written this that you may have my reason for
the divergence from you.” [emphasis in original]’
As Dana died in April, 1895, this edition was his final
work (Williams, H. S., 1895). According to Williams’
memorial for Dana, he was confined to New Haven
during the last few months of his life while he was
working on this fourth edition, so if they were to work
together, in person, then Harris would have been the
one to do the traveling.
In the preface, Dana acknowledged Harris’ assis-
tance:
. and the Tertiary, as regards the Invertebrates, to
PROFESSOR G. D. HARRIS. ... and that with regard
to the marine Tertiary of the country was chiefly written
for its place by PROFESSOR HARRIS.” [Capitalization
in the original.] (Dana, 1895, p. 4).
The Tertiary section in Dana’s book runs from page
879 to 939, and Harris not only assisted with the writ-
ing, but he also drew several fossil plates found on
pages 896 and 897, and described many species found
in the fossil lists for the Eocene.
This collaboration must have been quite a boost for
Harris, for the fact that he was able to work with James
Dana, arguably the preeminent geologist of his time,
certainly indicated that he had already made a repu-
tation as a Tertiary paleontologist. The Manual was a
very important book, described by Williams has hav-
ing:
**. . done more to unify and codify American geology than
any other work, and until very recent years, if we may
’ Letter from James Dwight Dana to Gilbert D. Harris, November
26, 1894. No envelope accompanies the letter, so Harris’ location
at the time Dana wrote him is unknown, but it is assumed he was
in Ithaca. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
judge from their literary quotations, foreign geologists have
made Dana’s Manual their chief source of information
regarding the geology of America. ... [This last edition
provides] a complete account of the state of the science at
the time of its publication.” (Williams, H. S., 1895, p. 620).
PRINTER AND PUBLISHER
That first year at Cornell, 1894-95, was certainly a
busy one for Harris, for along with the trip to Europe
and the work for Dana, Harris was preparing for a new
career as a teacher. He also launched what would be-
come a major preoccupation for the rest of his life.
Harris had become quite frustrated in his dealing with
government agencies over publication delays—or in
the case of his Yorktown manuscript and his Texas
monograph, lack of publication—of his own work in
paleontology. Encouraged by his earlier success with
the Conrad reprint venture, Harris became convinced
that there was a need for a completely new, scientific
journal devoted exclusively to paleontology. With that
in mind, on May 25th, 1895, Harris published issue
one, volume one of the Bulletins of American Pale-
ontology. His new journal was devoted exclusively to
stratigraphy and paleontology, and Harris was willing
to publish papers that were quite long, often encom-
passing a single issue, which was a novel idea for
scientific journals at the time.® In 1995 the Bulletins
reached the 100th year of publication, making it the
oldest journal in the western hemisphere devoted ex-
clusively to paleontology’, and it is among the three
or four oldest such publications in the world.
Harris not only founded and published the Bulletins,
but he printed them on his own platen press in the
third-floor ‘“‘tower room,” off the gallery in the central
section of McGraw Hall at Cornell. The first issue of
the Bulletins appeared under the imprint: “Harris and
Stoneman” (using his wife’s maiden name); “Harris
Company” appeared on issue number four. Over time
the imprint became “The Harris Company,” which
remained on all issues until Volume 20 in 1932, when
it was replaced by the imprint of the Paleontological
Research Institution (PRI), the organization Harris
founded that same year. With its founding, PRI be-
came the publisher of the Bulletins, a role that contin-
8 The journal today continues Harris’ innovative policy of having
a single issue devoted to one paper when appropriate.
° The next oldest in the U.S. is the Journal of Paleontology. Ac-
cording to the ‘NOTICE TO MICROPALEONTOLOGISTS” signed
by J. J. Galloway, the first editor, and dated December 14, 1926,
“Plans are now nearly complete for beginning the publication of the
Journal of Paleontology, which was founded by the Section of Pa-
leontology of the American Association of Petroleum Geologists.”
Actual publication began in 1927. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 39
ues to the present day. It was well Harris had some-
where else for his printing operation because the vi-
bration was causing some problems in McGraw Hall
and the University wanted it moved:
‘‘The ‘powers’ also feel that your printing press in the tower
room on the third floor is an unsafe load, and would ap-
preciate it if you can move it to some other place. Mr.
Van Blarcom says that they will move it to any place that
you may designate without expense to yourself.””!°
On the back cover of Volume 1, Number 1, dated
May 25, 1895, Harris wrote:
“ANNOUNCEMENT
These Bulletins will appear when suitable material is pre-
pared for them and not necessarily at regular intervals.
They will not represent work done by one person or
institution!’ but will be of a more general nature subject
to acceptable contributions from all paleontological work-
ers. They will, we believe, serve as a receptacle for articles
too technical or long for the ordinary monthly periodicals
and too important to admit a delay from one to an in-
definite number of years in a government printing office.
Moreover, the desirability of amassing articles relating to
one branch of knowledge in one publication, must be evi-
dent to all.”
This announcement reveals Harris’s experiences with
long publication delays in government printing offices
from his days with the U.S.G.S. and the Geological
Surveys of Arkansas and Texas. He alluded to the prob-
lem again in Number 3 of Volume | (Harris, 1895c),
in the paper about the Galveston Deep Well fossils,
and he summarized the contents of his large Tertiary
fossil monograph that had been “‘in press” for several
years, but at that time had still not appeared. !
Also, the organization of his own publishing com-
pany gave him the ability to reprint classic works in
paleontology as he had done earlier with the Conrad
reprint. In his reprint of the paleontological writings
of Thomas Say'? Harris explained why he felt com-
pelled to do these reprints:
!0 Heinrich Ries to G. D. Harris, October 15, 1934. Heinrich Ries
Papers, 15/15/691, Box 1, File 1-24. RMC-KL, Cornell.
'| These remarks probably concern James Dana’s American Jour-
nal of Science, published at Yale University, and the Journal of
Geology, published at the University of Chicago.
'2 As mentioned earlier, parts of the Texas manuscript were pub-
lished by both Harris (1895a) and the Texas State Geologist, Edwin
T. Dumble (1894), but most of it was never published. A small
portion of the original manuscript is in the Harris Archives at PRI.
'3 Thomas Say (1787-1834) was a self-taught naturalist who was
a charter member of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadel-
phia. He was a friend and co-worker of William Maclure (who pro-
duced one of the earliest geologic maps of the U.S.), and in 1816 he
wrote the first paper by an American about American shells. Say did
“For several years we have been endeavoring to decide
upon the most feasible plan for rendering the paleonto-
logical literature of America, especially that from 1800 to
1860, more accessible to young students... . All digests,
adaptations or condensations of works dealing with the
systematic side of natural history have seemed but delu-
sions, and fraught with grave dangers; for, what two per-
sons would cull out the same passages as worthy of going
into a digest of an author’s writings!—the author alone
knew just what he wanted to say and how to say it.
“Surely, no scholar will ever rest contented with an
abridged form of any author’s works; he must have the
real thing. But if the real thing is beyond his means and
there are no magnificent libraries to which he had access,
what is he to do? There seems to be but one really satis-
factory solution to the difficulty, viz., a republication of
each author’s work, exactly as he wrote and punctuated
it, word for word, line for line, page for page, and plate
for plate, regardless of the publication in which it first
appeared.
“*.. . Doubtless some will believe that it is means thrown
away to republish these short and seemingly unimportant
articles [by Say]. Yet we believe such not to be the case.
More than once have our European co-workers overlooked
Say’s original description of Exogyra and credited the ge-
nus to Sowerby, too often has Say’s work on ‘Crinoidea’
been forgotten... .
“*.. The humble task of republication . . . can point out
the way in which the study of paleontology can be for-
warded ... by making its literature accessible, at a very
modest cost, ina most convenient form. . .”’ (Harris, 1896b,
p. 273-274).
In 1921, Harris brought out a reprint of the paleon-
tological writings of Robert J. L. Guppy (Harris,
1921).'4 This tradition was continued by Harris’ suc-
cessor as editor of the Bulletins, Katherine V. W. Palm-
er.
Originally the cost of the Bulletins was one dollar
per one hundred pages, “strictly in advance.”’ Harris
must have tried to attract some advertising as well, for
inside the front cover of issue Number one is an an-
nouncement for The Nautilus, a journal published by
the Academy of Natural Sciences in Philadelphia. As
he had recently published a paper in their proceedings
(Harris, 1895a), however, he might not have charged
major works in conchology (6 volumes) and entomology (3 volumes).
(Dictionary of Scientific Biography, v. XIV, p. 132-134).
'4 Robert John Lechmere Guppy (b. London 1836-d. Port of Spain
1916), trained as a civil engineer, settled in Trinidad in 1859 after
traveling in Australia (Tasmania) and New Zealand. He wrote almost
100 papers on the geology of Trinidad and the West Indies (Guppy,
1907). Shortly before his death, Carlotta Maury, a former Harris
student, mounted her expedition to San Domingo in 1916. Ina letter
to Harris, Guppy indicated he was hoping to hear something of the
“Maury Expedition.” R. J. Lechmere Guppy to Gilbert D. Harris,
April 18, 1916. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
40 BULLETIN 350
for the space. The notice did not appear in the second
issue.
Irregular publication was certainly the case with the
early issues of the Bulletins; the five issues of Volume
1 appeared between May 25, 1895, and December 7,
1896. Being his own publisher, furthermore, reduced
the possibility that unfavorable comments from a peer
review would stop or delay publication—and in the
early volumes, Harris’ own writings predominate (Har-
ris, 1895b,c; 1896a). He did, however, make an effort
to attract other authors, for in June of 1896, Science
carried a small note!>:
“A prize of $50 is offered by the editor of the Bulletins of
American Paleontology, Prof. G. D. Harris, of Cornell
University, for a monograph suitable for publication in
the bulletins; it must be presented before May 1, 1897.”
(June 19, 1896)
Atsome point, another Cornell faculty member took
a leaf from the Harris book and formed a printing
company. In the Harris Archives is a large undated
envelop with an advertisement on it for a publication
from “The Comstock Publishing Company, Ithaca,
New York.” The publication is “The Moth and But-
terfly Outlines’’, and this company was created by John
H. Comstock, Professor of Entomology, who was a
contemporary of Harris’ (but no relation to the Com-
stock who was in the Geology Department in the 1870s).
Perhaps Comstock saw ““The Harris Company” suc-
cess and attempted to develop a similar enterprise, but
this is the only reference I have ever seen to ‘The
Comstock Company.”
There was also an advantage for students that Harris
owned his own scientific journal. His major philosophy
of teaching was to allow students to learn by doing
actual research, and the final product of such activity
was (and is) to put the work before colleagues in the
field by the publication of the results. Edward M. Kin-
dle, a student at Cornell during Harris’ second year of
teaching, was the first to benefit from this arrangement.
His Master’s Degree thesis, a study of Devonian stra-
tigraphy and paleontology in the Ithaca area, was pub-
lished in the Bulletins (Kindle, 1896), the first of many
student theses to be printed in a Harris publication
(e.g., Sheldon, 1916; Hodson, F., 1926; Weisbord, 1926;
Schoonover, 1941). A measure of the quality of this
first student author can be seen in the fact that Kindle
was a geologically multi-talented student, for the same
year in which he published his work on the Devonian
strata and fossils of the Ithaca area, he went to Green-
'S A similar notice was printed in the American Journal of Science,
4th Series, v. 2, pp. 85-86.
land as a member of Professor Tarr’s 1896 expedition
to study glacial activity there (Brice, 1989).
Later, when Harris had his field camp in the Held-
erbergs near Albany, New York, other students were
also able to see the result of their labors in print. Herd-
man F. Cleland (later a professor at Williams College)
discovered a previously undescribed fossil fauna in the
limestones of the Mohawk Valley, and this work was
published in the Bulletins (Cleland, 1900, 1903), The
1900 field camp was the first of several for Percy E.
Raymond (who the following year was a graduate stu-
dent at Yale and later had a distinguished career at
Harvard), and he, too, published on material gathered
while attending Harris’ field camp (Raymond, 1902,
1903). Harris had high esteem for Raymond: ‘‘Mr Ray-
mond, by natural instinct a geologist before he ever
came to Cornell.’’!®
Apparently not everyone at Cornell appreciated Har-
ris being able to publish student work in his journal,
and the objections must have reached the Cornell ad-
ministration. In 1913, Harris responded to Ernest Mer-
ritt, Dean of the Graduate School:
““... In general it seems to me, that any Professor is in a
way more or less responsible financially for the publication
of this [sic] thesis by students under his direction. . . . Some
I have heard of, have been published by publications hav-
ing considerable means at their disposal, would cost the
student not less than $1500. Any such drain on the or-
dinary student’s finance [for] the cost of a very unremu-
nerative career of study, would seem to me disastrous... .
Naturally, so far as my own department is concerned, I
look out after the publication myself for the subjects are
usually Paleontological and can be made to fit in as one
of my Bulletins of American Paleontology. Naturally many
of us are wishing that our University could have a press
of its own wherein things might be published, serving thus
as a means of exchange and as it were a legitimate means
of advertising our research work. However, naturally, I
am getting along without such University support in a very
satisfactory manner.”’!’
The perceived lack of support by the University, al-
luded to in the last sentence, was to continue to trouble
Harris for many years.
By 1916, Harris had become dissatisfied with the
coverage and the small (octavo) size of the Bulletins
and felt the need for another series of larger size. He
therefore began Pal@ontographica Americana, a quar-
'e 4nnual Report to the President of Cornell University of the De-
partment of Paleontology and Stratigraphic Geology, May 15, 1901,
by Gilbert D. Harris, p. 5. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
'7 Unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris to Ernest Merritt,
December 8, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 41
to sized monographic series, 21 years after he began
the Bulletins.'® This larger-format publication was to
emphasize more detailed, systematic papers on in-
vertebrate paleontology. Most importantly, given the
larger format, the illustrations could be larger. With
his new journal, Harris followed the European tra-
dition for publications of this type in both name and
size, e.g., Palwontographica Italica (1895) and
Paleontographica (German, 1851).
Harris’ introduction to the first issue of
Paleontographica Americana also gives a rare insight
into his views of both the role of paleontological re-
search and publication in studies of organic evolution,
and the place he believed his publications would as-
sume in the history of American paleontology:
“Several years ago we commenced a series of papers in
‘Bulletins of American Paleontology,’ dealing with the
molluscan remains in the various horizons of our southern
Tertiaries. In these the subject matter is treated strati-
graphically; in other words, the Midway stage was first
taken up, then the Lignitic, and now the Claiborne is in
press.!° Other papers dealing with special localities or ho-
rizons have also been published. In future numbers we
hope to discuss all important Tertiary horizons strati-
graphically. This seems the natural way for all investiga-
tion of this preliminary nature. Witness for example Hall’s
works on the paleontology of New York as well as the
paleontological matter included in our various state survey
reports. Such papers if printed in small octavo form are
convenient for field use as well as laboratory study.
“But as years pass by and the faunas of the various
horizons are better understood, and vast amounts of ma-
terial collect in our museums, there comes a time when a
purely biologic phase of investigation may be advanta-
geously undertaken. Note for example the more recent
works of Clarke and Ruedemann of the New York survey.
This calls for a larger sized publication, admitting plates
of sufficient dimensions to contain for comparison rep-
resentatives of many closely allied types of life. And, the
large size page will be found not inconvenient in laboratory
and museum where desks and tables are at hand; in the
field, a work arranged biologically would scarcely ever be
called for. Accordingly, this new work has been begun to
receive such papers on invertebrate paleontology as are
arranged systematically, papers that will be of direct as-
sistance to students of biologic evolution.
'8 Although the title page of the first issue carries the year 1916,
on the Errata page at the end, Harris says the actual date of publi-
cation was January 31, 1917.
19 Harris did this with the following publications: Midway (Paleo-
cene), Bulletins No. 4, 1896; the Lignitic (Wilcox, Sabine), Bulletins,
Nos. 9, 1897, 11, 1899; Claiborne (Lower and Gosport Sand), Bul-
letins No. 13, 1919, and others on this unit, Bulletins 32, 1937
(Palmer); and Bulletins No. 117, 1946-47 (Harris and Palmer).
“The first of these papers, unpretentious and seemingly
easy of preparation, has cost the author a vast amount of
study here and elsewhere to make sure that no serious
omissions of specific or varietal forms have been made
either in the text or plates, and that the figures and text
indicate clearly the characteristic features of each form
discussed.
Paleontology Laboratory G. D. Harris
Cornell University
October 30, 1916” (Sheldon, 1916, p. 3)
That first issue was a good example of what Harris was
trying to accomplish. For her Ph.D. thesis, Pearl Shel-
don did a massive study of bivalve mollusks of the ark
family, and her work was chosen for the inaugural issue
(Sheldon, 1916).
Shortly after Harris’ death in 1952, Katherine V. W.
Palmer, in response to an inquiry from someone at
Ward’s Natural Science Establishment, described Har-
ris’ publication efforts:
“As to the Bulletins, I am enclosing the most recent list
so that you may gain an idea of the scope and number
that have been published. You will note that he started
them in 1895, printing the publications on his own platen
press. This he had up in the tower room on the balcony
floor of McGraw Hall. He had a typesetter there who set
the copy in monotype. Later, in the middle 20’s he got a
cylinder press on which he could print a signature of 16
pages. This [cylinder press] he had in the basement of his
home at 126 Kelvin Place . . . In 1936-37 when we added
the second unit to the building of the Paleontological Re-
search Institution, the two presses were moved to the base-
ment of that unit, where the small press remains [1953].
Prof. Harris printed until 1949. That would have been
Bulletin 134.
“Previous to the founding of the Journal of Paleontol-
ogy in 1927, the Bulletins of American Paleontology were
the only publication in America devoted entirely to pa-
leontology. Prof. Harris founded the Bulletins to print his
own publications and to help his students publish their
theses and papers. By the means which he used, he could
reduce the cost of publication so that this could be done.
He started in 1917 [actual date of printing] the quarto
series, Palaeontographica Americana, a series for mono-
graphs of special subjects. Since there were similar series
in England, Germany and Italy, this is the series in Amer-
ica of the same standard. This naturally has not had as
many numbers published. We have now [1953] in press
No. 25, which will be a monograph on Venericardia.””
(Anonymous, 1953, p. 49).
The Paleontological Research Institution continues to
publish both journals.
Harris had a special interest in the illustrations used
in paleontological publications. As mentioned above,
42 BULLETIN 350
he had shown talent as an illustrator at an early age
and he contributed several illustrations to Dana’s
Manual of Geology; he also made many of the skillfully
executed drawings of fossils for the reports on the Ar-
kansas Tertiary in 1894, and for several other folios.
Now with his own journal series he had an opportunity
to pursue this interest with great vigor and determ1-
nation. Many drawings of fossil mollusks found in the
early volumes of the Bulletins were drawn by his hand.
Thus, he was not only editor, frequent contributor,
publisher, and printer, but the chief illustrator as well.
When photographic illustrations replaced ink draw-
ings, Harris perfected methods developed by H. S. Wil-
liams for coating fossils with sal ammoniac (ammo-
nium chloride) to bring out details in the photographs.
In addition, in his pursuit of clarity for illustrations,
Harris experimented with other photographic tech-
niques using glass negatives and copper plates. Palmer
(1953a) indicated that he also experimented with col-
lotype engraving for a few issues:
“T believe the word Collotype is used sometimes generi-
cally to include most all of the gelatin processes but, as I
understand this process is differentiated from the Helio-
type largely by the fact that the so-called gelatin skin re-
mains attached to a thick plate glass and is not removed,
placed upon pewter, or fixed for a roller in the process of
printing.”’?°
His demand for the highest possible quality in all
illustrations in his journals is a legacy continued by
PRI today as they continue to publish both the Bul-
letins and Paleontographica Americana. In fact, no
better indication of his emphasis on illustrations can
be found than in the complete title, which is seldom
used, of this second journal: Pa/@ontographica Amer-
icana-Illustrated Contributions to the Invertebrate Pa-
leontology of America.
TEACHER
Asa teacher, Harris is best remembered for his grad-
uate students and their individual research projects.
He was less than effective in large classes, for he had
a tendency to speak softly and often off to the side
rather than toward the class 7!. One former student
remembers Harris as a “wonderfully poor” teacher who
did not have any set method of instruction, had a poor
delivery, and was seldom prepared. It was not uncom-
mon for Harris to arrive for class with the lantern slides
he was going to use wet from the developing process.??
20 Unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris to Paul Bartsch, De-
cember 8, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
*! Katherine V. W. Palmer, personal communication, July 28,
1982.
2 Personal communication, John W. Wells, July 15, 1982.
But despite his apparent lack of preparation and poor
lecturing style, Harris did reach the undergraduate stu-
dent and communicated his enthusiasm and his love
for geology. John L. Rich remembered his first en-
counter with Harris with these words:
“T first came under the influence of Professor Harris in the
year 1903-04 when I took his elementary course in His-
torical Geology and found a slumbering interest in rocks
and fossils fanned to a flame.”’??
In advanced classes, however, Harris was more at
ease. He and his students would frequently sit around
a table full of mollusks and Harris would describe each
one; no lecture, as such, just him talking about the
fossils.24 This was in keeping with his feeling that:
“*.. . far away things and mere principals [sic] do not appeal
to the young mind as near at hand concrete objects and
facts.”’*5
For advanced students this technique was clearly in-
spirational. As Kenneth Caster (A.B. ’29, M.S. 731,
Ph.D. °33), later of the University of Cincinnati, com-
mented many years later, Harris taught “more by pre-
cept than rote or formality,” and he treated students
as (paraphrasing the motto of Sigma Xj, the scientific
research honor society) ‘*... zealous companions in
research” (Caster, 1973). John Rich, also later at the
University of Cincinnati, said that Harris’ students:
“*.. remember especially the stimulus which came from
his own active pursuit of scientific studies, his strong per-
sonal interest in them [the students], and his habit of as-
signing to them responsibilities which might ordinarily be
considered to be beyond the capacities of students in their
earlier years.”*°
One measure of his ability as a teacher lies in the
success of his students. To date, more of Harris’ stu-
dents have been awarded paleontology’s highest honor
in the United States, the Paleontological Society Med-
al, than any other single professor (Schram, 1992). Three
of his students have been so honored: Katherine V. W.
Palmer (1972) (the first woman awardee), John W.
Wells (1974), and Kenneth E. Caster (1976). For
Schram, such success was derived directly from the
mentor:
23 John L. Rich to Axel A. Olsson, February 21, 1953. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
24 Personal communication, Dr. John W. Wells, July 15, 1982.
Wells served as Harris’ graduate assistant about one year after he
came to Cornell in 1928 (Brice et a/., 1995).
25 Unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris to Edward M. Tuttle,
May 30, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
26 John L. Rich to Axel A. Olsson, February 21, 1953. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 43
“cc
. when memories were recalled among the paleonto-
logical elite it was not of courses or field trips taken, but
precepts learned. The learning was by example and direct
transfer in a collaborative situation rather than as a teacher
down to his students... . in his own acceptance speech
(1977) Caster said, “Harris stimulated his students to great
endeavor and when a student won his largely intuitive
approval he was treated as an equal, whether or not he
was mature or experienced enough to merit this equa-
tion.’” (Schram, 1992, p. 473).
The closest thing to a teaching philosophy Harris
ever committed to paper was included in one of his
Annual Reports; it is short, simple, and goes right to
the heart of his approach:
“The main object for which this department exists, is to
furnish students with the opportunity of learning geology
in the most natural and efficient manner.””*’
As Palmer put it, however, he was not willing to work
with just any student, only those who had a deep desire,
sense of devotion, and the necessary discipline for the
demanding tasks before them:
‘**He was determined but kind. He had no interest for the
indifferent student but for those who were capable and
energetic, he provided opportunity and stimulation to en-
courage their interest in geological subjects.” (Palmer,
1953c, p. 20)
For Harris, the best teaching took place in a field
situation because it was in the field that he felt the
greatest learning took place:
‘From the lessons of our own experiences, as well as from
the lives of others, we are led irresistibly to the conclusion
that the most natural way of acquiring a knowledge of the
earth is to be associated in Nature’s Laboratory—the field —
with some experienced person who Is carrying on original
investigations.”’?®
And one of Harris’ favorite field locations was Yawger’s
Woods, near Union Springs, New York, which is one
of the oldest known fossil localities in the Devonian
rocks of New York (Plate 8). The site was noted by
DeWitt Clinton as early as 1810, and it has been a
very popular location to study the densely fossiliferous
Oriskany Sandstone ever since. Harris would take the
students by boat to the northern end of Cayuga Lake
and then they would hike the three or four miles to
the outcrop. After making their collections and obser-
27 Annual Report of the Department of Paleontology and Strati-
graphic Geology, 1899-1900, p. 3, by G. D. Harris. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
28 4nnual Report of the Department of Paleontology and Strati-
graphic Geology; 1899-1900, p. 3, by G. D. Harris. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
vations, they would have a pleasant lunch among the
rocks and then hike back to Union Springs, making
various geological stops along the way. At Union
Springs they would board the steamer for the return
trip to Ithaca. The questions his students had to answer
while on these trips are equally appropriate for today’s
student:
“6. Are the banks of the Inlet of soft or hard rock? 20.
What are bedding-planes? Joints? 32. Note three classes
of animals in the Hamilton shale.”’”°
In his approach to learning, Harris seemed to echo
the methods of Louis Agassiz, who was so influential
in the founding of the Department of Geology at Cor-
nell, and Charles Frederic Hartt, the first professor of
Geology at Cornell and a former student of Agassiz
(Brice, 1989, 1994b). Like Agassiz, Harris’s emphasis
was not on the mass memorization of facts, but on the
clear and careful amassing of knowledge and under-
standing of the earth by using the facts. Harris com-
municated to his students his own great love of learning
through example and not by lecture. Like Hartt, Harris
showed great enthusiasm for other languages (he once
took a course in Sanskrit). Harris also was continuing
and using the style of paleontological investigation he
learned from H. S. Williams, his professor at Cornell.
Williams was a strong advocate of very careful and
meticulous collecting from every few centimeters of a
section, if possible; a technique which requires much
patience and time (Cleland, 1918). The importance of
patient, careful study was passed along from Williams
via Harris to a new generation of students, who in turn
have passed this torch to others.
Harris expected his students, graduate and under-
graduate alike, to do professional work almost from
their first day of class with him. In his 1901 Annual
Report to the President, Harris described his approach
with these words:
“This department has always maintained that the highest
grade of teaching is not the rule-of-thumb, text book, di-
dactic lecture work so commonly in vogue in schools,
colleges and even universities; it consists rather of saying
little, but surrounding the student by the atmosphere of
the subject, by taking him in partnership, as it were, in
the subject, by attempting to cultivate independence of
thought in him at the earliest possible date; in other words,
make him work along with his instructor, make of him a
scholarly investigator and not a mere student... .
“The underlying principle of all true University work
must be original investigation. . . . The beginning students
29 Excerpts from: ‘Excursions for classes. Two free ones on lake
and one by rail to Union Springs or Chemung Narrows, Fall of
1903”. Printed list of questions students should answer. HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY.
44 BULLETIN 350
are taken into the field and shown a little and required to
find out a great deal more. The same principle holds good
in our lecture room and laboratory.’’*°
Collecting fossils on a field trip was only the beginning;
the samples had to be carefully cleaned, identified, and
labeled. If anything new or unusual resulted from the
study, the students were expected to write about it.
Harris encouraged them to publish their results, and
with the Bulletins he was able to publish the best of
what they produced. Harris’ ability and willingness to
publish the work of students was highly unusual among
his contemporaries and would be so even today, and
it gave his students an early start as original investi-
gators in paleontological research. Those who contin-
ued doing research in paleontology knew that Harris
would always be willing to read, if not publish, their
results. In this way, Harris gained the steadfast loyalty
and devotion of his students that endured to the end
of his days and beyond:
“Those ... who were his students ... , realize they were
guided by a master’s hand, .. .”” (Olsson, 1954, p. 128).
Arthur C. Veatch, who came to Cornell in 1898 as
a transfer student from Indiana University, was one
of Harris’ most successful students. Although Veatch’s
work was not strictly in paleontology, he does provide
an example of this loyalty and devotion. Although he
did not receive a degree from Cornell, he worked with
Harris in his field camps and was Harris’ Assistant
Geologist on the Louisiana Geological Survey at the
age of 21; having served on the Indiana University
Geologic Survey at age 19. In 1907, Veatch was at-
tached to President Theodore Roosevelt’s office as a
special commissioner to study mining laws and min-
eral-land administration in New Zealand and Austra-
lia. The result of this work was the development of the
Land Classification Board under the U. S. Geological
Survey, with Veatch as the chairman. Later, he was
involved in the famous Elk Hills case in California that
eventually reached the U.S. Supreme Court and re-
sulted in the legal definition of petroleum as a min-
eral.*! This was not his first trip to the courtroom for
the U. S. government. In 1908, Veatch was involved
in a case in Wyoming in which it was shown, for the
first time in a court of law, that geological evidence
30 Annual Report to the President of Cornell University of the De-
partment of Paleontology and Stratigraphic Geology by Gilbert D.
Harris; May 15, 1901, p. 1,3. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
3! United States v. Southern Pacific Company et a/.: Number 179;
argued March 5,6, 1919-decided November 17, 1919. Case Ad-
judged in the Supreme Court of the United States at the October
Term 1919. Citation courtesy of Ms. Ann McGee, Librarian, Widner
Law School, Harrisburg, Pennsylvania.
could be used to prove the presence of underground
coal beds that were not visible on the surface (Veatch,
1907). He was among the first to use echo-sounding
devices to construct bathymetric charts of high accu-
racy. He worked on a joint two-year project, with the
Geological Society of America and the Coast and Ge-
odetic Survey, in which the continental shelf was
mapped from Chesapeake Bay to a point one hundred
miles east of Cape Cod, an area of more than fifty
thousand square miles. The mapping (Veatch and
Smith, 1939) indicated an intricate drainage pattern
on the continental shelf that Veatch felt was due to
former subaerial erosion. A revealing story about
Veatch’s character is that while doing a traverse in
Africa, he extended his line right through a herd of
Cape buffalo. He claimed that it would have taken too
long to go around, so he went through them (Heroy,
1942). After the swamps of Louisiana, what were a few
buffalo? With regard to his work in Louisiana, Harris
too remarked about his daring:
. especially during the early years of reconnaissance
when young Veatch’s (A. C.) delight in difficult and suc-
cessful exploits brought in splendid material from hitherto
unheard of localities.” (Harris, 1919, pp. 3-4).
Veatch, also, published several important papers re-
lated to oil exploration, e.g., Evolution of the Congo
Basin (1935).
Veatch was, perhaps, the most financially successful
of Harris’s students. By age 41 he was Director of the
Exploration Department of Sinclair Consolidated Oil
Corporation and he was always a strong supporter of
Harris and his paleontology at Cornell. In 1915, while
in London, Veatch sent a check for $1,000 to Cornell
to create a fund “‘by an anonymous donor,”
“Which fund shall be available as to principal and interest
for any purpose or purposes which in the sole discretion
of Professor Gilbert D. Harris shall be of assistance to
students of geology.
‘‘Payments shall be made from the fund to Professor
Harris as and when requested and no accounts shall be
required beyond simple receipts from Professor Harris
saying that the sum or sums he may request from time to
time have been received and that they are to be expended
for purposes which in his opinion will be of assistance to
a student or students of geology as the case may be.
“If it is not possible for you to accept a gift with these
provisions, please return the cheque to me.’’*?
In the accompanying letter, Veatch said of Harris:
“T may perhaps explain that it has been my privilege to
32 Letter from A. C. Veatch to Cornell University Treasurer, Oc-
tober 25, 1915. Copy in HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 45
attend courses at three [other universities], and at none of
these have I known of any man who so fully as Professor
Harris had the real training and development of his stu-
dents at heart or who to so extreme a degree of unselfish-
ness lived only for their good and the advancement of
Sciences.
“T have had many men through my hands coming from
all the larger institutions in the United States as well as a
number from Europe, and I can unhesitatingly say that no
one is able to train real field geologists and investigators
as opposed to mere lecturers on geology, as he, because
the real University atmosphere, in contradistinction to
that characterizing a college or high school, is more fully
realized and more thoroughly pervades Professor Harris’
laboratory than any other geological laboratory of which
I have any knowledge.” (Anonymous, 1915a).
This was written about 10 years after he left Cornell
to make his way in the world with the skills and knowl-
edge he gained while in the company of his mentor,
Professor Harris.
And well he did make his way in the world. Unfor-
tunately Veatch’s wife, Caroline Hornbrook (neé
Evans), did not share her husband’s allegiance to Cor-
nell or to Harris’ PRI, and when she died in June,
1985, her estate of approximately $20 million was left
to the North American Unitarian Universalist Asso-
ciation.23 And all this from someone who started by
identifying fossils on the fourth floor of McGraw Hall
with G. D. Harris, collected samples around the shores
of Cayuga Lake and fought mosquitos in the swamps
of Louisiana!
WOMEN STUDENTS
Another aspect of Harris’s relationship with students
that was atypical of his times was his strong encour-
agement of female students. At a time when women
were not encouraged to pursue higher education, or
much formal education at all, and were especially dis-
couraged from pursuing science, Harris actively sup-
ported their endeavors in paleontology. Years later one
of his former students remembered Harris:
“TI went to Cornell for two years after my graduation from
Mount Holyoke College, and received my Master’s [sic]
degree. My Master’s thesis was under the direction of G.
D. Harris, who was the ONLY one in the department who
felt kindly toward women. My original idea had been a
thesis in Structural Geology under Charles M. Nevin but
he flatly refused to have a woman. Altho [sic] a few months
later, when I had already begun with Harris, he did change
his mind.” [Emphasis in the original.]**
33 New York Times, June 16, 1985, Section A, p. 28.
34 Letter from Caroline Heminway Kierstead to William R. Brice,
October 26, 1983. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
Cornell University, as a whole, had an enlightened
policy of admitting women, and from the very first
days of the geology department photographs of field
trips show that women were enrolled in general geology
classes. It was the first college in the eastern United
States to admit women along with men (1872); provide
scholarships specifically for women (1884); and the
first to award the Doctor of Science degree to a woman
(1895) (Conable, 1977). According to Charlotte Con-
able’s book, Women at Cornell-The Myth of Equal
Education, however, reality did not match policy
(Conable, 1977). She speaks, for example, of how the
male fraternities made it a point to exclude female
Cornell students from all parties. Jill Ker Conway ech-
oes these conditions:
“At Cornell, the tension between the men and women was
symbolized by the decision of male fraternities to ban any
fraternity brother seen fraternizing with the Cornell wom-
en at Sage College.’ (Conway, 1994, pg. 239).
Their analysis is certainly supported by a comment in
O. D. von Engeln’s handwritten Reminiscences, pre-
pared when he was in his 83rd year. In speaking about
his days as a student at Cornell during the first decade
of the Twentieth Century, von Engeln said:
“Coeds [at Cornell] were frowned upon and had no part
in any social events, for these [events] females were im-
ported, the nearest source was Wells College [an all wom-
en’s college in Aurora, New York].’’*°
In light of this, Harris’ policy of including women
among his students went very much against the tenor
of the times, and he was the first member of the De-
partment to accept women as graduate students. Even
in the 1930s, 1940s, and 1950s some faculty in the
Department still refused to admit women for graduate
work with them. All through the 1930s and 1940s when
the Department held its geological field camp at Spruce
Creek, Pennsylvania, no women were allowed to attend
because the facilities were less than appropriate to house
both men and women, as everyone slept in one room
on the second floor (Brice, 1989). In contrast, in 1900
Harris had women at his field camp using tents. Al-
though these were probably less than adequate, at least
everyone did not sleep in the same tent. But the use
of tents is a story which will come later.
This departmental attitude of excluding women
seems to have extended to faculty positions as well;
the first female member of the Cornell geology faculty
above the rank of research assistant, lecturer, or in-
structor was Teresa E. Jordan, who was named an
35 Page 198, Reminiscences, by O. D. von Engeln. Von Engeln
Papers, 14/15/856, Box 1, Files 1-44, 1-45. RMC-KL, Cornell.
46 BULLETIN 350
Assistant Professor in 1983. This fact seems quite sur-
prising, given the department’s tendency to hire its own
students (as witness Harris, J. Burfoot, C. Nevin, S.
Cole, J. Wells, and L. Brown). The quality of the wom-
en students was certainly good, for many of them went
on to work with various companies and to hold faculty
positions at other universities and colleges. Here are
career summaries for three, of many, from the early
days who became quite successful geologists and teach-
ers of geology:
Carlotta Joaquina Maury (Ph.B.’96, Ph.D.’02) worked with
Royal Dutch Shell Petroleum Company as a consulting
paleontologist for many years, and also worked with O.
A. Derby” in Brazil. She lectured at Barnard College from
1909-1912: was on the faculty at Huguenot College, Cape
Town, South Africa from 1912-1915, and organized her
Own expedition to the Dominican Republic in 1916 after
receiving the Sarah Berliner Fellowship in the biological
sciences. She served as the official paleontologist for Brazil
from 1914 until her death in 1938 (Ogilive, 1986, pp. 131-
132).
Katherine Van Winkle Palmer (Ph.D. °25) was Director
of the Paleontological Research Institution from 1951 to
1978, and during those years served as editor of the Bul-
letins of American Paleontology and of Palaeontographica
Americana. She was awarded the Paleontological Society
Medal in 1972—the first woman to be so honored.
Caroline Heminway Kierstead (M.A. °28) was a paleon-
tologist with Shell Oil and a professor of geology at Smith
College. She retired in 1969.%’
Why Harris was so supportive of women remains a
mystery; he left no comments or explanations on the
subject. Perhaps this support had an economic basis
because in that time women were paid less than men;
he could, therefore, hire more assistants for the same
outlay of salary money. Perhaps he felt that women
were better suited to the precise and exacting work
required in paleontology. Or perhaps, and I would like
to think this was the reason, he was sensitive to the
aspirations and abilities of women. Perhaps it was be-
cause he had several sisters, two of whom were college
graduates; he also had a sister-in-law with a D.Sc. His
wife, Clara, was certainly a strong person in her own
right, and their only child was a daughter and a Cornell
graduate. Although in a letter to Heinrich Ries, Harris
did present a slightly different attitude towards at least
one former female student, Carlotta Maury (about
%° Orville A. Derby (B.S.°73, M.S.°74) 1851-1915; student and
colleague of Charles Frederic Hartt at Cornell and worked with Hartt
on the Imperial Geological Survey of Brazil 1875-1878; later director
of the first Federal Geological Survey of Brazil, 1906-1915.
*”? Personal communication, October 26, 1983.
whom more will be said later), he was otherwise uni-
versally supportive of women scientists under his tu-
telage. The letter to Ries was part of a request for funds
to purchase Maury’s “European collection of Oligo-
cene Tertiary shells...” Harris indicated that she spent,
““... one year and... about $600...’ Then he went
on:
“T do not want to insult the lady, but it seems to me that
in so much as she could not collect at the same advantage
as the men could, that if she really wants to sell her col-
lection, she might part with it for some such consideration
as $200, at least I would like the privilege of making some
such suggestion to her and see what the results would be.”’38
Whatever his motivation for encouraging the women
students, paleontology in particular and geology in gen-
eral were greatly advanced as a result of Harris’ ac-
ceptance of women graduate students. Perhaps it was
Harris’s example that made it possible for women to
do graduate work with other colleagues. For example,
Georgianna Duncan Conant (M.A. ’28), who later
worked for many years with the U.S.G.S., did her thesis
under Dr. Charles Nevin (the same professor who re-
fused to have Caroline H. Kierstead as a student); she
also assisted Dr. Heinrich Ries with his molding sands
experiments. She was co-author of a paper originating
from this work, and edited a revision of Ries’s engi-
neering geology text (Brice, 1989).
FIELD CAMPS AND BOATS
One of the most colorful aspects of Harris’s teaching
at Cornell was his use of boats for field trip transpor-
tation and to travel to field sites. Automobile and bus
travel were unknown when Harris launched the first
of his fleet and most travel was by horse and wagon
or train; all were used for student field trips. But be-
cause of Ithaca’s location on Cayuga Lake, Harris de-
cided that travel by water was better. Not only could
the parties get from one place to another easily, but
often the shorelines had good rock exposures—not un-
like today’s highway cuts. For many years, Harris made
extensive use of waterways and boats for both teaching
and research, and in this he was following in the foot-
steps of one of his predecessors, Theodore Comstock.
Comstock started the tradition of a summer school at
Cornell with geology classes in summer of 1876 which
had a base camp in a mountainous region “.. . illus-
trating geological science.” (Brice, 1989, pp. 30-31).
The following summer, 1877, Comstock took students
by chartered steamer on a geological trip along the
coasts of the Great Lakes.
38 Gilbert D. Harris to Heinrich Ries, November 8, 1915. Heinrich
Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-24. RMC-KL, Cornell.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 47
Harris already had the option of using the excursion
steamboats that were in operation on Cayuga Lake: the
Frontenac made her maiden voyage on June 4, 1870,
and in 1901 the Jroquois and the Mohawk joined her
on the lake, making quite a flotilla. These were large
boats—the Frontenac was 135 feet long with a twenty-
foot beam and had room for 350 passengers—and al-
though they were fine for taking students to regular
stops such as Taughannock Falls, on the west side of
Cayuga Lake, or Union Springs, on the east side, Harris
felt he needed transportation he could control, making
stops whenever and wherever he wished. He sought
assistance from the University, and a report in Science
(Anonymous, 1897; Harris, 1897a) erroneously sug-
gested that the Cornell Trustees were assisting Harris
with the construction cost of his first boat Janthina,
but the entire $1100.00 came from his own pocket, as
did the cost of them all.*? To appreciate fully how much
Harris was investing in this boat, it is useful to note
that just a few years earlier he had been hired by Cornell
as an Assistant Professor at a salary of $1400 per year!
So he was spending an amount almost equal to his
annual salary.
The first boat, Janthina (Plate 7), built in 1897 by
Lintz and Company of Grand Rapids, Michigan (Har-
ris, 1897a), was named after a mollusk—a practice
Harris continued with all his boats. Janthina was
shipped by rail from Grand Rapids to Ithaca and
launched into Cayuga Inlet in early 1897. She was forty
feet long, had a nine-foot beam, and was equipped with
both a propeller and a large paddle wheel. The paddle
wheel did not prove very useful, though, and was soon
removed. Janthina was powered by a two-cycle, six-
horsepower gasoline engine that could push the craft
along at six miles per hour. Janthina had a “trunk”
cabin with six cots and an upper deck used as an ob-
servation platform.
The boat was barely in the water before Harris and
a small band of students ““motored”’ for Chesapeake
Bay and the Carolinas. Among the students who made
the trip in the summer of 1897 were Edgar R. Cumings
(geology graduate student 97), the “engineer” as he
was called, Thomas A. Caine (A.B. °86); and George
C. Martin (B.S. °98). For Martin, this trip to Maryland
was a harbinger of things to come, for later the Mary-
land Geological Survey called upon him to prepare the
gastropod section of its Miocene volume (Clarke ef al.,
39 The cost of the boats comes from a letter Harris wrote on May
28, 1929 to Professor Heinrich Ries, Head of the Department of
Geology at Cornell. (H. Ries Papers, #14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-24,
RMC-KL-Cornell.) But in an earlier report, Harris gives a slightly
different cost for the first Orthoceras as indicated in a later paragraph.
1904). Despite numerous mishaps on the journey and
problems with the paddle wheel, Janthina proved its
worth as a means of transportation. The samples the
group collected were eventually described by Harris
and a student in 1919:
“es
. material collected by members of the first cruise of
the Janthina in Virginian waters in 1897.” (Van Winkle
and Harris, 1919, p. 6).
Harris was so pleased with the launch that he ex-
tolled her virtues in a letter to the editor of Science,
dated November 5, 1897. He described the first trip,
which was a long voyage from Ithaca to lower Ches-
apeake Bay and return, via the Erie Canal, Hudson
River, Raritan River and Canal, Delaware River, Del-
aware and Chesapeake Canal, Chesapeake Bay and its
many inflowing rivers. He also spoke of why he pre-
ferred the gasoline-powered launch to one powered by
steam:
“1. Cost—(a) Any well constructed boat 30 feet long, with
a 6-horse power gasoline engine will run 800 miles on two
barrels of oil; cost about $9.00 on an average, i.e., a little
over a cent a mile; (b) while on government waters no
licensed engineer or pilot is required. With a few days
practice, under the direction of one acquainted with the
engine, one learns his engine thoroughly and can as easily
go up the Potomac to Washington as navigate his own
mill-pond.
“2. Freedom from government inspection.
‘“*3. There being no boiler or fire, the boat is light, roomy
and cool.
“4. When stopping at an outcrop no gasoline is being used.
The whole machine is at a standstill, dead. But to start up
and get under full speed requires less than a minute.”
He closed with:
“Suffice it to say that in a country like our own, well
traveled by water ways, a marine laboratory capable of
rapid locomotion, at an exceedingly small cost, seems a
very desirable adjunct to true university work in natural
history subjects.” (Harris, G. D., 1897b, pp. 703-704)
Of course, if surviving photographs are any indica-
tion, there were times when Harris and his crew had
to resort to using a sail, but this information he did
not include in his letter to the editor. He also refrained
from mentioning the many hours of “tinkering” re-
quired to repair damage and breakdowns. Harris’
daughter, Rebecca was quoted as saying:
“My father may not always have used accepted tools or
methods but he could make machinery work.” (Kiersch,
1964)
Soon Janthina was joined by a faster launch which,
48 BULLETIN 350
because of her narrow form, was christened Orthocer-
as, after the long and slender fossil nautiloid. The new
boat was not as costly as Janthina, but just how much
it cost is difficult to determine for Harris left conflicting
references. In the letter to Ries in May 28, 1929, Harris
indicated that $600 was required to get her built and
launched. In one of his Annual Reports written just
after she was built, however, Harris listed a different
figure:
““My large boat Janthina proving too heavy for rapid tran-
sit. | bought a much lighter boat last spring, of torpedo
model, for $400.00, christening it Orthoceras, and in it
placed my old engine. This left my old boat with no power.
I have just bought a 12 H.P. double cylinder engine for
the Orthoceras and will reinstall the old engine in the old
boat. For this summer’s use, then, besides rowboats, I shall
have my light and very swift boat and a large, heavy boat
for great loads and large classes. Without these additions
to my summer work no such complete and sweeping su-
periority could be claimed for our school over all rivals.
They are just what turns the tide in our favor.’*°
This light “‘torpedo” boat was 5 feet wide but 30 feet
long (2.5 x 9.5 meters), and the double cylinder 12
horsepower engine could drive Orthoceras at 12 miles
per hour (20 kph). This launch was to act as a tender
for assisting and towing the larger and heavier /an-
thina. According to a report in 1902, Harris had both
boats in operation by 1899:
“The first [field camp] trip was in 1899. Professor Harris
took five men in one of his launches .. .”” (Smith, 1902,
p. 396) [Note the use of the plural, “launches.”’]
Also in his Annual Report for 1899-1901, Harris said:
“We have built a launch [/anthina] for promoting field
investigation in southern waters; we have reconstructed
the same for better service in waters nearer by, and now
have just purchased a much finer launch [Orthoceras], one
that will still better serve the purpose we have in view.””*!
Thus, Orthoceras must have been purchased sometime
in late 1898 or early 1899 and Harris had the “fleet”
he needed for the summer work. Certainly by the sum-
mer of 1900, both boats were in operation because
there was this brief reference in Science June 1, 1900
(even though Orthoceras was not a steam launch):
“Professor Harris, of the department of geology, Cornell
University, will take a class with the steam launch the
4° Annual Report to the President of Cornell University of the De-
partment of Paleontology and Stratigraphic Geology, by Gilbert D.
Harris; May 15, 1901, p. 5. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
4! Annual Report of the Department of Paleontology and Strati-
graphic Geology; 1899-1900 by G. D. Harris, p. 4. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
Orthoceras to Lake Champlain for geological work.” (Sci-
ence N.S., v. 11, no. 283).
According to the published announcement (Anon-
ymous, N.D.) for what appears to be the 1902 field
camp (no date is on the pamphlet, but the class list for
the 1901 camp is the last one included in the an-
nouncement), both boats were still in operation or at
least expected to be in operation for the summer of
1902. John Rich recalled that Janthina, and presum-
ably Orthoceras as well, was in operation when he came
to Cornell in 1903-04:
“‘One feature of Professor Harris’ instruction which helped
arouse my interest as well as that of many others was the
institution of Saturday geological excursions on the Harris
launch, Ianthina, to various points of interest along the
shores of Cayuga Lake. In the summer of 1904, Professor
Harris took a group of us, including F. L. Whitney, Leo-
pold Reinecke, of South Africa, and Joviano Pachecho*?,
of Brazil, on a longer trip on his fast launch [Orthoceras]
from Ithaca down Cayuga Lake and thence along the Erie
Canal to the neighborhood of Albany, where we were joined
by a larger group of students for two weeks camping and
geological scouting in the Helderberg Mountains.”*?
About that time or shortly afterward, however, a boat
house fire destroyed both boats. This was no doubt a
devastating loss for Harris, but, to date, no record has
been found as to how this disaster affected him or his
programs, nor has the exact date of the fire been de-
termined.
Not to be stopped by the fire, Harris had Orthoceras
IT (cost $500.00) constructed to carry on the field ac-
tivity for the last few years that the field camp existed.
In 1905 Harris attempted to sell ‘ta launch” to Cor-
nell;** which one is not known. Also, there seems to
have been another boat between the time of the fire
and 1914 that has not been mentioned in any of the
Harris memorials:
“You remember how we studied and worked over the
engine of our boat ‘Prexy’ and you said that in case it ever
ran you would like to know what means I used to get it
started again. You remember there seemed to be imperfect
compression so I purchased some brand new piston rings
and put them in in [sic] place of the ones which we spread
out last year , [sic] and there was no difficulty in starting
#2 Joviano Augusto d’Amaral Pacheco (Cornell University A.B.
°04) worked with Harris in the Helderberg Field Camp and with the
Louisiana Geological Survey. Later he was part of the Brazilian
Geologic Survey.
*% John L. Rich to Axel Olsson, February 21, 1953. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
44 A notation about not wanting to sell any of the Paleontology
collection, nor wishing to purchase Harris’ launch. Cornell Univer-
sity Trustees meeting minutes, December 5, 1905.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 49
the engine and it has run splendidly ever since. This I did
but a few weeks ago, not having time all last summer to
touch it.”**
This is the only reference to Prexy found in the Harris
Archive and nothing is known about her size, etc., or
her final disposition. Prexy, however, must have been
another boat because that name does not seem to be
a familiar or shortened form of Orthoceras, nor is it
the same as Pecten or Pecky, the name ofa small dinghy
Harris owned at the same time as Ecphora. Also, one
would not expect a dinghy to have an engine in it. So,
it appears that Harris had yet another boat after losing
the first two in the boat house fire.
HELDERBERG FIELD CAMP
The very first summer Harris was at Cornell, he was
out in the field, and he had received funding for ex-
penses from the Cornell Board of Trustees:
“In the spring of 1895 the Trustees of Cornell University
generously appropriated the sum of $400 to be expended
in geological and paleontological research in the Tertiaries
of our Gulf and Atlantic coast states. This sum was for
defraying the field expenses of the writer and one assistant
who were to volunteer their services during the following
summer vacation in the field specified. Accordingly Mr.
W. S. Hubbard*® and the writer left Ithaca in the latter
part of June, and after visiting west Tennessee, northern
and central Mississippi, central Alabama and Western
Georgia, returned North in the latter part of August... .
‘It is scarcely necessary to say that during the summer
season in the south it is often extremely warm, and trying
to one’s health; and the writer, as well at the University
at large, is deeply indebted to the skill, strength, good-will
and never-tiring zeal of Mr. W. S. Hubbard.” (Harris,
1896a, pg 119-120).
The next summer, he and Hubbard were back out in
the field with the Trustees granting him another
$400.00, this time to return to the Gulf and Atlantic
coasts (Harris, 1897c). The fact that Hubbard, who
was not even a geology student (Anonymous, 1908),
would spend two summers doing field work with Harris
is a good illustration of the influence he had with stu-
dents, even non-geology ones.
But very soon Harris’ summer activity was much
more organized and involved more students. As in-
dicated earlier, Harris’ involvement with summer field
camps (Brice, 1994a, 1995) also followed a Cornell
45 Unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris to F. L. Whitney, May
11, 1914. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
46 Walter Stacy Hubbard was at Cornell 1882-85 and 1894-96.
He was not a geology student and received a Bachelor of Letters in
1895. He died in Buffalo, New York June 6, 1908.
Geology Department tradition started by Professor
Theodore Comstock in 1876 (Brice, 1989, p. 30). Har-
ris appeared to have been motivated by two factors.
First was his desire to instruct students in techniques
of field geology:
“The Helderberg School of Field Geology is the outgrowth
of a strong desire of the Department of Paleontology and
Stratigraphic Geology at Cornell University to teach ge-
ology in the most practical, natural and efficient way at
the least possible expense to the student.” (Anonymous,
N.D., First page, but no page numbers printed).
These phrases are quite similar to what Harris used in
his Annual Report for 1899-1900, the same year that
the major field camp effort began, and these ideas seem
to be central to his teaching.
Secondly, Harris became the ““Geologist-in-Charge’’*’
for the Louisiana Geologic Survey in 1898 and needed
to change his teaching schedule to free part of his year
to work in Louisiana. Given the Ithaca winters, Harris
chose to spend that season in Louisiana, and his classes
were held during the fall and summer months to fulfill
his teaching obligation to the University. According to
a card Harris printed**, he was in Louisiana from De-
cember 15 until March 15, and then at Cornell from
March 15 to December 15; away from Ithaca just long
enough to miss the worst of the winter weather. While
he was head of the Survey in Louisiana, Cornell paid
Harris $1500.00 while his colleagues were receiving
$3000.00%°. Even though he was in Louisiana only
three months a year, there was, no doubt, Survey busi-
ness to conduct while he was in Ithaca. It took him a
year or so to get this “‘winter-off-for-summer work”
arrangement approved™’:
“We have, finally, exchanged the winter term of our year
for the summer, and have established a school of practical
geology in eastern New York, in the heart of the most
classic geological country of the continent.’”>!
The field camp was an efficient way for Harris to
attend simultaneously to his duties as Geologist in
47 Title on a printed card prepared by Harris which includes A.
C. Veatch, Assistant State Geologist. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
48 HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
*° Letter from President Schurman of Cornell to H. Ries, Head,
Department of Geology, May 28, 1915 (Ries Papers, #14/15/691,
Box 1, File 1-22; Budget request from H. Ries to President Schur-
man, May 29, 1915. RMC-KL, Cornell.
°° Harris gained official approval to take a winter vacation and do
equal work-time after the close of the regular spring term; Cornell
University Trustee meeting minutes for November 1, 1899.
>! Page 4 of the “Annual Report of the Department of Paleontology
and Stratigraphic Geology; 1899-1900” by G. D. Harris. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
50 BULLETIN 350
Charge of the Louisiana Geological Survey, meet his
teaching obligation, and provide a marvelous educa-
tional experience for the students. Consistent with his
philosophy of teaching, he felt that:
“To have knowledge, then, at first hand of New York’s
type sections, must necessarily be the ambition of every
young and true student of geology.”” (Anonymous, N.D.
p>. 2):
In addition to the regular college students, Harris
also welcomed secondary school teachers to his camp
and modified the course of study to fit their particular
needs. In the prospectus describing the planned 1902
field camp program Harris put in a special section
directed toward the secondary teachers:
“To the high school teacher to whom falls the lot of teach-
ing the sequence of formations, their characteristics and
fossils, without having at command his own fossils, or
drawings and photographs, of his own make, of Trenton,
Oriskany and Niagara falls; the Adirondack, Catskill and
Helderberg mountains; and the thousand and one little
objects and sketches that go to fill up and vivify bare text-
book outlines-no longer is pity nor tolerance due, since
the means are now at hand for gaining the requisite knowl-
edge and material at a very small expense.” (Anonymous,
N.D., p. 2).
That small expense amounted to about $75.00 for
the summer: this included university tuition of $25.00,
fees for tents and cots set at $10.00, the various side
excursions cost an additional $10.00, and living ex-
penses of about $3.00 per week. For that investment,
students could take as many as 10 credits depending
on how much time was spent in the field activities.
The course ran from June 26 until September 4, with
a concurrent six-credit, six-week session from July 7-
August 16. Later in the 1930s when the Department
began another field camp, this time in the valley-and-
ridge region of central Pennsylvania, the cost was
$150.00, which included $60.00 for tuition.>°*
Harris’ great concern for the education and training
of secondary teachers clearly went beyond the field
camp activities, for in a course description he prepared
for ‘“‘Course 25”, he explained what he hoped they
would really learn:
“The object of the course will be to show how the geology
of a region is actually worked out, mapped and reported
upon. It is felt that a teacher, in order to fully realize his
or her opportunities in teaching geology, should be able
to work out systematically and carefully the geology of the
region where the teaching is to be done. Take away the
°? Draft of field camp announcement, no date, but assumed to be
for the summer of 1931. Ries Papers, #14/13/691, Box 2, File 2-8;
RMC-KL, Cornell.
pleasure and stimulus of local, ‘near-at-home’ references
and the subject becomes tedious to teacher and pupil.’’*3
LIFE IN THE CAMP
The Harris field camps were unconventional in many
ways. Using the boats certainly made them different
(Harris, 1900), as did his encouragement of the sec-
ondary teachers, and he continued to encourage wom-
en students. Lillian B. Sage** not only attended the
1900 field camp, but she returned the following year
as an instructor. The letterhead stationery Harris print-
ed for the 1901 field camp had a map on it showing
the camp location and the excursion routs marked with
a red line. Also the staff list included, ““L. B. Sage,
Methods in Mapping.” The letterhead itself is inter-
esting in the way Harris included the University:
“HELDERBERG SCHOOL
OF
FIELD GEOLOGY
Under the auspices of the
Department of Paleontology and
Stratigraphic Geology of
CORNELL UNIVERSITY.’
According to the pamphlet describing the proposed
1902 program (Anonymous, N.D.), after 1899 the
number of women students increased, e.g., 4 of 15 in
1900 and 14 of 27 in the 1901 camp. In 1901, two of
the women are listed as Mrs., and according to the
department records (Brice, 1989), not all of the women
were school teachers; several were geology students
studying at Cornell and other universities such as Mount
Holyoke and the University of Michigan. By contrast,
the information prepared for another department field
camp begun in 1930 specified, “‘Registration is limited
to men.’’°° because the living facilities were “not ad-
equate.” This seems a very weak excuse, for the tent
facilities Harris used 30 years earlier were far from
ideal, and yet he happily welcomed women students
to his camp.
As mentioned above, the living quarters for the field
camp consisted mostly of tents furnished by the de-
partment:
*3 From “Information Regarding Courses 21 and 25” [no date,
but assumed to be c. 1900 for A. C. Veatch and Percy Raymond
were the assistants]. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
*4 Lillian Belle Sage (A.B. ’01). By 1905 she was a teacher in
Brooklyn, New York (Hewett, 1905, v. 4, p. 475).
55 Letterhead stationery with a partly colored map showing the
excursions for 1901. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
5° Draft of field camp announcement. Ries Papers, #14/13/691,
Box 2, File 2-8. RMC-KL, Cornell.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 51
“For summer expenses, mostly for camp equipment, the
appropriation of $500.00 has been made by the executive
committee. The money will be used, but the equipment
will last for a number of seasons.”’*’
The camp had:
**.. (1) a large assembly tent, (2) a tent or building for
drawing and laboratory work, books, museum specimens,
instruments, etc., (3) a space set aside for preparing the
rations of each mess [meal], and (4) 25 wall tents, with
two cots in each, for the accommodation of 50 persons.”
(Anonymous, N.D., p. 4).
The ‘“‘“museum”’ portion included a set of labeled fossils
from each of the sections the students would be ex-
amining.
The students were divided into different parties ac-
cording to their background and given tasks appro-
priate for their capability. Those with experience went
directly to the various mapping projects, while the less
experienced students had 10 days of intensive lectures
in addition to the material they were expected to read
before attending the camp. One suggested reference
was Dana’s Geological Story Briefly Told ... (Dana,
1875). As with all good geological camps, when the
field work began, it began in earnest, and echoing H.
S. Williams, the students were told that the best way
to measure and investigate a stratigraphic section was:
“By commencing at the base of the mountain, and col-
lecting from each and every bed until the top is reached,
the student has then in his possession material from which
it is possible to construct a geological section of the region.”
(Anonymous, N.D., p. 6).
With such strenuous activities, meals take on added
importance, and in this camp the students were their
own cooks:
“‘Questions are often asked as to how food is provided and
served in camp. This, however, is a simple matter. Camp
is divided usually into messes [meal groups] of about four
to eight congenial souls each. A few cooking utensils are
bought and some supplies ordered from a nearby village
store. The honors of purchasing, cooking and caring for
the culinary property of each mess are divided as equally
as may be among its various members. Here comes in play
‘“‘natural selection’, “survival of the fittest’, etc. Sufficient
heat is furnished by camp fires or oil stoves. The services
of a hired ‘“‘chef” have thus far been done away with, tho’
[sic] no complaint could be made if a mess should decide
to employ such a person.” (Anonymous, N.D., pp. 7-8).
Sleeping accommodations were cots supplied by the
university, but students were directed to bring, “...
57 Annual Report to the President of Cornell University of the De-
partment of Paleontology and Stratigraphic Geology, by Gilbert D.
Harris; May 15, 1901. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
two sheets and six blankets...” They were cautioned
to keep their belongings to a minimum and to bring
only old clothes suitable for summer work out-of-doors:
“It is a serious impediment to work to be clothed too
heavily, or to have to be ever on the alert to keep from
soiling one’s clothes.”” (Anonymous, N.D., p. 8).
While the evenings were to be filled with the usual
field camp tasks, such as drafting sections, working on
samples, etc., Harris did set aside time for lectures at
least twice a week. These lectures, prepared by the
advanced students, were illustrated by lantern slides,
but no mention is made as to how the lantern slide
projector was powered. Perhaps these truly were “‘lan-
tern”’ slides. After the close of an evening’s activity,
the students frequently gathered around the camp fire,
and Harris had planned for that activity as well. Among
the field camp related material is a small booklet with
a cardboard stock cover and bound with red cord,
entitled “‘Fossil Fragments for Fireside Frappe-ing’>* —
the camp song book. Among the 26 songs are many
old favorites known today, including, ‘““My Old Ken-
tucky Home’’, “America”, ““Tavern in Our Town”,
and ‘“*Mandalay.”’ Others included are not so well known
today, such as, “Soldier’s Farewell’’, “Who Did?’’. “The
Mountains’’, and ““Romeo and Juliet.’” Campus loyalty
was expected, so several campus songs of Cornell were
included, “‘Cornell’’, “Cornell Rowing Song”, and the
Alma Mater. As the camp was open to other univer-
sities, Harris also included “Fair Harvard”’, and “The
Orange and the Black” (Princeton). Also among the
songs was not one, but TWO verses of “The Star Span-
gled Banner.” If you listen closely on a quiet summer
night in upstate New York, it is easy to imagine the
lively voices raised in song still echoing off the Held-
erberg hills, **. . . led by the Professor’s ringing tenor”
(Herrick et al., 1953, p. 14A).
FIELD CAMP ACTIVITIES
In 1899, the year after he became Geologist in Charge
of the Geological Survey of Louisiana, Harris con-
ducted a modest field excursion with only five students:
T. A. Caine (Nunda, NY), W. M. Chapman (Elmira,
NY), H. F. Cleland (geology graduate student 01, New
Haven, CT), W. E. Thro (Elmira, NY), and J. Pacheco
(A.B. ’04, Sao Paulo, SP, Brazil) (Anonymous, N.D.).
Cleland and Pacheco attended several field camps and
probably functioned as field assistants for Harris. An-
other member of the 1900 camp was A. C. Veatch,
mentioned above.
Because of its proximity to many fossil-rich beds
and other interesting geology, Trenton Falls proved a
58 Private collection, WRB; now at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
Nn
N
good choice for the camp headquarters in 1899 and a
more permanent camp was created there for the 1900
field camp (Anonymous, N.D.). From the camp head-
quarters they took excursions by boat to Lake Cham-
plain and through the Mohawk River valley via the
Erie Canal. Then for the next few years, certainly for
1901 and 1902, Harris moved the headquarters of the
field camp to the Helderberg Mountains in the Country
Man Hill section:
“The Helderbergs have been chosen for our camp or ren-
dezvous this summer in place of Trenton Falls for various
reasons: Ist, they show in one section ten geological for-
mations; 2nd, they are more central, excursions can radiate
out down the Hudson, up Lake Champlain, and west on
the Erie canal.” °°
This camp was to cost about $65.00 for the six weeks
(Anonymous, N.D.; Smith, 1902). Students could reach
the camp location from Voorheesville, **. . . by special
conveyance at a moderate price for person and bag-
gage.”’; special conveyance was a horse and wagon. The
nearest large city was Albany, “... being about 15
miles a little north of east from the camp.” (Anony-
mous, N.D., p. 4). Three side trips were undertaken in
1901 using the boats, (1) to Lake Champlain as far as
Plattsburg, (2) down the Hudson River to Rondout,
and (3) along the Erie Canal back to Ithaca at the end
of the session. The group was to spend two weeks at
Valcour Island in Lake Champlain completing a survey
started in 1900. In addition to the boat trips, students
could take a train to visit AuSable Chasm and as far
north as Georgia, Vermont.
During the first six week of the 1902 field camp,
Charles E. Smith (A.B. 02) and others spent time
working on the stratigraphic section at Indian Ladder.
This is a famous area of Devonian rocks exposed near
Albany that have been visited and studied by many
famous geologists including Amos Eaton, James Hall,
and Charles Lyell. During the last three weeks of the
camp, the group worked at Oriskany Falls, including
a trip on foot from New Salem to Oriskany Falls. At
this time, topographic surveys for that part of the state
were not well advanced or totally accurate, but it was
important to have accurate elevations for the measured
sections. To get these elevations, it was necessary to
Start at a point of known elevation, a bench mark, and
survey elevations from the bench mark to the work
site. To accomplish this during the 1902 session, Harris
and the students ran spirit level lines from a new
U.S.G.S. bench mark at East Berne around to all the
°° Annual Report to the President of Cornell University of the De-
partment of Paleontology and Stratigraphic Geology, by Gilbert D.
Harris; May 15, 1901; pp. 5-6. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
BULLETIN 350
sections being measured and over to a New York State
Survey triangulation station on Countryman Hill, a
distance of about 12 miles (almost 20 km). Each line
was run in duplicate to ensure accuracy. This procedure
allowed the measured sections to use sea level as a
vertical reference point.
THE LAsT DAYS OF THE CAMP
Although various field camps continued for another
seven years after 1902, no detailed record of those
activities has survived. In the introduction to a ground-
water report, Harris states that he was doing field work
in Louisiana from “*. . . June 20, 1903 to July 20, 1903
...” (Harris et a/., 1905, p.1), so ifhe held a field camp,
it could not have been during those four weeks. Hewett
(1905) states:
“Since 1899 Professor Harris has been state geologist for
Louisiana, spending the time between Christmas and Eas-
ter in that state, and, with the exception of the year 1903,
conducting a regular summer session of ten weeks in field
geology and paleontology in the Helderberg Mountains
and on Lake Champlain.” [Emphasis added.] (Hewett,
1905. Vol. II, pp. 236-237).
Based upon the information above, it appears there
was no field camp in 1903. The surviving letters from
that year give no hint as to reason, but Harris was very
active with his geological work in Louisiana that year.
Based on a diary entry by Henry Shaler Williams
for May 30, 1904, Harris was in the field for summer,
1904: **. . . [Harris] into field—Cent. [sic] NY & Held-
erbergs from June 15—July 15... .’°° Also, John Rich,
in his letter to Axel Olsson mentions the 1904 camp,
but, as indicated in the previous quotation from that
letter, by 1904 the time spent in the field had been
reduced to about two weeks.®! Palmer (1953c) stated
that all the field camps from 1898 through 1909 were
held in the Helderbergs, but according to Olsson (1954),
after 1902, only the 1904 camp went back to the Held-
erberg area. During the 1904 season Rich, Francis. L.
Whitney (A.B. 06), Leopold Reinecke (M.A. ’09, from
South Africa), and Joviano Pacheco (Sao Paulo, Brazil)
helped Harris trace the contact between the Devonian
and Silurian rocks from Cayuga Lake to the Helder-
bergs. This work was published by Harris (1904, 1905a)
and provided, perhaps, another valuable lesson for the
students. Nowhere in the 1904 publication does Harris
indicate that he had any assistance with the work; there
is not even an acknowledgement section listing the
°° Diary of Henry Shaler Williams, p. 128, file 3-9, Box 3, H. Ries
Papers, #14/15/691, RMC-KL-Cornell.
*! John L. Rich to Axel A. Olsson, February 21, 1953. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 53
students from several different field camps who worked
on the various stratigraphic sections he described. In
the small pamphlet on the geology of Union Springs
published by Harris in 1905, however, he did acknowl-
edge the work of Pacheco, Rich, and Whitney, and
another student, C. A. Tracy, who apparently originally
started the project.
In any event, 1909 was the last summer Harris held
the “‘Helderberg School of Field Geology.’’®? This was
also the same year he ceased being the Geologist in
Charge for Louisiana, apparently because funding for
the Survey was not continued by the state legislature
(Pope, 1988), the same difficulty Harris had faced in
Texas earlier. The conjunction of the two events, the
demise of the Louisiana Survey and his last Helderberg
field camp, may be just coincidence. A series of letters
and notes which passed among Ries, Harris, and Act-
ing Cornell President Thomas F. Crane in December
of 1912 tends to suggest that the two had no direct
connection, but this is open to interpretation; especial-
ly considering what Harris said in a letter written the
following year:
. I shall be occupied most busily all summer in oil
investigation .. .”°°?
Among the Ries papers is a note, probably written
by Ries in December 1912, which stated the following:
‘‘For several years, Professor Harris has been granted leave
of absence from approximately the middle of December
to the beginning of the second term, for the purpose of
going to Louisiana where I understand he is interested in
some private work. In return for this privilege he offered
to conduct, and has conducted a geologic field excursion
in summer lasting from five to six weeks.”
In the Ries file, the above note is attached to a letter
from Harris to Crane, December 10, 1912, in which
he requested a shift of six weeks after the Christmas
Holiday recess until the end of the first term for the
six weeks in the summer. He said that he wanted to,
““.. enter the field of commercial geography during
the winter six weeks. . .”’ Harris went on to state more
of his reasons for the request:
““My reason for discontinuing [the summer field course]
was that the $1500 salary I was receiving was not ample
for additional equipment and by taking undergraduates or
students of that rank they could not be properly cared for.
Now I have several times that income and shall limit my
62 Printed letterhead used before the 1901 field camp. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
©’ Unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris to Charles Schulz, May
19, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
[summer] class strictly to those who are going to devote
their lives to geology.’’°*
Harris, next, gave examples of former students who
had become successful geologists after studying with
him at Cornell. One was A. C. Veatch, mentioned
earlier, who had been working as a geologist for Barber
Asphalt Company in Venezuela witha salary of $10,000
per year. A few days later Harris received permission
to take a leave from Christmas to the beginning of the
second term.
In 1913, apparently Harris was forced to examine
his situation. The arrangement of trading time in the
summer for part of the regular academic year at Cornell
that Harris, the “Geologist in Charge”, needed to per-
form his duties for the State of Louisiana, now Harris,
“The Consultant’, found advantageous as well. He
wrote to the Cornell President:
‘‘As to the general plan for the future, I see two roads open
before me : [sic] (1st) To largely withdraw from elementary
teaching, and devote myself to the materials which I have
been collecting these 15 years past, aiding and encouraging
only such students in like work as chance to come my way
and seem particularly fitted for museum work and research
in general—trusting that the beginnings of geology, by
whomsoever given will be impartial and will naturally tend
to bring a few students each year my way. (2nd) To or-
ganize a beginning course in Geology for Arts [sic] stu-
dents, with the intention of making several such students
research workers in Paleontology and Stratigraphic Ge-
ology. This course has already been suggested to me by
[former] President Schurman and the present Dean. But,
I have concluded, insomuch as it has been directly ex-
pressed to me that the Executive department of this Uni-
versity prefers me to confine my efforts to special and
perhaps graduate work, and insomuch as there is now no
museum help at all with thousands, yes, tens of thousands
of specimens needing attention, I shall prefer for the com-
ing year to not announce any elementary new work.
‘Had I not felt the need of work being done immediately
and in goodly quantities in the museum, I certainly would
have asked for a sabbatical leave of one-half year to attend
to an offer from the University of California®*. It would
have been a great thing for me personally in several
ways....
*‘Allow me to thank you for the arrangement by which
I give my students, in the summer, field work in the North;
in the winter field work in the South.”
°4 Gilbert D. Harris to Acting President Crane, December 10,
1912. The undated memorandum by Ries is attached to the Harris
letter. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-22. RMC-KL,
Cornell.
65 No record of such an offer exists among the Harris papers. HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY.
66 Unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris to “President Crane”
[Thomas F. Crane], April 28, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
54 BULLETIN 350
Although earlier Harris had indicated to Crane his de-
sire to do more commercial work, nowhere in this letter
does Harris mention the fact that now he was involved
with these commercial ventures and that the field work
the students were doing in the south was related to this
activity. Also, it would appear that perhaps some of
the museum’s pressing needs could have been ad-
dressed by Harris staying at Cornell for the entire year,
but to do that he would have had to forego the con-
sulting work.
So in 1913, Harris continued an informal summer
field program when he and small group of students
worked in southwestern New York and northwestern
Pennsylvania (Olsson, 1954) for about a month:
“T shall not be here [at Cornell University] from the 5th
of June to the 5th of July, but shall be here several weeks
during the Summer Session, [I will be] leaving here shortly
after the 20th of July for the south; . . .’67
“We are going for a few weeks [to a] geological summer
camp in the vicinity of Warren Pa., . . .”’°8
The material collected in Pennsylvania eventually
found its way into the hands of Kenneth Caster, a
student of Harris, who described the fossils and ac-
knowledged the:
“... students at the Cornell Summer School of Geology
at Stoneham, Pa.,.. .”” (Caster, 1930, p. 146).
Based upon the surviving correspondence, Harris
spent several months in the south in 1913, for he re-
ceived mail in Louisiana in September,®? and his typed
letters, with a secretary’s initials on them, do not re-
sume until September 29. Also, Harris wrote to Dall
in October, 1913:
“Tam back safe from a hard summer’s work in the south
and feel unusually well and ready for work, . . .’7°
°*? Unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris to F. L. Whitney, May
26, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
** Unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris to George H. Girty,
June 4, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
*° Post Card from Floy Harris to Gilbert D. Harris postmarked
September 1, 1913 and addressed to Alexandria, Louisiana. HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY.
’° Unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris to W. H. Dall, October
4, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
Thus, he would not have had much time for conducting
a geological field camp during the summer of 1913.
The same leave request was made the following year,
and in 1914 Crane simply gave him an indefinite ex-
tension of the substitution privileges. Harris was again
in the south during the summer of 1914:
“Tam planning to be away on my boat trip from June 10th
until the latter part of July and from then on the remainder
of the summer I shall probably be in Louisiana, . . .”’7!
So Harris continued the non-university winter ac-
tivity, mostly in Louisiana, after ending the field camps,
but now he was involved in commercial ventures. For
a few more years he used the summer for field activities
but with fewer students. Very soon, however, he had
a new boat built for that purpose, Ecphora.
For the students, the Helderberg field camp was an
experience that literally lasted a lifetime. This is illus-
trated by the following quotation taken from a Christ-
mas card sent to Harris in 1938 by Miss Emma C.
Robinson, a member of the Helderberg Camp in 1900.
In the age of satellite images and computer mapping,
it is dificult to understand what geology and geology
teaching were like when what might be called the “fast
lane” was a boat that sped along at five or six miles
per hour. I wonder if the present day students will
develop and sustain the feelings and memories such
as those expressed by Miss Robinson almost 40 years
after attending the Helderberg camp:
“Dear Professor Harris and Rebecca [Harris’ daughter]:
“Christmas greetings from one of the old camp fire group.
The pattern of my life has changed greatly since those days
but through it all runs the thread of joy and gratitude that
I could share those days with the Harris family.
Yours Sincerely,
Emma C. Robinson’’”?
This was certainly a view shared by Harris, for of his
time with the Helderberg field camps, Herrick ef al.
(1953, p. 15A) said:
““... he held those days to be the happiest of his life.”
”' Unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris to F; L. Whitney, May
11, 1914. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
7 Emma C. Robinson to G. D. Harris, Postmarked Black Moun-
tain, NC, December 16, 1938. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 55
CHAPTER 4. ECPHORA
The closing of his Helderberg field camp did not
stop Harris from working with students in the field,
but thereafter the trips were not associated with formal
class situations. The loss of his boats in the fire around
1905 did stop some of his water trips because Ortho-
ceras IIT was not large enough for more than a few
people at a time, and she certainly had limited sleeping
accommodations. So the few trips were taken by the
newest mode of transportation, the automobile. But
his heart remained with the idea of using a boat, and
he soon had another one. As two of his students wrote
after the 1915 trip:
‘‘Not many mountains or other geological formations can
be persuaded to leave their native resting place to come
to college, and this is perhaps why the ancient saying about
Mohammed and the mountain finds a parallel in geological
instruction at Cornell University. For many years it has
been the custom of Professor G. D. Harris, of that insti-
tution, to organize a summer course in field geology, that
his students may see for themselves formations and places
they would otherwise know only from books, and that they
may collect with their own hands the fossils they study
during the winter.” (Schmidt and Olsson, 1916, p. 15).
In 1914! Harris launched his fourth and largest boat.
Ecphora, designed by M. M. Whitaker (Nyack-on-
Hudson, NY) and constructed by the Champaign
Brothers Boat Works on the Inlet in Ithaca at a cost
of $1,000 (Plate 5). She was thirty feet long, almost
nine feet at the beam with a draft of three feet, and she
carried two 40 gallon gasoline tanks. There were sleep-
ing accommodations for six people; two bunks, two
canvas beds suspended in the cabin, and two canvas
stretcher beds in the cockpit. The galley consisted of
a two-burner kerosene stove with compressed air in
the aft section of the cockpit (Schmidt and Olsson,
1916).
Harris must have rebuilt his boat house after the fire
that destroyed Janthina and Orthoceras I, but it was
not adequate for Ecphora. Thus, he attempted to pur-
chase some land from Roger B. Williams, son of H. S.
Williams, along the Ithaca Inlet:
“In endeavoring to put into practice a scheme I have been
teaching geology at first hand in the field I desire to con-
struct a fairly good sized boat wherein I may accommodate
comfortably such students as would profit by exceptional
advantages in geologic work.
“Over and above the expense of all this comes the ques-
' The craft was constructed in the early part of 1914, *... Iam
building a large boat . . .” Unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris
to I. Perrine, March 23, 1914. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
tion of the housing of such a craft. Now I have a boat
house already for my own use, but this [new] boat I would
have to house somewhere else. Knowing that the Williams
estate Owns some property on the west bank of the Inlet,
I believe just north of the Intercollegiate Crew House, I
am writing this to see if you cannot help me in this work
to the extent of selling me say 15 or 16 feet front on the
Inlet running back to the street to the west, I believe some-
thing like 60 feet, and if so kindly advise me at what rate
per foot you would be willing to sell it.’’?
The correspondence does not indicate whether he was
successful or not, but Ecphora was kept in a boat house
on the Inlet.
As with previous boats, Harris turned to a mollusk
for the name; Ecphora is a Miocene gastropod guide
fossil, and later he was to use it as the symbol for the
Paleontological Research Institution. In a letter to his
former student, A. C. Veatch, just after Veatch made
a $1,000 contribution to Cornell for Harris to use, he
indicated what he hoped to accomplish with the launch
and he described the new boat and his ambitious plans:
“Ecphora, 8 1/2 x 30° with 30 hp. 4 cyl. 4 cyc engine. My
plan is simply this: to have students go and get their own
data from mother earth; to have enormous collections of
good material accumulate here; to exchange and sell enough
to largely meet actual expenses in the field; to use the same
funds therefore over and over again; to have each student
feel under obligation to return value received by way of
materials, getting his pay in training and general experi-
ence; to have such collections as go out, labeled in the
most accurate manner possible and mounted in the most
approved permanent, and artistic manner; .. .”?
Ecphora was barely wet when, just four days after
launching, on June 19, 1914, Harris and six students
began a three-month voyage that covered some three
thousand miles. Only a few weeks before Harris was
trying to raise money for the fuel through the Univer-
sity and explaining how valuable the resulting collec-
tions would be:
“T have to report that I have practically completed my
personal cruising outfit and have selected seven first class
men to help do collecting down the Atlantic coast, in the
Tertiary formations during a period of 6 weeks, and I am
now asking you if the sum of not to exceed $100 for fuel
I mentioned formerly will be available by a week from to-
day [sic]. You remember that I have stated that the col-
? Unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris to Roger B. Williams,
March 16, 1914. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
3 Letter from Gilbert D. Harris to A. C. Veatch, no date, but
written in response to Veatch’s donation made October 25, 1915.
Copy at HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
56 BULLETIN 350
lections will be worth several hundred dollars perhaps
$1000 and that you were kind enough to say that there
should be no trouble in raising the $100 under such con-
ditions.’”*
But Harris was having some difficulty with the new
“channels” that had been created recently with the
appointment of Heinrich Ries as Department Head.
President Schurman responded to Harris’ request with
these words:
“T have just received your communication of June 2nd
(which by error is dated May 2nd) asking for an appro-
priation of $100 for fuel for your trip to collect material
down the Atlantic Coast.
‘Please talk this matter over with the Head of the De-
partment of Geology and have him in the usual way for-
ward your communication with his endorsement there-
upon.””>
He must have received the fuel money, for the group
went as far south as New Bern, North Carolina before
turning Ecphora’s bow northward; a three-month jour-
ney of over three thousand miles. The students were
Victor Elvert “Monty” Monnett (Ph.D. ’22), Parkin
“Park” Wong (M.A. 714), Oliver N. “Ollie” Olson (20)
(not to be confused with Axel A. Olsson, who was on
the trip the following year)°, Karl P. ‘Hans’? Schmidt
(A.B.’°16)’, Henry R. “Sunny” Sunball (16), and Lloyd
G. ‘Nellie’ Grinnell (°16). (Olson, Sunball, and Grin-
nell did not major in geology, although they studied
with Harris.)
“Nellie” Grinnell kept a very lively and descriptive
diary of their adventures on this trip. This journal and
accompanying photographs (e.g., Plate 6) were pre-
sented to Harris on October 2, 1944, his eightieth
birthday®. The diary forms the basis of the following
account which gives the general flavor of the trip. Not
only does Grinnell’s diary describe the important pa-
leontological collecting they were able to do, which
included several new species, but it also illustrates the
4G. D. Harris to Jacob G. Schurman, May 2, 1914 [with June
inserted above May]. Schurman Papers, v. 34, Pg 256. RMC-KL,
Cornell.
5 Jacob Gould Schurman to G. D. Harris, June 2, 1914. Schurman
Papers, 3/4/6, v. 34, Pg. 256. RMC-KL, Cornell.
® An article about the trip in The Ithaca Journal, June 6, 1914,
lists A. A. Olson as a member of the party, but L. G. Grinnell’s diary
has the names as they are listed here. Also, A. A. Olsson’s name is
spelled differently and he did not use the nick-name of “Ollie.” The
newspaper article is incorrect.
7 The nick-name ‘“‘Hans” came from the name of a famous mur-
derer of that era, Hans Schmidt of New York City (Schmidt and
Olsson, 1916). Karl Schmidt later worked with the American Mu-
seum of Natural History and became a well known herpetologist.
® Both reside now in the library of PRI. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
closeness and camaraderie that developed among the
group, and especially between Harris and his students.
The voyage had an ominous beginning. That first
day engine trouble and very stormy weather kept the
party from getting out of Harris’s boat house on Cas-
cadilla Creek near Steamboat Landing where they all
spent their first night— Harris sleeping on the floor of
the boat house and the boys sleeping either on Ecphora
or Orthoceras II. The following morning they made
another attempt to leave Ithaca, but first they had to
dredge up the starboard light, which had fallen over-
board during the night. The engine problems also had
not been totally solved and required further diagnosis
and cure. Then the group was delayed (for some un-
known reason) by the ““R. H. McGreeny Funeral.” But,
finally, at about 1:00 P.M., they cleared the Inlet light-
house, “thumbing our noses at it as we sped by.”” They
were making about “‘six miles per hour, or knots or
crinoids or something,” and had the Cornell pennant
flying from the masthead’. After about seven hours the
group reached the Montezuma Lock at the north end
of Cayuga Lake. Here disaster almost overtook the
party, again:
““‘We were raised up in a lock and were ready to start on.
Our engineers, Prof. Harris and Hans, started the engine
backwards and the boat was plowing backwards, nearly
slamming the back deck into a bridge, but just in time
Sunny used his head, reversed the propeller and we went
ahead.” (June 20, 1914)!°
With the engine restarted in the proper direction,
they continued along the Erie Canal for two days to
Pattersonville, New York where they were joined on
June 23 by Ernest Rice “‘Sister”!! Smith (a geology
graduate student *13-"19). Pearl Sheldon (A.B.’08,
M.A.’09, Ph.D. °11) and Eleanor Long (A.B.’15), also
from the Cornell geology department, met the group
there, and spent the day with them collecting fossils.
Long stayed on board as far as Albany. Later, in the
Washington, D.C. area, they were joined by Harris’s
brother, Rollin, who stayed with the party for part of
the day on July 19.
As they reached each suitable collecting area, Ec-
phora would be tied up to a jetty or anchored and the
crew would visit outcrops and quarries to study the
exposed geology and make collections. On Chesapeake
Bay near Herring Bay, according to Grinnell, they spent
more time collecting berries than fossils. A similarity
between many present-day geologists and these 1914
° This Cornell pennant survived the trip and now hangs at PRI.
‘0 The dates refer to Grinnell’s diary entries.
'! The nick-name, Sister, was given to Smith because he came to
Cornell from “religious Oberlin.”’ (Schmidt and Olsson, 1916)
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 57
adventurers appears in the diary entry for July 1, when
they were at Chesapeake Beach: “In the evening we
went ashore and bought can openers and some Schlitz
beer, the first we had since Hudson, N.Y. on June
25thi
Their engine troubles were not over and it proved
to be a constant source of irritation for them. Harris,
however, was “not only a great geologist but a master
mechanic as well,”’ according to an entry in Grinnell’s
diary. As they were often moving in uncharted waters,
running aground was another constant threat. One such
occurrence was at Jones Wharf on the Patuxent River
in Maryland:
““As we landed, we hit a reef and you should have seen us
pile off the boat.... We all pushed the boat with Prof.
Harris at the bow and others astern. The boat finally started
with a lunge as a wave helped raise the boat and our
pushing almost ran the Prof. down; at least knocked him
over and how we laughed and roared as he came up out
of the water with his clothes on, his glasses wet and he
sputtering and spitting out the salt water he had gargled.
What a picture!”’ (July 3, 1914)
Rough seas, also, were not unknown on this voyage.
A storm on July 4 continued with high waves the fol-
lowing day, and ““Monty got so sick he felt sorry for
the fish and fed them plentifully. We all played cards.”
Monty left the group on the evening of the Sth to go
to Baltimore, while the voyage continued down the
Bay toward Virginia. Here in the swamps of Tidewater,
mosquitoes and other bugs became a real problem:
“We anchored [up the Pamunkey River] alongside a huge
marsh, with water moccasins, crawling with huge snapping
turtles and swarming with mosquitoes as big as bats. Awful
mosquitoes! We tried camphor-ice, Nyals, Skeeter-shoot
and mosquito netting. They seemed to think we were
throwing a party for them and everything we used was
dessert and we were the main course. We were being eaten
alive, but their buzzing in swarms sounded like bees
swarming and drove us nutty. We couldn’t sleep.” (July
9, 1914)
At Petersburg, Virginia, this group of Northeaster-
ners were told an unfamiliar version of a battle in the
War between the States. An old Confederate veteran
told them about how a Confederate leutenant and
eight hundred men drove Grant and fifteen thousand
“Yank Rebels” as he called them, out of a fort that
was known as “the Crater” after the Yankees mined
it. ““‘We were appreciative listeners,’ Grinnell com-
mented. The story of the ““Crater”’ was part of the Battle
of Petersburg which resulted in a large loss of life,
especially among black soldiers of the Union Army,
and Harris’ students heard about it from one who was
there. Although history shows that Grant had very little
to do with this battle, that probably made for a better
story to tell those “yankee students.”
Health and safety were constant concerns for the
group, and although they took proper precautions,
sometimes there were accidents. For example, on July
12, near Williamsburg, Virginia, Sunny was attempting
to learn to swim while the others were collecting fossils
along the beach, when Harris stepped on a serrated
fish bone that went almost through his foot. Apparently
they had a tough time pulling it out; Grinnell wrote in
his diary, “It was a very painful ordeal and is very
sore” (July 12, 1914). The “‘operation”’ must have been
successful, for Grinnell made no further mention of
the incident or of any complications as a result of them
pulling out the bone.
On July 16, near City Point on the Appomatox Riv-
er, the group met its first real danger. In threatening
weather and an outgoing tide, they tried to take a short-
cut across Tar Bay and became stuck in the mud:
“We all tried to push, we sank into the soft mud, and the
boat barely wiggled. We were frantic. Something had to
be done quickly or the tide would leave us high and dry
in the mud. We struggled back into the channel. No other
boat would dare come into [sic] pull us out, and no sign
of civilization anywhere. Then the lightning flashed and
thunder rolled.
‘Hans and Park went out in Pecky [Pecten, the dinghy]
to sound for deeper water. It was several hundred feet to
our left. But how could we get there in that soft, footless
mud? The harder we pushed on the boat, the further we
sank into the mud. We were desperate! The Prof. came to
the rescue as usual. He directed us to take the 80 lb. anchor
with its long heavy flukes out to the end of our 100 ft. of
rope. We rowed it out and two fellows, Hans and Ollie,
stood on it in the mud while the rest of us on the boat
heaved on the rope. . ..[T]hen by moving the anchor out
three times more and pulling up to it three times, we finally
got into deeper water and the boat floated.” (July 16, 1914)
As soon as the boat was in a safe mooring near
Coggin Point, the storm abated, the sun came out, and
they continued their trip to the end of Tar Bay to check
on a location of Miocene sediments:
“This must have been a Miocene burial ground, for fossils
were thick as gravel stones in a gravel pit. We had collected
but a few minutes when Ollie found a new species of cardia
[sic]. Soon we found two new pectens that we had not
found before. One of these, too, was a new species that
had never been named. I found what I prized highly. It
was the largest Ecphora of this or any other trip. Prof.
Harris found a large one many years ago, and it is now in
the Smithsonian Institution, as the largest one known. But
this beat that one. It is a whopper nearly as big around as
my head. The Prof. says the one he found is the size of a
big fist. This one is four times as big.” (July 16, 1914).
58 BULLETIN 350
Eventually they had to begin to retrace their path
back toward Ithaca, and the diarist experienced his first
and only bout of seasickness. His remedy will probably
never replace dramamine. It was Grinnell’s time to
prepare breakfast:
“There was a heavy sea running. The wind was strong,
and the tide was going out. The boat tugged at the anchor
rope and the cross wind chopped the Ecphora up and down
in a rotary motion. Either that motion or the fumes of the
kerosene stove on which I was cooking breakfast gave me
a funny feeling in my stomach, and I felt I must be getting
seasick, although I had never been before. ... I had on
only sailor pants, so I dropped them off, and rushed up
on deck and dove off the top of the boat on the leeward
side. A solid mass of slimy, stinging jelly fish or portuguese
[sic] men-of-war had collected there in the protection of
the boat away from the wind. I smashed right into them.
They were all over my naked body and in my hair. I dove
down through them, but then dared not come up, so swam
around and under the front of the boat, and came up on
the windy side. When I had clambered aboard, I was no
longer threatened with seasickness. But I was almost stung
to death by the jelly fishes, or more properly stung to life,
for they certainly revived me. After finishing the prepa-
ration of breakfast, I turned off the kerosene and swam
ashore.” (July 22, 1914).
As they were going north through the Delaware-
Chesapeake Canal, Hans invented a new sport: he would
dive off Ecphora and catch the trailing Pecky as it came
by. But if he missed the dinghy, he had to swim to
shore, run along the towpath, then dive in ahead of
the boat and swim out to catch it. Before long others
were trying this, and on one such venture, Sister, who
only a week or so before was trying to learn to swim,
Hans, and Nellie all missed Pecky and had to run about
one hundred fifty yards to catch Ecphora. They all dove
into the canal to swim to the boat and Hans and Nellie
were hauled on board, but Sister, who was very much
out of breath from running, missed the pickup and
sank:
“So we passed him by and he went down to the bottom
of the canal, probably about ten feet deep. Hans quickly
dove overboard and I threw a life preserver about where
he would come up. Before Hans got to him he came up
and sank a second time, but he did not see the life pre-
server. Sunny turned the boat around, and I dove in to
help find Sister. When he [Sister] went down the second
time, his feet hit bottom and he kicked so hard that he
came up quickly and Hans grabbed hold of him. About
that time I got in the way of the boat and almost got run
over as I scraped alongside and just missed the propeller
as it went by, then Pecky bumped into me and I held on
to her and helped Hans tow an exhausted “Sister” Smith
to Pecky and then to the Ecphora. But he was all right as
soon as he got his wind.” (July 22, 1914).
The following day they saw the body of a young boy,
who had not been as lucky as Sister, being pulled from
the canal.
Although their primary interests were paleontology
and stratigraphy, the return trip beneath the Palisades
along the Hudson River brought out the poet in Grin-
nell:
“This was really the most beautiful scenery we had yet
seen. The Palisades are beautiful colums [sic] and towering
cliffs with deeply carved towers, all dotted with green
shrubbery, and all high above the majestic Hudson. The
intrusive columns of the Palisades make a rare picture.
The highlands, too, with their rounded domes of Archaean
rock and huge whale backs, bumped up here and humped
up there with a beautiful valley of green forest in between.
There were many huge castle-like homes perched up on
the heights overlooking the river, and as we looked up at
them they were seemingly hanging from the sky, while
others were clinging, perched precariously on the edge of
a cliffora steep hillside. It all made an enchanting picture.”
(July 24, 1914).
It was one in the morning on July 27th when they
reached the lock into Cayuga Lake, and the lock-tender
had gone to bed. But by this time they were all expe-
rienced “‘lock-tenders’’, and they simply let themselves
through. They had to awaken the operator of the last
railroad bridge to let them pass, however, paying him
ten cents for his trouble. At last, they were on “‘the
broad bosom of Cayuga Lake”’ by 1:20 A.M. After an
all-night run down the lake, Hans dove over the side
for a morning swim and nearly froze. Cayuga Lake was
much colder than the Chesapeake.
Grinnell summed up the voyage:
“Thus ended the epic trip of the great little ship, the Ec-
phora, and her baby the Pecten, which had bobbed along
behind us for many a league of knots. This had been a
great experience for all of us, and a grand cruise in more
ways than one. We all felt it had been eminently successful,
as we had found many wonderful specimens and discov-
ered several new species for Professor Harris and his de-
partment to classify and name. We had had a lot of fun
and we all loved and respected one another. It was a grand
bunch of fellows, but more than that for dear Professor
Harris: we all felt that he was super, and the finest and
grandest man it had ever been our privilege to be asso-
ciated with. May he live long and ever happily in order
that he may fulfill a great contribution to Geology and
particularly to Paleontology. His name and his fame will
echo down through to ages, long after the rest of this motley
crew are forgotten.” (July 28, 1914).
This journey, like all the others, was more than just
swimming in the canals and fighting off jelly fish; there
was a serious side as well. The people who accompa-
nied Harris on these boat trips were privileged to see
a master paleontologist do field work and thereby learn
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 59
their craft, and these extended trips built a bond be-
tween student and teacher that literally lasted a life-
time. And, of course, there was the resulting science,
i.e., the descriptions by Olsson (1914) of some of the
material the group collected on this journey to the
Coastal Plain.
In reading Grinnell’s description of the trip, one is
led to wonder whether today’s students are missing
something when in less time than it took them to reach
the end of Cayuga Lake we can cross a continent. How
much more detail can be seen in the Palisades from a
boat drifting by them at six miles per hour than from
a car driving across the top at sixty miles per hour, or
a plane flying over them at six hundred miles per hour!
After some discussion with Ries, Harris replied:
“Upon due reflection re matter discussed yesterday I believe
the interests of all concerned demand that what work over
and above the regular university year is undertaken by
members of this branch of the department be limited en-
tirely to private enterprise, thus eliminating all misunder-
standings as to expense, tuition, credit, and serious obli-
gations that may at some time be almost impossible to fill.
It costs time, money for fuel, repairs, upkeep, interest on
investments, insurance, to say nothing of worry and risks
at least $1000 to carry out a successful cruiser expedition
along the East Coastal regions, and what little would be
returned by tuition at $30 apiece [sic] would amount to very
little towards the whole. Of course it would be a little but
The following year, 1915, there were some questions
from the University administration to Ries concerning
Harris’ summer activities. President Schurman wrote:
‘As you [Ries] are perhaps aware, Professor Harris, up to
1912, was professor on half time at a salary of $1500. In
1912, after Professor Tarr’s death, he was asked to give
full time for the year 1912-13 ata salary of $3000 for the
year. At the expiration of that year, he was re-appointed
professor for one year for $3000, and in the following year
( May 11, 1914 ), he was again appointed professor for
one year at $3000.
“‘T should like to know now whether the University needs
the full time of Professor Harris, or whether the University
could revert to the arrangement, which was in existence
for many years, under which he gave the University half
his time. ...
“If Professor Harris is not to be absent from the Uni-
versity half of his time, does he desire to be absent for a
portion of his time?. . . . I should think it advisable if this
arrangement is to be continued, that a resolution should
be adopted by the Trustees authorizing it generally and
making a fair adjustment of the salary.
“‘Professor Harris has I know been very much interested
in summer work in paleontology. . . . If, however, students
are taken away in the summer and given credit for their
work, would it not be fair that they should pay a fee? And
if Professor Harris himself gives time in the summer to
the instruction of students, it would seem fair that he also
should receive some compensation. I hasten to add that
it may be impossible to authorize the summer course in
paleontology, if the receipts therefrom are insufficient to
cover all the expenses incurred in connection with it.
“TI must add for your information that I am not at all
certain that the Trustees would or could grant professors
in the University leave of absence for six weeks or so
during the regular academic year on condition that they
give a corresponding period of time to summer instruction.
That, however, is a question which must be settled by the
Trustees. I only note it here in order that you [Ries] may
not take any solution for granted.”’!?
'2 Jacob Schurman to Heinrich Ries, May 28, 1915. Heinrich Ries
Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-22. RMC-KL, Cornell.
would weigh nothing in assuming such responsibilities to
be carried out every year without fail. Personally I hope to
be able to carry out this work as planned for at least 10
years. But the expenses are too great for me to promise
certain extensive programs definitely every year.”'?
Regardless of the cost, however, Harris took some
students on Ecphora down to the coast again, going
through Dismal Swamp Canal to Albemarle Sound,
North Carolina and the Neuse River; eventually cov-
ering over 3000 miles between June 7 and August 11,
1915. But before embarking on the second major voy-
age with Ecphora, Harris had to do some modifica-
tions:
“Ax [Axel Olsson] tells me you have bought the Ecphora
an engine and a good one, which is certainly good news
714
The four cylinder, 30 horsepower Loew Victor engine,
built in Chicago!>, was purchased from Bruns, Kimball
& Company, of New York City.!®
The students on this trip included E. R.(Sister) Smith
and Karl P. (Hans) Schmidt (both back for a second
summer); Charles. P. (Chuck) Alexander, the ento-
mologist; Bayard Taylor; James D. (Tommy) Thomp-
son, Jr. (graduate student ’14—16), who was the “chef
as distinguished from cook.’’; and Axel A. Olsson
(A.B.’13)!7. Taylor did not graduate from the Geology
Department. Schmidt was considered the engineer and
13 Gilbert D. Harris to Heinrich Ries, June 1, 1915. Heinrich Ries
Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-22. RMC-KL, Cornell.
14 Karl P. Schmidt to Gilbert D. Harris, March 5, 1915. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
'5 Instruction booklet from Loew Victor Company. HA-PRI, Ith-
aca, NY.
16 M. C. Kimball to Gilbert D. Harris, March 16, 1915. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
'7 Axel A. Olsson (1889-1977), a student of Harris’, worked for
various oil companies, including Sinclair. He was a founding mem-
ber of PRI and first President, and was present at the laying of the
corner stone on June 28, 1932 at the Dearborn Place facility (Moore,
D. R., 1978).
60 BULLETIN 350
vertebrate zoologist; Smith was “commissioner of
business affairs”; and Olsson was the chief cook, elec-
trician and paleontologist (Schmidt and Olsson, 1916).
This voyage resulted in the collection of more than
sixty boxes and barrels of Miocene fossils and rock
samples.
Although there is no diary record of this trip, an
article by Schmidt and Olsson in Power Boating mag-
azine following the journey gives a wonderful account
of the trip and provides an inside look at their expe-
riences. The following description comes from that
article.
The group left Ithaca about 11 A.M. on June 7 giving
the Ithaca Lighthouse the “‘Cornell yell’, and entered
the canal system five hours later. Mechanical problems
were not unknown on this trip either, even before they
cleared the New York canal system. Just below Little
Falls the reverse gear broke off at the collar and it took
four day to get it repaired. But they were in the Hudson
River by June 15. They took a quick stop to inspect,
and admire, the museum at Princeton University be-
fore continuing down the Delaware Canal system, and
gaining a healthy respect for the New Jersey mosquitos.
At least two of the enfants, as Alexander, Thompson,
and Taylor were known by the rest of the party, dis-
covered the joys of seasickness shortly after Ecphora
entered Chesapeake Bay. It was in this area that the
serious collecting began, although the group was also
impressed with the Cretaceous fossils they saw piled
along the banks of the Delaware and Chesapeake Ca-
nal:
‘“Few places that we saw on our journey offered a more
desirable field for study than the 13 miles of this one-
hundred-year old canal, so that we envied the lock keepers
their magnificent opportunity, of which they doubtless
never dreamed.” (Schmidt and Olsson, 1916, p. 19).
At Langley’s Bluff, a small anchorage south of Cedar
Point, where they took shelter from the wind and high
waves, they did their first real collecting. The wind did
not let up and Thompson and Alexander became so
seasick that they were put ashore to walk to the next
anchorage, without their shoes, of course. They took
a side trip up the Potomac to Washington, D. C. where
Harris had worked about 20 years earlier. It was here
that the trip nearly ended in disaster. Just before taking
a shore excursion, someone left the fuel tank valve
open and they returned to find about 20 gallons of
gasoline in the bilge. After cleaning up the spilled fuel,
they proceeded back down the Potomac collecting at
such famous localities as Aquia Creek, Potomac Creek,
and Pope’s Creek, all yielding many boxes of fossils
and valuable first-hand experience for this group of
young geologists.
At the mouth of the river the winds and waves were
still high and they took refuge at the village of Lewisetta
and explored the art of dealing with a boat stuck on a
mud flat. They should have conferred with those from
the 1914 trip, who had a similar experience. But each
learned on their own. The procedure seemed simple
enough: when the boat ran aground, or “‘snotting it”
as they called it, all hands but the captain shed their
trousers and went overboard to lighten the boat. Then
she usually floated free or could be pushed back into
deeper water. But when the water was filled with jelly
fish whose nettle-like sting could persist for many hours,
the procedure became more complicated and painful,
if no less necessary.
While in the harbor at Hampton Roads, Virginia,
the group saw several interned German cruisers, a grim
reminder of the realities of the world in 1915. Two of
the group were to come face to face with these realities
a little later in the trip. They travelled near Roanoke
Island, where Sir Walter Raleigh had established his
ill-fated colony some 330 years earlier. Eventually on
July 7, 30 days after leaving Ithaca, the hardy band of
travelers had reached their destination, New Bern,
North Carolina and the junction of the Neuse and
Trent Rivers. Here they split into three collecting par-
ties and each went off in search of fossils; some by rail
south to Wilmington and north to the Chowan and
Meherrin Rivers. On July 15, the three who remained
with the boat started north and the rest joined them
along the way, with some interesting tales to relate.
Although Schmidt and Olsson say little about their
adventures in their article, probably because Olsson
was directly involved, newspapers from Virginia and
Baltimore to Ithaca carried the story. The Ithaca Jour-
nal of August 30, 1915 does give some indication of
their activities. It seems that on one occasion, Olsson
and Taylor were near Harrellsville'*, a little town in
North Carolina along the Chowan River, checking
stream beds, hillsides, back yards and gardens, and
other out-of-the-way places, for fossils. The local in-
habitants thought their behavior rather suspicious—
particularly as the nation was almost at war. The sher-
iff, who was 15 miles away, sent word that the village
doctor, storekeeper, and hotel keeper should act as a
“Committee of Investigation.” The two students were
picked up and taken before this committee. When
questioned, their claim to be just collecting rocks,
brought laughter to the captors. The villagers knew
these strange people must be either spies or crazy, for
everyone knew the rocks in that part of the country
were useless. Eventually, after producing some ship-
'8 The Suffolk newspaper article named the town “Haroldsville”’.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 61
ping receipts for samples they had shipped back to
Cornell, the pair convinced the townspeople they were
telling the truth and that they were not German spies.
A very disappointed posse released their prisoners, but
were happy that their city was in no danger from Ger-
man submarines.
A local paper in Suffolk, Virginia, got wind of the
story and made much of the fact that their neighbors
to the south had taken Cornell geologists for German
spies. Then it made the editorial page of the Ba/timore
News which compared it to a similar incident when a
local group went out to investigate the “suspicious”
behavior of a Harvard geology professor out in the Bad
Lands of Dakota. As the group was about to surround
him, thinking they were a band of outlaws, the pro-
fessor took flight and led the group on a wild, 40 mile
chase through the hills before he was “captured.” And
now another case had occurred in “‘far-off but socio-
logically wholly different North Carolina.” Putting the
two incidents together, the editorial suggested it was
clearly the fault of the scientists:
“The occurrence of two such distinctly differentiated yet
analogous cases acquits the Bad Lands of gross ignorance
of inhospitality. It puts squarely upon the geologist the
obligation to wear some mark which will distinguish him
from the undesirable. Clearly the symptoms of his voca-
tion are dangerously confusing.””!?
In another town things got more serious when a
farmer fired a shotgun at Thompson. It seems that
Thompson had been collecting in a nearby quarry and
was walking back toward the boat with his arms full
of fossils. He heard someone tell him to stop, but as-
sumed the command was meant for someone else and
seeing no reason to stop, he walked on, until the man
behind the voice fired his shotgun. Apparently, some-
one had been stealing watermelons from a field near
the quarry, and when the farmer saw Thompson with
his arms full, he felt he had caught the thief.
The return journey was made over the roughest wa-
ter of the entire trip and, according to Schmidt and
Olsson, it included battling some of the largest mos-
quitoes ever seen. In 1914 the run from Newport News,
Virginia to Ithaca had taken eight and a half days, but
various mechanical problems did not allow them to
break that record. Ominous sounds and propeller shaft
vibration developed as the engine was run at slow
speeds. An inspection showed no obvious problem or
cause. At other times, all went well, and once they ran
the engine for 22 hours straight with no difficulty. Their
trip north provided some memorable times and sights:
'9“Tt Might Happen Anywhere”’ Baltimore News, July 25, 1915,
page unknown.
“What words can describe the feelings of the pilot, as he
watched the slow rise of the constellations in front of him,
and came to anchor safely in the Elk river, just inside of
Turkey point, as the moon set blood red in the west.”
(Schmidt and Olsson, 1916, p. 21).
The next morning they discovered the propeller had
fallen off.
They found two men with a boat who were willing
to tow Ecphora to Havre de Grace on the Susquehanna
River where they found an old foundryman who would
cast them a new one. Unfortunately the blades of the
only mold he had were too large, but with some grind-
ing work, they managed to limp into Chesapeake City
for a proper replacement, only to have the vibration
return when they restarted the journey. This time the
shaft had to be replaced, but the rudder was in the way,
which would have meant digging a three foot hole in
the ‘“... doubtful smelling mud of the Brandywine,
racing to get it done before the return of the tide, .. .”
But Harris came to the rescue with a simple idea. They
simply turned the rudder sideways and drilled a 1.5
inch hole in it right over the shaft and slipped in the
new shaft in short order.
But they continued to have engine and other troubles
all the way back to Ithaca, including stripping all the
gears in the magneto, and finding a bridge down across
the canal at Utica. By removing all awnings, they were
able to slip under the bridge, much to the disappoint-
ment of the local crowd. They finally reached Ithaca
on the afternoon of August 11 to the cheers and con-
gratulations of friends and relations. The journey of
3000 miles had produced about 60 boxes for fossils,
over 5000 pounds. Some of the fossils were described
by Olsson (1916).
For the students:
“The value of the trip to us-students of science-could
scarcely be estimated. Professor Harris’ attitude toward
his students seems best expressed in the words of his pre-
decessor at Cornell, Charles Frederick Hartt, in his account
of the Morgan Expedition”®: ‘If to discover a new Car-
boniferous Fauna will repay a journey to Brazil, of how
much greater importance is the discovery of a new Nat-
uralist?’”’ (Schmidt and Olsson, 1916, p. 46).
As had been outlined in Schurman’s letter in May,
1915, it appears Harris’ summer field activity was run-
ning afoul of university bureaucracy. That autumn,
Harris wrote to Ries:
20 A Cornell expedition to Brazil funded mostly by Colonel Edwin
B. Morgan of Aurora, New York in 1870. The rest of Hartt’s quo-
tation is, “‘Had the expedition produced no other results than to
have added four new men to science, I should have considered time
and money amply well spent.” “The Morgan Expedition, 1870-71,
Bulletin of the Cornell University. Science, v. i, no. 1, p. 4)
62 BULLETIN 350
“If another expedition to the south is altogether too ex-
pensive for my private funds, I can perhaps for one year
equally well continue a little piece of delayed work in
northwestern Pennsylvania that I commenced three years
ago; work that would imply topographic, stratigraphic,
paleontologic, and physiographic research of various de-
grees of advancement.”?!
Ries replied quoting from Schurman’s letter from the
previous spring about the Trustees probably not ap-
proving the arrangement of replacing regular academic
term work with summer activities for all professors,
and thereby eliminating it for the one. Ries closed with:
“He [Schurman] believed that if a department is to run
summer work, it should be treated as a separate matter,
and separate compensation should be allowed for it. And
if such compensation were allowed, it seemed but fair to
the President that the students taking this summer work
should pay a tuition fee.
“As you were not willing to agree to the latter, I could
not agree to ask the Trustees for an appropriation for the
summer course, your final decision was to run this as a
private matter.”’*?
Thus the victim of the University bureaucracy and
rising costs, there is no record of any further extended
21 G. D. Harris to Heinrich Ries, September 22, 1915. Heinrich
Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-22. RMC-KL, Cornell.
22 Heinrich Ries to G. D. Harris, September 25, 1915. Heinrich
Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-22. RMC-KL, Cornell.
boat trips by Harris after 1915. He did continue using
Ecphora for short trips on the lake, but he was already
looking to the future, for in his Annual Report to Ries,
head of the department, for 1919-1920, Harris said:
“Several excursions were given on the lake by boat last
fall and will be this spring [1920], but I find for small
classes that a Ford is very desirable. In the University of
Texas I understand a large excursion truck is owned by
the department for excursion work.’’?3
Ecphora continued to make various field trips until
about 192074 (Palmer, 1953a), when Harris sold her
to A. C. (Dave) Davis, a Cornell engineering professor.
She must have stayed in the Ithaca area, for by 1964
Ecphora was owned by Peter Paul Kellogg, a Cornell
ornithologist who used her for his exploration and re-
search. When last heard of, according to Kellogg, she
had been taken to Florida, but her current location or
condition is unknown.”>
23 Page 2; G. D. Harris Annual Report for 1919-1920 submitted
to Heinrich Ries, April 15, 1920. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691,
Box 1, File 1-85. RMC-KL, Cornell.
24 In a personal communication July 22, 1983, Katherine Palmer
indicated that 1918 was the last major Ecphora field trip.
25 History of the Ecphora prepared by Peter Paul Kellogg, June
10, 1964. Copy in HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 63
CHAPTER 5. THE LOUISIANA SURVEY
Although it is not known exactly how or through
whom Harris secured the appointment in Louisiana,
there is little doubt that during his various trips to
Arkansas and Texas, and with his work near the border
between northern Louisiana and Arkansas while doing
stratigraphic mapping for the Arkansas Geological Sur-
vey, he must have come in contact with influential
people in the Louisiana government. With those con-
nections plus his reputation as a Tertiary paleontolo-
gist, Harris was appointed ‘“‘Geologist in Charge’’ for
the Geological and Agricultural Survey of Louisiana
in 1899. Pope (1988) states that he followed William
W. Clendenin, who had led the survey from 1894—
1897. The original state survey, the Topographical and
Geological Survey of Louisiana, was organized in 1869
after the recommendation of a special committee in
1856:
“a geological and scientific survey of the State of Lou-
isiana, 1s under all the circumstances, much to be desired,
and that it should be judiciously, not too rapidly, prose-
cuted.” (Riddell et a/., 1856, p. 6)
This original organization lasted until 1872 when fund-
ing was withdrawn.
A new Survey started again in 1891-92 as the Geo-
logical and Agricultural Survey of Louisiana under the
direction of Dr. Otto Lerch who came to Louisiana
from the Texas Survey. Each of these Surveys was
associated with Louisiana State University and Agri-
cultural and Mechanical College (LSU) in Baton Rouge,
and Survey directors were expected to serve on the
faculty of LSU as well. But funding ended again in the
very year it was commissioned. In 1894, William Clen-
denin assumed the leadership of the Survey, lasting in
this role until 1897. According to the letter of trans-
mittal for the 1896 report, Clendenin devoted “...
October to March... to LSU ... and the rest of the
time to field work of the survey.” (Clendenin, 1896,
p. 163). Thus, a pattern was established for the Survey
director to be “part-time,” which Harris continued
when he spent part of his year in Louisiana and the
rest at Cornell.
When Harris was appointed in late 1898, there had
been no survey work for two years. At this time the
geological survey activity came under the political arm
of the State Experiment Stations, which had Dr. Wil-
liam C. Stubbs as their Director. Harris, like Lerch
before him, was not on the LSU faculty. That very first
year, 1899, A. C. Veatch (age 21) worked as Harris’
assistant, a position he held for several years. Veatch
was the first of several Cornell students, as well as some
from LSU, who worked with Harris in Louisiana. In
his letter of transmission to the Governor for the 1899
report, Stubbs extolled the quality of the work that
team did during their first year:
“Since our last report of the Geological and Agricultural
Survey, a complete change has taken place in the personnel
of the survey. Prof. W. W. Clendenin, who performed the
duties of Professor of Mineralogy and Geology in the Lou-
isiana State University and A. and M. College, and geol-
ogist for the stations, has severed his connections with
both institutions by resignation, and taken charge of Blees’
Military Academy, at Macon, Mo.
“Upon his resignation arrangements were made with
Prof. Gilbert D. Harris, Ph.B.', of Cornell University, who
is the recognized authority of this country in Tertiary ge-
ology, by which he was to conduct the survey under our
direction and publish annually a report of his work. He
gives considerable time to the actual field work and writes
and superintends the publication of his reports. Mr. A. C.
Veatch has been selected as his assistant and gives his
entire time to the field and office work of the survey. Mr.
Veatch is an acknowledged authority upon Quarternary
[sic] geology, and with his assistance we feel satisfied that
the entire State, which consists almost exclusively of ter-
tiary [sic] and quarternary [sic] formations, will be cor-
rectly and fully reported. These two gentlemen have per-
sistently followed their work through freezes and sunshine,
over intolerable roads, impelled by an enthusiasm known
only to lovers of science. How well they have accomplished
their work, the present volume will testify.” (Harris and
Veatch, 1899, p. 4)
In his own letter of transmittal to Stubbs, Harris out-
lined their activities and had some words of praise for
Veatch:
“Mr. A. C. Veatch acting as assistant geologist, com-
menced field work November Ist, 1898, and studied the
distribution of the soils of Caddo and Bossier parishes until
my arrival in the State, December 23rd. Thereafter we
worked for the most part together in De Soto, Sabine,
Natchitoches, Grant, Winn, Caldwell and Ouachita par-
ishes.
“After my departure from the State, the last of March
[1899], Mr. Veatch continued work in the northern tier of
parishes between Ouachita river and Red river until re-
quested by you to visit the Five Islands and the Sulphur
region of the southwestern part of the State. This done,
we worked on the report herewith transmitted from mid-
summer to late autumn, when he again took the field and
I saw to the completion of the report.
“T gladly take this opportunity to inform you that Mr.
Veatch has in all his connections with this survey, shown
' Bachelor of Philosophy.
64 BULLETIN 350
himself a most capable and energetic assistant; and it is
to his untiring zeal, and your [Stubbs] never failing and
well directed support that such success as the survey has
been able to attain is largely due.
‘“Most respectively submitted,
GILBERT D. HARRIS,
Geologist-in-Charge.
Cornell University, Ithaca, New York,
November 25, 1899.”
(Harris and Veatch, 1899, p. 6)
Harris was always mindful of his own strengths and
weaknesses with regard to geological work, and this
first report of 1899 illustrates that quite well. For the
necessary work that was outside his expertise, he in-
volved other colleagues; Heinrich Ries of Cornell did
the analysis of clay samples that Harris collected (Ries,
1899), and Arthur Hollick of Columbia did the fossil
plant identification (Hollick, 1899). And even though
the section on the Cretaceous fossils is published under
his name, in the introductory remarks, Harris gave full
credit for the identification of these fossils to T. W.
Stanton, a former co-worker at U.S.G.S. Pope (1988,
p. 188) describes the results of the 1899 activities as,
“By far the most productive of the early surveys.”
One very important aspect of the reports of 1899
can be found in Veatch’s report on “The Five Islands”
(Veatch, 1899) in which he maps and describes salt
domes in the Parishes of Iberia and St. Mary. Although
at this point in time, salt was the attraction, not oil, it
was Veatch’s careful mapping, especially of Petite Anse
Island, that revealed these important structures. Veatch
mentions the existence of both oil and gas associated
with the salt deposits:
“In hole number 10 [on Belle Isle] gas was struck at a
depth of 120 feet in sufficient quantities to throw sand all
over the derrick. It is now bubbling out the hole where it
can be easily collected and ignited. A small amount of gas
and oil was struck in hole number 4.” (Veatch, 1899, pp.
224-225).
The cross section in figure 6 in Veatch’s paper is a
classic salt dome structure showing holes 4 and 10 on
the flank. Further, Veatch concludes that the, “*. . .dome
shape is due to uplift and not erosion.” (1899, p.228).
He found similar structures on the other islands as well.
The work of Harris and Veatch put to rest the current
popular belief in a Cretaceous “backbone” which was
supposed to extend through the Five Islands area and
connect with structures running up through Arkansas:
“Our observations go to show that whatever folding and
faulting has been the cause of bringing the underlying Cre-
taceous strata to day, has been in the northeast-southwest
direction, roughly parallel in fact to the northwestern shore
line of the old Mississippi embayment in Eocene Tertiary
time.
“The shallow depth at which rocks supposed to be of
this series [the Cretaceous age backbone] have been struck
... [in various wells, and]. . . the great depth of the Shreve-
port well (1,100 ft.) with no record of Midway beds [of
lower Tertiary age] or Cretaceous limestones though nearly
in line with the so-called axis or “*back-bone”’, [as well as]
the various dips observed in the limestones at various
exposures with but one exception-the St. Landry outcrops-
all indicate northeast-southwest local folds parallel to old
shore lines rather than a mountain chain at right angles
to the same, or in a northwest-southeast direction.” (Harris
and Veatch, 1899, Section II, p. 62)
When Harris began his work in Louisiana in 1899,
the area was poorly mapped, and in many areas he and
his crew had to create their own base maps before doing
their geological work. There is a section in the 1899
report in which Harris addresses, ““The Establishment
of Meridian Lines.’ He described the difficulties of
doing land surveying using only a “magnetic needle”
for determining direction:
“Different men with different instruments at different times,
have naturally, as we well know, come to very different
conclusions regarding the location of many corners and
boundary lines.” (Harris, 1899c, p. 312).
Throughout his work in Louisiana, Harris always tried
to maintain the most accurate readings possible with
his surveying work which is well illustrated in his let-
ters. Apparently in his quest for accuracy, Harris sent
some of his equipment to Washington, D.C. for testing:
“Your compass needle to your transit requires a correction
of +8’ for east declination and —8’ for west declination,
In the official communication this corr’n [sic] will probably
not be changed by more than 1”?
He even had his steel tape measured and received a
“Certificate of Verification— National Bureau of Stan-
dards” which did a test on his 100’ steel tape; “...
with 10 lbs of tension, off +0.03” in 50’ and +0.03”
im LOO! 73
The accuracy of the surveying work of Harris and
his various teams, especially that of Veatch, was re-
markable; almost 60 years later, no one had improved
upon it:
“The cartographic history of the Sabine River is reviewed
by Veatch (1902, pp. 107-111) whose personal work in
mapping the course of the stream in 1900 (published in
1902, pls. 32-36) is without peer. . . . The writer would be
remiss not to add that the course of the Sabine River
2L. A. Bauer, Coast and Geodetic Survey office in Washington,
D.C., to Gilbert D. Harris, December 22, 1902. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
3 National Bureau of Standards [signature illegible] to Prof. G. D.
Harris, State Geologist, Louisiana, December 23. 1902. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 65
mapped by Veatch in 1902 was also done with much to-
pographic skill and fidelity which is substantiated by aerial
photographs and the fact that the outcrops described along
the Sabine River can be accurately located today [1960]
from the 1902 map (figs. 2 and 3). [Parentheticals in the
original.] (Anderson, H. V., 1960, pp. 18,19).
Harris continued to use Veatch and other students
as his assistants with the Louisiana work, even though
Veatch was attracted to the U.S.G.S. in 1902 in a full-
time capacity. Often the same people would work with
him in the Helderberg Field Camp during the summer
and then go south with him in the winter (Plate 3).
John L. Rich described his association with Harris:
“... and in the summer of 1905 [Harris] led a party con-
sisting of Whitney,* Reinecke,*> and Rich, together with
three students from Louisiana State University, in a pro-
ject for preparing a map and geological report of the Winn-
field sheet, Winn Parish, Louisiana. During that summer,
the controls for the map were established. During the fol-
lowing winter [1906], Whitney, Rich and E. B. Hopkins
completed the contouring of the sheet while Harris made
the geological studies. Needless to say, all this was extreme-
ly valuable training for the young geologists concerned.”’®
Their work became part of the 1907 report (Harris,
1907a,b) and all their names, including the LSU stu-
dents, appear at the bottom of the two maps.
In the report on the Winnfield Sheet (Harris, 1907a),
Harris concludes that faulting and folding were not
responsible for the development of large dome-like
structures they were seeing:
“The longer we study these peculiar structures [salt domes]
the more convinced are we that although they may be
located along lines of weakness, faults, or fractured anti-
clines, they are not to any great extent due to tangential,
mountain-making forces, not to volcanic upheavals, nor
igneous plugs, as has recently been suggested, but to the
slowly-acting, little understood, concretion-forming forces
as well as the power of crystallization. Hot saline or cal-
careous solutions, coming from earlier Mesozoic or later
Paleozoic beds beneath, rising perhaps by hydrostatic pres-
sure alone, may very readily, upon reaching a level where
the pressure is somewhat relieved and the temperature
decreased, deposit some of their mineral contents.”’ (Har-
ris, 1907a, p. 9).
* Francis Luther Whitney (A.B..06, M.S..11; Ph.D.28), later a
Professor of Geology and Paleontology at the University of Texas
in Austin.
> Leopold Reinecke (1884-1935), a South African who was at
Cornell (M.S.°09) and studied with Harris. Completed his Ph.D. at
Yale in 1914. He worked with the Geological Survey of Canada,
with Sinclair Oil company and as an economic geologist in South
Africa (Collins, 1937; Nel and Krahmann, 1937).
® John L. Rich to Axel A. Olsson, February 21, 1953. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
This was the core of Harris’ theory of salt dome for-
mation and subsequent uplift with the major force
coming from salt crystallization as the rising saline
waters cooled. Experimental work by Harris on salt
crystallization appeared to support his hypothesis of,
“*... the power of growing crystals.” (Harris, 1908, p.
134). While this idea was gradually replaced by the
concept of diapiric rise of the salt masses (due to dif-
ferential density of the salt and overlying sediments),
as late as mid-century, some workers in the field were
re-examining Harris’ idea (Willis, 1948).
Although Harris and Veatch made some of the early
detailed descriptions of these domed structures in Lou-
isiana, the commercial connection between the domes
and petroleum came from Captain A. F. Lucas and his
work with the Spindle Top, Texas, oil field. In 1897,
Lucas had been working in the Five Islands region and
discovered the salt deposits on Belle Isle and Grand
Cote. At these locations Lucas recognized that while
these deposits were limited in horizontal extent, they
were extensive in the vertical dimension. Lucas moved
on to Texas where he discovered the first of the major
oil fields on a dome structure, and Harris gave full
credit to Lucas:
“More and more work was being done on the salines of
north Louisiana in 1900 and 1901, when suddenly the
commercial and geological worlds were astonished at the
marvelous results of Capt. Lucas’ boring on a slight rise
of ground known as “Spindle Top,” three miles southward
from Beaumont, Texas. Oil at this place seemed to indicate
that perhaps, although no salt was known at Spindle top,
there was some relationship betweeen [sic] oil and salt
mounds and low domes and salines. .. . January 10, 1901
[date of Lucas’ first oil strike, a ““gusher’’], may well be
considered the date of the commencement of our educa-
tion regarding a new type of geological phenomena—we
refer to the origin and method of development of local dome
structure.” [Emphasis in the original.] (Harris, 1908, p.
nT)
Thus, this was an exciting time in Louisiana as Har-
ris was beginning his tenure as Geologist-in-Charge,
for the oil industry was gaining momentum. In his
letter of transmission for the 1902 report, Stubbs de-
scribed the situation this way:
“Since our last report a wonderful interest has been created
in the geology of Louisiana by virtue of the discovery of
oil in this State and Texas....
“Numerous gushers at Beaumont, Texas have excited
persons in all parts of the State to action. Many wells have
been bored in various parts of the State, and numerous
companies have been formed for exploiting the State’s
wealth in this great fuel and illuminant.
“Some few efforts have been successful; many have failed.
7 See also Harris, 1912b.
66 BULLETIN 350
In this report will be found a full discussion of the oil
conditions of this State, and it is hoped that the facts given
will deter companies from expending large sums of money
in the vain hope of obtaining oils in unfavorable localities
where the so-called oil experts have pronounced an abun-
dance of this greasy fluid. A knowledge of the geology of
a section is often of valuable aid in determining where not
to bore.” (Harris et al., 1902, pp. iv—v).
In reality though, only one portion of the 1902 report,
Special Report 8 “Oil in Louisiana” which Harris wrote,
dealt directly with the oil geology. It is interesting to
note that this report provided the drilling results of
several wells, including complete well logs giving de-
scriptions of the various layers and at what depth the
strata were encountered (Harris et a/., 1902, pp. 261-
275). This was Harris’ first direct encounter with an
industry that was to dominate his non-academic life
for many years.
A measure of the general excitement engendered by
these discoveries can be judged from a letter sent to
Stubbs in 1902, who, in turn, sent a copy to Harris. A
Mr. C. M. Hicks, Treasurer, Sicily Island Oil Com-
pany, Wisner, Louisiana, was happy to hear that Stubbs
was:
““... Inogorating [sic] a Geological Survey in the La. Par-
ishes. We will be vary [sic] glad to give any information
or assistance in our power to aid this highly appreciative
enterprise. I hope your geologist are [sic] ready to take up
(our Franklin Parish) the work that they will come direct
to Wisner [Louisiana] as we will meet them if they will
wire us. ... We would be pleased to have them with us at
an early date as there has been one oil well sunk and
arrangements are being made to put one down an other
[sic] one on Sicily Island. We have had no good results so
fare:
An article in a local New Orleans paper, 7imes Dem-
ocrat, commenting on some cooperative efforts that
Stubbs had mentioned also generated some letters in
which the writers were happy to see that Stubbs:
“.. has secured the co-operation of the Agricultural Bu-
reau at Washington, in securing the services of an expert
to examine the resources of our state, and that one of the
gentleman is an expert in examining oil lands. . . . [ask for
him to] examine some lands we have at Lafayette, La. at
the LaFayette Refinery, for the purpose of ascertaining
whether these lands are oil bearing. In this connection, we
would explain that we have sunk at that point three 8”
®’ To W. C. Stubbs, Director, Louisiana Sugar Experiment Station,
Audubon Park, New Orleans, from C. M. Hicks, Treasurer, Sicily
Island Oil Company, Wisner, Louisiana, December 31, 1902. HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY.
[diameter] artesian wells for the purpose of supplying the
refinery with the necessary amount of water. These wells
are connected to a powerful air compressor and when ever
the full force of the air compressor is confined to one of
these wells, the oil flows out with the water. This leads us
to beleieve [sic] that there may be oil in paying quantities,
and of course we would like to have an examination made.”
Despite all the rising interest, the first successful wells
in northern Louisiana were not drilled until 1904, which
in turn led to the development of the Caddo field which
hit its maximum production in 1913 (Powers, 1920b).
Veatch (1906b) had described the geology of this area
in his massive groundwater report for the U.S.G.S.
Based upon his earlier experiences with the U.S.G.S.,
Harris was familiar with “‘cooperative”’ operations be-
tween the federal and state surveys, and his Louisiana
Survey was asked for its cooperation. One such request
occurred in 1903 when Veatch was working with the
U.S.G.S. Harris was in correspondence with F. H.
Newell, who said, ““Mr. Veatch is now working for us
in southern Arkansas and northern Louisiana, .. .””!°
Then he went on to ask Harris to do some work for
the U.S.G.S. gathering statistics on ground water in
central and southern Louisiana.'! Harris must have
sent a proposal, perhaps asking for a rather high pay-
ment for his services, for there is a response from New-
ell a few weeks later offering only $600:
“\.. . for expenses and compensation during completion of
field work and the preparation of the report on under-
ground waters of Louisiana... .I should be very glad to
have you undertake the work, notwithstanding the fact
that the rate of remuneration you ask is higher than is
ordinarily accorded a geologist under similar condi-
tions. ... There is no objection to the preparation of the
report during free intervals while engaged in other work,
providing it is ready to be submitted before January 1,
19047"!
Then Harris must have asked for more expense money
in order to obtain better data, but Newell wrote him:
“TI appreciate the necessity of further field work in Loui-
siana for the purpose of determining the amount of the
° To Prof. W. C. Stubbs, Audubon Park, City [New Orleans] from
H. E. Gumbel, L. Gumbel & Company Ltd, Cotton & Sugar factors
and Commission Merchants, New Orleans, December 31, 1902. HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY.
'© Actually according to Harris, Veatch was working for both the
U.S.G.S. and the Louisiana Geological Survey (Harris ef al., 1905,
pith):
'! F.H. Newell, U. S. Geological Survey, to G. D. Harris, Audubon
Park, Louisiana, January 24, 1903. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
'? F.H. Newell to G. D. Harris, February 9, 1903. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 67
supplies derived from the wells. I would suggest, however,
that approximate amounts are of nearly as great value as
exact determinations, and can be obtained in a much short-
er time and at less expense. The details of carrying on the
field work and the preparation of the report are left to your
judgment, but the sum of $600.00, which I mentioned in
my letter of February 9th., is all that I feel at liberty to
assign for the work in Louisiana, and, if possible, I should
like to have you make the field and office expenses, in-
cluding salary, come within this amount. Please let me
know definitely at your earliest convenience whether or
not you can undertake the work on the allotment men-
tioned, in order that we may arrange for its payment from
this year’s appropriation.”!3
Is this what is meant by the old saying, “Close enough
for government work?’ He must have accepted the
$600, however, for Harris said in the introduction to
the groundwater report:
‘the writer spent the month of June 20 to July 20,
1903, in the same field in behalf of the U. S. Geological
Survey.” (Harris et a/., 1905, p. 1).
While this negotiation concerning the groundwater
work was being conducted, Harris sent his own pro-
posal to the U.S.G:S.:
“Your application of December 24 [1902] for means to
continue a systematic paleontologic and stratigraphic in-
vestigation of the eastern Cenezoic [sic] has been carefully
considered by Messrs. Stanton, Willis, Dall and Vaughan.
There is entire unanimity regarding the value of the work
which you propose and its desirability at the present time.
There is also a unanimous opinion that the work should
be done under Survey auspices and that the results, both
collections and notes, should belong to the Survey.”’'*
No money was forthcoming, but at least the scientific
merit of his proposal was accepted.
He also arranged cooperative agreements with other
governmental agencies, such as the Coast and Geodetic
Survey. In the Harris Archives is a copy of a letter to
one Mr. Edwin Smith, Assistant, United States Coast
and Geodetic Survey (USC&GS), from Superintendent
{unnamed], December 23, 1902 which directs Smith
to go to Louisiana and work with Harris in setting up
a meridian line. This was part of a joint agreement
with the USC&GS and Harris to do magnetic survey
work in Louisiana. “‘Articles of agreement” from the
Superintendent were sent for Harris to sign in letter on
December 23, 1902. Through this joint effort, Loui-
13 F. H. Newell, Chief Engineer, U.S.G.S., to G. D. Harris, Sugar
Experiment Station, Audubon Park. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
14 CM. Hayes, Geologist in Charge of Geology, U.S.G.S. to G.D.
Harris, January 28, 1903. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
siana became only the third state in the Union to, “.. .
have a satisfactory survey made including all three
elements-declination, dip, and intensity.’ [Emphasis in
the original.] (Harris, 1905b, p. 171).
This was not the first time Harris had seen the need
for such magnetic surveys. While working in Arkansas,
Branner asked him to determine what it would cost to
establish meridian lines in every county seat, and Har-
ris estimated about $3500 and a year’s work. This was
not the kind of commitment Branner could support,
so nothing was done. Then, when Harris came to Lou-
isiana in 1898, he found little magnetic survey or me-
ridian work had been done, but with an annual ap-
propriation of only $2000, once again it seemed an
impossible task. But if he could not do the work one
way, he would do it another:
‘Accordingly, an engineer’s transit (Heller and Brightley’s)
was borrowed from the Engineering Department of the
State University at Baton Rouge and observations were
made and markers were left at every parish seat traversed
in general geologic work. The only losses thus entailed to
geologic work proper were one day after a night’s obser-
vations, devoted to finding and setting permanent mon-
uments or markers, and the transportation expense of a
few extra instruments.” (Harris, 1905b, p. 173).
Harris continued this type of survey work for three
years, and when the task became totally overwhelming,
he asked the United States Coast & Geodetic Survey
for assistance.
Much of the effort of the work by Harris and his
assistants dealt as much with determining correct el-
evations and doing topographic mapping as it did with
rocks and fossils. The topographic data available to
them were minimal and often base maps had to be
prepared before the geology could be mapped. For ex-
ample, the appendix to Part II of Bulletin Number |
is simply a compilation of altitudes in North Louisiana
(Veatch, 1905). Part of this mapping activity relied on
having proper compass headings, which, in turn, re-
quired establishing magnetic variations and meridian
lines. This was very much “‘non-rock work’’, but still
vital to the overall success of the Survey activities.
The attention to establishing meridian lines and their
importance to the general mapping of the region was
a lesson well learned by his students. Several years later
one of his student assistants, J. Pacheco, who by then
was working with the Commisao Geographica e Geo-
logica do Estado de Sao Paulo, related the following:
“This survey is now doing something in the way of de-
termining meridian lines, and I thought I could possibly
do something in the way of studying the influence of the
68 BULLETIN 350
various rock masses in deviating the magnetic needle. We
have here to contend with great trap dikes and overflows,
which on decomposition gives a deeply red soil highly rich
in iron oxide. Of course the needles behave crazily in such
areas, but I thought that perhaps we could find some meth-
od in such behavior.”*!>
In 1905, Harris changed the titles of the Survey re-
ports he was producing. Up until this time he had been
continuing a line of reports started by Lerch, e.g., the
1902 report was Part VI of the series. He also changed
the heading; “Geology and Agriculture” became ““Geo-
logical Survey of Louisiana” to better reflect the type
of work he and his assistants were doing. In addition,
each report became known as a Bulletin, Report of
[year] and numbered consecutively. Perhaps the choice
of a name for the series of publications was influenced
by his academic experience, and his own Bulletins of
American Paleontology. In light of subsequent history,
the letter of transmission from Stubbs, Director of the
State Experiment Stations (the state office which con-
trolled the survey) for the first Bu//etin has an inter-
esting statement in it:
“The bulletins which follow will deal with salt, lignite, oil,
etc., but these products are of most trifling account when
compared to the great underground water supplies of the
State.” (Harris et a/., 1905, p. vii).
Today, however, no one would refer to the oil industry
in Louisiana as a “trifling account.”
At times, however, Harris’ ideas on the importance
of the Survey and its activities did not quite coincide
with what the State expected, at least in so far as Stubbs
represented the State’s view. In a letter indicating that
Harris had $2500 available after paying various ex-
penses and salaries, Stubbs outlined various sugges-
tions as to how he felt the money should be used:
“You next speak of the volumes to be published, one on
Economic Geology, another on Stratigraphy and topog-
raphy, and another on Paleontology. I consider the first
and second of the utmost importance just now, not because
in themselves they are really so valuable, but because they
will do to furnish to the large number of immigrants and
land agents that are now invading this State with such
information, and the object of this appropriation in the
State is more to develop the material resources than for
scientific research, although the latter is not lost sight of
in the appropriation.”’!®
Stubbs must have had his way, for in 1905, the pub-
lished reports concerned only groundwater, altitudes,
'S J. Pacheco to Gilbert D. Harris, March 22, 1909. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
'e W.C. Stubbs, Director, Louisiana Sugar Experiment Station, to
G.D. Harris, October 13, 1903. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
tide, and magnetic data, with not a single mention of
paleontology (Harris et a/., 1905, pts I and II; Harris,
1905b, c, 1907b; Veatch 1905, 1906a).
By 1905, Stubbs was no longer in charge of the Ex-
periment Stations and the new Director, W. R. Dod-
son, was not familiar with Harris and his work. Dodson
inquired:
“Tam not acquainted with all the correspondence regard-
ing the contract with you, and would be obliged if you
would give me a statement of the months you are to spend
in the filed [s7c], and those which you are to spend in
working up your reports.
“T would also be obliged for a short resume of the work
you have done this winter, the reports you have in prep-
aration, and the number of publications now being issued,
approximately what they will cost, when they will be ready
for distribution and so forth.
““What arrangements have you had regarding the survey
paying the traveling expenses between Louisiana and Ith-
aca. I note on the first statement that you have your rail-
road expenses. Do I understand from this that we are to
pay your expenses to and from Louisiana each season.
Had I known you were going to return at this time to
Ithaca, I should have requested you to come by Baton
Rouge. I wanted to have a day or so with you and learn
all about your plans, the work done this winter and many
other things. I have given most of my time to the work
that has needed my attention the most and have not yet
given your work the consideration I wanted to. I hope in
due time to become fully informed as to the what [sic] I
can best do to promote the best interest of the work.””!’
Only a few years after Dodson replaced Stubbs as
head of the Experiment Stations, there were hints of
financial problems that were affecting the Survey work
and publications:
“I [Dodson] approve of your anxiety to get the Louisiana
work before geologists of the country, and especially before
the national department as fully as possible. I have no
special reason to believe that the appropriation for the
work in Louisiana will be discontinued, but it is always a
fight to get appropriations and there is so much politics in
the legislature that things are not always put on their mer-
its, and we must always count on the possibility of having
the appropriations cut off.”’'§
And it seems Harris was, once again, having problems
getting items printed by a governmental agency. This
time it was a matter of having to use a “state printer”
instead of a private print shop:
'7 W.R. Dodson, Director, Agricultural Experiment Stations, Bat-
on Rouge, Louisiana, to G. D. Harris, March 29, 1905. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
'§ W. R. Dodson to G. D. Harris, January 21, 1908. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 69
“T [Dodson] have your letter of the 21st, and note your
suggestion for having the bulletin printed in New Orleans.
I hardly think we could do this. The printing of the ex-
periment station, and of the State Board of Agriculture
was awarded to the state printer by a committee from the
State Board of Agriculture appointed for the purpose of
awarding the contract for printing. . . .
“*.. Possibly by printing 5,000 copies instead of 7,000,
... 1t will be an easier proposition.”’!?
The Bulletin of 1908, Number 8 (Harris et a/., 1909)
was the last of the series Harris and his students pro-
duced, for there was a change in leadership at the state
level and the general funding for the work ceased.
Among the final numbers of the Survey Bulletin was
Harris’ large work on rock salt (Harris, 1908), and later
he continued his work on salt with a paper in Economic
Geology (Harris, 1909).
The published work on salt certainly struck a re-
sponsive chord with his friend Branner, who was then
Vice President of Leland Stanford Junior University:
“T have no hesitation in saying that I regard it [the Eco-
nomic Geology paper] as one of the most valuable and far
reaching contributions that has been made to geology in
this country for many years.
“Since 1885 I have looked high and low for such evi-
dence as you have here brought forward; but it is one thing
to have a theory, and it is quite another to have facts and
a theory too.”’?°
“Your salt bulletin [No. 7, 1908] was duly received and
I thank you very much for it. It is not only good on the
salt of Louisiana, but the best there is now on the general
subject.”?!
One rather interesting map (Plate X XIV) in this 1908
report shows the relationship between the salt domes
and the oil and gas areas of Louisiana and southeastern
Texas, an idea which he continued to develop (Harris,
1909, 1912a, 1912b, 1913, 1915). Also, in this 1908
report, Harris gave what appears to be the first good
description of what he called the “Sabine Peninsula.”
In a later report (Harris, 1910), he called it the “Sabine
Uplift.”” This is one of the major structural features of
northwestern Louisiana and northeastern Texas, and
it has played a major role in various geological theories
such as Powers’ (1920b) “Positive elements in petro-
leum geology”.
Harris certainly exploited his idea about salt domes
during his days as a consultant to oil companies in
'2W. R. Dodson to G. D. Harris, January 25, 1908. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
20 J. C. Branner to Gilbert D. Harris, March 1, 1909. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
21 John C. Branner to Gilbert D. Harris, April 12, 1909. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
Louisiana. Ina report he did for the Pardee Land Com-
pany in 1912, he said:
“*. .. there are breaks in the underlying deposits and through
these artesian saline solutions have arisen, concentrating,
crystallizing, & [sic] pushing back and upadjcent [sic] de-
posits. . .And in Coochie brake [sic] the elevations clearly
of salt origin have .. .”’??
His ideas about the domes resulted in successful ex-
ploration because, as Harris indicated in an article about
salt domes, the Myles Mineral Company,
“... has had the courage to try out the theory and has
discovered by the means a new oil field [Pine Prairie]. The
director writes, ‘I consider this a most remarkable vindi-
cation of a theory originated by you, and we [Myles Min-
eral Company] attribute a large measure of our success
thus far to your advice.’” (Harris, 1912a, p. 546).
No doubt such statements appearing in print did much
to enhance Harris’ reputation as a consultant.
Although Harris was not an active researcher in the
origins of salt domes after about 1915, he did try to
keep abreast of the work of others. Several years later
Harris was apparently not altogether pleased with a
description of his salt dome theory by Sidney Powers
and inquired about it. Powers replied:
“You asked me the reason for certain of my views on salt
domes expressed in my American Journal [of] Science
paper [Powers, 1920a]. The mechanics of salt dome growth
are admittedly unknown to me. But when Rogers pointed
out that enormous volumes of water would have to be
gotten rid of according to your theory I tried to choose the
path of least resistance, and accepted tentatively the Eu-
ropean view. But I do not think the cap rock was raised
or grew with the salt.”’?3
Somewhat later, Harris replied:
‘*“Now, as to the most plausible theories as you have stated
the volcanic and the uplift | have always been at a loss to
know how salt chunks covered unusually qua-qua-versally
[sic] with calcareous thimble-like caps could possibly orig-
inate volcanically. I have made most complete magnetic
surveys around some, especially Weeks Id [sic] [Island] to
see if the usual deflections produced by volcanic phenom-
ena are present, but they are not. As to the usual uplift
theory, there may be no extremely serious objections to it
in a dome devoid of great masses of cavernous, crystalline
capping among the inner belt of domes, but how about
the coastal rep esentatives [sic], where some of the salt
22 Typed copy of Report on the Oil and Gas Prospects of the Pardee
Co.'s Lands near Pine Prairie, La. by G. D. Harris, August 24, 1912;
attached to a carbon copy ofa letter from O. C. Hathaway to “The
Pardee Company, August 27, 1912. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
23 Sidney Powers to Gilbert D. Harris, September 13, 1920. HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY.
70 BULLETIN 350
chunks have been penetrated, have these lost their moor-
ing from deep lying Cretaceous or Permian beds, and have
they on account of lightness in specific gravity been shakeu
[sic] up top as popped kernels of popcorn rise to the top
while the heavier unpopped kernels stay at the bottom of
the popper? Or have they been squirted up in a semi-solid
state from those great depths as our foreign brethern [sic]
suppose stopping strangely enough just wrere [sic] the
squirting is easy, not far beneath the surface? Again, with
all this upward shaking or squirting movement is it not
strange that porous, crystalline, cavernous calcareous mat-
ter without traces of organic remains can come fr m [sic]
no known sedimentary rock directly yet be there on top
of the salt nicely in place in spite of the cavorting of its
salty mount?
‘Does not the fact that these secondary crystalline mass-
es are associated with geosynclines as you say rather sug-
gest artesin [sic] action than volcanic or ordinary uplifting?
‘However, there is lots to be learned about these domes
yet. Let others if they will, find more and describe them
as you have done and the [sic] we will trust future results.
I [sic] a hundred years or so I hope some one [sic] will re-
determine the precise bench-marks I established some ten
years ago to determine if differential uplifting was going
on there now.”’*4
Two years before Harris’ death and almost 50 years
after he had done his work on salt domes, the American
Association of Petroleum Geologists was producing a
new volume on salt domes, and wanted to include an
“appreciative biography” in recognition of his pio-
neering work with these features. Walter Hopper’, a
former student who had worked with Harris in Loui-
siana in 1908, contacted him about the volume:
“T assure you that my work with you as a student and later
in Louisiana is very clear in my mind.
“T realize that Iam not writing a memorial. This makes
it necessary, or at least advisable that I be more careful in
what I say. You may read my story.” [Emphasis in the
original. ]?°
By 1909, Dodson was not very optimistic about fi-
nancial the health of the Survey:
“T regret very much that the work that has been done is
not more fully appreciated by some of those who hold the
purse strings. The chairman of the appropriation com-
mittee has no appreciation for scientific work of any kind,
and it is not his fault that the appropriation for other
scientific work was not cut off... .
*4 Unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris to Sidney Powers,
November 2, 1920. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
25 Walter E. Hopper (A.B. °08; M.A. °10) was consulting geologist
in Tulsa, Oklahoma at the time of the correspondence.
26 Walter E. Hopper to Gilbert D. Harris, July 1, 1950. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY. However, for unknown reasons, the volume was never
published. The A.P.P.G. library has no record of it.
“IT have not been able yet to get any money from the
State Treasurer on our appropriation, but I feel confident
that when the Board of Liquidation meets that they will
make arrangements for filling the appropriation, and we
will be able to pay our bills.”’?’
But the funds were not forthcoming and Harris’ Geo-
logical Survey of Louisiana came to a close.
At no time was Harris’ organization really well fund-
ed. According to Pope (1988), the maximum appro-
priation seldom exceeded $2500 per year. In a letter?®
in 1905, Harris told H. S. Williams that Louisiana gave
him $5000 to spend as he saw fit. That must have been
a well funded year, or perhaps Harris inflated the facts
to impress Williams. In the “*Prefatory Remarks” of
his very first report in 1899, Harris sang a different
song and bemoaned the lack of adequate financial sup-
port at that time:
“The prosecution of a well organized geological survey
demands an expenditure of funds far in excess of those
now at our command. This the reader is requested to
constantly bear in mind.” (Harris and Veatch, 1899, p. 7).
Yet, financial support notwithstanding, Harris and his
assistants made quite a contribution. Seventy-nine years
after the close of this phase of the state survey work,
this is how the Harris years were remembered; note
the quotation from the first Harris report:
**.. [Much] extremely valuable topographic and carto-
graphic work was accomplished, .. .
“The work of Harris was amazingly accurate especially
under conditions of the times. His efforts, and those of his
assistants, contributed not only significantly to the geo-
logical knowledge, but greatly to the development of the
natural resources of the state. The attitude of these tireless
and astute workers is best expressed in the letter of trans-
mission of the 1899 report in which the Director of the
Experiment Station, William C. Stubbs said of Harris and
Veatch, ‘These two gentlemen have persistently followed
their work through freezes and sunshine, over intolerable
roads, impelled by an enthusiasm known only to lovers
of science.’ Conversely, credit should be given for the sup-
port rendered by the Director of the Experiment Station.
Harris in his letter of transmittal to Dr. Stubbs in the
Report of 1905 stated, *. . . you have cheerfully. promptly,
knowingly expedited all matters relating to our State Sur-
vey with no compensation whatever save the knowledge
of seeing the right thing done at the right time’” (Pope,
1988, p. 190-191).
27 W. R. Dodson to Gilbert D. Harris, February 1, 1909. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
28 G. D. Harris to H. S. Williams, April 12, 1905. H. S. Williams
Papers, 14/15/728, Geological Correspondence Box, RMC-KL, Cor-
nell.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE ql
Pope (1988) gave no reason for the closing of the Sur-
vey in 1909; other than the unspoken and obvious one,
that the legislature did not appropriate any more mon-
ey. It was not until 1914 that the Survey was re-estab-
lished as the Louisiana Soil and Geological Survey.
Thus closed one aspect of Harris’ commercial work,
which, in turn, led to the opening of a new challenge
for him as a geological consultant to various oil com-
panies.
CHAPTER 6. CONSULTANT
The commercial aspects of geology and the work of
academic geologists as professional consultants are of-
ten overlooked by historians of the subject, and yet
commercial interests have been a driving force in the
development of most geological surveys, on both sides
of the Atlantic (Tweedale, 1991). While Harris was
certainly not the first academic geologist to seek work
in the commercial sector, he was very much at the
forefront of the development of the oil industry in
Louisiana in the early years of the Twentieth Century,
and as it was such an important part of his life, that
activity deserves more than a passing mention. The
fact that Harris did most of his consulting by mail and
by telegram makes this aspect of his career even more
interesting. As these various letters between Harris and
his clients are read, wonderful images come to mind
of drillers sitting on the edge of the drill rig down in
some Louisiana swamp with the crew playing cards,
all waiting for the mail to arrive with Harris’ instruc-
tions.
Exactly when Harris made the transition into the
field of geological consulting is not known with any
certainty, but from existing letters, it appears that con-
sulting opportunities began to present themselves while
he was serving as Geologist in Charge for the State of
Louisiana. Information on a small printed sheet, prob-
ably prepared and printed by Harris and entitled
“Stratigraphic Geology and Paleontology at Cornell,”
lists the following: “1916-1920 Louisiana professional
geological work.’! But there is evidence that he was
involved with consulting activities long before 1916.
It is difficult, however, to tell if the work he was doing,
much of it by mail, was part of his Survey duties, or
whether he was involved in private ventures.
Certainly as the oil industry began expanding with
great rapidity during the first decade of the Century,
there was increased pressure to supply geological in-
formation and assistance, perhaps with requests for
more detailed information and quicker access than the
published material would provide. Here is an example
' Undated printed page. Pen corrections on it suggest a date of
about 1945; its purpose is unknown. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
of one of the many letters requesting assistance which
were sent to William Stubbs, Director of the Experi-
ment Stations, the parent agency for the Louisiana Sur-
vey:
““We have some very fine oil indications near Shreveport
and I trust you [William Stubbs] will send one of your
government geologists up here. I can send a jar of stuff
taken from the top of the water here if it will be of any
SELVICe seen
In 1905, four years before the demise of the Louisiana
Survey, Harris received this letter from J. Numa Jordy
in New Orleans:
“T have your letter of the 27th. You have evidently mis-
understood what we want in this matter. We are forming
a stock company here to develop that Quarry and we want
to know its commercial value as a Marble, for Lime or for
any other purpose to which it may be put. Now, you are
evidently very familiar with this property, and if you will
get up a handsome report and make it as strong as your
conscience will permit without overrating it, we will give
you $1000 in the stock of the Company.
‘*‘Please do this at once, and ascertain, if you please the
other information that we are anxious to put in our pro-
spectus, 1, e, [sic] as to whether some of this marble was
sent by the State of Louisiana to form a part of the Wash-
ington Monument, in the meanwhile tho’ [s/c] send the
report we want, as we are waiting on it... .
“State in your report that you have made a visit to this
property and know all about it. Sign it officially.’
There is no record as to whether the report was sent;
probably not, given the tone of the letter, but it does
illustrate the kind of situations that were available to
him during these early days of the oil boom in Loui-
siana and Texas. Even Stubbs seemed to be impressed
with the rising interest:
“T enclose you quite a number of letters lately received
[sic]. Some of them may be of use to you, while others
? Henry Shepherd to William Stubbs, January 3, 1903. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
3J. Numa Jordy to G. D. Harris, October 31, 1905. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
72 BULLETIN 350
may be worthless. I send them as a proof of the widespread
interest manifested in the work now going on in Louisi-
ana.””*
Even before the Survey closed Harris was corre-
sponding with an I. N. Knapp, who appears to have
been an independent operator, originally in Louisiana,
and later in Philadelphia. There are a series of letters
from Knapp to Harris starting in April of 1907 and
continuing through 1910. No company name Is given
on the letterhead, just his name, I. N. Knapp. In some
letters, Knapp described the fossils he was able to save
from the well cuttings and said that he had them all
labeled, waiting for Harris to stop by and see them.
From this it seems that Harris was making visits to
well sites:
““My [Knapp] office man at Morgan City is Mr. J. F. Allen
and you can Phone [sic] or wire him regarding going down
to the well and he will have a boat ready for you on arrival
of the train. The porter from the Gostellos Hotel meets
all trains ask him [about the boat].””°
Samples were sent to Harris in bottles, small boxes,
and even folded in the letters themselves:
“Please find enclosed some fossils for determination. I
would be glad to know their geological horizon.”
Harris and Knapp had more in common than just their
mutual interest in the oil business:
“‘T have two sons now at Cornell, Arthur Knapp, M.E. 07,
Instructor in steam engineering [and] Walter Knapp stu-
dent in the E. E. course. I was about | 1/2 years at Cornell
with class of ’75.””’
By 1915, Knapp’s son, Arthur, worked on one of the
first rotary drill rigs used in Russia.§
When the Survey ceased operations in 1909, Harris
would have needed additional income to replace what
he had been receiving as Geologist-in-Charge. Also, it
was at this time that Harris ceased operations with the
large geologic field camp held in the Helderbergs, and
reverted back to less elaborate summer excursions with
very few students. It is difficult to know whether a
connection exists between the two events, but the tim-
4 W.C. Stubbs to G. D. Harris, January 12, 1903. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
5]. N. Knapp to G. D. Harris, August 22, 1907. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
© 1.N. Knapp to G. D. Harris, September 27, 1907. HA-PRI, Ith-
aca, NY.
7]. N. Knapp to G. D. Harris, September 27, 1907, p. 7. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
8 Vivien L. Knapp (Mrs. Arthur Knapp) to Gilbert D. Harris,
December 12, 1915. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
ing certainly suggests one. By having the smaller sum-
mer activities, Harris would have had more time to
devote to consulting.
The following letter is typical of the correspondence
which was reaching Harris from Louisiana. Although
not addressed to him, it was probably forwarded by
Dodson, who had succeeded Stubbs as Director of the
Experiment Stations:
“With a view of trying, by boring, excavating etc., in the
earth to ascertain whether in our part of the country there’s
minerals and deposits to justify the presence and aid of
‘A 1’ geologist, we thought it would be advisable to confer
with you-relative to such an undertaking-feeling that you
have the interest in and the development for such at
heart.... Others have succeeded in such undertakings,
and who knows what might happen in old Union Parish?’”?
And as he explored the world of consulting, Harris did
not overlook his own home state: “I have tried to
obtain the information you asked me for about gas
wells about Buffalo . . .”"!°; there followed a three-page
(albeit small ones) description of various wells and
their bearing strata.
By June of 1909, it appears that Harris was well and
truly in the oil consulting business in Louisiana, for
this date marked the beginning of a large volume of
letters from ‘‘The Myles Mineral Company, F. F.
Myles!', President, MINERAL LANDS SCIENTIFI-
CALLY EXPERTED, BOUGHT, LEASED AND DE-
VELOPED.” At the left side of the Myles letterhead
is a drawing of a wooden oil drilling tower with black
liquid gushing out the top. The first of the letters from
The Myles Mineral Company begin in 1909, but from
the tone of the nine letters written between June and
December that still exist from that year, it appears
Harris had been working for the company prior to
June, 1909, for the first letter reads as though it was
part of an ongoing correspondence. There are 22 sur-
viving letters from 1910; and similar numbers through
1915 at which point the record stops. Many letters had
drilling reports enclosed with them informing Harris
° J. M. Anderson to J. G. Lee, February 3, 1909. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
10 Catharine M. Allen to G. D. Harris, June 22, 1909. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
\| Frederick F. Miles was a figure in the business world of New
Orleans for many years and before venturing into the oil business,
he began the salt industry in Louisiana with his mines on Weeks
Island. He was a General in the Louisiana State Militia and was
appointed as Quartermaster-General of the militia by the governor.
He died in New Orleans July 1, 1915 at age 64. The Times-Picayune,
page 4, July 2, 1915. The Historic New Orleans Collection, 533
Royal Street, New Orleans, LA.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 73
what depth had been reached and a description of the
material found at the various depths. A large part of
the surviving record consists of nothing but the drilling
reports with no accompanying letter.!*
Although Harris’ replies by mail and telegram with
his recommendations are unknown, from reading the
Myles side of the correspondence, it seems that he was
actually advising the company almost on a daily or at
least weekly basis. When he was not teaching, Harris
would travel South for actual field examination and to
meet with his employers. This was possible after the
demise of the Louisiana Survey because Harris con-
tinued on a half-time appointment at Cornell, with his
teaching duties confined to rather reduced summer field
activities and the fall term:
“We are ready for the fourth attempt, and want you to
locate the well; so, upon receipt of this if you are in position
to do so, please wire me here when we may expect you.”’?
‘‘When you have examined these shells, please advise me
here by return of mail, what you think of them; and if you
think them good indication please wire me here collect, as
we are getting a little discouraged with this hole.” [Em-
phasis in the original.]'*
The Myles Mineral Company Secretary, H. M. Jour-
nee, appears to have been an interesting person. From
his letters he seems to have been quite well educated,
if not formally; and he certainly had given considerable
thought as to how and where oil might be found, es-
pecially where the structural domes were concerned:
“Since last hearing from you, I have been pondering a
good deal on your intimation that you now think it possible
that we have a considerable uplift in our section, — possibly
extending several miles to the Northward, I take it.
“Now, this has always been my idea, in a vague sort of
way, and we were influenced by it in taking leases to the
northward. As you will remember, we have no leases to
the southward, except immediately adjoining us.
“We are therefore extremely anxious to get your views
after an examination of the shells sent you; for, should you
feel confident of an uplift of considerable proportions, we
would take several thousand acres more of leases.””!°
‘2 As I was taking these letters out of the envelopes during the
summer of 1994, I often found small gravel samples folded inside
the letter and a stream of particles would fall out as the page was
unfolded.
13H. M. Journee, Secretary, The Myles Mineral Company to G.
D. Harris, December 10, 1909. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
14H. M. Journee to G. D. Harris, February 15, 1910. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
15H. M. Journee to G. D. Harris, March 10, 1910. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
Earlier he had asked Harris for geologic literature on
the eastern oil and gas fields, as reading them could,
**_. serve the purpose of my enlightenment.”’!®
Harris must have had some success with his rec-
ommendations, for Journee wrote:
“T note your [Harris] progress as a promoter and beg to
offer my humble congratulations. There are some rocks,
and shells, and such as that in the path of a geologist; but
the real rocky roads, and the real shell games, lie in the
path of the promoter.””!’
From his letters it appears that Journee had some geo-
logic knowledge, or at least he had mastered some of
the terminology:
“Your letter of the 20th inst. has been forwarded here
[Pine Prairie, Louisiana], and has been read with great
interest. — particularly as I had been hoping that these shells
would show us to be in the Cretaceous.”!®
And another time:
“At the same time I am enclosing a perfect shell; so small
as to be apparently insignificant, but in which you may
find some interest. It was found in the cuttings from the
2050 ft. level; and I thought it might possibly be ‘Fusus
harrisi. ”!°
Given that Harris was actually on site only a few weeks
each year, he had to use local people, such as Journee,
to do his field work:
“T too am much interested in knowing the relative location,
as touching the dome formation, of the Anse La Boutte
and Vinton wells; and it is my intention very shortly to
go over to both places and make a careful examination,
when it will afford me much pleasure to give you such
information as my capacity may justify.”’°
Journee certainly had a sense of humor, which might
have been a useful trait in his business:
‘**Herewith I enclose as of possible interest, two specimens
of what I took to be petrified wood. Can it be that we have
come to the ‘Stone Age.’ Must have been rocky times,
those.”’?!
16H. M. Journee to G. D. Harris, July 30, 1909. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
17H. M. Journee to G. D. Harris, January 18, 1910 HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
18H. M. Journee to G. D. Harris, February 25, 1910 HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
19 H. M. Journee to G. D. Harris, June 12, 1910 HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
20H. M. Journee to G. D. Harris, October 12, 1910 HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
21H. M. Journee to G. D. Harris, May 12, 1910 HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
74 BULLETIN 350
Harris’ ideas on the relationship between salt domes
and the presence of oil proved worthwhile, but on oc-
casion he apparently did not respond quickly enough
to Journee’s letters:
“T have just returned from Vinton, and what I saw there
‘looked mighty good to me.’ All of the producing wells of
any size are right alongside [sic] the salt dome, —one could
stand on the dome and throw a biscuit (one of the kind
we had at Eunice) across the best part of the field. While
prospecting is going on very widely, the proven field is
describing a crescent, and will, I believe eventually encircle
the dome. Few, if any, people there, has [sic] any idea of
the dome theory; and there may still be obtained on the
South of the dome land that looks just as good to me at
this time as the proven field. I would take some of it myself,
were it not for the fact that I am convinced that we have
a field of our own, and just as good....
“Any further information you may desire, I will gladly
furnish; but it appears to me I am writing a good deal
lately, and getting mighty few replies.”’**
Harris, it would seem, was not only being paid as a
consultant, but was also offered an opportunity to in-
vest in the wells:
**Herewith I am handing you samples from about 1 10 feet,
in the present well, #7. Please let me know whether or not
they look good to you, as we intend to bring a gusher in
here soon, and want you committed in advance.’’?#
While Harris’ idea about salt domes and oil seemed
to be a good one, according to this letter, his advice
was not 100% correct all the time. Journee was ready,
however, with a fair geological reason to explain the
anomaly:
*‘Herewith I am handing you a clipping, showing that a
well [at Pine Prairie] has been brought in at Vinton, after
passing through 1,000 feet of rock. This would seem to
upset your theory that little oil is to be found beneath
[that] much rock, but, if my idea as to the location of this
well is correct, it is right at the edge of the salt mass, and
the oil has evidently penetrated a cavity in the rock from
the side.”’*4
Apparently Harris’ lack of communication in 1910
can be traced to the building of his house at 126 Kelvin
Place:
“Am glad to learn that the new home will soon be com-
pleted, and I trust that, when once you have a place to
live, you will be like most other people who build houses,
22H. M. Journee to G. D. Harris, February 8, 1911. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
23H. M. Journee to G. D. Harris, March 13, 1911. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
24H. M. Journee to G. D. Harris, April 6, 1911. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
prepared to travel about; and that you will be with us more
than of recent days.”’?°
But all was not going well at the well, so to speak:
“The well is down to 1269 feet, in standstone [sic], satu-
rated with oil, and showing much gas, and much ‘smell.’
If we don’t get it this time, then you are discredited as a
prophet. In other words, by one fell swoop, we will lose
our phophet [sic] and our profits too. However, let us hope
that this double disaster will not befall us.”’*¢
The well was a disaster, but for other reasons:
“T have no good news for you. It looks that we are to lose
the present well. At 1687 feet, and while drilling, a lot of
rock fell in, jammed the drill stem, and they [the drill
stem] pulled in two in trying to get out. We are still working
on the hole, but have little hope to save it... .
““We now want you advoce [sic], as to whether to drill
alongside this hole, or try another part of the field.’’?’
The Myles Mineral Company had better luck with well
# 2, and they struck oil at 306 feet.*® It is interesting
to note that almost all of the letters from Journee begin,
‘‘Dear Doctor”’, and Harris apparently did not correct
him as to his proper academic title.
The Myles Company had other successes:
“IT know you will be gratified to learn that we brought in
a gusher on yesterday. Just what it will finally yield we
cannot determine exactly, as we did not let it run to its
full capacity, and now have it capped. However it flowed
pure oil in a solid 4 inch stream, more than 60 feet high,
and was constantly increasing when we shut it off.
“I consider this a most remarkable vindication of a the-
ory originated by you, and we attribute a large measure of
our success thus far to your advice.”’”°
Apparently Harris had a letter in the mail which crossed
Journee’s in which he was saying they would have to
drill deeper:
“Your letter of the 6th is received, and for once I find you
a bad prophet, as we have already brought in a big well
at a much less depth than you predict.
“We are now arranging for tankage, and in about two
weeks we expect to start it flowing. As you are the father
of this field, it would be most appropriate that you should
25 H. M. Journee to G. D. Harris, April 14, 1911. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
26 H. M. Journee to G. D. Harris, April 29, 1911. HA-PRI, Ith-
aca,NY.
27 H. M. Journee to G. D. Harris, July 10, 1911. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
INS
28 Hand-written PS on letter from H. M. Journee to G. D. Harris,
November 28, 1911. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
2> H. M. Journee to G. D. Harris, February 5, 1912. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 75
be present at the christening. Can’t you get down about
that time?’”*°
Harris seems also to have had a head for business
as well as for siting of the wells:
“Your idea as to sell outstanding leases is quite in accord
with our own, except for the fact that I believe there is a
series of domes in this section. . . .
‘‘While we don’t wish to become too ambitious on ac-
count of slight success. The demonstration of your theory
has been so complete in this instance, that we are minded
to take up the prospecting of Belle Isle should we meet
with large success in the present instance, I am in position
to obtain a lease on the entire island, and as you are so
thoroughly familiar with the matter, I would be glad to
have your views regarding the possibilities of oil to be
found there. As I recollect it, you were very enthusiastic
about the island when last I saw you.””?!
Of course there is nothing like a little prosperity to
bring on civilization, and the well was producing oil
at a good rate:
“Since I wrote you last, things have been moving at Pine
Prairie,—we have a lot of new neighbors, plenty of new
saloons, a dance hall or two, and several holes being drilled,
but as yet no wells... .
“After bailing the water out, it came back oil, and is
running better than 1,000 bbls. [a day?], which we are
shipping directly, as we do not intend to close it again.’’**
In an earlier letter, Journee said that oil from the
Caddo Field was selling for $.60/ barrel.*? Then as-
suming the yield figure quoted is barrels/day, that one
well would create a gross income of about $600.00 per
day. To help put this figure in perspective, Harris’
salary at Cornell University, if he had worked full-
time, would have been about $3,000 per year, or $250/
month. Thus, the gross income from that one well in
one day was equal to more than twice Harris’ monthly
salary.
Journee continued to express his support for Harris
and the relationship between the presence of oil and
the salt domes:
‘‘All indications bear our [sic] your views that the oil will
lie immediately adjoining the salt, and the test will now
be to locate the contour of the salt dome.’’**
30H. M. Journee to G. D. Harris, February 10, 1912. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
31H. M. Journee to G. D. Harris, February 21, 1912. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
>? H. M. Journee to G. D. Harris, April 12, 1912. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
33H. M. Journee to G. D. Harris, March 23, 1912. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
34H. M. Journee to G. D. Harris, April 29, 1912. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
While Journee and Harris were corresponding about
the wells owned by The Myles Mineral Company, Har-
ris was receiving letters from W. D. Cheny* in Shreve-
port, Louisiana, and consulting with him on a project
at the same time. Cheny enclosed land maps and well
logs on wells drilled by the Cudahy Oil Company:*°
“Tam enclosing you a map and a log of the well drilled
by the Cudahy Oil Co. on the lease I made them, and I
have lately acquired the well and the surrender of the
leasesee
““... lam sending you under separate cover some samples
of the rock, shells and sand, . . .”’>”
In 1913, there was yet another company joining Har-
ris’ “‘stable’’, The Pardee Company. This group was
headquartered in Philadelphia, and this connection ap-
parently developed as a result of his work with The
Myles Mineral Company in the Pine Prairie area. Har-
ris did some preliminary work for The Pardee Com-
pany in late 19123*, and there must have been an ex-
change of information between the two organizations
as Journee knew Harris had some connection with The
Pardee Company:
“Am in receipt of a letter from The Pardee Company,
stating that they have abandoned the idea of drilling at
Pine Prairie, but they make no explanation whatever. In
view of the many courtesies which I have extended these
people, and the personal trouble and inconvenience I have
been put to in their behalf, the letter is not at all what I
should have expected. Can you give me, confidentially,
any information as to the sudden change of front of Mr.
Pardee?’’*°
Harris must have known nothing about the Pine Prairie
project, or chose not to say anything:
“Yours of the 12th is received, and I note that the Pardee
people have not taken you into their confidence as to the
cause of their delay. I was very much surprised at their
sudden change of attitude and the brusque manner in which
they announced it to me. However it is evident they have
some plans which they desire to conceal, and as my interest
35 No information is known about W. D. Cheny, but apparently
he was no relation to Monroe G. Cheney (Cornell B.S. *16).
36 W. D. Cheny to G. D. Harris, November 29, 1911, April 20,
1912, and one undated letter missing page 1, but the information in
it appears to be about the same well as the April letter and written
near the April, 1912 date. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
37 W. D. Cheny to G. D. Harris, April 29, 1912. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
38 Copy of a report prepared by Harris for The Pardee Company,
August 12, 1912. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
3° H. M. Journee to Gilbert D. Harris, February 8, 1913. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
76 BULLETIN 350
is largely friendly and my efforts entirely gratis, I shall not
trouble them further.’’*°
But apparently Pardee was still in communication with
Journee:
“Just received a telegram, requesting that I meet Mr. Par-
dee in New Orleans tomorrow, and will advise you as to
the outcome. Verily the Yankee commercial mind, like
Providence, ‘moves in a mysterious way its wonders to
perform’ ’**!
Journee apparently was looking after Harris’ interest
as a consultant, as well as his own interests; note the
use of the word ‘‘us”:
“Today I had a conversation with Mr. Wexler, Vice-Pres-
ident of the Largest [sic] bank here, and he states that he
wants us to go to Honduras this Summer [sic], and he
requested that I write and ask whether or not you can go.
Your compensation would be $500.00 per month and ex-
penses, and the trip would be a most interesting one. Please
let me hear from you, and if you can arrange to go, I will
make definite arrangements.”’*?
But Honduras was too much even for Harris to un-
dertake at that time:
“... [note your plans for work during the coming year;
and upon further consideration I quite agree with you that
it would be well to devote whatever time you can spare
this summer to Louisiana work, and defer the Honduras
trip until next winter. I will immediately take this matter
up with Mr. Wexler and ascertain whether or not this will
meet with his views.’’*?
Harris replied to Journee agreeing with the postpone-
ment, but he certainly wanted to keep the project alive,
if possible:
“T think it is quite proper to let the Honduras proposition
rest Over until next winter if it will keep. In fact I am
writing this particularly to let you know that this so far as
I am concerned will be possible for next winter, because
I have already made arrangements with the Trustees to
allow me the same leave of absence the coming winter as
I had during the past, namely from about December 22nd
to February 6th. This will give us ample opportunity for
investigating any equatorial proposition.’’**4
40H. M. Journee to Gilbert D. Harris, February 25, 1913. HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY.
4! H. M. Journee to Gilbert D. Harris, March 12, 1913. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
“2H. M. Journee to Gilbert D. Harris, March 17, 1913. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
43H. M. Journee to Gilbert D. Harris, March 28, 1913. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
** Unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris to H. M. Journee,
April 7, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
The monthly salary quoted by Journee apparently was
Harris’ standard rate and, no doubt, one of the reasons
why Harris was drawn to this work.
There was no further explanation from Journee as
to why Mr. Pardee wanted to meet with him, but Par-
dee may have wanted to ask him about Harris’ work
as a geologist, for by May, 1913, The Pardee Company
was back in touch with Harris:
“Tam advised by my son Ario Pardee that you are willing
to continue to serve my Company, or myself, or both, as
heretofore, looking over the lands of The Pardee Com-
pany, to advise where to search for Gas, Oil, or Salt, and,
in addition, to advise as to additional purchases of lands
where in your opinion these minerals or elements may be
found, and on the terms hitherto paid you, — Five Hundred
Dollars per month and your expenses. In addition, we are
to pay for the necessary surveyors, etc., to aid you, and
also their expenses.
““You are to spend two months on this work the coming
summer and one month next winter.
“In addition to your salary and expenses, we are to give
you a five percent interest in the lands purchased in the
territory where you think a new stratum oil field, similar
to the Caddo field, may be found.’’**
As this offer came when his maximum annual salary
at Cornell was only $250 per month, needless to say,
Harris accepted almost immediately:
““Herewith I am returning some clippings from the Shreve-
port Times sent to me by your Mr. Hodge... .
“As regards your personal letter of May 2nd, the con-
ditions you mention are entirely satisfactory to me, and I
shall take great pleasure in working out the stratigraphy
of the east portion of the Sabine uplift. I really believe
herein is the secret of future development that is worthy
of serious consideration’’*°
Pardee was quite happy that Harris had accepted the
terms:
“TI need not say I am pleased that the conditions named
in my letter to you of May 2nd are entirely satisfactory to
you and that you will be prepared to go to Louisiana some-
time in July.’’*’
At this point it is necessary to note that now Harris
was working for The Pardee Company (Philadelphia),
Mr. C. Pardee, President, and for The Myles Mineral
Company (New Orleans), Mr. H. M. Journee, Secre-
tary, both at the same time. Also, the officials of each
45 C. Pardee, President, Pardee Land Company, to G. D. Harris,
May 2, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
46 Unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris to C. Pardee, May 7,
1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
47 C, Pardee to Gilbert D. Harris, May 12, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE Va
companies appear to have known of his affiliation with
the other company, for Harris was open with Journee
that he was now working for another company:
**T shall be down in Louisiana further to the north however,
for the Pardee people next summer, and doubtless shall
be through by Pine Prairie sometime before the University
opens in the fall.’’*8
Apparently Harris’ reputation was spreading; the fol-
lowing is another example of many such letters from
this time period requesting his services, this one from
the ‘‘Bank of Boyce, Boyce, Louisiana”:
“We understand you have been doing some geoligist [sic]
work for the Pine Prairie Oil Co, also for S, [sic] Gumble
of New Orleans. We want some work of this kind in Rap-
ides Parish, near Boyce. Are you in a position to do any
thing [sic] of this kind at the presant [s/c] time, and if so,
what are your usual terms, and what machinery would be
necessary for the initial work, if any.’’*”
And another, this time with a letterhead, ““Fox-Renaud
Grocer Company, Limited; Pure Food Grocers” in
Monroe, Louisiana, also requesting Harris’ help:
‘‘Associates and self have in contemplation drilling for oil
or gas in this parish. Could we secure your services or
some other competent person to locate the place to drill,
ifin your opinion, indications are such as to justify sinking
a well and what would you charge for the services.” [sic]°°
This time Harris declined, but he did offer some free
advice:
“Replying to your favor of the 15th, I must say that from
my experience in the state of Louisiana, I could not rec-
ommend the expenditure of money drilling for oil in north-
east central Louisiana, or in the parishes immediately
around Monroe. . . . Again, since I shall be occupied most
busily all summer in oil investigation in other parts of the
state where I have more confidence in the locations, I could
not find time to spend with you as suggested in your let-
tere:
It was at this time that the Hodge character, men-
tioned in a previous letter, made a major entrance into
Harris’ consulting activities. This episode also dem-
onstrates that the latter part of the Twentieth Century
does not have a monopoly on unscrupulous behavior.
48 Unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris to H. M. Journee, May
8, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
49 William Jonlaw to G. D. Harris, January 4, 1913. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
5° Charles Schultz to Gilbert D. Harris, May 10, 1913. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
5! Unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris to Charles Schulz, May
19, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
Based on a letter from Pardee to Harris May 17, 1913,
there was some trouble brewing. Pardee wrote:
“Mr. Hathaway writes me under date of 5/22/13:
‘There has been some parties from your territory that is
[sic] trying to buy some land in the immediate sections
where we have been trying to buy, and I am unable to
ascertain how these people got this information, unless the
same came from your office. However, I learned yesterday
that Mr. Thos. [sic] L. Hodge had been in Shreveport and
also in New Orleans while I was in Tennessee. This might
account for the interference.’
“T have written Mr. Hathaway to know exactly where
efforts had thus been made to secure lands in the territory
where you have already made, or propose making, ex-
aminations and reports in my interest.
“I dismissed Mr. Hodge April 30, 1913, since which
time he made a visit to Louisiana, reported by Mr. Hath-
away.
“TI have thought it best to advise you of Mr. Hodge’s
dismissal and of his reported efforts to buy lands in Lou-
isiana in what I might term my territory and in which you
are to have an interest, as I fear he has been trying to get
lands in what you think may prove a possible second Cad-
do field®?.”” [Emphasis in the original.]°?
A few months prior to this, in March, Hodge had re-
turned a page from Harris’ report which described those
lands.
Harris shared his thoughts on the situation with
Journee:
“Tam informed from Mr. Pardee of Philadelphia that Mr.
Hodge is no longer with the Pardee Company and the
intimation is given me that Mr. Hodge has been in Lou-
isiana apparently taking advantage of the geological knowl-
edge gained through association with me while in the Par-
dee employ. All of this I hope is in some way due to some
slight misunderstanding, for I do not wish to consider Mr.
Hodge a traitor, but I thought it my duty to give you this
pointer, which you may be on your guard as to what state-
ments Mr. Hodge may make to you if he is that character
of a person seemingly indicated by what little I have re-
ceived from the Pardee people of late. The only suspicion
I have felt regarding Mr. Hodge was (1) as I have already
written you, I see no necessity whatever of his taking time
and expense to go to Louisiana to help write my report
for I had promised to stop in Philadelphia and tell the
Pardee people all I knew; (2) I became slightly suspicious
on account of the over religiousness shown ostentatiously,
or without cause in many instances by Mr. Hodge. I always
52 The Caddo oil field was first developed about 1904 (Harris et
al., 1909). Production peaked in 1913, and by January 1, 1920, the
Caddo Field had produced over 81 million barrels of oil. On March
10, 1920 it was still producing over 17,000 barrels per day (Powers,
1920b).
53 C. Pardee to Gilbert D. Harris, May 27, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
78 BULLETIN 350
feel very suspicious of a person who takes particular pains
to state that he is very, very religious, and especially if he
has serious fears of my immortal soul. After what has
happened and the very crooked morality displayed, if such
it really turns out to be, I feel almost inclined to write to
Mr. Hodge and ask how about his own immortal soul.””**
Apparently, Hathaway (in New Orleans), Harris (in
Ithaca), and Pardee (in Philadelphia) did not move
quickly enough, for only a few days later, Harris wrote
to Pardee:
“T think Mr. Hodge has made a serious mistake in any
way you may consider it, for first, it seems to me [Harris]
that upon his [Hodge] representation of what seems to be
a good thing to any company in Shreveport, the question
will immediately be raised as to what authority he bases
his judgement upon, and if he declines to tell they will
immediately suspect something is wrong, and in case he
should tell said companies will more than apt to write to
me some inquiries regarding the matter, and I cannot help
thinking aside from the moral aspect of the matter, he has
made a most grievous mistake. What could have lead [sic]
him to such miserable actions, I for one cannot imagine.””**
Harris then received the following:
“Your letter of 2nd inst. has been received and I will write
Mr. Hathaway to-day [sic] to better describe the 4040 acres
referred to in his letter May 28th and the 1000 acres re-
ferred to in his letter to me of 5/22/13, copies of which I
enclose you [sic].
“Mr. Hathaway wired me yesterday from New Orleans
that the scamp Hodge and friends had closed for the 4000
acres (which I believe to be the 4040 acres).”’*°
To further complicate this situation, there seems to
have been some financial connection between the two
companies, at least on some of the drilling prospects.
Here is part of a letter from Journee, Secretary of The
Myles Mineral Company:
“The Pardee well is now down more than 2500 feet, and
when I left yesterday, was in water sand with many shells,
so it looks like a dead one to me, and I told Hincy he could
have our interest if he wanted to go deeper.””*’
About two months before Hodge was dismissed by
Pardee, Harris had received a short letter from none
other than Thomas L. Hodge who was returning a page
from one of Harris’ reports. From the closing in the
*4 Unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris to H. M. Journee, May
30, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
°> Unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris to C. Pardee, June 2,
1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
56 C, Pardee to Gilbert D. Harris, June 5, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
57 H. M. Journee to Gilbert D. Harris, January 27, 1914. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
letter, 1t would appear that Hodge and Harris had more
than a passing acquaintance:
“Enclosed is sheet [page] no. 19 of your Report which
must belong to your copy, as our copy and that sent to
Hathaway are complete...
Mrs. Hodge wanted to be remembered when I wrote
again.””°8
Another interesting note is that the page Hodge was
returning just happened to be one that has part of the
description of ““A New Stratum Oil Field’? and men-
tioned:
“Such facts as we now have tend to cause us to believe
that in the extreme south of Bossier and southwest extreme
of Webster Parish a monoclinal structure exists that, in
case oil has been generated in this district of Louisiana,
should produce a duplicate of the Caddo field. . . . Again,
we have determined that on Lake Bistineau nearly along
the Webster-Bienville line it is not the Claiborne Eocene
that appears at the surface but the Sabine, just as in the
Caddo field! [Emphasis in the original.]*°
It was in June that Harris must have written to Jour-
nee about Hodge, for he received this reply:
“Yes; we have Mr. Hodge in our midst, so to speak. He
has been down here twice within the last thirty days, and
is at present in Shreveport. He came to me about two
weeks ago and stated that he wanted to buy some cheap
lands in the Lake Bistineau section, and I turned him over
to Mr. Giddens of Campti, with the understanding that
he (Giddens) and I divide any profit that might be made;
and I understand from him that he has sold Hodge the
4,000 acres immediately adjoining the lake on the west,
in Township 16, Range 10. I don’t know just what Mr.
Hodge has in view, but my impression is that some of his
friends have put up this money and are carrying him for
an interest in the purchase. If Hodge is stealing Pardee
thunder, and Hathaway says that he is, I don’t know just
exactly how he satisfies his conscience; but he tells me that
he attended Sunday school in Shreveport, and urges that
I do so on the occasion of my next visit there. He also
expressed much concern for my spiritual and moral wel-
fare, and I know he thinks that poor Babcock is utterly
damned.”’°°
The saga continued, with Harris very much in-
volved. From Pardee, Harris received a letter dated
June 12th and with it was a copy of a letter to Pardee
58 Thomas L. Hodge to Gilbert D. Harris, March 3, 1913. HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY.
5° Part of an unpublished report, page 19, attached to a letter from
Thomas L. Hodge to Gilbert D. Harris, March 3, 1913. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
60H. M. Journee to Gilbert D. Harris, June 5, 1913. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 79
from Hodge. First is Hodge’s letter to Pardee and then
Pardee’s accompanying letter to Harris:
‘At Pine Prairie yesterday I [Hodge] learned from Mr.
Journee, for the first time, that you had been offered a
portion of the 4000 acres at Lake Bistineau recently pur-
chased for my friends. I think you should know the cir-
cumstances under which I acted.
‘When you [Pardee] dismissed me from your employ,
it was, of course, necessary for me to secure other em-
ployment, and I came to New Orleans to see Mr. Journee
about another matter. He told me of a report which Dr.
Harris made to his friends last year of a possible new oil
field, and said that if I could raise any money he thought
he could get me some cheap land in that neighborhood,
naming a price at which he agreed to buy it. I accepted
the proposition with the understanding that nothing should
be done to embarrass Mr. Hathaway in any negotiations
he might have in hand. I returned to Philadelphia, com-
pleted my arrangements for the purchase of a thousand
acres, and on receipt of telegram from Mr. Journee, went
to Shreveport, where he told me that there were 4000 acres
in the tract, which my people agreed to take. It was not
until the week after I had agreed to take the property for
my friends and arranged for the money, that I learned of
Mr. Hathaway being after it. I was then committed to my
friends. ...
“T felt entirely free to secure the land in that territory
after Mr. Journee had volunteered the information re-
garding Mr. Harris’ report of last year, showing that the
information was not the exclusive property of the Pardee
Company; also from the fact that you said in the office
some time ago that you could not, of course, buy all the
land in that neighborhood, and further, that you said to
Mr. Ario [Pardee, son of C. Pardee], in my hearing, that
you had already secured 3000 acres on the lake... .
“If I have interfered with your plans, it was uninten-
tionally done, and I very much regret it, having supposed,
as stated above, that you had already secured a large hold-
ing in that neighborhood”’*!
Pardee’s assessment of Hodge’s explanation, as he ex-
plained to Harris, was not very high:
“TI am to meet him [Hathaway], and will ascertain what
he knows of Mr. Journee’s reports to Mr. Hodge as to
Hodge’s explanation in second paragraph of his letter, of
your report of last year to Mr. Journee’s friends of a pos-
sible new oil field based on which Hodge claims he bought
the four thousand acres.
“I can only say Hodge was fully aware of your report
made this year in my interest and even marked on one of
our office maps of Louisiana the exact location of the
territory where you thought might be found a second Cad-
do Oil Field and I naturally assumed he was using confi-
dential information gained while in my employ to my
6! Typed copy ofa letter, Thomas L. Hodge to C. Pardee, June 9,
1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
detriment. Hodge’s explanation is one that does not ex-
plain in my opinion. In view of your statements that the
information you gave of this supposed oil field was to be
confidential he should not have gone into this territory
except with your consent and mine.”’°?
But now the plot thickened. Again from Pardee:
“I returned from Bristol, Va., yesterday after an interview
with Mr. Hathaway, who says your Report, which Hodge
mentions in his letter of explanation, was the one you made
Julius Weis & Sons and its contents were made known by
Mr. Journee to both Mr. Hathaway and to Mr. Hodge in
Mr. Journee’s office.
“Mr. Hathaway also states that Hodge had a copy made
of your report to The Pardee Company which he [Hodge]
virtually stole from me and gave it to a Mr. Giddens of
Shreveport while buying through him the 4040 acres on
the west side of Lake Bisteneau [sic].
“T also learned through Mr. Hathaway that The Gulf
Refining Company have recently renewed their oil leases
in the Lake Bisteneau [sic] section and that very little land
remains without leases.”’®?
Pardee enclosed for Harris a copy of his letter to Hodge,
and from the last section it seems Harris shared his
letter from Journee with Pardee, or Pardee had com-
municated with Journee himself. Pardee wrote to
Hodge:
“Your [Hodge] letter of June 9, 1913, has been received,
but your explanation does not explain, as you deliberately
appropriated while in my employ and took from my office
a confidential report made by Dr. Harris for and at the
expense of The Pardee Company, of which I am practically
the owner, used it for your advantage, and furnished a
copy to a Mr. Giddens® (and who I believe still has it)
through whom you bought about four thousand acres of
land in the territory recommended by Dr. Harris.
“As you are noted for your ostentatious concern for the
welfare of the souls of others, let me suggest that the welfare
of your own soul needs especial looking after in view of
this breach of trust by you.”’®
So now it appears that Harris was involved with yet
another company, Julius Weis & Son, at the same time
as the other two major companies. But none of this
62 C. Pardee to Gilbert D. Harris, June 12, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
63 C. Pardee to Gilbert D. Harris, June 18, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
64 T. K. Giddens of Campti, Louisiana. From the surviving letters
it appears that Harris was advising him on geological matters as well
as advising him on where to send his son to study geology, Cornell
or Louisiana State University; Unsigned carbon copies, Gilbert D.
Harris to T. K. Giddens, October 2, 1913; November 17, 1913. HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY.
65 Typed copy of a letter from C. Pardee to Thomas Hodge, June
18, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
80 BULLETIN 350
seemed to change Harris’ relationship with either ma-
jor company as shown with the following letters; first
from Pardee, in what appears to be the finalé to the
Hodge story, and then from Journee:
“I [Pardee] still think it advisable that you [Harris] should
go to Louisiana, as we have plenty of work for you there
for the summer, and I shall expect you to do so and wish
you would report to Mr. Hathaway, to whom I shall send
a copy of this letter.
“Hodge has replied to my letter of the 18th instant [sic],
copy of which I sent you, as follows: —‘I [Hodge] acknowl-
edge that I did wrong in giving to another information
from your office, and I ask your pardon for so doing.’ I
don’t think Hodge shall ever get my pardon, and my only
regret in the matter is that he cannot be punished as he
deserves for his breach of trust.”’°°
Then from Journee
“Should Pardee decide to curtail his investigation this
Summer [sic] I [Journee] can readily arrange for you to
put in your time to advantage, as our mutual friend, Mr.
Learned, of Natchez, is very anxious for you to make a
comprehensive investigation of the section to which we
paid a visit last Summer [sic]; and in any event I expect
to arrange with Mr. Pardee for you to put in at least a
couple of weeks at Natchez.’’°’
Harris’ response to Pardee must have been a positive
one, for Pardee replied:
“Your telegram has been received and I enclose you a
check for Three Hundred dollars, and I infer you will be
likely be prepared to start for Louisiana soon after July
twentieth, ... [to do] the examinations I would like you
to make, which will, of course, include the Lake Bisteneau
[sic] territory, even though Hodge so shamefully and out-
rageously took away about four thousand acres of it... .”’°*
But the Hodge affair would not go away, and it had
made Harris very cautious, for almost four months
later, he wrote to Pardee:
“T am enclosing herewith a letter recently received from
New Orleans, the import of which you will quickly
grasp....
““Were you here, I would be glad to discuss this letter
more in detail, but knowing how matters discussed before
Hodge regarding my own opinion touching matters in Lou-
isiana, and finding the same disclosed and commented
upon freely by people in New Orleans, I think it best to
°6 C. Pardee to Gilbert D. Harris, June 26, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
°7H. M. Journee to Gilbert D. Harris, June 27, 1913. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
°8 C. Pardee to Gilbert D. Harris, June 30, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
say little at the present time, although I do not believe you
will suffer again in the immediate future from men like
Hodge.”’®?
Then another reference to Mr. Hodge was made in
one of Journee’s letters, and it appears that Journee
used the word “friend” in a sarcastic manner:
‘‘About a week ago your friend Mr. Hodge called on me
here and stated that you would be astonished if you knew
how closely he had followed your work during the past
Summer [sic]. He also showed me a number of fossil shells
in rock, taken from some point where you had made an
examination, but he declined to state where. He asked me
to ascertain what the shells were, but I told him I was not
interested.
‘Whether intentionally or not, there is no doubt that
Hodge has circulated so many reports throughout the en-
tire section as to make it very difficult for Pardee to obtain
cheap lands; and if you have found anything which you
think it advisable to buy, I would suggest by all means
that the negotiations be left to a third party, and that party
be unknown in the transaction until such time as the pur-
chases be completed. There is no doubt in my mind what-
ever that the Castor property could have been bought much
cheaper in this manner. The nature of country people is
such that I make practically all of my purchases through
local men, even when buying only for land and timber
values, and in sections generally recognized to be barren
of minerals.’’”°
The relationships with The Myles Mineral Company
and The Pardee Company appear to be typical of the
manner in which Harris went about his consulting,
albeit all the more colorful due to the ““scamp” Mr.
Hodge; namely by mail and telegram, with the occa-
sional site visit. As Harris maintained a connection
with some companies for ten years, the results gained
from following his advice must have been successful.
A few of Harris’ letters with instructions and advice
have survived and these provide a brief look at the
consulting services the companies were getting for their
money. This one was written to Journee:
“Tt certainly is little unlooked-for [sic] to have the flanking
clays extend to the depth of 1200 feet; yet of course we
must expect that there will be projections and inflections
making the dome quite irregular about the periphery.
“This seem to be the first well you have sunk in one of
the inflections or bays in the dome and it naturally suggests
for the well either no oil at all or a far greater and more
satisfactory supply at a greater depth.
6? Unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris to C. Pardee, October
6, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
70 H. M. Journee to Gilbert D. Harris, October 1, 1913. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 81
‘‘Hoping the latter condition will prove to be the correct
OneNaraee
The second one, to Pardee, is more detailed, and with
definite conclusions, but they are presented in an al-
most “‘stream-of-consciousness” writing style that is
difficult to follow:
“T have also indicated on the map that in the central por-
tion of the domw [sic] you may expect to find a large mass
of salt. This will doubtless be flanked by porous limestone
and gypsum. Similar to that we were in in Well No. 1. At
Winfield just outside will be upturned sedimentary de-
posits and in the porous layers of such deposits in this
particular case cretaceous [sic] formations such oil and gas
accumulations as may have been formed in this region will
naturally be found. A well located not too far a way [sic]
from the salt center would naturally penetrate these cre-
taceous [sic] beds in an undisturbed condition, hence they
would doubtless contain no special concentration of hydro
carbons [sic]. Hence the location of Well No. 2 at Castor
as you find it on your map still farther away from the sands
of the dome outside of your main purchases you would
doubtless find between one and two thousand ft. of tertiary
[sic] sands containing a considerable amount of water to
at least a thousand feet or more in depth. This then is the
general scheme of this dome and a well or two of no great
depth about the northern portion should indicate its oil
potential.”’’?
The advice given by a consultant can be only as good
as the information received and at times Harris did
suffer from insufficient information:
“T have received your communication regarding the log
of the well you were engaged in sinking, but I must confess
that one can get only the most meager conception of what
is really being done by a mere statement as a driller sees
it in the field. What we want is actual specimens, partic-
ularly of the life that is generally in the form of sea shells
that are brought up, that we may see whether or not low-
lying formations have been bent up near the surface there
and hence give us reason to suppose that such structures
exist as may lead to the accumulation of Hydro Carbons
[sie] e72
The Myles Mineral Company appeared to have
dropped out of Harris’ consulting stable by about 1915;
at least that is when the surviving letters cease, about
two years before the death of F. F. Myles. Letters and
” Gilbert D. Harris to H. M. Journee, February 17, 1914. HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY
72 Gilbert D. Harris to C. Pardee, October 12, 1914. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
7 Unsigned carbon copy; Gilbert D. Harris to C. Pardee, Decem-
ber 15, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
drilling reports from the Pardee company continued
at least until 192374.
With the amount of consulting available to him and
with companies willing to pay him four times his
monthly, half-time salary from Cornell, it is easy to
understand why Harris was very anxious to have this
half-time arrangement continued, and even made per-
manent. He wrote to J. G. Schurman, Cornell Uni-
versity President:
““A year or two ago you were kind enough to make an
arrangement with me in my work whereby I substituted
certain weels [sic] in the field in the summer for a few
weeks between Christmas recess and the beginning of the
second semester. ... Now I am extremely anxious that
this scheme, which has certainly worked with the greatest
benefit and success to the students and University in gen-
eral, should be continued and I am asking you therefore
if you will kindly refer to the minutes of the action above
referred to and see whether such action were [sic] taken
to mean as a permanent arrangement or for last year only,
2975
It is interesting to note that Harris was apparently un-
der contract to several companies at the same time,
and was, no doubt, charging each of them his full
monthly rate, but none of this was mentioned in his
letter to the Cornell President. Also, the consulting
work seemed to be taking Harris away from other ac-
ademic projects, for he wrote to a Professor Lyford at
Middlebury College:
“As regards a text book on Paleontology for second year
students, I can sympathize with you, because I have felt
the need of exactly what you call for. In fact, I have already
started such a text book to be published by Ginn & Com-
pany, but owing to lack of time the publication will be
delayed for some years yet.”’”°
By early 1915, apparently H. M. Journee was no
longer employed by The Myles Mineral Company, for
he was writing to Harris on a variety of company sta-
tionary, e.g. ““Lake End Store’’, ““Polk-Fenner Com-
pany Real Estate”, and ““The Lampton Realty Com-
pany”; still sending Harris drilling information and
requesting assistance and professional advice. By 1920,
Journee was with “Invincible Oil Company’’, Fort
Worth, Texas. From the letters, it is difficult to deter-
mine just who was paying Harris for his information,
74 Well log from “Henderson Syndicate’s Pardee No. 1”, Decem-
ber 1, 1922 to March 2, 1923. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
75 Gilbert D. Harris to J. G. Schurman, October 16, 1914. HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY.
76 Carbon copy of a letter (unsigned), Gilbert D. Harris to C. A.
Lyford, March 17, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY. No record of such a
manuscript has been found in the Harris Archives.
82 BULLETIN 350
the company or Journee himself, who then passed the
material on to the company.
Over the next four or five years Harris continued to
work for a variety of companies and individuals ex-
amining material from Brazil to the West Indies to
Louisiana and Texas. A partial list includes: “Freeport
Sulphur Company”, Freeport, Texas; “Crystal Ice and
Bottling Company, Ltd.”, Natchitoches, Louisiana;
“Mer Rouge Oil and Gas Company”’, Morehouse Par-
ish, Louisiana; “Ouachita Natural Gas & Oil Com-
pany”, Ouachita, Louisiana; “Progressive Oil & Gas
Company”, Morehouse Parish, Louisiana; ““Chestine
Land Corporation”; “Louisiana Oil Refining Corpo-
ration’, Shreveport; ‘Sinclair Exploration Company”,
“The Texas Company”; ‘Trinidad Petroleum Devel-
opment Company”; and “Standard Oil Company.”
Harris had used students as assistants when he was
directing the Louisiana State Survey and, at least by
1914, his students were involved in the consulting
business as well, following in the footsteps of their
professor:
“Work here is just over for me this term. I am out every
week end [sic], acting as consulting and field geologist for
one of the big oil companies of the state.”’”’
And another student, who was to later accompany Har-
ris on one of the Ecphora trips, Karl Schmidt, wrote:
“As there has been no pause in the drilling here I have
not gone to Winnfield this week, and hence not talked with
Hincy. I may as well send in what meager information I
have from Mr. Hines, and report later on conversation
with Mr. Hincy.”’’®
From Schmidt’s letters, it appears that he was working
for Harris as a field representative in Louisiana while
he was doing other collecting work. In the letters,
Schmidt made several references to collecting snakes,
insects, etc.
Although there is no record that Harris ever made
the Honduras trip mentioned previously, even before
1920, his students were being employed in foreign
ventures”? and companies were contacting Harris about
potential employment and requesting recommenda-
tions:
“T have been authorized by Mr. D. F. McDonald, Geol-
ogist for the Sinclair Central America Oil Corporation, to
77 Irving Perrine (A.B.°07, M.A’11, Ph.D.”12) to Gilbert D. Harris,
January 29, 1914. At this time Perrine was on the faculty of The
University of Oklahoma. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
78 Karl P. Schmidt to Gilbert D. Harris, February 13, 1915. HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY. This letter from Schmidt in Louisiana was written
on Cornell University, Department of Entomology letterhead.
79 A.C. Veatch was writing from England in 1914. A. C. Veatch
to Gilbert D. Harris, November 7, 1914. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
employ a number of geologists for work in the Republic
of Panama. The men are wanted for a period of six months
beginning the latter part of December and of course all
expenses including traveling will be included. I would be
glad to hear of any men who you care to recommend. You,
no doubt, can understand that men with German names
have considerable difficulty in traveling nowadays but this
need not be a serious drawback if they are American
born.”**°
Those who went to foreign lands always seemed to
keep in touch with Harris, for there are many rather
lengthy letters from former students. Axel Olsson was
a frequent correspondent; from Panama he wrote:
‘*A few weeks ago I returned from a ten week trip to the
Pearl Islands and to the interior of Panama. Before that I
had been pretty much on the move with only a few days
in town at a time.
“|. The fossil collections have been shipped to the
Smithsonian but as soon as the war is over I hope to get
busy on them. . . . and of greatest interest a large nautiloid,
probably the Enelimatoceras alrichi Vaughan on the bases
of the very small and incomplete fossil collection made
by MacDonald has correlated this Eocene with the Wilcox,
but don’t you think it is more apt to be your Midway?
“I have spent quite a bit of time in the Darien that part
of Panama which borders Colunbia [sic]. Geographically
it is the most interesting part of the republic [sic], contains
the largest river, is inhabited by black Panamains [s/c] and
by friendly and hostile Indian tribes. With our launch
Bertha, we ascended the Rio Tuyre to Real and Yarisa.
Both are old towns which were founded by the Spaniards
some 400 years ago ... For this river work, use is made
of a long, slender, dug-out canoe with flattened bow and
stern... . One man stands at the bow and another at the
stern and by poling progress is made against the current
and up over rapids. These boatman are wonders at the
work ... In this way one can go far up the small shallow
rivers and over bad looking rapids. Coming down 1s at
first quite exciting but the novelty gradually wears off. A
river may take 3 or 4 days to ascend may take only half
a day or less to descend, especially as often happens during
a flood... . In the Tuyre valley the Cunas are friendly but
in the upper [illegible] are hostile against strangers of any
kind. Their country is closed and very little is known re-
garding it....
“In the Tuyre valley we have a geologic section some
10,000 feet thick of which 3000 feet are highly fossilifer-
ous. ... This will make an interesting subject of study by
itself.
“Yesterday I helped take our launch Bertha through the
Panama Canal. It seemed like our old days on the Barge
Canal and the good old Delaware and Chesapeake. Some
day we must have another Ecphora trip.”*!
80 EP. Dale Condit to Gilbert D. Harris, November 10, 1917. HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY.
81 Axel Olsson to Gilbert D. Harris, October 6, 1918. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 83
Through the influence of A. C. Veatch, his former
student and assistant during the Louisiana Survey days
who was then with Sinclair Oil Company, Harris was
hired by the Trinidad Petroleum Development Com-
pany, Ltd. in 1919. In a memorandum Veatch de-
scribed Harris this way:
“2. In a region where the geology is of the character of
that in Trinidad, it is quite important to have Paleonto-
logical assistance. I [Veatch] wrote [R. H.] Soper to send
the fossils to Professor G. D. Harris of Cornell University,
the greatest authority in the world on American Tertiary
fossils, saying that I was writing Professor Harris asking
what arrangements could be made with him, or through
him, for examining the fossils which Soper would send
him from time to time, and for reporting to Soper on their
stratigraphical significance.
“3. At the same time I wrote Professor Harris asking if
he could accept the position of Consulting Paleontologist
to the Company and asking also if an honorarium of $1,000
per annum*® would meet the case,—the Company to pay,
in addition, all freight and transportation expenses.
“4. I now have a letter from Professor Harris accepting
this basis.’’*?
In the contract Harris received from the Trinidad Pe-
troleum Development Company, in addition to indi-
cating the salary would be $1,000 per year, were two
interesting clauses; very interesting, indeed, in light of
difficulties that developed about seven years later with
Maury. The clauses were:
**3. The specimens sent you will be your personal prop-
erty, except for such sets of representative examples of
characteristic forms as may be of value for a reference
collection for the field geologists working for the Company
in this area.
“4. The Company has no objection to your publishing
descriptions of new fossils found, but you will not be free
to make publication concerning general stratigraphical re-
sults at any time within five years from the date of the
receipt of the collections without approval of the geologist
in charge of the Trinidad work, which approval will be on
the basis that such publication will not prejudicially affect
the commercial interests of the Company.’’**
This last clause is quite interesting, also, in light of the
philosophy Harris apparently imparted to his students:
82 This pay rate was still in effect in 1923, for Harris received a
check for $500 which covered the, “*.. .half yearly payment...” N.
F. Hill to Gilbert D. Harris, January 3, 1923. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
83 MEMORANDUM to The Board of the Trinidad Petroleum De-
velopment Co. Ltd. Regarding a Paleontologist for the Trinidad Work.
Initialed ‘““ACV” in Veatch’s handwriting, July 14, 1919. Trinidad
Box, HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
84 Contact between Trinidad Petroleum Development Company
Ltd. and Gilbert D. Harris, July 17, 1919. Trinidad Box, HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
‘“‘Now if there is anything that I can do for you in the way
of visiting localities, collecting fossils, taking photographs,
or any other information either regarding Trinidad or the
mainland of Venezuela across the Gulf, remember you
have but to ask. There are, as I have often heard you say,
scientific things which are above ones [sic] duty to any
company and if while I am there I can get you any infor-
mation which may help you in your work or possibly save
you a trip down I will only be too glad to do so. I have
not forgotten the innumerable things you did for me when
I was at the university.’’®>
Within six months of Harris taking the position with
the Trinidad Petroleum Development Company, So-
per left the Company and Gerald. A. Waring®® became
Harris’ contact in Trinidad, and the two men were to
continue their working and personal relationship for
many years. Harris did not, however, make a very
auspicious start with the Company:
“We received a short letter from you dated September,
Ist. [1919] in which you said that you were working on
our material, but we have heard nothing from you since
then. I also wrote you on 22nd. September, and sent a few
fossils by mail, from two wells, but have not received an
acknowledgment to date. We are particularly anxious to
hear from you in regard these latter fossils—whether or
not they are of any value. You understand, of course, that
if the material we send you, is to be of actual value in this
particular survey, the data [sic] will have to be available
by the end of August, 1920 at the latest, since the final
report and maps will probably be prepared during Sep-
tember and October, 1920.’’8”
So in 1920, Harris went to Trinidad, his first trip
overseas since his visits to England and France in 1894,
just after he had accepted the position at Cornell (Palm-
er, 1953c). But this time he was going for consulting
purposes and was being paid. In a letter to Waring in
May, 1920, Harris mentioned his plans:
**.. am planning so that if the Pearsons will help me on
my field expenses I can take next year off for field work
at least for the early months of 1921.88
Later, Waring confirms his 1920 trip:
“Since you sailed for New York, Mr. Kip has put in a
85 R. A. Liddle to Gilbert D. Harris, January 2, 1921. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
86 G. A. Waring came to the Trinidad Petroleum Development
Company, Ltd. after working for the U.S.G.S, and later he worked
for Margay Oil Corporation (Tulsa, Oklahoma). Harris named Ven-
ezuela waringi in his honor.
87 R. H. Soper to Gilbert D. Harris, December 18, 1919. Trinidad
Box, HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
88 Carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris to G. A. Waring, May 2, 1920.
Trinidad Box, HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
84 BULLETIN 350
couple of days on the lower part of the Brasso section;
2789
Although not mentioned by Palmer (1953c), a letter
from Waring in 1921 suggests that Harris made a re-
turn trip to Trinidad the following year, from which
he was late returning to Ithaca and missed the begin-
ning of the fall term:
“I was pleased to receive your letter of the 20th. October
and to learn that you had reached home safely with all of
your material... .
“We are interested to learn of Cornell’s new President?’,
and I presume it was in connection with his installation
that some dissatisfaction was felt with your late return to
the University. I fancy, however, that the incident has been
wellnigh [sic] forgotten by this time, and doubtless the
inconvenience to you was not such as to detract from the
advantage of spending a few days longer here in in [sic]
Trinidad.””*!
During the 1921 excursion, Harris collected material
from over 100 localities’, and he returned to Trinidad
again in 1923°3 (Harris and Hodson 1922, 1931; Harris
1926; Waring 1926):
As a measure of the respect he enjoyed among the
professionals working on Trinidad, it appears there 1s
a mountain there named after him**. Also, during the
1921 trip, Harris managed to arrange a meeting to
discuss stratigraphic nomenclature of Trinidad, at-
tended by geologists from all the oil companies working
there; Trinidad Petroleum Development Company,
Ldt., United British W. I. Petroleum Syndicate, Ltd.,
Trinidad Leaseholds, Ltd., Trinidad Central Oilfields,
Ltd., and Apex Oilfields, Ltd.:
“This meeting was called partly at the instance of Prof. G.
D. Harris of Cornell University, who wished to discuss
the matter with geologists of the principal Oil [sic] com-
8° G. A. Waring to Gilbert D. Harris, October 8, 1920. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
°° On June 30, 1921, it was announced that Livingston Farrand,
former President of the University of Colorado and Chairman of
the American Red Cross, would become President of Cornell Uni-
versity (Bishop, 1962).
°1G. A. Waring to Gilbert D. Harris, November 10, 1921. Waring
File, Trinidad Box, HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
°? Locality list of all 109 sites is in the Trinidad Box, HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
°3G. D. Harris field book with title “Trinidad” which starts on
August 7, 1923 and the last entry is August 16. Trinidad Box, HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY. Attached to a letter from Waring is a list of col-
lecting localities for Harris which has the dates **August-September,
1923” on it. G. A. Waring to Gilbert D. Harris, September 24, 1923.
HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
°4 River between Mt. Harris and Plum Mitan Rd.” Quotation in
a letter from H. G. Kugler to Gilbert D. Harris, November 13, 1924.
Kugler File, Trinidad Box, HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
panies, before he returned to the States. This meeting was
also in part in response to a desire expressed by Drs. Ganz
and Kugler’® [respectively representing the United British
W.I. Petroleum Syndicate, Ltd. and Apex Oilfields, Ltd],
to exchange ideas with Professor Harris about a uniform
system of nomenclature to be adopted by the leading ge-
ologists working in Trinidad... .
“Asa result of the meeting the following formation names
were tentatively agreed upon, but without discussion of
their geologic age, or even of their equivalence or sequenc-
es—
Matura Formation
Caroni Formation
Manzanilla Formation
Tamana Formation
Moruga Formation
Naparima Formation
San Fernando Formation
(Palo Seco Facies) Pointe-a-Pierre Forma-
San Fernando Formation tion
San Fernando Argiline
Formation’’’®
There seems to be a connection between Harris’ work
in Trinidad and his re-publication of the paleontolog-
ical writings of Guppy (Harris, 1921), as both occurred
at about the same time.
His 1923 visit to Trinidad was made while returning
from a consulting trip to Venezuela.
“After spending two months in Venezuela a stopped [sic]
by in Trinidad for two weeks and Waring and I had a final
look over the Island.’’’’
By the early 1920s a former student, Ralph Liddle’,
was working in Venezuela for Standard Oil Company,
and he seemed to be Harris’ contact for the Venezuela
portion of the 1923 trip:
“T am glad to hear that you are well and that you intend
going to Venezuela on an excursion with Mr. Lidall [sic]
[R. A. Liddle]’’’?
Later Liddle forwarded some photographs to Harris
°5 Harris continued correspondence with Kugler for 30 years. H.
G. Kugler to G. D. Harris: first letter, June 12, 1923; last letter, July
3, 1951. Kugler File, Trinidad Box, HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
°° Notes of a meeting held at the residence of G. A. Waring, in Port
of Spain, on the 22nd, September, 1921, to discuss the adoption of
an Uniform Series of names for the various Geologic formations of
Trinidad, p. | and 5. Trinidad Box, HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY. These
names were used a year later in a stratigraphic column sent along
with a letter to Harris by G. A. Waring, October 24, 1922. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
97 Gilbert D. Harris to H. G. Kugler, December 25, 1923. Kugler
File, Trinidad Box, HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
°8 Ralph Alexander Liddle (Cornell A.B.’18).
°° H. G. Kugler to G. D. Harris, December 6, 1923, p. 4. Kugler
File, Trinidad Box, HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE
showing him sitting on a “gallant steed on the La Velg
anticline” taken during the Venezuela trip.!°°
Palmer (1953c) stated that the Venezuela trip was
in 1924, but, although he made a second trip in 1924,
Harris’ letter quoted above clearly states that he was
in Venezuela in 1923 working for the Standard Oil
Company'®!. And a letter from that company, dated
September 5, 1922, suggests that he was hired in late
1922, at the same time as Floyd Hodson, another of
his students:
‘We desire this work to be under your general supervision
so that Mr. Hodson and the Venezuelan organization can
call on you at any time for advice. We shall in all prob-
ability count on your making a trip down there next sum-
mer [1923] to see that the work is being properly handled
and to give personal attention to it.’
‘As to the matter of compensation, I am authorized to
make you an offer at the rate of $700 per month for time
actually devoted to the work, whether in the field or in
the laboratory, with all official traveling and field expenses
while in the field.”’!°”
The material he collected on these consulting ex-
cursions plus the material collected by his students and
returned to his laboratory, created a very valuable re-
source. Harris described the situation this way:
“TI now have enough material from Santo Domingo, Ja-
maica, Costa Rica, Panama, Peru and Venezuela so that
I can begin to work to advantage, in fact have the best
outfit going on west Hemisphere Paleontology [sic] of the
later formations, and more coming from Venezuela, Peru,
Columbia [sic] and Argentina.”!°?
As more data became available, modifications had
to be made in previous stratigraphic positioning of
some of the strata. A former student of Harris’, Car-
lotta Maury, had proposed some of the earlier no-
menclature and organization (Maury 1917a,b, 1918,
1925):
**_. thanks especially for the copy of Miss Maury’s bul-
letin on the Miocene and Pliocene of Trinidad'!°*. Will you
kindly extend to her my sincere appreciation of the rec-
ognition she gave me, in naming several new forms. You
mention that her stratigraphy does not quite accord with
100 R. A. Liddle to Gilbert D. Harris, October 15, 1923. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
101 Further support that he was in Venezuela in 1923 comes from
this quotation: “After spending two months in Venezuela a [sic]
stopped by in Trinidad for two weeks. . .” Gilbert D. Harris to H.
G. Kugler, December 25, 1923 (original). Kugler File, Trinidad Box,
HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
102 C. F, Bowen to Gilbert D. Harris, September 5, 1922. HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY.
103 Gilbert D. Harris to H. G. Kugler, December 25, 1923 (orig-
inal). Kugler File, Trinidad Box, HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
103 Probably Maury, 1925, which was published March 27, 1925.
85
ours, and in checking hers (pp, 16-17), against my latest
geologic column (of Oct. 1924), I find the following:
Freeport-Todd’s
Road
Miss Maury
Upper Miocene
Waring
Lower Pliocene
Springvale Upper Miocene Upper Miocene
Brasso Middle Miocene Upper Middle
Miocene
Godineau River Middle Miocene Upper Middle
Miocene
Manzanilla Lower Miocene Upper Middle
Miocene
Machapoorie Lower Miocene Upper Middle
Miocene
Tamana Lower Miocene Upper Middle
Miocene
“The discrepancies seem to be chiefly as to Godineau
River, which we place equivalent to Machapoorie; and
Manzanilla, which we place as Upper Middle instead of
Lower Miocene. This can be taken care of, I suppose, in
a footnote to our paper, in accordance with your latest
determinations.”!°°
These excursions into foreign countries were not
without their hazards, especially medical, and after his
1924 trip to Venezuela, Harris suffered from an illness
and it took him many months to recover:
“T regret to state that I have been doing practically nothing
this fall since I returned from Venezuela, having contracted
amebic dysentery while there and having been confined
to the house or hospital most of the time.”’!°°
This illness continued to trouble Harris and almost a
year later he received this letter:
“Tam very sorry to hear of your illness, in which you have
my sincere sympathy, for I had amoebic dysentery for
thirteen months some years ago...
“T am glad for the few remarks on Trinidad stratigraphy
which you were able to give me in spite of your sickness,
27107
Not only was Harris venturing into foreign lands,
but as indicated above, his students were doing the
same thing, often in more exotic places and conditions
than their professor. Olsson worked in Panama and
Costa Rica, Liddle in Venezuela, and in 1921 Harris
received a letter from Dean E. Lounsbery!® (BS °19).
Not only does this letter describe the hardships en-
105 G. A. Waring to Gilbert D. Harris, April 27, 1925. Waring
File, Trinidad Box, HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
106 Gilbert D. Harris to H. G. Kugler, November 11, 1924. Kugler
File, Trinidad Box, HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
107 J. A. Bullbrook to Gilbert D. Harris, September 3, 1925. War-
ing File, Trinidad Box, HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
108 T ater Assistant to the Vice President for Land and Geological
Department, Phillips Petroleum.
86 BULLETIN 350
dured while doing geological fieldwork, but it illustrates
the willingness with which Harris’ students apparently
undertook such tasks; a willingness they, no doubt,
acquired through their association with Harris. An-
other interesting point about many of these letters which
came back to Harris, aside from the geological discus-
sion, is the political insight they show. Perhaps this is
a measure of the broadness of the education they re-
ceived from Cornell and from Harris. Lounsbery wrote
from Ponnagyun, Burma:
“T haven’t forgotten my promise to write, but in fulfilling
that promise, I must admit a decided slowness on my part.
I cannot imagine that almost a year has passed since I
started globe trotting. In that year I have done considerable
traveling especially in India, for a young blood; on the go
almost continually since last January, but far be it from
me to complain or kick for I am having the time of my
life, and later on I will be sure to realize that is so, even
more than now.
‘Last season from January to April I was with the party
of D. D. Condit, formerlly [sic] of the U.S.G.S., which was
conducting a rapid reconnaissance of the foothills adjoin-
ing the Kirthar Range in Sind and Baluchistan. There were
two others in the party— Mr [sic] Nuttall, 23; and Mr [sic]
Maynard, 24, from Chicago, a protege of Prof Salisbury’s.
We covered a large amount of territory, and most all by
camels; the joys of riding via camel are to be compared
with seasickness in the last degrees, and coupled with that
there is always the unpleasant and nauseating odor ema-
nating from the camel’s nostrils. We always had siwars or
mounted guards who sat in front of the hump to drive
them, water being scarce and the siwar naturally dirty, you
can figure the rest.
“The country was rugged and barren of vegetation-a true
desert. Water was very scarce at many places, and the
natives said that there had been no rain in the last three
years and only once in the last five. The geological end
however was very interesting. Formations were very dis-
tinctive and one had little trouble in identifying horizons.
The main Tertiary formation of the area is the Kirthar
Nummulitic Limestone, and there was never any doubt
about it, as whereever [sic] found it was always abundantly
filled with Nummulites!°’, of several distinct and easily
identified types. During the season we found and mapped
many beautiful anticlines and they were certainly excellent
to look at from the standpoint of structure. We failed,
however to locate any proof of petroliferous horizons un-
derneath them....
“By the Middle [sic] of April the weather was so hot
that further work in the field was very near impossilbe
[sic], let alone foolish.... The Company maintained a
summer headquarters at Dalhousie, a beautiful little hill
station at the edge of the outer Himalayas. The elevation
there is 7,000 feet, and consequently cool throughout the
109 A type of fossil foraminifera.
hot season. All of the staff with the exception of Dr. Wrights
[sic] party came there to do office work, the latter being
in Assam, the most convenient station was Shillong. The
atmosphere there proved very pleasant to Mr. Weeks!!°,
and he was captivated by a very nice English girl, who last
October became his wife.
**.. The moonsoon [sic] lasted until the middle of Sep-
tember, and then Dr. Knox, who is my present chief, and
I started off into the Himalayas to do a little mountain
climbing. ... Various places along the route chosen af-
forded log rest houses. The highest pass which we went
over was in the Central Himalayas at an elevation of 14,400
feet. On that particular day, unfortunately for us, there was
a howling snowstorm [sic] in progress, which prevented
taking any pictures of the first range of the Inner Hima-
layas....
“This season the Company sent us into the Arakan coast
region of Burma. The country so far as geology is con-
cerned is virgin soil. The Indian geological staff has ex-
amined and reported on only the costal [sic] and accessible
regions. The Burma Oil Company geologists did some
work in here, but so far as we can find out, they did not
trouble themselves much where the jungle growth was
thick. Our program calls for a complete examination of
the entire strip, clear up to the Arakan Yomas. True enough
the jungle is thick but one can always get through as there
are many trails both animal and native. When I first heard
of our assignment, I had visions of wild animals, snakes,
leeches and jungle, as all were reported by the party in
Assam. So far, I would not ask for a more ideal place to
geologize in. We have not seen any tigers, wild elephants
or bison; all terrors of the jungle, and as for snakes, they
two [sic] are scarce. Malaria is very bad during the rainy
season, but we will leave before that time... .
“India is all astir now that the Prince of Wales is out
here. The non-co-operatore are getting bolder every day
and it will not be long before the government will have to
step in and call a halt. Mr [s/c] Ghandi’s influence is very
far reaching amongst the Hindus and the sooner things are
brought to a showdown the better. Circumstances are get-
ting graver in the Punjab every day as that has been the
seat of all the trouble. I am not at all sorry that I am in
Burma this year. The effect of Irelands [sic] being granted
a Free State will have considerable influence here.””!!!
Such consulting work, aside from the adventure, also
paid the young people well. In 1922 after completing
his work for the Sinclair Oil Company in Costa Rica!!?
110 Believed to be Lewis George Weeks, a graduate student at
Cornell, 1919-1920, who later worked with Standard Oil Company
(New Jersey).
111 EP. E. Lounsbery to Gilbert D. Harris, December 18, 1921. HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY.
12 Not above a little politics as well as geology, A. C. Veatch, who
was then working for Sinclair Oil company, suggested to Harris that
Olsson dedicate the Costa Rican work to the National Museum or
to the “... scientists of Costa Rica. This I think desirable from a
company standpoint.” A. C. Veatch to Gilbert D. Harris, January
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 87
(Olsson, 1922), Olsson wrote to Harris that he had
been hired as a paleontologist for $5,000 per year by
the International Petroleum Company!!3, and by Feb-
ruary of that year he planned to be in Peru.
In fact, for Olsson, the constant lure of consulting
work kept him from completing his Ph.D. Each time
he would return to Ithaca to begin the residence re-
quirements and his thesis on the Miocene of Virginia,
he would be hired for another overseas assignment.
But that did not stop his interest in scientific work and
Olsson published almost 4000 pages of material during
his career, a total that does not include the countless
pages of company reports that he wrote (Moore, 1978).
Olsson’s 1922 trip to Peru was the beginning of nearly
30 years of work in South America, work in which he
was so successful'!* that the companies gave him free-
dom of movement and unrestricted permission to pub-
lish on the material he found!!>. Olsson and Harris
formed an effective team, Harris with Bulletins of
American Paleontology, the avenue for publication,
and Olsson with a constant stream of new fossils from
his oil company explorations. For Peru alone, Olsson’s
collections resulted in seven major works, 750 pages
and 128 plates, on the paleontology of that country
(Olsson,1928, 1929, 1930, 1931, 1932, 1934, and
1944), which Harris published.
Material returned to Harris by his former students
working in foreign lands would also often provide the
samples for others to study. For example Palmer (1923)
used material sent from Costa Rica by Veatch and over
20 years later she used samples collected by Weisbord
(Palmer, 1945).
As one reviews the many letters Harris received from
his former students as they pursued industry and other
tasks, one cannot help but be struck by what a differ-
ence their geological training made in their view of the
world when compared to non-geologist. These young
people saw a different world before them than the one
seen by ordinary citizens. In reading one of Olsson’s
23, 1922. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY. Olsson did mention the “Officials
of the National Museum of Costa Rica” and “Dr. A.C. Veatch” in
the “‘Preliminary Remarks” to the paper (Olsson, 1922), although
there is no record that Veatch ever actually graduated from any
college (Heroy, 1942).
"13 A. A. Olsson to Gilbert D. Harris, January 22, 1922. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
‘14 One well in 1924 was the largest gas well ever drilled in Peru
up to that time with 26,000,000 cu. ft. of gas. A. A. Olsson to Gilbert
D. Harris, February 26, 1924. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
‘15 Sometimes there was a delay with that permission, “In a couple
of years or so, there should be no reason why the stuff cannot be
published, but at the present time the company is very close on
giving out any kind of information.” A. A. Olsson to Gilbert D.
Harris, February 26, 1924. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
letters, written shortly after his arrival in Peru, one
imagines how differently a non-geologist would have
described the scene; one feels the excitement Olsson
must have felt as he gazed at this Peruvian landscape
for the first time. He described the landscape with these
words.
“Back a short distance from the sea, the country is gen-
erally high, a flat plain or tablayo covered with Pleistocene
gravel. This plain near the coast and along the dry rivers
is chiefly dissected by dry arroyas or gullies revealing the
Tertiary rocks underneath. This dissection results in a bad-
land sort of topography with most wonderful exposures so
that the whole structure and relations of the beds is laid
bare before ones eyes. It isa most ideal country for geology
I have ever seen.””!!°
Others with foreign assignments included the Hod-
sons, Floyd and Helen (Hodson, F., 1926; Hodson, H.,
1926; Hodson, F. et a/., 1927; and Hodson and Hod-
son, 1931), and Norman E. Weisbord (1929, 1934).
Weisbord, like others before him, took an interest in
the local politics as well as the geology; at times he was
in considerable danger himself. From Cuba in 1931,
Weisbord sent Harris a description of the political and
social conditions of the people and a hypothetical, but
all to real, description of how certain government of-
ficials might operate. The conditions he described
eventually led to several revolutions and much polit-
ical instability on the island. Also, Weisbord’s com-
ments show how corruption in one country is often
supported and exploited by others, even by people in
our Own country:
‘But enough of geology and on to politics. The revolution
is definitely over tho [sic] there are occasional rumblings
of another one brewing. Tho [sic] our press generally treats
these political upheavals in a comic operatic vein they are
serious affairs frequently resulting in loss of life, economic
paralyzation and a bitter aftermath. I was in a sense in the
thick of it inasmuch as I was working in the field all the
while, tho [sic] my movements were constantly hampered
by the rural guard who always had to examine my stuff
and cross examine me. I protested in one place and got a
good crack over the shoulder with the soldier’s rifle and
for a moment I thought the darned thing might go off. It
is a sinking sensation to have a gun waved in front of you
by an exceedingly mad soldier (who perhaps had had no
sleep for several nights and very much on edge). I thought
of lots of things during the interval. I was sent up to the
guard house to the seargent [s/c] for carrying khaki clothes
(prohibited) a medicine chest and sundry instruments which
looked like bombs I guess. The seargent [sic] .. . [had] .. .
a kind, dumb face and I wheedled permission to go on
"6 A. A. Olsson to Gilbert D. Harris, February 21, 1922. HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY.
88
ahead. I showed him my passport which he scrutinized
and said it looked alright [sic] but it was somewhat difficult
to read. Since the incident I don’t talk snotty to any sol-
diers.
“Of the various Latin countries I have visited, this one
seems to be the most corrupt politically, possibly because
I’ve been more exposed to it here. The revolution was
entirely warranted, tho [sic] it is quite possible that the
new regime would have been as bad as the present and in
all probability worse. There is no more thought of service
to the people than there is common honesty in higher
circles. Our own government is bad in spots, let’s recognize
it, but we do have some legislators and executives with a
really earnest desire to do the right thing. This is usually
very difficult in a democratic form of government hence
our frequent failures. But here the prime reason of holding
office is for the graft involved. The higher the circle the
bigger the ‘reward.’ Compared to Venezuela which is
avowedly the most autocratic of the South American states,
this system is elephantine in its corruption compared to
measly Venezuela which hasn’t a penny [of debt] outstand-
ing. This lovely little island of perhaps 4 million people
is in debt to the tune of nearly a half billion dollars —with
hardly anything to show for it. Here is the way its [sic]
done, with the connivance of U. S. banks. I’m Joe Presi-
dent, let us say. I can’t milk my people any more they’re
dry—have been since the ‘gorda vaca’ or dance of the
millions during war time when sugar was selling for over
20 cents a pound. Well now, I and my clique have to have
some money. We get our crooked heads together and we
conceive of a great highway to span the entire island. We
don’t need such a highway for 50 years to come but it
looks nice, it makes a show for tourists and above all it
gives us a chance to get in on as easy a dollar as ever
trickled thru [sic] the financial sieve. I, as president, con-
trolling every phase of the government get Congress to
pass a bill authorizing let us say 50 million dollars for
highway 800 kilometers long, done up pretty good style.
If congress doesn’t O.K. this plan, why by hooky Ill take
the lottery rights away (another prolific source of 100%
graft). Congress benignly passes the bill without a whim-
per. That item taken care of, I have to get 50 million
dollars. That’s easy! We call in Mr. Bullblower of National
City Bank and say we want 50 million dollars. Mr. B. says
alright [sic] that can be arranged quite top hole. Cuba floats
a public works loan of 50 million dollars, the National
City Bank underwrites it giving public works let us say
40,000,000 dollars—that is they actually pay 90 dollars
for a 100 dollar bond or some such figure. Public Works
now has its 40,000,000 dollars. National City Bank gets
its crew of nifty looking bond salesman and the talk is
bruted around that National City is offering, ‘as, if, and
when’ with all the proper phraseology and sleek looking
salesman oiling the selling machinery. Result is National
City sells its bond issue to a gullible public. Tom Citizen,
a poor sucker who has a thousand dollars saved up from
teaching school or tightening nuts on an automible [sic],
goes in to what he thinks is a big, reputable house and he
BULLETIN 350
comes out with a Cuban bond yielding 6%, the interest on
which raised in part by another bond issue.
“Well this leaves National City with a fat profit of let
us say 10,000,000 dollars and Public Works with
40,000,000 for the great highway. An American firm rep-
resentative, used to Latin American road contracts is called
in to conference and emerges with a fat contract. The secret
figure which Mr. American gets is 50,000 dollars per mile,
which is certainly plenty and then some. Of course Mr
American bills Obras Publicas for 140,000 per mile and
distributes the balance between /is profit as entrepreneur
and what he bills Public Works. The balance which you
will agree is goodly is distributed among close members
of the ‘gran departmento de Obras Publicas.” Mr. Amer-
ican is paid promptly because as soon as he’s paid the
largess is distributed and memebers [sic] of Obras Publicas
have hungry mouths to feed! So the great thing goes thru
[sic]. Yawping [sic] tourists come down and see the nice
carretera and beautiful capitolio and rave about how ad-
vance Cuba is. The debts pile up—they can never be paid,
will eventually be repudiated. Who suffers? Tom Citizen,
the gullible American citizen who believes in great big
institutions, and the great mass of Cuban people who are
deprived of essentials. Thus Joe President reduces teach-
er’s salaries so that the interest on Public Works can be
paid. Officialdom and National City Bank get big swigs at
the ‘botella’ (bottle) whilst we eventually pay the price.
“There you have it. I have no figures to back me up,
other than the fact that the central highway which is a fair
job, cost 140,000 dollars per mile. Compare this with costs
in the States for an A-1 super-fine, reinforced concrete
road with all sorts of emellishments [sic] (20,000 per mile
would cover it) and you can see that something is damn
rotten in Denmark.” [Parentheticals and emphases in the
original.]'!”
Eventually the clouds of war overtook the world and
letters from Harris’ former students carried descrip-
tions of war preparations as well as geological ones.
Weisbord was working for Island Exploration com-
pany in Papua, New Guinea, in 1939, only six months
before the beginning of World War II. Yet the war
clouds did not dampen his spirits nor interfere with
his recreation which included both old and new games:
“Two days ago arrived a detachment of 40 Australian
soldiers and several big guns destined for the protection
of Port Moresby in event of war. A naval and air base is
being established as well so that the place is developing,
one way or another, quite rapidly and quietly.
**..a suburb of Port Moresby, is the site of the technical
staff. Fortunately it is located adjacent to the golf course,
so that after hours I can get my swearing done early and
keep at it until nightfall. Golf is a game, the emotional
graph of which closely resembles a business chart with
‘17 Norman E. Weisbord to Gilbert D. Harris, November 3, 1931.
HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 89
long periods of depressing lows and brief peaks of soaring
highs. It is a game unsuited to my temperament since it
affects my sensibilities too much. Between strokes I run
the whole gamut of reactions and since I am a duffer these
reactions may make me apoplectic. ...
“In one of the weekly cricket matches I was given the
opportunity of playing and, according to the local paper,
‘delighted the crowd with my baseball antics.” You prob-
ably know as much about game as I do. I never handled
a cricket bat before. You’re supposed to keep the ball away
from the wicket by smacking the ball before it hits it. Since
the ball bounces first and comes with terrific speed and all
sorts of twists it’s not as easy as it looks. I hit a number
of foul tips which to my surprise counted for runs so I
rolled up a better score than some of the blokes who have
been playing since childhood. Came a ball, however, which
I missed and which knocked over the little ticks and did
I feel sheepish. Still I got a good hand from the fine, sport-
ing crowd who go a big kick out of my unconventional
stance.””!'8
No matter where they went, the former students con-
tinued to send Harris fossil collections whenever pos-
sible. This continued especially after he started the
Paleontological Research Institution:
““As a souvenir from New Zealand for the Paleontological
Research Institution, I have sent you a fossil moa bone. I
believe it is the fused tibia and tarsus or the lowest part
of the leg which was covered with feathers. It belonged to
118 Norman Weisbord to Gilbert D. Harris, March 26, 1939. HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY.
the largest species Dinornis maximum and the bird in life
probably stood almost 14 to 15 feet high”!!?
Thus consulting activities served as a valuable re-
source for Harris and his students. For the students
these activities provided adventure, meaningful em-
ployment (especially during the depression years of the
1930s!°), an opportunity to make a meaningful con-
tribution to science, and, in some cases, the opportu-
nity to explore the unexplored; to be true geological
pioneers, following in the footsteps of other former
Cornellians such as Hartt, Derby, and Branner. For
Harris, the rewards came from advancing the under-
standing of Tertiary strata, building his fossil collec-
tions, and, as it turned out, the financial return. Ap-
parently his consulting work allowed him to gradually
build a nest-egg that could be used to start the Pale-
ontological Research Institution in 1932. Without the
financial rewards he reaped through the consulting ac-
tivity, 1t seems unlikely that he would have had the
necessary resources during the depths of the Great De-
pression to found his own institution.
119 Axel A. Olsson to Gilbert D. Harris, August 4, 1939. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
'20 “Very soon now I shall have to decide whether to go away again
(the Company wants me to return to the East when my time is up)
or stay in the States as another member of the unemployed.”’ Norman
E. Weisbord to Rebecca Harris, September 21, 1939. HA-PRI, Ith-
aca, NY.
CHAPTER 7. CARLOTTA J. MAURY
One incident occurred between Harris and a former
student which, when compared with his relationships
with other students, appears to be totally out of char-
acter, and had a profound influence on his later life.
The incident was a very serious affair for the student,
for Cornell University, and for Harris. It may also have
sown the seeds of distrust and discontent that, seven
years later, would lead Harris to break completely with
Cornell and found his own organization, the Paleon-
tological Research Institution. It is therefore treated
separately with considerable detail.
Before describing the disagreement Harris had with
Carlotta Maury, however, it is useful to consider an
earlier episode which, perhaps, sets the tone for what
followed. The first record of a serious disagreement
between Harris and an outside party comes from a
note Albert W. Smith, Acting President of Cornell, sent
to Heinrich Ries accompanied by a copy of a letter
from Professor Junius Henderson at the University of
Colorado at Boulder:
**Since this is a question that may affect seriously the good
name of the University I would ask you to take prompt
measures to adjust the matter so that it is satisfactory to
Professor Henderson.”!
The ‘“‘question’”’ mentioned was this. In 1917, after
corresponding with Harris, Henderson sent him a box
of fossils from the western U. S. containing more than
' Albert W. Smith to Heinrich Ries, July 7, 1920. Schurman Papers
3/4/6, v. 47, p. 263. Also a copy in the Heinrich Ries Papers 14/
15/691. RMC-KL, Cornell.
90 BULLETIN 350
150 species. In return Harris was to forward examples
of New York Devonian fossils. There were receipts
signed for the fossils and several letters exchanged, but
Harris did not complete his part of the arrangement,
and, according to Henderson, Harris would not even
answer his letters. So Henderson appealed to the Uni-
versity President:
“Cornell University has our material and it seems hopeless
to make any further appeal to Professor Harris. I am told
that he has treated other paleontologists in exactly the
same manner. I do not believe he has any intention of
being dishonest or unfair, and suppose he will justify his
failure to keep his promises made on behalf of Cornell by
saying that he has been too busy to attend to it, or some-
thing of that sort. Nevertheless, the effect upon those who
have dealt with him is the same as if he had deliberately
started out to steal their material, so far as actual results
are concerned.’””
Harris was out of town at the time Smith’s note
reached Ries, but upon his return, Harris wrote to Ries
stating that he had received the 157 species and that
Henderson wanted a similar sized collection of De-
vonian and Atlantic Coast Miocene fossils in return.
He said that he had planned to have Axel Olsson put
together the collection Henderson wanted, but Olsson
left for a six-month stay in Panama that turned into
two years. Olsson, however, had now returned and
Miss Katherine van Winkle was there to help. Hen-
derson’s collection was right in front of him, “‘contin-
uously in view’, and the samples requested could be
sent with, “justice to ourselves and satisfaction to Hen-
derson.”’ Harris continued:
“So far as 1am aware I have answered all communications
rec’d [sic] from him and have tried my best to explain the
delay and cannot understand his caustic imputations.’”?
This exchange with Henderson must have brought
Harris’ temper to the foreground; based upon Hen-
derson’s reply, Harris must have sent him a scathing
letter, but no copy of it exists. Apparently Harris, among
other things, asked for the list of people he had, ‘**.. .
treated the same way.”’ Henderson was quite apologetic
in tone, but stood his ground and did cite his source:
“In the first place I have not intimated, as you say, that
you have been swindling a long list of unfortunates these
past years. Neither have I made any sweeping charge as
to your general character, as you declare. I explicitly said
that I did not believe you had any intention of being dis-
? Junius Henderson to President of Cornell University, July 7,
1920. Schurman Papers 3/4/6, v. 47, p. 264. Also a copy in the
Heinrich Ries Papers 14/15/691. RMC-KL, Cornell.
*G. D. Harris to Heinrich Ries, July 29, 1920. Heinrich Ries
Papers, 14/15/691. RMC-KL, Cornell.
honest or unfair, and that you would doubtless explain the
long delay by saying that you were too busy to attend to
i een
“T regret that I cannot send you ‘the long list of unfor-
tunates’ that I ‘intimate’ you have been ‘swindling these
past years,’ for the very good reason that I have made no
such intimation of a long list of unfortunates. I did say
that I had been told that you had treated ‘other paleon-
tologists’ the same way. I would very willingly give you
the name of the man who told me that, but his name has
escaped me entirely. ... One of these geologists (I believe
he was in the employ of the Toxana or Mid-West company
{oil companies], though I am not sure) spent several hours
here, and we got to talking incidently about exchanging
material. In reply to his inquiry as to where we got certain
unusual material I told him of some of our exchanges, and
just incidentally remarked that I sent a lot to you for the
purpose of getting some more Miocene and Devonian ma-
terial, two or three years ago, but had not yet received the
return collection because Mr. Olsson had been called away
at that time. He began to laugh, and said that there were
‘others’ who had had the same experience: that he himself
had sent you material some time before for which he had
received no return. He had no thought of dishonesty on
your part, he said... . If he deliberately lied to me, then
you certainly know it. If he told the truth, then you of
course know who he is.’’4
The incident related here is trivial, except that it
does demonstrate the strong reaction that came from
Harris when he thought he had been wronged. His
temper does not show itself very often in the written
records that survive or in the various personal anec-
dotal remarks, but this small incident certainly dem-
onstrates its existence. Perhaps that temper played a
role in the difficulty that developed about six years
later with Maury. Certainly, given knowledge of the
situation with Henderson, Harris’ temper does mani-
fest itself in his letters to her company.
The Maury incident began in 1925-26 over an al-
leged breach of confidentiality and ownership of sam-
ples kept on the fourth floor of McGraw Hall (Plate
11). Carlotta Joaquina Maury was working for one
group of oil companies and Harris was a consultant to
another. Maury was born in Hastings-on-Hudson, New
York in 1872,° and lived there in the ancestral home
of her mother, Virginia Draper Maury, for most of her
life when she was not out of the country.° Maury lived
the last two years of her life in Yonkers, New York.
+ Junius Henderson to G. D. Harris, August 10, 1920. Heinrich
Ries Papers, 14/15/691. RMC-KL, Cornell.
5 Notes on her life are taken from her obituary in the New York
Times, Tuesday, January 4, 1938, p. 23, and from Who Was Who
in America, v. 1 1897-1942, p. 791, Chicago, A. N. Marquis Com-
pany.
© In the Harris Archives is an undated post card photograph of a
very fine looking dwelling labelled ““The Old Draper Homestead,
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 91
Her sister was Miss Antonia Coetana de Paiva Pereitra
Maury, a former research astronomer at the Harvard
Observatory.’
Contrary to the story which has circulated around
the Cornell Department of Geological Sciences for
many years, and repeated in the department history
(Brice, 1989), Carlotta Maury was only distantly re-
lated to the famous oceanographer Matthew Fontaine
Maury through her father’s family; she was not his
daughter or granddaughter. Her father, The Reverend
Mytton Maury, D.D., the son of William and Sarah
Mytton Maury, was born near Liverpool, England and
came to the United States in 1849. Mytton’s father,
William Maury, was an English cousin of Matthew
Fontaine Maury. Matthew Maury worked for the Con-
federacy in England during the Civil War. Unable to
return to the United States immediately after the war,
he lived in Mexico for a while and, with the help of
Empress Carlotta of Mexico, he tried to organize and
settle ““New Virginia, Mexico.”’ Eventually he did re-
turn to the U.S. in 1868 (Corbin, 1888; F. L. Williams,
1963). Aside from his oceanographic work and naval
career, Matthew Fontaine Maury is best known for a
series of school geography texts, Maury’s Geographical
Series. After Matthew’s death in 1873, Mytton Maury,
Carlotta’s father, served as editor of these books from
1875-1895 (M. F. Maury, 1891).
After attending Radcliffe, Columbia University, and
the University of Paris, Carlotta Maury came to Cor-
nell and completed the Bachelor of Philosophy in 1896,
but then, according to Harris, she left for a term or
two:
‘“Miss Maury, who spent a year in France after holding a
fellowship in this department, has been unable for financial
reasons to take her second degree this year, though she
will soon fill all requirements for the same.’’*
She did, indeed, return and completed her Doctor of
Philosophy degree in 1902. She was the first woman
to obtain a Ph.D. degree in geology at Cornell, and was
among the first women in the United States to earn a
Ph.D. in geology’. Her thesis was published as Number
15, Volume 3 of the Bulletins of American Paleontology
(C. J. Maury, 1902).
200 Years Old—Hastings-on-Hudson”’ with the message, ““Come
see us. Carlotta.”” HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
7 Antonia Maury was a colleague of William Pickering at Harvard
Observatory and she did pioneering work in star classification by
spectral analysis; eventually she published a catalog with the spectral
classification for about 4800 stars.
8 4nnual Report of the Department of Paleontology and Strati-
graphic Geology; 1899-1900, by G. D. Harris, p. 5. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
° John W. Wells, Personal communication, July 15, 1982.
Right from their first days together as student and
teacher, Harris and Maury appear to have developed
a very close working relationship. One example of this
can be seen from the work she did on fossils collected
at a site along the western shore of Cayuga Lake, be-
tween Taughannock Falls and Frontenac Beach. Ap-
parently the location was first noticed by Harris’ col-
league, R. S. Tarr. The site is now known as ‘‘Fern-
bank’’, a name whose origin is unknown and which is
not included in any local history archive.'°
Apparently while she was a student, Maury and Har-
ris visited the site together, for the date, May 1897, is
on the handwritten fossil identification cards.'! In this
small side valley along the shore of Cayuga Lake, Mau-
ry and Harris collected fossil freshwater shells that are
of the same mollusc genera as found in the lake today.
In 1908, Maury published a brief description of these
shells, which were deposited during a warm interglacial
stage when water in Cayuga valley was about 15-18
meters above its present level (C. J. Maury, 1908).
More recent inspections indicate the lower part of the
section to have been deposited during a high water,
warm climate period. Then there was a short period
of erosion, followed by high water again, but with a
much cooler climate. Radiocarbon dating of the plant
material in the upper portion has produced ages greater
than 50,000 years. The site remains difficult for glacial
geologists to explain because, although it correlates well
with the Don Beds of Toronto, Ontario, it remains
unique in the Cayuga Lake valley, and so far as is
known, unique in the entire Finger Lakes region.!”
Maury had a marvelous career after leaving Cornell
and during most of this time her relationship with
Harris was one of cordiality and mutual respect, at
least if the following letter Harris wrote to Branner is
typical:
“T received with pleasure your note from Brazil last sum-
mer, and I believe Dr. Derby’ has written my illustrious
student [Maury] this summer of [sic] South Africa, if it
may be possible to make the arrangements to have her
10 Personal communication, Professor Arthur Bloom, Cornell
University, June 22, 1995.
‘1 One set of samples is in the possession of Professor Arthur
Bloom at Cornell University. Who prepared the hand written iden-
tification cards is unknown, but the handwriting is very similar to
Carlotta Maury’s.
'2 For this brief summary, I am indebted to Professor Arthur L.
Bloom, Cornell University, personal communication June 22, 1995,
and the loan of a guidebook he and John H. McAndrews, Royal
Ontario Museum, prepared for the “Friends of the Pleistocene’,
35th Annual Reunion, May 19-21, 1972.
'3 Orville A. Derby (B.S. ’73; M.S. °74), student and colleague of
C. F. Hartt, did not have a Ph.D.
92 BULLETIN 350
come and look over the Museum at Rio Janeiro [sic] in
the near future.’’'*
Maury did develop a connection with Derby and the
Brazilian Geological Survey, and several years later,
Harris again wrote to Branner:
“T note what you say regarding paleontological work for
Brazil. Now it so happens that Dr. Morey [sic] has been
doing a magnificent, great piece of work for the Brazilian
Survey, and is thoroughly familiar with, presumably all,
the horizons .. . and it seems to me that she is the logical
one to take this work up [for pay] and put it through, as
she is not at leisure to do this class of work. Her great
monograph on the Brazilian fossils contains twenty-four
large quarto-plates, and is certainly on a par with, and I
think superior to, Clarke’s'> monograph on the Devonian
of Eastern Brazil. If, however, the fossils were sent here,
and she, for any reason, should be obliged to leave the
work unfinished, I will guarantee that it will be taken care
of at once by competent hands here in the laboratory.’’!°
Harris wrote to Maury after she had been to Brazil
and returned to South Africa where she was teaching
at Huguenot College:
“Feb. 9, 1914
““Miss C. J. Maury,
Huguenot College,
Cape Province,
South Africa.
““My dear Miss Maury:
“Your letter from Los Palmos was received today and
am greatly pleased at the scientific spirit shown therein.
You can depend on me for your illustrations—the more
the better; and in case the Brazilian Survey has no funds,
I shall do it just as cheerfully without. Moreover, it seems
to me that in case the Revolution is on you could send
your material and descriptions of species and I could get
them out carefully as a Bulletin of American Paleontology.
In this case your work would not be buried, Revolution
or no Revolution.
‘As to illustrations, I have got me a large, six-foot $130.
camera and am using it almost exclusively in my illustra-
tions now-a-days, and before you finally decide on your
illustrations I shall hope to send you copies of photograph-
ic reproductions that may suit you even better than line
drawings.
“It seems strange that you should be in South America
and should find so many acquaintances and friends, and
most of all I was astonished to note the mention of Pa-
checo, and I wonder if the Crandalls are any relatives of
the Crandalls here. This is interesting to me as my own
'* Unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris to John C. Branner,
October 4, 1913. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
'S John Mason Clarke (1857-1925), State Geologist for New York.
'e Unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris to John C. Branner,
October 3, 1921. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
mother’s name was Crandall. I hope to see them here some
time.
“This must be, on account of haste, a business letter,
and I will write you the gossip at some future time.
“Yours very truly,
{unsigned]
“GDH/MEH”!”
Upon her return to the United States from South
Africa, Maury was awarded the Sarah Berliner Fellow-
ship in Biological Sciences,'* created by Mr. Emile
Berliner of Washington, D. C.,in memory of his mother,
Mrs. Sarah Berliner , **. . .a woman of strikingly strong
and noble personality.” (C. J. Maury, 1917a, p. 165).
The Fellowship included a cash award of $1,000.00:
“... for studying some biologic science at any university
or museum, here or abroad—provided a definite line of
study be undertaken and a report upon the results of the
same be produced. (Anonymous, 1917, pg. 434)
Maury chose to spend part of her money mounting
an expedition to the Dominican Republic, for there
had not been any new collections made of the island’s
fossils in over 40 years (C. J. Maury, 1918). Personnel
on the expedition included two veterans of the Ecphora
trips: Karl Paterson Schmidt!? and Axel A. Olsson;
both, ‘*... had the great advantage of having been
trained in geological field work by Professor Gilbert
D. Harris, ...”” Maury received additional money to
pay for an extra assistant from the Veatch Fund for
paleontological research at Cornell which was men-
tioned earlier. Harris outlined the arrangement for Ries
in a leave request for Olsson:
“Will you kindly see that the proper authorities are con-
sulted and the necessary arrangements made for a leave
of absence for Mr. Olsson from about May to the end of
this term in order that he and Mr. Schmidt may carry out
the roughest part of the San Domingo work. . . . Dr. Maury
will have general charge of the expedition, going for a short
time in June personally, [she] will contribute $300 [for
them], whereas I shall turn over $200 of the Veatch fund
for the boy’s use. This will give them $500 in cash where-
with to collect in Gabb’s?! old localities and make sections
'7 An unsigned carbon copy of the original, but with Harris’ initials
at the bottom; Gilbert D. Harris to Carlotta Maury, February 9,
1914. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
'S In a letter to Heinrich Ries, Jacob Schurman used the title,
“Sarah Berliner Research Fellowship for Women.” February 28,
1916. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-24. RMC-KL,
Cornell.
'° Schmidt was member of the Ecphora expeditions.
20 Olsson was an instructor at Cornell at the time of the expedition.
2! William Gabb who had collected and written about the fossils
on Santo Domingo in 1873. See C. J. Maury (1918).
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 93
wherewith to determine the true sequence of Tertiary fau-
na of the West Indian region, .... There is a splendid
chance here for Dr. Maury and Cornell to distinguish
themselves in Tertiary investigation—and the means
(money, strength, brains) are at hand. Now seems the time.
[Parenthetical in the original.]’’**
From this letter, as the two men were going in May
and Maury wasn’t scheduled to arrive until June, it
would seem Olsson and Schmidt were going to be doing
field work on the island before Maury arrived.
Maury acknowledged their contribution to the ex-
pedition:
‘*‘All the heavy and arduous work of collecting was done
by Mr. Schmidt and Mr. Olsson. This involved wading
up rivers, carrying heavy packs of fossils, sleeping in the
roughest shanties, and undergoing the greatest discom-
forts, some not unmixed with danger to health and life,
but none causing them to falter in the slightest degree.”
(C. J. Maury, 1917a, p. 167).
For three weeks all went well, but then the work was
brought to an abrupt halt by yet another revolution
that ‘*. .. assumed menacing proportions.” (She seemed
to have had her problems with revolutions, first Brazil
and now the Dominican Republic.) She described the
situation this way:
“The party arrived at Monte Cristi none to [sic] soon, as
the Revolutionary party had begun shooting. All Ameri-
cans took refuge on the United States gunboat Panther,
and remained on board four days.
“The Dominican residents who did not join the rebels
fled to the beach. The town was deserted, the bush full of
rebels, bandits and malo gente. A return to the field from
the direction of Monte Cristi was obviously impossible.
‘Proceeding on to Puerto Plata we hoped to strike in
from there to Santiago, as under normal conditions a cog-
wheel railroad connects these towns. But Desiderio [De-
siderio Arias, the leader of the revolutionary forces] had
captured all the locomotives. Moreover we met at Puerto
Plata the American residents of Santiago as refugees who
had left all their possessions and secretly fled under cover
of night. Several had hidden in the bush without food for
some days. Conditions in the interior were such that we
were most urgently advised to abandon the attempt to
reach Santiago, since Desiderio was entrenched there, and
geologizing in the lonely thickets would certainly result in
our being shot and never heard of again. The sight of seven
dead men on the pier at Macoris convinced us that this
was no idle fancy. So with profound regret we were forced
to abandon the Santiago section and the study of the blue
clay of the Upper Yaqui and Nivaje, but we trust that we
may yet accomplish this on a future occasion.” (C. J. Mau-
ry 1917a, pp. 173-174).
22 G. D. Harris to Heinrich Ries, March 30, 1916. Heinrich Ries
Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-24. RMC-KL, Cornell.
Axel Olsson and Karl Schmidt added to the story; when
they were cut off from the rest of the party by the
revolution, they managed to get through the rebel front
lines by speaking German and pretending to be from
Germany rather than from the U.S. (Moore, 1978).
This time being ““German”’ was an asset for Olsson;
only two years before he had been arrested as a sus-
pected German spy while on the second Ecphora field
trip with Harris in the Carolinas.
Even after escaping the flames of revolution with her
samples, Maury’s troubles were not over. She returned
to Cornell during the winter and spring of 1916-1917:
“No sooner was work begun on her collections than it was
discovered that materials of a similar character, from the
same island, collected forty years ago, would be shortly
studied and reported upon [by Pilsbry and Johnson], thus
forestalling her in her work and relegating her types and
descriptions to the scrap-heap of synomymy [sic].
‘Weeks and months of strenuous work ensued until
finally a work of 300 pages of printed matter and 40 plates
was brought out by the privately-owned press in the geo-
logical department of Cornell University four days before
the rival work was issued! The specific names proposed
for the types described by Dr. Maury will therefore ever
hold as true names for these life forms and the great and
valuable collection will doubtless eventually become prop-
erty of the University if fire proof accommodations are
provided for its reception.” [Emphasis in the original.]
(Anonymous, 1917, p. 434).
Maury herself described the situation in these words:
“Since publication and distribution of Bulletin of Amer-
ican Paleontology, No. 29, Sections 1 and 2, comprising
the systematic discussions of our Santo Domingo fossils,
quite a number of Gabb’s 1873 shells in the Philadelphia
Academy’s collection have been described, without fig-
ures, as new species by Drs. Pilsbry and Johnson.** No
doubt a number of these are not represented in our col-
lections and should be added to the Santo Domingo fauna.
Some species, however, described as new by Drs. Pilsbry
and Johnson will prove identical with mine and will pass
in synonymy, since mine have priority. For, Section |
(pages 1—12074) of Bulletin 29 was published and distrib-
uted March 31, 1917 and Section 2 (pages 121-240), April
29, 1917, while Drs. Pilsbry and Johnson’s Advance De-
scriptions were not issued until May 4, 1917, as stated on
the cover of their separates.” (C. J. Maury, 1917b, p. 419).
23 Original Footnote: “New Mollusca of the Santo Domingan Oli-
gocene, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., designed for the April number
which was not issued in April. Advanced separates issued May 4,
NEE
24 Note that until Volume 36, Number 155, Bulletins of American
Paleontology had two different sets of page numbers. One referred
to the issue or number, and another the entire volume. Here Maury
is referring to the page numbers of the issue. The cited reference uses
the volume page numbers.
94 BULLETIN 350
The type specimens from this expedition are now in
the PRI collections.
The following year the Harris-Maury relationship
continued on the same level of cordiality and respect,
albeit with some indication of tension over the funding
of her work. Knowing what was to follow, this seems
to be the first hint of trouble. Maury wrote to Harris
about expenses incurred in obtaining some fossils from
Africa. This excerpt from her letter also illustrates the
difficulties encountered in obtaining such samples and
what had to be done to move them from the field site
to the laboratory collection.
“Replying to your letter I would say that the expenses to
be paid on the East African fossils are:
(1) Transportation from outcrop in wilderness to the
port which I think was Durban. Due to Dr. F. B. Thomp-
son, Bizara, Pondoland, East.
(2) Shipment from the East coast port to Cape Town.
(3) Transportation by rail from Cape Town to Wel-
lington where the fossils were stored a year for safety.
(4) Transportation by rail from Wellington to Cape
Town.
(5) Shipment from Cape Town to Boston.
(6) Transportation from Boston by rail to Ithaca.
Miss [illegible] has kindly paid (2),(3),(4),(5),(6) and this
loan is to be refunded to her, also any additional expenses
she may have incurred. She will tell you the various
amounts. I do not know at all what they were. We are
greatly indebted to her for advancing the money and taking
all the trouble.
“As regards (1) Dr. Thompson who collected the fossils
was most kind and did not charge for all this work nor
would he tell me the cost. But Iam sure it must have been
several pounds and I am sure some such amount should
be sent to reimburse him... .
“T left with you all the important literature on the
Bokkveldt, Port Elizabeth and Pondoland fossils. I was
never reimbursed for those pamphlets, which amounts to
10 or 12 dollars, but will present them to your department.
I also give my work and various expenses connected with
obtaining the fossils as I have no doubt the expenses of
transportation will use up or exceed the $50 remaining of
the $100 appropriation”>.
“T presume you remember that $50 only was placed in
my hands and of that I presented an accounting several
years ago.”’*°
25 The $100 was an appropriation from the Cornell University
Trustees to Harris for obtaining South African fossils from Maury,
but Harris had given her only $50 of the appropriation. This infor-
mation is contained in a letter from Heinrich Ries to Gilbert D.
Harris, November 11, 1915, and two days later Harris informed
Ries that the South African material had arrived. Gilbert D. Harris
to Heinrich Ries, November 13, 1915. Heinrich Ries Collection,
14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-24. RMC-KL, Cornell.
26 Carlotta Maury to Gilbert D. Harris, February 5, 1918. HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY.
The first definite record of a problem between Maury
and Harris is in a letter to Harris from Avery D. An-
drews acting for un-named oil companies. A later letter
in this sequence carries the letterhead of “The Carib-
bean Petroleum Company” and was signed by W. B.
Pardee.*’ Andrews’ letter, dated September 2, 1925,
was in reply to a previous letter from Harris, of which
no copy survives:
“Please pardon our delay in replying to your letter of
June concerning the paleontological work which Dr. Mau-
ry has been doing for our companies in Venezuela; but
correspondence with both London and Venezuela has been
necessary in order to reply definitely to your suggestions.
“In the first place I wish to assure you that Dr. Maury
has been acting in accordance with the original instructions
and agreements made many years ago when our work was
commenced in Venezuela. At that time we were the pio-
neers, and naturally wished to maintain the utmost secrecy
concerning our work. Now that the Venezuelan fields are
more widely known, we are willing to modify our arrange-
ments somewhat, and suggest that the following procedure
can be adopted if it appeals to you as satisfactory.
‘‘We propose that in the future fossils forwarded to Dr.
Maury shall be sent as far as possible in duplicate, and
that after her study is completed and reports made, one
of each duplicate may be retained by Cornell University
as a loan from the particular Company furnishing the fos-
sils. A list of such fossils so loaned should be furnished us
from time to time, and it should be quite clearly under-
stood that the transaction is entirely in the nature of a
loan, and that all such fossils remain the property of the
particular Company from whom they are received, and
subject to return to that company when desired.
‘‘All other terms and conditions of our arrangement with
Dr. Maury remain unaltered, and I particularly invite at-
tention to the agreement that no information accruing from
these fossils so furnished will be published without our
specific knowledge and consent.
“If this agreement meets with the approval of Cornell
University, we shall be glad to put it into effect upon receipt
of appropriate advices from them”’?*
Apparently Harris did not reply, and a few weeks later,
Andrews wrote:
“On September 2 I wrote you concerning the Paleonto-
logical work which Dr. Maury has been doing for our
companies in Venezuela. Not having received a reply, I
fear that my letter may not have been received. I have no
27 From about 1914 until the 1920s, Harris was a consultant to
an oil company in Louisiana which was part of the “Pardee Land
Company, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania”. There may have been a
connection between that earlier company and the W. B. Pardee of
the Caribbean Petroleum Company, but unfortunately the signature
on the letters cannot be read.
28 Avery D. Andrews to Gilbert D. Harris, September 2, 1925.
HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 95
desire to hasten your conclusions, but would be glad to
know whether my former letter was received and that the
matter is receiving your consideration in due course.’’?°
There is no known immediate reply to Andrews’ sec-
ond letter either, but Harris did respond the following
March, about six months later:
“T have been looking after the material you sent me some
time ago, hoping to be able to hit upon the exact horizon
from whence your material was derived; but so far without
success. Since it is all practically new no very definite
correlations can be made. But, I shall soon send you a
complete account of the paleontology of the macroscopic
forms, and the plates can be used in the field for further
collection and correlation.””*°
Harris then gave brief descriptions of several fossils in
the collection sent by Andrews; including representa-
tives of the genus Rimella which he said were, ““The
most striking molluscs in your collection ...” It is
noteworthy, however, how late Harris was with his
response and, more importantly, that his letter said
nothing about the need to keep a duplicate set of the
fossils at the University. Later this was to become quite
important.
In November of 1925, from Hastings-on-Hudson,
Maury wrote a letter to Harris which seems to suggest
their relationship was still cordial:
“‘Dear Professor Harris:
“Your letter gave me a real thrill, think of our seeing
the Opus?! with our mortal eyes! A hope long since aban-
doned!
‘“‘As Lam boarding for the time being in Yonkers [prob-
ably with or near her sister], it would be best if you would
be so kind as to send the package on to me at: 1/19 Locust
Hill Ave., Yonkers, N.Y. But Hastings-on-Hudson is best
for a permanent address when writing from time to time.
“If the package is in a bad condition perhaps, if you
asked one of the boys, like Weisboard [sic] or Olsson,they
and Mrs. Palmer** would be so good as to put on an extra
wrapping to protect it safely hither.
2? Avery D. Andrews to Gilbert D. Harris, September 25, 1925.
HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
°° Unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D. Harris to A. D. Andrews,
March 6, 1926. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
3! “Opus” probably refers to her 250 page paper on the paleon-
tology of Trinidad (C. J. Maury, 1925).
32 Norman E. Weisbord (A.B.’24, M.S.’°26), a student of Harris
who went on to work with various oil companies, e.g., Standard Oil
Company, Atlantic Refining Company, and Mobil. He spent many
years while with these companies working in South America and
the Caribbean. He became a professor of paleontology at Florida
State University in 1957. He was a charter member and great friend
of PRI. Katherine V. W. Palmer (Ph.D.’25; 1895-1982), also a stu-
dent of Harris’, a founding member of PRI and was present at the
laying of the corner stone. She was also the second director of PRI.
“T should have liked very much to have seen Mr. Olsson.
“Isn’t it fine about the Bulletins! I should think the
British Museum author on Madagascar ammonites} would
be quite a feather in your Bulletin’s cap.
“Best regards and thanks. Sincerely always,
Carlotta J. Maury [signed]”
{Emphasis in the original.]*4
The dedication in the “Opus” she mentions further
indicates the close professional relationship she had
with Harris and the respect she had for him and his
work:
“TO THE PUBLISHERS OF THE
BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY
AND
PALZONTOGRAPHICA AMERICANA
DEDICATED BY THE AUTHOR
WHO HAS WATCHED WITH ADMIRATION THE
MAKING
OF THESE PUBLICATIONS
FROM THEIR INTREPID INCEPTION
TO THEIR PRESENT SUCCESS:
WORKS FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF PALEON-
TOLOGY,
ORIGINAL AND FEARLESS
Anno amiciti@ tricesimo”’
(C. J. Maury, 1925, Pg. 157)
This peace and tranquillity, however, lasted only
another year. The following December Maury was at
Cornell working on samples from the same oil com-
pany that had earlier sent samples which Harris had
identified. While at Cornell she received a copy of a
letter that W. B. Pardee, Assistant Secretary for ‘‘The
Caribbean Petroleum Company” [at the same address
as Andrews] had written to Harris in reply to a letter
from him (no copy known):
“With reference to your [Harris’] letter of November
30th, it is our understanding that Dr. Maury has in several
instances sent specimens of fossils to different authorities
in order to obtain as much data as possible but, in all cases,
the specimens have been returned.
“There apparently has been some misunderstanding in
regard to the return of specimens for as stated in our letter
of November 19th, it is our desire to assist the Cornell
University laboratory as much as possible and we certainly
would not discriminate against Cornell. We regret the un-
pleasantness that this apparent misunderstanding has
caused but trust that matters will rectify themselves and
8 Spath (1925).
*4 Carlotta J. Maury to Gilbert D. Harris, November 19, 1925.
HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
96 BULLETIN 350
that there will be no further trouble in regard to the fos-
sils.’”3°
Harris did respond to Pardee’s letter, but apparently
not to Maury herself. A copy of that reply was for-
warded to Cornell President, Livingston Farrand, and
to Heinrich Ries, Head of the Geology Department.
Harris told the company:
“Caribbean Petroleum Company
Messrs;
“Referring to the subject over which we now have had
considerable correspondence let me state that over a year
ago I informed you that I did not consider it proper to
send materials here to be looked over and reported upon
without conforming to the regulation practice of having it
proper [sic] labeled and a provision for a duplicate set to
remain here for general reference work. You have seen fit
to send here a large collection of fossils without my consent
and have directed Miss Maury to work it up here. For-
tunately we have no objections to Miss Maury personally.
But you are taking advantage of help and conveniences
here and wholly ignoring just obligations.
“The term ends December 18th and I am asking that
you have all packed and shipped by that date as I shall
not allow work to go on here of that character beyond that
date. If in the future you will conform to the regulations
above noted I shall of course do what I can to help you
along just the same as with others. And, if I receive your
reply within 48 hours stating that you will conform strictly
to the above mentioned conditions your specimens will
be cared for till the 18th, otherwise I shall not hold myself
responsible for whatever may happen to the material.
Yours as always
G.D. Harris’’*°
Note the reference to the “duplicate set” in his re-
sponse. When Harris had examined a set of fossils for
the same company earlier, and discussed that work in
his letter of March 6, 1926, there was no record or
mention of any request for a duplicate set of the fossils
to be added to the collections in his laboratory at Cor-
nell. Apparently, he was now expecting Maury to do
something he did not do himself when he examined
fossils for the same company.
Others working on oil company material in Harris’
laboratory at the same time apparently did not disclose
detailed information about the samples. Note the sim-
3° W. B. Pardee to Gilbert D. Harris, December 2, 1926. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
36 A copy of the letter dated December 6, 1925 from Gilbert D.
Harris to the Caribbean Petroleum Company is in the Heinrich Ries
papers, 14/15/691, File 1-23, and another copy is in the President
Livingston Farrand Papers, 3/5/7, Box 20, File 20-51. RMC-KL,
Cornell.
ilarity of the disclaimers, especially the second and
third ones:
‘“‘This article is based on more than two years of field work
in Venezuela unraveling the stratigraphy and paleontology
of certain areas for one of the American [oil] companies
operating in that country. We propose here to describe
some of the new material collected during this investiga-
tion with general reference to type localities and general
age determination.
**At some future time when interests of the company for
whom the work was done permit, we hope to publish more
definite information as to the exact locatity [sic] of each
collection, the type sections, and the stratigraphic range
and age determination of the species described.” (F. Hod-
son, 1926, p. 173)
“Only descriptions of species with general localities and
general ages can be given at present, but later when the
interests of the company permit, we hope to publish def-
inite localities and stratigraphic ranges for the species.”
(H. Hodson, 1926, p. 2)
“The collections upon which this article 1s based were
made in Venezuela for an American company. Only de-
scriptions of species with general localities and general ages
can be given at present, but later when the interests of the
company permit, we hope to publish definite localities and
stratigraphic ranges for the species.” (Hodson et al., 1927,
p. 2)
A further aspect of this issue is related to Harris’
own private geological work, details of which have
been given in another section. Starting in 1921, Harris
was employed as a consultant by several oil companies
for work in Trinidad (Trinidad Petroleum Develop-
ment Company, Ltd.) and Venezuela (Standard Oil
Company of Venezuela, for which both Hodsons
worked)?’. But aside from that one time when he did
the identification work mentioned previously, Harris
does not seemed to have been employed by The Ca-
ribbean Petroleum Company. Given the situation, at
the very least, this is a major conflict of interest.
Maury’s company response to Harris’ demand went
to her by telegram, and sent in care of the Paleontology
Laboratory at Cornell:
*“Miss Charlotta [sic] J. Maury
Paleontological Laboratory
Cornell Univers., Ithaca, N.Y.
“Prof. Harris has written us giving notice that unless with-
in forty eight hours we agree to certain conditions he will
not be responsible for anything which may happen to our
fossils and materials now in his laboratory stop we therefor
[sic] request that you finish your examination and remove
7 Another former student, Axel Olsson, was working for Sinclair
Oil Company at this time and he used the laboratory facilities when-
ever he had company samples to identify.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 97
all materials at the earlies [sic] possible date and not later
than december [sic] eighteenth the end of the present term
stop we are telegraphing Prof. Harris as follows quote your
letter December sixth just received we will consider your
proposals and remove our materials as soon as practicable
but with regard to your forty eight hour ultimatum please
take notice that for any loss or injury to any of our ma-
terials in your possession we will hold you personally and
Cornell University strictly responsible in damages unquote
please keep us advised by wire
“Caribbean Petroleum Company
SSO ANS Wie
Harris replied to the telegram on December 9 by
letter:
“Caribbean Petroleum Co.
“Messrs:
“Your Postal Telegram of yesterday was duly received.
I note with surprise my, and the University’s responsibility
over your collection, sent here contrary to my wishes at
least under conditions I have never agreed to. This is a
new angle, but I accept it with of course proper compen-
sation. Your material has been here now occupying space,
you have been furnished heat, light, library and museum
facilities for some and whatever any competent committee
should judge these facilities worth, I am willing to accept[.]
Perhaps $100.00 per months [sic] would not be excessive.
Please let me hear from you before the removal of your
collection and greatly oblige[.]
“Yours always
““G.D.Harris’”?
It is not hard to imagine the confusion reigning in
the fourth floor paleontology laboratory of McGraw
Hall, with Harris sending letters to and receiving tel-
egrams from her company, and Maury trying to do her
work while getting telegrams telling her to pack up and
clear out, and all the while evidently having little, if
any, communication with Harris. Based on statements
in a letter by Ries, quoted below, very little of what
was passing between Harris and her company was be-
ing communicated to her by Harris. She was apparently
hearing enough, however, to feel very pressured. Fi-
nally, perhaps in desperation, on December 10, Maury
38 Copy of a telegram (night letter)from Caribbean Petroleum
Company to Carlotta Maury, December 7-8, 1926. Original in Liv-
ingston Farrand Papers, 3/5/7. Box 20, File 20-51; copy in Heinrich
Ries Papers, 14/15/691, File 1-23. RMC-KL, Cornell.
*° Letter from G. D. Harris to Caribbean Petroleum Company,
December 9, 1926. A copy is in Livingston Farrand Papers, 3/5/7,
Box 20, File 20-51, in Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, File 1-23.
RMC-KL, Cornell. Also, an unsigned carbon copy on “Paleonto-
logical Laboratory, Cornell University” letterhead, is at PRI. HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY.
turned to Heinrich Ries, Head of the Department of
Geology, in a letter on which she gave the department
as the return address:
““My dear Prof. Ries:
‘““May I lay before you as Head of the Geological De-
partment of Cornell University, a matter which relates to
the University policy towards commercial companies that
are carrying on research in the University’s laboratories?
I wish also to protest against Prof. Harris’ threat to eject
the material of the company that I represent within 48
hours unless the conditions he imposes are agreed to.
“The company I represent has always been most cour-
teous in its attitude towards the University, and desirous
of returning any favors possible in recognition of the priv-
ilege of using from time to time the books and fossils
necessary for identifying their fossils. A very important
collection comprising the first lower Eocene material ever
found in the entire Caribbean and Northern South Amer-
ican region was presented to the Geological Department
by them some years ago. Were it possible, this depositing
of duplicate, labeled sets and types in the University lab-
oratories would have been continued and a few weeks ago,
the company asked me to deposit duplicates of the fossils
upon which I am now working.
“But I wrote back advising most strongly against this-
because [sic] I saw that my company was to be betrayed.
The University was being used as a decoy to capture a
very important set of fossilsfor [sic] the use of another
company whose interests lie in the same field.
“Tt is a fact obvious to all that this other company is
using as its laboratory the paleontological research labo-
ratory of the University, practically to the exclusion of
everyone else. The students are perfectly aware of this and
I have heard it much criticized.
“‘As far as I am concerned I took both my degrees at
Cornell. My Dominican collection is deposited here, also
the Eocene I spoke of, and many casts of my Brazilian
types. I have held two fellowships, one of the University,
one from outside, but the work was done here. I cannot
but think that the books I have published coming out from
this Department have given credit to the University, no-
tably my Monograph for the Brazilian Government, but
others as well. Indeed you cannot take up any work on the
Tertiary of the Caribbean or Northern South or Central
America, without seeing constant references to the work
I have done.
“In token of my affection for the University, for years
I have left in my will a legacy of ten thousand dollars.
“‘T mention these details so you may know that I am not
merely using the University’s laboratory and giving noth-
ing in return.
“T know I am here now only by courtesy of the Uni-
versity, but I wish to ask why, if the University grants the
privilege of research here to one Commercial Company,
it should deny it to another? Why should one company
be granted an entire laboratory for a year, and another be
denied the use of a table for a few weeks? Why should one
98 BULLETIN 350
company have the right to say to another, if you do not
give me your fossils all labelled for my use in the field in
which we are rivals, they will be confiscated!
“Very truly yours,
[Signed]
“(Carlotta J. Maury)”
[Emphasis in the original.]*°
Accompanying Maury’s original double-spaced let-
ter in the Ries files is a badly typed single-spaced copy,
perhaps typed by Ries himself to keep this problem
from reaching the department secretary (for obvious
reasons), and at the bottom of page two of the copy is,
“PS. I enclose Prof. Harris’ letter to the company and
their telegram reply to me.”’ Apparently Ries made the
copy for President Livingston Farrand and included
those items with the copy, all of which were forwarded
by Ries to President Farrand.*! This letter from Maury
may have caught Ries by surprise and he may not have
been very well informed as to what was happening only
a few floors above him. This would be a reasonable
assumption, considering the very strained professional
and personal relationships that existed among the de-
partmental faculty.
In the Ries papers is a small un-signed and un-dated
note in Ries’ handwriting. It appears to be the text of
a telegram sent to the Caribbean Petroleum Company
either just before or after he received Maury’s letter.
Determining who really instigated the telegram 1s com-
plicated by the fact that both Ries and Maury had
residences on Eddy Street in Ithaca at this time. The
telegram read:
“Please wire me (Eddy Street address) copy of letter by
Prof. Harris containing stipulations referred to in first
paragraph of his letter of Dec. six, nineteen twenty six.”
[the word stop written and crossed out.]*”
Given the fact that Ries included the company reply
to his telegram with the material he gave the Cornell
President, he may have been working on the situation
before Maury’s letter reached him. Ries’ letter to the
University President, which accompanied his copy of
Maury’s letter to him, is dated December 11, only one
day after Mary sent her letter to Ries. The quotation
given below is from the original letter Ries sent to
Farrand. Annotations are added from what appears to
be a draft of this letter which is with the Ries Papers.
40 Carlotta J. Maury to Heinrich Ries, December 10, 1926. Hein-
rich Ries papers, 14/15/691, File 1-23. RMC-KL, Cornell.
41 Badly typed copy of Carlotta J. Maury’s letter to Heinrich Ries
isin the Livingston Farrand Papers; 3/5/7. Box 20, File 20-51. RMC-
KL, Cornell.
42 Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, File 1-23, RMC-KL, Cornell.
In places the draft has slightly different wording from
what he sent to Farrand. Again, it appears Ries was
typing his own letters to avoid using the department
secretary.
‘““My dear President Farrand.
“I [Ries] submit herewith a protest received from Dr.
Carlotta J. Maury, relating to her treatment in the Pale-
ontological Laboratory, as well as several communications
bearing on the matter.
“This case is brought to your attention on the advice of
Dean Ogden, as it involves important matters of Univer-
sity policy and also unfortunately presents other serious
aspects.
“Some explanation of the situation is necessary in order
that you many better understand the conditions, although
the bearing or significance of all the facts stated may not
be clear until after you have read the attached commu-
nications.
“The Paleontological Laboratory of Cornell contains a
remarkably fine collection of Tertiary fossils, many of them
type specimens [“‘species” used in the Ries copy]. I have
always assumed that there was no objection to persons
using it for consultation and reference, and I do know that
some of our graduates who have been engaged in field
work for oil companies, have brought their fossil collec-
tions back to Ithaca, and individually have spent several
months at a time identifying [their specimens]. I have
never heard of their being charged for this privilege.
“T understand that Prof. Harris has done considerable
work for the Stand Oil Company [Standard Oil] or its
subsidiaries. There is of course no objections to this. [The
last phrase was left out of the typed copy in the Ries
Papers.] Further more for over a year Mr. Hodson*? and
his wife, assisted at times by a stenographer and others
have practically monopolized the working space in what
is known as the Research room of Prof. Harris’ quarters.
They have been engaged in working up fossils which they
collected in Venezuela for an oil company, said to be Stan-
dard. During this period they have worked days and nights,
have used any quantity of electricity and water, and so far
as I know their company has not paid the University one
cent for the privilege, Moreover to facilitate their work
electric wires for lights, etc. had been strung in such a
careless manner that the insurance inspector reported it.
These were altered at the University expense.
“T once asked Prof. Harris if Hodson’s company was
going to leave with the University a named duplicate set
of fossils, and was told that he ‘supposed’ they would, but
he did not state that the privileges extended oil represen-
tatives were conditional upon their giving the Department
a set of duplicates.
“‘Hodson’s Ph.D. thesis was on the genus Turritella, the
specimens of which were collected by him during his work
43 Floyd Hodson (Ph.D.’26) and Helen Kind Hodson, charter
members of PRI. For examples see F. Hodson (1926), H. Hodson
(1926), and Weisbord (1926).
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 99
for the oil company in Venezuela. I was a member of his
graduate committee, and after examining his thesis com-
mented on the fact that although he had described a num-
ber of new forms, there was no definite information re-
garding the localities or horizons from which they came.**
Mr. Hodson explained this by saying that the company
for which he was working had not yet obtained control of
the property from which these fossils came, and that con-
sequently for commercial reasons they did not want this
information made public.
“I [Ries] mention this because Hodson’s and Miss Mau-
ry’s companies are rivals, working in the same general
region (Venezuela), so that if Hodson’s company consid-
ered it proper to suppress this information, and no objec-
tion seems to have been raised against it by Prof. Harris,
it seems a little curious that the Caribbean Company should
be criticized for doing what is somewhat the same thing.
In other words if the latter deposited its specimens labeled
as to locality and horizon in the collection it might be very
useful for Hodson’s company.
‘The following facts have been given me by Miss Maury.
During the past sixteen years Miss Maury has had ap-
proximately 8 boxes of fossils sent her by the Caribbean
Company for identification. She had deposited here one
large collection which she worked up for the predecessor
of her present company.
“The 8 lots referred to above, had few or no duplicates
and consequently no extra collection could be left. Al-
though Prof. Harris expressed a desire to get duplicates of
the fossils which Miss Maury worked over, he never made
any stipulation to her. Moreover all his communication
to her company have been sent without her knowledge.
“In the winter of 1925-26, while Miss Maury was in
Egypt, the Caribbean company, not knowing that she was
away, sent a box of fossils addressed to her at Ithaca. Prof.
Harris saw the box and wrote to the company suggesting
that he could do the work**, This he was allowed to do,
and was paid for it. So faras Miss Maury knows he retained
no duplicate set.
“About May or June 1926 the Caribbean Company ad-
vised Miss Maury that another box of specimens had been
sent to Ithaca for her to identify, so she came up here and
worked on it. No set of duplicates was available to leave
here, and Prof. Harris raised no objection.
“In October 1926 Miss Maury came here to work up
another small collection. This material fills a box about
20 x 18 x 18 inches. In working it up she occupies two
small tables over which there hung one electric light. She
has not used over [“not” and “over” scratched out in the
Farrand copy, but left in the typed copy in the Ries Papers]
about 12 books for consultation, not over 6 of which be-
longed to Prof. Harris. There were very few duplicate spec-
44 This work was published without listing any localities (F. Hod-
imens in this last lot of material sent, and the collection
has been returned to N.Y. City. The [These] data given in
this last paragraph have a bearing on the statements made
in Prof. Harris’ last letter.
“TI am informed also by Miss Maury that in this last
piece of work she has referred chiefly to her own collection
from San [sic] Domingo which she presented to the Uni-
versity. She has for ethical reasons been careful not to look
at the material collected by Hodson but she has noticed
in passing by the specimens are identified merely by num-
bers or signs.
“IT have given you above such facts as are in my pos-
session, and which it seems to me have some bearing on
the attached letters. As the matter is a serious one involv-
ing University policy towards commercial companies, I
feel that it deserves being called to your attention. Prof.
Harris will no doubt wish to explain his attitude, and I
think he should be given an opportunity to, Miss Maury
also stands ready to answer any questions you may wish
to ask her.
“It is gratifying to feel that Cornell possess a paleon-
tological collection sufficiently valuable to be regarded as
[the ‘“‘as” is missing in the copy in the Ries Papers] a
standard for reference, and I believe that all workers should
be given equal privileges to consult it so long as the Uni-
versity rights are properly safeguarded, and it involves no
interference with the work of our regular students, either
graduate or undergraduate. I cannot see however that the
representatives of any one company should be allowed to
enjoy a monopoly.
“It is also to be regretted that any member of the faculty
should appear to demand personal compensation for the
granting of privileges which do not belong to him, as such
action cannot fail to be prejudicial to the reputation of the
Department and also the University.
“Yours very truly,
[Signed] H. Ries’’*°
While Ries was sending his letter to Farrand, Maury
received the following from Avery D. Andrews, dated
December 10:
*“Many thanks for your letter of December 9th just re-
ceived. While the Caribbean Petroleum Company does
not itself care to make any complaint against Professor
Harris, we certainly have no objection to you, as an Alum-
nus of Cornell, placing such facts before the Authorities
as you may desire.
“In this connection, I have just received a further letter
[December 9, 1926], presumably from Professor Harris.
The signature is typewritten and over it are the penciled
initials ‘“G.D.H.°. I enclose a copy of this letter which is
exact in all particulars, including punctuation. I mention
4° Heinrich Ries to Livingston Farrand, December | 1, 1926. Org-
son, 1926). The list of localities was kept separate and never pub-
lished; it is in the PRI archives.
45 Harris’ letter of March 6, 1926 about this work is quoted earlier;
see page 21.
inal is in the Livingston Farrand Papers, 3/5/7, Box 20, File 20-51.
A typed copy, with minor differences, is in the Heinrich Ries Papers,
14/15/691, File 1-23. RMC-KL, Cornell.
100
this because it seems rather a crude production to come
from a great University.
“Professor Harris apparently wishes us to pay him per-
sonally $100 a month for the use of ‘heat, light, library
and museum facilities’ of Cornell University. If the proper
authorities of Cornell see fit to make a charge against all
persons using these facilities of the University, we will pay
our share; but we certainly do not intend to pay any sum
whatever to Professor Harris personally for the use of any
such facilities which do not belong to him, nor have we
any intention of replying to his letter.
“You are at liberty to show this letter to the Authorities,
if you so desire.
“Trusting that you will very soon be able to close this
work and ship all of our materials, and with best wishes,
Iam
“Very sincerely yours,
“Signed Avery D. Andrews’’*’
Andrews also sent another telegram at about the same
time as the above letter:
“Miss Carlotta J. Maury
“125 Eddy St. Ithaca, N.Y.
“Letters referred to by Professor Harris practically iden-
tical first paragraph his letter December sixth of which you
have copy stop he stated other companies left duplicates
for museum and inasmuch as you had asked help from
members of their surveys and made comparisons with
their specimens without reciprocating it placed you in em-
barrassing position.
“Andrew D. Andrews”
Ries added a typed note to the transcription of Maury’s
telegram, quoted above (based on information presum-
ably provided to him by Maury) which he sent to Pres-
ident Farrand:
““Miss Maury denies the general character of the accusation
in last part of message. She claimed that she used only
Weisbord and Olson [sic] collections for reference, and
that these two men have used her books and specimens
for reference.
On the same telegram copy in the Farrand Papers is a
handwritten note by Ries not present on the copy in
the Ries Papers:
“Miss M. claims that in addition to consulting her own
collections deposited here she has used only Weisbords
[sic] and Olsons [sic], (This was a thesis), and that they
have referred to her books and specimens, and she has
given them help.” [There was a pencil line drawn from
47 Letter from Avery D. Andrews to Carlotta J. Maury, December
10, 1926. Livingston Farrand Papers 3/5/7, Box 20, File 20-51; and
a copy is in the Heinrich Ries Papers 14/15/691, File 1-23. RMC-
KL, Cornell.
BULLETIN 350
this pencil note up to “their surveys” in the telegram tran-
scription.] [Parenthetical in the original.]**
The day this telegram was sent, Maury wrote to Ries
again:
“In connection with the statement that Professor Harris
told the Company I represent over a year ago that certain
conditions must be followed if their fossils were to be
studied here, I would like to ask this question: —
“Why was it right for him to study the Rimella zone
box in my absence under circumstances that would be
wrong for me? He reported on this box of fossils and was
paid to do so.
“If he retained duplicates where are they? And why were
they not pointed out to me now when I was studying
similar horizons and the person most entitled to have
access to them for comparison?*?
“Perhaps I might add that the Caribbean Petroleum
Company has international afhliations, with offices in New
York, London and the Hague and is, I think, associated
with the Royal Dutch Shell Company.
“Very truly yours,
Carlotta J. Maury [signed]°°
At this point it seems President Farrand asked Harris
for an explanation. What Harris may or may not have
said in that interview is known only from notes of
Heinrich Ries. Ries was certainly not an unbiased ob-
server, and he furthermore put these notes together
several years after Harris had retired:
“*.. the case of Dr. Maury (C.U.Ph.D.) who came to Cor-
nell to check up some Tertiary fossils for the company she
was working for. Harris demanded that she leave a com-
pletely labeled set with the University as he claimed others
had done (a statement which is not true) and issued an
ultimatum to her company that failing to do this he would
demand payment for use of laboratory facilities, and that
if the company did not meet this condition all their ma-
terial would have to be removed in 48 hours or he would
not be responsible for it. Miss Maury took the matter to
the President, to whom she presented a copy of all cor-
respondence (as well as one to myself). Harris when ques-
tioned by the President in my presence denied that he had
48 Transcription of telegram from Avery D. Andrews to Carlotta
Maury, December 13, 1926. Original transcription with pencil note
added is in the Livingston Farrand Papers, 3/5/7, Box 20, File 20-
51; the other copy without the additional pencil note is in the Hein-
rich Ries Papers 14/15/691, File 1-23. RMC-KL, Cornell.
4° Here, and in the previous paragraph, Maury refers to the work
Harris reported in his letter to Andrews on March 6, 1926 quoted
above. In this letter there was no mention of any duplicate set of
fossils being left at Cornell.
°° Carlotta J. Maury to Heinrich Ries, December 13, 1926. Liv-
ingston Farrand Papers, 3/5/7, Box 20, File 20-51. RMC-KL, Cor-
nell.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 101
ever made such a demand.” [Parentheticals in the origi-
nae
In another set of notes, Ries remembered the events
this way:
““Miss Maury, a Cornell Ph.D., had a bunch of fossils to
identify, which she had collected in connection with her
field work for an oil company. She assumed that she might
have the courtesies of the department and come here to
identify them.
“Shortly after she arrived Harris demanded that she
leave a duplicate set here. She replied that she was not
sure that she had a compete duplicate set, and furthermore
would have to get permission of her company to do so.
“Harris thereupon wrote a letter to her company re-
peating his demand. He said if it was not complied with
by a certain date she would have to get out, and failing to
do so he would not be responsible for what happened to
her material. If she remained [at Cornell] a payment of
$100 a month for the use of space, books, light, and col-
lections. He did not say this was to be paid to the Uni-
versity. Miss Maury came to me with a copy of the entire
correspondence (which I [Ries] still have). I took the mat-
ter to the Dean and he ruled that the President should
handle it. I therefor [sic] told Miss M. to see Pres. Farrand,
which she did, and also gave him a copy of all the letters.
Farrand called Harris and myself into his office, and asked
the former about it, and whether he had demanded any
money of Miss M’s company. Harris denied that he had,
and Farrand did not contradict him, even though he knew
Harris was not telling the truth. He [Farrand] later gave
me the lame excuse that a professor could do about what
he pleased in his quarters.’*>?
Based upon the surviving letters, Ries seemed to have
the facts correct, and one therefore may assume he is
correct about what transpired at his meeting with Far-
rand and Harris.
What we know about what Harris put in writing
comes from an unsigned carbon copy of a letter he
wrote on “Paleontological Laboratory” letterhead to
the Cornell President on December 16, five days after
Ries filed his letter with President Farrand. Note how
different Harris sounds in this letter to the University
5! Un-signed and un-dated typed notes, believed to have been
prepared by Heinrich Ries after or shortly before his retirement in
1939. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 3, File 3-2. RMC-KL,
Cornell.
>? Although these notes are un-signed notes, the use of phrases
such as, “*.. . after 1 became head, . . .” suggest they were written by
Heinrich Ries. Based on a note attached to one set of these notes,
at least one version was prepared in 1944 for Charles Nevin who
was then head of the department. Among the Ries papers are at least
three different versions of these notes, each evidently prepared at a
different time. Heinrich Ries papers, 14/15/691, Box 3, File 3-2.
RMC-KL, Cornell.
President after their meeting than he did in his earlier
letters to the oil company personnel.
““My dear Dr. Farrand:
“If there really seem to be any dangers of ‘foreign en-
tanglements’ at any time, I wish to suggest a way, a rather
poor one however, but a certain one out.
“I have had occasion to bring here a considerable num-
ber of books, equipments of various kinds, private collec-
tions &c, presuming, I think correctly, that the value to
work here pays floor-space rental. I confess to having
worked hard to have various outsiders, oil companies and
others send me materials here to work up, feeling that the
space they take up is very trivial in proportion to the help
they give investigational studies, and best of all feeling that
in practically every case such material will forever remain
where last worked over.
“Now, if in handling these materials I have overstepped
my proer [sic] [proper] authority relative to University
matters, I am anxious to apologize most humbly. But so
far as partiality to outside individuals or corporations is
concerned, anything but the most stupid type of self in-
terest would check the slightest leanings.
“If necessary to protect the University from criticism I
can build some roomy apartment, off the University prop-
erty and collect therein ally [sic] my own and these various
collections that might possibly cause embarrassments and
hence relieve all anxieties. But the expense involved would
be considerable and the proximity to my work of my own
books instruments, and the various collections while at
the University seem to make the carrying out of this plan
advisable only as a last resort.
“Your most sincerely,
Unsigned” **
A few days after Harris wrote this version of an
apology letter to Farrand (there seems to be no evi-
dence that he ever corresponded with Carlotta Maury
again), Maury was again writing to President Farrand.
Based on her letter, Harris, or Farrand repeating Har-
ris, must have said something to her about how much
work she did in the paleontology lab, and implied that
she spent vast amounts of time there doing work for
her company, for she seemed to be more than a little
upset when she wrote this on December 18:
““My dear President Farrand:
“That you may know the slight amount of commercial
work done by me in the paleontological laboratory of Cor-
nell, I give the following list of a// my commercial reports,
the number of pages, and when recorded, the number of
days:
“1912 Large report published in Jour. Phila. Acad. Sci-
ence, in their de luxe [sic], 100th birthday, volume. I wrote
*3 Unsigned carbon copy of letter from Gilbert D. Harris to Liv-
ingston Farrand, President, Cornell University, December 16, 1926.
HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
102 BULLETIN 350
the report and paid Professor Harris to make the drawings.
All the fossils which were described were brought back by
me from South America and presented by the Company
I represented to Cornell University. I was not paid to write
this report and it was chiefly purely scientific.
1915 About 1/2 dozen shells sent for identification.
Report maybe 2 pages. No copy retained.
“1922 May 29, A few shells.
Report 5 pages, including summary of past results.
“1924 December 20.
Report 8 pages.
“1925 June.
Report 4 1/2 pages.
“1926 June.
Report 11 1/2 pages. 14 days.
“1926 Dec.
Report 67 pages. 56 days.
“From this you may see how trivial the matter in its
relation to the use of the Universities [sic] facilities really.
[sic] has been. It is only this last report which has taken
any time worth considering.
“In my letter of protest to Professor Ries, I have men-
tioned some of the non-commercial Memoirs and Mono-
graphs that I have written in the University’s laboratories.
All have been published and for the most part the collec-
tions and types are deposited in the Geological Museum.
All, indeed, except the types belonging to the Brazilian
Government which of course I had to return to Brazil, but
whenever possible casts were made of these Brazilian types
and are also deposited in the University’s Geological Mu-
seum.
“My own feeling is this: Iam deeply appreciative of the
opportunities and privileges the University has afforded
me to carry on my scientific work here, but I feel that I
have given in return as far as I could. I have given collec-
tions; and I cannot but think that I have also brought
scientific credit to the University.
“Very sincerely yours
Carlotta J. Maury [signed]
“P.S. I have not retained for myself a single specimen of
all the various collections I have studied. Everything in
my power to give, I gave to the University.” [All emphases
in the original.}°*
Two additional letters from this controversy bring
it almost to a close. The first is from Maury to Farrand
on December 28 and then his reply on the 29:
““My dear President Farrand: —
““As under the present circumstances it 1s not possible
for me to complete here a paleontological report I am
engaged on for the Brazilian Government, I would like to
‘4 Carlotta J. Maury to Livingston Farrand, December 18, 1926.
Livingston Farrand Papers, 3/5/7, Box 20, File 20-51. RMC-KL,
Cornell.
return soon to New York. But, having made a protest
against unfair discrimination, I am ready to stand by, if it
seems best to do so.
“Should you desire it, I would be glad to answer any
question you might wish to ask me. And I enclose a mem-
orandum of my principal monographs and memoirs and
collections.
“Since there are in the Geological Department a great
quantity of Venezuelan fossils belonging to the Standard
[Oil Company] and affiliated Companies, it is difficult to
explain the feverish desire manifested to obtain the few I
held in trust, except in one way. Fossils from our highly
productive wells would be illuminating for comparison
with those from experimental drillings. They might be very
helpful in the selection of land tobe [sic] leased for oil
exploitation, in the same neighborhood.
“Whatever the motive, two facts remain:- the 48 hour
ultimatum and the $100. a month, retroactive, private
charge for use of University property.
‘‘Most vital to me is the question whether I am to be
debarred from all future privilege of studying in the Geo-
logical Department, and even of making comparisons with
my own collections and types therein deposited.
“Very sincerely yours
Carlotta Maury [signed]”
The following memorandum accompanied the above
letter.
“COLLECTIONS DEPOSITED IN THE GEOLOGICAL
DEPARTMENT BY C. J. MAURY
“Freshwater Mollusca Central and Western New York.
Cayuga Lake Basin Interglacial Mollusca.°°
French and Belgian, Oligocene, Miocene and Pliocene
Fossils.
Trinidad Eocene, and Venezuelan Cretaceous Fossils.
South African, Permian, G/ossopteris flora.
Pondoland Cretaceous Fossils.
Port Elizabeth Tertiary Fossils.
Dominican Republic Miocene Fossils. A large and beau-
tiful collection obtained by my own expedition.
Brazilian, artificial casts of types, returned to Rio de
Janeiro.
(For further detail ask Professor Ries, Head of the Depart-
ment)
PRINCIPAL MEMOIRS PUBLISHED BY C. J. MAURY
“Paleontology of Trinidad Island. Chiefly Eocene. Jour.
Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1912.
Santo Domingo Type Sections and Fossils. Bull. Amer.
Paleont. Nos. 29 and 30, 1917.
Tertiary Fossils Porto Rico. Ann. New York Acad. Sci.,
Scientific Surver Porto Rico & Vol. 3 Pt. 1, 1920
55 This was the material from the Fernbank site on the western
shore of the lake; see page 91.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 103
Paleontology of Trinidad Island.Miocene. Bull. Amer. Pa-
leont. No. 42, 1925.
Tertiary and Cretaceous Fossils of Brazil. (Fosseis Teriarios
do Brasil &) Servico Geologico do Brasil, Monographia 4,
1924-25.
Also an annotated Catalogue of the Mollusca of the Gulf
of Mexico, and many minor articles on correlation, new
species, new formations, &, in Science,; Amer. Jour. Sci.;
Nautilus; Jour. Geology.
(All these are deposited in the main University Library).”
[All emphases in the original.]*°
Farrand’s reply:
““My dear Miss Maury:
“T have your letter of yesterday and am not as yet in a
position to make any positive statement. I am quietly
gathering such information as I can as to the situation in
general and have no doubt in due time a satisfactory mode
of procedure in the laboratory will be worked out.
“‘Under these circumstances, I see no reason why you
should remain in Ithaca, for I think I have before me the
essential facts from you which would be significant. As to
the notice to remove your property, I believe that is not
a question of immediate embarrassment, and as to a
monthly charge for the use of University property, that if
made at all, should be worked out on a basis applicable
to all such users.
*“As to your own future relation to the Department, I
can make no statement because that is obviously a per-
sonal situation. I know of no institutional reason why the
same privileges should not be extended to you as to any
other graduate or inquirer but I know of no way to remove
mutual personal prejudices. .
“In conclusion I can only say that I trust a working basis
will be arrived at after further consideration.
“Sincerely yours,
Livingston Farrand”>’
Maury wrote one last letter to Farrand before de-
parting from Ithaca:
“Before leaving I would like to thank you for your letter,
and to express appreciation of the desire of justice to all
that you have shown. I am very glad you intend to place
research work of industrial concerns at the University on
an equitable basis. The University should have a proper
return, but I think a Company should not be required to
surrender materials potentially of great commercial value.
°° Letter and memorandum from Carlotta J. Maury to Livingston
Farrand, President, Cornell University, December 28, 1926. Liv-
ingston Farrand Papers, 3/4/7, Box 20, File 20-51. A copy of the
letter only is in the Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, File 1-23.
RMC-KL, Cornell
>»? Livingston Farrand to Carlotta J. Maury, December 29, 1926.
Livingston Farrand Papers, 3/4/7, Box 20, File 20-51; additional
copy in the Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, File 1-23. RMC-KL,
Cornell.
“T am not an economic geologist. The Caribbean Com-
pany has thirty-eight oil geologists working in the Mara-
caibo field. They look on me as a scholar in pure pale-
ontology and stratigraphy, and I am glad that they have
this confidence in me. It’s going to be hard to do the work
away from the University, but I shall manage somehow.
“T should be very sorry to have you think that I came
knowing I was unwelcome. Had I known, I should not
have come. Professor Harris was writing to my company
without my knowledge. I returned, as I supposed, on the
old friendly basis, I wrote, called on arriving, and asked
at his office if I might have a table. He seemed very pleas-
ant. Ten days before the eviction I was invited to dine at
his house and all seemed kindly.
“Yet I lost trust in his sincerity.
“TI am glad I have had no altercation with Professor
Harris. When he saw me replacing books and trays, he
said; [Harris] ‘What, you aren’t going are you?’ [Maury]
‘Of course. You do not suppose I would remain under
these conditions!’ [Harris] “What is going on? I can’t make
it all out. I seem to be Nobody!’ [Maury] *A great deal of
injustice is going on!’ [Harris] ‘Come and tell me about
it.’ [Maury] ‘I do not wish to discuss it.’ That was all.
“T could not do otherwise than protect the materials and
interests entrusted to me, and it seems right to me to have
protested against injustice and attempted betrayal. I do
not think it will be of any help to me, but it may prevent
the reoccurrence of such an incident which is very unfor-
tunate for those involved, and injurious to the reputation
of the University. Conditions of commercial research in
the Geological Department, being upon no established ba-
sis, now almost invite attempts to wrest valuable facts or
materials from seemingly weaker rivals.
“Yet 1am more sorry than I can say that this has taken
place. For Ithaca can never seem the same. I may never
return, But my affection of the University, though sad-
dened, remains otherwise unchanged.”’**
There was, however, a change in her affection for
the University. Almost exactly a year later, December
16, 1927, Farrand received the following:
“Dear President Farrand:
“Lately a representative of the Cornell Alumni fund
called. In reply to the request for money I said that I had
just cancelled my long-standing legacy to the University.
It was my purpose to double instead of cancelling this gift.
But after waiting a year and receiving no reply to my
protest regarding Professor Harris’ very unscrupulous ac-
tion I conclude that you condone it.
‘He is an old man,*? and was my highly esteemed Pro-
fessor and friend. I wished him no harm but thought he
should be restrained from trampling on others.
58 Carlotta J. Maury to Livingston Farrand, January 4, 1927. Liv-
ingston Farrand Papers, 3/5/7, Box 20, File 20-51. RMC-KL, Cor-
nell.
’° Harris was 62 on October 2, 1926.
104 BULLETIN 350
‘Although I told the Alumni representative to say noth-
ing, perhaps after all you should know that this matter has
cost the University a loss of twenty thousand dollars.
“Sincerely yours,
“Carlotta J. Maury [signed]°°
Farrand made an attempt to smooth the situation, but
to no avail:
“T have your letter of December 16th. Naturally I regret
the situation which arose between Professor Harris and
yourself a year ago and which I made every effort to clarify.
As I told you at the time, there can be no institutional
discrimination of any kind. Personal differences are un-
fortunately beyond administrative control and in the last
analysis such differences seemed to form the crux of the
situation at that time. I feel sure that Professor Harris is
willing to conform to any general procedures which may
be deemed equitable and wise. I am, of course, very sorry
that you do not think you can work out with him the
personal difficulty which arose between you but after re-
peated conferences I could not see a definite admissible
step which would insure satisfaction to you and all con-
cerned.
“Sincerely yours’’°!
A few months later Farrand received what appears
to the last word from Maury and he forwarded a copy
to Ries:
‘“‘Dear President Farrand:
‘The exposure of the corruption of the Sinclair-Standard
methods may open your eyes to the truth of the situation
in the paleontological department when I appealed in vain
to you for fair play.
“Mr Sinclair has been Professor Harris’ hero for many
years, unhappily replacing his admiration for the great men
of the intellectual world. The Sinclair methods are the
ideals of the paleontological department. The same deceit,
and falseness, and fraud, is there, The ‘oil smudge’ is not
only on the Republican party°?. It is also Academic. Hence
°° Carlotta J. Maury to Livingston Farrand, December 16, 1927.
Livingston Farrand Papers, 3/5/7, Box 20, File 20-51. RMC-KL,
Cornell.
*! Carbon copy of a letter from Livingston Farrand to Carlotta J.
Maury, December 22, 1927. Livingston Farrand Papers, 3/5/7, Box
20, File 20-51. RMC-KL, Cornell.
©? Maury was probably referring to the scandals involving the leas-
ing of Naval Oil Reserve land which rocked the political world in
the 1920s. In 1922 President Harding’s Secretary of the Interior, A.
B. Fall, allowed Harry Sinclair to lease Tea Pot Dome (Wyoming)
area and Edward Doheny (Pan-American Oil) to lease the Elk Hills
(California) area without any competitive bidding in return for siz-
able “‘contributions.”’ Although Fall was convicted of accepting a
bribe and went to prison, both Sinclair and Doheny were acquitted.
Sinclair did go to prison for contempt of court for refusing to answer
questions and attempting to influence a jury (Allen, 1931). Details
of the scandal would have been in the headlines in 1927-28.
I sadly withdrew my allegiance from Cornell. Not from
personal resentment.
“Sincerely yours
“Carlotta J. Maury’’®
Farrand wrote to Ries:
‘Dear Professor Ries:
“For your personal information and not for quotation
in any way I enclose a copy of a letter just received from
Dr. Maury. Is there anything at all in her charge? Don’t
take this up with Professor Harris, as I see no reason for
re-opening that matter unless you think it advisable to do
so.
“Sincerely yours
[Signed] Livingston Farrand®*
The bequest had been withdrawn and now her “‘alle-
giance”’ was withdrawn as well. As a result of what she
felt was a breach of professional ethics, she severed all
ties with Cornell and with Harris. This situation ap-
parently was not a total secret, for many years later in
a set of typed notes Ries left the final word with regard
to Carlotta Maury, Harris, and Cornell:
““Miss Maury had in her will left an appreciable sum of
money to Cornell for visiting lecturers in Geology. She
canceled this bequest after the episode . . .”’®
As mentioned earlier, by the time the Maury incident
occurred, Harris had been working for several years as
a consultant for various oil companies. Why he appears
to have stepped beyond the bounds of propriety in this
One case is not clear. Perhaps he was struck with a
touch of avarice, for the oil companies apparently were
paying him quite well and he saw an opportunity to
raise his standing with his company, and concomi-
tantly his salary. Perhaps the mixture of commercial
and scientific activities that were being conducted in
his laboratory at that time blurred the distinction be-
tween them in his mind. Was it a case of his temper
taking control of his actions? If so, what made him
angry? He left no record of his motivation, but Carlotta
J. Maury left little doubt as to her feelings.
°3 Carlotta J. Maury to Livingston Farrand, President, Cornell
University, March 19, 1928. Original letter is in the Livingston
Farrand Papers, 3/5/7, Box 20, File 20-51. A typed copy is in the
Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691. RMC-KL, Cornell.
°4 Livingston Farrand to Heinrich Ries, March 20, 1928. Heinrich
Ries Papers, 14/15/691. RMC-KL, Cornell.
°> Un-signed notes prepared by Heinrich Ries (uses the phrase,
“* after I became head... .’’). Based on a note attached to another
draft in the file, these were prepared in 1944 for Charles Nevin who
was then head of the department. In the Ries papers are several
versions of these notes and each set differ but slightly in content.
Heinrich Ries papers, 14/15/691, Box 3, File 3-2. RMC-KL, Cornell.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 105
Based on the many letters and memos which Harris
wrote to Ries and the other department heads, some
of which have been quoted in a previous section, his
difficulty with Maury seems to fit into a pattern of
defensiveness and self-preservation. Some of this de-
fensiveness 1s apparent in his letters to Maury. Harris
does not refer to her as “Dr. Maury”, the title she is
given in some of the company correspondence and one
that he had used for her in previous years, even though
she received her Ph.D. under his direction. Perhaps
this is related to the fact that he never received an
earned doctorate himself, but was surrounded by col-
leagues who had, and he felt he had to “prove” himself
in their eyes.
Certainly the most profound result to arise from the
Maury episode seems to have been the Paleontological
Research Institution, which Harris founded six years
later. In the “apology” letter to the University Presi-
dent, Harris used the phrase, *... I can build some
roomy apartment, off the University property . . .” This
appears to be the first hint, at least in print, of what
later developed into the Paleontological Research In-
stitution, a private entity totally divorced from Cor-
nell. In this way, he was able, at last, to gain control
over his collections without the interference of Uni-
versity officials. Harris’ bitterness towards Cornell only
deepened as the years went by, and was perpetuated
by his daughter long after his death. In her will, Re-
becca Harris indicated that the $50,000 she left to PRI
was to be donated to other charities if PRI ever ““merg-
es” with Cornell. This same feeling evidently translated
into the feelings of Harris’ successor and protege, Kath-
erine Palmer. Responding to questions from the Na-
tional Science Foundation in December of 1961 as to
current or future plans for any formal connection with
Cornell, Palmer stated:
“The Institution has no formal connection with Cornell
University nor does it plan to establish any such connec-
tion in the foreseeable future. ... The Institution coop-
erates with Cornell University as with other institutions;
to maintain much the same relationship as exists between
the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia and the
University of Pennsylvania, American Philosophical So-
ciety or other similar institutions in the same area.”°®°
© “Information in reply to questions” sent to the National Science
Foundation, December 6, 1961. PRI Archives, Ithaca, NY.
The fact that this was written 29 years after the laying
of the PRI corner stone and almost 10 years after Har-
ris’ death gives some indication of the depth of ani-
mosity that existed between Harris, his family, and
those who followed him at PRI and Cornell. Not until
the 1990s was PRI to have any significant connection
with Cornell.
It also appears that the situation between Harris and
Maury foreshadowed the current difficulties of decid-
ing where university research ends and private com-
pany enterprise begins that exist within many univer-
sities today, especially with regard to molecular biology
and pharmaceutical research. Now, however, faculty
at many institutions are required to sign annual “‘Con-
flict of Interest” and ‘Disclosure Statement” forms
declaring participation and/or ownership of any com-
mercial venture even remotely related to their univer-
sity teaching and research.*’ In this way the university
seeks to protect itself, or at least gain prior knowledge
of any potential difficulty, and situations like the Har-
ris-Maury conflict should not arise.
There is an old saying that time heals most wounds,
and to some extent, this seems to be applicable for
Harris, and perhaps for Maury as well. On December
30, 1936, just over two years before Maury’s death, in
his address as retiring President of the Paleontological
Society, Harris presented a history of Cenozoic pale-
ontology (Harris, 1937b). In several places in his ad-
dress, Harris acknowledged Maury’s work and its im-
portance to paleontology, e.g.:
“C. A. White’s mistakes in assigning all his fossil material
on the northeast coast of Brazil to the Cretaceous were
corrected in Maury’s large memoir, published by the Bra-
zilian government in 1924°8.” (Harris, 1937b, p. 456)
Perhaps this recognition by her former mentor and
protagonist brought comfort to Maury before she died,
and may have served to partially remove the deep
bitterness resulting from their estrangement. Maury
died at her home in Yonkers, New York, on January
3, 1938, after a year-long illness. She was only a few
days shy of her 64th birthday.
*? This is the situation for the University of Pittsburgh.
68 C. J. Maury (1924).
106 BULLETIN 350
CHAPTER 8. CORNELL COLLEAGUES
Harris came into a difficult situation when he re-
turned to Cornell in 1894. He and Adam C. Gill, the
mineralogist, joined Ralph S. Tarr in a department that
had been running with temporary appointments and
graduate students for almost two years. Even with the
additional faculty, Tarr was still required to teach eco-
nomic geology, which was not to his wishes, and he
continued to request another person. According to notes
left by Heinrich Ries, later Head of the Department:
*‘Pres. Schurman apparently agreed to this [hiring another
geology faculty] reluctantly, but told him [Tarr] that if he
appointed one the man need never expect to be promoted
to a higher rank'.... Tarr was hoping to get a Harvard
man as that was his Alma Mater. I heard of the position
accidentally and applied. Gill subsequently told me that
Tarr could not very well refuse me with my record and
experience”?
Thus in 1898, the situation was further complicated
by the arrival of Heinrich Ries?, an economic geologist,
who apparently was not Tarr’s first choice. Eventually
Ries split from Tarr and by 1902 each of the four was
conducting business as a separate entity, and each com-
municated with the others formally on his own sepa-
rate letterhead. In essence, there was no ““Department
of Geology” during this time. Even the University ac-
knowledged that this arrangement had been in effect
for many years in a committee report to the Board of
Trustees in 1906:
“«.. the Department was conducted by three independent
heads; Professor Tarr having charge of dynamic geology
and physical geography, Assistant Professor Gill having
charge of mineralogy and petrography. and Assistant Pro-
fessor Harris having charge of paleontology. Dr. Ries, who
came as instructor to assist Professor Tarr, was in due time
promoted to an assistant professorship with special charge
of economic geology.’”*
' This turned out not to be true, for Ries was promoted to Assistant
Professor in 1902 and Professor in 1906 (A. L. Anderson, 1952).
? Page 2 of typed, undated and unsigned notes. Because of the use
of “I” and “me” in the narrative, these must have been written by
Ries and based upon an attached note, they were prepared about
1944 for Charles Nevin, then head of the Department. Heinrich Ries
Papers, 14/15/691, Box 3, File 3-2. RMC-KL, Cornell.
> Heinrich Ries appointed Instructor in Economic Geology for
1898-99, at a salary of $750; Cornell University Board of Trustees
meeting minutes, April 12, 1898.
+ Report on the state of the Geology Department and another
related item, promotion of Heinrich Ries, presented to the Cornell
University Board of Trustees by S. D. Halliday, R. H. Treman, and
J. G. Schurman. Trustee meeting minutes, May 15, 1906.
For almost 10 years these four people, Harris (pa-
leontology), Gill (mineralogy and petrography), Ries
(Economic Geology), and Tarr (Dynamic Geology and
Physical Geography) ran their respective sections, all
in McGraw Hall, but acting as if they were virtually
on separate planets. Although not many department
records survive from this period, apparently each per-
son was sending the university president a separate
annual report each year.° This was the climate in which
Harris interacted with his colleagues.
ADAM C. GILL
As might have been expected, Harris and Gill be-
came close friends, and that friendship endured until
Gill’s death only five months after his retirement from
Cornell in 1932. When the Harris’ lived on Eddy Street
in Ithaca, Gill, a bachelor at the time, was a frequent
visitor. Harris prepared the professional memorial for
Gill which appeared in the Bulletin of the Geological
Society of America in 1933 and he recalled his friend-
ship with Gill:
“Early in 1894 Cornell University decided to broaden its
work in earth sciences, and in the place of the former
professorship in geology, have, at first, three assistant pro-
fessorships, which were assigned as follows: Mineralogy,
A. C. Gill; Physical Geography and Dynamic Geology, R.
S. Tarr; Paleontology, G. D. Harris. It was then that the
writer became acquainted with Professor Gill, and from
that time until the day of his death our relations as col-
leagues and neighbors were most intimate and most cor-
dial.” (Harris, 1933, p. 326)
The Gill residence was on Wycoff Avenue, not far from
where Harris built a home on Kelvin Place, and both
shared a love of flowers which grew profusely in their
back gardens. No doubt the two men walked together
across the bridges over Fall Creek gorge countless times
as they went to and from McGraw Hall. Perhaps be-
cause of this, there is, unfortunately, little record of
their friendship aside from the Gill memorial.
RALPH STOCKMAN TARR
There is a similarly sparse record of the Harris-Tarr
relationship, but apparently there was little love lost
between them. As noted earlier, the University ad-
ministration did not include Tarr in the decision to
hire Gill and Harris, even though he had repeatedly
requested additional assistance. When they were hired,
Harris and Gill were afforded the same rank as Tarr,
5’ There are copies of Harris’ reports for 1899-1900 and for 1900-
1901; each printed with his own letterhead. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 107
even though Tarr had been there for almost two years
operating as a defacto department head. No doubt Tarr
had some feeling of betrayal; this was probably not the
kind of reward he expected after all his hard work to
keep the Department functioning after the departure
of H. S. Williams. His only advantage, and he may not
have even known this, was that he was paid a higher
salary than Gill or Harris, for they each received $1400
while he was paid $1700.° Add to this situation the
fact that the University administration did not make
an official designation for a department head when the
faculty was enlarged. On the contrary, Harris came to
Cornell armed with a letter from the President, quoted
earlier, which stated that each person was to be in-
dependent of the other. All in all there was very little
here to create a condition of cooperation and friend-
liness, at least between the two new faculty members
and Tarr.
Ries described the situation between Harris and Tarr
this way:
“Tarr had not introduced me to Harris at all. I knew him
by sight, so one day walking home to lunch I overtook
him and introduced myself. Told him I was to teach Eco-
nomic Geology. Said he was glad to hear it as the way it
had been taught was execrable [sic]. (Tarr had been teach-
ing it.) [Parenthetical in original.]’
HEINRICH RIES
The only person to keep much a record of daily
interaction with Harris during these years was Ries,
who joined the faculty only four years after Harris and
was head of the Department for almost 30 years. As
the administrative officer, like Williams before him, it
is expected that he would keep good records. The De-
partmental records of Williams and Ries, along with
their personal notes, form the basis for much of what
follows.
From the tone of the communications between Ries
and Harris, it is clear that they simply did not get along
well’. According to Harris’ former student, Druid Wil-
son, when H. S. Williams retired in 1914, Harris ex-
pected to be named head of the department, but, in-
stead, the position went to Ries. Also, Wilson, who
knew both men, felt that Ries **... never gave Harris
his due.’’”? In defense of Ries, a department head often
© Cornell University Trustees meeting minutes, January 9, 1894.
RMC-KL, Cornell.
7 “Notes on past conditions in Geology Department” Set of typed
notes by Ries complied for Charles Nevin c. May 1944. Heinrich
Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 3, File 3-2. RMC-KL, Cornell.
* This was confirmed by Dr. Lois (Schoonover) Kent. Personal
communication, September 9, 1995.
° Personal communication, July 12, 1995.
must hold a different view of things than the average
professor, on matters such as operating costs and en-
rollments. From the existing records, it seems Harris’
portion of the Department was very costly to run due
to the small class sizes. As examples, the following are
taken from Annual Reports Ries prepared for 1914—
1915 and 1919-1920:!°
1914-1915 Cost per Student-hour
Class Ist Term 2nd Term
Elem & Econ. Geol SD) aT TI $ 3.02
Physical Geography 5.40 6.08
Mineral— Petrology 10.50 8.70
Paleo & Strat. Geol 35.00 23.20
Dept. Average 4.30 5.00
Number of
1919-1920 Students Cost/Student-hour
Class Ist 2nd Ist 2nd
Term Term Term Term
Elem. Geology 287 301 $3220 on 3225
Phys. Geography 155 us} 4.30 8.75
Min— Petrology 73 80 12.00 13.00
Historic— Paleo 14 30 41.00 19.00
Economic Geol Sih ley 4.10 4.50
A check of several other Annual Reports shows that,
in general, Harris’ classes had lower enrollments than
any of his colleagues. As Ries had to answer to the
University administration each year on these costs, no
doubt this affected his personal relationship with Har-
ris. Ries was not the only one to note the low enroll-
ments in Harris’ classes and the fact that for many
years Harris was on campus only part of the regular
academic year. As mentioned previously, in 1915 Pres-
ident Schurman inquired as to whether Harris was
even needed full time or not!!.
Apparently Harris had little to do with the academic
advising of undergraduates, a task that is vital to any
department. Ries commented in a letter to Henry
Leighton!? that everyone in the Department had taken
their share of undergraduate advising, almost everyone
that is; “At present only Professor Harris, I believe,
‘© Annual Reports for 1914-1915, Box 2, File 2-1; 1919-1920,
Box 1, File 1-85. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, RMC-KL, Cor-
nell.
'! Jacob Schurman to Heinrich Ries, May 28, 1915. Heinrich Ries
Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-22. RMC-KL, Cornell.
'? Henry Leighton (A.B.’06) worked for the Pennsylvania Geo-
logical Survey and was Professor of Geology at the University of
Pittsburgh where John Wells was one of his students. It was Leighton
who encouraged Wells to come to Cornell (Brice et a/., 1995).
108 BULLETIN 350
has never done so.”’!? Certainly this would not have
endeared Harris to his colleagues, all of whom were
doing not only their share of the undergraduate ad-
vising, but his share as well.
Yet, regardless of the personal feelings, Ries defend-
ed Harris’ portion of the Department and tried to
maintain and increase financial support for paleontol-
ogy. For example, in 1920-21, even though Harris had
only 17 students in the first term, Ries filed this request
with the President:
“Professor Harris urges the need of a museum in which
he can display his extensive collection of Tertiary fossils.”
In another report by Ries:
“The collections which he [Harris] has crowded on the top
floor [of McGraw Hall], can probably not be duplicated
anywhere in this country, and are of great value for stu-
dents interested in his particular field.”’!*
While Ries did show some sympathy for Harris’ sit-
uation with regard to the need for collection space, he
told Harris that McGraw Hall simply did not have any
extra room. Ries, however, was not totally sympathetic
to the request, and he continued:
“Indeed I question whether the many type specimens of
Tertiary fossils which he has, and which are of interest
chiefly to a few graduates taking special work in that line,
could not equally well be preserved for study in special
cases of drawers.”’!>
As is often the case, the professor can be the dreamer,
but the department head must deal with realities:
“Professor Harris wants to see vertebrate paleontology
developed, but to do this would entail more expense as to
equipment and space, ... The number of students taking
it would probably be very small, and it is my [Ries] per-
sonal opinion that is should hardly be attempted until we
have plenty of money and space. He [Harris] likewise ex-
presses a desire to have an instructor in Paleozoic Pale-
ontology.”’!®
In some of his private correspondence, Ries was less
than complimentary even about Harris’ research:
“\... Harris has I think the most cheerful habit of writing
'S Heinrich Ries to Henry Leighton, October 21, 1926. Heinrich
Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 2, File 2-3. RMC-KL, Cornell.
‘4 4nnual Report for 1924-1925 by Heinrich Ries submitted to
Dean R. M. Ogden, May 7, 1925, p. 3. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/
15/691, Box 2, File 2-4. RMC-KL, Cornell.
'S Annual Report for 1920-21, N.D. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/
691, Box 1, File 1-85. RMC-KL, Cornell.
'e Annual Report for 1925-1926 by Heinrich Ries submitted to
Dean R. M. Ogden, N.D.,p. 3. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691,
Box 2, File 2-4. RMC-KL, Cornell.
up every little bit of work he does as if no one else had
ever been in the region, .. .””!’
How much the conflict between Harris, the profes-
sor, and Ries, the department head, colored their per-
sonal relationship is very difficult to tell, but, based
upon the surviving documents, it appears the personal
side was as contentious as the professional. From what
Ries wrote in a letter to the President in 1929, some
jealousy existed over some of Harris’ advantages. Note
Ries’ ability to both praise and damn in the same sen-
tence:
“TI am returning herewith the letter which you received
from Mr. K. E. Schmidt!® regarding the establishment of
a publication fund to assist Professor Harris with his pub-
lications. I may say that Professor Harris has for a number
of years published at his initial expense the bulletins [sic]
of American Paleontology and the Paleontographica [sic]
Americana. The articles which have appeared in these are
mostly papers on Paleontology by himself and his own
students!’ and contain much valuable material. These have
never been for free distribution but have been sold by him.
It would of course be very nice if we can have a publication
fund for the Department but I think that the rest of the
Department might feel of course that if such a fund were
established that the other branches should share in it. This
other side of the matter is one which Mr. Schmidt knows
probably nothing about as I find in looking up his record
that he took 25 hours of work under Professor Harris and
was not registered for an hour in any other branch of the
Department. By publishing the paleontological papers
himself Professor Harris is of course able to publish them
in full with many illustrations while the rest of us have to
be content with sending our papers and those of our stu-
dents to the scientific journals in which they must neces-
sarily appear in very much condensed form.”’?°
Such was their relationship for over 50 years.
HENRY SHALER WILLIAMS
For Harris, and perhaps others, one of the saddest
situations within the Department was the deterioration
of the relationship between himselfand H. S. Williams,
his former professor and often strong supporter. Cer-
tainly they maintained a strong friendship in the early
days, for very soon after receiving his appointment to
‘7 Heinrich Ries to H. P. Cushing, March 10, 1906. Heinrich Ries
Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-84. RMC-KL, Cornell.
'8 “Hans” Schmidt who was on the two Ecphora excursions in
1914 and 1915.
‘2 About 70% of the papers in the first 100 issues of the Bulletins
and all but one of the first 13 issues of Pal@ontographica were by
Harris or his students.
2° Heinrich Ries to Livingston Farrand, April 12, 1929. Heinrich
Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 2, File 2-7. RMC-KL, Cornell.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 109
Cornell in 1894, Harris wrote to Williams, who was
then at Yale:
“Having now received the appointment myself I shall spare
no time and means to put invertebrate paleontology at
Cornell on the best footing possible, i.e., within my
power.””?!
It was not until Williams returned to Cornell that the
two men became disenchanted with one another.
In 1904, H. S. Williams left Yale and returned to
Cornell to assume the duties as head of the Geology
Department, but with a concurrent half-time appoint-
ment with the U.S.G.S.*? Part of Williams’ duties for
the University also included overseeing the museum
which was housed in McGraw Hall.
During his stay at Yale Williams had apparently kept
in touch with Harris, and shortly before his return to
Cornell Williams wrote to him about a project:
“*_. to map the Paleozoic rocks of the Ithaca Quadrangle
this year. And if nothing arises to hinder [Edward M.]
Kindle and I will be at work in the neighborhood during
the summer.”’?*
Williams asked Harris for recommendations for a field
assistant who would have the highest potential. He also
indicated that at least part of the collections resulting
from this study would stay at Cornell. In this letter,
however, Williams gave no hint that he was contem-
plating a return to Cornell, and indeed, there seems to
have been little consultation by Williams or the Uni-
versity administration with any of the geology faculty
about his return to the campus.
Of all the faculty, Harris appears, at first, to have
been the most supportive of Williams. J. C. Branner
wrote to Harris at the time Williams returned to Cor-
nell:
“In regard to Wms [sic] and Cornell: I find that Tarr has
been trying to kick up a great dust about it, and that he
has written to people outside of the University that he is
so put out that he is disgusted almost or quite to the point
of resignation. Of course such views should be expressed
only to the President.
“Tam very glad that you told W. that you would frankly
cooperate in building up a museum and in strengthening
2! Letter fragment, G. D. Harris to H. S. Williams, believed written
before March 26, 1894. H. S. Williams Papers 14/15/728, Box 28.
RMC-KL, Cornell.
22 Williams was appointed Professor of Geology, Head of the De-
partment and Director of the Museum, but only on half-time salary
of $1750, plus $250 as department head and museum director, to
become effective in 1904—05 academic year. Cornell University Board
of Trustees meeting minutes, February 6, 1904. RMC-KL, Cornell.
23 Henry S. Williams to G. D. Harris, May 30, 1903. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
the graduate work. W. thinks highly of you, and of course
nothing is to be gained by being cantankerous. A head to
the department will greatly strengthen geology all round
at Cornell. It certainly will look better to the world outside.
You are not to infer from this that I have had any finger
in the pie. I never knew anything about it until I heard a
rumor of it when I was in N. C. but I ought to tell you
frankly that it seems to me on the whole an excellent thing,
though of course it is none of my business except in so far
as it affects my friends, and affects the study of geology.”**
Williams’ return, however, only made a bad situa-
tion worse. While Ries’ notes are admittedly not the
most unbiased source, they are among the few surviv-
ing records of these times:
“Williams was a mild mannered and kindly in his dis-
position, and if the others had been decent to him I feel
sure he would have done a lot for them. Tarr was the most
openly aggressive of the three, and did not hesitate to show
his feelings.’’?°
Things did seem to move smoothly for a while, at
least on the surface. In his second Annual Report, Wil-
liams sounded optimistic:
“There has been greater harmony and cooperation, to-
gether with the greatest freedom of the individual initiative
consistent with good organization and best efficiency of
the whole... .
“The coordination and organization of the several in-
dividuals into a harmonious department, providing the
best possible opportunity for students to perfect them-
selves in geological science as a whole, is the end toward
which my chief energies are directed. My feeling is that
this spirit is becoming more and more appreciated by my
colleagues and is resulting in increasing regard for the gen-
eral interests of the department.’’*°
But the honeymoon did not last long, for Williams
had a different philosophy for paleontology as a college
subject than Harris did. This he outlined in a draft of
his Annual Report for 1904-05:
‘““My attitude toward the general policy of conducting the
branch of work in Paleontology I will frankly state, “Al-
though it is my favorite branch of geological study my
conviction is that it is of secondary importance as an el-
ementary branch of university study; that it is a special
field of investigation, of value to specialists as a prepa-
ration for professional work, but on account of the im-
24 J.C. Branner to G. D. Harris, March 24, 1904. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
25 Page 2 of a typed, undated and unsigned notes prepared by Ries
about 1944 for Charles Nevin, then head of the department. Heinrich
Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 3, File 3-2. RMC-KL, Cornell.
26 Annual Report for 1905-1906 by H. S. Williams. H. S. Williams
Papers, 14/15/728, Geological Correspondence Box. RMC-KL, Cor-
nell.
110 BULLETIN 350
perfection of the materials presented for study it is inex-
pedient to allow students who are untrained in zoology
and botany to specialize in the subject.’ Further, I believe
that to raise the study of paleontology from a mere ex-
amination of curiosities to the position of an exact science
requires in the student a trained mind, in the first place,
and, secondly, an immense amount of careful, systematic
study. It is therefore my judgment that it is cruelty to
encourage an ignorant freshman to play at study by allow-
ing him to spend time at collecting and identifying fossils
before he knows the elements of either zoology, botany,
or geology, such as can be taught to beginners in the uni-
versity. When, therefore, I discover that it is possible by
the elective system for freshman to specialize in paleon-
tology without either being trained to study and having
no preparation in other sciences, I am disturbed and wish
to disallow the practice.’
From this it is obvious that the teacher and his pupil
had developed very different ideas since they had last
shared a classroom, and the teacher was now once
again in a position of control.
Harris was guilty of allowing his students to take few
classes outside the area of paleontology. Ries com-
mented on this in the quotation above concerning Karl
Schmidt’s letter and in a set of notes:
“‘He [Harris] was interested in what he called bio-geology
and saw no reason to make students in historic geology
even take a course 1n elementary geology first.’’?8
Certainly this was not the approach to paleontology
recommended by Williams.
In yet another way teacher and pupil had moved
apart. Williams did not consider the study of paleon-
tology a suitable livelihood for most students:
“He [Williams] considered the field of scientific paleon-
tology to be limited in its possibilities for a livelihood, and
consequently he never offered undue encouragement to
prospective students to enter the work. To those who were
bound to enter, however, he gave the best council and
advice of which he was capable.” (Weller, 1918, p. 700).
Meanwhile, Harris seemed to be doing just the op-
posite by having students work with him in the Lou-
isiana Survey and with his extended boat excursions
and field camp work. Harris, especially with his work
with the Survey, demonstrated that the study of pa-
leontology could provide a good living. The size of
Harris’ classes, however, did indicate that he was not
bringing large numbers of students into paleontology.
2? Draft of Annual Report for 1904-1905. H. S. Williams papers,
14/15/728. RMC-KL, Cornell.
78 Typed notes prepared by Ries sometime between Harris’ re-
tirement in 1934 and the early 1940s. Heinrich Ries Papers, 1/4/
15/691, Box 3, File 3-2, RMC-KL, Cornell.
In May of 1905, after a brief discussion that included
a request for a pay raise for Ries, Williams wrote to
President Schurman:
“While speaking of this matter [pay raises], too, the case
of Prof. Harris comes in. While I realize that Prof. Harris
is a man of high merit as an investigator, as suggested in
the conversation some time ago, there is the misfortune
to him of having me as his colleague. I cannot recommend
to the trustees to devote an excess of funds to the pale-
ontological side of geology. Although I feel appreciative
of Prof. Harris’ ability I am not ready to urge increase of
salary in that line, although I would like to see him ap-
preciated and honored in such a way as the trustees can
do. ... He does not ask for a raise of salary at present as
he has funds from the Louisiana Survey and from the
U.S.G.S. sufficient to run his research work finely, and
both of these outside [activities] helps detract from the
amount of time he can give to the University.’’?°
From this, it appears Williams was not happy with the
half-time arrangement that Harris was working every
year.
It was during this period that Harris came very close
to leaving Cornell. In October of 1905, the beginning
of Willams’ second year back at Cornell, Harris began
to make inquiries about a position at Louisiana State
University (LSU), where most of the previous state
geologists had been faculty members. In reply to his
expression of interest, the LSU President responded:
“I should like nothing better than to see a geological de-
partment established at this University, and to have you
in charge of it. In fact, I have long had this step in mind,
but it has never seemed practicable to carry it out. I am
glad to find now that you are thinking along the same line,
and that there is a possibility of our securing your services
to build up such department here, and work in the state. . . .
I should be glad for you to write me at once giving an
outline of your plans for the organization of the geological
work here, and state when you could begin the work as
professor of geology at this University, whether it is your
idea to remain here permanently or only temporarily, what
salary you would wish, what sum would be needed to
purchase the desired collections, and how you think your
salary and your time should be divided between the Uni-
versity and the Experiment Stations [the State Bureau un-
der which the Geological Survey operated].’°
Within days of receiving Boyd’s letter, Harris must
have written to J. C. Branner about his plans, for Bran-
ner offered this sage advice:
29 H.S. Williams to J. G. Schurman, May 12, 1905. H. S. Williams
Papers, 14/15/728, Geological Correspondence Box. RMC-KL, Cor-
nell.
3° Thomas D. Boyd, President, Louisiana State University, to Gil-
bert D. Harris, October 2, 1905. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 111
“T can’t tell you how sorry I am to get your letter of the
12th. There is no mistake about the fact that I have never
in my life heard Williams say anything but good of you
and your work. There is so much good scientific work to
be done in this world that it seems to me a great pity that
any one should spend his energies in personal controver-
sies. The things you complain of are unworthy of your
serious attention, and I cannot help thinking that you are
being egged on by someone who is seeking to make a fool
out of you by exaggerating the importance of a lot of very
trivial matters.
“None of the relations of life are just what we should
like to have them; there is something to be put up with
wherever we are and whoever our associates may be. Be
patient, my dear fellow, and don’t listen to the growler
and the faultfinder. I hope to have better news from you
next time.””3!
Part of Harris’ disillusionment may have stemmed
from the fact that by this time he had been at Cornell
about 13 years, started his Bulletins, produced several
Ph.D. students, amassed a large collection of fossils,
and served with distinction as Geologist in Charge of
the Louisiana Geological Survey, yet he had not been
promoted to the rank of Professor (apparently there
was no associate professor rank at that time). This,
coupled with the return of Williams, certainly explains
some of his frustrations. Harris was not alone, how-
ever, in trying to flee the department; it seems that all
of them, except Gill, were threatening to resign in 1905
and 1906.
Williams wrote to all the geology faculty quoting
from a letter from President Schurman:
““*T [the President] have received a letter from Professor
Tarr in which he objects to the organization of the new
course on practical geology and mineralogy which you
have been contemplating for Engineers.
“*T have already notified you that Professor Tarr has
informed me that he expects to leave Cornell University
at the end of the next academic year. In view of that fact
I suggest for your consideration the desirability of post-
poning for one year the establishment of the above men-
tioned course for Engineers.’ ”’**
Harris carried his search for the position at LSU
right to the point of being appointed:
“TI do not know whether the Secretary of the Board or I
am most to blame for not sending you a formal notification
of the action of our Board on the 10th ult., but to avoid
mistakes, I will take the responsibility, and humbly beg
your pardon for the delay. The Board elected you Professor
3! John C. Branner to G. D. Harris, October 18, 1905. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
32 Henry S. Williams to Professors Tarr, Harris, Gill, and Ries,
March 23, 1905. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
of Geology, with the understanding that you will divide
your time between the instruction of the University and
the field work for the Experiment Stations, and that one
half of your salary will be paid by the Experiment Stations
and one half by the University. After conferring with Mr.
Dodson as to the meaning of your letter October last, I
have concluded to offer you a salary of $2500 per annum,
your expenses, of course, to be paid while engaged in sur-
vey work for the Station. If I have misinterpreted your
letter, please set me right at once. Please also let me know
when you wish to begin the work in Louisiana, which term
of our session you would prefer to spend in giving instruc-
tion at the University, and what courses of study you wish
torohermenr
“With kindest regards, and with much rejoicing over
the prospect of having you with us permanently, . . .°*3
Members of the department must have known Har-
ris was actively seeking another position, for just as
Harris was receiving the news that he had been ap-
pointed to the position at LSU, Williams was writing
to Schurman expressing concern about Ries seeking
another position, but showing little concern if Harris
left:
“The fact seems to be that he [Ries] is going right ahead
seeking for another position, on the ground that he cannot
get along with his present salary; believes he is worthy of
a better salary; and receives from you no hope ofarise. . . .
““My position has been very seriously attacked by men
considering themselves to be friends of the University. I
have endeavored to prevent harm to the university by
giving no occasion for complaint on their part or those
two members of the department who have openly sought
to upset all the plans originating with me in the depart-
ment. This policy has so far resulted in preventing these
two men, messrs. Tarr and Harris from resigning... .
“T think the Department would not be seriously weak-
ened by the loss of the Assistant Professor of Paleontology,
though he is a thoroughly able and energetic man in the
line of paleontology he has cultivated. So that in consid-
ering the future of the department, I think it would not be
inexpedient to make no reappointment at the termination
of his term of office... . it will give less offense to Mr.
Harris and his friends if the termination of his appoint-
ment be placed on the score of economy, rather than on
any comparison with other needs of the department or
with the merits of another member of the department. No
doubt objections will be raised, whatever is done; but the
criticism of the President and of his appointment of me
over the department have come from both Mr. Harris and
Mr. Tarr, and neither of them has as yet fully adapted the
spirit of ‘harmonious cooperation’ which you indicated in
your report as so essential to the ... university... .
“With the many matters in your mind you may not be
*3 Thomas D. Boyd, President, Louisiana State University, to G.
D. Harris, June 2, 1906. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
112 BULLETIN 350
able to realize the intensity of the strain at particular points
of the institution, but I trust you will be able to give this
matter sufficient thought to not allow the active departure
of Mr. Ries from the University.
“‘We must not lose our friends, while we are protecting
ourselves from the attacks of our enemies.’*4
As it turned out none of them resigned. Ries received
a raise and stayed:
“After Pres. S. [Schurman] agreed to raise me, I withdrew
my application out there [University of Michigan, at $2500/
year].*>
Instead of actually resigning, in 1906 Tarr took his
portion of geology completely away from the Geology
Department and created his own independent De-
partment of Physical Geography**, that was also housed
in McGraw Hall. This arrangement remained until
Tarr’s death in 1912 when geology and geography were
once again combined into a single department. Harris,
too, apparently had second thoughts:
“TI [LSU President] very much doubt whether it would be
well to make the temporary arrangement you suggest at
this time. My idea when I asked the Board to elect you
Professor of Geology here was to secure your whole time
for the University and the Experiment Stations; but under
all the circumstances I think you have acted wisely in not
severing your connection with Cornell. This being the case,
it now seems to me that it would be better for you to
confine your work in Louisiana for the Stations just as you
have been doing for the last number of years, and not to
take up the work of teaching at the University until we
can have a full personal conference about the courses of
study to be offered.””*’
Even though he did not leave, it appears that Harris
did not become a model member of the department,
at least not according to his colleagues. Complaints
continued to pour forth to Williams. Responding to
Williams’ request for him to teach introductory lab-
oratory classes, Harris wrote:
“‘Last spring I found the assistance in my branch of geology
entirely inadequate for the large amount of work we were
called upon to do. . . . 1 do not think it desirable or dignified
for the professor who gives an elementary course to per-
34H. S. Williams to J. G. Schurman, June 2, 1905. Attached note
in Williams’ hand says, “Personally discussed with him; letter not
delivered.” H. S. Williams papers, 14/15/728, Geological Corre-
spondence Box. RMC-KL, Cornell.
* Heinrich Ries to H. S. Williams, July 22, 1906. Heinrich Ries
Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-75. RMC-KL, Cornell.
3° Cornell University Board of Trustees meeting minutes, May 15,
1906. RMC-KL, Cornell.
»” Thos. D. Boyd, President, Louisiana State University, to G. D.
Harris, July 25, 1906. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
sonally follow it up in the laboratory when cheaper help
should do the work. I do not think such practice is cus-
tomary.’”**
Still using letterhead paper with the heading ‘Cornell
University” to one side and “‘Paleontology and Strati-
graphic Geology, G. D. Harris” to the other, and no
mention of the “Geology Department”, Harris used
quite a terse and sarcastic tone in some of his letters
to Williams:
‘Memorandum relative to aims and needs of the Pale-
ontological and Stratigraphical Division of the Geology
Department of Cornell University, 1908.
“The AIM of this division, section, or department at
Cornell . . ... [Emphasis in the original.]*”
At one point Harris even addressed a letter as, “Prof.
H. S. Williams, Dean, Geol. Dept., C. U.’’*°
Despite this rancor, and perhaps unknown to Harris,
Williams was requesting support from the University
administration for his area of paleontology:
“T think give more attention to development of Professor
Harris’s [sic] special line of work. One of the chief needs
connected with such development is putting in order of
the vast amount of collections pertaining to the Paleon-
tology museum.’”*!
In 1907, Harris had sought promotion to the rank
of Professor by appeals directly to the University Pres-
ident, apparently not going through his department
head. He received this reply:
“The Trustees were not prepared to establish an additional
full professorship in the geologicaldepartment [sic]. And
the conferring of a title without the corresponding emol-
ument was felt to be a dangerous precedent to establish.
“‘All this simply means that the Trustees are unable to
promote to higher positions many men who have rendered
long, faithful, and meritorious service in their present po-
sition.”**?
Harris responded by saying that he had not asked for
any additional salary, and further that he had agreed
to never ask for a full year’s pay. He went on:
38 G. D. Harris to H. S. Williams, October 2, 1907. Heinrich Ries
Papers, 14/15/691, Box 3, File 3-4. RMC-KL, Cornell.
3° Memorandum, April 15, 1908. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/
691, Box 3, File 3-4. RMC-KL, Cornell.
40 G. D. Harris to H. S. Williams, April 14, 1909. Heinrich Ries
Papers, 14/15/691, Box 3, File 3-4. RMC-KL, Cornell.
41 4nnual Report for 1908-1909 by H. S. Williams, April 28, 1909,
p. 7. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 3, File 3-6. RMC-KL,
Cornell.
42 J. G. Schurman to G. D. Harris, May 31, 1907. Jacob Gould
Schurman Papers, 3/4/6, Vol. 20, pg. 118. RMC-KL, Cornell.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 113
“Rumor has it that the Geological Department is already
overmanned. This state of affairs has come about, if at all,
by recent appointments over which the professor here con-
cerned had no authority. He should not be made to suffer
on account of the cost of new men.’’**?
No doubt one of the “recent appointments” to which
Harris referred was that of Williams three years earlier.
When it was to Harris’ advantage, however, he was
quite willing to cooperate with Williams. Just before
he received his promotion and at about the time the
funding for the Louisiana Survey had an uncertain
future, Harris wrote to Williams from Louisiana:
“Just now I am not bound by contract to anyone for the
time mentioned. I thought perhaps as you have often ex-
pressed a desire for the arranging of General Geology under
one man and as you have kindly suggested I would be the
most fit for the work, would it not be well just now to
suggest the matter to the President [of Cornell]. Naturally
I should expect the beginning ‘full’ professor’s salary, i.e.,
$2500 but since this would relieve Dr. Ries of so much
work it would naturally give him the chance to dismiss
one instructor. So the (1) cost would be no more to the
University, (2) your idea would be finally carried out, (3)
students would have more of two professors in place of
an instructor. What objections can properly be made to
these three points? Still, I am not thrusting myself any-
where. I simply suggest this now as it seems that I should
know where I stand before agreeing to too much outside
work.’’44
Williams must have interpreted this as a thinly veiled
request for promotion, for he answered:
“T have just received your letter this morning*? and have
taken it into the President and consulted him regarding
the matter, and he says to tell you that there are several
Departments in the University sadly needing more full
professors, but that the Geological Department is not one
of them, and he cannot recommend to the Trustees the
appointment of another full professor in the Geological
Department.
“This, is seems to me, settles the question you raise. . . .
“T still think it would be a desirable thing to have the
General course in one man’s hands, but the reply of the
President seems to make this impossible, in the way at
least, that you suggest it.’”*°
*3 Two page, printed (probably by Harris) legal-looking extract
““Subject— Change of title with no change in compensation Case of
Assistant Professor Harris asking to have the word ‘Assistant’ dropped
from his title.’ N.D. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
44 G. D. Harris to H. S. williams, November 2. 1908. Heinrich
Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 3, File 3-6. RMC-KL, Cornell.
*5 Note the two day mail service between Jennings, Louisiana and
Ithaca, New York in 1908.
4° H. S. Williams to G. D. Harris, November 5, 1908. Heinrich
Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 3, File 3-6. RMC-KL, Cornell.
Harris seemed to get the message loud and clear, but
was, at the same time, saddened by the recommen-
dations of the President:
“Am very glad to hear the plain truth about the Geol.
Dept. [sic] as seen by the President and shall naturally trim
my sails accordingly. There are a whole lot of things I want
to do here [Louisiana] in the next five years and according
to present indications I shall have many more students
down here at work than I ever had before. This I am willing
to do and and [sic] teach 1/2 year at Cornell; but I am
perfectly frank to say that in my judgment it would be no
more than mere decency and of real advantage to all con-
cerned to give me the rank as well as the pay (now given)
of full professor while I am at the University. It would
cost nothing (even in dignity) it seems to me to make the
change. I wish there were some way of making the Pres-
ident give his reasons against the change. I have already
agreed to swear off from all claims of permanency and to
never ask increase in pay. There is some . . . [one behind
this] . . . and the President isn’t going to point him out.’’4”
There is no way of knowing who Harris thought was
standing in the way of his promotion, but given the
past differences he had with Williams, it is not unrea-
sonable to assume he felt Williams was that person.
Later, despite all their differences, Williams even-
tually was able to obtain Harris’ promotion. Note Wil-
liams’ use of the word “‘again”’ in the letter below. This
evidently was not the first time he had attempted to
gain Harris’ promotion:
“Recognizing the fact that peace of mind and good feeling
are essential to the most effective work, I want to call
attention to the unhappiness of my colleague Assistant
Professor Harris because he is still rated an Assistant Pro-
fessor. I believe his ability is widely recognized through
out the country as a first class Geologist and Paleontologist
and I believe he should be recognized as a full Professor.
He devotes half of the year most earnestly and effectively
to the work of the Geological department, and is a devoted
loyal Cornellian. I therefore, again, (and urgently) rec-
ommend that some way may be found to give him the
title of Professor of Paleontology.’’**
Harris was promoted to “Professor of Paleontology
and Stratigraphic Geology (part time)” by action of the
Board of Trustees on May 19, 1909.49
In this same letter Williams made another attempt
to bring peace and harmony to the department. At this
point, apparently in desperation, Williams did relin-
47 G. D. Harris to H. S. Williams, November 7, 1908. Heinrich
Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 3, File 3-6. RMC-KL, Cornell.
48H. S. Williams to J. G. Schurman, May 19, 1909. Heinrich Ries
Papers, 14/15/691, Box 3, File 3-4. RMC-KL, Cornell.
49 Cornell University Trustee Meeting Minutes for May 18-19,
1909. RMC-KL, Cornell.
114 BULLETIN 350
quish his control of the department with a suggestion
to the President and Trustees that the department be
run by a committee, “The Geology Conference.”°° This
action tends to support Ries’ assessment of Williams’
personality mentioned earlier, and it shows that Wil-
liams was trying to get, and keep, the department run-
ning smoothly. The committee approach, however, did
little to ease the situation.
This constant bickering between the Williams and
Harris continued at various levels until Williams’ final
retirement in 1912, and even beyond. Williams had
been granted some research space on the top floor of
McGraw Hall, and Harris had eyes for some of the
storage drawers located there; Ries had other ideas:
‘‘As for your room on the top floor; no one will be allowed
in there. That is for your private use, as long as you want
eee
‘‘Harris as you know has the southwest room on the top
floor. He wants to put a lot of drawers in racks along the
east side of that room. It was for this purpose he suggested
the possibility of getting the vacant racks in yourroom....
“T [Ries] told him [Harris] this morning that actually
and proportionately he had more floor space now that any
other branch of the department.’’ [Emphasis in the orig-
inal]°!
So, the relationship between Harris and Williams
which began with warmth and mutual respect, ended
with bitterness and distrust. The last few years of Wil-
liams’ life were spent in Cuba, and he died in Havana
in 1918 (Weller, 1918).
Even after Williams’ death, however, Harris was not
above appealing to the memory of his colleague to
advance his own cause:
*«. there should be at once a move made to raise funds
for an International Devonian Museum here, in the center
of the best Devonian section in the World [sic]. This should
be a shrine, as it were, to the memory of Professor H. S.
Williams and should be financed by the Williams family.
They have given little so far but I believe might take hold
of such a proportion if properly approached. This naturally
should be quite separate from the general paleontological
museum.””>?
Many years later, Harris still did not acknowledge
that his actions had any thing to do with the turmoil
that existed during Williams’ tenure as head of the
department:
°° The suggestion was approved by the Trustees; Cornell Univer-
sity Board of Trustees meeting minutes, May 19, 1909. For details,
see the chapter “Period of Confusion” in Brice ,1989, p. 74-83.
5! Heinrich Ries to H. S. Williams, December 12, 1914. Heinrich
Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-76. RMC-KL, Cornell.
‘2 G. D. Harris, Annual Report for Heinrich Ries, May 8, 1928.
Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 2, File 2-7. RMC-KL, Cornell.
“Professor H. S. Williams could have done wonders here
{at Cornell] if he had managed a little differently financially
and had gotten material to work on for Cornell, and not
for the U. S. Geol. Survey.”’*?
In defense of Harris, however, it can be said that
while Williams came with high hopes for the depart-
ment, his focus may have been a bit narrow. In his
diary, written the first week of April 1904, Williams
said:
“T believe it may be truthfully said, that with the return
of the Devonian laboratory of the U. S. Geological Survey
to Cornell no other university will possess the facilities so
well adapted for advanced research in regard to problems
of evolution of Paleozoic life and their relation to historical
geology and to the principles of correlation in the Paleozoic
rocks as Cornell.’’**
Williams also wrote about the need for vertebrate pa-
leontology, more exhibits, and certainly emphasized
his own area of Paleozoic paleontology, but he said
very little about Tertiary paleontology. Perhaps Wil-
liams was so focused on the old rocks he had little ttme
for the younger ones and the people who did.
O. D. VON ENGELN
Harris and Oskar D. von Engeln may have had an
amiable relationship. Von Engeln came to Cornell as
a student in 1904 and was associated with the De-
partment until his death in 1965; more than 60 years.
Exactly how amiable the friendship was between Har-
ris and von Engeln is difficult to say because “Von”,
as he was known, was a student and protegé of R. S.
Tarr, and from what can be determined, Tarr and Har-
ris did not get along very well. But according to Ries,
Harris and von Engeln must have been friends:
“There did not seem to be any use objecting [to appointing
O. D. von Engeln an assistant professor] and I felt thatif
[sic] I said anything against [the appointment] Harris would
tattle it to O. D. [von Engeln]. . . .”°
Von Engeln had a home on Kelvin Place not far
from Harris and Gill, and it would have been normal
for him to join the others in walking from home to
McGraw Hall. Perhaps photography provided von En-
geln and Harris a mutual interest. Von Engeln was the
photographer on several expeditions to Alaska with
Tarr, and he took what may be one of the most famous
53 Annual Report by G. D. Harris to Heinrich Ries, May 8, 1928,
p. 2. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 2, File 2-4. RMC-KL,
Cornell.
54H. S. Williams’ Diary and Course Book, p. 119. Heinrich Ries
Papers, 14/15/691, Box 3, File 3-9. RMC-KL, Cornell.
55 Typed note by Ries complied c. 1944 for Charles Nevin. Hein-
rich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 3, File 3-2. RMC-KL, Cornell.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 115
photographs of the Cornell campus in the early Twen-
tieth Century. Von Engeln sold copies of it under var-
ious names, “Rainy Day on Campus” and “In College
Precincts” (Brice, 1989), and it appeared in magazines
of the day (Von Engeln, 1907).°° The photograph was
the product of a serendipitous event, for he was just
testing a camera in the rain before embarking on the
1906 expedition to Alaska°’. He set up the camera
outside McGraw Hall, and tripped the shutter just as
two students walked by. He framed the pair as they
walked in the rain under the stately elm trees that used
to grace the Arts Quadrangle of Cornell.
Both von Engeln and Harris believed in the power
of illustrations, and in their teaching they used lantern
slides, large 3” x 4” glass black and white positives
which could be projected on to a screen (today replaced
by the 35 mm color transparency). In their publications
von Engeln used photographs of landscapes while Har-
ris used photographs of fossils and outcrops. Perhaps
this common interest overcame what differences might
have existed with von Engeln’s association with Tarr.
Von Engeln was one of the three people who pre-
pared Harris’ faculty memorial which stated, “*Profes-
sor Harris did not cultivate wide social contacts.” (Her-
rick et a/l., 1953, p. 16A). Von Engeln evidently had
fond memories of Harris, for he dedicated is 1961 book
to “The Faculty Stalwarts: Tarr, Gill, Harris of the
Good Old Days in the Geology Department of Cornell
University” (von Engeln, 1961). Apparently, however,
there was little social contact between the two, for in
his Reminiscences,** a 214 page handwritten autobi-
ography prepared when he was 83, von Engeln made
almost no mention of Harris. The only reference to
Harris appears in the section in which von Engeln was
describing the situation when H. S. Williams returned
to the department in 1904:
“The return of Williams and elevation to head was most
distasteful to all three, Tarr, Gill and Harris and later,
1914, [the] succession of Ries Williams’s [sic] protege, was
greatly resented by the survivors, Gill and Harris.’’°?
Thus, even though they were colleagues in the same
building for almost 50 years, that is all von Engeln had
to say about Harris in the telling of his own life’s story.
°° The photograph was on the cover of The Interior, Educational
Number, v. 38, no. 1940, August 1, 1907.
*’? A photograph of von Engeln developing film in a glacial mel-
twater stream during the 1906 expedition was reprinted in National
Geographic, v. 188, no. 2 (August), 1995, p. 130
8 O. D. von Engeln Papers, 14/15/856, Box 1, File 1-45. RMC-
KL, Cornell.
°° O. D. von Engeln Papers, 14/15/856, Box 1, File 1-45, p. 136.
RMC-KL, Cornell.
RETIREMENT
Harris retired from Cornell in 1934, after 40 years
of association (Plate 13). To mark the occasion, the
University Faculty and the Cornell Board of Trustees
unanimously adopted the following resolution:
“Gilbert Dennison Harris born at Jamestown, New York,
October 2, 1864; graduated by Cornell University in June,
1886, with the degree of Ph.B.; assistant and associate
professor®® of Paleontology and Stratigraphic Geology at
Cornell from 1894 to 1909; Professor of the same since
1909; retired as of October 2, 1934 [his 70th birthday].
“Because of various preempting factors occurring in more
general fields of geology, Professor Harris soon became
interested in the belt of Tertiary rocks which occur all over
that vast territory of the United States from Maryland to
Texas. Thus, he early began to make intensive studies of
the stratigraphy of the Tertiary and of the fossils lying at
hand everywhere over that wide area. It was not long
before he became known throughout the world as an au-
thority on Tertiary Stratigraphy.
“During the six years immediately following graduation,
Professor Harris became successively a member of the
Arkansas Geological Survey, of the United States Geo-
logical Survey, and of the Texas Geological Survey. Sub-
sequently he was State Geologist®! of Louisiana for ten
years and for a time special lecturer in Paleontology and
Stratigraphy at the University of Texas. Professor Harris
and his students have described hundreds of species of
fossils from the Tertiary of the southern United States,
Central America, South America and Africa, and their
studies have extended to southern England and northern
France. As a result of these studies, hundreds of type spec-
imens of fossils have accumulated which constitute a price-
less and absolutely essential collection to all students of
the Tertiary in the countries indicated.
““He was one of the first to recognize the relationship
existing between salt domes and commercial oil and gas
fields and years ago made a special study of salt domes
with the publication of several pioneer papers on the sub-
ject.
“Professor Harris early recognized the necessity of a
medium for the publication of the original descriptions of
new forms and of the papers on stratigraphy by himself
and students. He, therefore, established the Bulletins of
American Paleontology for the more general papers and
the Palaeontographica Americana for the monographic pa-
pers. These publications he has always printed on his own
private press, has, indeed, set the type himself for many
of them and formerly made the plates. This work, with
the Bulletin now in its 22nd volume, and with many mono-
graphs of the Palaeontographica, has been truly prodi-
°° This rank did not exist during that time period. There were two
grades of assistant professor. Trustee minutes for May 18-19, 1909,
state, “Assistant Professor G. D. Harris to be Professor of Paleon-
tology and Stratagraphic [sic] Geology . . .”
®! His official title was, “Geologist in Charge” (Pope, 1988).
116 BULLETIN 350
gious-difficult to understand how it has been possible for
one man to do. Moreover, the plates of two publications
have scarcely been equalled in quality and finish and are
still considered the best in their field today.
“In addition to his extensive labors here at Cornell and
in Louisiana, he has been consulting geologist for the Trin-
idad Petroleum Development Company and Paleontolo-
gist to Standard Oil Company of Venezuela.
**As a teacher, his courses have been rather specialized
and technical for the undergraduate but no man anywhere
has received greater admiration and unbounded loyalty
from graduate students than has Professor Harris. His qui-
et, restrained, modest character, combined with his de-
votions to the interest of his students and to the ultimate
fruition of their labor has inspired many of these men and
women with a fervent zeal and lasting allegiance to him
and to Cornell.
“Professor Harris is now preparing with the greatest
enthusiasm to carry on his work in paleontology and stra-
tigraphy of the Tertiary. He has great collections available
and properly housed. Several of his former graduate stu-
dents are now at work with him and our best wishes are
extended to him for many productive years of labor in his
chosen field’’®?
This and a small reception at the Department orga-
nized by a Mr. J. M. Parker, 3rd°* and given by the
Department, Chi Upsilon, and Sigma Gamma Epsi-
lon,®°* ended his formal connection with Cornell.
62 Adopted at the Trustees meeting of February 2, 1935. Reso-
lution was drafted by A. H. Wright, C. M. Nevin and Glenn W.
Herrick. These names are on a copy of the resolution at HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
°? The name is mentioned in a letter from George M. Martin to
Heinrich Ries, October 6, 1934. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691,
Box 1, File 1-25. RMC-KL, Cornell.
Harris did, however, maintain an office in McGraw
hall for several years after retirement. A former stu-
dent, who was at Cornell shortly after Harris retired,
remembers seeing him carrying fossils and manuscripts
back and forth everyday from home to the office. He
was so afraid of a fire in McGraw Hall, that he would
not leave important materials in his office.® Ries de-
scribed the situation:
“Professor Harris works over here [McGraw Hall] spas-
modically. He retains his desk in the same place it has
been for years, and all of his Tertiary (except for what he
has taken away) is in the next room, ..., Harris suffers
no retrenchment.’’®°
Harris was certainly leaving his mark on McGraw Hall,
for about the time he was retiring, Ries informed him
that the University officials were concerned about the
load on the floors in McGraw Hall from the many
drawers of rocks and fossils that were stored there.°’
But two years earlier, Harris had already begun a
project that was to remove him permanently from Mc-
Graw Hall and Cornell, and which would occupy him
for the rest of his life, the Paleontological Research
Institution.
°’ This information comes from a small article, believed to be
from the /thaca Journal, but exact date and page are unknown, most
probably in October, 1934. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
®5 Lois Schoonover Kent, personal communication, September 8,
1995.
°* Heinrich Ries to John L. Rich, April 8, 1935. Heinrich Ries
Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-24. RMC-KL, Cornell.
°’ Heinrich Ries to Gilbert D. Harris, October 15, 1934. Heinrich
Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-23. RMC-KL, Cornell.
CHAPTER 9. “SOME ROOMY APARTMENT”:
POST-RETIREMENT AND THE PALEONTOLOGICAL RESEARCH INSTITUTION
The years after his retirement in 1934 were, as was
normal for Harris, busy ones, as he continued to edit
and publish his two journals. In fact one of the last
known photographs of Harris, taken three years before
his death, shows him bending over his printing press
as he printed yet another issue (Plate 14). He continued
to personally run the press until 1949, his 85th year,
and number 134 of the Bulletins, when failing eyesight!
forced him to relinquish his position as editor, printer,
'““My eyes are rather going back on me but maybe they have a
right to after 86 years.” Original letter, Gilbert D. Harris to H. C.
Kugler, June 15, 1951. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
and publisher (Palmer 1953a, b). There was a delightful
newspaper article by Carl B. Kaufmann entitled: “‘Pro-
fessor Still Active At 85 In Field of Paleontology’?
which was accompanied by the photograph of Harris
and his printing press. In the article Kaufmann noted
that although he was practically unknown “outside of
science’, Harris did not mind; it“. . .is of little concern
...” to him. Further, Kaufmann brought out the fact
that while the Journal of Paleontology was a“. . . sub-
sidized, staff-prepared affair.”, Harris’ journal was a
one-person operation. At that time, only three years
? The Ithaca Journal, Thursday Evening, November 3, 1949, p. 5.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 117
before his death, he was running 600 copies of the
Bulletins in a single press run.
In retirement there was time for more travel. For
example, in November, 1935, with each person paying
his or her own expenses and Harris providing the au-
tomobile transportation, Rousseau Flower, Katherine
Palmer, and Harris took a trip through Tennessee,
Louisiana, Mississippi, Alabama, and Florida visiting
and collecting in over 31 localities (Palmer, 1982). Two
years later, in 1937, Ralph Liddle (A.B.718) and his
wife Pearle took Harris by automobile across the U.
S. to California and the West Coast on a collecting trip.
The next year, with assistance from a grant from the
Geological Society of America, Harris, Katherine
Palmer, and her husband, E. L. Palmer, made an ex-
tended trip to examine the Gulf Coast from Florida to
Arkansas. One highlight of this venture came with the
discovery of an unexpected fossil. While examining
some strata near Forrest City, Arkansas, Harris dis-
covered a vertebra of a zeuglodont, Basi/osaurus ce-
toides (Owen), which was part of the first known? re-
mains of this extinct whale found that far north (30
degrees) (Palmer, 1939). In 1902, based on other fos-
sils, Harris had assigned the Jackson units to the Eo-
cene and B. cetoides confirmed the presence of these
Jackson beds in the Forrest City area.
He finally found the time to complete the opus on
the turrid gastropod illustrations, a project he had start-
ed almost a half century earlier (Harris, 1937a). He
kept busy with other research publications (Harris,
1934b, 1940, 1951) and professional activities, serving
as President of the Paleontological Society in 1936,
and Vice President of the Geological Society of Amer-
ica in 1937. His address as the retiring President of
the Paleontological Society provided him with an op-
portunity to outline the history of Cenozoic marine
paleontology, to which he and his students had added
many chapters (Harris, 1937b). In 1939, Harris was
elected a “Correspondent of the Academy” by the
members of The Academy of Natural Sciences of Phil-
adelphia, one of the oldest scientific organizations in
the United States, founded in 1812.
But on a personal side, these were lonely years for
him. Two years before he retired, Harris suffered two
irreplaceable losses. First Clara, his wife of almost 42
years and the mother of their only child, became ill in
late 1931:
“T have [sic] sorry to learn that Mrs. Harris is not well.
> As of 1953, it was still the only such remains ever found that far
north (Palmer, 1953a).
* James A. G. Rehn, Corresponding Secretary, to Gilbert D. Har-
ris, September 26, 1939. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
[sic] but I trust it is only temporary and it will not be long
before she will be well once again.’*
But apparently the illness persisted well into March of
1932 and beyond: “Hope Mrs. Harris is improving.’”®;
and:
“T was sorry to learn of Mrs [sic] Harris [sic] bad health.
No doubt the unseasonable weather we have been having
lately is largely responsible. The winter cannot last much
longer and with the return of sure-enough Spring, Mrs.
Harris’s [sic] health will surely also return’’’
Her health did not return and Clara died on August
12, 1932.8 These life-long companions were not des-
tined to go into their twilight years together.
Then his friend, colleague, and neighbor, Adam C.
Gill, died in November of that same year shortly after
his retirement from Cornell (Harris, 1933). Despite all
his activity and the best efforts of his friends and his
daughter Rebecca, the loneliness and the void in his
life caused by these losses must have remained:
“But you can imagine the sadness of opening Christmas
good wishes with the light of our home gone out, But I
suppose such things must just be... .
“After a hard week of winter we are enjoying beautiful
spring-time weather during holidays. ... Nature is O.K.
if man is vile!” [Emphasis in the original.]°
It appears that his sister-in-law, Bertha Stoneman,
came back to New York after Clara’s death:
““We are expecting Mrs [sic] H.’s sister from S. Africa in
Feb. but fear she will be so wedded to the dark continent
that she will be returning after a few months.”’!?
But apparently she did stay, at least for a while, for
Palmer (1982) lists her among the Charter Members
of PRI; however, she was not present at the laying of
the corner stone. She was in Chatautqua County at that
time, “R.D. 3, Jamestown, New York’, and was one
of the three people, along with Harris and Rebecca,
who signed the $1,000 “‘Surety Bond” for PRI on Oc-
tober 17, 1934''. Bertha Stoneman’s name appears
5 Axel Olsson to Gilbert D. Harris, December 28, 1931. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY. The nature of her illness is not known.
© Cecil Card to Gilbert D. Harris, March 15, 1932. HA-PRI, Ith-
aca, NY.
7 Axel Olsson to Gilbert D. Harris, March 30, 1932. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
8 Ithaca Journal-News, Monday, August 15, 1932, p. 3.
° Original letter, Gilbert D. Harris to ““Hodsoni” [Floyd and Helen
Hodson], December 29, 1932. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
‘© Onginal letter, Gilbert D. Harris to “Hodsoni” [Floyd and Helen
Hodson], December 29, 1932. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
' HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
118 BULLETIN 350
also on an undated, but obviously early, list!” of PRI
members with her address listed as “PRI.” She did
eventually return to South Africa!?, for PRI records
show that she resigned her membership “April 31 [sic],
1943” (obviously a mis-typed date), and her address
then was Huguenot University College, Wellington,
South Africa.'4
As he approached his retirement in 1934, the largest
part of Harris’ energies were directed toward his newly
formed Paleontological Research Institution. PRI, as
it was and is known, was founded in 1932 and char-
tered by the State of New York as an educational in-
stitution October 12, 1933'°. It is always difficult to
determine an individual’s motivation when there are
few records of their thoughts, but there seem to be at
least three, and possibly four, major influences which
caused Harris to create PRI. Alone probably none of
these would have been sufficient, but in concert they
were a powerful force.
The first of these was Harris’ fear of fire.'!° McGraw
Hall was filled with wooden floors, ceilings, stairways,
tables, chairs, etc., all of which were very flammable.
One of Harris’s great concerns was that his collections
could be lost if McGraw Hall ever caught fire. The old
wooden inner structure and all the wooden drawers
were hardly fireproof. His fears were not unfounded,
for fires in university buildings had certainly occurred:
“Although most of the records relating to your work at
McGill University were burned in the fire which destroyed
the Engineering building .. .”!’
Even at Cornell only a few months before Harris retired
a fraternity house was destroyed by fire.'®
As the years went by, he appears to have become
more and more obsessed with this fear. As early as
1915 in a letter to Veatch after receiving his $1,000
donation, Harris said:
'? The list is typed on the same paper and accompanies a dues list
which is dated 1936. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
'3 She had a “Power of Attorney” recorded for her in Jamestown
on July 9, 1936. Walter L. Miller, Attorney-at-Law, to Gilbert D.
Harris, March 3, 1937. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
‘4 Membership 1950; Resignations. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
'S The Absolute Charter was granted on November 20, 1936
(Palmer, 1982).
‘e An Ithaca newspaper column by John Chiment published at the
time of the 61st anniversary of PRI made particular note of this fear
in the title, “The man who collected fossils and hated fires.” The
Ithaca Journal August 14, 1993. Chiment, a former employee of
PRI, was Dean of Freshman at Cornell University in 1995.
‘7 Frank Adams to L. C. Graton, March 15, 1913. Heinrich Ries
Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-17. RMC-KL, Cornell.
'8 The Ithaca Journal, January 2, 1934, p. 3.
““My feeling is that in the end the large collection of type
and illustrated specimens to be hereafter collected as well
as those that I have been bringing here for the past 20
years should be left finally at Cornell, provided the Uni-
versity see to it that a fire-proof quarter is arranged for
their reception. What funds we can accumulate should be
left as an assistantship or scholarship with special reference
to the care and upkeeping of these collections.”’!?
At this time Harris makes no mention of creating a
private institution.
Again in 1919, in his budget request to Ries, Harris
said:
“*... and I hope every effort is being made to either have
a small fire proof addition made to this building or to ‘fire-
proof the entire structure. Insurance at present seems to
be rather high for things in this building [McGraw Hall].”’?°
Ries certainly shared Harris’ concern about fire, for
in his report for 1922-23, Ries complained about the
fire danger in McGraw Hall and mentions the irre-
placeable items that would be lost ifa fire should occur:
“Professor Harris has added greatly to the collections of
Tertiary fossils, which are a special feature of the research
carried on in his branch of the department.””!
In a letter to Ries, May 2, 1924, Harris carried the fire
danger complaints further, this time trying the com-
parison approach:
““A student from a neighboring, impovershed [sic] insti-
tution [unnamed] remarked the other day: What lots of
fine things you have here, but Oh [sic] if you only had our
building! A visiting professor from the West remarked: I
admire the class of work you are turning out, but I dont
[sic] like the quarters you work in. We shall hear these
remarks again and again. . .. What is to be done? Personally
I can get along without electric fans or even great and
marble-floored apartments, even trudge sometimes dozens
of times a day up the equivalent of 5 flights of stairs. But
what stings me to the quick is the danger I am running
here every day of the destruction by fire of almost my life’s
work.
“Thad supposed that mere buildings were comparatively
easy to find donors for?*, but we seem to be in the plight
'° Typed and signed copy, with corrections in pen. Gilbert D.
Harris to Arthur C. Veatch, no date, but written in response to
Veatch’s letter dated October 25, 1915 which accompanied his do-
nation. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
20 Gilbert D. Harris to Heinrich Ries, January 25, 1919, Heinrich
Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 2, File 2-1. RMC-KL, Cornell.
2! 4nnual Report by Heinrich Ries to Archie M. Palmer, May 23,
1923, p. 2. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 2, File 2-4. RMC-
KL, Cornell.
22 Perhaps it was never easy for Geological Sciences at Cornell,
for a separate geology building, Snee Hall, was not dedicated until
1984 (Brice, 1989).
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 119
of getting together most notable collections of materials
and have no decent and safe building to put them in!’’?+
In his report to Ries for 1924-25, Harris emphasized
why fire was such a concern to him:
“‘What is most needed here is a suitable building and fur-
niture and help in curator work. No human being can
teach, carry on investigational work, be getting the im-
portant collections of this Hemisphere in his collections,
and giving the results of his work to the world in completed
printed reports, and at the same time have time to properly
clean, shellac, number, catalog, and put away in conve-
nient place for reference the thousand and one specimens
from hundreds of horizons and thousands of localities.
Nor is it economical that he should so spend his time. So
far as our building is concerned it certainly taxes ones [sic]
moral courage to be buying expensive books, getting in
invaluable collections and feeling, with good reason, that
every time the fire whistle blows a great share of ones [sic]
interest in life may be going up in smoke. it seems as tho
[sic] there must be some way out of this strange situa-
tion.’”*4
Ries was cognizant of the situation and, again, made
a point of stressing in his Annual Report for 1924-1925
the value of Harris’ collections:
“The collections which he [Harris] has crowded on the top
floor, can probably not be duplicated anywhere in this
country, and are of great value for students interested in
his particular field.’’?>
The following year Harris was at it again:
““What is most needed inpaleontologic [sic] geology here
at Cornell now is a modest, compact, fire-proof museum
building with a curator in charge.’’?°
In none of the existing letters and reports written
before the autumn of 1926 in which Harris spoke about
the danger of fire and the need for fire-proof quarters
does he suggest having such a building anywhere except
at Cornell. But note the change in this letter from 1927:
““Of course, the chronic disease, the stupefying factor here
at Cornell in Geology today is the lack of facilities for the
utilization of such materials as we already fortunately have.
“Personally I am going into publication far more exten-
sively than heretofore, but with more and better room
could accomplish twice as much with half the energy.
23 Gilbert D. Harris to Heinrich Ries, May 2, 1924. Heinrich Ries
Papers, 14/15/691, Box 2, File 2-4. RMC-KL, Cornell.
24 Annual Report for 1924-25 by G. D. Harris, N.D., pp. 1-2.
Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 2, File 2-4. RMC-KL, Cornell.
25 Annual Report for 1924-1925 by Heinrich Ries to R, M. Ogden,
May 7, 1925, p. 3. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 2, File
2-4. RMC-KL, Cornell.
26G. D. Harris to Heinrich Ries, May 4, 1926. Heinrich Ries
Papers, 14/15/691, Box 2, File 2-4. RMC-KL, Cornell.
“I have sometimes seriously thought of removing ev-
erything not belonging to the University to an outside
building, but have hesitated on account of desiring to teach
by doing before the students themselves.”’ [Emphasis in
the original.]*’
In Harris’ mind, the move had been made, and the
reason seems Clear; between the first letter quoted above
(May, 1926) and the second (May, 1927), Harris and
Maury had their confrontation (December, 1926), as
detailed in a previous section. This change in Harris’
mind from having all his collections at Cornell to leav-
ing nothing at Cornell appears to have developed as a
direct result of the Maury affair, and was an extension
of his ideas on the need for a fireproof structure. In a
portion of the ‘apology’ letter to the President in De-
cember, 1926, cited earlier, this transition can be pin-
pointed:
“If necessary to protect the University from criticism /
can build some roomy apartment, off the University prop-
erty and collect therein ally [sic] my own and these various
collections that might possibly cause embarrassments and
hence relieve all anxieties.” [Emphasis added.]?®
Even as he was contemplating a solution to his dif-
ficulties, Harris was still hammering away at the po-
tential fire danger and Ries mentioned it again in his
Annual Report for 1926-27, *“The danger from fire is
a menace which is continually with us.’’?
The following is yet another excerpt from a letter
Harris wrote to Ries which further demonstrates his
almost morbid fear of fire. Harris was writing on his
own stationery, with the letterhead, “*Paleontological
Laboratory, Cornell University” and sending the typed
letters to Ries; they were communicating by formal
letter from one floor of McGraw Hall to another. In
this letter Harris complained, again, about the fire dan-
ger, but used somewhat stronger language about mov-
ing his material elsewhere:
“My amazement grows daily as I see heaps of ejecte-
menta from the various geologic rooms and dens contain-
ing semi-burned matches by the hundreds and smell the
odor of ignited tobacco.
““Now there must be some way of stopping this matter.
Of course these yongster [sic] who have nothing at stake
care little, but if we have several tens of thousands of
2? G. D. Harris to Heinrich Ries, May 24, 1927. Heinrich Ries
Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-23. RMC-KL, Cornell.
28 Unsigned carbon copy of letter from Gilbert D. Harris to Liv-
ingston Farrand, President, Cornell University, December 16, 1926.
HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
2? Annual Report for 1926-1927, by Heinrich Ries to R. C. Gibb,
May 28, 1927. p. 4. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 2, File
2-4. RMC-KL, Cornell.
120 BULLETIN 350
dollars worth of types and rare publications needed in the
promotion of science it is not fair to let this matter drag
along unchecked, and I shall certainly see to it that my
things, are disposed of elsewhere if Cornell does not show
a vivid interest in not particularly my welfare, butthe [sic]
welfare of sience [sic].’°°
Ries looked into the situation immediately, and he did
not let Harris get the better of him over the issue of
fire hazards. As he explained in his reply, a quick in-
spection of McGraw revealed the worst potential for
a fire to be in Harris’s own paleontology laboratory:
“Tf you will present me with a more exact information as
to where you have seen these ‘heaps of ejectementa’ and
‘semi burned matches by the hundreds’, I shall be very
glad to give the matter prompt attention. I have told you
many times that no one is more worried over fire in Mc-
Graw than I am, and I also suspect that I keep a much
closer watch over conditions in the entire department than
you do, for I have the interest of the whole organization
at heart, and realize that others besides yourself have ir-
replaceable collections.
“Incidently, it may also be added that the fire inspector
makes periodical visits to McGraw, and it was in your
own rooms that he has reported some of the worst con-
ditions. You may remember the time I visited the top floor
with Mr. Curtis [the fire inspector], and in your northwest
room found a lighted bunsen burner, perched on a narrow
board over a bushel basket of waste paper.
“(Handwritten at the bottom.] P.S. Possibly some of the
fumes of ignited tobacco which you refer to may come
from some of your own students who are known to descend
to the floor below yours when they want to smoke.” [Em-
phasis in the original.]*!
Yet, as indicated earlier, Ries was not unsympathetic
to the need for better quarters. For years he had been
trying, without success, to get the new and more fire-
proof facilities Harris, and he himself, wanted. In the
1919-20 report, after stating what an unfavorable im-
pression the geology facilities made on visitors, he as-
serted that the department facilities were “actually hin-
dering the growth of the department”’ [emphasis in orig-
inal]. Ries had tried a different approach in 1923. As
large enrollments forced the department to use the
basement, in a letter to President Farrand, Ries com-
plained that the area, “*... is really not fit for women
students to work in.’*? The university administration,
30 G. D. Harris to Heinrich Ries, April 20, 1928. Heinrich Ries
Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-23. RMC-KL, Cornell.
*! Carbon copy, with handwritten P.S., Heinrich Ries to G. D.
Harris, April 20, 1928. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1,
File 1-23. RMC-KL, Cornell.
>? Heinrich Ries to Livingston Farrand, March 27, 1923. Heinrich
Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-23. RMC-KL, Cornell.
however, apparently never seriously considered build-
ing new quarters for geology, even though President
Farrand’s 1931 report mentioned that this was “one
of the real needs of the university.”’**
Given the animosity that appears to have existed
between the two men, it would have been expedient
for Ries to communicate to Harris what he was doing
and that the fault of non-action did not lie with him
or the Department, but it is difficult to tell if Ries told
him or not. Harris did, however, know of Ries’ at-
tempts to make the University Administration aware
of the situation in McGraw Hall. Monroe G. Cheney**
appears to have sent Harris a letter he received from
Ries in February, 1930, in which Ries described the
needs of the department. At the top of Ries’ list was
the plea:
“*._. we are sorely in need of a new building, in which we
can feel safe from fire, . .. For some years I have stressed
this matter as strongly as I knew how in my annual reports
to the Dean, until he must be tired of hearing it, but I shall
continue to do so.’°
On the strength of that letter, just before a meeting of
the American Association of Petroleum Geologists
(AAPG) in New Orleans, Cheney sent an open letter
to “Fellow Cornellians” (presumably only those who
had connections with the Department) in which he
outlined the problems and requested assistance. In this
letter he had a long quotation from a letter he had
received from Harris. Once again Harris put forth his
idea about a having separate entity. Cheney quoted
Harris as writing:
“I would like to see a small, very substantial fire-proof
section of a building commenced in this generation, with
a possibility in the plan for future expansion. And I am
convinced that the value of such a building would be such
that the building and materials would be known and used
by all real geologic investigators, Cornellians or otherwise.
I think there is a way of inlisting [sic] real men in a real
cause, with no personal names or strings tied to it.”” [Em-
phasis added.]*°
33 In a letter to “Fellow Cornellians”, Cheney quoted Farrand as
saying that, “. .. he [Farrand] considers that better geological quar-
ters and facilities are among the foremost needs of the University.”
M. G. Cheney to Fellow Cornellians, March 8, 1930. HA=PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
34 Monroe G. Cheney (B.S. ‘16), later President, Anzac Oil Cor-
poration, Coleman, Texas. The Monroe Cheney Fund was created
at PRI by a donation from his widow in 1969.
35 Heinrich Ries to M. G. Cheney, February 8, 1930, and bearing
Ries’ signature. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
36 M. G. Cheney to “Fellow Cornellians’”, March 8, 1930; copy
sent to Harris attached to Ries’ letter of February 8, 1930. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 121
Note Harris’ desire not to have a person’s name on
this new building or organization. Later, this was to
play a major role when the final name for his new entity
was decided.
The fear of fire, and his distaste for University in-
volvement in what he obviously felt were his own af-
fairs, appear to have planted the seed which in six years
grew into reality. Yet PRI was nurtured by two addi-
tional conditions beyond his fears of both fire and not
having total control of his own affairs and collections.
As Harris approached retirement, he had greater and
greater anxiety about how to protect his collections
and, at the same time, insure that the work to which
he had devoted his life would continue. When Harris
arrived at Cornell as a student in 1883, the center
portion of McGraw Hall from the second to the fourth
floors was devoted to a large museum. The museum
is largely forgotten now at Cornell, but it was a sub-
stantial enterprise. At its peak, it included a large, three
story, open gallery with a central atrium lined with
balconies on the third and fourth levels. It housed
many exhibits, both geological and non-geological, e.g.,
several mounted specimens of recent animals and even
a real Egyptian mummy (Brice, 1989). In addition to
literally thousands of invertebrate fossils and Recent
shells>’, the museum housed complete skeletons of fos-
sil vertebrates, both real and full-sized casts, including
a life-sized cast of a giant sloth skeleton. Harris had
watched this University museum and its collections
slowly disappear through neglect and indifference
(Brice, 1989). Now as he neared retirement, he was
faced with the prospect of having his life’s work being
similarly abandoned or at best not cared for properly:
“TI don’t want to see my material, the work of 40 years,
thrown into ash-cans. Furthermore, I want to be sure that
the research will be carried on where I left off and that the
collection will not fall into disuse in unsympathetic hands.
After all, great cathedrals aren’t built in a day ora year.’38
So, this gave him another reason for having a separate
facility; his fear of fire, the University having some
control over who could or could not use the collections
(exemplified by the Maury affair), and now his fear that
no one would care for the material after he was gone.
But there is one more condition which, when added
to the other three, helps explain his desire to create a
separate entity, separate from Cornell or any other
influence. This, furthermore, may have been at the
heart of why there was such animosity and bad feeling
toward Cornell on the part of Harris and both his real
” e.g., The Newcomb Shell Collection which was originally pur-
chased by Ezra Cornell and now resides at PRI.
38 Ithaca Journal-News, April 1, 1933.
and his “paleontological” family; namely his percep-
tion of how he and his work was judged by the Uni-
versity administration and his colleagues.
Running through many of his reports and letters to
Williams, Ries, and other University officials are state-
ments which suggest Harris felt his work was neither
fundamentally understood nor appreciated by his su-
periors. This is evident, for example, in his Annual
Report for 1927-28:
“IT am well aware that all departments in the University
could use to advantage more funds. But I say bio-geology
should be considered first on account of what we have
already personally done for its needs. The running of free
excursions for 20 years by boat has not been duplicated
by many departments, to mention but one item. The of-
fering of ready means for publication of desirable pale-
ontologic papers is not duplicated in every department.
The use of photostat, type material, personal equipment
in general, does not fall into the hands of students in every
department.’”*°
Earlier he had written:
“We have had, therefore, to rely largely upon our own
resources, chance associations with State and National sur-
veys, special expeditions and various connections with
exterior organizations for our support in our museum work
and materials.’’*°
“And until some rather sweeping changes are made in
plan of work, plan of announcements, teaching staff, quar-
ters and appropriations I cannot look forward to great
improvements here [at Cornell].*!
Even in a newspaper article about the founding of PRI,
there is the comment:
“This cataloging and collecting Professor Harris has been
doing for forty years, [was] all [done] at his own expense,
[and] mostly with his own hands. . .. He bought the press
with his own funds out ofa salary that until ten years ago
was not more than $1,500 a year. He worked extra in
summer vacations to raise small sums for geology
expeditions’’*?
This is a classic case of not telling the entire truth.
Certainly what is in the article is true, but what it
doesn’t say is that the $1,500 represented only half-
salary and that Harris himself requested the arrange-
8° Annual Report for 1927-1928 by G. D. Harris for Heinrich Ries,
May 8, 1928, p. 3. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 2, File
2-4. RMC-KL, Cornell.
*°G,. D. Harris to Heinrich Ries, May 2, 1924. Heinrich Ries
Papers, 14/15/691, Box 2, File 2-4. RMC-KL, Cornell.
4! Page 1, Annual Report by G. D. Harris to Heinrich Ries, May
4, 1926. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 2, File 2-4. RMC-
KL, Cornell.
“2 New York Herald Tribune. Sunday, July 16, 1933.
122 BULLETIN 350
ments. But it seems Harris saw this article as an op-
portunity to tell the world how badly Cornell had treat-
ed him, and to demonstrate how unappreciated he was.
Thus, is seems in Harris’ mind he had four different,
but related, pressures pushing him toward the eventual
split with Cornell. It is interesting to note that the split
was not total, however; for over 10 years after his
retirement, Harris still maintained some quarters at
McGraw. At least that seems to be the situation de-
scribed by Ries:
“|. an investigation. . . [would] find that Professor Harris
is now [1945] occupying considerably more space with his
property than I am.’’*?
The small platen press remained in McGraw Hall until
1948 (Palmer, 1982).
Starting as early as two years before his formal re-
tirement from Cornell, Harris carried his idea to some
of his former students, several of whom expressed their
concern for the work at Cornell after he retired:
“T am heartily in accord with the ideas expressed in your
letter of February 20th regarding a building to be known
as the ‘Hall of Types.’ ’’*4
*‘Whatever is going to happen to the department which
you’ve spent so many fertile years to build up? Your last
letter in which you mention that as yet no visible successor
was being groomed for the paleontological department,
frankly perturbs me... . My technique would be to stress
what the department has done and in true alumnus style
vigorously inquire what is going to be done when the old
guard goes. Please let me know what your ideas are on the
subject, for I feel we all owe it to you to first ascertain what
you think is best, not only for the personal attachment but
for the good of the department with the workings of which
you are fully acquainted.’’*> [Emphasis in the original.]
Not all of his former students seemed to feel a separate
organization was altogether a good idea, Olsson wrote:
““We have made such a start in Tertiary paleontology and
it would be an everlasting disgrace if this work was sus-
pended at Cornell in the future. Under the deplorable con-
ditions in which the world finds itself today, the only thing
we can do is to wait and hope for the best. . . . Until there
is at least a change for the better and some assurance for
the future, I personally believe that any other plan now
would be sure to fail. This may not be a very bright picture
43 Heinrich Ries to Edmund Day, President, Cornell University.
Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 2, File 2-9. RMC-KL, Cornell.
44 A.C. Veatch to Gilbert D. Harris, May 16, 1930. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
4° Norman Weisbord to Gilbert D. Harris, January 10, 1932. HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY.
to draw but all is not yet lost at Cornell and our first
obligation is to her.’’*°
But Olsson finally gave his blessing to the idea, al-
though at the time he did not feel he could offer fi-
nancial support:
“T am very much interested in your new plans for your
lab. [sic] and I hope you will be able to carry the project
through to completion. In normal times as it was a few
years ago, I could and would have considered it a privilege
to take part in it but at the present time I can see no way
of doing so. With taxes and other expenses continually
rising from which there is no escape and no income, these
times are very difficult and the prospect of any immediate
change for the better is not rosy. However when I am once
again on an earning bases [sic] I will be very glad to join
your Paleontological company and become a share-holder.
I have always dreamed of having a paleontological lab.
[sic], but your idea is much finer than anything I could
possibly visualize. There is no doubt that Cornell has got
into a rut and intends to stay there. Still you have a year
or more at Cornell and so there is really no need of rush
or worry.’’4”
In only a few short months, Olsson was to become a
founding member of this new organization.
Harris worked with his family law firm in James-
town, New York*’, to prepare a charter and a set of
by-laws for a research institution. In the spring of 1932,
Harris transferred title to a small strip of land on his
property at 126 Kelvin Place that opened onto Dear-
born Place to his new Institution, and the cornerstone
for a future building was laid on June 28 of that year.
This was marked with a simple ceremony, as might be
expected of an occasion presided over by Harris. Each
of those present inserted a particular object into the
cinder block cornerstone, and, assisted by one of his
graduate students, Stephen M. Herrick, (A.B.’27,
M.S.’29, Ph.D.’33), Harris cemented it over. Partici-
pating in that historic event were Harris’s wife, Clara,
and their daughter, Rebecca; his friend, colleague, and
neighbor, Professor A. C. Gill, and Mrs. Gill; Axel A.
Olsson; three other former students, Pearl G. Sheldon,
Beatrice Bolton (Mrs. Celton Hughes), and Katherine
Van Winkle Palmer. The proceedings were watched
over with great interest by Herrick’s dog, Pat. Professor
E. Laurence Palmer, husband of Katherine, took pho-
tographs and recorded the event on movie film, which
4© Axel Olsson to Gilbert D. Harris, March 17, 1932. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
47 Axel Olsson to Gilbert D. Harris, April 4, 1932. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
48 Wilson C. Price, Attorney and Counselor at Law, to Gilbert D.
Harris, April 19, 1932. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 123
resides in the PRI archives. Apparently within about
a year, Harris had a small building in place over this
new corner stone:
‘Liddle was out to see me a few months ago and was much
pleased with the Cabina [the name of the first PRI build-
ing].””*°
Palmer (1982), however, indicated that the building
known as the ““Cabina”’ was not erected until late 1934,
the year after Liddle saw the ““Cabina”’ according to
Harris’ letter, and was not ready for occupancy until
1935:
“After his retirement from teaching in 1934, he [Harris]
financed the construction of a two-storied cinder black
structure of 4800 square feet of four rooms with central
stairway and fireplace . . .”’ (Palmer, 1982, p. 7).
Perhaps Harris meant to say that Liddle was pleased
with the plans for the Cabina, or Palmer, who wrote
the PRI history almost 50 years after the events, was
simply confused about the dates, even though she was
there when it happened. To further confuse the issue,
in 1949 Harris himself said:
“in 1932, a small fire-proof [sic] structure was erected,
and certain collections of fossils and books were installed.”
(Palmer, 1982, p. 22; Reprint of a letter to the PRI mem-
bership, May 1949).
This seems to support the idea that there was a building
in place before he retired. In any case, the building was
built, PRI was really underway, and the ‘first official
meeting in the Cabina took place on April 6, 1935.
The official Founding Members were Harris and his
daughter Rebecca; former students (in order of their
association with Harris), Axel A. Olsson, Pearl G. Shel-
don, Ralph A. Liddle, Katherine V. W. Palmer; and
Burnett Smith, a retired Syracuse University professor
of geology and paleontology (Palmer, 1982).
After some wording changes in the Charter and By-
Laws required by the Board of Regents of the State
Education Department, PRI was granted a provisional
charter on October 12, 1933, and a permanent charter
was issued in 1936. Originally Harris had wanted to
use the name American Paleontological Institution,
*° Orginal letter, Gilbert D. Harris to “Hodsoni” [Floyd and Helen
Hodson], October 15, 1933. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
*° The name appears in the photostat of a letter from Charles E.
Weaver to Gilbert D. Harris, April 6, 1933. In the letter Weaver
agrees with Harris that the arrangement is, “*. . . an opportunity for
the development of an organization where research may be carried
on without restrictions of any University and for that reason it seems
very desirable to have the entire plant off of University grounds. . .”
HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
but the State Education Department felt that this name
was too broad and presented some misrepresentation
(Palmer, 1982):
“... the Regents do not approve of American Pal. Inst.
as a name, fearing we are pretending to be more han [sic]
we are, presumably. I have suggested other ways our but
have failed. Still, maybe some of my last suggestions will
carr , [sic] and Oct. i2th [sic] was the day they were o [sic]
decide on charter granting.’”*!
That name did appear in a newspaper headline atop
an article about the founding of PRI which was pub-
lished before the state charter was granted. The head-
line was ‘Harris’ Museum of fossils Forms Nucleus of
American Paleological Institution.’’*? In another letter
Harris used the name American Institute of
Paleontology**, which is close to the final name. Even
though Harris used the word J/nstitute in a letter, Palm-
er said:
“It always annoyed Prof. Harris when the organization
was referred to as the Paleontological Research “Institute.”
There is a difference [which Palmer did not explain].”
(Palmer, 1982, p. 5)
As indicated earlier, Harris was adamant that neither
his nor any other person’s name be in the title of the
Institution, and that there be no official connection
with Cornell University (Palmer, 1982).
By the time the provisional charter was granted in
1933 the PRI had captured at least some of the media.
Even the New York Herald Tribune had an article about
it: “Museum built for Shell and Bone at Ithica [sic]’>4
quoted Harris as saying the reason for creating it was,
“to keep safe some ‘things money can’t buy.” The
‘things’, according to the article were, “said to be part
of life of 100,000,000 years ago.”: the article didn’t
even get the age correct.
As an aside, it is interesting to note that in the con-
>! Original letter, Gilbert D. Harris to “*Hodsoni” [Floyd and Helen
Hodson], October 15, 1933. Also in this letter Harris indicates that
he had been ill for several weeks with kidney problems. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
°2 The Ithaca Journal-News, April 1, 1933.
‘3 This name is typed in capital letters at the top of an unsigned
carbon copy of a letter, Gilbert D. Harris to “Dr. Bowen”, March
12, 1933. This would be C. F. Bowen of Standard Oil Company as
Harris received a letter from him June, 12, 1933, with a list of
Brazilian fossils and the March letter was about Brazilian fossils.
HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
4 New York Herald Tribune. Sunday, July 16, 1933. The page and
section are not known, for the article appeared in a regional edition,
and that part was not included in the microfilm records which were
of the “Final Editions” of the newspaper.
124 BULLETIN 350
versations on which this article were presumably based,
Harris appears to have used the word evolution:
“They [the fossils] are things which evolution discarded
and threw out of the procession of life 100,000,000 years
ago. Valuable because they are the last of their kind, re-
cords of ‘horizons’ of the past, essential pieces in a jug-
saw puzzle which is expected some day to show man
‘whence he came’ ”
This small statement is the only record known of
Harris’ thinking on the concept of evolution. Even in
his historical geology text he did not go into the subject
in any depth. In the Introduction he said:
“If we are, as geologists claim, not children of an hour but
of the tenth part of a second, geologically speaking, how
can we presume to know the course of past and future ages
of earth history? Is the life history of any organism what-
ever to be determined by a mere glance at its form at one
stage of development? What botanist would attempt to
write the life history of an oak if he never saw it except
from the window of the Empire State Express?>> What
zoologist would feel competent to rush into print con-
cerning the life history of a porpoise if he had observed it
but once from out the cabin window ofa Transcontinental
steamer as the creature darted between two waves? But
reflect for a moment, if along side a full grown oak the
botanist could get a glimpse of oaks all the way from but
a few inches in height to those already falling with decay,
and the zoologist could see a whole school of porpoises of
various sizes or stages of development, then the life his-
tories of these subjects would no longer be so obscure
although many of their earlier stages could only be sur-
mised... . (Harris, 1907c, p. 3)
And in the section about the origin of life:
“It is doubtless quite true that in general animals of simple
structure preceded those of complex structure. The first
forms of life were doubtless unicellular.” (Ibid, p. 57).
From these excerpts from his text, it appears that Har-
ris did at least agree with the idea of evolution. Exactly
what he believed about the processes and mechanisms
of evolution however, is unknown. Although in his
text book he followed and described an evolutionary
pattern of change in life forms, he apparently never
published any general discussion of the topic.
When the time came to begin the transfer of samples
from the Cornell Geology Department to PRI, con-
fusion must have reigned supreme. Years earlier, a
former classmate had remarked on the chaos in Harris’
collections:
“I am glad to learn that your are overhauling the plant
material with the other fossils in the Museum. I hope you
°> The name of a fast passenger train of the day.
will turn up some interesting material. I dare say that there
is a great lot of work to be done on your collections. When
finished the fossil series will be far more efficient as a means
of instruction for students.’’*°
As the collections were divided, Ries had to shoulder
the task of overseeing the collection separation and
making certain that something was left for the Uni-
versity:
“*... because of Prof. Harris’ retirement it became nec-
essary to take stock of the collections on the top floor. As
I [Ries] suspected they are in a most confused condition,
and it will take some work to get them straightened out,
for although some $1400 has been allowed for curatorial
work on them during the past four or five years, little
cataloging or arrangement of specimens has been done, in
fact we had to depend to a large extent on Prof. Harris to
tell us what belonged to the University and what to other
people. I shall use the $200 allotted for curatorial work in
the new budget towards making a start to get things in
some sort of shape before a new professor is appointed.’’>’
There was some truth to what Ries said about the
lack of curation work with the fossils that were col-
lected by the various expeditions. Apparently the groups
would collect vast amounts of material, but then not
have time to really prepare and describe what they
brought back to the laboratory. Olsson (1914) and van
Winkle and Harris (1919) used some samples collected
on the 1897 Janthina trip, 22 years later. And in 1921:
“
. more material from the ‘97 trip was found in the
laboratory which had not been worked up.” (Van Winkle,
LOD pa S52):
(Certainly Harris was not unique in being slow to
get to material. For a thesis study (Howell, 1925), Har-
ris loaned Princeton University several drawers of tri-
lobites collected by C. F. Hartt in New Brunswick in
the 1860s. These samples were not returned to Cornell
until the 1980s.°°)
Even after some of the dust of Harris’ move had
settled, there were still problems concerning the col-
lections. In Ries’ mind, Harris had removed much
more than necessary. Note the reference to course pre-
°° David White to G. D. Harris, April 18, 1910. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
5? Annual Report for 1933-34 by Heinrich Ries, N.D., pp. 2-3.
Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 2, File 2-17. RMC-KL, Cor-
nell.
°8 These were returned to me after Snee Hall was opened in 1984.
Princeton closed out paleontology and discovered the samples, still
in the original drawers, with the Cornell labels on them. A friend
was on the Princeton faculty then and knew of my connection to the
Cornell Department and gave them to me at a Northeastern Section/
Geological Society of America meeting.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 125
requisites, which was always a subject of contention
between Harris and Ries:
“‘The courses in paleontology and stratigraphy are running
satisfactorily, but they are handicapped by lack of study
material, although Dr. Merriam®*’ is attempting to over-
come this trouble as rapidly as possible. I am glad to
remark that he [Merriam] insists on his students having
the proper prerequisites for his courses, so that is some-
thing I have not had to worry about since he took charge
of the work in his branch... .”*°°
Several years later, Ries remembered the problems
of collection ownership this way:
*‘When Harris was about to retire an inventory was made
of the property in Paleontology, whereupon it developed
that of the 3300 odd drawers of fossils only about 1300
were acknowledged to be university property of which abut
300 [sic] are practically of no value unless we can find the
key to the letters on them. About 1300 [drawers] were
listed by Harris as his property, while Caster claimed about
250, the remainder being said to be the property of various
other people. It will be seen that the collection belonging
to the university is wretchedly small. . .. He [Harris] re-
moved all of his ‘types’ to his ‘Institute’ and with them
went some of the types that belonged to the university, as
was subsequently discovered accidently. A lot of Miss
Maury’s San domingo types have disappeared.’’*!
To fully appreciate the step Harris was taking in
starting PRI, one must consider the economic condi-
tions of the nation at the time. 1932 was the height of
the Great Depression; banks were failing-by the hun-
dreds, and bread lines were a common sight all across
the nation. Yet, Harris went ahead with his dream,
ignoring the pessimism of the day, for in his mind the
alternative of leaving everything at Cornell was far
worse. But it was, even then, a strange type of insti-
tution, for it came into existence with:
. no elaborate fanfare, no fund raising, no ballyhoo,
nor subscription plan to start or promote the Harris con-
crete, but perhaps Utopian, scheme of a long term estab-
lishment. No private endowment funded or blessed this
extremely informal modest enterprise.”’ (Palmer, 1982, p.
5).
There is a certain irony in that as Harris was contem-
plating how he was going to raise the capital to put a
°° Charles W. Merriam, who replaced Harris (Brice, 1989).
°° Heinrich Ries to R. M. Ogden, Dean, Cornell University, May
31, 1937, p. 2. This letter served as the Annual Report for 1936-
1937. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 2, File 2-2. RMC-KL,
Cornell.
*! Undated notes prepared by Ries after Harris retired in 1934
and before Charles Merriam left in 1942. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/
15/691, Box 3, File 3-2. RMC-KL, Cornell.
building around his new corner stone, to Hodson he
related the following:
“Simonds writes they are moving in their grand Geol. bldg
[sic], a building far finer that he ever dreamed of, and he
has lived to see it. Texas is putting thru [sic] a $5,000,000.00
[sic] building program.’’°?
In addition to his salary from Cornell and the fees
he was paid by various oil companies, Harris appar-
ently was renting the family farm®? and he had sub-
divided part of the land, built houses on some of it
and was renting them. According to surviving records,
in 1939 Harris was selling land for $200 and acre and
$250 for a corner lot®*. Given the times, it is not sur-
prising that he received the following letter: with a
return address, “104 Harris Avenue”:
“IT was wondering if it were possible for you to come down
on our rent as I have had a fourteen 14.00 [sic] dollar a
month cut in my salary and will be impossible for me to
stay here at the present rate. I most assuredly hate to move
from here as it isa very pleasant house & my wife & myself
have become very much attached to it.’®
And another letter, this time from “68 Harris Ave-
nue”:
“.. I deposited $25.00 to your account yesterday which
is to apply for the month of Feb. and I will make another
deposit for the month of March at a later date.’®*
As Harris approached the end of his time at Cornell,
he began the transition from university professor to
director of the private institution®’. He converted the
third floor of his house into a temporary laboratory
and a new rotary cylinder printing press went into his
basement. Later, as furnishings were purchased for the
Cabina, Harris allowed only metal tables, chairs, and
specimen cabinets as they would not burn easily. Fi-
nally he had his fire-proof building. Ironically, the only
62 Gilbert D. Harris to Floyd Hodson, April 12, 1933. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
®3 Cecil Card to Gilbert D. Harris, March 15, 1932. Mr. Card
discussed the land taxes and electric bills he had paid, and requests
Harris’ presence to “*. . . get the work for the summer planned, . . .””
HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
°* Unsigned carbon copy sent to Harris; Newman & Adams, At-
torneys and Counselors, to William H. Feltcher, Jr., Esq., June 29,
1939. The letter was refusing an offer of $600 and outlining the
prices Harris was asking. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
6° DeForest L. Strunk to Gilbert D. Harris, March 3, 1932. HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY.
66 W. Edwin Carlson to Gilbert D. Harris, March 6, 1932. HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY.
®? Although he was not officially elected to that office until June
2, 1950, everyone understood who was in charge (Palmer, 1982).
126 BULLETIN 350
source of heat for the building was an open fire place.
As the 1930s vintage concrete blocks were quite porous
to the cold Ithaca winter winds, that fireplace was, no
doubt, well used. The newspaper articles about the
creation of PRI underscored the fire-proof aspect, but
most did not get the name correct:
“This institution, already chartered by the state board of
regents, is established in a fireproof museum named by
Professor Harris ‘The Hall of Types,’®* built with $3,000
of his own funds in the backyard of his home at 126 Kelvin
Place.”’°?
Certainly his former students appreciated the new fa-
cility, especially for its “fireproof” nature:
“It is also of considerable satisfaction to know that our
type material will be securely housed and properly cared
for in the fireproof vault of the Paleontological Research
Institution which Professor Harris has sponsored, to his
everlasting credit. May this institution grow and prosper
and ever increase in usefulness to students of paleobiology.
May it also quicken interest in and appreciation for pa-
leontologic research in the community in which it was
established.” (Flower and Caster, 1935, p. 200)
Not long after the beginning of PRI, Harris and a
former student, Helen Tucker (Ph.D.°37; Mrs. Rich-
ards Rowland), had a serious disagreement, along the
same lines as the situation with Maury. This one seemed
to be centered around fossil collections that belonged
to her which Harris wanted for PRI. Tucker appears
to have come to Cornell about 1932. Among Ries’
papers are letters of reference for her, and one is from
Kirtley F. Mather of Harvard University.’° She had
attended a summer school course of his. One of Harris’
former students, however, Ernest Rice Smith at De-
pauw University, had not had a very pleasant expe-
rience when she was in his department:
“T don’t believe you can realize the continual tension be-
tween Miss Tucker and me. It is terrible. I never saw the
beat of that woman. For instance, I have the feeling that
she has sent a student who was griping on me to the Dean.
I’m not the only one who feels so, yet no one can prove
igen
68 Harris used this name ina letter to Veatch in 1930, cited earlier.
6° The Post-Standard, Syracuse, New York, November 4, 1934.
The page and section are not known, for the article appeared in a
regional edition, and that part of the newspaper is not included in
the microfilm records which were only of the “Final Editions.”
70 Kirtley F. Mather to F. H. Richmeyer, Dean, Cornell University,
March 7, 1932. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-61.
RMC-KL, Cornell.
71 E. R. Smith to Gilbert D. Harris, November 16, 1931. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
“T will be perfectly frank. We have been under such
heavy expense this year together with decreased income I
had even considered not coming to Ithaca myself this sum-
mer. yet I feel it very important for her sake, for my sake,
for the sake of the department here, to move her on. How
would you feel toward this? You urge her to try for the
$300 scholarship there.’’’?
Eventually she did come to Cornell to do work in pa-
leontology with Harris. Shortly after she came to Cor-
nell, her life was further complicated by the loss of all
of her money when a bank failed.’? In any event, she
had difficulties and, given Smith’s letters, in Harris’
mind she no doubt came to Cornell under a cloud of
suspicion. But despite all this, she and Harris appeared
to develop a good working and personal relationship
which lasted for several years. She was a Charter Mem-
ber of PRI.”4
Druid Wilson, a colleague of Tucker at Cornell, had
known her at Florida Southern College prior to her
coming to Cornell. He found her to be a good teacher,
but not as careful with her research as she might have
been. In fact Wilson said’? he was unhappy with some
errors in their first joint paper (Tucker and Wilson,
1932a), but he never saw the manuscript until it was
too late to have his name removed. According to Wil-
son, the two of them were seldom in the field together,
and he did most of the actual collecting, but they did
publish a series of papers on Florida fossils (Tucker
and Wilson, 1932b,c, 1933). So Tucker was active in
paleontological research before and while she was at
Cornell.
In 1935, she was granted Department funds to ship
the fossils she collected in Florida back to Ithaca.’”¢ In
addition she had amassed a collection of material from
Cuba, and Harris apparently wanted these collections,
which through some arrangement with him were stored
in the basement of his house. He must have quoted
her a price that was not even reasonable:
‘“‘Atno time has my Florida, Cuba, or any part of my other
collections been offered for sale. If it were, I am too well
informed in regard to the cost of collecting and trans-
porting it to Ithaca to sell it for any such figure as you
quote to me in your note. I do not see how you can advance
? Personal letter, E. R. Smith to Gilbert D. Harris, February 23,
1932. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
7 Heinrich Ries to Eliot Blackwelder, October 5, 1941. Heinrich
Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 3, File 3-3. RMC-KL, Cornell
74 Helen Tucker is listed as a Charter Member in the minutes for
October 6, 1934 (Palmer, 1982, p. 6).
75 Personal communication, September 6, 1995.
76 Heinrich Ries to Helen Tucker, July 22, 1935. Heinrich Ries
Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-61. RMC-KL, Cornell
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 127
any suggestion that I might beowing [sic] you freight.’’ I
am very certain such can not be the case. If you like, I
shall be glad to consider any reasonable figure which you
may quote for storage charges, even though you invited
me to store the collections in your basement without any
mention of such storage charges. I have the figure which
Deans [a local moving and storage company] quoted to
me at the time, and if you expect me to do so, I shall, of
course have no choice but to try to raise the money some-
how, [sic]
“T should like to have an answer at once so that I can
make arrangements to have the collections moved to-day,
or to-morrow [sic] at the latest. Do you also consider that
my types an [sic] other figured material should be removed
from the collections of the Paleontological Research In-
stitute? As I recall the matter, I have also a copy of
Montfort’® temporarily on deposit there.
“T had hoped, and I still see no reason for this move on
your part, that your feelings of bitterness against me might
not lead to the point where it would involve scietific [sic]
work or materials. However, it is your choice, and you
very evidently do not care to explain the reasons for your
actions.
“Should you so desire, I shall be glad to send my fromal
[sic] resignation as a charter member of your Institution.
Feeling as you do at present I can see no reason for my
attempting to clear up the present situation.”’”?
What Harris wrote or said to her after receiving that
first letter is unknown, but it certainly prompted im-
mediate action on her part:
“T think it is well for me to carry out the plan which I
suggested to you in my first letter to-day [sic]—of removing
all my collections and books from your basement and the
Paleontological Research Institution. I have, therefore, ar-
ranged with Deans to bring me over at ten o’clock, Thurs-
day morning, April 25th. I hope this will be convenient
for you because it seems to be the only hour I am free that
Deans can come. I hope that you yourself can arrange to
there [sic] so that there may be no doubt in your mind in
regard to the items which I remove.
“T have number [sic] of boxes in the [Harris] basement;
a book, a box of East Indian Permian, types and figured
material in the Paleontological Research Institution which
I shall arrange to have placed in a fireproof warehouse. I
have no intention of making it impossible for workers here,
or elsewhere, to study any of my specimens either now or
in the future, but I do intend to avoid a repetition of a
situation such as must have inspired your communication
to-day [sic].’*°
77 In a previous letter Ries indicated the Department paid the
shipping costs from Florida.
78 A rare and valuable book on mollusks published in 1810.
7° Helen Tucker to Gilbert D. Harris, April 23, 1935. Heinrich
Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-61. RMC-KL, Cornell.
80 Helen Tucker to Gilbert D. Harris, April 23, 1935. Heinrich
Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-61. RMC-KL, Cornell.
Several months later, she still had not located all her
collections, and even some of her personal property.
She wrote to Katherine Palmer:
“Tam returning the toaster, which I had never seen before
it was left at the house. Mine was, you may recall, a large
one with a rack, and in good condition. If it has been
misplaced we will simply drop the matter.
“You may also recall that I sent you a small barrel, i.e.,
a nail keg, of Indiana Salem (Mississippian) fossils, of
which you have returned a mere handful of the material
from which the fossils have been removed. Have they,
also, been misplaced, or may I expect them to be promptly
returned?’’®!
A few months later, Tucker, after removing all of
her material, asked Harris for permission to study some
of Olsson’s Miocene types either at PRI, “... or to
have Miss Schoonover®’ bring them to McGraw Hall
for that purpose.’®? At this point Harris must have
exercised his prerogative to select who would use the
collections at PRI—one of the main reasons behind
the creation of PRI—and he refused her permission to
use the fossils. Tucker wrote to Harris in reply:
“Last year I sent my resignation from membership in the
Paleontological Research Institution. So far as I have been
informed, no action was taken on the matter. Would [sic]
it be unreasonable for me to ask for an immediate reply?
“TI have no wish to have my name connectend [sic] in
any way with an an [sic] organization which refuses to
cooperate with workers in other institutions, as I am in-
formed yours does. Nor do I wish to be connected with
an organization which seemingly attempts systematically
to convey the impression that there is a connection be-
tween it and Cornell University and then fails to open its
facilities to students in the University.”**4
So shortly after the creation of PRI, Harris was already
exerting control over who could use its collections.
This first physical structure for PRI, “Block II” in
Harris’ long range plans (“Block I” was for some reason
never built), as indicated earlier, was called the ““Ca-
bina” by all who labored there. Construction began in
October, 1936 on “Block III’, and by autumn of 1937,
a second two-story structure was added, with a base-
ment and a furnace so the open fireplace was no longer
needed. According to the surviving records, “Block
5! Helen Tucker to Katherine Palmer, September, 7, 1935. Hein-
rich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-61. RMC-KL, Cornell.
82 Lois (Schoonover) Kent.
83 Helen Tucker to Gilbert D. Harris, January 28, 1936. Heinrich
Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File 1-61. RMC-KL, Cornell.
84 Un-dated and un-signed copy of a letter from Helen Tucker to
Gilbert D. Harris. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/691, Box 1, File
1-61. RMC-KL, Cornell.
128 BULLETIN 350
III” cost $4,187.01%>. Although the Institution’s Board
of Trustees voted to expand the facilities in April, 1944,
not until 1948, after the end of World War II, was
“Block IV”? added (Palmer, 1982). All three buildings
were interconnected by a series of doors and steps,
making it quite easy for the uninitiated to become lost
trying to go from one room to the other.
The expanded Cabina became the home not only
for Harris’ collections, but also for his printing presses.
From about 1934, even after the construction of the
Cabina, until 1948, Harris printed his journals on a
rotary-cylinder press that he had installed in the base-
ment of his home. There was also a platen press still
in McGraw Hall at Cornell University, where it had
caused structural problems because of its weight and
vibration. In 1948, both presses were moved into the
basement of the PRI. Still preserved at PRI is the small
platen press on which Harris did his original printing.*®°
PRI was not established as part of Cornell, and as
an Institution, it has never had any official connection
with the University; it is a separate scientific and ed-
ucational organization. Not everyone has understood
that fact. In Bishop’s A History of Cornell, when de-
scribing changes at the University after world War II,
he said:
“The University took over the Paleontological Research
Institution developed by Professor Gilbert Dennison Har-
ris °86.” (Bishop, 1962, p. 582).
The media announcements that accompanied the
founding probably are responsible for much of this
misunderstanding. One story was headlined with,
“Harris Turns Over Museum to Cornell’’’’, but then
the article went on to say that the museum was con-
structed in his back yard. Ironically, in the late 1960s,
when PRI moved to a new and much larger location
at the former orphanage of the International Order of
Odd Fellows on West Hill in Ithaca, the old PRI build-
ings on Dearborn Place were purchased by Cornell for
additional storage and research space for the geology
department.
In a letter to Science in 1934, Harris indicated his
reasons behind the founding of PRI:
85 Statements from A. H. McPherson & Son, Contractors and
Builders, January 5, 1937 and August 31, 1937. HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.
8° Personal communication, Dr. Katherine Palmer, July 28, 1982.
The press was still at PRI in 1995.
8” Newspaper and date are not identified, but it is assumed to
appeared in the /thaca Journal shortly after January 13, 1934 as the
article was printed only a few days after the first Board of Directors
Meeting which was held on that date. Heinrich Ries Papers, 14/15/
691, Box 1, File 1-86.
‘Facilities for the conserving of types have been hitherto
lacking here; hence a fireproof building has been privately
constructed and deeded to this institution...
“‘There are three leading ideas underlying the establish-
ment of this institution:
“(1) To prevent the labor and valuable acquisitions of
each generation from being wasted or lost, as is too fre-
quently the case in educational institutions without proper
museum facilities.
“(2) To furnish temporary working facilities for pale-
ontological students home from abroad or not connected
with regular university or museum organizations.
(3) To serve as a regional center (since our country is
large and not unicentric as is France) where local young
students may see actual investigation going on and hence,
perhaps, become interested in this branch of science.”
(Harris, 1934a, p. 381)
Yet, idea number (3) notwithstanding, for most of
its history PRI has been essentially invisible to the local
region. It existed behind Harris’ house as a private
domain for him, his students, and a few scholars who
were involved in Tertiary paleontological research. Ex-
cept for the postal workers who handled the journals
when each issue was mailed, there was little commu-
nity interaction. In many respects Harris was not ful-
filling the spirit of the ‘‘educational” charter; in another
he was doing exactly what he set out to do. Little won-
der the local people have been so confused about PRI
over the years.
In fact, according to Harris’ own words, it was never
his intention to include a real “‘public” aspect to his
Institution’s activities®® beyond the occasional visit by
school groups and local student clubs. In a talk Harris
gave in June, 1939, to a group of natural history stu-
dents visiting PRI, he revealed much about his per-
ception of the Institution and why it was founded, and
expanded somewhat on the ideas he had published in
Science five years earlier. First and foremost, he still
felt it was necessary to preserve collections gathered
over 40-50 years of work, especially the generic and
specific types, to keep the material from being “dumped
in the ash barrel.” The continuity of work could be
assured by preserving the material, which required, of
course, a fireproof structure. Harris felt that any edu-
cational institution becomes, essentially, the record of
its graduates, and he wanted to preserve something to
which the graduates could return. Such an organization
would give the students an opportunity to do the nec-
essary work to gain eminence in their field. In Harris’
88 Beginning in the early 1990s, PRI began to improve its public
role through an active association with the local public schools to
improve earth science teaching though school visits, student field
trips, and other educational programs, as well as expanded exhibits
and educational programs at the West Hill building.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 129
view, this could not be done without the proper insti-
tution, and his Institution was to be “of, by, and for
paleontologists” and it would be limited primarily to
Tertiary paleontology*’.
His statements in a letter to the PRI members in
1949 show that he had not altered his thinking during
the ensuing 10 years. Indeed the 1949 letter echoes two
of the four conditions which prompted him to create
PRI 17 years earlier; namely having an organization
not under the control of a larger entity, and preser-
vation of collections. According to the letter, however,
in Harris’ mind PRI really started with the founding
of Bulletins of American Paleontology in 1895, and the
soul of the Institution was “research work’, but he
added:
“The primal object of this Institution is to furnish a suit-
able retreat for those workers who desire to carry on in-
vestigations connected with their own collections, but who
have no permanent affiliation with any large organizations,
such as public surveys, museums, universities, etc. Since
all work is pursued on a strictly voluntary basis, funds
received (from sale of publications, membership fees, do-
nations) can be applied to building, equipment, publica-
tion, and an eventual endowment fund.
*“A second, and by no means unimportant, function of
this Institution is the preservation of paleontological ma-
terials that might otherwise be lost.°° This applies, for
example, to cuttings from wells in territories of abandon
leases and collections from seldom-visited localities. The
success in accumulating such collections and funds for
their study and preservation will depend on the alertness
of the members.
‘And, indeed, if the Institution itself is to continue and
prosper, it will only be because of a shared faith and feeling
of responsibility.”’ [Emphasis in the original.] (Letter to PRI
members by G. D. Harris, May, 1949; reproduced in
Palmer, 1982, pp. 22-23).
Thus, PRI remains a unique institution, housing and
caring for enormous fossil and Recent mollusk collec-
tions (the “type and figured collection” now exceeds
33,000 specimens; the non-type collections are esti-
mated to contain more than 1.6 million specimens,
placing them firmly among the 10 largest invertebrate
fossil collections in the United States?'). Until recently,
8° Although the complete text of the Harris talk no longer exists,
a student, Lois Schoonover, later Mrs. Lois Kent, took detailed notes
and these notes are the source used for the information in this para-
graph. All quotations are from these notes. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
°° As late as the last two decades of the Twentieth Century, drawers
of fossils still were being transferred from the Department of Geo-
logical Sciences at Cornell to PRI. Harris’ fear of what might happen
to the department collections in later years has become a reality, but
fortunately, his PRI exists to save the material.
°! Warren Allmon, person communication, August 1, 1995.
few people ever saw this material, however, for public
exhibit space in the West Hill building is minimal’.
PRI publishes several scholarly publications, but is not
an academic organization in the conventional sense,
for it depends heavily on volunteers, and operates with
only a small number of paid, full-time staff supporting
its activities. PRI continues to be the world’s only
private organization devoted solely to advancing and
preserving the science of paleontology, an increasingly
important role at a time when many universities are
closing or reducing their paleontology programs.
In 1984, after the last surviving member of the party
who laid the cornerstone had died, Peter Hoover, then
the Director of PRI, and I decided it was time to open
the cinder-block cornerstone. If it contained anything
of historical interest, we felt, it would be better to re-
move and preserve those items than to leave them in
the block that had become quite porous with age. Ac-
cordingly, on July 19, 1984, Dr. Hoover carefully
opened the cinder block cornerstone in the presence
of several very interested people. Inside were the badly
deteriorated remains of the envelopes that held the
articles deposited by those who were present at the
laying of the stone.”?
All but one person had deposited a Tertiary fossil
in an envelope, and on each envelope they had written
both the name of the fossil and his or her own name.
Naturally enough, Harris’s fossil was Ecphora, the
symbol of the PRI and the name he gave to his last
boat. Rebecca Harris, his daughter, was the only one
who did not use a fossil for her remembrance. Instead,
she placed a small Joan of Arc medallion in the cinder
block, and with it was a card on which she had written:
“Joan of Arc also saw visions and dreamed dreams.”
Those were, and still are, fitting words, for her fath-
ers dream did come true. Through the dedication,
loyalty, and sheer hard work of his students, friends,
and fellow paleontologists, the publications and the
Paleontological Research Institution he began are alive
and well as we near the end of the Twentieth Century.
°? During the summer of 1995, PRI created a temporary public
exhibit of material in a building on The Commons in downtown
Ithaca. The centerpieces of the exhibit were mechanical dinosaur
models, but accompanying materials came from PRI collections and
the PRI staff designed the entire exhibit. All told, more than 100,000
people viewed PRI exhibits or participated in Institution-sponsored
programs in 1995. A fund drive for a suitable public museum has
been started.
°3 The articles removed are now in the PRI Archives.
130 BULLETIN 350
CHAPTER 10.
Gilbert Dennison Harris rose from humble begin-
nings on a farm near Jamestown, New York to be one
of the premier paleontologists of his day. Through his
students, publications, and professional consulting, he
had a major impact on our understanding of the fossils
and stratigraphy of the Tertiary rocks of the Atlantic
and Gulf Coastal Plains. Harris had great energy for
doing paleontological research; he was really able to
go out and “get the job done’”’, efficiently and quickly.
During one trip late in his career, as he and Palmer
were doing some roadside collecting they were man-
aging to stay ahead of a road crew seeding the road
cuts right behind them!. This enthusiasm he passed
along to his students. According to Druid Wilson, few
people have ever traced a single unit for over 1,000
miles as Harris did, and Wilson feels he deserves a
place alongside Conrad, Aldrich, Lea, and others, as
one of the all time giants of Tertiary paleontology’.
Certainly some of his paleontological publications set
a standard for the profession, and several of his papers
are still considered the definitive work for particular
groups of fossils or time intervals. The primary key to
his good work rested in the fact that Harris was a good
illustrator who supported his illustrations with the ap-
propriate descriptions*. Even today, many, perhaps
most, of the species that he first described are still
considered valid.
Once, when asked late in his life how he would like
fellow geologists to think of him, Harris replied, per-
haps with false modesty, ““As a beginner in a limited
number of branches of geologic sciences.”” And when
asked were there any particular personal features he
would like to be remembered, he offered two:
“Building of boats for geologic excursions before the days
of automobiles[.]
“Establishment of the Paleontological Research Insti-
tution at Ithaca for volunteer research workers [.]’**
Of all his accomplishments, these were the most per-
sonal to him.
Based upon their success, for most of his students
Harris fulfilled the role of mentor in the finest tradition
of the word. For a student seeking training in the field
of paleontology as it existed 50 to 100 years ago, he
' David Dockery, personal communication July 12, 1995.
2 Druid Wilson, personal communication September 7, 1995.
* David Dockery, personal communication July 12, 1995.
* Question included in Walter E. Hopper to Gilbert D. Harris,
July 1, 1950; answers included in unsigned carbon copy, Gilbert D.
Harris to Walter E. Hopper, July 5, 1950. HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.
FINAL WORDS
or she could have done no better than to train under
Gilbert Harris. At the time there were few places where
students, even before they completed their studies, had
the opportunity to serve in responsible positions with
a state geological survey, but Harris’ students could do
just that while he headed the Survey for the State of
Louisiana. And the fact that the professor had his own
journal and was willing to publish student work, gave
these students an almost ideal situation.
Yet, Harris was an enigmatic person; kind and gen-
erous, a wonderful mentor, and lasting friend, he could
also be vindictive, mean, self-centered, and just down-
right ornery. In a few words, he was human. His legacy
to paleontology lives on through his publications, the
work of his students and his students’ students and
their students as the torch has been passed from gen-
eration to generation. But mostly his bequest to pos-
terity is kept alive most tangibly though his journals
and the Paleontological Research Institution which he
founded in 1932. During the Depression, a time when
most people were wondering how they would survive
another day, Harris was looking to a future beyond the
present misery. He was able to infect others with his
dream of the future, and that small band of followers
gathered one warm afternoon in June on a plot of land
behind his house, and in the form of a cinder block,
laid the beginning of that dream.
As a student at Cornell Harris had the benefit of
studying under Henry S. Williams, and some of his
success as a teacher he owed to what he learned during
his time with Williams. But Harris mostly learned by
doing and he expected his students to follow that path,
and many who followed his path found that it led to
foreign shores. From Venezuela a student wrote to
Harris:
“T certainly appreciate the training you gave me and your
help in getting me started in Paleontological work.’”*
Not everyone reacted well to this style of teaching,
but those that did went on to make their mark in the
world of paleontology; his students included Kenneth
E. Caster, Monroe G. Cheney, Herdman F. Cleland,
W. Storrs Cole, Stephen M. Herrick, Floyd Hodson,
Charles W. Honess, Lois M. (Schoonover) Kent, Ed-
ward Kindle, Henry Leighton, Ralph A. Liddle, Car-
lotta J. Maury, Axel A. Olsson, Joviano A. A. Pacheco,
Katherine V. W. Palmer, Irving Perrine, Charles S.
° Floyd Hodson to Gilbert D. Harris, January 7, 1932. HA-PRI,
Ithaca, NY.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 131
Prosser, Percy E. Raymond, Leopold Reinecke, John
L. Rich, Helen I. (Tucker) Rowland, Pearl G. Sheldon,
Ernest R. Smith, Arthur C. Veatch, Walter A. Ver
Wiebe, Norman E. Weisbord, John W. Wells, Francis
L. Whitney, Druid Wilson, and Charles Yeakle, just
to mention a few.
Harris also touched the lives of many who never
majored in paleontology, but only had a class or two
with him. Almost 35 years later they still remembered
vividly their brief encounter:
“You can scarcely be likely to remember me—Just one of
your elementary students of about 1913. I mean I took
the lecture course in elementary paleontology up in your
laboratory high in Mc Graw [sic], also your course in Geo-
logic Mensuration and still have the notes! I also have a
photo of you at the steering lever of your Cayuga Lake
vessel.”’ [Emphasis in the original.]°
In many ways Harris was a driven man; he was not
a person who could sit still for very long, even in “‘re-
tirement.”’ At age 73 he visited the University of Cal-
ifornia to study the Tertiary of the west coast. He cel-
ebrated his 82nd birthday while on a collecting trip to
® Albert G. Ingalls to Gilbert D. Harris, December 15, 1947. HA-
PRI, ithaca, NY.
Florida, Alabama, and Georgia (Palmer, 1953c) which
totaled over 3700 miles and lasted almost a month.
Right up to his death he was actively engaged in pa-
leontological research. His last paper was published
just a few months before he died (Harris, 1951), and
in part was based upon the samples collected during
his recent excursions to the south. Well past his 80th
birthday, he was still running the presses to print his
journals. Perhaps Harris described it best with his
Christmas Greeting sent in his 85th year:
““We are happiest when our hobbies and our ‘life’s work’
become identical.” (Herrick et a/., 1953, p. 16A).
Katherine Palmer, who worked with Harris from
1921 until his death in 1952, remembered him thusly
(Palmer, 1953b, p. 2624):
““He was always stimulating and inspiring to those students
of close contact and he continually planned training and
provided opportunities for their scientific advancement.
In turn he received steadfast loyalty and developed an
idealism which is manifested in the projects which they
in turn initiated or helped carry on. The monuments of
basic endeavors which Professor Harris built along the way
in paleontology and stratigraphy are bench marks from
which the progress of those sciences can be measured. The
worth of such factors is everlasting.”
REFERENCES
[Note: A complete bibliography of Gilbert Harris
was published by Katherine Palmer (Palmer, 1953c;
reprinted in Ward, 1993).]
Allen, F.L.
1931. Only yesterday. Bantam Classic, New York, 270 pp.
Anderson, A. L.
1952. Memorial of Heinrich Ries. American Mineralogist, vol.
37, pp. 264-275.
Anderson, H.V.
1960. Geology of Sabine Parish. Geological Bulletin 34, De-
partment of Conservation, Louisiana Geological Survey,
164 pp.
Anonymous.
1881. Illustrated historical atlas of the County of Chautauqua,
New York from actual surveys and records. F. N. Beers
and Company, New York.
1897. Note about Cornell. Science, N.S., vol. 5, no. 116, p. 473.
1908. The ten-year book of Cornell University, IV, 1868-1908.
Cornell University, Ithaca, NY, 793 pp.
1915a. Unique tribute to a teacher—gift fund of $1,000 to be
administered by Professor Gilbert D. Harris. Cornell
Alumni News, vol. 18, no. 11, p. 126.
1915b. Cornell Alumni Directory, vol. 13, no. 12, 582 pp.
1917. Miss Maury’s successful work—a valuable report on the
paleontology of Santo Domingo. Cornell Alumni News,
vol. 19, no. 37, p. 434.
1922. Cornell Alumni Directory, vol. 13, no. 12, Cornell Uni-
versity, Ithaca, NY, 582 pp.
1934. Article. (November 4), Post-Standard, Syracuse, NY.
1953. A word from Ward’s, Ward’s Natural Science Establish-
ment, vol. 26, no. 4, p. 49.
1988. Arkansas. in The state geological surveys—a _ history.
A.Socolow, ed., Association of American State Geologists,
pp. 20-26.
n.d. Special Announcement of the Helderberg School of Field
Geology: Under the Auspices of the Department of Pa-
leontology and Stratigraphic Geology, Cornell University.
[Believed to have been prepared and printed by G. D.
Harris for the summer of 1902].
Bishop, M.
1962. A history of Cornell. Cornell University Press, Ithaca, NY,
651 pp.
Branner, J. C., and Coville, F.V.
1891. Annual report of the Geological Survey of Arkansas for
1888—the geology of Washington County. vol. 4, pt. II,
pp. 155-252.
132 BULLETIN 350
Brice, W.R.
1989. Cornell geology through the years. Cornell Engineering
Histories, vol. 2, College of Engineering, Cornell Univer-
sity, Ithaca, NY, 230 pp.
1994a. Field camp in the Helderbergs— 1900 to 1909. (Abstract).
Third Annual Meeting of the History of Earth Science
Society, Troy, NY, July 7-9, p. 4.
1994b. Charles Frederic Hartt (1840-1878): The early years. Earth
Sciences History, vol. 13, no. 2, pp.160-167.
1995. Field camp in the Helderbergs—1900 to 1909. North-
eastern Geology and Environmental Sciences, vol. 17, no.
2, pp. 188-194.
Brice, W.R., Philbrick, S.S., and Bloom, A.L.
1995. John West Wells, July 15, 1907 - January 12, 1944. in
Memorial statements, Cornell University faculty 1993-
94. Office of the Dean of Faculty, Cornell University, Ith-
aca, NY, pp. 121-125.
Caster, K.E.
1930. Higher fossil faunas of the Upper Allegheny: Bulletins of
American Paleontology, vol. 15, no. 58, pp. 145-316.
1973. Presentation of The Paleontological Society Medal to
Katherine Van Winkle Palmer. Journal of Paleontology,
vol. 47, no. 3, pp. 599-601.
Clark, W.B.
1891. Correlation papers. Eocene. United States Geological Sur-
vey Bulletin, no. 83, 173 pp.
Clark, W. B., and Miller. B.L.
1912. The physiography and geology of the Coastal Plain Prov-
ince of Virginia. Virginia Geological Survey Bulletin, no.
4, 274 pp.
Clark, W.B., Shattuck, G.B., and Dall, W.H.
1904. The Miocene deposits of Maryland. Maryland Geologic
Survey, Baltimore, Johns Hopkins Press, vol. I (Text), 543
pp.; vol. II (Plates).
Cleland, H.F.
1900. The calciferous of the Mohawk Valley. Bulletins of Amer-
ican Paleontology, vol. 3, no. 13, pp. 241-266.
1903. Further notes on the calciferous (Beekmantown) Forma-
tion of the Mohawk Valley, with descriptions of new spe-
cies. Bulletins of American Paleontology, vol. 4, no. 18,
pp. 30-50.
1918. Memorial of Henry Shaler Williams. Bulletin of the Geo-
logical Society of America, vol. 30, pp. 47-65.
Clendenin, W.W.
1896. A preliminary report upon the Florida Parishes of east
Louisiana and the Bluff, Prairie and Hill lands of southwest
Louisiana. Geology and Agriculture, Part III. Louisiana
Geological Survey, Baton Rouge, pp. 163-256.
Collins, W. H.
1937. Memorial of Leopold Reinecke. Proceedings of the Geo-
logical Society of America for 1936, pp. 259-261.
Conable, C.W.
1977. Women at Cornell—the myth of equal education: Cornell
University Press, Ithaca, NY, 211 pp.
Conrad, T. A.
1832. Fossil shells of the Tertiary Formations of North America.
vol. 1, no. 1, pp. 9-20, no. 2, pp. 21—28, Philadelphia.
1833. Fossil shells of the Tertiary formations. vol. 1, no. 3, pp.
29-38, no. 4, pp. 39-46, Philadelphia.
Conway, J. K.
1994. True North—a memoir. Alfred A. Knopf, NY, 250 pp.
Corbin, D. F. M.
1888. A life of Matthew Fontaine Maury, U.S.N. and C.S.N.
Sampson Low, Marston, Searley & Rivington, Ltd., Lon-
don. 326 pp.
Cumings, E. R.
1916. Memorial of Charles Smith Prosser. Bulletin of the Geo-
logical Society of America, vol. 28, pp. 70-80.
Dall, W. H.
1893a. Determination of the dates of publication of Conrad’s Fos-
sils of the Tertiary formation and Medial Tertiary. Bulletin
of the Philosophical Society of Washington [D.C.], vol.
12, pp. 215-239.
1893b. Republication of Conrad’s fossil shells (medial) of the Ter-
tiary Formation. Wagner Free Institute of Science, Phil-
adelphia, 136 pp.
Dall, W. H., and Harris, G.D.
1892. Correlation papers, Neocene. United States Geological
Survey Bulletin, no. 84, 349 pp.
Dana, J. D.
1875. The geological story briefly told, an introduction to geology
for the general reader and for beginners in the science.
Ivison, Blakeman, Taylor & Company, New York. 263
pp.
1880. Manual of geology, treating of the principles of the science
with special reference to American geological history: Ivi-
son, Blakeman, Taylor and Company, New York. 912 pp.
1895. Manual of geology: treating of the principles of the science
with special reference to American geological history. 4th
Edition. American Book Company, New York, 1087 pp.
Downs, J. P., and Headley, F.Y. , eds.
1921. History of Chautauqua County New York and its people.
American Historical Society, Inc., New York, 703 pp.
Dumble, E. T.
1894. The Cenozoic deposits of Texas. Journal of Geology, vol.
2, no. 6, pp. 549-567.
Dumble, E.T., and Harris, G.D.
1893. The Galveston Deep Well. American Journal of Science,
vol. 46, pp. 39-42.
Figueiréa, S.A F. de M.
1994. Charles Frederic Hartt and the “Geological Commission
of Brazil” [1875-1877]. Earth Sciences History, vol. 13,
no. 2, pp. 168-173.
Flower, R. H., and Caster, K. E.
1935. The stratigraphy and paleontology of Northwestern Penn-
sylvania; Part II, Paleontology; Section A-The cephalopod
fauna of the Conewango Series of the Upper Devonian in
New York and Pennsylvania. Bulletins of American Pa-
leontology, vol. 22, no. 75, pp. 197-270.
Guppy, R. J. L.
1907. Biographical notice of R. J. Lechmere Guppy (For private
circulation only). The Mirror Printing Works, Trinidad,
10 pp.
Harris, G. D.
1890. The genus Terebellum in American Tertiaries. American
Geologist, vol. 5, p. 315.
1891la. Notes on the geology of Southwestern New York. Amer-
ican Geologist, vol. 7, pp. 164-173.
1891b. The Fayetteville-Huntsville section. in Annual report of
the Geological Survey of Arkansas for 1888—The geology
of Washington County. F.W.Simonds, ed., vol. 4, pt. I,
pp. 149-154.
1891c. On the confounding of Nassa trivittata Say and Nassa
peralta (Con. sp.). American Geologist, vol. 7, pp. 164—
178.
1893a. The Tertiary geology of Calvert Cliffs, Maryland. Amer-
ican Journal of Science, vol. 45, pp. 21-31.
1893b. Preliminary report on the organic remains obtained from
the Deep Well at Galveston together with conclusions re-
specting the age of the various formations penetrated. Geo-
1893c.
1893d.
1893e.
1894a.
1894b.
1895a.
1895b.
1895c.
1896a.
1896b.
1897a.
1897b.
1897c.
1899a.
1899b.
1899c.
1900.
1904.
190Sa.
1905b.
190Sc.
1907a.
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE
logical Survey of Texas 4th Annual Report, 1892, pp. 117-
119.
Introduction. in Republication of Conrad’s fossil shells of
the Tertiary Formations of North America. Rufus H. Dar-
by, Printer, Washington, D. C. pp. 5-8 [reprinted by the
Paleontological Research Institution, Ithaca, NY, 1963,
121 pp.]
Remarks on Dall’s collection of Conrad’s works. Ameri-
can Geologist, vol. 11, pp. 279-281.
Correlation of Tejon Deposits with Eocene Stages of the
Gulf Slope. Science, vol. 22, p. 97.
On the geological position of the Eocene deposits of Mary-
land and Virginia. American Journal of Science, vol. 47,
pp. 301-304.
The Tertiary of Southern Arkansas. Annual Report of the
Geological Survey of Arkansas for 1892, vol. 2, 207 pp.
New and otherwise interesting Tertiary mollusca from
Texas. Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences
of Philadelphia, vol. 47, pp.45-88.
Claiborne fossils. Bulletins of American Paleontology, vol.
1, no. 1, 52 pp.
Neocene mollusca of Texas or fossils from the Deep Well
at Galveston. Bulletins of American Paleontology, vol. 1,
no. 3, 32 pp.
The Midway Stage. Bulletins of American Paleontology,
vol. 1, no. 4, pp. 116-270.
Introduction. in A reprint of the paleontological writings
of Thomas Say. Bulletins of American Paleontology, vol.
1, no. 5, pp. 3-4 (273-274).
An imaginary fleet. Science, N.S. vol. 5, no. 119, p. 586.
A gasoline launch for field work. Science, N.S. vol. 6, no.
149, pp. 703-704.
The Lignitic Stage, Part I. Stratigraphy and paleontology
(Pelecypoda): Bulletins of American Paleontology, vol. 2,
no. 9, pp. 193-294.
Key to the Upper Devonian of southern New York—De-
signed for teachers and students in secondary schools. El-
ementary Natural History Series, no. 2, The Harris Com-
pany, Ithaca, NY, 26 pp.
The Lignitic Stage, Part II. Scaphopoda, Gastropoda, Pter-
opoda and Cephalopoda. Bulletins of American Paleon-
tology, vol. 3, no. 11, 128 pp.
The establishment of meridian lines. Special Report No.
7. in Geology and Agriculture, Part V. A preliminary re-
port on the geology of Louisiana. by G.D.Harris and
A.C.Veatch. Made Under the Direction of State Experi-
ment Station, Baton Rouge, Louisiana, pp. 31 1-324.
A gasoline launch for field work. II. Science, N.S. vol. 12,
no. 313, pp. 1009-1010.
The Helderberg invasion of the Manlius. Bulletins of
American Paleontology, vol. 4, no. 19, pp. 55-77.
Guide to the geology of Union Springs. Elementary Nat-
ural History Series, no. 3, The Harris Company, Ithaca,
NY, 16 pp.
A report on terrestrial magnetism and meridian line work
in Louisiana—by members of the Division of Terrestrial
Magnetism of the coast and Geodetic Survey and members
of the State Geological Survey. Geological Survey of Lou-
isiana Bulletin, Report of 1905, no. 2, pp. 165-213.
A report on the establishment of tide gage work in Lou-
isiana. Geological Survey of Louisiana Bulletin, Report of
1905, no. 3, pp. 221-248.
Notes on the geology of the Winnfield Sheet. Geological
Survey of Louisiana Bulletin, no. 5, Report of 1907, 36
pp.
1907b.
1907c.
1908.
1909.
1910.
1912a.
1912b.
1913.
1915.
1919.
1940.
1951.
133
Cartography of Southwestern Louisiana with special ref-
erence to the Jennings Sheet. Geological Survey of Loui-
siana Bulletins, no. 6, Report of 1907, 60 pp.
Elements of historical geology: Publisher unknown, but
assumed to be printed by G. D. Harris, Ithaca, New York.
(Library of Congress Certificate of Deposit for the book is
dated March 19, 1907; HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.)
Rock salt, its origin, geologic occurrences and economic
importance in the State of Louisiana; together with brief
notes and references to all known salt deposits and in-
dustries of the world (Assisted by C. J. Maury and L.
Reinecke). Geological Survey of Louisiana Bulletin, no. 7,
Report of 1907, pp. 60-259.
The geologic occurrence of rock salt in Louisiana and east
Texas. Economic Geology, vol. 4, pp. 12-34.
Oil and gas in Louisiana with a brief summary of their
occurrence in adjacent states. United States Geological
Survey Bulletin, no. 429, 192 pp.
Oil concentration about salt domes. Science, N.S. vol. 35,
pp. 546-547.
Dome theories as applied to gulf coast geology. Science,
N.S. vol. 36, pp. 173-173.
Immense salt concretions. Popular Science Monthly, vol.
82, pp. 187-191.
Discussion. in The origin of the Louisiana and east Texas
salines. by E.G.Norton, American Institute of Mining En-
gineers Bulletin, no. 97, pp. 93-102; no. 101, pp. 1120-
1122; Transactions, no. 51 (1916), pp.502-513.
Pelecypoda of the St. Maurice and Claiborne Stages. Bul-
letins of American Paleontology, vol. 6, no. 31, pp. l-
208.
A reprint of the more inaccessible paleontological writings
of Robert John Lechmere Guppy. Bulletins of American
Paleontology, vol. 8, no. 35, 108 pp.
Notes on the paleontology [of Trinidad]. in The geology
of the island of Trinidad, B.W.I. by G.A.Waring. Johns
Hopkins University Studies in Geology, no. 7, pp. 87-
2
Memorial of Adam Capen Gill. Bulletin of the Geological
Society of America, vol. 44, pp. 325-328.
A Paleontological Research Institution at Ithaca, N.Y. Sci-
ence, vol. 79, no. 2052, pp. 380-381.
A low-price station indicator. Science, N.S. vol. 80, no.
2063, p. 38.
Turrid Illustrations— mainly Claibornian.
Palzontographica Americana. vol. 2, no. 7, 96 pp, 14 pl.
Our first century of Cenozoic invertebrate paleontology
(Presidential address—The Paleontological Society). Bul-
letin of the Geological Society of America, vol. 48, pp.
443-462.
The name Claiborne in geologic literature. Science, N.S.
vol. 92, no. 2386, pp. 257-258.
Preliminary notes on Ocala bivalves. Bulletins of Amer-
ican Paleontology, vol. 33, no. 138, 54 pp.
Harris, G. D., and Hodson, F.
1922.
1931.
The rudistids of Trinidad. Paleontographica Americana,
vol. 1, no. 3, pp. 119-162.
An Oligocene rudistid from Trinidad. Bulletins of Amer-
ican Paleontology, vol. 16, no. 61, 9 pp.
Harris, G. D., and Palmer, K. V.W.
1947.
The mollusca of the Jackson Eocene of the Mississippi
Embayment (Sabine River to Alabama River). Part I
(1946); Part II (1947). Bulletins of American Paleontology,
vol. 30, no. 117, 563 pp.
134 BULLETIN 350
Harris, G. D., Perrine, I., and Hopper, W. E.
1909. Oil and gas in northwestern Louisiana with special ref-
erence to the Caddo field. Geological Survey of Louisiana
Bulletin, no. 8, 52 pp.
Harris, G. D., and Veatch, A.C.
1899. Geology and Agriculture, Part V; A preliminary report on
the geology of Louisiana. Made Under the Direction of
State Experiment Station, Baton Rouge, Louisiana, 354
pp.
Harris, G. D., Veatch, A. C., and Pacheco, J. A. A.
1902. A report on the geology of Louisiana. Geology and Ag-
riculture, Part VI, 288 pp.
Harris, G. D., Veatch, A. C., and others.
1905. A repot on the underground waters of Louisiana. Geolog-
ical Survey of Louisiana Bulletin, no. 1, Report of 1905,
77 pp.
Harris, R. A.
1898a. On harmonic functions (Abstract). Bulletin of the Amer-
ican Mathematical Society, vol. 5, p. 96-98. (Paper read
before Section A of the AAAS Meeting in 1898.)
1898b. On harmonic functions. American Journal of Mathemat-
ics, vol. 34, no. 4, pp. 391-420.
1902. The tides in the Rigolets. in Geology and agriculture-a
report on the geology of Louisiana, Part VI. by G.D. Har-
ris, A.C. Veatch, and J.A.A.Pacheco, Baton Rouge, Loui-
siana, Special Report 7, pp. 255-260.
Heroy, W. B.
1942. Memorial to Arthur Clifford Veatch. Proceedings Volume
of the Geological Society of America, Annual Report for
1941, pp. 201-209.
Herrick, G. W., Von Engeln, O. D., and Wright, A. H.
1953. Gilbert Dennison Harris, October 2, 1864-December 4,
1952. Necrology of the faculty—1952-1953, Cornell Uni-
versity, Ithaca, NY, pp. 14A—-16A.
Hewett, W. T.
1905. Cornell University—a history. Volumes I - IV. The Uni-
versity Publishing Society, New York. vol. I, 456 pp.; vol.
II, 417 pp.; vol. III, 431 pp. vol. IV (Register, Compiled
by F. R. Holmes and L. A. Williams, Jr.) 611 pp.
Hodson, F.
1926. Venezuelan and Caribbean Turritellas, with a list of Ven-
ezuelan type stratigraphic localities. Bulletins of American
Paleontology, vol. 11, no. 45, pp. 171-220.
Hodson, F., and Hodson, H. K.
1931. Some Venezuelan mollusks. Bulletins of American Pale-
ontology, vol. 16, no. 59, pp. 95-132.
Hodson, F., Hodson, H.K., and Harris, G. D.
1927. Some Venezuelan and Caribbean mollusks. Bulletins of
American Paleontology, vol. 13, no. 49, pp. 1-160.
Hodson, H. K.
1926. Foraminifera from Venezuela and Trinidad. Bulletins of
American Paleontology, vol. 12, no. 47, pp. 1-46.
Hollick, A.
1899. Areport ona collection of fossil plants from Northwestern
Louisiana; Special Report No. 5. in Geology and Agri-
culture, Part V. A preliminary report on the geology of
Louisiana. by G.D.Harris and A.C. Veatch. Made Under
the Direction of the State Experiment StationBaton Rouge,
Louisiana, pp. 276-288.
Howell, B. F.
1925. The fauna of the Cambrian Paradoxides beds at Manuels,
Newfoundland. Bulletins of American Paleontology, vol.
11, no. 43, pp. 1-140.
Johansel, M. E.
1988. Texas. in The state geological surveys—a history.
A.A.Socolow, ed., Association of American State Geolo-
gists, pp. 409-416.
Jordan, D. S.
1922. Days of a man. Being memories of a naturalist, teacher
and minor prophet of democracy: World Book Company,
Yonkers-on-Hudson, NY, vol. I, 710 pp.; vol. I, 906 pp.
Kiersch, J. K.
1964. Cornell’s forgotten fleet. Cornell Alumni Times, vol. 66,
no. 6, pp. 7-9.
Kindle, E.M.
1896. The relation of the fauna of the Ithaca Group to the fauna
of the Portage and Chemung. Bulletins of American Pa-
leontology, vol. 2, no. 6, pp. 1-56.
Lopus, P., and Ingham, E. , eds.
1977. Bible records. Contributed by Jamestown (NY) Chapter,
National Society of the Daughters of the American Rev-
olution, vol. I, 103 pp. (#78.49.1 at the Fenton Historical
Society, Jamestown, NY).
Maury, C. J.
1902. A comparison of the Oligocene of Western Europe and
the Southern United States. Bulletins of American Pale-
ontology, vol. 3, no. 15, pp. 311-404.
1908. An interglacial fauna found in Cayuga valley and its re-
lation to the Pleistocene of Toronto. Journal of Geology,
vol. 16, no. 6, pp. 564-567.
1917a. Santo Domingo type sections and fossils. Part I. Bulletins
of American Paleontology, vol. 5, no. 29, pp. 165-415 (1-
251).
1917b. Santo Domingo type sections and fossils. Part II. Bulletins
of American Paleontology, vol. 5, no. 30, pp. 418-459 (1-
43).
1918. Santo Domingan paleontological exploration. Journal of
Geology, vol. 26, no. 3, pp. 224-228.
1924. Fosseis Terciarios do Brasil, com descripcao de novas
formas Cretaceas. Monograph no. 4, Servicio Geologica e
Mineral. do Brasil, 711 pp.
1925. A further contribution of the paleontology of Trinidad
(Miocene horizons). Bulletins of American Paleontology,
vol. 10, no. 42, pp. 155-402, 43 pl.
Maury, M.F.
1891. Physical Geography. (Revised by Mytton Maury.) Uni-
versity Publishing Company, New York, 130 pp.
Moore, D. R.
1978. Axel A. Olsson—an obituary—19 April, 1889 - 26 Oc-
tober, 1977. The Nautilus, vol. 92, no. 2, pp. 59-61.
Moore, E. J.
1995. (Review of) The G. D. Harris 1890 manuscript on the
stratigraphy of Miocene and Pliocene beds at Yorktown,
Virginia. by Lauck W. Ward (1993). Earth Sciences His-
tory, vol. 14, no. 1, pp. 112-113.
Nel, L. T., and Krahmann, R.
1937. Notes prepared for the Geological Society of South Africa.
Proceedings of the Geological Society of America for 1936,
pp. 261-269.
Ogilvie, M. B.
1986. Women in science—antiquity through the Nineteenth
Century. A biographical dictionary with annotated bibli-
ography: MIT Press, Cambridge, MA, 254 pp.
Olsson, A. A.
1914. New and interesting Neocene fossils from the Atlantic
Coastal Plain. Bulletins of American Paleontology, vol. 5,
no. 24, pp. 41-72.
1916. New Miocene fossils. Bulletins of American Paleontology,
vol. 5, no. 27, pp. 121-152.
1922. The Miocene of Northern Costa Rica with notes on it
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 135
general stratigraphic relations. Bulletins of American Pa-
leontology, vol. 9, no. 39, pp. 1-309.
1928. Contributions to the Tertiary paleontology of Northern
Peru; Part 1. Eocene mollusca and brachiopoda. Bulletins
of American Paleontology, vol. 14, no. 52, pp. 1-154.
1929. Contributions to the Tertiary paleontology of Northern
Peru; Part 2. Upper Eocene mollusca and brachiopoda.
Bulletins of American Paleontology, vol. 15, no. 57, pp.
67-116.
1930. Contributions to the Tertiary paleontology of Northern
Peru; Part 3. Eocene mollusca.Bulletins of American Pa-
leontology, vol. 17, no. 62, pp. 1-96.
1931. Contributions to the Tertiary paleontology of Northern
Peru; Part 4. The Peruvian Oligocene. Bulletins of Amer-
ican Paleontology, vol. 17, no. 63, pp. 97-264.
1932. Contributions to the Tertiary paleontology of Northern
Peru; Part 5. The Peruvian Miocene. Bulletins of Amer-
ican Paleontology, vol. 19, no. 68, pp. 1-272.
1934. Contributions to the paleontology of Northern Peru; Part
6. The Cretaceous of the Amotape Region. Bulletins of
American Paleontology, vol. 20, no. 69, pp. 1-104.
1944. Contributions to the paleontology of Northern Peru; Part
7. The Cretaceous of the Paita Region. Bulletins of Amer-
ican Paleontology, vol. 28, no. 111, pp. 163-270.
1954. Memorial to Gilbert Dennison Harris (1864-1952). Pro-
ceedings of the Geological Society of America, Annual
Report for 1953, pp. 125-130.
Palmer, K. V. W
1923. Foraminifera and a small molluscan fauna from Costa
Rica. Bulletins of American Paleontology, vol. 10, no. 40,
pp. 1-18.
1937. The Claibornian Scaphopda, Gastropoda and Dibranchi-
ate Cephalopoda of the southern United States, Part I.
Text; Part II. Plates. Bulletins of American Paleontology,
vol. 7, no. 32, pt. I, pp. 1-548; pt. II, pp. 549-730, 89 pl.
1939. Basilosaurus in Arkansas. Bulletin of the American As-
sociation of Petroleum Geologists, vol. 23, no. 8, pp. 1228-
1229.
1945. Fresh-water mollusca from the state of Monagas, Vene-
zuela. Bulletins of American Paleontology, vol. 31, no.
118, pp. 1-42.
1953a. Memorial. Gilbert Dennison Harris 1864-1952. Journal
of Paleontology, vol. 27, no. 4, pp. 615-618.
1953b. Gilbert Dennison Harris (1864-1952). Bulletin of the
American Association of Petroleum Geologists, vol. 37,
no. 11, pp. 2620-2626.
1953c. Memorial. (1864-1952) Gilbert Dennison Harris. Bulle-
tins of American Paleontology, vol. 35, no. 146, pp. 1-23
1963. Preface. in reprinting of Republication of Conrad’s fossil
shells of the Tertiary Formations of North America, by
G.D.Harris, 1893. Washington, D. C. Paleontological Re-
search Institution, Ithaca, NY, p. 2.
1982. Paleontological Research Institution, fifty years, 1932-
1982. Paleontological Research Institution, Ithaca, NY,
29 pp.
Pope, D. E.
1988. Louisiana. in The state geological surveys - a history. A.
Socolow, ed., Association of American State Geologists,
pp. 177-198.
Powell, J. W.
1889. Eighth annual report of the United States Geological Sur-
vey to the Secretary of the Interior, 1886-87. Washington,
D. C., U. S. Government Printing Office, 474 pp.
1890. Tenth annual report of the United States Geological Sur-
vey to the Secretary of the Interior, 1888-89. Part I, ge-
ology. Washington, D. C., U. S. Government Printing Of-
fice, 774 pp.
189la. Eleventh annual report of the United States Geological
Survey to the Secretary of the Interior, 1889-90. Part I,
geology. Washington, D. C., U. S. Government Printing
Office, 751 pp.
1891b. Twelfth annual report of the United States Geological Sur-
vey to the Secretary of the Interior, 1890-91. Part I, ge-
ology. Washington, D. C., U. S. Government Printing Of-
fice, 675 pp.
1892. Thirteenth annual report of the United States Geological
Survey to the Secretary of the Interior, 1891-92. Part I,
report of the Director. Washington, D. C., U. S. Govern-
ment Printing Office, 240 pp.
1893. Fourteenth annual report of the United States Geological
Survey to the Secretary of the Interior, 1892-93, Part I,
Report of the Director: Washington, D. C., Government
Printing Office, 321 pp.
Powers, S.
1920a. The Butler salt dome, Freestone county, Texas. American
Journal of Science, 4th Series, vol. 49, pp. 127-142.
1920b. The Sabine Uplift, Louisiana. Bulletin of the American
Association of Petroleum Geologists, vol. 4, no. 2, pp.
117-136.
Raymond, P.E.
1902. The Crown Point section. Bulletins of American Paleon-
tology, vol. 3, no. 14, pp. 267-310.
1903. The faunas of the Trenton at the type section at Newport,
NY. Bulletins of American Paleontology, vol. 4, no. 17,
pp. 9-18.
Riddell, J. L., et al.
1856. Report of the Special Committee of the New Orleans
Academy of Sciences on the importance of a geological
and scientific survey of the State of Louisiana. Baton Rouge,
Advocate Steam Press Printer, 11 pp.
Ries, H.
1899. A report on Louisiana clay samples. Special Report No.
4. in Geology and Agriculture. Part V: A preliminary re-
port on the geology of Louisiana. by G.D.Harris and
A.C.Veatch. Made Under the Direction of State Experi-
ment Station, Baton Rouge, Louisiana, pp. 263-275.
Schmidt, K. P., and Olsson, A. A.
1916. From Cornell to the Carolinas. Power Boating, (May) pp.
15-22, 46.
Schoonover, L.M.
1941. A stratigraphic study of the mollusks of the Calvert and
Choptank Formations of Southern Maryland. Bulletins of
American Paleontology, vol. 25, no. 94B, pp. 165-134.
Schram, F. R.
1992. Medalists of the Paleontological Society. Journal of Pa-
leontology, vol. 56, no. 2, pp. 469-476.
Sheldon, P. G.
1916. Atlantic slope Arcas. Paleontographica Americana, vol.
1, no. 1, 101 pp., 16 pl. [Errata page at the end states that
the actual date of publication was January 31, 1917.]
Simonds, F. W.
1891. Annual report of the Geological Survey of Arkansas for
1888—the geology of Washington County. vol. 4, part I,
pp. 1-154.
Smith, C.E.
1902. Work of the Cornell summer school of field geology.
American Geologist, vol. 30, pp. 396-397.
Spath, L. F.
1925. Jurassic cephalopoda from Madagascar. Bulletins of
American Paleontology, vol. 11, no. 44, pp. 141-170.
136 BULLETIN 350
Tarr, R.S.
1892. Reconnaissance of the Guadulupe Mountains. Geological
Survey of Texas Bulletins, no. 3, 42 pp.
Tucker, H., and Wilson, D.
1932a. A list of Caloosahatchie Pliocene species. Indiana Acad-
emy of Science Proceedings, vol. 41, pp. 355-356.
1932b. A list of species from Acline, Florida. Indiana Academy
of Science Proceedings, vol. 41, p. 357.
1932c. Some new and otherwise interesting fossils from the Flor-
ida Tertiary. Bulletins of American Paleontology, vol. 18,
no. 65, 24 pp.
1933. A second contribution to the Neogene paleontology of
south Florida. Bulletins of American Paleontology, vol.
18, no. 66, 20 pp.
Tweedale, G.
1991. Geology and industrial consultancy—Sir William Boyd
Dawkins (1837-1929) and the Kent Coalfield. British
Journal for the History of Science, vol. 24, pt. 4, pp. 435-
451.
Van Winkle, K.
1921. Illustrations and descriptions of fossil mollusca contained
in the paleontological collections at Cornell University.
Bulletins of American Paleontology, vol. 8, no. 36, pp.
347-385.
Van Winkle, K., and Harris, G. D.
1919. New and otherwise interesting Tertiary molluscan species
from the east coast of America. Bulletins of American
Paleontology, vol. 8, no. 33, pp. 1-32.
Veatch, A. C.
1899. The five islands. Special Report No. 3. in Geology and
Agriculture. Part V: A preliminary report on the geology
of Louisiana. by G.D.Harris and A.C. Veatch. Made Under
the Direction of State Experiment Station, Baton Rouge,
Louisiana, pp. 209-262.
1902. See Harris et al., 1902.
1905. The underground waters of Northern Louisiana and
Southern Louisiana. Part II. in A report on the under-
ground waters of Louisiana. by G.D.Harris et al. Geolog-
ical Survey of Louisiana Bulletin, no. 1, Report of 1905,
pp. 79-164.
1906a. Geology and underground water resources of Northern
Louisiana with notes on adjoining districts. Geological
Survey of Louisiana Bulletin, Report of 1905, no. 4, pp.
261-457.
1906b. Geology and underground water resources of northern
Louisiana and southern Arkansas. United States Geolog-
ical Survey Professional Paper, no. 46, 422 pp.
1907. Geography and geology of a portion of southwestern Wy-
oming, with special reference to coal and oil. United states
Geological Survey Professional Paper, no. 56, 178 pp.
1935. Evolution of the Congo Basin. Geological Society of Amer-
ica Memoir, no. 3, 183 pp.
Veatch, A. C., and Smith, P. A.
1939. Atlantic submarine valleys of the United States and the
Congo submarine valley. Geological Society of American
Special Paper, no. 7, 101 pp.
Von Engeln, O. D.
1907. Onand about a college campus. Harper’s Weekly, vol. 51,
no. 2632 (June 1), pp. 808-809. (reprinted in the Ithaca
Daily Journal, Saturday, June 8, 1907.)
1961. The Finger Lakes region. Its origin and nature. Cornell
University Press, Ithaca, NY, 156 pp.
Walcott, C. D.
1891. Correlation papers. Cambrian. United States Geological
Survey Bulletin, no.81, 447 pp.
Ward, L. W.
1993. The G. D. Harris manuscript on the stratigraphy of Mio-
cene and Pliocene beds at Yorktown, Virginia. Paleon-
tological Research Institution Special Publication 20, 118
pp.
Ward, L. W., and Blackwelder, B. W.
1980. Stratigraphic revisions of upper Miocene and Lower Plio-
cene beds of the Chesapeake Group, Middle Atlantic coastal
Plain. United States Geological Survey Professional Paper
1482-D, 61 pp.
Waring, G.A.
1926. The geology of the island of Trinidad, B.W.I. Johns Hop-
kins University Studies in Geology, no. 7, 180 pp.
Weller, S.
1918. Henry Shaler Williams, 1847-1918. Journal of Geology,
vol. 26, no. 8, pp. 698-700.
Wheeler, H. EF.
1935. Timothy Abbott Conrad, with particular reference to his
work in Alabama one hundred years ago. Bulletins of
American Paleontology, v. 23, no. 77, 157 pp. (reprinted
1977 by the Paleontological Research Institution, Ithaca,
NY)
Weisbord, N. E.
1926. Venezuelan Devonian fossils. Bulletins of American Pa-
leontology, vol. 11, no. 46, pp. 221-272.
1929. Miocene mollusca of Northern Colombia. Bulletins of
American Paleontology, vol. 14, no. 54, pp. 233-306.
1934. Some Cretaceous and Tertiary echinoids from Cuba. Bul-
letins of American Paleontology, vol. 20, no. 70C, pp.
165-266.
White, C. A.
1891. Correlation papers. Cretaceous. United States Geological
Survey Bulletin, no. 82, 273 pp.
Williams, F. L.
1963. Matthew Fontaine Maury—Scientist of the sea. Rutgers
University Press, New Brunswick, NJ, 720 pp.
Williams, H. S.
1891. Correlation papers. Devonian and Carboniferous. United
States Geological Survey Bulletin, no. 80, 270 pp.
1895. James Dwight Dana and his work as a geologist. Journal
of Geology, vol. 3, no. 6, pp. 601-621.
Willis, B.
1948. Artesian salt formations. Bulletin of the American Asso-
ciation of Petroleum Geologists, vol. 32, no. 7, pp. 1227-
1264.
PLATES
138 BULLETIN 350
Plate 1.—Gilbert Harris in May, 1872, age 8. (Photo: HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.)
PLATE |
BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY, VOLUME 109
BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY, VOLUME 109
PLATE 2
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 139
Plate 2.—Gilbert Harris, ca. 1895, shortly after he began teaching at Cornell. (Photo: HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.)
140 BULLETIN 350
Plate 3.—Field crew from the Louisiana Geological Survey, 1905. Harris is second from the right. (Photo: HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.)
BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY, VOLUME 109 PLATE 3
BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY, VOLUME 109 PLATE 4
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 141
Plate 4.—Harris at a tide gauge station near Weeks, Louisiana, 1905. (Photo: HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.)
142 BULLETIN 350
Plate 5.— Harris (bent over on the stern) inspects his new launch Ecphora at Champaign’s Dock in Ithaca, 1914. (Photo: HA-PRI, Ithaca,
NY.)
BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY, VOLUME 109 PLATE 5
BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY, VOLUME 109
. tag ae
— eam Ve}
Vi. 2 ~eseeSa Ba x
i
PLATE 6
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 143
Plate 6.—Harmis’ launch Ecphora, Cornell pennant on the bow, passing through a lock on the Erie Canal, 1914. (Photo: HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.)
144 BULLETIN 350
Plate 7.—Harris at the helm of his launch /anthina, date unknown. (Photo: HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.)
BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY, VOLUME 109 PLATE 7
PLATE 8
BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY, VOLUME 109
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 145
Plate 8.—Class field trip to Yawger’s Woods, on the shore of Cayuga Lake, ca. 1927-28. Harris is seated, right foreground. (Photo: HA-
PRI, Ithaca, NY.)
146 BULLETIN 350
Plate 9.—Harris and his students around the table in McGraw Hall, Cornell University, probably ca. 1915-1920. Left-to-right: A. Jacot,
Karl Schmidt, Carlotta Maury, Harris, Axel Olsson, and E.R.Smith. (Photo: HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.)
BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY, VOLUME 109 PLATE 9
BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY, VOLUME 109 PLATE 10
3
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 147
Plate 10.—A more formal (and possibly posed) photo, around the table in McGraw Hall, ca. 1921. Left-to-right: Axel Olsson, Harris, Pearl
Sheldon, Carlotta Maury, Katherine Van Winkle Palmer. (Photo: HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.)
148 BULLETIN 350
Plate 11.—Carlotta Maury in the paleontology laboratory in McGraw Hall, date unknown. (Photo: HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.)
BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY, VOLUME 109 PLATE | 1
BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY, VOLUME 109 PLATE 12
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 149
Plate 12.—June 28, 1932, the cornerstone of the first building of the Paleontological Research Institution is laid near Harris’ house on
Dearborn Place in Ithaca. In rear, left-to-right: Axel Olsson, Katherine Palmer, Mrs. A.C.Gill, Beatrice Bolton, Rebecca Harris, Pearl Sheldon,
Clara Harris, Prof. A.C.Gill. Foreground, Stephen Herrick (left) helps Harris set the stone. (Photo: HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.)
150 BULLETIN 350
Plate 13.—Harris’ official faculty photograph, taken around the time of his retirement from Cornell in 1934. (Photo: Department of
Manuscripts and University Archives, Cornell University.)
BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY, VOLUME 109 PLATE 13
BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY, VOLUME 109 PLATE 14
&
Te aA ol NTN.
er, Py haga |
‘ Yr ¢
CL CLAD Gbigy
~
GILBERT DENNISON HARRIS: BRICE 151
Plate 14.—Harris, age 85, with his rotary printing press in the basement of the Paleontological Research Institution on Dearborn Place in
Ithaca, November, 1949. (Photo: HA-PRI, Ithaca, NY.)
INDEX OF PEOPLE
NOTE: As the biography is about G. D. Harris, his name does not appear in the index.
Page numbers marked with * means the reference is in a footnote on that page. Where there are multiple pages listed, e.g., 120-125, please
check the footnotes on those pages for references to the person.
Adamsi@2 key eet ee er ne ec ra aie comin erica 36
Adams; branks | S52 trcrsrersicre nis ttsterecensesterovagavs shoisvela enone reat 118*
INERGVAIUGNIS, scsausansnsguunoogdeasc00Ncuoadsone sraveyetttoes 43
Alexanders@harlesiPex. 27 os, a. fv eitacs cts ct etalon uae aicere 59, 60
Allen, Catharine M., ..... Rien ears Eee coe oboe 12*
UN Worse ee Oe Be a See OO ee eC o coco cbonone Ee 72
Allmon, Warren, 8, Pe Anon en Ae O Good oO TorUuD om as 129*
Anderson ssi Matters raycyo)ccorsis, hotles aves aasteteas (archery hevtG eievayrerote 2
Andrews vAVeryD Suenseeenier ie caer 94, 94*, 95, 95*, 100, 100*
Anzalone Miachae) ee mseniee seer eee aera emit reriane 9*
Arias; Desidenio sy avait cyctonrer acs eieor tone eee rece 93
EMO Chalo lshe poadueousoosmooRm Senko noo doco geoDes 22
ISthh a Oa OR as 6 GOR GOD Romo Ae CoO e aoaenr Eee ao 64*
BerlinerEmiles een saic rience er ee Cee eee 92
Blackwelder.sEliote ee ce eet eee erie reeriore 126*
Bloom: -Arthuphlotseccwsccctcectee ec cee ete elons te eehetetel ett 91*
Bolton, Beatrice
(Mrs>\Geltonilughes) seme. cee 17292, 12 1172
Boyd: Thomas) Ds canes eee ae eerie terete 110-111
Bowens GC: Fetes pene teens oc Peery teyceeer inserter Soe 23%
Brannemy) Ohi Gee eee iil, 12, ds Syl, 33, 233}, Bis), Sisk
en A ee Ss opbvansuMo soot S 69, 69*, 89, 92, 92*, 109-111
Brice: Heather Wee crc rica teniarste ete sien sete evelone foeieeicierrcicls 9
Brice; WilliamtRs. Sani ns cries vies ek ae core cnt eee a fepaleierremnciers 7
Brown: Larry merece ec ele aicies ire iereiiecicret ter kere tsi 46
Brunberg; Nancy suese ccs ore neers itt atte cl aks eone le teral 8
Bullbrooks:JivA er rveac cle atic ekeac Vere eave tie overe sks ete eeaet Fe 85*
Burfoot: Jamesecn nic os er hee arte eer ies 45
Burns; Banks) yee setcns sere crue aire arsuawete ee ade harvesters evaree 23
Game: ThomasvAt. eh an-.cacste ses eee tiene suit aereal 47, 51
Gard! (Cecil Tie ne certs erty dees asters che oreretarre enero 125%
Garlsont: Ws Edwinths. coon con crc ner coer rite 125*
Gaster: Kennethaese o. oane oct eee eyes 42, 43, 54, 130
@heny;/ Monroe; Gapeeeeaeeeeta ares e 75*, 120, 120*, 130
Cheny;,W= Diy arta roars oats torr reel eee WSs ke
Chiment;/Johne, fe aoa.ciciisen ee eee ern Crem ae 118*
GlarkesJohniMasony -taacccc ccc eran cictemiete ersraieters 41, 91, 91*
Clarkes WABey cies oc: ahel te peveiertrualgrerceroei acter ieisisene craic 23, 38
@lelandsinerdmanvb eee eee nae 40, 51, 130
Clendenin; William W2,, “ac; ase.cc tees ecerees nat epateinre evened 63
Clintons DeWitt, jas sche css iese cto SO SIS Caen 43
ColeSStorrsscse foc eee eee meee a ero ere 8, 46, 130
GolmansGoul@ Pe ha access eee ea adaaeeta tetera ent eel 8
ComstockJohnibenty mags eer eee erase 40
(Compstocks hecodOreh een piece tao err 46, 49
GConablesCHAarlOttes iced eeascpetsyeceesteee,ove averarsVovsrsters ome eae orae miners 45
GonantaGeorgiapnay Duncan ae eee Leer eee eee ene 46
Condit, Ds Dalen ieee tr. cece ee ec cit taeeeme 82*, 86
Conrad, Timothy Abbott, ...... 23, 32, 34, 34*, 35, 35*, 38, 39
Gon way sillier rnc, 5 eerie retest erica see eee ee ae ee 45
(Ghoyo) SNE Renee Set OCIa Scenic eeeetcaicmtG deine no 21
(QenGhilky Heese soons ppp ede ec OTon po danodeCoo ono S 91
G@hristinal((Senjamin) eee teeter eet) eee 9
Lydia—See Harris, Lydia
Stephens eps etore orate tolaretevore's aicunciehererarsyn overs alone) rei teietereieiate axel 9
Graneslhomas: Bs ssc, soo ce ee ae eee 53, 53*, 54
@umings! EdgarR.,, sciiyecc)bsevane ss rs ee ee eee 47
Dall, William Henry, ........... 13, 14, 18, 22, 23, 24, 30, 31,
Deh SCRA GERI e OLR ernment nisok 32, 32%, 35,355.50
DanayJames Dwight, ecer-ee eres 11; 125735536) 37,565.00
Davis; -AviG: (DAVE)! es .iceraeoSiccerseeis cise oe ree ee eee 62
DerbyxOnvallevA] = .2-m eee 36, 46, 46*, 89, 91, 91*, 92
Dockerys Davids whic ds fone soeeeeone onsen eR eRe 130*
ID OdSODs WhUR ess cases eens s ¢ 68, 68*, 69, 69*, 70, 70*, 72, 111
MohenyssEdwardsy < s =le 11
OAL: THC HIE OIGOSAy cob geese Goo os DDD OOOO DUO OO dlolne GoCUD CO Ane cm mSiCOmonoo Om soos 760 Cob vo OmoEGoe 11
liligoeernl gene oO bh OO ROO AEGON MOCO TOGO HO MO OOOH DUD OAD OOD GUC OO OO Ue CD oe OO Coton 4 ham oie 11
SHEMHIGS Loteopnsdctdk pido ano odlupoo se dou muse Seosumooe on ooo conimOeAnAbea bm pia obo ono m 12
ieinnvihy Claapitels: llc RIED cateis ooloa sb ou go 6 ond oO Ob ood oD Do uNeUUS nD ay oboe blbodoto SS sen cisinaaad- 12
Spieiniviby Coaari hire Cana SJE} og biauinin oo pid loin ooo Ald coo niG did Dolo davies Unpia alu miata e oo: 12
(Cas Cagis Nae WY) soon seb dees ns poe o sr OGR OOO UU Aan OOnDGBodEBeE scene dada Ai oeome dado. 12
SPU ReniS Foiamaao Gell», UIA con gone pate docn > oes enue Oreo bbe eUds RoGeu bSeduics Deis Sasa sen K 12
Gorbiulal(Bomrocorpula)eunined Guppy eUSOOD) tetehey- resol t-1o)ol rata ietelelat-deleiale) eh clene ne) eliel oyeieed eee iet- del fete elie ielieds 12
SubpenusiCanyocorpulanGarduerelo20 meter tetetenenete oneneiee etl ekens tee negettete tet te =ercene ol stint israel Tt tiaras A ol sia laa 14
Gorbula\(Garyocorbula)\dominicensis' Gabby US7S0) s\- ore ele oe ele or rede ie ere wirel oho) =e fmyiag «fe fe) pes a= sts leb =i )ielie =|) = ie) = t= 14
GCorpulan(Garyocarbula)SeriCeaw all aloo Owe tater ete ete y nee eeee teen etersiey an sesielog se iain atte tNe ge lieieted ele) hone nen ea 15
Subgenus Julracorbula’ Olsson and) Harbison, 19530 3. ~~ ce ee clein = ce eee wie «se 0 el oe wine am iol ais ess le 17
(GCorpulalCUuhacOs pula) OSSHISIENSDLY S192 20 tweu- teat rears anche che ieen east oketoeic) aan ee nete nen eae nie conan ite tela 17
SEL OnMns roliea dylan, IEP oon cont bide Deb acid > Se nb ene en come eoednoaroo Soc ooeu Sado oe 18
Gorbulan(hanamicorbuld) (CONE NeWASPECIES mci Wereie pale eked Renken ede epee rene ay ek stella steel oiinlin isto > ie totate t= feleista iain aia 19
(Gantt (aay MAQRT)) Spyie & Oe oo oS oO Noe DU eOooe ana ooo ON oD ob Ud ose CL GMs owes aso 6 aoGeh 19
SlibgenssVaricorbulaGrantiand (Galen) OS Ue penewe pen aeeteta te tettet teed eel clad 100 Hard, dark-brown to black silty finely laminated clays. Indurated, sometimes
crossbedded lenticular, sand lenses common towards the top of the bed. Fossils
occur very sparingly below the top of the bed.
Text-figure 3.—Explanation to profile of composite section on Text-figure 4.
EOCENE MOLLuscs OF TEXAS: GARVIE 13
Locality 20
UnitK Holocene
Units G-J Quaternary?
Units A-F Eocene
7\\ Locality 18
0 mes
SS eS —s
See Se oe A SO ee ee 100
cm.
Text-figure 4.—Profile of two localities in Joe Taylor Branch, Milam County, Texas. Source of many species described in the text.
Locality 1. (=TBEG 28-T-9) Dump by old copper Smithville, 1.3 km (=0.8) miles east of Upton, Bastrop
mine shaft, E. Pullen survey, east of Sandy Fork County, Texas. Marquez member of the Reklaw For-
Creek, 4.8 miles by road northeast of Harwood, mation. Localities 2, 3, 4, and 6 were described by
Gonzales County. No trace remains in the fields of Lyth (1949).
the mine or dump, which was apparently dug before
1933, and was an attempt to locate a treasure trove
dating from Spanish suzerainty times. This is the
type locality of Turritella turneri Plummer, 1933,
and Volutocorbis stenzeli Plummer, 1933.
Locality 2. (=Lyth, 1949, locality 4, map reference:
°68.55E, **20.17N) Bluff on Ridge Creek, ap-
proximately 30.5 m (=100 feet) long exposed on
north side of creek about 556 m (+1825 feet),
(Lyth, 1949, in error says 825 feet) south of Mis-
Localities 2 to 8 are along Ridge Creek (also known souri, Kansas, and Texas railroad trestle and coun-
locally as Reed’s Creek), 0.63 km (=1.0 mile) above ty road bridge across Ridge Creek which is ap-
the old Missouri, Kansas, and Texas railroad trestle proximately 8.0 km west of Smithville or 1 km
and county road bridge, 10 km (=6.2 miles) west of east of Upton.
Locality 3. (= Lyth, 1949, locality 5, map reference:
°°68.45E, *20.02N) Bluff on Ridge Creek, approx-
imately 91 m (=300 feet) long exposed on the west
side of the creek and about 730 m (=2400 feet)
south of Missouri, Kansas, and Texas railroad trestle
and county road bridge. The upper portion of the
bluff has a very fossiliferous sandy lens, now ob-
scured by slumping.
Locality 4. (= Lyth, 1949, locality 7, map reference:
°°68.40E, *°19.92N) Bluff on Ridge Creek, approx-
imately 61 m (=200 feet) long exposed on the west
side of the creek and about 888 m (+2915 feet)
south of Missouri, Kansas, and Texas railroad trestle
and county road bridge. This is the site of the ma-
jority of the Ridge Creek specimens collected.
Locality 5. (Map reference: °°68.43E, *°19.67N) Bluff
on north side of side creek which joins Ridge Creek
about 970 m (=3180 feet) south of Missouri, Kan-
sas, and Texas railroad trestle and county road
bridge across Ridge Creek. This exposure had one
fossiliferous silty lens which yielded most of the
specimens of Laevibuccinum lineatum Heilprin,
1881. This was also the site of a large well-pre-
served, but flattened specimen of Angulithes elliotti
(Stenzel, 1940), about 30 cm in diameter. This lo-
cality was not described by Lyth (1949).
Locality 6. (= TBEG 11-T-7, and Lyth, 1949, locality
6, map reference: °°68.69E, “19.57N) Bluff on
Ridge Creek, approximately 61 m (=200 feet) long
exposed on the west side of the creek and about
3700 feet south of Missouri, Kansas, and Texas rail-
road trestle and county road bridge across Ridge
Creek. This is the type locality of Athleta petrosa
smithi Fisher and Rodda, Angulithes elliotti Stenzel,
and Aturia turneri Stenzel. Only very leached sed-
iments are exposed now.
Locality 7. (Map reference: °°68.60E, *°19.24N) Loose
fossiliferous limonitic slabs in bed of Ridge Creek,
about 1463 m (= 4800 feet) south of Missouri, Kan-
sas, and Texas railroad trestle and county road
bridge, and continuing upstream for about 305 m
(=1000 feet) (not described by Lyth (1949). Due to
vegetation cover, the level from which these slabs
came was not ascertained but it appears to be near
the very top of the formation. This exposure is the
type locality of Hexaplex eoa n. sp., Bittium ridgei
n. sp.
Locality 8. (=TBEG 11-T-72, Bombshell Bluff, map
reference: °°68.17E, **20.02N ) Bluff on Colorado
River bank, about 2.4 km (=1.5 miles) west-north-
west of Devil’s Eye, Bastrop County, Texas. High
bluff along right bank of Colorado River, 0.63 km
(=1 mile) east of Upton and .64 km (= 0.4 mile)
east or downstream from the mouth of Ridge Creek,
BULLETIN 352
approximately 10.4 km (=6.5 miles) west of Smith-
ville, Bastrop County, Texas. Marquez Member of
Reklaw Formation. The bluff is no longer on the
river but is at least 61 m (=200 feet) from the river,
just downstream of a wooded island. Part of the
bluff is still accessible and is very fossiliferous.
Locality 9. (Map reference: °°68.17E, **20.02N) Out-
cropping gray indurated sandstone ledge on Colo-
rado River bank, near water level, extending from
just downstream of locality 8 for 61 m (=200 feet),
Bastrop County, Texas. Large specimens of Galeo-
dea (Mambrina) turneri Gardner, 1939, and Clav-
ilithes parvetorbis n. sp. have been found here.
Locality 10. (=TBEG 11-T-35, map reference:
°70.88E, %23.05N) Davids Bottom, left bank of
Colorado River, 0.8 km (=0.5 mile) south of junc-
tion of Alum Creek and Little Alum creek, imme-
diately south of dead-end gravel road leading to
State Highway 71, Bastrop County, Texas. Marquez
Member of the Reklaw Formation. The high river
banks are now completely overgrown except for a
glauconitic ledge seen only at very low river levels.
The ledge extends upstream for some considerable
distance.
Locality 11. (=TBEG 11-T-36) Devil’s Eye, former
island in Colorado river, 12.8 km (=8.0) miles
southeast of Bastrop, between TBEG locality
11-T-39 (Kennedy Bluff) and TBEG locality 10.
Marquez Member of the Reklaw Formation. Local
recollection does not agree with the above descrip-
tion of Devil’s Eye but rather with that of Penrose
in: Dumble (1890, p. 30) which is described as: “. . .
Devil’s Eye, an eddy at a low ledge .. .”’. Nothing
remains today of the “‘island’’ or low ledge in the
river although the ledge can still be seen on the left
bank.
Localities 12 to 23 are along banks of Joe Taylor
Branch of Two Mile Creek’. 0.6 mile upstream from
junction with Brazos River. 0.32 km (=0.2 mile)
downstream from county road crossing of Two Mile
Creek, southeast on county road 1.9 km (=1.2
miles) from U.S. Highway 79, at a point 6.2 km
(=3.9 miles) northeast from the center of Gause; the
point where the creek crosses the county road is
given by U.S.G.S. Gause quadrangle topographic
map, reference 96 deg. 39’ 06” N, 30 deg. 48’ 40”
E. Marquez member of Reklaw formation.
Locality 12. (Map reference: °’24.40E, *410.76N) Hard
black silty clay in bed and banks of Joe Taylor
> Localities 12 to 23 were measured and described in 1985 and
as such due allowance must be made for changes in the intervening
time. For example, the author has photographs documenting 12 m
of erosion at Joe Taylor Branch creek at Locality 20 in ten years.
EOcENE MOLLuscs OF TEXAS: GARVIE 15
creek, just downstream of county road bridge to 0.9
m (=3 feet) resistant ledge. The banks of the creek
have produced irregular echinoids.
Locality 13. (Map reference: °24.33E, “10.90N)
Banks of creek and small waterfall on small side
creek 46 m (=150 feet) upstream of junction with
Joe Taylor Branch creek, just below locality 13.
This locality has produced fine examples of Phalium
(Semicassis) reklawensis n. sp.
Locality 14. (Map reference: °’24.52E, *10.79N)
Banks and bed of Joe Taylor Branch creek, from
base of 0.91 m (=3 feet) resistant ledge to first bend,
a distance of about 244 m (=800 feet). The bed of
the creek produced the large Galeodea (Mambrina)
turneri Gardner, 1939, figured in Plate 14. The right
hand creek banks contain stringers with micro-gas-
tropods, one of which contained numerous speci-
mens of Ringicula cf. trapaquara Harris, 1895, and
Solariorbis? parsnaticoides n. sp. At the down-
stream end of this locality, vertebrae and other bone
material of a whale were collected, now deposited
at the J. J. Pickle (formerly the Balcones) Research
Center, University of Texas at Austin.
Locality 15. (Map reference: °’24.31E, “10.69N) Hard
glauconitic lenticular fossiliferous ledge at right
hand bank of Joe Taylor Branch creek at water level.
This exposure is the source of many large Barbatia
spp.
Locality 16. (Map reference: °’24.36E, *10.67N)
Large low ledge at sharp bend of Joe Taylor Branch
creek, and below a source of water seepage. Unit B
of this locality was the site of some remarkably fos-
siliferous lenses and was notable for large Athleta
petrosus smithi Fisher and Rodda, 1964, Protosur-
cula? aurora n. sp., and other large turrid species.
The downstream end of this exposure (unit B) is the
source of a poorly preserved crab carapace.
Locality 17. (Map reference: °’25.40E, *10.71N) Left
hand bank of Joe Taylor Branch creek, from just
upstream of small waterfall over a limonitic ledge
to just downstream of intermittent flowing gully, a
distance of 15 m (= 50 feet). No large fossils have
been found here, but unit A has sandy layers very
rich in pteropod species.
Locality 18. (Map reference: 25.43E, *410.76N)
Banks of Joe Taylor Branch creek about 152 m
(=500 feet) long ending at a high cliff on the left
bank where the creek enters an open flat area. At
the base of a very overgrown bluff are localized and
sometimes lenticular sandy zones in the clay, just
underneath a sometimes discontinuous limonitic
ledge about 1.2 m (=4 feet) above water level.
These are locally very fossiliferous and have pro-
duced almost all the Michela trabeatoides carinata
n. subsp. specimens found in the Reklaw.
Locality 19. (Map reference: °’25.57E, **10.76N) High
cliff, about 61 m (=200 feet) long on right hand
side of Joe Taylor Branch creek, just downstream of
a dry branch. Bed B near the end of the exposure
has produced a few larger molluscs. From the de-
scription, this would also appear to be locality
TBEG 165-T-3 (cf. text-figure 4).
Locality 20. (Map reference: °’25.62E, *10.86N) High
cliff at left side at sharp bend of Joe Taylor Branch
creek. The vast majority of fossils found from Joe
Taylor Branch creek came from this exposure and
most of those from two very fossiliferous lenses,
one in bed B just above water level and the other
about 6 ft above the base of unit C. Unit F which
is first exposed at this locality, is traceable until the
end of locality 21, and is also the source of many
unique or only rarely found species such as Bucct-
nanops ellipticum reklawensis n. subsp., Strepsidura
harrisi Givens and Garvie, and Venericor densata
reklawensis n. sp. The base of unit B at the very
end of the exposure is the source of numerous spec-
imens of Pseudoliva cf. santander Gardner. Unit E
is notable for occasional large Architectonica (Stel-
laxis) reklawensis n. sp., and numerous specimens
of corals (Paracyathus sp.).
Locality 21. (Map reference: °’25.71E, *410.95N) Long
high cliff with initial left hand bend on Joe Taylor
Branch creek, ending at small rapids and scree of
limonitic boulders. Beds A through K of locality 21
are traceable through this area with a noticeable de-
crease in sand content and increase in glauconite.
The base of unit B has produced the only specimens
of Clavilithes parvetorbis n. sp. and Fusinus clat-
bornica n. sp. found from this creek. Unit B at the
downstream end is the site of a large mass of rolled
coral and within it the specimens of Cypraeorbis
bulbus n. sp.
Locality 22. (Map reference: °'25.74E, “11.09N)
Small 1.5 m (= 5 feet) high bluff on right bank of
Joe Taylor Branch creek, about 90 m (= 300 feet)
downstream from the end of locality 22, ending the
Reklaw exposure before its reappearance at the
mouth of the creek at locality 24.
Locality 23 (Map reference: °’25.83E, “11.12N) High
bluff on left bank just before the mouth of Joe Tay-
lor Branch creek, and high bluff on right bank of
Brazos River. Numerous specimens of a Paracy-
athus coral species. The base of the bluff at low
water level has a discontinuous layer of nuculanid
bivalves. I have not seen this exposure in an un-
weathered state.
Locality 24. (Map reference: °'25.57E, “11.40N)
16 BULLETIN 352
Joe Taylor Branch Inset
=
BB:
Reklaw
Claiborne
==
Ridge Creek Locality Inset Jackson
Text-figure 5—Maps showing the extent of the Reklaw Formation in Texas (after Collins, 1980, and Sams and Gaskell, 1990) and fossil
locations discussed in the text.
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 19/
Banks of a small unnamed creek entering the Brazos
River about | km (=5/8 mile) airline distance up-
stream of the mouth of Joe Taylor Branch creek.
The creek side exposures are similar to unit E of
locality 20, but even more sparingly fossiliferous.
Locality 25. (=TBEG 200-T-1) Borrow pit on north
side of U.S. Highway 84 near east bank of Angelina
River, 300 feet west of the river, 4.2 km (=2.6
miles) east of Reklaw, Rusk County, Texas. Newby
and Marquez members of the Reklaw Formation.
See Stenzel (1953, p. 60, fig. 31) for a detailed sec-
tion of this locality. The locality is now very weath-
ered but still collectable. The oyster Hyotissa offe-
manae n. sp. is the most common large mollusc
present.
COLLECTION AND PREPARATION OF SPECIMENS
Only where sediments were continuously wet were
fossils found washed free or observed in situ; on other
exposures weathering leaches the fossils from the sed-
iments. With even moderate weathering, the fossilif-
erous layers become highly indurated, iron-stained and
the fossils corroded. Generally, fresh specimens are
very fragile, particularly from the sandy lenses in Joe
Taylor Creek, the original shell material being partially
leached and in many cases secondary calcium carbon-
ate has re-deposited as crystalline growths on the spec-
imens and within the matrix.
As most fossils are fragile, extreme care is required
in cleaning and removal of adhering matrix. The pro-
cess of alternate washing, drying and sieving so useful
in disintegrating the shales of the Stone City member
and Cook Mountain formations, produces a shell hash
of broken, or distintegrated material when applied to
the Reklaw fauna. Many of the rarer and unusual spec-
imens were cleaned under 10 or 20 power magnifica-
tion of a binocular microscope. On many of the highly
ornamented forms, adhering grains of sand had to be
removed singly using the point of a needle to avoid
damaging the specimens. The calcitic crystalline
growths, which on gastropods were most commonly
cemented to the apex and apertural region and in bi-
valves to the hinge area, could be removed by careful
scraping with a sliver of a razor blade.
A weak solution of cellulose acetate in acetone was
frequently used to harden shell surfaces; repairs were
made with cellulose acetate cement. As can be seen
from a number of figures, in spite of the greatest care,
breakage of specimens was common.
DEPOSITIONAL ENVIRONMENT
The sedimentary characteristics at locality 20 are
varied: regions of clayey silt alternate with finely lam-
inated sands, glauconite and greensand layers, and the
boundaries are often disrupted by contorted bedding,
possibly produced by subaqueous slumping. In general
the micaceous sediments of unit C are poorly lami-
nated and finegrained. Interspaced within the silts are
thin shell-rich layers, containing corals, bryozoans,
molluscs, and fish remains. Crossbedding and ripple
laminations were not observed. The only mollusc that
might indicate fluviatile conditions would be Theodox-
us, but modern representatives of this genus also live
in marine environments.
The condition of the fauna within the shell layers
suggests a transported or winnowed assemblage; the
bioclasts are mixed and reach a maximum size of
about 3 cm. The preservation of the fossils is excel-
lent; even highly ornamented species such as Chama
and Volutocorbis are perfectly preserved and broken
or abraded specimens are rare. Moreover, the interior
of many gastropods is hollow and some have a brown
flakey organic looking substance in the aperture. With-
in the spire of one specimen the carbonaceous material
reached almost to the apex, was not attached to the
interior wall and looked very like the dried body of
the animal. Several specimens were analyzed at the
Electron Microscopy Laboratory at Arizona State Uni-
versity, and Dr. L.A.J. Garvie (pers. comm.) reported
the interior substance was almost pure amorphous car-
bon with other elements below the threshold of detec-
tion. If the molluscs were buried with the soft tissues
intact, that would indicate a rapid burial. Epifaunal bi-
valves are almost invariably found disarticulated, in
one sample of more than 200, only 5 were found with
both valves united.
The sedimentary conditions of unit E suggest a
higher energy environment than for the other beds.
Fossils and areas of greensand are intermingled, the
fossils often broken, and usually extensively abraded.
The central part of the bed clearly shows considerable
contorted bedding. Bioturbidation was not observed,
and in any case is unlikely to account for the large-
scale mixing, as the intermixed zones are typically
much larger than the fossils. The areas of greensand
have the same fauna found in the shell layers, although
more sparsely distributed, and generally the specimens
are larger. Subangular quarzite pebbles up to | cm. are
not uncommon in this bed.
Unit F is a fine sandy silt with abundant Notocor-
bula and Caryocorbula occurring in the lower part; the
lower boundary clearly indicating deposition by cur-
rents, as all the scaphopods are aligned parallel to one
another. The beds above unit F are eroded away at
locality 20, but may be observed both up and down-
stream of this locality.
18 BULLETIN 352
COMPOSITION OF THE FAUNA
Table 1 (inside back cover) lists the fauna from the
two localities where the majority of the collecting was
done, TB: Joe Taylor Branch (= localities 12—22), and
RC: Ridge Creek (=localities 2—7). The codes within
the latter two columns indicate, a: abundant (100+
specimens), c: common (11—100), u: uncommon (6—
10), r: rare (1-5). The habitat is gleaned from various
sources, primarily L. Smith (1959, 1962, 1965), Hul-
ings (1955), Natland (1957), and Abbott (1974), and
is intended as an indication only. Following Smith the
marine environmental continuum is subdivided into
the following six habitats:
Inside intertidal (IT): river channel near mouth; in-
side beach and marsh, shal-
low depth; brackish
occasional salinity reduction,
combined brackish and ma-
rine or transitional faunas
essentially zero depth to ap-
proximately 3 m (=10 feet);
normal marine
approximately 3 m (=10) feet
to approximately 30 m (=100
feet); normal marine
approximately 30 m (+100
feet) to approximately 90 m
(=300 feet); normal marine
approximately 90 m (+300
feet) to approximately 180 m
(=600 feet); normal marine
shelf edge to continental rise;
open sea
Bay and pass (BA):
Beach (BE):
Inner neritic (IN):
Middle neritic (MN):
Outer neritic (ON):
Slope (SL):
The habitat of the many species with no modern
relatives was inferred from taxa with similar shell
form. Text-figure 5 displays the result of distributing
5125 specimens from Ridge Creek and 3700 speci-
mens from Taylor Branch within the seven habitat
types as given in table 1. All complete specimens
found during the duration of the study were kept, bro-
ken specimens were also kept of the rarer species. The
fauna collected is therefore likely to be a good ap-
proximation of the original fauna after taphonomic
processes. The numerical count of a species was equal-
ly distributed between habitat types when more than
one habitat was inferred. The computed faunal abun-
dance histogram should be similar in shape to the or-
ginal faunal abundance histogram in the seven habi-
tats, although the computed values would be less than
the original values, due to the bias of not collecting
all of the original sample. The collection error is un-
likely to significantly change the overall shape of the
graph, given that the same bias applies to all seven
habitats. The diversity count sums the number of dif-
ferent species and subspecies assigned to each habitat;
if more than one habitat was inferred a count of one
was equally distributed as a fractional value between
the habitats. The difference in total diversity and abun-
dance distributions between Ridge Creek and Taylor
Branch is very small considering the number of indi-
viduals involved, implying a very similar set of envi-
ronments at the two locations. More than 75% of the
fauna is similar to taxa living in the inner neritic to
outer neritic habitats with a diversity maximum at the
shallow inner neritic. Interestingly, the maximum
abundance is in an inferred environment of 30—90 m
(= 100-300 feet) greater depth than the diversity max-
imum. Bivalves make up about 12% of the total fauna
and gastropods about 88%. In contrast the bivalve and
gastropod diversity ratios (counting species and sub-
species) are in an inverse relation to each other with
a turning point at the middle neritic habitat.
These habitat data support the case for the majority
of the fauna being an open marine assemblage, al-
though some current winnowing must have taken place
to produce the size-limited specimens in the shell
seams. The excellent condition of the shells also im-
plies a low energy depositional environment, although
a rapid burial appears likely given the evidence that
some molluscs appear to show the fossilized soft-bod-
ied animal remains. Perhaps the animals were killed
by a load of fine mud from a land runoff, or river
sediment, causing the burial. The sediments within the
units where the shell seams are common often show a
fine component of plant material indicating a landward
origin. A supporting piece of evidence is the appear-
ance of the usually fluviatile genus Theodoxus, it could
also have been transported seaward with the land or
river sediments.
Hickman (1976, p. 25-28) cites studies noting the
increasing percentage of turrid species in modern neo-
gastropod faunas with depth. Within the Reklaw fauna
the turrid percentage of the fauna is about 26%, plac-
ing the bulk of the Reklaw faunas in the 0—20 m range,
although probably at the deeper end since the turrid
families represented are indicative of deep water
(Hickman, 1976; Powell, 1966). The presence of abun-
dant corals, bryozoans and bivalve suspension feeders
also implies that the fauna must have lived in a normal
marine environment. Purdy (1964) notes that suspen-
sion feeders are more common in sands, while Nucula,
Glycymeris, Chama and Postalia, prefer a coarser sub-
strate such as gravel, or shell hash, or a reef substrate.
As the bulk of the Reklaw material is found within a
sandy clay it might indicate some transportation of the
material took place prior to final disposition. When
bivales such as Chama, and Plicatula that prefer a hard
EoceNE MOLLuscs OF TEXAS: GARVIE
Faunal Abundance for Ridge Creek
and Taylor Branch as a Percent of
Total Fauna for all Habitats
= Ridge Creek
C] Taylor Branch
% Abundance
gray rae
= ey Srey
Habitat Type
Faunal Abundance at Ridge Creek
and Taylor Branch as a Percent of
Total Fauna for all Habitats
eae {J Ridge Creek
30 ; Bivalves
8 254
5 20 + Taylor Branch
5 45 Gastropods
3 |
)
anterior and posterior series of teeth are approximately
equal in length; apex of pallial sinus broadly U-shaped.
Remarks.—Palmer and Brann (1965), list seven spe-
cies from the Paleogene of the Gulf and East Coast of
the U.S. The subgenus appears to be uncommon in the
Claibornian of Texas with the exception of the Weches
Formation. It is widely distributed today.
Nuculana (Saccella) demissa, new species
Plate 1, figures 9-12
Description.—Shell very small, moderately inflated,
height about 58% of length, umbones central. Anterior
end smoothly rounded, posterior end rounded in young
shells, feebly rostrate and ending in a blunt point in
older ones. Lunule narrow, not well defined, escutch-
eon wider, bordered by a rounded ridge which ends at
a rostral point, and containing another ridge running
parallel to the margin for three-quarters of the length.
About 16 posterior and 12 anterior chevron-shaped
teeth. Surface smooth on the anterior third, ornament-
ed medially with low and rather large concentric
rounded folds which then become indistinct on the
posterior third of the shell.
Remarks.—This species is easily distinguished from
the only other similar Reklaw species Nuculana (Jup-
iteria) turgeo by its concentric folds. Larger specimens
show a shallow depression in front of the rostral ridge
running from the umbo to the ventral margin, while
on the posterior side a smooth radial ray is formed by
the cessation of the central folds. The comparatively
large folds concentrated in the middle third of N. (S.)
demissa can also distinguish this species from other
Paleogene species. In outline, Nuculana (Saccella) ca-
tasarca (Dall, 1898) from the Cook Mountain For-
mation of Wautubbee, Mississippi, approaches this
most closely although it is a very much more inflated
species. This species has only been found in the in-
durated ledge at the top of the formation. The species
may appear to be very small, and juvenile in aspect,
but several adult species figured by Moore (1983, pl.
2) are within 1—2 mm of the size of N. (S.) demissa.
Etymology.—Referring to the low and indistinct
character of the folds.
Type information.—Holotype: left valve, PRI
33070; paratype: left valve PRI 33071. Type locality:
locality 7.
Material examined.—Four specimens, the largest,
4.2 mm length, 2.5 mm height.
Genus LITORHADIA Stewart, 1930, p. 37
Type species.—Leda acala Dall, 1898, by original
designation. Bashi Formation, Sabine Group, Eocene
of Alabama.
Diagnosis.—Resilifer narrow, oblique; posterior end
24 BULLETIN 352
produced; sculpture smooth or concentric; lunule sunk-
en; ligamental pit wide; pallial sinus wide.
Remarks.—Gardner (1945), noted further the ab-
sence in Litorhadia of the posterior end double cari-
nation, and the obsolete or obtuse concentric sculpture
so sharply developed in the group typified by Calor-
hadia pharcida (Dall, 1898). The group is particularly
well developed in the Eocene of the Gulf Coast and is
abundant at most of the Cook Mountain Formation
localities in Texas. The genus ranges from the Eocene
into the Miocene.
Litorhadia milamensis, new species
Plate 1, figures 5—8
Description.—Shell small, elongate, height 47-57%
of length, umbones at 39-45% of length, inflation
moderate at 25—43% of height. Anterior end smoothly
rounded, posterior end produced and rostrate, the ros-
trum obliquely truncate. Umbones opisthogyrate, the
dorsal margin from the umbones to the anterior end
straight to feebly medially angulated, escutcheon and
lunule long, the lunule bounded by a rounded angu-
lation and bisected by a sharp ridge. Posterior portion
of the valve bounded by two further rostral ridges. The
inner surface of the valve with a rounded ridge, par-
allel to the dorsal margin and terminating in a prom-
inent knob under the rostrum. Umbones with very fine
concentric sculpture which disappear after about 1 mm
and then reappear again more prominently with about
ten undulations per mm.
Remarks.—This species can be distinguished from
the other Reklaw species by the fine regular folds and
narrow interstices. Gardner (1927), described the spe-
cies Leda atakta from the Weches Formation at Smith-
ville, referred to Saccella by Palmer and Brann (1966),
and which shares many points of similarity with Li-
torhadia milamensis. This species appears to be the
direct descendant of L. milamensis and is separated
from it by its shorter, plumper form and larger flat and
smooth inter-rostral area.
Etymology.—tThe specific name milamensis refers to
Milam County.
Type information.—Holotype: right valve, PRI
30265; paratypes: left valve, PRI 30266, juvenile left
valve, PRI 30267. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—20 specimens: the largest 6.7
mm length, 3.4 mm height, 1.3 mm width. Mean ra-
tios: height/length .52, width/height .34, umbones/
length .44.
Litorhadia undulata, new species
Plate 2, figures 1—4
Description.—This species, which has a generally
similar outline to N. (J.) turgeo n. sp., can be distin-
guished by its more rostrate outline, the surface or-
namentation of low rounded folds which become
sharper towards the ventral margin and interstices wid-
er than the folds. The folds die out irregularly towards
the anterior end and sharply before a concave area pre-
ceding the first ventral ray.
Remarks.—This is the most common of the Reklaw
Litorhadia species. Imprints referrable to this species
have also been found in the ironstones of Wolf Den
branch of Mud Creek, Robertson County, and Three
Mile Creek in Milam County, Texas. The external or-
namentation is so strikingly similar to those of Nucu-
lana jewetti (Gardner, 1927) from the Weches For-
mation (not Cook Mountain Formation as given by
Palmer and Brann, 1965, p. 219), that this species is
undoubtably the precursor of Gardner’s species. N.
Jewetti is shorter, lacks the concave area preceding the
rostral ray and has a flat posterior ventral margin, not
concave as in Nuculana milamensis. The folds of L.
undulata vary quite considerably in size and at one
extreme, approach the size of those of L. milamensis.
The distinguishing feature is that the folds of L. un-
dulata are the same size at all stages of growth while
in L. milamensis the folds increase slowly in size with
increasing growth. Worn specimens from Ridge Creek
in Bastrop County possess the same outline as typical
L. undulata from the type locality, although the surface
ornamentation is finer and more effaced. None how-
ever has the fine regular pattern of L. milamensis.
Etymology.—The specific name undulata (Latin,
wavy) refers to the prominent surface undulations.
Type information.—Holotype: left valve, PRI
30268; paratype, right valve: PRI 30269. Type local-
ity: locality 20.
Material examined.—90 specimens: the largest 8.3
mm length, 4.6 mm height, 1.0 mm width. Mean ra-
tios: height/length .55, width/height .22, umbones/
length .44.
Litorhadia valdefragilis, new species
Plate 2, figures 5—8
Description.—Shell very small, inflated, elongate,
height 43-50% of length, umbones anterior at 35—40%
of length. Outline of dorsal margin from umbo to tip
of rostrum curved. Posterior rostral rays defined by
two smooth diverging lines, the anterior ray defined
by a slight swelling on the surface. Adult specimens
have the anterior margin of the rostrum thickened into
an elongate boss which projects into the interior past
the hinge line. Resilium small and recessed. Lunule
very feebly defined to absent, escutcheon long and lan-
ceolate. Sculpture of well-defined rather widely-
spaced, raised, concentric lines, the interstices with ex-
ceedingly fine lines of growth. The concentric lines are
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE
obsolescent before the anterior ray, and on the poste-
rior end before the first rostral ray; the lines of growth
continue undiminished in character over the rays.
Remarks.—The fine evenly-spaced concentric lines
and the smooth rostral rays immediately distinguish
this species from Litorhadia undulata and Litorhadia
turgeo. The closest described relative is probably Li-
torhadia? bastropensis (Harris, 1895a) from the Wech-
es Formation; L. bastropensis has concentric lines with
wider interstices. . The species is more common than
the recovered number of specimens would indicate but
the extreme fragility of the shells accounts for its ap-
parent rarity. The fine sculpture sets this species apart
from known Nuculanidae of the Eocene of the Gulf
Coast. I have found a similar, although smoother spe-
cies in the Stone City Member that appears to be the
descendant of L. valdefragilis. Even though the larger
specimens of L. valdefragilis are still very small, they
do not appear to be juveniles. Adult specimens of Ca-
lorhadia and Litorhadia are more elongated than the
juvenile ones, because the rostrum in the adult speci-
mens is much more developed. Specimens of L. val-
defragilis greater than 2 mm in length have essentially
the same proportions, suggesting they have reached
their adult proportions.
Etymology.—The specific name valde (Latin, very
much), fragilis (Latin, easily broken), refers to that
feature of the shell.
Type information.—Holotype: left valve, PRI
30270, right valve, PRI 30296. Type locality: locality 5.
Material examined.—19 specimens, the largest 4.0
mm length, 2.0 mm height.
Litorhadia sp.
Plate 1, figure 17
Remarks.—Two specimens were obtained of a Li-
torhadia which is quite distinct. It possesses folds of
the type found in Litorhadia milamensis but only over
the anterior quarter of the shell, the rest of the surface
being smooth with indistinct irregular undulations. The
specimens are cemented in a block of matrix so the
interior cannot be observed.
Figured specimen: A left valve, PRI 30552, from
locality 12.
Material examined.—2 specimens, the largest 7.2
mm length.
Genus ORTHOYOLDIA Verril and Bush,
1897, p. 55
Type species.—Yoldia scapina Dall, 1889b, by orig-
inal designation. Recent off the Brazilian coast.
Original diagnosis.—*‘Shell oblong, gaping, blunt
or rounded at both ends, without distinct rostrum; no
carina. Pallial sinus large and broad. Teeth numerous
tO
nN
in both series. O. scapina [error for scapinia] (Dall)
from off Brazil, and O. salenoides (Dall), from the
West Indies.” (Verril and Bush, 1897, p. 55).
Remarks.—A reasonably common genus in the
more unctuous shales of the Cook Mountain Forma-
tion, and Stone City Member beds of Texas, but dif-
ficult to collect due to their fragility. The genus is
known from the Eocene onwards. Recent species are
deposit feeders and primarily boreal in their distribu-
tion.
Orthoyoldia psammotaea vivianensis
(Harris, 1919)
Plate 2, figures 9-10
Yoldia psammotaea var. vivianensis Harris, 1919, p. 73, pl. 25, fig
SF
Orthoyoldia psammotaea vivianensis (Harris). Stenzel, Krause and
Twining, 1957, p. 55.
Original diagnosis.—**... The variety “‘vivianen-
sis” has much more prominent beaks and stronger
sculpture than psammotaea. .. .”” (Harris, 1919, p. 73).
Remarks.—The Reklaw specimens have about 22
anterior and 20 posterior teeth, compressed and chev-
ron-shaped near the beaks and becoming spatulate and
compressed parallel to the hinge towards the posterior
end. Resilifer deep, widely triangular and set back be-
neath the hinge line. Surface sculpture of concentric
lirations, 12-14 per mm., strong medially and indis-
tinct at each end. The subspecies is only known from
the Reklaw Formation in Texas and Louisiana.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 4231, an exter-
nal mold in ironstone showing the shape and some
details of the sculpture. Type Locality: Reklaw For-
mation of Vivian, Caddo Parish, Louisiana. Figured
specimen: PRI 30271, from locality 20.
Material examined.—12 specimens, the largest:
11.5 mm length, 5.5 mm height, 1.0 mm width, um-
bones/length .41.
Subclass PTERIOMORPHIA Beurlen, 1944, p. 144
Order ARCOIDA Stoliczka, 1871, p. xx
Superfamily ARCOIDEA Lamarck, 1809, p. 318
Family ARCIDAE Lamarck, 1809, p. 318
Subfamily ARCINAE Lamarck, 1809, p. 318
Genus BARBATIA Gray, 1840, p. 81
Type species.—Arca barbata Linnaeus, 1758, by
subsequent designation (Gray, 1847a, p. 197). Recent
in the Mediterranean.
Diagnosis.—Shell usually moderate to large in size,
somewhat irregular in outline; moderately inflated; an-
terior end rounded, posterior end rounded or angulated
with a keel; posterior slope rounded; byssal gape
26 BULLETIN 352
small. Sculpture usually of beaded radial ribs. Umbo-
nes anterior. Cardinal area narrow with five or more
chevron-shaped ligament grooves; hinge straight;
hinge teeth continuous in the young, separated by an
edentulous gap in the adult. Ventral valve margin fine-
ly crenulated. Periostracum hairy.
Remarks.—Recent species are suspension feeders,
most abundant in warmer seas ranging from the inter-
tidal zone to abyssal depths; shallow water represen-
tatives are usually attached by a byssus. The genus
ranges from the Jurassic to Recent.
Subgenus ACAR Gray, 1857, p. 369
Type species.—Arca gradata Broderip and Sowerby,
1829, by subsequent designation (Woodring, 1925, p.
37). Recent off the coast of Mexico and Central Amer-
ica.
Original diagnosis.—**Shell small to medium sized,
trapezoidal in outline, posterior end keeled; byssal
gape narrow; sculpture coarsely reticulate and imbri-
cate; ligament area rhombohedral and for the most part
opisthodetic; teeth like those of Barbatia s.s. but the
anterior series is larger’’ (Gray, 1857, p. 369).
Remarks.—The genus is known from the Paleocene
to Recent. Living members of this subgenus are re-
stricted to tropical and subtropical waters. Palmer and
Brann (1966), note only two in the Paleogene of the
Gulf Coast.
Barbatia (Acar) salebrosus, new species
Plate 2, figures 11—12
Description.—Shell elongate, medium in size,
height 23% of length, umbones anterior at 26% of
length, flattened and slightly inrolled behind the hinge
line. Hinge straight with six anterior and ten posterior
teeth. Anterior dorsal margin rounded, ventral margin
sinuous, concave medially and anteriorly, gape shal-
low, posteriorly regularly rounded. Sculpture of thick
concentric very regular foliations, covered by radiating
costae which are thickened and upturned at the end of
the foliations. Posterior umbonal region delimited by
a slightly thickened line of nodular costae. Umbonal
slope sculpture of hook-shaped downturned costae, the
entire surface additionally covered with raised lines
forming a granular effect. Interior with low radial and
concentric undulations corresponding to the external
sculpture. Adductor muscle scars elliptical and elevat-
ed, edge flattened and crenate.
Remarks.—Only one species referable to section
Acar is reported from the Gulf Coast, viz. Barbatia
(Acar) aspera (Conrad in Wailes, 1854); that species
ranges from the Middle Eocene Weches Formation
through the Upper Eocene Jackson Group. The present
species seems to be the precursor of B. (A.) aspera,
but differs enough to warrant separation from it. B.
(A.) aspera has a sharper umbonal ridge with a very
noded summit, a concave post umbonal area, and little
or no medial depressed area. A possible antecedent is
a variety of Barbatia cuculloides (Conrad, 1833a)
found at Bell’s Landing, which has a somewhat similar
although weaker sculpture, is more regular and has a
weaker umbonal ridge than the Reklaw specimens.
Etymology.—The specific name salebrosus (Latin,
roughness), refers to the rough external sculpture.
Type information.—Holotype: a right valve, PRI
30272, 14.2 mm in length. Type locality: locality 15.
Material examined.—Two specimens, the largest
19.0 mm length, 10.0 mm height (estimated), 6.0 mm
width. Two further fragments were also obtained.
Subgenus CUCULLAEARCA Conrad, 1865a, p. 11
Type species.—Byssoarca lima Conrad, 1847, by
subsequent designation (Stoliczka, 1871, p. 340).
Lower Oligocene, Vicksburg Group, of Mississippi..
Diagnosis.—Elongate to obliquely subquadrate,
subequal but generally much distorted, ventral valve
margin deeply sinuated by a large byssal gape: cardi-
nal area high, amphidetic; sculpture formed by fine to
coarse subequal costae; hinge long, straight, teeth in
continuous series in young, in adults divided in the
middle by large gape, distal teeth conspicuously larger
and oblique.
Remarks.—The subgenus ranges from the Upper
Cretaceous to Recent. Living members of the subgenus
live in warm seas.
Barbatia (Cucullaearca) reklawensis, new species
Plate 2, figures 13—14
Description.—Shell medium in size, height 60% of
length, width 33% of height, umbones anterior at about
29% of length. Shape obliquely rhombohedral, larger
posteriorly. Anterior end obliquely truncate at the ven-
tral margin, rounded medially and truncate at the in-
tersection with the straight hinge line. Posterior end
rounded to produced medially. Posterior keel not no-
ticeable, ventral margin concave at both ends, convex
in the middle at the byssal gape. Sculpture consists of
coarse concentric growth-resting stages crossed over
by numerous ribs which on the umbo tend to bifurcate,
wider on the posterior end, fine medially and some-
what larger again anteroventrally. Posterior umbonal
region sharply delimited by one larger coarsely foli-
ated rib, the sculpture more subdued on the umbonal
slope than on the rest of the shell.
Remarks.—The holotype is 36 mm long, 22 mm in
width and 8 mm height; four juvenile specimens were
also recovered, the largest 19 mm in length. Height/
length, width/height and umbones/length ratios were
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE Dil
within 10% of each other for all specimens. This spe-
cies differs from Barbatia uxoripalmeri Stenzel and
Krause, 1957, in its flatter and more rhombohedral
shape, the straight hinge line and the more subdued
ornamentation. The coarse rib separating the concave
umbonal slope from the rest of the sculpture is very
reminiscent of genus Arca and this species has some
characteristics of both genera. Juvenile specimens
show little trace of the expanded umbonal rib, the ar-
eas delimited instead by a sharper angular change in
the shell. One specimen was also found in the Newby
member in Cherokee County, at locality 25.
Etymology.—The specific name reklawensis refers
to the formation.
Type information.—Holotype: a right valve, PRI
30273; paratype: a juvenile left valve: PRI 30274.
Type locality: locality 15. Paratype from locality 20.
Material examined.—14 specimens, the largest:
36.0 mm length, 22.0 mm height, 8.0 mm width, 10.0
mm umbonal length. Mean ratios: height/length .59,
width/height .35, umbones/length .29.
Barbatia sp.
Plate 2, figure 15
Description.—One specimen obtained, in hard sand-
stone, of a Barbatia species whose rhomboidal outline
is similar to that of Barbatia rhomboidella subscopula
(Harris, 1919) from the Lisbon Formation. The spec-
imen is very finely ribbed with 54 ribs, those on the
medial and posterior area bifid.
Type information.—Figured specimen: PRI 30305,
from locality 8, length:13.5 mm.
Genus BATHYARCA Kobelt, 1891, p. 213-214
Type species.—Arca pectunculoides Scacchi, 1834
by original designation. Recent in European Seas.
Diagnosis.—Shell minute, subglobose, inequivalve,
left valve larger than right. Posterior carina obscure or
lacking. Sculpture of radial costellae and concentric
threads, slightly different on each valve. Ligament area
narrow, hinge line straight, teeth short and oblique,
posterior and anterior series separated by an edentu-
lous gap. Margin of valve faintly fluted.
Remarks.—The genus ranges from the Eocene to
recent with the living species confined to relatively
deep water. All but a very few species are minute in
size.
Bathyarca claibornica, new species
Plate 3, figures 1—4
Description.—Shell very small, asymmetrical, to
3.5 mm in length, highly inflated, hinge line about
80% of maximum length. Sculpture of fine radial gent-
ly rounded costae, the intercostal area with a fine sharp
radial line; overriding the radial sculpture are fine con-
centric lines which bend towards the umbo as they
cross over the costae, stronger over the area which is
transitional to the weak umbonal slope; sculpture of
the left valve slightly more prominent than the right.
Cardinal area under the umbones margined by a
smoothly curved line; ligament preserved as a small
asymmetrical high triangle, the base of which defines
the edentulous portion of the hinge line. Teeth eight
or nine in number on the anterior side and six on the
posterior side. Inner margin of valves coarsely crenate.
Remarks.—This species is unique in the American
Eocene, the oldest previously described form being
Bathyarca hendersoni (Dall, 1898) from the Bowden
beds in Jamaica. The largest specimen, unfortunately
broken after collection, was 3.5 mm in length. All re-
maining specimens are 2 mm or less in size. Cossmann
suggested that Arca lissa Bayan, 1873, from the Lu-
tetian of the Paris Basin was an ancestral Eocene Bath-
yarca; the Reklaw species is much closer to the ho-
lotype than that species.
Etymology.—The name notes the first occurrence of
this genus in the American Claibornian.
Type information.—Holotype: a left valve, PRI
30275; paratype: a right valve, PRI 30276. Type lo-
cality: locality 20.
Material examined.—17 specimens. Maximum
length, 3mm. Mean ratios: height/length .8, width/
height .44, umbones/length .67.
Family NOETIDAE Stewart, 1930, p. 78
Subfamily TRINACRIINAE MacNeal, 1937, p. 458
Genus PACHECOA Harris, 1919, p. 46
Type species.—Trinacria (Pachecoa) cainei Harris,
1919, by monotypy. Middle Eocene, McBean Forma-
tion of Orangeburg, South Carolina.
Diagnosis.—Shell small, moderately to strongly in-
flated; oval, trigonal or cunate-rectangular, not gaping.
Umbones median or closely so, opisthogyrate. Ante-
rior smoothly rounded, posterior usually angular, ros-
tral ridge well developed. Lunule not present, escutch-
eon very narrow. Hinge arcuate, anterior series of teeth
usually slightly longer than the posterior set. Cardinal
area small and elongate-triangular, situated entirely be-
hind beaks, ligamental area elongate, oblique and an-
terior to beak. Sculpture of low concentric ribs and
close-spaced radial ribs. Inner margins crenate or
smooth.
Remarks.—Stenzel et al. (1957, pp. 61—65) give a
detailed discussion on the validity of the name Pache-
coa. The genus is restricted to the Eocene of the Gulf
and Atlantic Coasts.
28 BULLETIN 352
Pachecoa concentrica, new species
Plate 3, figures 7—10
Description.—Shell small, to about 4 mm in length,
moderately inflated, cuneate-rectangular, umbones
slightly anterior. Anterior and ventral margin smoothly
rounded, posterior-dorsal margin nearly straight. Um-
bonal ridge rounded, the umbonal area flat towards the
dorsal margin. Anterior teeth seven, posterior series
five or six. Sculpture of low somewhat irregularly
spaced concentric rounded ribs, radial sculpture almost
entirely obsolescent, defined principally by a micro-
scopic wrinkling on the margins of the ribs, slightly
stronger on the umbonal slope. Inner margins of valves
smooth.
Remarks.—This species is smaller than other spe-
cies of Pachecoa and differentiated further by the ob-
solete radial sculpture and smooth inner margins of the
valves. It appears to be the ancestor of Pachecoa sa-
binica (Harris, 1919), a higher and more triangular
species with well defined radial and concentric sculp-
ture and crenate valve margins. Both Lower Eocene
representatives of this genus, Pachecoa decisa (Con-
rad, 1833b) “var.” Clark and Martin, 1901, and Pa-
checoa microcancellata (Barry, 1942), have smooth
inner valve margins. Another species from the same
time interval is the Tallahatta species Pachecoa (Pa-
checoa) catonis Stenzel and Twining, 1957, from Al-
abama; this species is larger, has about twice the num-
ber of hinge teeth and has both radial and concentric
threads generating a reticulate pattern on the main part
of the disc.
Etymology.—The name concentrica notes the dom-
inant character of the sculpture.
Type information.—Holotype: a left valve, PRI
30277; paratypes: PRI 30278, 30279. Type locality:
locality 20.
Material examined.—23 specimens, the largest: 4.1
mm length, 3.1 mm height, 1.0 mm width. Mean ra-
tios: height/length .76, width/height .32, umbones/
length .41
Superfamily LIMOPSOIDEA Dall, 1895, p. 517
Family GLYCYMERIDIDAE Newton, 1922, p. 72
Subfamily GLYCYMERIDINAE Newton,
1922" pe ie
Genus GLYCYMERIS da Costa, 1778, p. 168
Type species.—Glycymeris orbicularis da Costa,
1778, by original designation. Recent, widely distrib-
uted in shallower waters of warm and temperate seas.
Diagnosis.—Shell heavy, equivalved, equilateral or
subequilateral, suborbicular. Beaks almost straight or
only very slightly incurved; hinge margin arcuate with
two series of transverse teeth; ligament amphidetic.
Exterior surface of valves concentrically or radially
striate; valve margins crenulate; adductor scars almost
equal.
Remarks.—Members of the genus are cosmopolitan
in distribution and range from the Lower Cretaceous
to Recent. Recent species are suspension feeders and
often well adapted to life in a shell hash or gravel
bottom environment.
Glycymeris sp.
Plate 3, figures 5, 6
Description.—Shell small, 6 mm., orbicular and
dorsally very slightly trigonal. Beak very feebly pro-
sogyrate, ligamental area small, at about 23% of
length, triangular, with a few chevron-shaped grooves.
Hinge highly arcuate with about eight teeth on either
side. Outer surface very worn but still showing fine
closely spaced radial lines.
Remarks.—The only complete valve obtained is ap-
parently a left one but is very worn and is therefore
not named specifically. The closest relative would
seem to be Glycymeris trigonella (Conrad, 1833c)
from the Gosport Sand of Alabama, a species of the
same size but with a more circular outline.
Figured specimen: PRI 30280, from locality 20.
Material examined.—One specimen: 6.5 mm length,
6.5 mm height, 1.9 mm width.
Order MYTILOIDA Feérussac, 1822, p. xvii
Superfamily MYTILOIDEA Rafinesque,
1815, p. 147
Family MYTILIDAE Rafinesque, 1815, p. 147
Subfamily MYTILINAE Rafinesque, 1815, p. 147
Genus MYTILUS Linnaeus, 1758, p. 704
Type species.—Mytilus edulis Gray, 1847a, by orig-
inal designation. Recent in the North Atlantic.
Diagnosis.—Shell mytiliform, beaks terminal, lu-
nule with radiating folds forming dysodont teeth on
the anterior margin. Anterior retractor scar elongate,
behind the umbo, anterior adductor small but distinct;
margin not crenulate. Surface smooth or with radial
ribs which are not bent in the dorsal direction.
Remarks.—The genus is known from the Upper Ju-
rassic to Recent, and is cosmopolitan in distribution.
The preferred habit of living members is colonial, at-
tached with a byssus to rocks and seaweeds.
Subgenus CRENOMYTILUS Soot-Ryan,
19555) p23
Type species.—Mytilus grayanus Dunker, 1853, by
original designation. Recent in the Indo-Pacific.
Diagnosis.—**Shell mytiliform with terminal um-
bones, lunule grooved and incurved, forming two or
EocENE MOo.Ltuscs OF TEXAS: GARVIE 29
three large teeth usually obsolete in old specimens.
Margins finely crenulated. Shell obliquely striated, es-
pecially distinct on the ventral surface. Resilial ridge
compact; anterior adductor strong, showing a distinct
thickened scar; anterior retractor scar elongate behind
umbo; posterior adductor and retractor scars continu-
ous.”’ (Soot-Ryan, 1955, p. 23).
Remarks.—Several species are known from the Oli-
gocene to Pliocene of the west coast of America. Only
one recent species is known, Crenomytilus grayanus
(Dunker, 1853), from the Philippines.
Mytilus (Crenomytilus) sp.
Plate 3, figures 13, 14
Description.—Shell moderate in size, smooth,
brown in color. Dorsal area above the line defining the
position of maximum inflation with faint radial lines,
the remainder smooth except for lines of growth and
shell thickenings which reflect growth resting stages.
Margin of the valves minutely crenulated except near
the umbo where a few larger teeth occur. Ligament a
thin groove under the teeth on the anterior-ventral mar-
gin.
Remarks.—Mytilidae are not common in the Gulf
Coast Eocene, only one species, Hormomya hamato-
ides Call, 1891, being described so far. The present
species fits readily in Crenomytilus with the crenate
edge and compact linear ligament area. Another spe-
cies with crenate valve margins that may be superfi-
cially confused with a juvenile M. (Crenomytilus) sp.
is Crenella isocardioides (Lea, 1833). This species is
much smaller, thicker-shelled, lacks terminal umbones,
and has typically one weak, projecting cardinal tooth.
Figured specimen.—A double valve, PRI 30281,
from locality 4.
Material examined.—One partially crushed double
valve specimen, 9 mm length.
Subfamily CRENELLINAE H. and A. Adams,
1857, p. 514
Genus GREGARIELLA Monterosato, 1883, p. 90
Type species.—Modiolus sulcatus Risso, 1826, by
original designation. Recent from the Mediterranean.
Diagnosis.—Elongate species with anterior umbo-
nes, straight dorsal margin, angulated umbonal keel
separating a coarsely sculptured dorsal part from a
smoother ventral part. Radially striate or decussate an-
teriorly or posteriorly where the posterior striae end
along an oblique line. Hinge with dysodont teeth both
anteriorly and posteriorly, valve margins dorsally fine-
ly crenulate. Periostracum hairy with bifurcating hairs.
Remarks.—Members of this genus reportedly live in
burrows in shell and coral. The genus is known from
the Eocene to Recent.
Gregariella ridgei, new species
Plate 3, figures 11, 12
Description.—Shell very small, elongate rounded-
subrectangular, dorsal side almost straight, ventrally
with a shallow sinus, translucent brown in color, the
prodissoconch whitish and sharply defined from the
teleoconch. Sculpture of bifurcating radial lines cov-
ering the surface from the dorsal margin, to below the
umbonal angulation, there covering about one quarter
of the ventral slope. Radial lines overriden by incre-
mental co-marginal growth lines and occasional un-
dulations, stronger on the dorsal slope, there forming
a latticed pattern. A few weak radial lines are seen
again on the smooth ventral slope in the immediate
neighborhood of the umbo. On the ventral slope the
radial striae end in an irregular, more or less oblique
line. Resilium elongate, relatively large, posteriorly
with four or five larger teeth, anteriorly and beneath
the umbo three larger teeth and a few smaller ones.
Valve margins crenulate except above the resilium.
Anterior muscle scar compressed-elliptical, the end sit-
uated directly under the beak, posterior scar bean-
shaped and very indistinct.
Remarks.—This species is similar to Gregariella ar-
caforma H. E. Vokes, 1986, a species from the Mio-
cene Chipola Formation of Florida. The Chipola spe-
cies is two to three times the size, more modioliform
and more evenly rounded at the anterior end than G.
ridgei. This is the earliest report of the genus in Amer-
ica. Glibert and van de Poel (1965, p. 80), who treat
Gregariella as a subgenus of Musculus, list three spe-
cies from the Eocene of the Paris Basin. Of the three,
only one as presently understood could be assigned to
Gregariella, the Lutetian species Gregariella arcae-
formis Cossmann, 1887.
Etymology.—Notes the locality, Ridge Creek, where
the specimens were found.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 33072, a left
valve, length 5.2 mm, height 2.8 mm, thickness 1.8
mm, paratype: PRI 33073, a right valve. Type locality:
locality 4.
Material examined.—Three specimens.
Superfamily PINNOIDEA Leach, 1819, p. 329
Family PINNIDAE Leach, 1819, p. 329
Genus ATRINA Gray, 1842, p. 83
Type species.—Pinna nigra Dillwyn, 1817, by sub-
sequent designation (Gray, 1847a, p. 199). Recent in
the Red Sea and Arabian Gulf.
Diagnosis.—Cuneiform or ham-shaped anisomyari-
an clams with large posterior adductor and a small or
no anterior adductor. Shell large, broad, fragile, gaping
posteriorly. Ligament in narrow groove extending the
30 BULLETIN 352
whole length of the hinge margin. Shell structure is
internally nacreous to about two-thirds or three-quar-
ters of the length, not divided by an internal sulcus,
and externally with a prismatic layer of large calcite
crystals at right angles to the surface.
Remarks.—tThe closely similar genus Pinna is dis-
tinguished from Arrina by its straight wedge shape and
the division of the nacreous shell layer by a longitu-
dinal sulcus. The clams live upright in sand or mud
with the apical end attached by the byssus to a sub-
strate. The genus is known from the Middle Jurassic
to Recent.
Atrina? sp.
Plate 3, figures 15, 16
Remarks.—Five small fragments and one fairly
complete valve were obtained. The smaller fragments
are all from areas near the beak and show that near
that point the shell must have been diamond-shaped in
cross-section. Outline pinnate with one straight hinge
margin and one sinuous margin. The large specimen
shows a well-defined nacreous layer extending from
the beak as a rounded lobe occupying about three-
fifths the length of the shell. Anterior ventral slope and
accessory carinal area with straight radial ribs, anterior
dorsal slope with obsolete radial sculpture, from the
dorsal carina originate numerous curved diverging
ribs; these meet the ventral ribs in a narrow area near
the ventral carina and generate a complex cross-hatch
pattern. Distant from the beaks, sculpture of long ir-
regularly sinuous rounded ribs. The diamond-shaped
cross-section can separate this species from Atrina
gravida (Harris, 1919) and Atrina cawcawensis (Har-
ris, 1919), both from the Cook Mountain Formation.
Reference locality: Locality 20.
Material examined.—One fairly complete specimen,
55 mm in length; numerous fragments.
Figured specimens: Beak fragment: PRI 30548;
specimen on matrix: PRI 30549.
Superfamily PTERIDOIDEA Gray, 1847a, p. 199
Family PTERITDAE Gray, 1847a, p. 199
Genus PTERIA Scopoli, 1777, p. 397
Type species.—Mytilus hirando Linnaeus, 1758, by
monotypy. Recent off the coast of England and south-
ward through the Mediterranean.
Diagnosis.—Shell nacreous, inequivalve, auriculate,
the left valve more inflated. Anterior auricle compar-
atively small, the posterior one ailiform. Exterior sur-
face almost smooth; umbones low and sharp, hinge
line straight. A single cardinal tooth under the umbo-
nes of each valve; one lateral tooth sometimes present.
Remarks.—The genus is known from the Triassic
onwards. Recent members of the genus are found
mainly in tropical and subtropical seas. Preria frag-
ments are common in the Claiborne outcrops in Texas
but entire valves are rarely found due to their fragility.
The type of the genus is characterized by a long ex-
tended posterior auricle, weak to inconspicuous den-
tition and a smooth surface. Harris and Palmer (1946,
pp. 36—37) briefly characterized three sections for liv-
ing Pteria but did not formally designate them. Only
Pteria s.s. has been reported from the Tertiary of the
Gulf Coast.
Pteria petropolitana, Stenzel and Twining, 1957
Plate 4, figures 1, 2
Pteria (Pteria) petropolitana Stenzel and Twining, in Stenzel,
Krause and Twining, 1957, p. 81, 7, figs. 14-6, text fig. 12;
Knight, Hodgkinson, Knight, Reid, Lindveit, Lindveit, and Offe-
man) 1977, pp. 12, 20.
Original description.—‘‘Right valve thin, nacreous,
small (to 16 mm long). oblique (axis of disk making
an angle of about 43 degrees with the dorsal margin;
. moderately inflated. Umbones very small, anterior
(at about 0.21 of height). Byssal notch small, shallow,
and obtuse. Ventral margin broadly and smoothly ar-
cuate, posterior margin sigmoid, descending below the
posterior auricle at an angle of 76°. Dorsal margin long
and straight. Anterior ear broken, probably angular,
posterior ear long, produced into a narrow, pointed
wing extending well beyond the posterior end of the
disk. Ligament area long, exceedingly narrow. Tooth-
like swellings small, inconspicuous. Sculpture of ob-
scure concentric growth wrinkles only.”’ (Stenzel and
Twining, in Stenzel et al., 1957, p. 81).
Remarks.—None of the Reklaw specimens recov-
ered has the posterior auricle present but this is prob-
ably due to poor preservation. The present species has
the angle between the axis of the disc and the dorsal
margin extremity equal to that of P. petropolitana and
also has the very long ligamental area of that species.
The latter feature differentiates P. petropolitana from
other Tertiary species of the Gulf and Atlantic coastal
plain.
Figured specimens.—Left valve (in matrix), PRI
30282; right valve, PRI 30283; from locality 7.
Material examined.—14 specimens, the largest:
26.2 mm in length, 16.7 mm height.
Pteria sp.
Remarks.—One specimen appears different from P.
petropolitana in possessing a semi-quadrate disc shape
and a smaller anterior auricle. No posterior auricle is
present, and although it may be a worn specimen an
examination of the growth lines near the dorsal margin
shows no indication of the change in angle that would
EOcENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 31
imply one was originally present. The specimen is on
the surface of a block of matrix and without an ex-
amination of the interior it will not be named here.
Order PTEROIDIA Newell, 1965, p. 17
Suborder PTERIINA Newell, 1965, p. 17
Superfamily PECTINOIDEA Rafinesque,
1815, p. 148
Family PROPEAMUSSIIDAE Waller, 1972, p. 249
Genus AMUSIUM (Bolton) Roeding, 1798, p. 165
Type species.—Ostrea pleuronectes Linnaeus, 1758,
by subsequent designation (Hermannsen, 1846, p. 47).
Recent in the Indo-Pacific.
Diagnosis.—Shell usually large, thin, suborbicular,
slightly inflated, right valve slightly more so than the
left; radial sculpture absent on the exterior; auricles
subequal; byssal notch small, chondrophore moderate-
ly large, shallow and flanked by two cardinal crurae.
Interior with narrow ribs not extending to the ventral
margin.
Remarks.—Recent members are carnivores, living
on small crustaceans in mud-bottom environments
(Knudson, 1967, p. 327-329). The genus is known
from the Cretaceous to Recent.
Subgenus PROPEAMUSIUM de Gregorio,
1884, p. 119
Type species.—Pectin (Propeamusium) ceciliae de
Gregorio, 1884, by original designation. Miocene of
Italy.
Diagnosis.—Valves rather flattened, thin, polished;
usually gaping along lateral margins; valves concen-
trically sculptured, left sometimes radially striated;
byssal notch slight to moderate; about nine internal
ribs which do not extend to the margin.
Remarks.—Only two species referable to Propea-
musium have been recovered from the Gulf Coast, and
one of them,—Amusium (Propeamusium) squamulum
(Lamarck, 1806), is a species originally described from
the Paris Basin. Most living members of the group are
widely distributed, small, and live in deep water.
Amusium (Propeamusium) zinguli, new species
Plate 4, figures 10, 11
Description.—Shell very small, ovate to 3.6 mm in
length, 3 mm width, slightly convex. Sculpture of
about 56 riblets crossed by fine concentric imbricated
threads, more widely spaced towards the valve mar-
gins. A few riblets tend to develop in the interstices
between the main ones. Interior with nine ribs extend-
ing almost towards the valve margins. Pallial sinus
large and rounded, extending almost to a line con-
necting the auricular margins.
Remarks.—A similar form and also of similar size
is Amusium (Propeamusium) alabamensis (Aldrich,
1886) from the Midway Group of Alabama. That spe-
cies has a few weak radial lines in the center of the
disc and on the anterior side of the shell. Tertiary
members of this group, even when adult, are typically
less than 15 mm in size.
Etymology.—This species is named in honor of pa-
leontologist Dr. Richard Zingula, formerly of Exxon
Corporation, Houston.
Type information.—Holotype: a left valve, PRI
30284; paratype: PRI 30285. Type locality: locality 4.
Material examined.—Seven specimens, the largest:
4.5 mm length, 4.3 mm height, 0.7 mm width. Mean
ratios: height/length .96, width/height .16, umbones
central.
Family PLICATULIDAE Watson, 1930, p. 29
Genus PLICATULA Lamarck, 1801, p. 132
Type species.—Spondylus plicatus Linnaeus, 1758,
by subsequent designation (Schmidt, 1818, p. 61). Re-
cent in the Indo-Pacific.
Diagnosis.—Shell inequivalve, flattened or slightly
convex, trigonal to subcircular, commonly irregular, at-
tached by umbone of right valve. Exterior surface gen-
erally plicate or foliate. Ligament internal, located in
a central cartilage pit between two large transversely
striate crurae; valve margins fluted.
Remarks.—Only a few species of Plicatula have been
described from the Tertiary of the coastal plain. At sev-
eral places in the Wheelock and Landrum Members of
the Cook Mountain Formation in Texas, Plicatula fila-
mentosa Conrad 1833a forms a shell bed to the exclusion
of almost all other species. Good exposures may be seen
in the lowest beds of the Wheelock Member on the
banks of the Little Brazos River near Bryan, and expo-
sures in the Landrum Member in the banks of Hurricane
Bayou near Crockett. Modern representatives are sus-
pension feeders and usually attached to rocks or other
hard substrate, primarily in warm tropical seas. The ge-
nus ranges from the Middle Triassic to Recent.
Plicatula pustula, new species
Plate 4, figs. 3, 4
Description.—Shell small to medium sized, the
largest specimen 26 mm. Shell form very irregular, in
juvenile specimens strongly tumid and with predomi-
nantly concentric growth lines; beyond a particular
growth stage of ca. 10 mm in size the shell flattens
out and the outer surface develops about eight to ten
very rough irregular radial lamellose costae. Resilium
pit small, crurae diverging in young specimens, mas-
sive, projecting, and tending to become parallel in
large ones. Adductor scar prominent, moderate in size,
32 BULLETIN 352
orbicular, and slightly posterior. In the largest speci-
mens the scar is elevated to a prominent projecting
boss. Interior valve margins obscurely crenulated.
Remarks.—The irregular character of the shell surface
is more reminiscent of the Ostreinae but the hinge char-
acters place it in the Plicatulidae. Plicatula? louisiana
Harris, 1946, Plicatula creola Allen, 1970 both from the
Moodys Branch Formation, and an undescribed form
from the Cook Mountain Formation in Texas, are other
species of this group having a similar early inflation, that
later flattens out. Most specimens are fragmentary or
worn, but a few specimens do show a minutely spinose
surface, a feature also seen on P. creola; the prominent
adductor scar and heavy hinge teeth can serve to distin-
guish P. pustula from that species. The common P. /fi-
lamentosa is a more regular and less inflated species.
Two specimens are attached over a large portion of the
exterior, a character typical of the Ostreidae, while Pli-
catula is usually attached by the umbones.
Etymology.—The specific name pustula (Latin, pim-
ple), refers to the prominent adductor scar in the shell’s
interior.
Type information.—Holotype: a right valve, PRI
30286; paratypes: PRI 30287, 30288. Type locality:
locality 20.
Material examined.—38 specimens, numerous frag-
ments. Dimensions of the largest: 24.0 mm length,
26.0 mm height, 8.0 mm width (including dentition).
Suborder OSTREINA Ferussac, 1822, p. xxxix
Superfamily OSTREOIDEA Rafinesque, 1815, p. 21
Family GRYPHAEIDAE Vyalov, 1936, p. 19
Subfamily PYCNODONTEINAE Stenzel,
9595 p: 6
Genus HYOTISSA Stenzel, 1971, p. N1107
Type species.—Mytilus hyotis, Linnaeus, 1758, by
original designation. Recent in the Indo-Pacific.
Remarks.—The genus ranges from the Late Creta-
ceous to Recent and is restricted to deeper waters of
the open sea where salinity and temperature stay with-
in a narrow range.
Hyotissa offemanae, new species
Plate 4, figures 5—9
Description.—Shell to about 6 cm long and high,
shape circular to moderately higher than long, rarely
falcate. Left valve moderately capacious, attachment
area 50% of valve area or more. Shell commissure
strongly plicate, plicae rounded to sharp-topped, not
divaricate; occasional scale-like extensions on ribs. In-
terior with oval attachment scar, higher than long. Re-
silifer large, tip curved to the left, set at angle of about
60° to valve margins. Chroma long, often occupying
more than 50% of the valve margins. Right valve con-
centrically imbricate, sometimes with low radial pli-
cations, commissure not plicate. Exterior of both
valves prominently vesiculate where worn.
Remarks.—Stenzel (1953, p. 75-76) noted a marine
faunule in the Newby Member of the Reklaw For-
mation containing a deep water pycnodont oyster. The
locality was visited in 1988 and found to be very
weathered, but H. offemanae could still be collected
where it outcrops on several indurated ironstone/clay
ledges. In the Marquez Member at Joe Taylor Branch
and Ridge Creek, juvenile specimens of a pycnodont
occur, recognizable by the vesicular shell structure, but
they are too small to assign confidently to H. offe-
manae. The subfamily occurs very rarely in the Clai-
borne and is only represented by one described species
Pycnodonte (Pycnodonte) trigonalis (Conrad in Wai-
les, 1854). Palmer and Brann (1966) assigned it to
Gigantostrea but the vesicular shell structure indicates
the assignment is in error. In the Claiborne Group, the
author only knows of two other Pycnodonte specimens
of a new species from the Wheelock Member. The
closest described species is Ostrea tacalensis Hodson,
1927, from the Eocene/Oligocene of Venezuela, which
is a more elongate species with a smaller attachment
area than P. offemanae. A somewhat similarly sculp-
tured species is Ostrea crenulimarginata Gabb, 1860,
from the Clayton Formation of Alabama and the Kin-
caid Formation of Texas; this species is more elongate
and lacks the radial plications on the upper valve. The
absence of the vesicular shell structure in O. crenuli-
marginata also precludes placement in the pycnodont
group of oysters.
Etymology.—Honoring Irene Offeman, one of the
founding members of the Paleontology Section of the
Houston Gem and Mineral Society whose enthusiasm
and dedication to paleontology has inspired the Socie-
ty’s members.
Type information.—Holotype: a left valve, PRI
30554; paratypes: PRI 30555, 30556. Type locality:
locality 25.
Material examined.—30 more or less fragmentary
specimen, the largest 65 mm length.
Subclass HETERODONTA Neumayr, 1883, p. 5
Order VENEROIDA H. and A. Adams,
1858, p. 347
Superfamily LUCINOIDEA Anton, 1839, p. 6
Family LUCINIDAE Fleming, 1828, p. 409
Subfamily MILTHINAE Chavan, 1969, p. [S01
Genus ANODONTIA Link, 1807, p. 156
Type species.—Anodontia alba Link, 1807, by
monotypy. Recent in the West Indies.
EocENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 3
Diagnosis.—*‘Shell of large to very large size, thin,
longer than high, strongly inflated, anterior expansion
small or moderate. Surface sculpture concentric, fine
to distinct, with irregularly spaced growth rings; dorsal
areas faint to distinct. Lunule long, shallow, variable
in shape. Ligament external or slightly inset. Anterior
adductor scar variable in shape and position; posterior
adductor scar elliptical. Anterior pedal retractor scar
separate from adductor, posterior one not evident. Pal-
lial blood vessel line scar present; inner ventral margin
smooth.” (Bretsky, 1976, p. 302).
Remarks.—A suspension feeder, which is often able
to tolerate extremely poor conditions although the pre-
ferred habitat is near shore, in sandy, grassy environ-
ments. The genus is known from the Paleocene to Re-
cent.
Subgenus EOPHYSEMA Stewart, 1930, p. 186
Type species.—Lucina subvexa Conrad, 1833b, by
original designation. Eocene, Gosport Sand Forma-
tion? (cf. Bretsky, 1976, pp. 305—306) of Alabama.
Diagnosis.—*‘Shell, thin, size very small to medi-
um, larger than high, moderately inflated. Surface
sculpture predominantly concentric, with fine radials.
Dorsal area faint to distinct. Lunule long wide, trian-
gular, shallow. Ligament external. Anterior adductor
scar small, bent away from the pallial line, posterior
adductor round. Anterior pedal retractor scar not evi-
dent. Hinge plate narrow, edentulous or with obsolete
anterior and posterior laterals, and with one cardinal
in the right valve, two in the left valve. Inner margin
smooth.” (Bretsky, 1976, p. 305).
Remarks.—The subgenus ranges from the Paleocene
to Recent. Living representatives live in tropical and
subtropical waters.
Anodontia (Eophysema) reklawensis, new species
Plate 5, figures 1—4
Description.—Shell small, height 92% of width and
moderately inflated, thickness about 24% of length.
Sculpture of fine and almost regular concentric lamel-
lae which form short pointed nodes at the dorsal ends
of the shell. The interstices of the lamellae show fine
irregular radial striae of various lengths which contin-
ue over the lamellae. Lunule triangular, long and de-
pressed. Anterior adductor scar lengthened and in the
middle bent away from the pallial line, posterior ad-
ductor scar elliptical, anterior pedal scar round and
separate, posterior one not noticeable. Left valve with
one thin cardinal, pointing upward near the dorsal end
and situated next to a triangular socket; right valve
with bifid cardinal. The only prominent lateral tooth is
the anterior one in the right valve.
Remarks.—Two species and varieties referable to
Wo
Eophysema have been described from the Paleogene
of the Southern Embayment, Anodontia (Eophysema)
subvexa (Conrad, 1833b) and Anodontia (Eophysema)
ozarkana (Harris, 1897b). Apart from its far larger
size, A. (E.) subvexa is a relatively solid shell with a
sculpture of low rounded undulations and a pitted in-
terior. A closer species is A. (E.) ozarkana, but that
has a more rounded profile, has more concave ventral
hinge margins, and has a somewhat irregular sculpture
of low undulations, rarely foliated.
Type information.—Holotype: left valve, PRI
30289; paratype: right valve, PRI 30290. Type local-
ity: locality 20.
Material examined.—13 specimens, the largest: 7.0
mm length, 6.6 mm height, 1.8 mm width. Mean ra-
tios: height/length .92, width/height .26, umbones cen-
tral.
Anodontia (?) sp.
Remarks.—One specimen referable to Anodontia
but different from the previously described species was
found. This specimen is larger, somewhat anteriorly
produced, has a longer ligamental groove, and a
straight anterior adductor scar. Externally this species
is smoother and shows none of the incremental radials
that are a characteristic feature of Eophysema. It is
possible this is a juvenile specimen of Anodontia? au-
gustana Gardner, 1951, a species from the Tallahatta
Fomation of Alabama and the Congeree Formation of
South Carolina. The two species share a similar out-
line, an edentulous hinge, and the radiating lines on
the interior which Gardner (1951, p. 10) mentioned
occurring on interior molds of A.? augustana.
Superfamily CHAMOIDEA Lamarck, 1809, p. 89
Family CHAMIDAE Lamarck, 1809, p. 89
Genus CHAMA Linnaeus, 1758, p. 691
Type species.—Chama lazarus Linnaeus, 1758, by
subsequent designation (ICZN opinion 484, 1957). Re-
cent in the Indo-Pacific.
Diagnosis.—Typically sessile, attached by the left
valve; beaks dextrally coiled; ornamentation spinose;
comarginally foliated or lamellose. Lunule absent, lig-
ament narrow and set in a deep groove. Adductor scars
large, rough, and subequal. Interior of some species
often pitted.
Remarks.—The animals are epifaunal, adapted for
life on hard substrates; most species have a low tol-
erance to salinity changes. The genus ranges from the
Paleocene (doubtfully the Upper Cretaceous) to Re-
cent.
34 BULLETIN 352
Chama taylorensis, new species
Plate 5, figures 5—6
Description.—Shell small, suborbicular. Right valve
with irregular concentric rows of foliations which be-
come progressively coarser, more pronounced and spi-
nose towards the posterior ventral area. The spines are
convex above, grooved below and tend to curve up-
ward from the shell surface. The left valve with larger
foliations and fewer spines. Right valve dentition ob-
solete anteriorly, posteriorly with a pronounced liga-
mental pit, 3b and PI large. The left valve with two
very large teeth, the others obsolete. Beaks strongly
incurved and spirogyrate. Except for the area under
the beak, the interior of both valves is strongly pitted,
that of the left valve is also linearly striate near the
pallial line.
Remarks.—Chama taylorensis differs from the Cook
Mountain Formation species, Chama harrisi Gardner,
1927, in possessing foliations that are irregularly spi-
nose at the edges, particularly so at the ventral margin.
The external sculpture of C. harrisi is predominantly
radial, with the spines arranged on radial, sometimes
bifurcating ribs. Chama monroensis Aldrich, 1903b,
another species from the Cook Mountain Formation,
possesses prominent foliations that are upturned at the
edges. These foliations are not spinose, and have im-
pressed radial lines that are arranged in pairs. An un-
described species, similar in many respects to C. mon-
roensis is reasonably common in the Cook Mountain
Formation of Texas, and may be distinguished by its
totally smooth foliations. A closer species than either
C. harrisi or C. monroensis is Chama (Psilopus) mis-
sissippiensis Conrad, 1848, from the Vicksburg Group.
This species has radially arranged spines on the edges
of the foliations. The Reklaw species can be distin-
guished from all of the preceding species, by the
strongly pitted interior of the valves, the fairly regular,
comarginal foliations, and the irregularly placed
spines. Eocene species of Chama are usually small,
most figured species being within a range of 8-20 mm.
Type information.—Holotype: left valve, PRI
30294; paratype: right valve, PRI 30295. Type local-
ity: locality 20.
Material examined.—33 specimens, the largest:
12.2 mm length, 10.0 mm height, umbones at about
26% of length.
Superfamily CARDITOIDEA Fleming, 1820, p. 668
Family CARDITIDAE Fleming, 1820, p. 668
Subfamily VENERICARDIINAE Chavan,
1969, p. N554
Genus VENERICOR Stewart, 1930, p. 155
Type species.—Venericardia planicosta Lamarck,
1799, by original designation. Eocene of the Paris Ba-
sin and the Bracklesham beds of England.
Diagnosis.—Shell large, heavy; outline trigonocor-
date. Umbones inflated, anterior extremity short and
obliquely rounded, posterior lateral margin slightly
truncate. Lunule narrow and long delimited by a
groove; escutcheon not defined. Earliest ribbing nar-
row, sharp, and crenate; adolescent and early adult ribs
anteromedially flat-topped, the ribs wider than the in-
terfaces; near the margins the collabral growth lines
are prominent and often become dominant in large
specimens. Hinge plate high and trigonal; anterior car-
dinal thin and lamellar, medial one heavy, posterior
one lamellar and parallel with the inner margin of the
nymph. Pallial line ragged and set back from the cre-
nate valve margins.
Remarks.—The genus ranges from the Paleocene to
the Oligocene.
Venericor densata reklawensis, new subspecies
Plate 6, figures 1—4
Venericardia (Venericor) densata Gardner and Bowles, 1939, p.
154.
Description.—The Reklaw specimens are ovate-tri-
angular in outline, lunule sharply notched at the mar-
gin in larger specimens. Hinge plate smaller, margin
straight to weakly sinuous, anterior cardinal is broad,
flattened and almost vertical. The umbonal rib sculp-
ture is T-shaped, rounded serrate in form, barely over-
hanging and dying out earlier than densata s.s.
Remarks.—The combination of smaller hinge area,
ovate-triangular outline and notched lunule shell mar-
gin will distinguish this subspecies from typical V.
densata. In a comparison between specimens from the
Weches Formation, Stone City, Landrum, and Whee-
lock members of the Cook Mountain Formation in
Texas, the following further differences were noted:
Weches specimens have similar hinge characteristics
but a regularly rounded outline; Stone City specimens
possess a thicker obliquely inclined anterior tooth, cos-
tal nodes over the entire umbo, sometimes a similar
outline, but a much larger hinge area; Landrum and
Wheelock specimens have a larger hinge and have a
vertically compressed outline. Stenzel (1953, p. 78)
reports an abundance of Venericardia planicosta La-
marck in the Newby Member in the Tyler Basin of
east Texas that is referable to this subspecies.
Type information.—Holotype: left valve, PRI
30296; paratype: right valve, PRI 30297. Type local-
ity: locality 20.
Material examined.—48 specimens, the largest 5.95
cm length, 5.68 cm height, 1.91 cm thickness. Mean
ratios: heighV/length .95, width/height .39, umbones/
length .31.
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE
Subfamily CARDITESINAE Chavan,
1969, p. N556
Genus CLAIBORNICARDIA Stenzel and Krause,
1957, pp. 104—105
Type species.—Cardita alticostata Conrad, 1833c,
by original designation. Eocene, Gosport Sand For-
mation of Alabama.
Diagnosis.—Venerids with highly inflated shell,
high degree of posterior and posterio-ventral elonga-
tion and generally inflated beaks. Ornamentation of ra-
diating noded or terraced costae, tripartite in cross-
section. Right valve dentition with a right blade-like
anterior lateral (3a), which is a continuation of the dor-
so-anterior point of the medial cardinal (3b), and dor-
sal to the socket for the left-valve anterior cardinal
tooth; socket narrowly or broadly triangular in shape.
Dorso-ventral cross-section a fairly regular spiral
which tends to flatten out as it approaches the ventral
margin.
Remarks.—The genus ranges from the Lower Eo-
cene to the Oligocene.
Claibornicardia linguinodifera milamensis,
new subspecies
Plate 5, figures 11, 12
Description.—Shell small in size, quadrate in out-
line with strongly inrolled beaks. Right valve denti-
tion: cardinal tooth 3a small, and blade-like, situated
just left of 3b; cardinal tooth 3b blunt at the apex,
sinuous; cardinal tooth 5b absent. Left valve dentition:
cardinal 2a horizontal blade, flat ventrally, rounded-
triangular dorsally; cardinal tooth 4b long and mod-
erately sinuous. Ornamentation of 23—25 ribs that are
tripartite in shape except on the posterior slope. Costal
nodes flattened and tongue-like, paracostals terraced
with rounded corners and where these are large enough
similarly rounded in concert with the central nodes.
Growth lines very marked and regularly wrinkled
within the intercostals.
Remarks.—This subspecies is very likely interme-
diate in evolutionary position between C. linguinodi-
fera and C. coloradonis coloradonis Heaslip, 1968
from the Weches and Bashi Formations respectively.
It has very similar ornamentation to C. linguinodifera
while possessing the outline of C. c. coloradonis. This
new subspecies is less inflated, has the umbones more
centrally placed, and is more elongate along the dorso-
ventral axis than either of the latter two species.
Type information.—Holotype: right valve, PRI
30298; paratype: left valve, PRI 30299. Type locality:
locality 20.
Material examined.—17 specimens, the largest:
14.5 mm length, 15.0 mm height, 4.9 mm width. Mean
WW
Nn
ratios: height/length 1.05, width/height .32, umbones/
length .36.
Claibornicardia coloradonis subsp.
Plate 5, figures 7-10
Venericardia (rotunda?) var. coloradonis Harris, 1919, p. 81, pl. 29,
fig. 9: Harris, 1946, p. 68; Palmer and Brann, 1965, p. 341.
Venericardia (rotunda) varying toward trapaquara Harris, 1919, pp.
80-81, pl. 29, figs. 6, 7.
Venericardia rotunda Lea, Plummer, 1933, pp. 641, 811-812, pl. 8,
figs. 7a, 7b.
Venericardia trapaquara Harris (in part), Harris, 1919, pp. 81-82,
pl. 30, figs. 6-7, 9.
Venericardia trapaquara subsp. texalana Gardner, 1927, pp. 370—
371, figs. 24-27; Renick and Stenzel, 1931, p. 108; Stenzel et al.,
1957, p. 106; Harris, 1946, p. 68 (variety texalana Gardner).
Description.—*‘Similar in general characteristics of
shape and dentition to V. (C.) linguinodifera, but dif-
fers in higher degree of postero-ventral elongation and
more highly developed posterior truncation, smaller
lower umbones, and less closely or regularly arranged
tongue-like costal nodes” (Heaslip, 1968, p. 100).
Remarks.—In the Texas Memorial Museum collec-
tions are venericards very close to Claibornicardia co-
loradonis texalana Gardner, 1927 from the Lower
Weches Formation, differing in having a higher degree
of postero-ventral elongation, about 20 ribs as opposed
to about 25, and a dental pattern that is more similar
to the Claibornicardia linguinodifera Heaslip, 1968,
group from the early Eocene Bashi Formation. The
exterior ornamentation is the same as C. coloradonis
texalana. The specimens are from the Devil’s Eye lo-
cality, where the exact stratigraphic level is not known.
Type information.—Figured specimens: left valve:
TMM 8482, right valve: TMM 8483. Type locality:
locality 11
Material examined.—Seven specimens, the largest
21.0 mm length, 18.5 mm height, 6.0 mm width. Mean
ratios: height/length 1.02, width/height .39, umbones/
length .25.
Superfamily MACTROIDEA Lamarck, 1809, p. 318
Family MACTRIDAE Lamarck, 1809, p. 318
Subfamily MACTRINAE Lamarck, 1809, p. 318
Genus TENUIMACTRA, new genus
Type species.—Tenuimactra hodgkinsoni, new spe-
cies.
Diagnosis.—Shell small, ovate-trigonal, moderately
to highly inflated. Sculpture concentric only. Right
valve hinge with small resilial socket, anterior edge
bounded by a prominent raised tooth, posteriorly with
relatively large inverted V-shaped cardinal, set almost
parallel to the hinge margin. Anterior laterals absent,
posterior laterals very small to obsolete. A deep furrow
36 BULLETIN 352
runs from the umbo to the posterior end of the hinge
area. Eschutcheon weakly defined by an impressed line.
Remarks.—Externally these specimens look similar
to venerids but the hinge is relatively simple with a
resilial socket, and an inverted V-shaped cardinal. The
anterior-dorsal hinge margin of Tenuimactra is smooth
and rounded, very different from the hinge furrow and
anterior lateral teeth of most representatives of that
family and the resilial socket is very small in com-
parison with the V-shaped cardinal of most Mactridae.
The lack of lateral teeth is similar to Lutraria s.s. al-
though in that genus the valve shape is prominently
elongate and lacks an eschutcheon. Stenzel, Krause,
and Twining 1957, report only one mactrid, Kymatox
Stenzel and Krause, 1957, (=Pteropsis Conrad, 1860)
from the Stone City Member. Kymatox has a sculpture
of broad concentric undulations, a left valve with a
prominent posterior lateral tooth and a thin, large, up-
turned hinge plate; the right valve with two cardinal
teeth, and two strong posterior lateral teeth.
Etymology.—Tenui (Latin, simple) mactra-like,
notes the very simple hinge characteristics.
Tenuimactra hodgkinsoni, new species
Plate 6, figures 5—8
Description.—As in the generic diagnosis.
Remarks.—All specimens were found attached to
blocks of sandy-glauconitic matrix, are extremely del-
icate and had to be coated with hardener. The two
specimens whose hinge was examined were first em-
bedded in wax for stability before preparation took
place and this has darkened the shell in places. The
interior of both prepared specimens shows a blue col-
ored band set back and parallel with the hinge margin.
In the best-preserved specimen this band also changes
direction at the anterior end as though defining a pal-
lial sinus. The color is not believed to have any con-
nection with the pallial sinus. Although only discerned
with greatest difficulty, the pallial line appears as a
reflective band parallel to most of the ventral margin;
muscle scars not seen but may be obscured by the
discoloration by the wax. The best specimen (now ce-
mented to the wax base) shows a very close external
resemblance to Dermatomya? harrisi Weisbord, 1929,
from the Miocene of Colombia. The interior of Der-
matomya, however, is nacreous or subnacreous.
Etymology.—The specific name honors Dr. Kenneth
Hodgkinson, paleontologist and researcher on the Gulf
Coast Tertiary Mollusca.
Type information.—Holotype: a right valve, PRI
33074, 6.7 mm length, 5.9 mm height; paratypes: PRI
30443-30446. Type locality: locality 4.
Material examined.—Four specimens, the largest
(somewhat crushed), 16.3 mm length, 12.5 mm height.
Superfamily SOLENOIDEA Lamarck, 1809, p. 319
Family SOLENIDAE Lamarck, 1809, p. 319
Genus EOSOLEN Stewart, 1930, p. 290
Type species.—Solen obliquus Deshayes, 1860, by
original designation. Eocene of the Paris Basin,
France.
Diagnosis.—Shell elongate flattened, hinge with
one tooth in each valve. Anterior end with an external
oblique groove. Beaks at extreme anterior end.
Remarks.—According to Stewart (1930), this genus
is restricted to the Eocene. Modern representatives of
the family live upright in sand or mud in nearshore
environments.
Eosolen shirleyi, new species
Plate 5, figure 13
Description.—Shell moderate in size, straight pos-
teriorly and medially, slightly curved on the anterior
quarter. Posterior end very slightly oblique and
smoothly rounded, anterior end characterized by a
deep oblique sulcus. Surface smooth except for lines
of growth which become very much stronger over the
anterior end forming irregular rounded lines. Posterior-
dorsal margin with a sharp raised edge, margined be-
low by a narrow depression which becomes obsoles-
cent medially.
Remarks.—This species is differentiated from Eos-
olen lisbonensis (Aldrich, 1886) from the Lisbon For-
mation, by the less angulated anterior end and shorter
form, from Solen pendeltonensis Barry, 1942 from the
Wilcox group, by the strong groove, wider form and
strong growth lines, and from Solena (Eosolen) lis-
bonensis abruptus (Dall, 1900) from the Cook Moun-
tain Formation by its more elongate form and rounded
anterior end. Palmer and Brann (1965) questionably
assign Dall’s species to Eosolen. The posterior-dorsal
angulation can also distinguish FE. shirleyi from the
preceding three species. The Reklaw specimen is at-
tached to a block of matrix so the interior cannot be
observed.
Etymology.—Named after my wife Shirley, who
discovered the first specimen.
Type information.—Holotype: a right valve, PRI
30301. Type locality: locality 14.
Material examined.—Six specimens, length: 26.2,
height: 7.5 mm.
Superfamily TELLINOIDEA Blainville,
1814, p. 179
Family TELLINIDAE Blainville, 1814, p. 179
Subfamily TELLININAE Blainville, 1814, p. 179
Genus TELLINA Linnaeus, 1758, p. 674
Type species.—Tellina radiata Linnaeus, 1758, by
subsequent designation (Schmidt, 1818, p. 51). Recent
in the West Indies.
EocENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 37
Diagnosis.—Shell ovate to ovate-trigonal, com-
pressed, usually rostrate. Umbones subcentral or pos-
terior to mid-length. External surface rarely smooth,
dominant sculpture usually concentric, commonly sug-
gested by the color pattern and sometimes internal
rays. Ligament external, situated in an elongate
groove. Two small cardinals in each valve, at least one
of them bifid. Lateral teeth always present in one
valve, usually strongly developed in the right valve,
weaker and sometimes obsolescent in the left. Pallial
sinus large, coalescent ventrally with the pallial line,
anterior adductor muscle scar of similar size but more
elongated than posterior.
Remarks.—The genus ranges from the Upper Cre-
taceous to Recent. Recent species of the genus are cos-
mopolitan in distribution, occurring in both polar and
tropical waters, and from the high tide level to depths
greater than 600 fathoms.
Subgenus EURYTELLINA Fisher, 1887, p. 1147
Type species.—Tellina punicea Born, 1778, by
monotypy. Recent from East Coast of Central Ameri-
ca.
Diagnosis.—Shell elongate-ovate, posterior end not
rostrate; umbones very slightly anterior, sculpture of
fine concentric lines or threads; two lateral teeth in
both valves, left valve laterals not as prominent; right
posterior and left anterior cardinal teeth trigonal and
bifid; pallial sinus the same in both valves, touching
the anterior adductor scar.
Remarks.—The subgenus ranges from the Eocene
to Recent, and is restricted to North and South Amer-
ica.
Tellina (Eurytellina?) milamensis, new species
Plate 6, figures 9, 10
Description.—Shell equilateral, height 57% of
length, umbones almost central at 53% of length. Beak
not incurved, not prominent, lunule not visible, es-
cutcheon small and defined by a sharp concave ridge.
Left valve with bifid anterior cardinal tooth parallel to
the dorsal-ventral mid-line, and another smaller, thin
lamellar posterior cardinal tooth, the dorsal end merg-
ing into the anterior margin of the small nymph. Pos-
teriorly to the nymph is a rounded callosity extending
externally from the valve margin. Anterior dorsal mar-
gin almost straight and parallel to the posterior ventral
margin, posteriorly acuminate. Rostral area defined by
a weak rounded angulation and a few obscure radial
rays. Surface smooth or with concentric undulations
which are well-defined behind the rostral angulation
and on the extreme anterior dorsal margin. Traces of
color banding still preserved, consisting of thin brown
streaks originating at the rostral area and increasing in
size and prominence towards the anterior dorsal mar-
gin.
Remarks.—Without examination of the shell interior
this species might be assignable to either Eurytellina,
Fisher, 1887, or Moerella, Fisher, 1887. Both subgen-
era are reported by Stenzel er al. (1937) and Palmer
and Brann (1966) from the Texas Claibornian. Keen
(1969, p. N615) gives the geologic range of Eurytel-
lina as Miocene—Recent, and Moerella as Early Eo-
cene—Recent. All available specimens are cemented to
blocks of matrix. The hinge description is made pos-
sible by the breaking of one specimen free of the ma-
trix, but that was still not enough to determine the
subgenus. The shell outline, the medium sized bifid
tooth and the obsolete radial sculpture make an as-
signment to Eurytellina more likely. T. (E.) milamensis
can be distinguished from its closest relative, Tellina
(Eurytellina) mooreana Gabb, 1860 from the Weches
Formation, and Stone City Member of the Cook
Mountain Formation by its more trapezoidal shape, the
excavated area posterior to the beak, and the obsolete
sculpture. The left valve of Tellina (Eurytellina) pa-
pyria Conrad, 1833b from the Lisbon and McBean for-
mations, another similar species, has not been de-
scribed but its hinge shows a large bifid anterior car-
dinal and no posterior cardinal, its place taken by the
raised margin of the nymph. All specimens of 7. (E.)
milamensis are very thin, many are even translucent.
Type information.—Holotype: a left valve, PRI
30302; paratype: right valve hinge fragment, PRI
33121. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—Ten specimens the largest:
15.0 mm length, 8.5 mm height, umbones at 53% of
length.
Genus ARCOPAGIA Brown, 1827, pl. 16, fig. 8
Type species.—Tellina crassa Pennant, 1777, by
subsequent designation (Hermannsen, 1846, p. 76).
Recent, on the boreal coast of Europe.
Diagnosis.—Shell large or small, orbicular, solid,
rounded, moderately convex. Posterior flexure obso-
lete, beak high. Sculpture concentric, rarely radial,
usually smooth or sometimes reduced to incremental
lines. Two cardinals in each valve, the right posterior
and left anterior bifid, right valve with strong laterals,
left valve usually with obsolete laterals. Pallial sinus
not close to the anterior adductor scar. The chief fea-
ture of this group is the free and ascending sinus.
Remarks.—Afshar (1969) is followed in giving Ar-
copagia generic rank. This genus is known from the
Cretaceous to Recent, today primarily in the Indo-Pa-
cific. The type subgenus has a similar pallial sinus in
both values and the ventral margin of the pallial sinus
entirely free.
38 BULLETIN 352
Arcopagia (Arcopagia) trumani (Harris)
Plate 6, figures 11—13
Tellina (Arcopagia) trumani Harris, 1897b, p. 73, pl. 12, fig. 15, pl.
14, figs. 10, 10a.
Description.—Shell small, compressed-elliptical;
beaks central. Pallial sinus large, margins parallel, ex-
tending a distance three-quarters into the shell interior.
Left valve cardinal asymmetrically bifid. Right valve
with a deep groove dorsal to the anterior lateral tooth.
Remarks.—Eight specimens were obtained that have
a very similar outline to 7. (A.) trumani, a species from
the Lower Eocene. The surface is covered with raised
concentric fine threads, not noticeably weaker towards
the dorsal margin. The outline does not have the weak
emargination of Arcopagia (Arcopagia) trumani aus-
tralina (Harris, 1919), a later representative from the
Middle Eocene. The two cardinal teeth, only visible in
the left valve, are very small and almost fused, the
anterior one is bifid. Tellina tallicheti Harris, 1895a
from the Weches at Smithville, Bastrop County, Texas,
is another similar species but its exterior is mostly
smooth and has a bifid posterior cardinal. This record
extends the occurrence of 7. (A.) trumani into lowest
Claibornian times.
Type information.—Three syntypes: PRI 170, 230,
231. Type locality: Gregg’s Landing, Alabama River,
Alabama. Range Lower Eocene, Tuscahoma Forma-
tion of Alabama, to Middle Eocene, Reklaw Formation
of Texas. Figured Reklaw specimens: a right valve,
PRI 33076; a left valve fragment, PRI 33122, from
locality 20.
Material examined.—Eight specimens. Dimension
of the largest: 10.8 mm length, 9.0 mm height, um-
bones at 55% of length.
Superfamily ARTICOIDEA Newton, 1891, p. 295
Family KELLIELLIDAE Fisher, 1887, p. 1022
Genus LUTETIA Deshayes, 1860, p. 787
Type species.—Lutetia parisiensis Deshayes, 1858
(in Atlas of plates), by subsequent designation (Stoli-
czka, 1871, p. 279). Eocene of the Paris Basin.
Diagnosis.—Shell very small, globose, circular in
outline. Umbo almost central, beaks pointed in an an-
terior direction. Surface smooth or with slight concen-
tric undulations. Interior highly polished, adductor
muscle scars small, equal, oval; pallial line simple.
Ligament external, on the nymph. Hinge with three
teeth in each valve. Right valve with one tooth beneath
the lunule and parallel to the margin, a central lower
one commonly L-shaped and a posterior one pointing
backwards; valve margin grooved. Left valve teeth
laminar.
Remarks.—The genus is known from the Eocene to
Recent, Europe and North America.
Lutetia cf. texana Harris, 1920
Plate 7, figures 7-10
Lutetia texana Harris, 1920, p. 7, pl. 17, figs. 7, 8: Gardner, 1945,
p. 99, in part; Brann and Kent, 1960, p. 989.
Description.—Shell very small; ovate to slightly el-
liptical in outline. Exterior smooth, shining, with weak
concentric undulations. Lunule large, well defined by
a radiating, impressed line. Ligamental margin deeply
channeled. Cardinal area narrow. Right valve with a
prominent tooth just posterior to the umbo; left valve
with a corresponding deep pit.
Remarks.—The Reklaw specimens differ from Lu-
tetia texana s.s. by their smaller size, and in the right
valve the central lower tooth is slightly thinner and
more elongate. The differences however are not con-
sidered significant particularly as all specimens appear
to be juveniles. Despite the fact that Lutetia has only
previously been reported from the Weches Formation
at Nacogdoches, Texas, it is in fact well represented
throughout the Texas Claibornian.
Type information.—Holotype: a right valve, PRI
33081, 0.5 mm diameter; paratypes: PRI 33082—
33084. Type locality: locality 4.
Material examined.—39 specimens, the largest 0.6
mm diameter.
Genus ALVEINUS Conrad, 1865b
Type species.—Alveinus minutus Conrad, 1865b, p.
138, by monotypy. Eocene, Gosport Sand Formation
of Alabama.
Diagnosis.—Shell minute, equivalved, smooth.
Right valve with two parallel teeth, resilial pit below
the beak, posterior valve margin channeled. Left valve
with corresponding resilial pit, a bifid tooth anteriorly
and anterior valve margin channeled. Pallial line en-
tire.
Remarks.—Palmer and Brann (1965) only report
this genus from the upper Claiborne Gosport Sand
Formation of Alabama and the Jackson Group of Lou-
isiana. In the author’s experience, however, it occurs
abundantly in all Claibornian exposures. The range of
the genus is Eocene to Miocene.
Alveinus cf. minutus Conrad, 1865b
Plate 7, figures 11—12
Alveinus minutus Conrad, 1865b, p. 138, pl. 10, fig. 2, as minuta;
1872, p.53, pl. 1, fig. 6; Meyer, 1885, p. 467; 1886b, p. 84, pl. 1,
fig. 19; Dall, 1899, p. 883; 1900, p. 1166; Harris, 1919, p. 110,
pl. 37, fig. 15 copy Meyer; 1920, p. 8, pl. 17, figs. 11-15, text-
fig. 5; Harris and Palmer, 1946, p. 83, pl. 19, figs. 5, 5a copies
Harris, 1920; Brann and Kent, 1960, p. 989; Olsson, 1964, p. 44:
EOCENE MOLLuscs OF TEXAS: GARVIE 39
Knight, Hodgkinson, Knight, Reid, Lindveit, Lindveit, and Offe-
man, 1977, p. 33.
Alveinus parvus Conrad, 1865a, p. 10, as parva nomen nudum,
1866a, p. 24 nomen nudum; de Gregorio, 1890, p. 210 not mim-
atur as in synonymy, pl. 30, fig. 30, fig. 14 copy Meyer, fig. 14b
copy Conrad; Dall, 1903, p. 1166.
Lutetia parva (Conrad). Cossmann, 1893b, p. 13.
Original description.—‘‘Suboval or suborbicular,
very inequilateral, convex, smooth and shining; mar-
gins rounded. This is a minute shell, much enlarged in
the figure, and common in a small quantity of marl
which accompanies the specimens. The family to
which it should be referred is undetermined. A micro-
scopic channel margins the valves within.” (Conrad,
1865b, p. 138).
Remarks.—Only two right valves were obtained of
this species. Both have an almost identical outline but
are about half the size of typical Gosport Sand speci-
mens. The hinge characters are a little different; the
resilial pit is smaller, shifted anteriorly and its place
taken up by an elongated and more angular upper
tooth. Whether or not this is enough to separate the
Reklaw specimens must await the discovery of more
material.
Type information.—Three syntypes: ANSP 13221
(Moore, 1962, p. 75). Figured Reklaw specimen: a
right valve, PRI 33085, from locality 4.
Material examined.—Two Reklaw specimens, ca.
1.3 mm diameter. Numerous Cook Mountain and Gos-
port Sand specimens.
Superfamily VENEROIDEA Rafinesque,
1815, p. 20
Family PITARIIDAE Stewart, 1930, p.232
p.232
Subfamily PITARINAE Stewart, 1930, p. 232
Genus PITAR Romer, 1857, p. 15
Type species.—Venus tumens Gmelin, 1791, by
monotypy. Recent, west coast of Africa.
Diagnosis.—Shell oval to subtrigonal, moderately
to strongly inflated, umbones anterior, beaks proso-
gyrate. Ornamentation smooth or finely lamellate, co-
marginal ribs, lunule defined by an incised line, es-
cutcheon long, poorly defined. Right valve with two
anterior lateral hinge teeth, and three cardinal teeth;
posterior cardinal tooth (3b), elongate, almost horizon-
tal, and bifid. Left valve: 2b triangular, joined to a thin
2a, 3a and | separate. Pallial sinus deep, reaching mid-
length. Valve margins smooth.
Remarks.—The genus ranges from the Paleocene to
Recent. At least 33 species are described from the Pa-
leogene of the Gulf and Atlantic Coastal Plains.
Subgenus CALPITARIA Jukes-Browne,
1908, p. 155
Type species.—Callista sulcataria Deshayes, 1825a,
by original designation. Eocene, (lower Lutetian) of
the Paris Basin.
Diagnosis.—Differing from Pitar s.s. in having a
short, wide, rounded pallial sinus.
Remarks.—The subgenus is restricted to the Eocene
of the northern hemisphere.
Pitar (Calpitaria) turneri, new species
Plate 7, figures 1—2
Description.—Shell medium in size, height about
89% of length, width (of single valve) about 31% of
height, umbones prominent, tip enrolled, and anterior
at about 17% of the length. Anterior end quite sharply
rostrate, ventrally smoothly curved, the posterior end
rounded, straighter dorsally. Escutcheon not observed,
lunule large, defined by an inpressed line, about twice
as long as high. Juvenile sculpture of somewhat irrre-
gular rounded lines. Adult sculpture of prominently
wrinkled, close-set lines, sometimes bifurcating, essen-
tially constant in strength over the shell surface except
within the lunule where the wrinkled character disap-
pears. No left valves found. Hinge of right valve with
a strongly bifid cardinal 3b tooth, a strong triangular
cardinal | tooth and a prominent thin projecting car-
dinal 3a tooth, both 3a and | projecting more than the
other teeth. Two moderately sized pits above and be-
low the anterior end of tooth 3a, anterior lateral very
poorly defined, right posterio-dorsal valve margin
grooved. Pallial sinus fairly short and stubby, the end
rounded, anterior muscle-scar gourd-shaped with the
neck pointing towards the pallial line.
Remarks.—At least three species of Calpitaria are
found in the Reklaw but this is the only species that
is well enough preserved for description. The two pro-
jecting cardinal teeth, 3a and 1, are a feature also seen
in the Weches species Pitar (Calpitaria) texacola
(Harris, 1919). That latter species, although shorter
than P. (C.) turneri does show some irregularity in the
undulations on the rostral area. Another similar species
is Pitar (Calpitaria) petropolitanus Stenzel and Krau-
se, 1957, which is restricted to the Cook Mountain
Formation, that species has a sculpture of close-set,
flat-topped comarginal ribs sometimes restricted to the
shell margins, deep sockets anterior to teeth 3a and 3a
and tooth | almost equal in size. One could surmise
P. (C.) turneri is the ancestor of P. (C.) texacola but
this appears unlikely as the author has an undescribed,
very elongate Weches species from Burleson Bluff
with the same unique external sculpture as P. (C.) tur-
neri.
40 BULLETIN 352
Etymology.—Honoring previous Reklaw worker FE
E. Turner.
Type information.—Holotype: right valve, PRI
33086; paratype: a juvenile right valve, PRI 33087.
Type locality: locality 4.
Material examined.—Two specimens, one juvenile,
both right valves. The adult 30.2 mm in length, height
27.0 mm, width 8.3 mm, umbones at 17% of length.
Pitar (Calpitaria?) sp.
Plate 7, figs. 3-6
Remarks.—Numerous small juveniles, or “‘spat’’,
were obtained of a species of Pitar. No intermediate
sized specimens were found between the adult size of
Pitar (Calpitaria) turneri n. sp. and these juvenile
ones, so an assignment to that latter species cannot be
made with confidence. However, the hinge features of
both species show many similarities, and the assign-
ment to the genus is assured after comparison with
growth series of other Pitar species. The shell outline
alon can distinguish these from other small Reklaw
bivalve species.
Material examined.—21 specimens, the largest 1.36
mm. Figured specimens, a right valve: PRI 33132, a
left valve: PRI 33133, from locality 4.
Subgenus KATHERINELLA Tegland, 1929, p. 280
Type species.—Callocallista arnoldi Weaver, 1916,
by original designation. Oligocene of western Wash-
ington.
Diagnosis.—Shell thin, ovate, orbicular or sub-
quadrate in outline. Beaks slightly elevated, prosogyr-
ate, posterior dorsal margin almost straight. Sculpture
with concentric growth lines and close-set concentric
threads rounded on top, obsolescent at the escutcheon
angulation. Lunule outlined by an impressed line and
centrally swollen. Hinge like Pitar but left valve with
an elongate anterior lateral tooth (AIT) far forward and
near the upper margin of the hinge plate.
Remarks.—Oligocene, western North America, Eo-
cene of Gulf Coastal Plain. Recent.
Pitar (Katherinella?) sp. A
Plate 7, figure 13
Description.—Shell thin, orbicular with fairly pro-
nounced prosogyrate beak. Margin anteriorly and ven-
trally evenly rounded, posterior-dorsally straighter.
Sculpture with very fine and even concentric rounded
threads, about 20 per mm, many of which coalesce as
they approach the margins. Lunule very indistinct, de-
fined by a colored line.
Remarks.—The only specimen is cemented to a
block of matrix so that the hinge characters cannot be
observed. Its external features closely resemble the
Stone City Member species Pitar (Katherinella?) tex-
itrina Stenzel and Krause, 1957. Another much larger
species with a similar outline is Pitar (Katherinella?)
trigoniata bastropensis (Harris, 1919); Palmer and
Brann (1966), list this species from Devil’s Eye, a lo-
cality believed assignable to the Queen City Formation
or upper Reklaw Formation. The much finer concentric
threads and indistinct lunule can distinguish this spe-
cies from other Gulf coast Katherinella species.
Material examined.—One specimen a left valve,
length: 12.3 mm, height: 12.3 mm Figured Reklaw
specimen from locality 20, PRI 33088.
Pitar (Katherinella?) sp. B
Plate 7, figure 14
Remarks.—Two individuals, possibly from the same
lot noted by Stenzel et al. (1957, p. 137), from Devil’s
Eye were examined and found to have external sculp-
ture similar to Pitar (Katherinella?) trigoniata var.
bastropensis (Harris, 1919). In neither specimen is the
hinge available for study so a definite generic deter-
mination cannot be made. It is easily distinguished
from species A by the coarser ornamentation and tri-
gonal outline.
Material examined.—Figured specimen: TMM
84819, length 22.0 mm. Figured Reklaw specimen
from locality 11.
Order MYOIDA Stoliczka, 1870, p. xv
Suborder MYINA Stoliczka, 1870, p. xv
Superfamily MYOIDEA Lamarck, 1809, p. 319
Family CORBULIDAE Lamarck, 1818, p. 536
Subfamily CORBULINAE Lamarck, 1818, p. 56
Genus CARYOCORBULA Gardner, 1926, p. 46
Type species.—Corbula alabamensis 1. Lea, 1883,
by original designation. Claibornian Eocene of the
Gulf and Atlantic coastal plains.
Diagnosis.—Shell small or of moderate size, acutely
keeled posteriorly; slightly inequivalve; right valve a
little larger and higher relatively than the left; both
valves concentrically rugose, the sculpture of the right
valve in some species stronger and more regular than
the left; a microscopically fine radial lineation devel-
oped in some of the larger species, particularly on the
posterior keel; ligament, dental, muscle, and sinus
characters similar to that of Corbula s.s.
Remarks.—Recent representatives are suspension
feeders, worldwide in distribution but more abundant
in warmer waters; commonly found below the tidal
level; the animals are burrowers. The genus is known
from the Upper Cretaceous to Recent.
EOCENE MOLLuscCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 41
Caryocorbula marquezensis, new species
Plate 7, figures 15-18
Description.—Shell small, solid and stongly inflat-
ed. The sculpture consists of concentric ribs, that are
flattened towards the margins and sharply ridged to-
wards the umbo; umbones central at about 34% of
length, umbonal area set off by a sharp ridge. Right
valve cardinal tooth is flattened parallel to the hinge
line and curves towards the umbones. Valve margins
on both sides of the rostrum concave. Pallial sinus
broad and moderately deep. Left valve with two small
teeth on the margin next to the resilium pit. Posterior
extremity concave.
Remarks.—tThe closest described form is Caryocor-
bula deusseni (Gardner, 1924) which ranges from the
Weches Formation to the Stone City Member. C. deus-
seni is larger, more elongate, has regularly rounded
ribs that are placed irregularly on the surface, has a
conical right valve cardinal tooth, and a rostrum
pinched inwards at the dorsal margin.
Etymology.—tThe specific name refers to the Mar-
quez member.
Type information.—Holotype: right valve, PRI
30300; paratypes: right valve and left valve, PRI
30303,30304. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—2\ specimens. Dimensions:
largest right valve, 6.1 mm length, 3.8 mm height, 1.7
mm width. Largest left valve, 6.1 mm length, 4.3 mm
height, 1.9 mm width. Mean ratios: right valves:
height/length .75, width/height .45, left valves: height/
length .72, width/height .43.
Genus NOTOCORBULA Iredale,
1930, pp. 404—405
Type species.—Notocorbula vicaria Iredale, 1930,
by original designation. Recent off the coast of New
South Wales, Australia.
Diagnosis.—Right valve larger, margins grooved for
the insertion of the left valve. Umbones inflated, rel-
atively low, capped by nepionic valves, both valves
rostrate posteriorly into a snout. Umbonal keel strong,
extending to the posterior-ventral margin with another
weaker keel extending to the dorsal side of the pos-
terior margin; area between the keels concave. Right
valve with strong concentric ribbing, the left valve
with weaker ribbing. Right valve with a prominently
“keeled” anterior cardinal, a small resilium pit; left
valve with a bipartite chondrophore. Adductor scars
large and prominent; pallial sinus small, almost verti-
cal.
Remarks.—The genus is known only from the Eo-
cene and Recent.
Notocorbula marquezensis, new species
Plate 8, figures 1—5
Description.—Shell small, heavy, strongly inflated.
Posterior end of right valve moderately rostrate and
obliquely truncate, the posterior dorsal margin curving
back sharply from the rostrum. Rostrum extended into
a prominent rectangular snout. Cardinal tooth trian-
gular in cross section, rounded below, sharp above and
upturned towards the umbones. Nepionic portion of
valve smooth or almost so, remainder with coarse flat-
tened folds and occasional smaller intermediate ones.
Left valve with much more subdued sculpture and a
prominent resting stage between the nepionic and adult
areas of the shell forming a distinct cap. Posterior mus-
cle scar thickened prominently and elevated into the
interior.
Remarks.—The only other species of Notocorbula
described from the Gulf Coastal Plain is Notocorbula
texana (Gabb, 1860) from the Stone City Member of
Texas. The Stone City specimens have more regularly
rounded primary ribs with few intermediate secondary
ones and a more cylindrical cardinal tooth. The most
noticeable features differentiating the Reklaw speci-
mens from N. texana are the rounder outline, the
pinched character of the ribs as they cross over the
rostral ridge, giving the appearance of a weak, round-
ed, radial rib, and the greater attendant change of angle
there. On the left valve the elevated muscle scar situ-
ated on a platform can immediately distinguish it from
the Stone City species.
Type information.—Holotype: right valve, PRI
30305; paratypes: one right valve, two left valves and
one double valve, PRI 30306-30308. Type locality:
locality 20.
Material examined.—400+ specimens: right valves:
the largest, 7.5 mm length, 5.8 mm height, 3.1 mm
width. Left valves: the largest, 5.8 mm length, 4.6 mm
height, 2.4 mm width. Double valves: the largest 6.1
mm length, 5.1 mm height, 4.2 mm width. Mean ra-
tios: right valves: height/length .81, width/height .55;
left valves: height/length .83, width/height .53; double
valves: height/length .81, width/height .91.
Superfamily HIATELLOIDEA Gray, 1824, p. 60
Family HIATELLIDAE Gray, 1824, p. 60
Genus PANOPEA Menard, 1807, p. 135
Type species.—Mya glycymeris Born, 1778 (= Pan-
opea faujas Menard, 1807), by subsequent designation
(Schmidt, 1818, p. 177). Recent in the Mediterranean.
Diagnosis.—Shell usually large, inflated, equival-
ved, beaks subcentral, usually gaping at both ends.
Surface smooth or concentrically furrowed. Ligament-
42 BULLETIN 352
al nymph large and high. A single prominent conical
tooth in each valve. Pallial sinus wide and deep.
Remarks.—The genus is known from the Upper
Cretaceous to Recent, where it usually occurs in cooler
waters.
Panopea? sp.
Plate 8, figure 6
Remarks.—Four specimens comprising at least two
species of Panopea sp. have been found in the Reklaw
deposits. In one of them the shell is very thin and
quadrate in outline, the other is more elongate and
rounded. As the hinge is not visible they could not be
subgenerically differentiated. The commonest form is
the second mentioned and is figured.
Figured specimen.—A right valve, from location 7,
PRI 30481.
Suborder PHOLADINA H. and A. Adams,
1856, p. 323
Superfamily PHOLADOIDEA Lamarck,
1809, p. 319
Family TEREDINIDAE Rafinesque, 1815, p. 148
Subfamily BANKININAE Turner, 1966, p. 57
Genus BANKIA Gray, 1842, p. 76
Type species.—Teredo bipalmulata Lamarck, 1801,
by subsequent designation (Gray, 1847a, p. 188). Re-
cent in the Indo-Pacific.
Diagnosis.—*‘Pallets greatly elongate, blade com-
posed of numerous cone like elements on a central
stalk, cones separate and easily removed from the
stalk, particularly in dried specimens. Cones with cal-
careous base covered with periostracum which extends
as a border. The width and ornamentation of the per-
iostracal border varies greatly; it may be smooth,
coarsely to finely serrated, or produced laterally as
awns. Siphons fairly long and serrated. Young not re-
tained with the parent.** (Turner, 1966, p. 80).
Remarks.—Turner (1966, p. 61) cites the results of
several studies demonstrating the difficulty of using
shell characters to identify species of Teredinidae, con-
cluding it is often not possible to determine the genus
without knowledge of the nature of the pallets. The
genus is known from the Paleocene to Recent.
Subgenus LYRODOBANKIA Moll, 1941, p. 200
Type species.—Nausitora kamiyai Roch, 1931, by
subsequent designation (Turner, 1966, p. 108). Recent,
temperate and tropical seas.
Diagnosis.—Pallet margin smooth, equal width on
both inner and outer faces, produced laterally into
short blunt points. Embryonic cones closely packed
and covered by periostracal cap.
Remarks.—Prior to this report the genus was only
known from the Recent.
Bankia (Lyrodobankia) petalus, new species
Plate 8 figures 7—10
Description.—Shell gently rounded from the ante-
rior-dorsal side to a more sharply rounded ridge par-
allel to the posterior slope. The posterior slope is broad
and rectangular, the lines of growth initially parallel to
the shell’s dorso-ventral axis, swinging round as they
meet the main body of the shell at right angles and
then swinging back again to continue obliquely along
the disc as low irregular undulations. Umbonal-ventral
sulcus with exceedingly fine radial ridges which are
themselves crossed by microscopic impressed striae
forming a minute lattice pattern. Anterior slope with
flat-topped denticulate ridges, spaced wider medially
than dorsally or ventrally and bounded posteriorly by
a thickened ridge. Cardinal tooth tubular, extending al-
most the entire interior length of the shell in a shallow
arc. Pallets smooth, distal cross-section compressed-
rhombohedral, one side smoothly rounded, the other
more pointed due to a slight medial carina. On the
carinate side, the pallets are laterally produced to a
rounded petal-like outline which on the other side con-
verges as a low V, the apex near the expansion point
of the tube. Distance between successive pallets about
the same as the maximum pallet diameter.
Remarks.—Specimens of free valves are rare in ear-
ly Tertiary deposits, this set and another two single
valves from the Cook Mountain Formation collected
by the author being the only ones known from the
Eocene of the Gulf or Atlantic Coastal plain. Pallets
are required to distinguish to generic or subgeneric
level and they have only been found in a few in-
stances. Turner (1966, pp. 14-17) lists two occur-
rences from North America, one from the Paleocene
of North Dakota and the other from the Oligocene of
Washington; several more have been found in western
Europe. Both primary Reklaw localities have yielded
tubes with pallets, in each case the tubes with pallets
were found in immediate proximity to the fossilized
wood specimen, but not within it. The tubes have a
smooth exterior, are crowded closely together, the
whole mass very convoluted. The interior of the tubes
was filled with a soft, microscopically fibrous material,
with the valves at one end and the pallets close to the
valves, a condition which according to Turner often
happens during death or disturbance of the animal.
Even more unusual was the discovery of a very thin
sheaf covering the pallets; this was broken in the prep-
aration but can still be seen in places, and is surmised
to be the remnants of the periostracum. The carbonized
remains of one animal was even found in the interior
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 43
of one double valve. According to Turner (1966, p. 32)
the young are not retained with the parent; this was
perhaps not the case in Eocene times as excavation of
one tube revealed two minute valves between the pallets
and the shell. All previous species of Bankia from the
Gulf and Atlantic coastal plain are all described from
the tubes, which are notoriously variable in character.
Three species of Bankia, whose preservation warrants
a comparison are Bankia maverickensis (Gardner,
1923), from the Kincaid Formation, Bankia emacerata
(Whitfield, 1885), from the Shark River Formation, and
Bankia ringens (Aldrich, 1921), from the Wills Points
Formation. B. maverickensis is described as occurring
in fossilized wood, and has a closely wrinkled surface;
B. emacerata is also described from fossilized wood
and has tubes that taper rapidly towards the apex; B.
ringens has tubes with raised thickened rings, set vir-
tually at right angles to the axis. The remainder of the
Bankia species are described from such poor material
as to make a comparison difficult.
Etymology.—Referring to the resemblance of the
margin of the pallets to petals.
Type information.—Holotype: a tube with pallets,
PRI 33125; paratypes: PRI 33090-33095. Type local-
ity: locality 7.
Material examined.—Seven specimens of valves,
two partial pallet sets, three separated pallets, and nu-
merous tubes in fossilized wood. Largest free valve
pair: diameter 2.5 mm, largest free pallet: 1.52 mm
length, 1.14 mm width.
Subclass ANOMALODESMATA Dall, 1889b, p. 64
Order PHOLADOMYOIDA Newell 1965, p. 21
Superfamily PHOLADOMYOIDEA Gray,
1847, p. 187
Family PHOLADOMYIDAE Gray, 1847, p. 187
Genus PHOLADOMYA G. B. Sowerby, 1823a°*
Type species.—Pholadomya candida G. B. Sower-
by, 1823a, by subsequent designation (Gray, 1847, p.
194). Recent, southeastern West Indies.
Diagnosis.—Shell medium sized to large, thin, na-
creous. Outline ventricose, transversely ovate-trigonal
to subquadrate, gaping posteriorly. Umbones anterior,
prominent, escutcheon faint, often defined by flatten-
ing of the shell or disappearance of the sculpture. Sur-
face microscopically pustulose, ornament usually
strong, both radially and concentrically, at the inter-
sections more or less noded. Hinge edentulous, liga-
ment external, pallial sinus broad and moderately deep.
Remarks.—The genus was most diverse in the late
Mesozoic and has declined steadily since. Six species
*On unnumbered page 228.
are known from the Paleogene of the Gulf Coast, two
in the Recent fauna.
Pholadomya cf. leonensis,
Stenzel and Twining, 1957
Plate 8, figures 11—12
Pholadomya leonensis Stenzel and Twining, 1957 in Stenzel, Krau
se, and Twining, 1957, p. 164, pl. 18, fig. 13; pl. 19, figs. 4, 5.
Remarks.—These specimens are preserved as clay
molds with fragments of attached shell, one partial
valve with exterior cemented to matrix was also found.
Due to the distortion no meaningful comparison can
be made with the outline of other species. The few
fragments of shell remaining show a microscopic pus-
tulose surface similar to that seen in Pholadomya leo-
nensis Stenzel and Twining, 1957 from the Weches
Formation. Another feature seen in P. /eonensis is the
almost complete absence of radial folds except close
to the umbo; the valve fragment shows this feature.
Material examined.—Four molds and one incom-
plete valve. The largest specimen: 24 mm length, 14
mm maximum height, 18 mm double valve thickness.
Type information.—Holotype: TBEG 20550. Type
locality: North ditch of old abandoned Concord-Cen-
terville county road, 0.6 mile southeast of dismantled
Robbins depot, Texas Bureau of Economic Geology
location, 145-T-1. Figured Reklaw specimen: PRI
33096, from locality 4.
Superfamily PANDOROIDEA Rafinesque,
1815, p. 20
Family PERIPLOMATIDAE Dall, 1895, p. 528
Genus COCHLODESMA Couthouy, 1839, p. 170
Type species.—Anatina leana Conrad, 1831, by sub-
sequent designation (Hermannsen, 1847, p. 266). Re-
cent, northeastern coast of North America.
Diagnosis.—Lenticular, subequilateral; lithodesma
present, chondrophore buttressed. Surface smooth or
minutely scabrous, with a fine epidermis.
Remarks.—An uncommon genus, found in boreal to
temperate waters at moderate depths. The genus is
known from the Miocene to Recent.
Subgenus COCHLODESMA Couthouy,
1839, p. 170
Diagnosis.—*‘Slightly inflated, surface not granu-
lose; lithodesma cartilaginous” (Keen in Moore, p.
N850).
Cochlodesma (Cochlodesma) ovalis, new species
Plate 8, figure 15
Description.—Shell, small, very thin, ovate, anteri-
orly larger. Surface smooth or irregularly concentri-
44 BULLETIN 352
cally plicate, overridden with lines of growth, medially
obsolescent, stronger on both ends of the shell. Interior
nacreous, pallial sinus and muscle scars not visible,
chondrophore thin and spoon-shaped.
Remarks.—To date Cochlodesma has not been re-
cognised as a fossil earlier than the Miocene. Gardner
(1943) lists just one species, Cochlodesma antiqua
(Conrad, 1834) from the Yorktown Formation of North
Carolina. As fossils, representatives of the genus Coch-
lodesma may be distinguished from those of the closely
similar genus Periploma by the combination of the
smooth rather than granular surface and the more reg-
ularly ovate outline. One double valve, but flattened
specimen shows the remnants of the lithodesma in the
chondrophore cup. The rounded outline of C. ovalis is
closer to that of the the type of Cochlodesma leanum
than the Miocene species C. antiqua. Both periplomatid
genera Cochlodesma and Periploma are commonly
found in the Weches and Cook Mountain formations in
east Texas although usually in a fragmentary condition.
Etymology.—Referring to the ovate outline.
Material examined.—11 specimens, the largest
complete: 13.5 mm length, 8.7 mm height. The length
of one fragmentary specimen is estimated at 76 mm.
Type information.—Holotype: a right valve, PRI
33097; paratype: PRI 33098. Type locality: locality 4.
Superfamily POROMYOIDEA Dall, 1886, p. 292
Family CUSPIDARIIDAE Dall, 1886, p. 292
Genus CARDIOMYA A. Adams, 1864, p. 330
Type species.—Cardiomya gouldiana Hinds, 1843,
by monotypy. Recent, Sea of Japan.
Diagnosis.—Shell radially ribbed on the main part
of the shell, rostrum smooth; similar to Cuspidaria but
with more prominent fossette, thinner septum and
prominent radial sculpturing. Right valve with a prom-
inent posterior lateral tooth.
Remarks.—Unlike most Cuspidariidae, Recent spe-
cies of this genus prefer shallow water. The genus is
known from the Upper Cretaceous to Recent.
Cardiomya fredsmithi, new species
Plate 8, figures 16-17
Description.—Shell very small, ovate triangular,
highly inflated, umbones central and enrolled. Sculp-
ture of 16 strong, slightly irregular placed ribs, small
and close-set anteriorly and becoming larger and fur-
ther apart towards the posterior margin. Umbonal
slope weakly defined and with three larger ribs. The
ribs are crossed by regular concentric rounded lines,
the interstices wider than the lines and the intersections
of the lines with the ribs tending to become nodular
near the ventral margin. Hinge line short and straight,
one upturned cardinal tooth.
Remarks.—At first sight this species is reminiscent
of Verticordia eocenensis Langdon, 1886 from the
Gosport Sand Formation, but genus Verticordia all
have a nacreous interior. C. fredsmithi belongs to the
small group of Cardiomya spp. with a very truncated
rostrum, of which Cardiomya attenuata (Aldrich,
1886), from the Lisbon Formation at Claiborne Bluff,
Monroe County, Alabama, Cardiomya (Cardiomya)
sp. Perrilliat (1984, p. 22, pl. 20) from the Miocene of
Mexico, and Cardiomya curta Jeffreys, 1881, Recent
of the Eastern Pacific are representatives. The closest
species is perhaps C. attenuata which is also covered
with fine concentric lines. The Reklaw species is dis-
tinguished from the others primarily by its almost ob-
solete rostrum and the presence of radial ribs over the
entire surface.
Etymology.—The species is named in honor of Pro-
fessor Fred Smith, a distinguished worker in Texas ge-
ology, and whose publication (Smith, 1962) was in-
strumental in causing the author to examine Joe Taylor
Branch.
Type information.—Holotype: a left valve, PRI
30482. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—Four specimens and two large
fragments. The largest 3.0 mm length, 3.0 mm height,
1.3 mm width, umbones central.
Cardiomya sp.
Plate 8, figure 18
Remarks.—A second species is represented here by
three incomplete specimens. The best one is an im-
pression in matrix with some fragments of attached
shell material. The species is very thin-shelled, surface
smooth with 13 sharp radial ribs, closely spaced an-
teriorly, widest just prior to the smooth rostrum. The
species is very close to an undescribed species from
the Cook Mountain Formation where it is reasonably
common. Larger specimens show an unequal devel-
opment of ribs; a feature also seen on large Cook
Mountain specimens.
Material examined.—Three fragments. The one
complete impression: 5.6 mm in length, 2.0 mm
height.
Figured specimen: A right valve, from location 7,
PRI 30538.
Family VERTICORDIIDAE Stoliczka, 1871, p. 224
Genus VERTICORDIA J. de C. Sowerby,
1844b, pl. 639
Type species.—Hippagus cardiiformis J. de C. Sow-
erby, 1844b, by monotypy. Coralline Crag (Plio/Pleis-
tocene) of England.
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 45
Diagnosis.—Shell small, inflated, with nacreous in-
terior and usually ornamented with strong curved ribs.
Ligament internal with large lithodesma.
Remarks.—The genus lives primarily in deep water.
Palmer and Brann (1965), list 11 species from the Pa-
leogene of the southern and eastern United States. The
genus is known from the Paleocene to Recent.
Subgenus TRIGONULINA d Orbigny, 1846, p. 291
Type species.—Trigonulina ornata d Orbigny, 1846,
by monotypy. Recent in the Caribbean and eastern Pa-
cific.
Diagnosis.—*‘Shell laterally compressed with
prominent radial ribbing, lithodesma long and flat.
Right valve with strong lateral tooth, left valve eden-
tulous. Interior brilliantly nacreous.”’ (Bernard, 1974,
jes Wits)
Remarks.—The species of this subgenus live in
shallower water than Verticordia s.s. Intensive col-
lecting in the Claibornian suggests Trigonulina is
much rarer than Verticordia s.s.
Verticordia (Trigonulina) cf. satex Gardner, 1927
Plate 8, figures 13-14
Verticordia satex Gardner, 1927, p. 367, figs. 22, 23.
Verticordia (Trigonulina) satex Gardner, Stenzel, Krause, and Twin-
ing, 1957, p. 178.
Original description.—‘‘Shell highly nacreous,
small, compressed, subtrigonal in outline, inequilater-
al. Umbones sub-central, incurved, strongly prosogyr-
ate. Margin directly in front of the umbones deeply
excavated by the false lunule. Escutcheon absent. An-
terior extremity strongly arcuate, posterior dorsal and
lateral margins forming a parabolic curve from the
umbones to the arcuate base. Outer surface heavily
corded with 14 subequal, abruptly elevated ribs radi-
ating from the umbones in gentle curves, convex pos-
teriorly, more widely spaced medially but with no
sharp breaks in the spacing; interradials deeply con-
cave and wider than the radials; entire surface micro-
granular; outer margins sharply dentate. Ligament op-
isthodetic, deeply inset, continuing to the apices of the
umbones. A single, rather stout, sub-umbonal cardinal
developed in the right valve, received in the left valve
between the dorsal margin and the thickened inner
margin of the lunule which functions as a denticle;
posterior margin of right valve grooved to receive the
bevelled margin of the left. Anterior muscle scar small,
elongate, quite deeply sunken, its dorsal extremity be-
neath the ventral margin of the false lunule, posterior
muscle scar obscure, pallial line remote from the mar-
gin, distinctly impressed. Dimensions: Altitude, 3.0
millimeters; latitude, 3.0 millimeters; semi-diameter,
0.7 millimeter.’’ (Gardner, 1927, p. 367).
Remarks.—The Reklaw specimens have one or two
fewer ribs than Gardner described, are about half the
size and are not so trigonal in outline. Because the
valves may be juveniles and a little worn it seems best
not to describe them as new here. Two right valves
were obtained. The only other known Paleogene rep-
resentative of Trigonulina, Verticordia (Trigonulina)
sotoensis Aldrich, 1903b, from the Cook Mountain
Formation of Mississippi, is differentiated by the un-
equal spacing of the ribs.
Material examined.—Two specimens, the largest,
1.65 mm length.
Type information.—Holotype: USNM 369240. Type
locality: Stone City Bluff, Burleson County, Texas.
Figured Reklaw specimen, a right valve: PRI 33099,
from locality 4.
Class SCAPHOPODA Bronn, 1862, p. 523
Order DENTALIIDA da Costa, 1776, p. 152
Family GADILINIDAE Chistikov, 1975
Genus EPISIPHON Pilsbry and Sharp,
1897, p. 127
Type species.—Dentalium sowerbyi Guilding, 1834,
by subsequent designation (Suter, 1913, p. 821). Re-
cent off the coast of the Southeastern United States
and the West Indies.
Description.—Shell very small, very slender, nee-
dle-like, circular, moderately curved, surface smooth
except for growth rings that are most conspicuous on
the posterior part of the shell; apex having a short
projecting tube or a wide narrow U-shaped lateral
notch.
Remarks.—Living species are mainly inhabitants of
deep water. The genus ranges from the Lower Jurassic
to Recent.
Episiphon gracilis, new species
Plate 9, figure 7—8
Description.—Shell small, smooth, glassy, gently
and regularly curved. Apertural cross-section rounded-
triangular with the apex ventral; the sides of the tri-
angle between 55—60°, apical end ovate. Orifice close
to the ventral face, elliptical in outline, the major axis
vertical, usually becoming circular at the apical end.
Remarks.—This species is similar to Episiphon
acicula (Hodgkinson, 1974) from the Wheelock Mem-
ber of the Cook Mountain Formation, but can be dis-
tinguished by the larger ventral angle of the triangular
cross-section, the relatively thicker shell anteriorly and
the more pronounced triangular outline. All specimens
appear to be broken, even those which can be observed
in situ within the matrix. Sediment compaction does
not seem to be the cause, as that results in longitudinal
46 BULLETIN 352
fractures in most cases while the observed fractures
occur in a plane at right angles to the shell axis. The
vast majority of breakages have occurred at the ante-
rior end where the shell thickness decreases smoothly
to less than .025 mm. It appears the animal must have
added new shell material as a sharp rim, thickening
the shell wall some distance behind the aperture. The
largest specimen is 14 mm although many specimens
must have been double that size. Numerous specimens
from the type locality exhibit surface markings which
are assumed to be the remains of the original color
pattern; these are usually evenly spaced concentric
rings but may also be longitudinal lines rather like an
effaced, ribbed Dentalium, one specimen showing both
concentric and longitudinal markings.
Etymology.—tThe specific name gracilis (Latin;
thin, slender), refers to that characteristic of the spe-
cies.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30310; para-
types: PRI 30311, 30312. Type locality: locality 4.
Material examined.—More than 150 specimens, the
largest: 13.9 mm length, 1.4 mm maximum diameter.
Family DENTALIDAE Gray, 1847, p. 158
Genus DENTALIUM Linnaeus, 1758, p. 785
Type species.—Dentalium elephantium Linnaeus,
1758, by subsequent designation (Montfort, 1810, p.
23). Recent off Amboyna and the Philippine Islands.
Description.—Shell an enlarging curved tube;
sculpture of longitudinal ribs at the posterior end that
commonly extend the entire length of the shell. Apical,
or posterior opening usually with a slit or notch; open-
ing circular or oblique, sometimes modified by the lon-
gitudinal ribs.
Remarks.—The Recent animals are cosmopolitan in
distribution, and feed on detritus with the apical end
below the surface of the sea bottom. The genus is
known from the Middle Triassic to Recent.
Subgenus ANTALIS H. and A. Adams,
1854, p. 457
Type species.—Dentalium antalis Linnaeus, 1758,
by subsequent designation (Pilsbry and Sharp, 1897,
p. 37). Recent off the Atlantic coast of Europe.
Original diagnosis.—*‘Shell small to medium-sized,
circular or polygonal in section, less strongly ribbed
than Dentalium s.s., longitudinal riblets commonly
lacking in senescent stages, but present on apical por-
tion of tube in juvenile stages; apical orifice generally
with a V-shaped notch on or near the concave side and
generally bears a solid plug with central pipe or orifice,
rarely simple.” (Emerson, 1962, p. 470)
Remarks.—The subgenus is known from the Plio-
cene to Recent.
Dentalium (Antalis) palmerae, new species
Plate 9, figure 2
Dentalium sp., Palmer, 1937, p. 18, pl. 1, fig. 11; Brann and Kent,
1960 p. 321; Palmer and Brann, 1965 p. 371.
Description.—The shell with ten or 12 sharp lon-
gitudinal ribs at the apex. Angle at apical notch about
80°. Single intermediate ribs develop, not always mid-
way between the primary ribs, and rapidly approach
the the primary ribs in size. Larger specimens may
show up to four intermediate ribs. Primary ribs always
define the vertices of a polygonal section. The entire
pattern becomes obsolete and smooth with increasing
age.
Remarks.—As is the case with Dentalium (Antalis)
thaloides Conrad, 1833a, from the Gosport Sand For-
mation, the shell is much thicker posteriorly, the thick-
er portions surrounding an inner circular section.
Palmer (1937, p. 18), described specimens she attrib-
uted to Dentalium sp. from the Cook Mountain For-
mation of Louisiana that appear to belong to the same
species. The species also occurs in the Weches For-
mation at Smithville, Bastrop County, Texas.
Etymology.—This species is named after Dr. K. V.
W. Palmer who first noted it.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30313, from lo-
cality 4.
Material examined.—150 + specimens or frag-
ments, longest specimen: 23.4 mm length, 2.1 mm
maximum diameter, largest diameter fragment: 2.4 mm.
Order GADILIDA Starobogatov, 1974, p. 13
Family GADILIDAE Stoliczka, 1868, p. 440
Subfamily GADILINAE Steiner, 1992, p. 398
Genus CADULUS Philippi, 1844a, p. 209
Type species.—Dentalium ovulum Philippi, 1844a,
by monotypy. Miocene to Recent in Italy.
Diagnosis.—Shell small to medium in size with cir-
cular cross section, more or less arcuate with maxi-
mum inflation between the maximum diameter and the
anterior end; aperture usually constricted. Surface
smooth, vitreous or transparent, with minute longitu-
dinal striae or annular rings. Apical orifice with two
to four notches.
Remarks.—Their distribution is Cretaceous to Re-
cent with more than 100 species known today.
Cadulus (?) bisissura, new species
Plate 9, figure 3—5
Description.—Shell small, smooth or glassy. Shell
arcuate with maximum inflation at about 60% of
length, profile tapering to a small circular apical end
which is characterized by a shallow V-shaped notch
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 47
on the ventral side and a rounded notch on the dorsal
side. Apertural shape a flattened ellipse with the major
axis dorsal-ventral; major/minor axis ratio about 1.3.
Remarks.—The only perfect specimen is now un-
fortunately broken but still shows the apertural char-
acteristics. The shell profile and aperture shape place
this species close to Cadulus (Gadila) erleneae Hodg-
kinson, 1974, from the Wheelock Member of the Cook
Mountain Formation. The apical notches and position
of maximum inflation can differentiate the two species.
The shape of the aperture can distinguish both Cadulus
bisissura and C. (G.) erleneae from other Tertiary Gulf
coast species. The two shallow apical notches do not
correspond satisfactorily to any of the subgenera dis-
cussed by Emerson (1962). Subgenus Platyschides
Henderson, 1920, is a similar taxon possessing similar
very shallow notches.
Etymology.—From the Latin for two-notched.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30314, 3 mm.
length; paratype: PRI 30315. Type locality: locality 4.
Material examined.—Ten specimens, the largest:
3.4 mm length, 0.66 mm maximum diameter.
Cadulus spp.
Remarks.—Broken fragments indicate at least three
other Cadulus species occurring in the Reklaw, one
species highly inflated and similar to Cadulus (Gadila)
ouachitensis Palmer, 1937, another with a very rapidly
contracted apertural end similar to Cadulus (‘‘Dischi-
des”) abruptus Meyer and Aldrich, 1886, and the
third, figured in plate 9, figure 6, from locality (PRI
33121), with affinities to Cadulus (Polyschides) sub-
coarcuatus (Gabb, 1860), cf. pl. 9, fig. 6. More ma-
terial needs to be found for further separation.
Class GASTROPODA Cuvier, 1797, p. 378
Subclass PROSOBRANCHIA Edwards,
1848, p. 191
Order ARCHEOGASTROPODA Thiele,
1925, p. 74
Suborder NERITIMORPHA Golikov and
Starobogatov, 1975, p 209
Superfamily NERITOIDEA Rafinesque,
1815, p. 144
Family NERITIDAE Rafinesque, 1815, p. 144
Genus THEODOXUS Montfort, 1810, p. 351
Type species.—Nerita fluviatilis Linnaeus, 1758, by
original designation. Recent in the Eastern Atlantic
Ocean.
Original Diagnosis.—**Coquille libre, univalve, a
spire reguliére, écrasée; point d’ombilic; bouche enti-
ére, arrondie, évasée, perpendiculaire a Il’ horizon; lévre
extérieure trenchant; nulle dent a cette lévre ni a la
collumella.”” (Translation.—Shell free, univalve; the
spire regular, squat, apex depressed; aperture entire,
circular, flaring, perpendicular; exterior rim sharp; no
tooth on the rim of the columella.).
Revised Diagnosis.—Shell small or very small,
ovate to hemispherical, spire moderately high, rarely
squat. Outer lip sometimes weakly flaring, not toothed;
septum smooth, columella edge smooth or finely
toothed. Operculum smooth, apophysis weakly
formed.
Remarks.—Theodoxus, in common with other mem-
bers of the Neritidae often have strongly marked color
patterns, and according to Russell (1941, p. 355) the
presence of color per se is of little taxonomic value
although the color pattern often is. Modern represen-
tatives of the genus are herbivorous and usually prefer
estuarine to freshwater conditions. Prior to this occur-
rence Theodoxus has not been known earlier than the
Oligocene. One of the earliest representatives is Theo-
doxus apertus (J. de C. Sowerby, 1823b) from the Oli-
gocene Headon Beds, Isle of Wight in England. The
genus is particularly well represented from the Mio-
cene to Recent in central Europe and the Middle East.
Theodoxus domicilium, new species
Plate 9, figures 23-24
Description.—Shell small and globose. Protoconch
not visible, being covered by a broad flat callus pad,
at the bottom of a shallow cylindrical depression. The
depression is formed by the side of the whorl initially
rising above the pad and then descending again on the
final whorl; sides straight and the rim sharp. Suture
impressed and bordered below by a small depression,
giving the whorl a slightly shouldered profile. Surface
glossy with fine curved lines of growth and retaining
a color pattern of irregular wavy lines curving back
from the sutural region, forward again past the mid
point of the whorl and then showing one or two small-
er undulations below. Aperture ovate, outer lip sharp,
columella septum thin, straight and smooth. Callus
broad and thin.
Remarks.—The absence of teeth or an apophysis
preclude placing this specimen in the Neritina group,
and although the remaining characters place it in genus
Theodoxus, the spire depression is atypical. This fam-
ily is very rare in the American Gulf Coast Eocene,
only one specimen having been described so far, Ner-
itina unidentata Aldrich, 1911 from the Lower Eocene
Hatchetigbee Formation. The author has another six
specimens of neritids from the Eocene of Alabama and
Texas but none of those can be assigned to Theodoxus.
Theodoxus is rare today in the U.S.; Abbott (1974)
records only one species, Theodoxus (Vittoclithon) lu-
48 BULLETIN 352
teofasciata Miller, 1879 and a Miocene representative
of Theodoxus has been reported recently by Smith
(1986) from Baja California. A similar spire depres-
sion is also seen in many specimens of Neritina vir-
ginica (Linnaeus, 1758).
Etymology.—tThe specific name domicilium (Latin,
house), refers to the atypical callus pad (vernacular for
house).
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30328. Type lo-
cality: locality 20.
Material examined.—One specimen, 5.0 mm in
width.
Order CAENOGASTROPODA Cox, 1960, p. [311
Suborder NEOTAENIOGLOSSA Haller, 1882
Superfamily CERITHIOIDEA Fleming,
1822, p. 491
Family LITIOPIDAE Gray, 1847a, p. 155
Genus LITIOPA Rang, 1829, p. 306
Type species.—Litiopa melanostoma Rang, 1929, by
original designation. Pelagic on floating seaweed.
Diagnosis.—Shell small, elongate-conic, whorls
smooth or with fine spiral lines that are stronger ba-
sally. Protoconch very small and axially striate. Body
whorl about half the length of the shell. Aperture en-
tire, oval-elongate; columella concave, strongly ridged
anteriorly; outer lip thin, weakly basally notched.
Remarks.—Recent species of Litiopa are much thin-
ner-shelled than all Eocene or Oligocene species that
were examined. The genus is epifaunal on floating al-
gae, particularly Sargassum. Well preserved specimens
from the early and middle Claibornian can be recog-
nized by the minute vertical striae on the protoconch.
Without the diagnostic sculpturing on the protoconch
whorls, specimens could be confused with Astyris, a
genus known from the Eocene to Recent and primarily
found in northern seas.
Litiopa texana, new species
Plate 14, figures 13-14
Description.—Whorls eight, protoconch of four
whorls, the first two smooth, inflated and slightly flat-
tened, the next two with minute close-set parasigmo-
idal threads crossed by three spiral threads. Adult
sculpture begins sharply, whorl profile almost flat and
with eight to nine close-set flattened ribs, the two ribs
bounding the channeled suture being the most promi-
nent. Outer lip smooth, crenate within, and sharp-
edged; aperture rounded, rhombohedral. Margin of la-
brum concave and margined below by a slight swell-
ing, canal straight-sided, strongly bent to the left, si-
phonal fasciole weak.
Remarks.—Specimens of this genus appear to be
uncommon in the early Tertiary; Palmer and Brann
(1966) list only two species from the Paleogene of the
Gulf and Atlantic coastal plain. Two species are also
known from the Eocene of the Paris Basin. Tracey
(pers. comm.) reports finding specimens of Litiopa
from the Eocene Bracklesham and Barton formations
in England. Specimens of this genus are more abun-
dant than the previous records would indicate, as I
have found several specimens of a closely similar, and
so far undescribed form from the Cook Mountain For-
mation. None of the previous descriptions of the Eo-
cene species mentions the axial striations on the pro-
toconch; Tracey (pers. comm.) reports that feature is
present on all the Eocene Paris Basin and English
specimens. All the English, French and Texas speci-
mens have strong spiral lines on the protoconch with
the vertical ribbing present in the interstices. The pres-
ent species L. texana, can be separated by its flatter
whorls, stronger spiral lines and shallower sutures. The
unnamed Cook Mountain Formation species is shorter,
with more inflated whorls, and weaker spiral sculpture.
I am indebted to Steve Tracey for recognising the ge-
nus Litiopa in the Reklaw, and for communicating
valuable information on the English and French spe-
cies.
Etymology.—Noting the discovery of the genus in
Texas.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30386; paratype:
PRI 30387, a juvenile. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—97 specimens, the largest: 5.0
mm length, 2.8 mm width.
Subfamily BITTIINAE Cossmann, 1906a, p. 61
Genus BITTIUM Leach in Gray, 1847b, p. 270
Type species.—Murex reticulatus Montague, 1803,
by subsequent designation (Gray, 1847, p. 154). Re-
cent in European seas.
Diagnosis.—Shell solid, small, slender and nodose.
Protoconch with about two and a half smooth or spi-
rally lirate whorls. Adult whorls flattish, usually three
with noded spiral lines, axial ribs and irregular varices.
Aperture ovate, inner lip concave, outer lip thin,
smooth, not reflected, short anterior notch present, not
reflected backwards.
Remarks.—Houbrick (1977) reevaluated the genus
Bittium and found no justification for the separation
into subgenera on conchological grounds alone, given
the high degree of variability and cosmopolitan distri-
bution seen in this genus. The genus ranges from the
Paleocene to Recent.
EocENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 49
Bittium tresquatrum, new species
Plate 10, figures 15—16
Description.—Shell solid, high, small, to 12 mm in
length. Whorls about 16 in number, the first one or
two nuclear whorls missing in all specimens found.
First two extant whorls smooth, squat and medially
carinate, the next two with two spiral lines, the anterior
one developing first. Adult whorls moderately convex
with about 18 to 22 broad longitudinal costae and one
varix every three-quarters of a whorl, the whorls over-
ridden by five broad flattened spiral cords, the poste-
rior One margining the suture. The posterior three
cords are larger and more prominently noded than the
other two. The interstices between the cords with one
to three fine spiral striae, the growth lines forming a
broad open C. Basal disc present and margined by a
sixth cord, the disc showing a few weak spiral lines.
Aperture oval, outer lip with a varix in the adult, la-
brum with a few short lirae. Inner lip reflected with a
moderately thick wash of callus, columella straight
with one thin acute fold, short anterior notch present.
Remarks.—Bittium is an uncommon genus in the
Eocene of the Gulf and Atlantic coastal plains. The
previously known North American species can be split
into two groups, the first, represented by subgenus
Stylidium Dall in Bartsch, 1907, is characterized by
generally smooth shells with weak or obsolete axial
sculpture; the second group is represented by Bittium
koeneni Meyer, 1886 from the Jackson Eocene, and
Bittium (Bittium) estellense Aldrich, 1921 from the Pa-
leocene of Alabama and Texas. These are very small
species with angular whorls and axial nodose ribs. B.
tresquatrum shows little similarity to either of the
above groups, or even to the two west coast Eocene
species, Bittium longissimum Cooper, 1894, and Bit-
tium (Semibittium) quadricingulatum Palmer, 1923. A
related Eocene species is Bittium transenna (Bayan,
1873), from the Paris Basin. Bittium tresquatrum ex-
hibits a remarkable similarity to several species of Ar-
gyropeza Melville and Standen, 1901, figured in
Houbrick (1980), which today includes five bathyal
species of small vitreous-shelled cerithids. Dockery
(1984) has recognized Argyropeza s.|. from the Oli-
gocene of Mississippi. The protoconch of even the best
specimen of B. tresquatrum is somewhat abraded and
the very tip is lost so a complete comparison cannot
be made; what remains certainly is very similar to sev-
eral Argyropeza species. All the Taylor Branch speci-
mens were found inside a deep fossilized burrow,
probably made by a crab or shrimp, and all show ev-
idence of abrasion; this species may have been a fa-
vored food of the original inhabitant of the burrow.
Etymology.—The specific name refers to the con-
stant three-quarter whorl placing of the varices.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30331; para-
types: PRI 30332, 30333. Type locality: locality 4.
Material examined.—154 specimens, the largest 12
mm in height.
Bittium ridgei, new species
Plate 10, figures 10-11
Description.—Shell very small, slender, solid. Ju-
venile whorls unknown. Adult whorls bicarinate,
straight-sided and ornamented with three heavy spirals
that are coarsely nodular where they cross over equal-
ly-sized longitudinal ribs; occasionally ribs are mod-
erately thickened, becoming small varices. Later
whorls may develop intermediate threads between the
spirals and below the suture. Basal disc delimited by
a smaller spiral line, and between it and the base of
the columella lip a few more spiral lines, one of which
is larger and continues into the aperture as a fold. Col-
umella bent to the left, base of aperture straight, slight
spout or emargination present.
Remarks.—As with Bittium tresquatrum there do
not seem to be any close relatives of this species in
the Gulf or Atlantic coastal plain. Distantly related is
Bittium koeneni Meyer, 1886 from the Jackson Eocene.
The coarse sculpture, slender straight-sided whorls,
and apertural shape are sufficient to distinguish this
species from other Bittium species.
Etymology.—Referring to the type locality, Ridge
Creek, Bastrop County, Texas.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30334; paratype:
PRI 30335. Type locality: locality 4.
Material examined.—14 specimens, the largest
(broken) specimen ca. 0.4 mm. locality: locality 4.
Family TURRITELLIDAE Loven, 1847, p. 194
Subfamily TURRITELLINAE Loven, 1847, p. 194
Genus TURRITELLA Lamarck, 1799, p. 74
Type species.—Turbo terebra Linnaeus 1758, by
monotypy. Recent in the Indo-Pacific.
Diagnosis.—Spire elongate, protoconch of about
one and a half smooth, glassy, turbinate whorls. Te-
leoconch whorls usually straight sided, sometimes
somewhat concave or convex, always ornamented with
spiral lirae, basal lira sometimes forming a strong ca-
rina or collar. Outer lip sinuous. The genus ranges
from the Cretaceous to Recent.
Turritella turneri Plummer, 1933
Plate 11, figures 13-14
Turritella sp. Plummer, 1933, p. 625.
Turritella turneri Plummer, 1933, p. 815, pl. 10, figs. 10, 10a; Sten-
50 BULLETIN 352
zel and Turner, 1940, p. 836, pl. 47, figs. 16, 17; Stenzel and
Turner, 1943, Card no. 106, figs. 10, 10a, 16, 17 (syntypes).
Turritella mortoni turneri Plummer. Palmer, 1937, p. 195 in part, pl.
23, figs. 4,5.
Turritella dumblei turneri Plummer. Bowles, 1939, p. 304.
Original description.—*‘Apical angle 17 1/2°,
sculpture consisting of five unequal spirals, anterior
spiral the largest, shape of the whorl strongly convex,
posterior whorl slope slightly longer than anterior.”
(Plummer, 1933, p. 815)
Remarks.—This species has so far not been found
in the deposits of Joe Taylor Creek, but further east in
the localities of Bastrop and Caldwell Counties it is
reasonably common at certain levels. Stenzel, (1953,
pp. 72, 78) notes the species is locally abundant in the
Newby member of Cherokee County. Bowles (1939),
regarded this form as a subspecies of Turritella dum-
blei Harris, 1895a, but it is in fact more closely related
to Turritella infans Stenzel and Turner, 1940. A similar
form that could also be referred to 7. turneri occurs
in the Weches Formation of Nacogdoches County,
Texas at the cut made for the Nacogdoches Lake Dam;
the Weches species has stonger beading on the spirals
and a somewhat smaller subsutural spiral but is oth-
erwise very similar.
Type information.—Syntypes: P5419, Plummer
Collection TBEG. Type locality: locality 1. Forney and
Nitecki (1976, p. 217) state there are four syntypes at
the Field Museum in Chicago, FMNH-UC 57367, only
one of which could be located. Figured Reklaw spec-
imens: PRI 33122, 33123, from locality 7.
Material examined.—84 specimens, the largest 14
mm length, 4 mm maximum diameter.
Subfamily PAREORINAE Finlay and Marwick,
1937, p. 42
Genus MESALIA Gray, 1842, p. 61
Type species.—Turritella brevialis Lamarck, 1822,
by subsequent designation (Gray, 1847a, p. 155). Re-
cent off the coasts of Northern and Western Africa.
Diagnosis.—Spire elongate, usually cyrtoconoid.
Teleoconch whorls rounded, often highly inflated, su-
tures not channeled or deeply impressed, ornamented
with spiral striae or lirae, lines of growth arcuate, the
points of contact with the suture closely in line with
the shell axis. Aperture subcircular, slightly reflected
anteriorly, anterior portion of outer lip recurved.
Remarks.—The genus ranges from the Upper Cre-
taceous to Recent.
Mesalia sp.
Plate 11, figure 15
Remarks.—A single specimen of a Mesalia sp. was
found in the general collection of the Texas Memorial
Museum. The preservation, shape and sculpture is sim-
ilar to that seen in Mesalia specimens from the Weches
Formation at Smithville and it is possible this is a mis-
placed specimen. The specimen is very close to Mes-
alia claibornensis Harris, 1895b, from which it differs
by an apical angle which is two to three degrees larger
and having more inflated whorls. The aperture had
within it a sandy glauconite matrix and two juvenile
specimens of Limacina sp.; the matrix is similar to
other Reklaw deposits and the Limacina species are
also commoner in the Reklaw than the later Weches
deposits. With some doubt this specimen is believed
to be of an age equivalent to that of the Reklaw. Fur-
ther collecting could resolve the matter although the
locality is now covered by a thick growth of vegeta-
tion.
Figured specimen.—UT-TMM 19346, from locality
10 (=TBEG 11-T-35).
Superfamily LITTORINOIDEA Gray, 1840, p. 119
Family LITTORINIDAE Gray, 1840, p. 119
Subfamily LITTORININAE Gray, 1840, p. 119
Genus LITTORINA Feérussac, 1822, p. xxxiv
Type species.—Turbo littoreus Linnaeus, 1758, by
subsequent designation (Blainville, 1828, p. 98). Re-
cent in north European seas.
Diagnosis.—Shell smooth or weakly sculptured,
usually thick-shelled; aperture inclined to the shell
axis, Outer lip sharp, upper part produced adapertur-
ally; columella smooth, excavated, flattened, umbilicus
covered. Operculum chitinous, nucleus offset from the
center.
Remarks.—Most Littorinidae live in the tropics,
graze on algae and are primarily intertidal in distri-
bution. The genus ranges from the Pliocene to Recent.
Subgenus PROSTHENODON Cossmann,
1888, p. 257
Type species.—Littorina monodonta Deshayes,
1865, by monotypy. Eocene of the Paris Basin.
Diagnosis.—Distinguished from Littorina s.s. by its
more attenuated spire, the spirally striate whorls with
deeply impressed sutures, and the prosocline growth
lines. Columella broadly flattened and excavated with
a strong tooth on the anterior margin, the margin meet-
ing the basal lip in a sharp curve.
Remarks.—The genus is restricted to the Eocene.
Littorina (Prosthenodon) eofasciata, new species
Plate 9, figures 9-10
Description.—Shell small, whorls six, tip and first
two flattened, the third with three spiral lirae, the re-
mainder of the spire smooth or with obsolete spiral
EOCENE MOLLuscs OF TEXAS: GARVIE 51
lirae, body whorl with stronger lirae and six or seven
strong lines on the basal part. Aperture tear-drop
shaped, abaxial margin sharply carinate, outer lip
(where extant) smooth; columella thick, flattened, mar-
gin thinner anteriorly, basal margin strongly bent, ap-
proaching a columella plication in character, so form-
ing an oblique tooth-like projection. Color pattern
weakly preserved as three darker bands on the spire
whorls, one or two more on the body whorl and a
tendency for the basal lirae to retain a bluish tinge.
Remarks.—At least 14 species of Littorina s.1. have
been described from the Paris Basin, the presence of
the tooth-like projection is diagnostic of subgenus
Prosthenodon, a rare taxon known from the Lutetian
and doubtfully the Cusian. A comparison of L. (P.)
eofasciata and L. (P.) monodonta shows the latter spe-
cies is more elongated and has spiral lines over the
entire shell; this species also according to Cossmann
(1888, p. 257) shows traces of widely spaced but nar-
row color bands. A similar banded coloration is seen
in the type of the genus, L. littorea. No littorinid seems
to have been reported previously from the Gulf Coast
or East Coast Paleogene of the United States. A single
species, Littorina subobesa Cooper, 1896, has been re-
ported from the Marysville Eocene of California; the
holotype, according to Keen and Bentson (1944, p.
168), was probably destroyed in the San Francisco fire
of 1906; it was not mentioned by Dickerson (1913),
in his faunal report on the Marysville.
Etymology.—Referring to the color banding on this
Eocene species. :
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 33100, 4.3 mm
length; paratype: PRI 33101. Type locality: locality 4.
Material examined.—Three specimens, the largest is
damaged, but is estimated to have been 7.9 mm long.
Superfamily TRUNCATELLOIDEA Baker,
1956, p 29
Family VITRINELLIDAE Bush, 1897, p. 107
Subfamily VITRINELLINAE Bush, 1897, p. 107
Genus CYCLOSTREMISCUS Pilsbry and Olsson,
1945, p. 266
Type species.—Vitrinella panamensis C. B. Adams,
1852, by original designation. Recent western Panama
and Mazatlan.
Diagnosis.—*‘The shell is small or minute (usually
less than 3 mm. in diameter), solid or moderately
strong, depressed or discoidal, much wider than high,
umbilicate, of few (about three more or less) whorls,
of which the first one and one third to two form a
smooth nuclear shell. Last whorl typically having sev-
eral spiral angles or carinae, their intervals typically
with lower axial riblets or striae. Aperture subcircular
or modified by the angles of the shell, the peristome
continuous, not thickened externally” (Pilsbry and
Olsson, 1945, p. 266).
Remarks.—The genus is abundantly represented in
the tropical seas of the west coast of America. The
genus ranges from the Upper Cretaceous to Recent.
Cyclostremiscus axacuus (Conrad, 1833b)
Plate 9, figures 11—12
Solarium axacuum Conrad, 1833b, p. 44.
Delphinula plana 1. Lea, 1833, p. 117, pl. 4, fig. 104; H. C. Lea,
1849, p. 99; Harris, 1895c, p. 34.
Solarium exacuum Conrad in Morton, 1834, p. 3; Conrad, 1835, p.
48, pl. 17, fig. 5; H. C. Lea, 1849, p. 105; de Gregorio, 1890, p.
135 in part, pl. 12, figs. 33, 34 copy S. plana Lea, figs. 35, 36
copies Conrad figs. 37—39; not figs. 40, 41 copy S. delphinoides
Meyer = Circulus ottonius Palmer; Harris, 1895c, p. 19.
Solarium Exacutum [sic] Conrad. d’Orbigny, 1850, p. 348.
Architectonica exacuua (Conrad). Conrad, 1865a, p. 29; 1866a, p.
1S
Achitectonica plana (1. Lea). Conrad, 1865a, p. 30; 1866a, p. 13.
Adaeorbis exacua (Conrad). Dall, 1892, pp. 331, 344, 347.
Adaeorbis exacuus (Conrad). Cossmann, 1893, p. 252.
Tornus (Adaeorbis) exacuus (Conrad). Cossmann, 1918, p. 98.
Circulus exacuus (Conrad). Palmer, 1937, p. 53, as exacuum, pl. 5,
figs. 28, 34, 37; Brann and Kent, 1960, p. 222; Glibert, 1962a, p.
TAL.
Cyclostremiscus exacuus (Conrad). Palmer and Brann (1966), p.
618; Knight, Hodgkinson, Knight, Reid, Lindveit, Lindveit, and
Offeman, 1977, pp. 19, 31.
Original Description.—*‘Discoid, with revolving
acute lines; whorls with a wide indentation at the su-
ture; submargin widely indented, and the periphery
acutely carinated; beneath flattened; umbilicus smooth,
aperture subovate.”” (Conrad, 1833a, p. 44)
Remarks.—As Palmer (1937, p. 53-54) noted there
are two forms within this species, one with more
rounded whorl profile and a greater number of spiral
lines than the other. Both forms start with three spiral
lines on the first post-nuclear whorl. Palmer and Brann
(1966, p. 616) list the species as also occurring in the
Cook Mountain Formation of Texas and the McBean
Formation of South Carolina. Typical C. axacuus is
fairly common throughout the marine Claiborne in
Texas; a second species is also present that starts its
post-nuclear whorls with two strong spiral lines. The
Reklaw Formation specimens of C. axacuus are within
the limits of variation of the species from the Weches
and Cook Mountain formations but as a group the
Gosport Sand Formation specimens might be separated
by their greater size, the wider flat area margining the
umbilicus and the imbricate character of the growth
lines in the umbilicus. There are, however, Gosport
Sand Formation specimens that fit well within the Tex-
as group; the converse has not been observed. Conrad
(1833b, pp. 39, 44) named the species Solarium ax-
acuum accompanied by a description and used the
52 BULLETIN 352
same name in his list of species in the contents; Con-
rad (1835, p. 48, pl. 17) renamed it Solarium exacuum.
All succeeding authors have treated the 1833 spelling
as an error. Unfortunately, according to the ICZN, Art.
32 (c) (ii), it “requires clear evidence of an inadvertent
error’ to designate an incorrect original spelling;
Moore (1962, p. 59) notes Solarium exacuum in Con-
rad’s handwriting on the specimen card in the ANSP,
but this falls under the “‘external information” sen-
tence in the same section of the code cited above and
so is inadmissible as a reason for change.
Type information.—Lectotype: ANSP 15389. Type
locality: Claiborne Bluff, Monroe County, Alabama.
Figured Reklaw specimen: PRI 33102, from locality 4.
Material examined.—Ten specimens, the largest:
3.3 mm greatest diameter, 1.0 mm thickness.
Family SKENIDAE Clarke, 1851, p. 472
Genus TUBIOLA A. Adams. 1863a, p. 74
Type species.—Turbo nivea A. Adams, 1863, by
subsequent designation, (Kobelt, 1879, p. 154). Re-
cent, Sea of Japan.
Diagnosis.—*‘*Shell very small to small, similar to
Skena, moderately high to discoid in shape. Whorls
rounded, with spiral lines, body whorl large, sutures
deeply impressed. Last whorl large, umbilicus funnel-
shaped, columella thickened, aperture circular to oval,
entire, set at an angle to the shell axis.” (trans. from
Wenz 1938, p. 327)
Remarks.—The genus ranges from the Eocene to
Recent.
Tubiola gracilis, new species
Plate 9, figures 13—14
Description.—Shell very small, thin-shelled, three
and three-quarter whorls. Nucleus small, rounded and
flattened. Whorls flattened posteriorly, only very light-
ly in contact, surface smooth, or with microscopic
growth lines. Peristome entire, rounded, posteriorly
produced, the edge swinging back below the flattened
posterior area. A few stronger lines of growth, thick-
ened threadlike, can be seen behind the aperture. Um-
bilicus rounded, deep, within with more prominent
growth lines.
Remarks.—This species has a remarkably thin shell
and that feature is no doubt responsible for the paucity
of specimens. The only other species known from the
Gulf Coast Paleogene is Tubiola nautiloides (Aldrich,
1910b) from the Cook Mountain Formation of Missis-
sippi, distinguished by its smaller umbilicus, a differ-
ent apertural profile and a body whorl extending free
of the previous whorl. Palmer (1937, pl. 21, fig. 10)
figures a species, ‘‘Adeorbis”’ incertus (de Gregorio,
1890), which is suggestively like 7. gracilis but the
description is not good enough for a meaningful com-
parison, and the specimen is lost. The generic place-
ment is in some doubt as the type, 7. nivea has a
thickened columella while in the new species that is
only marginally so. The very thin shells of 7. gracilis
could imply a pelagic existence for the animal and
three possibilities suggest themselves. As the shell is
dextrally coiled it is unlikely to be a pteropod and even
if these are assumed to be abnormally coiled speci-
mens, no known coiled Eocene pteropod is at all sim-
ilar in shape or size. Two heteropod families are
known from the Eocene of the Paris Basin, the Atlan-
tidae and the Carinariidae. The Atlantidae are planis-
pirally coiled and from the illustrations in van der
Spoel (1976) have a swollen nucleus, and _ initial
whorls offset from the shell axis. These are represented
by Eoatlanta, Cossmann, 1889; a dextrally coiled ge-
nus, usually keeled, or with a triangular shaped aper-
ture. The other heteropod family, Carinariidae, might
be considered, and one genus in that family, Cardia-
poda d Orbigny, 1836, has a similar shell. The shell
is typically extremely minute, however, and after a few
planispiral whorls the shell is greatly enlarged. The
pelagic family Janthinidae are not known in the fossil
state; they have an asymmetrical cylindrical proto-
conch and are not planispiral in form.
Etymology.—The specific name gracilis (Latin,
thin), refers to that feature of the shell.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30316. Type lo-
cality: locality 20.
Material examined.—Three specimens, the largest:
2.9 mm maximum diameter, 1.5 mm height 1.5 mm.
Genus SOLARIORBIS Conrad, 1865a, p. 30
Type species.—Delphinula depressa I. Lea, 1833, by
subsequent designation (Dall, 1892, p. 414). From the
Gosport Sand Formation, Eocene of Alabama.
Diagnosis.—Shell small, depressed, moderately
thick shelled. Nucleus small but fairly prominent,
smooth and shining, paucispiral. Surface smooth or
with punctate spiral lines. Aperture holostomous; peri-
stome angulated and slightly sulcate at the commis-
sure. Parietal wash heavy, umbilicus small, partially
covered by the thickening of the umbilical carina.
Remarks.—Conrad proposed this genus in a heading
for a list of four disparate shells, Dall designated the
first as type, the others now being referred to the gen-
era Solariella (Wood, 1842), Norissia (Bayle, 1880)
and Cirsochilus (Cossmann, 1888). The genus is re-
stricted to the Tertiary. Modern members of the Vitri-
nellidae are reported to feed on algae and to be para-
sitic On worms.
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 53
Solariorbis discoides, new species
Plate 9, figures 15-16
Description.—Shell very small, diameter 2 mm,
rounded, discoidal. Whorls four, nucleus flattened,
spire convex, whorls rapidly expanding. Body whorl
flattened above and below, evenly rounded at the edge.
Suture impressed and margined below by a narrow
depression. Surface smooth and polished, the upper
surface smooth or spirally striate, lines of growth mi-
croscopic in size only. Aperture round, margin strongly
oblique, thickened near the basal callus which is lunate
in shape and projects back partially over the umbilicus.
Area between the basal margin and thickened region
with at least two faint spiral grooves. Umbilicus small,
obscurely margined by the thickened callus.
Remarks.—The closest relative seems to be Solar-
iorbis rotulus (Heilprin, 1879) from the Gosport Sand
Formation, where the sutural region is developed as a
wide concavity rather than a groove. When a large
suite of specimens is examined it is found that the
presence or absence of spiral lines cannot be used as
a distinguishing characteristic. Most specimens are
dorsally smooth but a continuous graduation does exist
to entirely spirally striate examples. One specimen
shows an abrupt transition from the smooth stage to
the spirally striate stage. Generally, juvenile specimens
are free of spiral ornament while one or more lines are
developed in the adult. Characters distinguishing S.
discoides from S. rotulus and other more distantly re-
lated species are the sharp rim of the callus on the
expanded outer lip and the non-punctate character of
the spiral lines. Very faint traces of nacre are visible on
some specimens, and since these are typical of Solari-
orbis as now understood, they could make the place-
ment of the genus within the Vitrinellidae doubtful.
Etymology.—tThe specific name discoides (Latin,
disc shaped), refers to the discoidal shape of the shell.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30317; para-
types: PRI 30318, 30319. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—200+ specimens, the largest
2.0 mm width.
Solariorbis conicus, new species
Plate 9, figures 17—18
Description.—Shell very small, solid, three and
three-quarter whorls. Nucleus minute and seemingly
partially immersed. Whorls smooth, rapidly expand-
ing, early whorls convex, later ones straight to slightly
concave, profile of spire approximating that of a low
cone. Suture impressed and ragged on later whorls.
Body whorl rounded, base flat to concave, umbilicus
small and partially obscured by a slight thickening of
the basal apertural callus.
Remarks.—This species is readily distinguishable
from other Solariorbis species by the cone-shaped pro-
file and smooth whorls. No subsutural depression or
basal umbilical callus is apparent, although a pro-
nounced color change in many specimens indicates its
position. Larger specimens have the later whorls en-
croaching considerably over the previous ones which
in one specimen almost completely envelops the pro-
toconch. This species is restricted to the highest fos-
siliferous bed at Ridge Creek.
Etymology.—The specific name refers to the conical
profile.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30320; para-
types: PRI 30321, 30322. Type locality: locality 7.
Material examined.—75 specimens, largest speci-
men 2.03 mm width.
Solariorbis? parsnaticoides, new species
Plate 9, figures 19—20
Description.—Shell very small, ca. 1 mm diameter,
solid, globose. Whorls three and one-half, nucleus par-
tially immersed within the succeeding whorl. Sutures
moderately impressed, whorls smooth or showing lines
of growth. Spire whorls carinated, flattened above and
below the carina. Body whorl rounded-bicarinate, the
lower carina more acute, curving smoothly below to
the base. Aperture rounded-quadrate thickened from
the lower margin to a point a little past the upper su-
ture and expanded into a large tongue where it meets
a smooth umbilical rib. Umbilicus wide and defined
by a carina at the outer edge and partially covered over
by the reflected columella margin.
Remarks.—This is a very difficult species to place,
even to the family level. The characters seen in Solar-
iorbis conicus n. sp. are accentuated to an even greater
degree here. The smooth whorls, high profile and lack
of a margining umbilical callus are not typical of So-
lariorbis s.s. although the umbilical cord ending in a
planed-off callus lobe is distinctive of that genus. They
are unlikely to be juvenile shells with three and one-
half whorls, a typical number for many Solariorbis
species. Pilsbry and McGinty (1945) introduced the
subgenus Diagonaulus within Didianema for a group
of small globose vitrinellids with a carinate or strongly
angulated umbilicus and these shells are very similar
to those in shape. A distinguishing characteristic of
Diagonaulus, however, is a narrow shelf within the
aperture (for probable placement of an operculum) and
these specimens lack that feature. Heniastoma Coss-
mann, 1918 might also be considered but species of
this subgenus of Collonia J.E. Gray, 1850b are de-
pressed and instead of an umbilical cord there is an
angulation ending at a moderately flared outer lip. S.
parsnaticoides has only been found at locality 14,
54 BULLETIN 352
where the most extreme dwarfing of the fauna is ap-
parent.
Etymology.—The specific name parsnaticoides
(Latin, Natica-like), refers to the similarity to a Natica
shape.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30323; para-
types: PRI 30324-30326. Type locality: locality 14.
Material examined.—12 specimens, the largest ca.
1.4 mm. width.
Subfamily TEINOSTOMINAE Cossmann,
NOU, jos 2UG
Genus TEINOSTOMA H. and A. Adams,
S535) p22
Type species.—Teinostoma politum A. Adams,
1853, by subsequent designation (Cossmann, 1888, p.
44). Recent from Santa Elena, Ecuador.
Original diagnosis.—Shell orbicular, depressed, sub-
spiral, polished, last whorl rounded at the periphery;
umbilical region covered with a large flat callosity; ap-
erture transverse, rounded, greatly produced and elon-
gated, ending anteriorly in a slightly caniculated point;
inner lip smooth, callus not emarginate or truncate an-
teriorly; outer lip thin, simple, not margined or reflected.
Remarks.—The genus rangs from the Upper Juras-
sic to Recent.
Teinostoma cf. texanum Palmer, 1937
Plate 9, figures 21—22
Teinostoma texanum Palmer, 1937, p. 46, pl. 2, figs. 20-22: Brann
and Kent, 1960, p. 837; Knight, Hodgkinson, Knight, Reid, Lind-
veit, Lindveit, and Offeman, 1977, p. 11.
Original Description.—*‘Shell medium, about three
and one-half whorls, not enveloped and not elevated;
sides of body whorl rounded; umbilicus covered com-
pletely with a solid callus; surface smooth.” (Palmer,
1937, p. 46)
Remarks.—One juvenile shell was obtained which
agrees very well with 7. texanum, a species described
from the Stone City Member of the Sparta Formation.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 2658. Type lo-
cality: Stone City bluff (type), Burleson County, Tex-
as. Figured Reklaw specimen: PRI 33103, from local-
ity 20.
Material examined.—One specimen, 0.5 mm max-
imum diameter.
Superfamily STROMBOIDEA Rafinesque,
1815, p. 19
Family STROMBIDAE Rafinesque, 1815, p. 19
Genus ECTINOCHILUS Cossmann, 1889, p. 57
Type species.—Strombus canalis Lamarck, 1803, by
original designation. Eocene of the Paris Basin.
Diagnosis.—Shell high, tapering, varicose and cos-
tate. Whorls convex with longitudinal ribs and fine spi-
ral lines. Aperture anteriorly wide and notched, pos-
teriorly also notched and bordered with callus which
extends onto the spire whorls. Outer lip extended and
thickened, smooth within; columella broadly concave
and smooth.
Remarks.—The genus ranged from the Paleocene to
Oligocene and was widely distributed in Eocene times.
Ectinochilus sp.
Plate 14, figure 10
Remarks.—One very small fragment was obtained
consisting of three smooth protoconch whorls and two
and a half adult whorls. It appears similar to Ectino-
chilus texanum (Harris, 1895a), but with more convex
whorls and stronger ribs. This records the presence of
this genus in the Reklaw.
Figured specimen.—PRI 30380, from locality 4.
Superfamily VANIKOROIDEA Gray, 1840, p. 1214
Family FOSSARIDAE Troschel, 1861, p. 153
Genus POSTALIA Oppenheim, 1896, p. 165-166
Type species.—Postalia postaliensis Oppenheim,
1896, by original designation. Eocene of Monte Pos-
tale, northern Italy.
Diagnosis.—Shell medium in size, of two and a half
whorls with very deeply impressed sutures, the last
whorl comprising almost the entire shell. The first one
and a half whorls are similar to an Adeorbis, with a
globose protoconch that develops stronger spiral sculp-
ture on the last whorl. The last whorl making up the
adult shell expands very rapidly, opening out trumpet-
like, the aperture in a plane parallel to the axis. The
outer lip is simple, the columella thin, vertical and de-
fining one edge of a deep but narrow umbilicus. The
ornament consists of narrow spiral ribs, 22 on the last
whorl, 12 on the preceding. (Free translation of Op-
penheim, 1896, pp. 165—166)
Remarks.—The genus is restricted to the Eocene.
Wenz (1940, p. 884) regarded the placement within the
Fossaridae as doubtful, but did not suggest an alter-
native. The genus does not seem to have been com-
mented on since.
Postalia americana, new species
Plate 13, figures 11—14
Description.—Whorls four to four and three-quar-
ters, rounded discoidal, flattened anteriorly and barely
or not at all in contact. Nucleus immersed but may
possibly be eroded. Protoconch large, rounded, of
* Nomen trans. Ponder and Warén, 1988.
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE
three volutions and with six to seven spiral lines end-
ing in a rib. The first half whorl of the adult shell is
smooth and rounded except for lines of growth, there-
after the whorls develop a sculpture of widely spaced
rounded costae of gradually increasing strength,
crossed by lines of growth giving the surface a rough
muricate appearance. The protoconch and first one and
a half adult whorls are at an acute angle of about 30°
to the shell axis. Outer lip thin, trapezoidal in shape,
the lower margin widely flaring and comarginal with
the external costae. Base of body whorl with stronger
ornament than the upper surface and with a wide um-
bilicus.
Remarks.—These specimens might be regarded as
abnormalities, particularly in regard to the change of
shell axis but all three specimens show the same fea-
ture. The only other species in this genus is the type
from Northern Italy. As Oppenheim (1896) notes, the
systematic placement is problematical, perhaps as that
author surmises the shape of the shell is connected
with some form of parasitism on crinoids. A somewhat
similar recent American species is Cyclothyca corru-
gata Sterns, 1890, questionably from the west coast of
Nicaragua; only one specimen has been discovered.
Etymology.—Noting the first occurrence of the ge-
nus in the New World.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30369; paratype:
PRI 30370. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—Three specimens, the largest
(with some flattening on the body whorl) 15.0 mm
width, 8.0 mm length. :
Superfamily VERMETOIDEA Rafinesque,
1815, p. 144
Family VERMETIDAE Rafinesque, 1815, p. 144
Genus SERPULORBIS Sassi, 1827, p. 482
Type species.—Serpulorbis polyphragma Sassi,
1827, by original designation. Tertiary of northern It-
aly.
Diagnosis.—Tubes either free or attached, irregular-
ly wound, often a flat spiral. Adult sculpture of three
or more rough nodose longitudinal costae, broken
feeding tubes often present on larger specimens.
Remarks.—Recent representatives of the genus are
mucus feeders, entrapping floating food particles and
pulling them back at intervals. The Vermetidae are dif-
ficult to classify, having in the past been confused even
up to phylum level. They may be distinguished from
annelid worms by the three-layered shell, the inner
surface glassy. Lemintina Risso, 1826, often cited in-
stead of Serpulorbis, is a nomen nudum having being
> Nomen transl. Pchelintsev and Korobkov, 1960.
nn
Nn
described from an annelid. In the absence of nuclear
whorls the assignment of the following species follows
general usage by other authors. The genus is known
from the Upper Cretaceous to Recent.
Serpulorbis multiclavus, new species
Plate 11, figures 16—17
Description.—Shell attached, colonial, irregular in
growth direction. No protoconch observed, juvenile
shell with concentric rounded costae and somewhat tri-
angular in crossection. The free apex becomes pro-
gressively ridged and more spinose, with increasing
age other ridges develop and finally the entire set of
longitudinal ridges develops a series of sharp irregu-
larly spaced spines. The internal profile remains cir-
cular at all stages of growth. The rounded concentric
costae and spines are often hollow and develop holes
which do not continue through to the interior of the
shell.
Remarks.—There seem to be no close analogs to
this species in the Claibornian. Tenagogus (Agathires)
texanus Palmer, 1937 from the Cook Mountain For-
mation, might superficially be taken to be this species
due to some similarity in external sculpture, but in that
species the holes occur in linear rows, continue
through to the interior of the tube, and correspond to
the external slit band seen in Tenagogus s.s. Adult
fragments of sculpture are very irregular in character,
the concentric costae become irregular swellings, often
merge with one another, and develop secondary irreg-
ular patterns.
Etymology.—The name notes the multiple ornament-
ed stripes on the tubes.
Type information.—Syntypes: PRI 30345-30349.
Type locality: locality 4.
Material examined.—At least 60 fragments of tubes
and colonial masses.
Superfamily CYPRAEOIDEA Rafinesque,
1815, p. 146
Family OVULIDAE Fleming, 1828, p. 331
Subfamily OVULINAE Fleming, 1828, p.331
Genus NEOSIMNIA Fisher, 1884, p. 664
Type species.—Ovula sepelta Linnaeus, 1758, by
monotypy. Recent in the Mediterranean.
Diagnosis.—Shell small to medium sized, elongate,
medially inflated, sometimes with an obliquely cari-
nated columella. Dorsum smooth, or more usually spi-
rally striated; anterior and posterior ends spirally stri-
ated. Aperture wider anteriorly, columella with an
oblique callus plication. Outer lip flattened, smooth or
finely toothed, bent anteriorly. Inner dentition rarely
developed. Terminal ridge weak or absent.
56 BULLETIN 352
Remarks.—Modern species are most abundant in
warm seas and feed primarily on gorgoniae and corals.
The genus ranges from the Eocene to Recent.
Neosimnia scobina, new species
Plate 13, figures 9-10
Description.—Shell small, elongate, outer lip almost
straight medially, attenuate at both ends, maximum di-
ameter of base at about one-quarter of the length from
the posterior end. Shell smooth medially, excepting at
both ends, where under a microscope a few very faint,
close together, spiral lines may be seen. Outer lip with
about 46 small similarly-sized small teeth. Inner lip
with about 33 small teeth gradually decreasing in size
posteriorly, disappearing just above the point of max-
imum inflation, the two terminal teeth slightly more
elongate and oblique. A small smooth fossula just vis-
ible. Posterior end of the inner lip with a thick pad of
callus which is the terminal end of an oblique colu-
mella fold.
Remarks.—Two specimens were found, both
somewhat crushed, and showing signs of abrasion.
The dentate aperture, straight central part of the out-
er lip and a posterior callus pad is also seen in Tran-
sovula (Oxycypraea) naviculae Palmer, 1937, which
is one of three Eocene Claibornian species Palmer
and Brann, 1966, assign to this taxon. Luc Dolin
(pers. comm.) places 7. (O.) naviculae in Prosimnia
Schilder, 1927. Palmer’s species is not as elongate
and possesses 25 fine teeth on the outer lip and a
lirate inner lip with about 20 strong teeth; in addition
the callus pad is not of the same character as N.
scobina, being terminated abruptly within the aper-
ture, there forming a sharp adapical ridge. Transo-
vula de Gregorio, 1880 is usually medium to large
in size, dentate on the outer lip, and usually also on
the inner lip, the end tooth composed of one to two
small folds. Prosimnia is small, cylindrically striat-
ed, and carinated to some degree above the center, a
shape and sculpture quite unlike that of the Reklaw
species. The Reklaw specimens are similar to Neo-
simnia texana (Johnson, 1899), although the latter is
a more attenuated species, has weaker dentition and
three or four grooves at the posterior end instead of
the callus pad. The dentition of N. texana is probably
a variable character; specimens in the author’s col-
lection range from weakly dentate to non-dentate.
Another dentate species, Neosimnia regularoides
(Aldrich, 1921), is found in the Lower Eocene at
Bells Landing, Alabama. This species is more evenly
rounded, and has a narrower aperture and fine re-
volving lines on the posterior half of the shell. Un-
fortunately the holotype was broken after figuring,
but the fragments still show the details necessary for
assignment.
Etymology.—Referring to the fine rasp-like teeth.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30379; paratype:
PRI 30292. Type locality: locality 4.
Material examined.—Two specimens, the largest
(the holotype): 13.5 mm length.
Family CYPRAEIDAE Rafinesque, 1815, p. 146
Subfamily CYPRAEORBINAE Schilder 1927, p. 97
Genus CYPRAEORBIS Conrad, 1865a, p. 31
Type species.—Cypraeorbis lineata Conrad, 1848a,
by monotypy. Oligocene, Byram Formation of Missis-
sippi, United States.
Diagnosis.—Shell oval to pyriform, aperture pos-
teriorly expanded. Back usually smooth and with one
or more brown spots. Both ends sometimes caniculate
and appearing notched in the dorsal view. Columellar
teeth set back from the margin, end tooth deeply set
and forming an elongate weak terminal ridge.
Remarks.—The genus ranges from the Upper Cre-
taceous to Recent.
Cypraeaorbis bulbus, new species
Plate 13, figures 5—6
Description.—Shell medium in size, prominently
pyriform and inflated, acuminate anteriorly. Rear
smooth and showing the faint outline of a large dark
oval spot. Aperture sinuous, large and flaring anteri-
orly. Outer lip thickened, constricted in the lower third,
and bearing 25—27 fine elongate teeth, columellar teeth
22-25 in number, the last three at a progressively more
acute angle to the shell axis, terminal ridge thin, fos-
sula flat to rounded, the inner teeth continuing over
the posterior two-thirds. The anterior edge of the ap-
erture sharply ridged, the columella side almost
straight and weakly reflected.
Remarks.—In general Cypraeidae are very uncom-
mon within the Eocene of the coastal plain although
it has been my experience that within a few very re-
stricted areas they are far less so. The Reklaw species
is closest to two Jackson Eocene species: Cypraeorbis
towncreekensis (Dockery, 1977), and Cypraeorbis
ventripotens (Cossmann, 1903) than to any Claibor-
nian species, and can be separated by the constriction
of the outer lip, the smooth dorsal surface, the greater
inflation, and the obtuse angle of the anterior notch.
All specimens of C. bulbus were found embedded in
a large mass of water-worn coral fragments of the
Madreporitidae family, which strongly suggests that
these Eocene Cypraeidae had association with corals
similar to that of modern representatives of the family.
The two complete specimens share the shallow de-
EOCENE MOLLuscs OF TEXAS: GARVIE 57
pression on the outer lip, one third of the distance from
the anterior end, a feature that is not present on another
five fragments of outer lips; it is possible that two spe-
cies are present, but this cannot be confirmed with the
present material at hand. The large colored spot seen
in many modern representatives of this family is also
seen as a darker area on the fossil specimens.
Etymology.—Referring to the prominent bulb-like
shape of this species.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30371; paratype:
PRI 30372. Type locality: locality 21.
Material examined.—Eight specimens (two com-
plete), the largest (the holotype): 32 mm length, 23
mm maximum diameter.
Superfamily NATICOIDEA Forbes, 1838, p. 29°
Family NATICIDAE Forbes, 1838, p. 29
Subfamily AMPULLOSPIRINAE Cox,
1930, p. 170
Genus AMAURELLINA Fisher, 1885, p. 776
Type species.—Ampullaria spirata Lamarck, 1804,
by monotypy. Eocene of France.
Diagnosis.—“‘Shell small to medium sized, moder-
ately elongate, spire elevated, shoulder narrowly chan-
neled, umbilicus narrowly to moderately open, umbil-
ical callus absent, inner lip reflected. A slender cord
arises on the thickened anterior inner lip and enters the
umbilicus. Shell smooth or with fine spiral ornament.”
(Marincovich, 1977, p. 241)
Remarks.—The genus is reported from the Lower
Cretaceous to the Oligocene. According to Marincov-
ich (1977), the ampullospirids are amongst the earliest
known naticids and probably ancestral to the other na-
ticid groups. Modern representatives of the family are
primarily Arctic or boreal in deep water.
Amaurellina plummeri, new species
Plate 12, figures 10-11
Description.—Shell small to medium in size, spire
elevated, whorls six and a half, rounded below and
with a subsutural shelf. Suture deeply impressed, chan-
neled on later whorls. Surface covered with minutely
punctate, fine spiral lines, the lines coarser and more
crowded subsuturally. Occasional weaker intermediate
striae also occur, more prominently on the base. Lines
of growth not visible except as color changes in the
shell. Anterior lip thickened below the umbilicus, um-
bilical cord small and flattened. Wide and shallow an-
terior spout present, peristome continuous.
Remarks.—Three species of Amaurellina have pre-
viously been reported from the Eocene of North Amer-
© Nomen transl. Thiele, 1929, p. 259 (ex Naticidae, Forbes, 1838).
ica: Amaurellina singleyi (Harris, 1895a), from the
lower Claiborne of Lee County, Texas, Amaurellina
caleocia Vokes, 1939, from the Domengine Formation
of California, and Amaurellina sp. Richards, 1950,
from Wake County, North Carolina. The Claiborne
species from Lee County is lost, fide Palmer and Brann
(1966). The present species can be distinguished from
the preceding by the proportionately slimmer outline
and more evenly rounded whorls.
Etymology.—In honor of FE B. Plummer who col-
lected the Texas Memorial Museum specimens.
Type information.—Holotype: UT-TMM 3583;
paratype: UT-TMM 3582. Type locality: locality 10.
Material examined.—44 specimens, the largest (the
holotype), 12.0 mm in height.
Subfamily NATICINAE Forbes, 1838, p. 297
Genus NATICA Scopoli, 1777, p. 392
Type species.—Nerita vitellus Linnaeus, 1758, by
subsequent designation (Anton, 1839, p. 31). Recent
in the Indo-Pacific.
Diagnosis.—Shell small to medium sized, globose,
with a low to moderately elevated spire. Surface gen-
erally smooth. Usually umbilicate, with a funicle and
umbilical callus; aperture holostomatous, semicircular
or ovate; outer lip sharp.
Remarks.—The Naticas are active carnivores prey-
ing on other bivalves, gastropods and scaphopods. The
range of the genus is Paleocene to Recent.
Subgenus NATICARIUS Duméril, 1806, p. 64
Type species.—Nerita canrena Linnaeus, 1758, by
monotypy. Recent in the West Indies and southeastern
United States.
Diagnosis.—‘‘Shell small to medium in size, glo-
bose to somewhat elongate, body whorl distinctly in-
flated. Axial sculpture of sharply incised grooves that
extend from suture part way to periphery. Umbilicus
usually narrow, rarely broad, with moderately to deep-
ly excavated sulcus. Umbilical callus slender; funicle
ranges from robust, to low and indistinct. Parietal cal-
lus thin to slightly thickened. Operculum with one or
two ribs at outer margin or several ribs over outer por-
tion.”” (Marincovich, 1977, pp. 371-372)
Remarks.—The subgenus is known from the Eocene
to Recent.
Natica (Naticarius) brevisulcata, new species
Plate 12, figures 12-14
Description.—Shell medium sized, of five and
three-quarter whorls, nucleus minute and flattened. Su-
’ Nomen transl. Wenz, W., 1941, p. 1039 (ex Naticidae Forbes,
1838, p. 29).
58 BULLETIN 352
ture deeply impressed, channeled, and with short to
obsolete radiating sulci that continue as striae over the
entire surface of the body whorl. Whorls flattened be-
low the suture, margined by a few striae in the adult,
below that regularly rounded. Aperture semilunate,
outer lip sharp, columella thin, straight and at an angle
of about 20° to the shell axis. Base slightly produced,
columella feebly reflected over the posterior end of the
umbilicus. Basal margin of the umbilicus strongly car-
inated in the adult, obscurely so in juvenile specimens.
Umbilical interior coarsely spirally striate, slightly
convex in the middle where the spiral striae are more
prominent.
Remarks.—This species combines may of the fea-
tures of “‘Natica’”’ gilberti Palmer from the Lower Eo-
cene Hatchetigbee Formation, 1937 and Natica (Tella)
magnoumbilicata (1. Lea, 1833) from the Gosport
Sand Formation. It agrees with “‘N.”’ (N.) gilberti in
general shape, character of the suture, and the striated
interior of the umbilicus. The radiating striae below
the suture and callus reflected over the umbilicus is
characteristic of N. (N.) magnoumbilicata. These ra-
diating sulci vary greatly in strength but in general
decrease in prominence with age. Juvenile specimens
of ‘“‘Natica”’ ‘(Naticarius)”’ semilunata I. Lea, 1833
from the middle Claiborne may be superficially con-
fused with N. (N.) brevisulcata but the lack of the
umbilical rib in the latter will distinguish them. As
Harris (1899, p.86—87) noted, some Sabine specimens
of “‘N.” (N.) semilunata lack the umbilical rib; this
form is higher-spired, lacks the radiating sulci and the
striae below the suture. Young individuals of these
species however, can be very difficult to distinguish
from one another.
Etymology.—tThe specific name is derived from bre-
vi—(Latin, short), su/cata (Latin, folds).
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30354; para-
types: PRI 30355, 30356. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—45 specimens, the largest: 10
mm width, 10.5 mm in length.
Subgenus CARINACCA Marwick, 1924, p. 553
Type species.—Ampullina wathaoensis Suter, 1917,
by original designation. Eocene of New Zealand.
Original diagnosis.—“‘Shell of moderate size, ovate,
smooth, widely umbilicated; spire low; suture some-
times impressed but generally tangential; aperture
semilunar; outer lip practically straight but strongly re-
tracted to suture; inclined 25° to 30° from vertical; in-
ner margin straight with a short, fairly thick parietal
callus; umbilicus with an obsolete funicle on its long
apertural margin (sometimes absent altogether), and
bounded by a broad strong ridge formed by a promi-
nent thickening of apertural margin at anterior corner.”
(Marwick, 1924, p. 553)
Remarks.—The subgenus is restricted to the Eocene.
Natica (Carinacca) moffitti, new species
Plate 12, figures 15-16
Description.—Shell small to medium in size, elon-
gate-ovate. Whorls five, nucleus minute, protoconch of
one-half whorl, more or less depressed. Whorls with
deeply impressed and slightly channeled sutures,
shoulder small, flat, and more visible in the earlier
whorls. Surface smooth and polished with prosocline
lines of growth and microscopic impressed irregular
spiral lines most visible posteriorly; one larger line be-
low the suture. Aperture oblique, semilunate, outer lip
thick and anteriorly extended, the lip thickened and
reflected forming a wide, sharply defined band that
spirals into the umbilicus from the left hand margin.
Inner lip straight to slightly excavated with a moder-
ately thick deposit of callus, posteriorly margined by
a weak channel. Umbilicus striated within and with a
wide weak funicle in the posterior area, the end of
which is covered over by a tongue of callus.
Remarks.—The combination of characters seen in
these specimens makes them difficult to place generi-
cally within the Gulf Coast Tertiary. They most closely
resemble Natica (Naticarius) reversa Whitfield, 1865
from the Naheola Formation of the Midway Group.
That species, which is a higher-spired form, has an
umbilicus covered more at the upper margin but does,
however, possess a similar, although less sharply de-
fined umbilical band and a weak funicle. At first sight
the umbilical band and shouldered whorls might place
itin Ampullina s.s. of the subfamily Globulariinae, but
the presence of the funicle precludes that. The robust
nature of the shell, flattened apex, apertural shape and
funicle place it in the Naticinae, and with some hesi-
tation it is placed in the subgenus Carinacca, so far
restricted to the Eocene of New Zealand and one rep-
resentative Natica (Carinacca) rasensis M. A. Hanna,
1927, from the Middle Eocene of California, La Jolla
Group, Rosa Canyon, San Diego. Another similar, al-
though more distantly related species is Euspira mar-
ylandica (Conrad, 1865a) from the Paleocene Aquia
Formation and a variety from the Lower Eocene Tus-
cahoma Formation; this species possesses a small,
weak funicle and shows the incipient development of
a reflected outer lip.
Etymology.—The species is named after John Mof-
fitt, geophysicist and trilobite expert.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30357; para-
types: PRI 30358, 30359. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—108 specimens, the largest
10.6 mm in width, 11.0 mm in length.
EOcENE MOLLuscS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 59
Subfamily POLINICINAE Gray, 1847, p. 149°
Genus POLINICES Montfort,
1810, pp. 223-224, pl. 56
Type species.—Polinices albus Montfort, 1810, by
original designation. Recent in the West Indies.
Diagnosis.—Shell small to large, globose to ovate,
whorls inflated to flattened, smooth except for incre-
mental growth lines and microscopic spiral costellae;
suture slightly to deeply impressed. Umbilicus narrow-
ly to broadly open, funicle weak to absent; umbilical
callus slender and broad to massive; parietal callus thin
or thick.
Remarks.—Polinices ranges from the Upper Creta-
ceous to Recent.
Subgenus PLICONACCA Cossmann and Martin,
1914, p. 171
Type species.—Polinices trisulcata Martin, 1914, by
monotypy. Eocene of Java.
Diagnosis.—Shell ovate, low-spired. Protoconch
with one and a half smooth moderately convex whorls;
suture impressed, initially with short radiating folds
which become obsolete on later whorls and exist there
only as growth lines. Whorls convex or with a very
slight subsutural depression. Aperture ovate, labrum
thickened, no fold, umbilicus partially covered with a
thick spread of callus upon which are three impressed
grooves, the middle one the strongest, the anterior one
also strong and the posterior usually indistinct (after
Martin, 1914).
Remarks.—According to Wenz (1941, p. 1031) sub-
genus Pliconacca 1s restricted to the Eocene.
Polinices (Pliconacca) onustus reklawensis,
new subspecies
Description.—Shell medium in size, obliquely ovate
in profile. Whorls four and a half to five, nucleus min-
ute, no visible demarcation between the protoconch
and adult whorls. Suture finely impressed (more so in
earlier whorls) by a line that is just visible under the
microscope. Whorls shouldered, concave above and
uniformly convex below. Aperture lunate, oblique,
outer lip rounded. Inner lip covered with a thick callus
covering most of the umbilicus and leaving just a slit.
Surface of callus with one transverse groove ending at
the upper entrance of the umbilicus and an obsolete
parallel depression on either side of it. Umbilicus
smooth within, or only showing lines of growth;
rounded funicle present and covered with callus to its
lower end.
* Nomen transl. Kabat, 1991 (ex Finlay and Marwick, 1937, p.
53).
Remarks.—The species is placed in Polinices by the
character of the callus, the flatsided whorls, and the
shape and inclination of the aperture. Incipient sec-
ondary callus grooves are sometimes visible, and the
three grooves place it in section Pliconacca, although
with some hesitation due to their obsolete nature. The
species has strong affinities with both Polinices (Pli-
conacca) onustus (Whitfield, 1865) of the Midway
group, and the higher spired form P. (P.) onustus in
the Sabine; it would seem P. (P.) onustus reklawensis
is the continuation of that line in the Reklaw which
leads to Polinices aratus (Gabb, 1860) of the middle
Claibornian. The species, however, is decidedly nearer
P. (P.) onustus, to which it is referred as a subspecies.
Etymology.—Referring to the Reklaw Formation.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30360; para-
types: PRI 30361, 30362. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—87 specimens, the largest 13.5
mm in length, 11.2 mm in width.
Subfamily SININAE Woodring, 1928, p. 387
Genus SINUM Roeding, 1798, p. 14
Type species.—Helix haliotoidea Linnaeus, 1758, by
subsequent designation (Dall, 1915, p. 109). Recent
off the coast of West Africa.
Diagnosis.—Shells small to large; whorls typically
depressed, may be globose, rarely elongate; sculpture
with distinct, closely spaced costellae. Umbilicus ex-
tremely narrow and slit-like or closed. Outer lip may
be weakly crenulated.
Remarks.—Sinum is known from the Upper Creta-
ceous. It is primarily tropical in distribution.
Sinum taylori, new species
Plate 13, figures 3—4
Description.—Protoconch of two and a half to two
and three-quarter smooth, erect whorls. Adult sculp-
ture starts at an oblique angle, the line defining the
transition being practically tangential to the suture of
the preceding whorl. Sculpture of numerous longitu-
dinal spiral flat-topped striae and wide interstices and
sometimes one to two microscopic intermediate
threads. Collabral sculpture of microscopic but distinct
rounded spiral threads, sometimes crowded, the
threads overriding the longitidinal striae, the two sets
together forming a reticulated pattern. Aperture ovate,
callus thin and reflected over the upper part of the
umbilicus.
Remarks.—On the basis of the degree of flattening
of the shell, the Eocene species of Sinum from the Gulf
coastal plain can be arranged in the following se-
quence: S. fiski LeBlank, 1942, S. bilix (Conrad,
1833c), S. declive (Conrad, 1833b), and S. arctatum
(Conrad, 1833b); S. fiski is from the Wilcox Group,
60 BULLETIN 352
the other three range from the Middle to the Upper
Claiborne Within the above sequence both Sinum tay-
lori and Sinum moveum (described next) would be
placed between S. declive and S. arctatum, being how-
ever closer to S. declive. The sculpture of S. taylori is
quite distinct, with its sharp raised lines and almost no
intermediate striae in the interstices, S. declive has that
arrangement almost reversed in having fine impressed
lines and many intermediate striae. Both Reklaw spe-
cies are additionally characterized by the near tangen-
tial transitional line separating the juvenile from adult
shell. A similar pattern of sharp raised lines is also
seen in S. arctatum.
Etymology.—Referring to the type locality, Joe Tay-
lor Branch.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30363; para-
types: PRI 30364-30366. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—18 specimens, the largest 6.7
mm length, 7.0 mm height.
Sinum moveum, new species
Plate 13, figures 1—2
Description.—Shell elongate, oval, protoconch of
three smooth erect rounded whorls, nucleus minute.
Last protoconch whorl and first quarter adult whorl
slightly depressed within the final body whorl. Suture
deeply impressed. Adult stage of one and a quarter to
one and a half whorls, surface granular, sculpture of
close-set spiral striae and finer intermediate threads
that appear wrinkled due to periodic lateral offsets at
larger lines of growth. The effect is that the shell ap-
pears to possess curved longitudinal striations when
viewed from some distance. Aperture obliquely ovate
with a callus reflected and covering the nght hand
edge of the large ovate umbilicus.
Remarks.—Very similar in shape to Sinum declive
(Conrad, 1833b) although the sculpture in that species
consists of broader bands and the umbilicus is sublun-
ate. From the shape alone S. moveum is additionally
distinguished by possessing a broad shoulder carina-
tion, and another anterior to that on the body whorl.
The juvenile to adult transition is intermediate in form
to that in S. declive and S. taylori.
Etymology.—The name moveum (Latin, movement),
refers to the wavy character of the spiral striae.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30367; paratype:
PRI 30368. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—19 specimens, the largest un-
crushed specimen, 8.2 mm width, 8.1 mm height.
Superfamily TONNOIDEA Suter, 1913, p. 313
Family CASSIDAE Swainson, 1840, p. 89
Genus GALEODEA Link, 1806, p. 113
Type species.—Buccinum echinophorum Linnaeus,
1758, by monotypy. Recent in the Atlantic and Med-
iterranean.
Diagnosis.—Shell thin, with a moderately elevated
spire, appressed suture and uniform spiral sculpture;
sometimes more or less nodulous on the prominent
spiral keels; with a conspicuous periostracum; the out-
er lip reflected and more or less transversely lirate,
with a tendency to a more prominent denticle near the
posterior angle and at the proximal end of the canal;
inner lip with a broad callus, smooth or obscurely lir-
ate, with margin more or less free in the adult; canal
elongate and recurved, with just a trace of a siphonal
fasciole; operculum subovate with the nucleus eccen-
tric.
Remarks.—Galeodea 1s known from the Eocene on-
wards, recent in the Mediterranean.
Subgenus MAMBRINA Gardner, 1939, p. 23
Type species.—Type species.—Cassidaria plano-
tecta, Meyer and Aldrich, 1886, by original designa-
tion. Cook Mountain Formation of Newton, Mississippi.
Diagnosis.—Shell medium in size to large. Proto-
conch naticoid, early whorls offset from the vertical
axis by about 15°. Spire flat to moderately coleocon-
oidal, later whorls often encroaching over the earlier
ones. Body whorl bicarinate, ““box-like’’, the area be-
tween the carinae flat to concave, the carinae outlined
by noded spirals, the remaining spiral sculpture usually
fine and simple, only one varix and that a terminal one.
Outer lip thickened, with a strong tooth anteriorly, and
usually dentate along its entire length. Callus shield
broad, flaring, detached below the lower keel; anterior
canal, long, slender, produced in the plane of the ap-
erture, but not in the axis of body and spire.
Remarks.—There is some confusion regarding the
subgenera Mambrina and Gomphopages, Gardner des-
ignated Cassidaria planotecta Meyer and Aldrich,
1886 as type of Mambrina and included three species
in the subgenus: G. (M.) koureos Gardner, 1939, G.
(M.) sp. from the Wilcox Group of Mexico, and the
type G. (M.) planotecta (Meyer and Aldrich, 1886). In
the same publication she also defined subgenus Gom-
phopages with Galeodea (G?) millsapsi Sullivan and
Gardner as the type. She first states the subgenus is
only known from the holotype, but then on the next
page questionably includes G. (G?) millsapsi in the
same taxon. Three primary characters are used to char-
acterize Gomphopages: the heavy chalky textured
shell, the long slender anterior canal, and the promi-
nent shoulder tubercles that are flattened in the plane
of the axis and connected by low axial riblets to the
basal series of nodes. On examination of the holotype
it only appears as if the shell has a chalky texture, the
texture probably due to weathering and damage during
preparation; the shell was encased in a hard matrix and
shows indications of having been badly prepared with
EOcENE MOLLuscs OF TEXAS: GARVIE 61
hammer and chisel. The long anterior canal, and flat-
tened shoulder tubercles are features of both the Mam-
brina and Gomphopages sections and so cannot be
used in separation of the two. Specimens that can be
assigned to G. turneri from the Weches Formation near
Nacogdoches show a variable development of the axial
riblets, some possess them weakly and others not at
all. On balance then, the only consistent feature sep-
arating Gomphopages from Mambrina is the heavy
shell and that also appears to be dependent on age,
older larger specimens are generally heavier shelled. I
believe, therefore, that Gomphopages is a synonym of
Mambrina, Mambrina having page priority in Gard-
ner’s publication. Unfortunately Gardner’s assignment
of G. koureos, followed by MacNeil in MacNeil and
Dockery, 1984, and the similar species from Mexico
to Mambrina, is also in error. G. koureos and Galeo-
dea dubia (Aldrich, 1885), which ranges from the
Hatchetigbee Formation to the Weches Formation,
clearly form a separate group which is characterized
by a rounded body whorl with two to four spiral rows
of nodes; a higher, often stepped spire; shows no sign
of a long anterior canal; and often possesses more than
one varix. Over 60 specimens of G. dubia were ex-
amined from the Weches Formation and not one
showed any indication of a long anterior canal. Two
Eocene European species which also appear to belong
to this latter group are Galeodea coronata (Deshayes,
1830) and “‘Cassis”’ striata J. Sowerby, 1812. As not-
ed by Palmer (1937, p. 253), G. D. Harris identified
specimens of the Sabine species Galeodea dubia (A\I-
drich, 1885) from the Weches of Burleson Bluff, a
range that would include the Reklaw era. I have ver-
ified the occurrence at Burleson Bluff and the same or
a very similar species is common in Weches strata near
Nacogdoches; no example of this species or anything
similar has been discovered in the Reklaw deposits and
in any case this species has little similarity to the ones
discussed above.
Galeodea (Mambrina) turneri Gardner, 1939
Plate 14, figures 6—7
Galeodea (Gomphopages) turneri Gardner, 1939, p. 25, pl. 8, figs.
1, 4.
Original description.—*‘Shell of usual dimensions
for the group, unusually heavy. Spire very low, the
apex scarcely rising above the reverted lip at the pos-
terior extremity of the aperture. Body whorl widely
shouldered, deeply serrate at the periphery and serrate
but less deeply at the second carina which outlines the
base of the body. Inner lateral margin deeply and
sharply constricted at the base of the body, the outer
margin scarcely at all. Anterior canal horizontally
compressed and turned sharply to the left and back-
ward. A single nuclear whorl preserved. Four rapidly
enlarging postnuclear whorls, the incised suture fol-
lowing the periphery and on the last whorl crenulated
by the coronal spines. Entire surface spirally lirate, the
lirae tending to alternate in strength and running about
five primaries to each of the whorls of the spire and
the shoulder of the body, finer and less regular upon
the medial portion of the body, coarser toward the an-
terior fasciole. Axial sculpture developed only upon
the final whorls. Peripheral spines very strong, later-
ally compressed, nine on the unique type, one of the
nine partly concealed by the reverted outer lip; series
at the base of the body less prominent, more conical
than those on the periphery but in line with them. In-
cremental sculpture relatively strong, retractive upon
the shoulder. Aperture narrow, obliquely lenticular,
bent towards the apex and obtusely angulated poste-
riorly, obscurely angulated also at the periphery, com-
pressed anteriorly into a slot-like opening. Apertural
opening entirely surrounded by heavily callused mar-
gins. Outer lip very much thickened and reverted, with
a suggestion of a Cassis-like flattening and, at the
opening to the anterior canal, a suggestion of a con-
striction such as that upon Strombus for the extrusion
of the eye stalks; reverted lip continuous around the
posterior commissure, encroaching slightly on the pre-
ceding whorl and spread widely and heavily over the
body whorl, but free from it between the base of the
body and the anterior fasciole. Fasciole conspicuously
wide and conspicuously compressed, oblique to the
axis of the shell. Dimensions of holotype: Height, 43.0
millimetres; greatest diameter, 38.0 millimetres; di-
ameter at right angles to the greatest diameter, 32.0
millimetres.” (Gardner, 1939, p. 25)
Remarks.—Gardner’s description of this species is
very good but as she only had one worn specimen
some additional remarks can be made. The protoconch
is large and consists of three smooth rounded whorls;
the nucleus is expanded and flattened; the protoconch
and first half teleoconch whorl are offset by an angle
of about 15° from the shell axis. Teleoconch whorls
start with eight or nine spiral lines that after the first
half whorl become crenulated; suture margined by a
slightly concave ramp, the ramp delimited by two
slightly stronger crenulated lines, the upper duplex,
and a weaker medial one. The type has nine peripheral
flattened spines but the number varies between seven
and 12 with nine the most common number on large
specimens. The very fine Reklaw specimen figured has
a beautifully polished, almost glazed surface, the body
whorl with effervescent spiral sculpture and prominent
growth lines. Larger specimens often show irregular
labial rugae which with increasing age migrate from
62 BULLETIN 352
within the aperture and thus become visible. Juvenile
specimens of G. (G.) turneri are very difficult to dis-
tinguish from juvenile specimens of the cassid Phal-
ium (Semicassis) reklawensis n.sp., their separation
will be discussed further under that latter species’ sec-
tion. The number of large complete and fragmentary
specimens of G. (G.) turneri shows this to have been
one of the commonest large gastropods in the Reklaw
seas; it is surprising only one specimen of this im-
pressive species has previously been discovered.
Type information.—Holotype: USNM 495184. Type
locality: USGS Sta. 13808, bend of Colorado River,
4.8 km (=3 miles) above old Burleson ferry. The exact
location has been lost but from the description it ap-
pears to also be locality 8 (TBEG 11-T-72) which is
in the Reklaw Formation, and not the Weches as given
by Gardner. Figured Reklaw specimen from location 14.
Material examined.—The type, an additional six rel-
atively complete individuals and 15 partial specimens.
The largest, PRI 33125, that is figured is 63.5 mm
length, 31.8 mm maximum diameter.
Genus PHALIUM Link, 1806, p. 112
Type species.—Buccinum glauca Linnaeus, 1758,
by subsequent designation (Dall, 1909b, p. 62). Recent
in the Indo-Pacific.
Diagnosis.—Shell medium in size; spire acuminate;
last whorl well-rounded. Both the false and true um-
bilicus usually open. Parietal shield anteriorly well-
developed; outer lip thick and with one row of denti-
cles which may be produced into spines at the lower
end.
Range.—The Cassidae are known from the Eocene
onwards, and are carnivorous. Their main prey is re-
ported to be sea urchins. The group is found predom-
inantly in warmer waters although a few live in cooler
latitudes.
Subgenus SEMICASSIS Morch, 1852, p. 112
Type species.—Cassis bisulcata Schubert and Wag-
ner, 1829, by subsequent designation (Harris, G. F,
1897, p. 198). East Africa to the Marshall Islands and
Japan to Australia.
Diagnosis.—Shells somewhat globular, rarely with
varices on the spire; outer surface usually with nu-
merous spiral threads or incised lines. Columella
shield finely wrinkled. Outer lip with fine denticles;
base of outer lip smooth. Siphonal fasciole is rounded,
showing a few longitudinal lines adaperturally.
Phalium (Semicassis) reklawensis, new species
Plate 13, figures 7—8
Description.—Shell small to medium sized, proto-
conch of three and a half smooth globular whorls, the
first minute and flattened. Adult sculpture begins
sharply with six to nine spiral revolving lines and
equal sized longitudinal ribs that become obsolete after
one whorl. Spire whorls shouldered, with one large
spiral line on the carina and another large one below.
In older specimens the ribs on and below the carina
develop many small pointed nodes.The interstitial area
between the spiral lines usually with one to three,
sometimes many interstitial threads. Over the later
whorls the sculpture consists of thick revolving ribs,
rarely with smaller lines, the interstitial spaces with
spiral threads; the whole crossed by numerous close-
set striae, the intersections of the two being slightly
nodular. Outer lip prominently thickened, the edge
sharp, and with 11 to 12 small linear teeth and one
larger one underneath the suture at the posterior end.
Columellar shield with large wrinkles, regular above,
irregular below and within the lower portion of the
aperture. Small umbilicus present but covered by the
columellar shield. Siphonal fasciole longitudinally
threaded. Larger specimens have the body whorl
slightly bicarinate, the lower carina defined by a thick-
ened, sometimes nodular line.
Remarks.—Over 40 complete juvenile and near-
adult specimens show this to be a relatively common
species in the Reklaw. One large fragment indicates
the species reached perhaps 30 mm in length, indicat-
ing that all complete specimens may be to some extent
juvenile. The early whorls of this species are quite
difficult to separate from Galeodea (Gomphopages)
turnert Gardner, 1939; without the protoconch one
could note G. (S.) reklawensis has spiral lines of dif-
fering strengths, sharper longitudinal ribbing, and
beading at their intersections with the spiral sculpture.
A specimen from St. Maurice, Louisiana in the Acad-
emy of Natural Sciences in Philadelphia labelled Gal-
eodea planotecta (missing the outer lip) has similar
but not quite so coarse an ornamentation and no lon-
gitudinal ribbing on the spire. Large fragments of the
body whorl of this species show mature individuals
becoming bicarinate, and then tricarinate in shape. The
absence of varices on the spire, the wrinkled columel-
lar shield and the longitudinally threaded siphonal fas-
ciole place the species in Semicassis. The earliest Sem-
icassis so far reported is from the Oligocene of Ore-
gon, Washington, and the Indo-Pacific region. The
Cook Mountain Formation species Phalium brevicos-
tatum (Conrad, 1834) is easily separated from P. (S.)
reklawensis by its more elongate shape and ornamen-
tation of flat spiral ribbons and incised grooves. The
Weches formation furnishes a Phalium sp. with char-
acters midway between the Cook Mountain and Rek-
law species. A species with a similar sculpture, but
somewhat less related is Phalium (Semicassis) caela-
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 63
tura (Conrad, 1848b), from the Lower Oligocene,
Vicksburg Group. This species is more elongated, has
a very weak shoulder, a rounded outer lip, and pos-
sesses a deep, strongly bent back, anterior notch rather
than the short, almost unnotched, canal seen in P. (S.)
reklawensis.
Etymology.—Noting the Reklaw Formation where
the species occurs.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30373. Type lo-
cality: locality 8. Paratype: UT-TMM 3581, locality
10.
Material examined.—40 specimens, the largest of
which (the holotype) 1s 20 mm in length.
Family FICIDAE Meek, 1864, p. 32
Genus FICOPSIS Conrad, 1866b, p. 100
Type species.—Hemifusus remondii Gabb, 1864, by
subsequent designation (Stewart, 1927, p. 375). Mar-
tinez Eocene of California.
Diagnosis.—Shell more or less inflated, with a low
spire and a long beak; sculpture usually cancellate or
with crenulated spirals; aperture elongate with a long
and twisted siphonal canal.
Remarks.—This genus is restricted to the Eocene of
Europe and North America.
Ficopsis nucleoides, new species
Plate 14, figures 3—5
Description.—Shell small, whorls six, protoconch
consists of three and a quarter to three and a half
smooth whorls of which the last quarter to one-half
whorl may show faint curving irregular striae on the
abapical half. The first half whorl is in line with the
shell axis while the rest of the protoconch is at an acute
angle of 20° to 30°. The adult sculpture consists of a
cancellate ornament of longitudinal and spiral lirae, the
spiral lines crossing over the longitudinal ones. On the
beak the longitudinal lirae are weaker and the spiral
ones alternate in size. Generally one varix occurs on
the first adult whorl, and in older specimens also on
the body whorl. The body whorl is bicarinate with four
to seven spiral lines on the shoulder which tend to
alternate in size. Labrum sharp and in some specimens
thickened within.
Remarks.—The longitudinal costae on several spec-
imens are so prominent that they could almost be re-
garded as costae. The medial carination of the body
whorl is another relatively variable character, strong in
some specimens and almost obsolete in others. The
species combines the larger nucleus, greater number of
lines on the shoulder and the carinate body whorl of
Ficopsis penita (Conrad, 1833a) that ranges from the
Weches Formation to the Gosport Sand Formation,
with the obtuse apex, varices and the tendency to form
longitudinal folds of Ficopsis texana (Harris, 1895a),
known from the Cook Mountain Formation of Texas
and the McBean Formation of South Carolina; it is
probably ancestral to both. The larger flattened pro-
toconch is the primary character differentiating these
specimens from F. penita and F. texana.
Etymology.—The specific name nucleoides (Latin,
nucleus) refers to the large inflated nucleus.
Type information.—Cotypes: PRI 30374-30375;
paratypes: PRI 30376, 30377. Type locality: locality
20.
Material examined.—109 specimens, the largest
complete one: 10.2 mm length, 5.1 mm width.
Suborder PTENOGLOSSA Gray, 1853b, p. 129
Superfamily TRIPHOROIDEA Gray,
1847a, p. 154°
Family CERITHIOPSIDAE H. and A. Adams,
1853, p. 239
Subfamily CERITHIOPSIINAE H. and A. Adams,
853 e5ps 23920
Genus CERITHIOPSIS Forbes and Hanley,
1851, p. 364
Type species.—Murex tubercularis Montague, 1803,
by monotypy. Recent in European Seas.
Diagnosis.—Shell small, slender, turrited, proto-
conch whorls smooth, axially ribbed, longitudinally
lirate or a combination of the above. Adult whorls or-
namented with tuberculated or beaded spiral cords.
Aperture oval or rounded rectangular in shape, colu-
mella short, slightly twisted.
Remarks.—The genus is known from the Upper
Cretaceous to Recent. The animals are all marine and
reported to feed on sponges.
Subgenus CERITHIOPSINA Bartsch, 1911, p. 328
Type species.—Cerithiopsis (Cerithiopsis) necropol-
itana Bartsch, 1911, by original designation. Pleisto-
cene of the San Pedro Group, Deadmans Island, Cal-
ifornia.
Diagnosis.—Differs from Cerithiopsis s.s. by hav-
ing the initial portion of the protoconch whorls smooth
and the final portion axially ribbed.
Remarks.—The subgenus ranges from the Eocene
to Plio-Pleistocene.
Cerithiopsis (Cerithiopsina?) sp.
Plate 12, figures 8—9
Description.—Shell very small, slender, of nine
whorls. Protoconch “‘“Gemmula like”, of five whorls,
° Nomen transl. Kosuge, 1966.
'0 Nomen transl. (ex subfamily Adams, H. and Adams, A, 1853,
p. 223, not 1854 of authors).
64 BULLETIN 352
the tip partially immersed; the first whorl smooth and
the remaining ones with increasingly protractive ri-
blets. Transition to teleoconch sharp and angular. Adult
whorls with concave ramp and three spiral lines on the
ramp, the lines crossing over sharp longitudinal folds
that die out before reaching the suture. Body whorl
with six spiral lines, the fourth from the suture the
largest and the anterior two the weakest. Outer lip
sharp, aperture oval, columella slightly thickened. No
anterior canal or spout.
Remarks.—It is conceivable this small shell is the
juvenile of Bittium ridgei n. sp., due to some similarity
in the early whorls, but the present collections of B.
ridgei show so little variation that this seems unlikely.
Were the protoconch absent there might be little hes-
itation in assigning the specimen to Bittium s.l., but
the multiwhorled ornamented protoconch precludes
that. A monotypic recent genus with similar sculpture
is Eumetula Thiele, 1912, from the Antarctic; this ge-
nus has a thickly ribbed protoconch whorl, a similar
whorl profile and similar teleoconch sculpture with
two spiral lines. Another species in which the teleo-
conch sculpture is markedly similar is Cerithiella der-
tobcarinata Sacco, 1895, from the Miocene (Tortoni-
an) of Italy, of which the protoconch is unknown.
Figured specimen: PRI 30378, from locality 4.
Material examined.—One specimen 2.0 mm in
length.
Superfamily JANTHINOIDEA Lamarck,
1812, p. 204
Family EPITONIIDAE Suter, 1913, p. 318'!
Genus AMAEA H. and A. Adams, 1853, p. 223!
Type species.—Scalaris magnifica Sowerby, 1844a,
by subsequent designation (de Boury, 1909, p. 258).
Recent from the Pacific Coast of Japan.
Diagnosis.—Shell high, thin, shining; whorls inflat-
ed, with numerous longitudinal and spiral lines or
threads, sometimes with a few thin irregular varices;
basal disc defined by a prominent line; aperture ovate
to quadrate.
Remarks.—The genus is known from the Creta-
ceous to Recent.
'' Many authors incorrectly ascribe the family name Epitoniidae
to Berry (1910), probably a mistake for de Boury (1910). In that
paper de Boury does discuss Dall’s use of the genus Epifonium
instead of Scala in connection with the validity of the Bolton cata-
logue, but was not in favour of using it. Dall apparently first uses
the genus Epifonium instead of Scala in Dall (1909b, p. 52), after a
discussion some years earlier (Dall, 1889b, pp. 315-317). The first
author to actually use the family name Epitoniidae seems to be Suter
(1913).
'* Nomen transl. (ex family Adams, H. and Adams, A, 1853, not
1854 of authors).
Subgenus SCALINA Conrad, 1865a, p. 27
Type species.—Scalaria staminea Conrad, 1860, by
subsequent designation (Palmer, 1937, p. 102). Eo-
cene, Gosport Sand Formation of Alabama.
Diagnosis.—Whorls regularly rounded; whorls re-
ticulated with axial costae and spiral ridges, the axials
finer and less crowded together than the spirals, the
interstices of the spirals with fine linear grooves. Basal
disc conspicuous and with fine cancellate ornament.
Remarks.—Modern representatives live in deep wa-
ter. The genus ranges from the Eocene to Recent.
Amaea (Scalina) macula, new species
Plate 12, figures 1—2
Description.—Shell high, turrited, with at least three
smooth and rounded nuclear whorls. Adult whorls
covered with numerous lamellose costae which cross
Over six to seven broad, rounded spiral lines, curve
forward and become almost tangential at the posterior
suture, and then finally disappear beneath the preced-
ing whorl. Whorls slightly shouldered, the shoulder
free of spiral lines. Basal disc present and margined
by a strong nodular revolving cord, the nodules ap-
pearing where the ribs cross over the cord. The ribs
continue to the obscure fasciole as rounded lamellae,
where they then bunch up and become a fringe at the
peristome. Aperture oval with the lower margin slight-
ly reflected; outer lip not thickened. The body whorl
of a complete specimen with 38 ribs, a larger broken
specimen with 48 ribs on the body whorl.
Remarks.—The bent axial ribs, spiral sculpture, lack
of varices and the basal disc with the close-set spiral
and radial lines place this species in Scalina. The clos-
est species is Amaea (Scalina) staminea (Conrad,
1860) from the Gosport Sand Formation; that species
has a similar rounded whorl profile, axial ribs which
meet the posterior suture at an acute angle, and a weak
cord margining the basal disc, the disc itself being al-
most smooth. More distantly related are Amaea (Scal-
ina) trapaquara (Harris, 1895a) and Amaea (Scalina)
trapaquara engonata (Harris, 1895a) from the Cook
Mountain and Weches formations respectively; these
two species have a fairly prominent concave upper
whorl profile, axial ribs that meet the suture almost at
right angles, and no cord margining the basal disc.
Perhaps the commonest species of Epitoniidae from
the Gulf Coast Eocene is Cirsotrema (Coroniscala)
nassulum (Conrad, 1833a), to which it bears a general,
although superficial resemblance; that species has al-
most no macro spiral sculpture.
Etymology.—the name macula (Latin, mesh), refers
to the pattern generated by the equally sized spiral and
longitudinal lines.
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 65
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30350; paratype:
PRI 30351. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—79 specimens, the largest
complete 12.0 mm in length.
Subgenus FORATISCALA de Boury, 1887a, p. 28
Type species.—Scalaria cerithiformis Watelet, 1853,
by original designation. Eocene (Cuisian) of Hérouval,
France.
Diagnosis.—Shell small, narrow and _ thin-shelled.
Whorls inflated, with deeply impressed sutures, orna-
mented with longitudinal lamellar ribs and revolving
axial lines of similar strength. Basal disc present, sep-
arated from the body whorl and the wide umbilicus by
strong cords. Aperture oblique, not entire, outer lip
thin.
Remarks.—tThe presence of the umbilicus distin-
guishes this taxon from other similar ones. The genus
is known from the Paleocene to Eocene.
Amaea (Foratiscala) texana, new species
Plate 12, figures 3—4
Description.—Shell small, whorls at least eight, tip
of spire worn. Whorls rounded, very slightly shoul-
dered and ornamented by five spiral lines and numer-
ous longitudinal lines, the shoulder free of spiral lines.
Basal disc present, margined by a strong cord, the disc
with weak spiral lines and weaker longitudinal ones,
these are the continuation of the longitudinal lines or-
namenting the whorls and continue into the umbilical
area as fine lamellae. The posterior part of the umbil-
icus with a thin covering of callus that spreads over
the upper part of the basal disc.
Remarks.—Even though this specimen is a little
worn, it appears to be closely related to Amaea (Scal-
ina) macula from the Reklaw Formation. A. (F.) tex-
ana has the same number of spiral lines, a similar
whorl profile with only a slightly more prominent
shoulder, and stronger spiral than longitudinal lines. It
is the character of the basal disc, however, where the
differences are greater, in A. (S.) macula the longitu-
dinal lines end in a “‘frill” against the columella
whereas here they run into the umbilicus without
bunching up. The similarity of the spire to A. (S.) mac-
ula could be taken as variation within a species living
in different environments, as A. (S.) macula is found
in a clay/shale (lagoonal) matrix while A. (F.) texana
was collected from an indurated sandstone/ironstone
layer, which is taken as representing clearer waters and
a near-shore higher energy environment. Species of the
subgenus Foratiscala are relatively rare; Cossmann
and Pissaro (1910-1913, pl. 8), list four species from
the Paris Basin Tertiary ranging from the Cuisian to
the Bartonian. Wenz (1944) notes Recent species in
the Indo-Pacific. The present species is allied to Amaea
(Foratiscala) sculptata (Deshayes, 1861), apparently
from the Cuisian, although this may be a mistake as
Furon and Soyer (1947) do not include it under the
Cuisian in their lists. This appears to be the first record
of this subgenus in the Americas.
Etymology.—Referring to the discovery in Texas.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30352. Type lo-
cality: locality 7.
Material examined.—One specimen, 10.7 mm in
length, 3.6 mm maximum diameter.
Genus RUGATISCALA de Boury, 1913, p. 72
Type species.—Scalaria levesquei de Boury, 1887b,
by original designation. Eocene (Cuisian) of the Paris
Basin, France.
Original diagnosis.—‘*Testa solida, imperforata,
eleongoturrita, costis longitudinalibus crassis et fimi-
culis transversis incrassatis ornati. Sutura mediocriter
profunda. Anfractibus convexi, costis longitundinali-
bus crassis funiculis incrassatis impressi et nullo modo
punctati. Ult anfra. spira minor, disco praditus. Aper-
tura subrotunda. Peritoma duples. Internum continuum
crassiusculum, vix prominulum, nitidum. Externum,
postice interruptum, crassum et altema varice costitu-
tum.” (de Boury, 1913, p. 72)
Free translation.—Shell solid, not umbilicated;
whorls inflated with bent axial ribs and (non-punctate)
spiral lines; suture impressed. Basal disc concave,
weakly spirally striate. Aperture oval, outer lip duplex,
apertural varix present.
Remarks.—The genus ranges from the Eocene to the
Miocene.
Rugatiscala cooperi, new species
Plate 12, figure 6—7
Description.—Shell small, tip of protoconch miss-
ing, three finely ribbed whorls remaining, the ribs fee-
bly arcuate and continuous. Teleoconch with eight and
a half whorls. Whorls with rounded longitudinal cos-
tae, 15 on the last whorl, the entire area crossed by
five low rounded ribs that are larger medially and also
more pronounced between the costae. Surface with an
opalescent sheen, not punctate. Basal disc present,
margined by a flat ribbon and with ten close-set spiral
lines, the profile slightly concave with feeble radial
undulations corresponding in position to the costae.
Aperture ovate, peristome continuous, abaperturally
duplex and slightly produced; minute umbilical slit
present.
Remarks.—This species might be placed in Rudis-
cala (de Boury, 1909), due to the similarity to Rud-
iscala harrisi, Palmer, 1937 from the Lower Eocene
Hatchetigbee Formation, and Rudiscala sessilis (Con-
66 BULLETIN 352
rad, 1833b) from the Gosport Sand Formation; R. har-
risi has the same number of ribs and the same minute
crowded spiral sculpture. R. harrisi however, has an
umbilical chink, lacks any larger spiral lines, and has
a smooth multi-whorled protoconch quite unlike that
of R. cooperi. The radically different protoconch in
itself points at R. cooperi belonging to a different ge-
nus than R. harrisi and R. sessilis although the gen-
erally similar teleoconch sculpture is confusing. Coss-
mann, (1912, p 80) includes Rudiscala under Turris-
cala de Boury, 1890; Wenz (1940, pp. 792-793) plac-
es Rudiscala in synonymy with Turriscala and also
includes Rugatiscala under the latter. Palmer (1937, p.
108) cites de Boury’s review of Turriscala and Rud-
iscala where the differences are noted and gives Rud-
iscala full generic rank. For the same reasons I also
prefer to give Rugatiscala full generic rank.
Etymology.—Named in honor of John Cooper of the
Natural History Museum, London
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30353. Type lo-
cality: locality 4.
Material examined.—One specimen, 5.4 mm in
length.
Rugatiscala? sp.
Remarks.—One incomplete specimen was found of
this species. There are seven and one-half remaining
whorls; the nuclear whorls and half the body whorl are
missing. The whorls are ornamented with strong, fairly
sharp-topped axial ribs, 16 on the final whorl, all ov-
erriden by 17—20 spiral lines, those nearer the suture
more crowded together. The basal disc is concave, and
covered with spiral lines the one nearest the periphery
about twice the size of the others. This species is dis-
tinguished from Rugatiscala cooperi n. sp. by the more
numerous spiral lines and axial ribs, and the lack of
an opalescent surface sheen. A similar species is Rud-
iscala harrisi Palmer, 1937 from the lower Eocene,
Hatchetigbee Formation; this species is more elongate,
has spiral lines of a punctate character, and a slight
groove in the umbilical region. Two characters that are
diagnostic of Rugatiscala are the terminal varix on the
outer lip and the duplex character of the peristome at
the columella. As both these characters cannot be seen
due to the damage, the species is only doubtfully re-
ferred to this genus.
Type information.—Figured specimen: PRI 33124,
5.1 mm length.
Superfamily EULIMOIDEA H. and A. Adams,
1854, p. 235
Family EULIMIDAE Troschel, 1853, p. 112
Genus MELANELLA Bowdich, 1822, p. 27
Type species.—Melanella dufresnii Bowdich, 1822,
by monotypy. Recent in the Indo-Pacific region.
Diagnosis.—Shell white, polished; last whorl pro-
duced, inner lip appressed for at least the greater part
of the attenuated base; shell straight or flexed.
Remarks.—MacNeil and Dockery (1984), may be
consulted for a discussion on the validity of Melanella.
The animals are carnivorous, believed to be always
associated with echinoderms. The genus ranges from
the Upper Cretaceous to Recent.
Melanella minutissima, new species
Plate 23, figures 20-21
Description.—Shell minute, whorls six. Protoconch
of one whorl merging smoothly into the adult whorls.
First three to four adult whorls moderately convex
with impressed sutures, thereafter almost flat, with a
slight subsutural depression and flat and indistinct su-
tures. Aperture tear-drop shaped, outer lip thin and par-
asigmoidal, the maximum width occurring where the
body whorl begins to curve towards the base. Colu-
mella slightly twisted and oblique.
Remarks.—This might be taken as the juvenile of
the next species but the initial rounded whorls and
parasigmoidal outer lip will separate the two species.
The type of outer lip is similar to that exhibited by
Rissoina dOrbigny, 1840a, of which a Claibornian
representative is Rissoina (Leanella) cossmanni (A\-
drich, 1910b). The present species lacks the thickened
outer lip and channeled sutures of that species. The
Reklaw species combines characters of both Melanella
and Leanella Cossmann, 1921, two taxa presently
placed in different families. The rounded initial whorls
and the impressed sutures of M. minutissima separate
it from other Claibornian and Jacksonian species of
the genus.
Etymology.—Noting the minute size of the species.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30546; paratype:
PRI 30547. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—Seven specimens, the largest
1.5 mm length.
Melanella cf. notata (I. Lea, 1833)
Plate 23, figures 22—24
Pasithea notata 1. Lea, 1833, p. 101, pl. 4, fig. 80; H. C. Lea, 1849,
p. 103; Harris, 1895c, p. 30.
Cf. Pasithea lugubris 1. Lea, 1833, p. 101, pl. 4, fig. 81; H. C. Lea,
1849, p. 103; Harris, 1895c, p. 26.
Pyramis notata (1. Lea). Conrad in Morton, 1834, p. 4.
Eulima notata (1. Lea). Conrad, 1865a, p. 29; 1866a, p. 14; de Gre-
gorio, 1890, p. 162, pl. 16, fig. 6, copy I. Lea.
Cf. Eulima lugubris (1. Lea). Conrad, 1865a, p. 29; 1866a, p. 14;
Meyer, 1887b, p. 54, pl. 3, fig. 8; de Gregorio, 1890, p. 161, pl.
16, fig. Sa copy Meyer, fig. Sb copy I. Lea; Cossmann, 1893, p.
24. ple 2 S* LOZ pos:
? Turbonilla lugubris (1. Lea). Dall, 1892, p. 255.
Not Rissoina notata (1. Lea). Cossmann, 1893, p. 27, pl. 1, fig. 34
= Eulima cossmanni Aldrich, 1910.
EOcENE MOLLuscs OF TEXAS: GARVIE 67
Not Rissoina (Leaella) notata (1. Lea), Cossmann, 1921, p. 91, pl.
3, figs. 59, 60 = Eulima cossmanni Aldrich, 1910.
Melanella notata (I. Lea). Palmer, 1937, p. 61, pl. 6, figs. 20, 26—
30; pl. 79, fig. 1 type: Brann and Kent, 1960, p. 541; Glibert,
1962b, p. 257.
Balcis notata (1. Lea). Palmer and Brann, 1966, p. 523; Knight,
Hodgkinson, Knight, Reid, Lindveit, Lindveit, and Offeman,
1977, p. 28, 30.
Original description.—*Shell subulate, highly pol-
ished; substance of the shell rather thick; apex acute;
suture very small; whorls eleven, very flat, each one
being marked with an impressed oblique line of
growth; mouth small, acutely angular above, about
one-fifth the length of the shell; columella somewhat
thickened at the base; outer lip somewhat arched, with
an obtuse edge.” (Lea, 1833, p. 101)
Remarks.—The species is smaller and slightly slen-
derer than Melanella notata s.s. from the Gosport Sand
Formation, but otherwise similar. It shows well the
impressed line of growth on each whorl. Two well-
preserved specimens have a glassy lustre and show the
sutural area as a light colored band.
Type information.—Holotype: ANSP 5495. Figured
Reklaw specimen: PRI 33105, from locality 14.
Material examined.—15 specimens, the largest
(crushed) 8 mm length.
Melanella aff. extremis (Aldrich, 1911)
Plate 23, figure 19
Eulima extremis Aldrich, 1911, p. 8, pl. 3, fig.4; Palmer and Brann,
1966, p. 667.
Melanella extremis (Aldrich). Palmer, 1937, p. 65, pl. 6, figs. cf. 8, 9,
13 copy Aldrich, cf. 14, 15, cf. 21; Brann and Kent, 1960, p. 540.
Original description.—*‘Shell polished; whorls nine
or ten; suture very shallow showing indistinctly; ap-
erture elongate; outer lip slightly sinuous; inner lip re-
flected over the lower part of the pillar.’ (Aldrich,
1911, p. 8)
Remarks.—One crushed specimen was obtained of
a very slender Melanella with the same shining pol-
ished surface seen in M. extremis, from the Middle
Eocene.
Type information.—Holotype: USNM 1963 (lost fide
Palmer and Brann, 1966, p. 667). Figured specimen:
PRI 30417, 8.2 mm length, from locality 20.
Order NEOGASTROPODA Wenz, 1938, p. 71'°
Superfamily MURICIOIDEA da Costa,
1776, p. 224
Family MURICIDAE da Costa, 1776, p. 224
Subfamily MURICINAE Rafinesque, 1815, p. 18
Genus HEXAPLEX Perry, 1811, pl. 8, fig. 4
Type species.—Murex chichoreum Gmelin, 1791, by
subsequent designation (Iredale, 1915, p. 471). Recent,
the Philippines.
'S Replacement name for Stenoglossa Bouvier, 1887.
Diagnosis.—Shell solid, usually quite large. Spire
moderate to high, whorls with five or more spinose,
foliated or knobbly varices and having spiral cords.
Aperture large and ovate, canal short, recurved and
partially obscured.
Remarks.—Hexaplex is similar to Chicoreus Mont-
fort, 1810, except for the number of varices. Vokes
(1968 pp. 86-87) gives a discussion particularly ap-
plicable to Tertiary members of the group. The distri-
bution is principally tropical and subtropical in extent
and in depths of 0 to 300 meters. The genus is known
from the Eocene onward.
Hexaplex eoa, new species
Plate 14, figures 8—9
Description.—Shell small, high spired. Protoconch
missing in all available specimens. Whorls at least six,
rounded and with a flat to slightly convex prominent
ramp; below the ramp with two or three spiral cords,
the uppermost on the carina and almost effaced except
on the varix. Body whorl with about 11 large cords
becoming less prominent on the beak. Between the
cords the surface shows numerous irregular spiral stri-
ae, stronger on the ramp, and an occasional interme-
diate spiral line. Early whorls with eight to nine foli-
ated spinose varices, later whorls with 10 to 11; the
tips of the spines strongly retractive. Aperture ellipti-
cal, outer lip with an open channel extending to a large
spine; five prominent denticles below the spine, colu-
mella lip smooth, siphonal canal moderate in length.
Remarks.—This species belongs to the Claibornian
group consisting of Hexaplex (Hexaplex) texanus
Vokes, 1968, Hexaplex (Hexaplex) silvaticus (Palmer,
1937) and Hexaplex (Hexaplex) vanuxemi (Conrad,
1834). The present species is closest to the Weches
species H. (H.) texanus and may be distinguished from
it by the higher spire, the weaker posterior spiral cord
and the lack of columella denticles. Both specimens
are rather worn and were found embedded in extreme-
ly fossiliferous ironstone boulders occurring at the
very top of the Marquez Member, the deposition of
which is presumed to have been a near-shore environ-
ment. Despite the wear it can be seen that H. (H.) eoa
is more prominently spinose that the other three spe-
cies. This appears to be the oldest species of Hexaplex
known within the limits of the genus as defined by
Vokes, 1968, extending the the limits of the genus into
the Reklaw.
Etymology.—The name eoa (Latin, dawn), refers to
the dawn of the genus.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30381; paratype:
PRI 30382. Type locality: locality 7.
Material examined.—Two specimens, the largest
(the holotype) 15.0 mm in length.
68 BULLETIN 352
Genus PTERYNOTUS Swainson,
1833, pl. 100
Type species.—Murex pinnatus Swainson, 1822, by
subsequent designation (Swainson, 1822 pl. 122). Re-
cent in the Indo-Pacific.
Diagnosis.—Small fusiform shells with three
winged varices, siphonal canal usually open, columella
lip adherent and smooth, spiral lines usually present.
Remarks.—Few modern members are known of this
genus and those usually live in deep water. The group
existed from the Early Paleocene and was relatively
common especially in the Tertiary of the London and
Paris Basins.
Subgenus PTERYNOTUS s.s.
Diagnosis.—Outer lip entire and without denticles,
siphonal canal slender, open and recurved.
Pterynotus (Pterynotus) cf. stenzeli Vokes, 1970
Plate 14, figures 11—12
Pterynotus (Pterynotus) stenzeli Vokes, 1970, p. 8, pl. 1 fig. 5, 1992,
p. 5, pl. 1, fig. 3; Harasewych and Jensen, 1979, no. 22, p. 3.
Remarks.—One specimen obtained of this species.
The shell is unfortunately missing the outer lip, and
without the presence of labral denticles and an open
apertural spine cannot definitely be assigned to P. (P.)
stenzeli, previous varix growth stages, however, show
indications of the presence of such earlier spines. At
six and a half whorls and 12.3 mm in length, the shell
is smaller and slightly shorter than the typical Weches
form, but this is not considered important enough for
taxonomic separation. It does also appear that previous
spines occurred above the carina unlike in P. (P.) sten-
zeli where they are positioned on the carina; if better
specimens should validate this fact, the Reklaw forms
may have to be separated.
Type information.—Holotype: TBEG 36637. Type
locality: TBEG 173-T-19, 6.4 km west of Chireno; hill
on San Augustine road (Texas Highway 21), Nacog-
doches County, Texas. Figured Reklaw specimen: PRI
33126, from locality 4.
Superfamily BUCCINOIDEA Rafinesque,
1815, p. 145
Family COLUMBELLIDAE Swainson, 1840, p. 61
Genus MITRELLA Risso, 1826, p. 272
Type species.—Mitrella marmin Risso, 1826, by
original designation. Recent in the Mediterranean.
Diagnosis.—Shell medium-sized, moderately slen-
der, spire high, pillar slightly constricted. Nucleus slen-
der, consisting of about one and a half bulging whorls,
the first part rather loosely coiled. Aperture relatively
wide. Anterior canal virtually absent, the outer lip ex-
tending down to base of aperture without any constric-
tion. Siphonal notch shallow. Columella slightly bulg-
ing at base. Inner lip bearing slender denticles. Parietal
callus thin except at posterior channel. Outer lip some-
what varicose, bearing a very shallow broad notch near
suture, the interior bearing heavy denticles. Sculpture
limited to weak spiral cords on pillar (Woodring, 1928,
a, 9/3)
Remarks.—Nine species are found in the Paleogene
of the Gulf costal plain. The group expanded greatly
in Miocene times, with Gardner (1947) noting 22 spe-
cies in the Alum Bluff Group of Florida. Abbott
(1974) records 23 species from the Atlantic and Gulf
coast provinces of the U.S. The genus is widely dis-
tributed today in warm and shallow waters.
Subgenus CLINURELLA Sacco, 1890, p. 44
Type species.—Columbella (Clinurella) scalaris
Sacco, 1890, by subsequent designation (Palmer, 1937,
p. 281). Miocene of Italy.
Diagnosis.—Shell small, turrited, spire high with an
acute apex. Spire whorls smooth, straight-sided, some-
times with a subsutural spiral line. Body whorl with a
few spiral lines on the base. Canal short, wide and
somewhat off-center. Columella excavated, smooth; la-
brum crenulated or with short lirae.
Mitrella (Clinurella) nuttalli, new species
Plate 14, figures 15—17
Description.—Apical area of the larger specimens
somewhat eroded. Juvenile specimens show a high
conical protoconch of four and three-quarter whorls,
the first two and one-half smooth, the next one and a
quarter with close-set longitudinal threads that are
bounded at the abapical suture by a spiral thread. Adult
sculpture begins sharply and consists of smooth,
straight-sided whorls with two equally sized threads
below the suture and a groove of the same size above
the suture. On large specimens the number of revolv-
ing lines may increase to four by the penultimate
whorl; the body whorl lirate from the subsutural line
to the base, the lines alternating in size. Outer lip cre-
nate with five to nine lirae. Columella concave above,
sometimes with a swelling on the lower margin; below
reflected and moderately twisted.
Remarks.—This species has affinities to both Mi-
trella (Clinurella) bucciniformis (Heilprin, 1879) and
Mitrella (Columbellopsis) mississippiensis (Meyer and
Aldrich, 1886), both from the Upper Claiborne Group;
M. (C.) mississippiensis has a smaller smooth area on
the body whorl, a shorter canal, three tubercles on the
columella and seven denticles on the labrum (not lirate
as in M. (C.) nuttalli); M. (C.) bucciniformis has more
prominently convex whorls, only one subsutural line
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 69
on the later spire whorls, a larger smooth area on the
body whorl and no twist to the canal. The crenate la-
brum and smooth inner lip place M. (C.) nuttalli in
subgenus Clinurella.
Etymology.—Named in honor of Clive P. Nuttall
formerly of the Natural History Museum, London.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30383; paratype:
PRI 30384, a juvenile. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—18 specimens, the largest: 9.5
mm length, 4.7 mm width.
Mitrella (Clinurella) nuttalli lineata,
new subspecies
Plate 14, figures 1—2
Description.—Shell small, thick shelled, to six and
three-quarter whorls. Protoconch of three and a half
whorls, usually all smooth, sometimes the final eighth
with widely spaced indistinct riblets. Adult whorls
convex, sutures impressed and in the center of a prom-
inent channel. The whorls of the spire have a sculpture
of flat-topped spiral bands, the bands wider than the
interstices. Early whorls with one or two bands below
the suture and by the fifth whorl the number of bands
has increased to five. The body whorl with 15 main
spiral bands, alternating with an equal number of
smaller ones, becoming subequal in size towards the
anterior end. Lines of growth very weak and parasig-
moidal. Aperture elongate-elliptical, slightly more than
half the total length of the shell, notched posteriorly
and with a straight channel below. Outer lip worn, but
apparently was thin-edged, labrum with ten strong lir-
ae starting some distance behind the outer edge. Col-
umella excavated above, the margin to the channel
with a thick deposit of callus and one small denticle
at the posterior end. Umbilical depression beside the
large siphonal fasciole.
Remarks.—The different protoconch will separate
this subspecies from Mitrella nuttalli immediately,
without it the shorter form, thicker shell and more
evenly lirate sculpture can be used. This species is
close to Mitrella alabamensis (Aldrich, 1895) from the
Hatchetigbee Formation of Alabama. The Alabama
specimen is a thinner shelled and slenderer species, has
denticles on the outer lip, a greater number of revolv-
ing lines on the spire and a more pronounced curvature
of the outer lip. This specimen has only one swelling
at the lower end of the parietal area. The specimen
combines characters of both Mitrella s.s and Astyris
s.s. The species of genus Mitrella are generally smooth
except for the base of the last whorl and possesses a
smooth or slightly wrinkled columella, while Astyris
possesses a channeled suture and a body whorl equal
to half of the total length. This species, M. alabamen-
sis and a so far unnamed species from the Weches
Formation at Burleson Bluff, Brazos River, Texas,
form a natural group, and could belong to a new genus
but without a specimen with an intact protoconch it is
considered premature to define it here.
Etymology.—The specific name /ineata (Latin, line),
refers to the very prominent spiral lines over the entire
surface.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30385. Type lo-
cality: locality 20.
Material examined.—2\ specimens, the largest (the
holotype), 13.0 mm length, 6.4 mm width.
Genus METULA H. and A. Adams, 1853, p. 84
Type species.—Buccinum metula Hinds, 1845 (cited
by H. and A. Adams as Metula hindsii) by tautonoray.
Recent, Pacific coast of Panama.
Diagnosis.—* ‘Shell medium-sized, moderately slen-
der to very slender, whorls not or only slightly con-
stricted at suture, body whorl very long. Nucleus stout,
consisting of almost two smooth whorls. Aperture very
long, narrow, elliptical, tapering to an acute angle at
the posterior end, constricted at anterior end to form a
short, wide, slightly recurved, moderately emarginate
canal. Siphonal fasciole low. Edge of inner lip forming
a definite edge along pillar and parietal wall. Outer lip
varicose, its inner edge bearing broad denticles that
may be extended into short lirations.”” (Woodring,
1928, p. 285)
Remarks.—Metula s.s. is known trom the Oligocene
to Recent. Woodring (1928), believed the Lower Eo-
cene Metula sylvaerupis Harris, 1899 deserved sub-
generic rank under Daphnobela Palmer (1937), and
Palmer and Brann (1966) do not follow Woodring’s
suggestion, and keep the Eocene species from North
America under Metula s.s.
Metula elongatoides, new species
Plate 15, figures 3—4
Description.—Shell small, very elongate, whorls
eight and one-half, protoconch of three and a half
whorls, the first two and a half smooth and conical,
the final one almost cylindrical, smooth except for a
final quarter turn of fine arcuate riblets that gradually
increase in strength. Sutures impressed; whorls orna-
mented with numerous spiral lines, flatter on the lower
half of the whorl, nodular on the upper half where
crossed by growth lines. On later whorls a few spiral
lines on the upper half of the whorl increase moder-
ately in strength, the one margining the suture devel-
oping a duplex character. Very occasional weak vari-
ces sometimes present. Aperture and canal together a
little less than one-third the total length of the shell;
outer lip smooth, finely lirate within, not continuing
70 BULLETIN 352
into the interior; columella straight, smooth, anterior
canal short, bent to the left and weakly emarginate.
Remarks.—The protoconch places this species in
Metula; it is the most elongate of all the Metula spe-
cies known to me. In outline it is certainly closer to
Parvisipho Cossmann, 1889, of which a few species
are known from the Eocene of the Paris Basin.
Etymology.—Noting the extremely elongate form of
this species.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30292; paratype:
PRI 30293. Type locality: locality 4.
Material examined.—Eight specimens, the largest
(the holotype) 12.9 mm long.
Superfamily CYMATIOIDEA Thiele, 1925, p. 90
Family COLUMBRARIIDAE Dall, 1909a, p. 213
Subfamily COLUMBRARIINAE Dall,
1909a, p. 213
Genus PPEUDOMETULA, new genus
Type species.—Metula gracilis Johnson, 1899, no.
7005 ANSP, herein. Middle Eocene, Cook Mountain
Formation of Texas.
Diagnosis.—Elongate, finely cancellate Metula-like
shells with varices usually a constant angular distance
apart. Protoconch smooth, conical. The suture and var-
ix encroaching onto the previous whorl. Callus plate
absent in juvenile specimens, weakly developed in the
adult. Outer lip weakly dentate or lirate. Anterior notch
shallow.
Remarks.—The genus Metula H. and A. Adams,
1853 as known in the Americas includes two disparate
groups of species. On the one hand there are the shells
exemplified by the Recent Metula amosi Vanetta,
1913, Metula metula (Hinds, 1845), and similar fossil
species such as Metula gabbi Brown and Pilsbry,
1911, from the Miocene Gatun Formation of Panama,
and Metula fastidiosa Casey, 1903, from the Oligocene
Red Bluff Formation. These species are long and ovate
in shape, evenly cancellate, with a varicose outer lip
and denticles on the inner edge; varices except for a
possible terminal one are absent. The genus Metula
has generally been placed in the Buccinidae although
Woodring (1928, p. 287) notes it may belong in the
Columbellidae. Woodring (1928, pp. 286-287) also
believed that the American Eocene Metula species
should receive subgeneric rank as the whorls of those
species have a different shape, a less recurved and less
deeply emarginate canal; he suggested that Daphno-
bela Cossmann, 1896b was available. In the Eocene
through Oligocene there is a related group of species
represented by Metula sylvaerupis Harris, 1899, Me-
tula brazosensis Johnson, 1899, and Metula gracilis
Johnson, 1899; these latter species are shorter, have
regularly spaced varices that encroach on the preced-
ing whorl, a columellar plate in the adult and a short
canal. Woodring’s suggestion to assign these latter spe-
cies to Daphnobela is ill-advised; the type is the En-
glish Bartonian species Metula junceum (Solander,
1766, non: J. Sowerby, 1822); this species has a blunt
paucispiral protoconch, a fine, evenly ribbed sculpture
with occasional growth resting stages, and no varices
and no denticles or lirae inside the outer lip. Cossmann
(1896a, p. 93) places Daphnobela in the Pleurotomi-
dae, whereas most modern authors place it in the Buc-
cinidae as a subspecies to Metula. Keen’s (1971, pp.
503-504, 509) diagnosis of Columbraria agrees well
with the characters seen in the three Eocene species,
M. sylvaerupis, M. brazosensis and M. gracilis and is
remarkably similar to that of Columbraria (Colum-
braria) lucasensis Strong and Hertlein, 1937, and Col-
umbraria (Columbraria) siphonata (Reeve, 1844) con-
sidering the long intervening time period. The colu-
mellar plate, such a prominent feature of modern
members of this group, is usually absent in all but the
larger Eocene shells but even in modern specimens is
only fully developed in mature shells. The lack of a
strong columella plate and the more fragile shell than
Columbraria s.s is deemed sufficient to define this
similar genus.
Pseudometula gradus, new species
Plate 15, figures 5—6
Description.—Shell small, fusiform. Protoconch of
two and a half whorls, the tip inflated and partially
enrolled, a single whorl of smooth, fine riblets appears
on the next whorl after which the full cancellate or-
nament develops rapidly. Later whorls moderately
stepped and ornamented with seven spiral lines, the
two below the suture larger and wider apart than the
remaining. The lines cross over numerous ribs, the in-
tersections nodular. Body whorl with 26 or 27 spiral
lines, nodular above the midsection and finer and more
closely spaced below. Varices indistinct on early
whorls, moderate in size on later ones and number
about one per whorl. Outer lip with terminal varix,
labrum with numerous equally spaced lirae the entire
length of the inner lip and siphonal canal, the lirae
continuous. Aperture elongate, canal short, slightly ex-
panded basally and barely notched.
Remarks.—The closest American species is Metula
sylvaerupis Harris, 1899, from the Hatchetigbee For-
mation at Woods Bluff, Tombigbee River, Alabama.
That species has a different protoconch, a straighter
canal, short denticles on the outer lip, and a heavier
labial deposit.
Etymology.—The specific name gradus (Latin,
step), refers to the stepped whorls.
EOCENE MOLLuSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 71
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30388; paratype:
PRI 30389, a juvenile. Type locality: locality 4.
Material examined.—30 specimens, three adult, the
largest 29.9 mm length.
Family CYMATIIDAE Pilsbry, 1922, p. 356
Genus DISTORSIO Roeding, 1798, p. 133
Type species.—Murex anus Linnaeus, 1758, by sub-
sequent designation (Gray, 1847a, p. 133). Recent,
Indo-Pacific.
Diagnosis.—Shells with distorted, gnarled aper-
tures; periostracum hairy. Varix on outer lip, aperture
more or less constricted, with prominent denticles and
with a moderately long canal, columella shield broad.
Remarks.—Recent members of this genus inhabit
the warmer waters of the Pacific, Indian and Western
Atlantic oceans. The genus is known from the Eocene
onward.
Subgenus PERSONELLA Conrad, 1865a, p. 21
Type species.—Distorsio septemdentata Gabb,
1860, by monotypy. Claibornian Eocene of the United
States.
Diagnosis.—Shell size as Distorsio s.s. but with a
wider aperture and smaller teeth; columella shield
moderately broad.
Remarks.—tThe subgenus is restricted to the Eocene
of North America and Australia.
Distorsio (Personella) nucleoides, new species
Plate 15, figures 11—13
Description.—Protoconch proportionately very
large, of four and a half to four and three-quarters
inflated whorls, about twice the size of the type of the
subgenus. Nucleus minute and pointed, first one and a
half whorls smooth, then developing widely spaced
longitudinal striae which become close-set by the end
of the nuclear whorls, and eight to nine fine spiral
striae which start after the second whorl. Adult sculp-
ture begins abruptly and consists of four revolving
lines and numerous large ribs which form a reticulated
ornament. The interstices have a finer secondary retic-
ulation generated by numerous fine spiral and longi-
tudinal threads. Each whorl generally has one large
varix. Ribs obsolete on the lower half of the body
whorl, canal moderately reflected and strongly twisted.
Outer lip thickened within and bearing five to six den-
ticles, the lower three moderate in size, above that a
very small one and above that the two largest. Labial
callus with two long denticles on the lower margin of
the columella and three smaller ones above. The lon-
gitudinal ribs are visible under the upper part of the
parietal callus.
Remarks.—This extends the known range of the ge-
nus to the lower part of the Claibornian. The Academy
of Natural Sciences in Philadelphia has several speci-
mens from the Reklaw Formation at Black Shoals on
the Colorado River, Texas, which may be part of the
lot sent to Heilprin in 1881; all of these specimens
have a worn protoconch but are referable to this spe-
cies. The emergence of this genus in America may
actually have been slightly earlier since Stephenson
(1953, p. 35) notes a mold referable to a possible Dis-
torsio in sandstone stratigraphically below the Reklaw
in northeastern Texas. The Reklaw species can easily
be distinguished from Distorsio (P.) septemdentata
Gabb, 1860, by the larger ornate protoconch. Without
the protoconch one notes that D. (P.) nucleoides is
slenderer with a spire angle of about 43° and four re-
volving nodular lines on the spire while D. (P.) sep-
temdentata is much larger, has a spire angle of about
48°, three coarse nodular lines on the spire and be-
comes very much more distorted with age.
Etymology.—The specific name nucleoides refers to
the inflated protoconch.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30390; paratype:
PRI 33109. Type locality: locality 21.
Material examined.—83 specimens, the largest 8.6
mm length, 4.5 mm width.
Family NASSARIIDAE Iredale, 1916, p. 82
Genus COLWELLIA Nuttall and Cooper,
1973, p. 208
Type species.—Colwellia fexuosa Edwards in Low-
ry, Etheridge and Edwards, 1866, by original desig-
nation. Upper Eocene, Middle Headon beds, Isle of
Wight, England.
Original diagnosis.—**Agrees with Pseudocominel-
la except in the following respects: seldom exceeds 20
mm in height; protoconch of about two and a half
smooth whorls, small, about 1 mm height, initially
slightly flattened, first whorl very small; teleoconch
with spiral and collabral sculpture of varying
strengths; subsutural platform either poorly developed
or absent; growth lines of fasciole broadly sinuous as
in Desorinassa; outer lip often denticulate within.”
(Nuttall and Cooper, 1973, p. 208)
Remarks.—The genus is restricted to the Middle to
Upper Eocene of Europe and North America.
Colwellia bilineata, new species
Plate 15, figures 7—8
Description.—Protoconch of two and a half to two
and three-quarters smooth whorls, rounded and rapidly
expanding, the first minute, flattened and partially im-
mersed in the next. Adult sculpture begins with close-
set very slightly curved longitudinal ribs upon which
Te BULLETIN 352
two or three fine spiral lines develop just below the
suture. The spiral lines gradually increase in size
throughout the succeeding whorls forming a small
concave ramp between them; longitudinal ribs rapidly
decrease in size, except on the shoulder area where
they form nodes at the intersections with the spiral
lines. Each pair of nodes is connected by a short pro-
socline rib. Spiral lines weak on early whorls, becom-
ing gradually stronger on later whorls, and well de-
fined on the body whorl. A single plication on the
lower margin of the columella. Siphonal fasciole bor-
dered by a sharp line, callus deposit thin. A thickened
area behind the outer lip.
Remarks.—In some specimens the longitudinal
folds are entirely lacking and the revolving lines are
free of nodes; specimens exist with all gradations be-
tween the smooth form and forms where the post-nu-
clear longitudinal ribs increase in size over the spire
and then become obsolete again over the body whorl.
A few specimens develop another finer line below the
suture which may also become nodose. On two spec-
imens all three spiral lines are equal in strength, close-
set, and have a greater number of ribs and nodes. This
seems to correlate with the presence of a small sub-
sutural carina and may warrant subspecific rank al-
though some intermediate forms do occur. Three
American west coast species have been assigned to
Colwellia by Nuttall and Cooper, 1973; this species
and the next are the first to be recognized from the
Gulf coast area. The character of the siphonal fasciole
to which Nuttall and Cooper attached major impor-
tance in their diagnosis of Colwellia and similar gen-
era, 1s duplicated almost exactly in this species. Anom-
alous is the far smaller size of this species, and the
lack of denticulation within the outer lip, although few
specimens do show some incipient development of
that feature. A similar species is Dorsanum n. sp. from
the Lower Eocene Sabinetown Formation of Texas, but
C. bilineata may be separated by the subsutural lines
of equal strength, the less prominent shoulder and the
smooth medial area of the body whorl. A closely sim-
ilar genus is Desorinassa Nuttall and Cooper, 1973,
but that genus is distinguished from Colwellia by the
absence of collabral sculpture, a convex ramp, and the
lack of denticles and ribbing within the outer lip. All-
mon (1990) has revised the Bullia group and recog-
nizes Colwellia in the Middle Eocene of Britain and
France, and possibly the Miocene of the West Coast
of the U.S. I have collected juvenile specimens of C.
bilineata, or a very similar species from the Seguin
Formation, so the genus extends back at least to the
base of the Lower Eocene. Desorinassa is recognised
from the Paleocene to Lower Eocene.
Etymology.—The specific name bilineata (Latin,
double line), refers to the lines on the shoulder.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30391; para-
types: PRI 30393, 30409. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—104 specimens, the largest:
7.0 mm length, 4.0 mm width.
Colwellia sp.
Plate 15, figures 9-10
Remarks.—One specimen was obtained of a Col-
wellia with the outer lip broken but sufficiently distinct
to be separated from C. bilineata. The nucleus is larger
and more flattened than in the above species, the
whorls have fine lines that increase in size towards the
suture and are not abapically nodular. The whorl pro-
file is rounded with no shoulder and a smaller portion
of the body whorl is smoother than in C. bilineata.
Figured specimen: PRI 30438, from locality 20.
Material examined.—One specimen, 5.3 mm length,
3.0 mm width.
Genus TRITIARIA Conrad, 1865a, p. 21
Type species.—Buccinum mississippiensis Conrad,
1848, by monotypy. Oligocene of Mississippi.
Diagnosis.—Distinguished from species of the very
similar genus Phos Montfort, 1810, by the more an-
terior position of the siphonal fasciole, the oval aper-
ture and the protoconch with some collabral costellae.
Remarks.—A few species belonging to the closely
similar genus Antillophos Woodring, 1928, live in the
waters of Florida and the West Indies and are com-
monly found in sand in waters of shallow to moderate
depths. The genus is known from the Eocene and Oli-
gocene of America.
Tritiaria nodosa, new species
Plate 15, figures 16-17
Description.—Shell small in size, whorls eight, nu-
cleus globular and slightly depressed, protoconch of
two and a half to three rapidly enlarging whorls, the
last one eighth to one quarter of which develop slightly
inclined longitudinal folds. The adult sculpture begins
with three or four spiral threads of which the lower
three develop into thick lines which cross widely
spaced collabral folds. Later whorls develop longitu-
dinal lines midway between the original three. These
increase in size until on the body whorl a reticulated
sculpture is formed. Where the transverse lines cross
the longitudinal ones prominent nodes are formed. La-
bial area margined below by a weak fold, usually with
one denticle posteriorly, and more rarely two to four
weak folds anteriorly. Siphonal fasciole bounded pos-
teriorly by a large beaded cord which is composed of
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 73
five to six slightly smaller folds. Profile deeply
notched, umbilical slit present.
Remarks.—On most adult specimens the longitu-
dinal folds decrease in size becoming ribs; on some
they are so small that a cancellate ornament is gen-
erated. In a few specimens the folds do not decrease
in size and a more robust type of shell is developed.
The change from folds to ribs usually occurs at about
the seventh whorl; in a few specimens the ribs even
change back to folds. Occasionally the labial orna-
ment is intensified to such an extent as to form wrin-
kles over the entire surface, somewhat reminiscent
of Cassis. The species is abundant in bed C of lo-
calities 12 to 23, but almost nonexistent in other
beds. Three related species are Tritiaria zacatensis
Gardner, 1945 from the Laredo Formation of Mexi-
co, Tritiaria hilli (Harris, 1894) and more distantly
Tritiaria albirupina (Harris, 1894), both from the
Upper Eocene Jackson Group, of which the Mexican
species 7. zacatensis is the most similar. This species
has an identical protoconch, similar but larger folds
that do not die out on the later whorls, and, as is
also the case with the other two species, no finer
intermediate spiral and longitudinal lines.
Etymology.—The specific name nodosa (Latin,
knotty), refers to the nodose character of the sculpture.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30394; para-
types: PRI 30395-30397. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—126 specimens, the largest:
7.2 mm length, 3.1 mm width.
Genus ANTILLOPHOS Woodring, 1928, p. 259
Type species.—Cancellaria candei d Orbigny,
1841a. Recent in the West Indies.
Original diagnosis.—**Shell medium-sized, moder-
ately stout. Nucleus consisting of between three to four
rapidly enlarging whorls, the last whorl bearing a spi-
ral thread near anterior edge, above which, on the last
quarter whorl, lie about five widely spaced, strongly
curved, protractive axial riblets. Aperture moderately
wide, forming a short, wide, deeply emarginate canal.
Siphonal fasciole broad, low, limited by a narrow
thread, bearing spiral threads and a weak axial groove,
followed by a slight swelling. Edge of inner lip above
basal fold bearing several irregular denticles. Parietal
wall bearing a ridge near its posterior edge. Near base
of outer lip lies a shallow stromboid notch. Interior of
outer lip strongly lirate. Sculpture consisting of axial
ribs and spiral threads.”” (Woodring, 1928, p. 259)
Remarks.—to date Antillophos has not been recog-
nized earlier than the Miocene. MacNeil in MacNeil
and Dockery (1984, p. 133) conjectured that Terebri-
fusus amoenus Conrad, 1833b might be a progenitor,
but this seems unlikely given these specimens. Most
authors treat Antillophos as a subgenus of Tritiaria;
typical Tritiaria as recognised above under 7. nodosa,
however, is rather more widely separated from Anztil-
lophos than are the Miocene representatives of those
two taxa. I therefore prefer to treat Antillophos as a
full genus. The ancestors of this taxon should probably
be looked for in Sassia or Ranella.
Antillophos multilineatum, new species
Plate 18, figures 10—13
Description.—Shell small to medium in size, whorls
nine, protoconch of four smooth whorls, the tip swol-
len and partially enrolled, the last one-third with a
weak spiral ridge and weak protractive riblets, transi-
tion to teleoconch sculpture gradual. Early teleoconch
whorls angular with strong longitudinal folds, ten on
the second teleoconch whorl; with age the whorls be-
come more rounded, the folds increase to about 14 and
then disappear on the last spire whorl; the final three
whorls with one or two varices per whorl, the body
whorl with one at the aperture. Spire whorls with six
or seven raised spiral lines, the body whorl about 18,
between each pair a weaker one and between those,
one or two even weaker ones; where crossed by
growth lines the spiral sculpture tends to nodularity.
Aperture elongate, weak anal sinus present, outer lip
broadly and weakly nodular within; inner lip with a
posterior duplex parietal fold, anteriorly with a few
weak denticles at the start of the short, weakly bent-
back canal; siphonal fasciole strong; canal moderately
notched.
Remarks.—Despite some similarity to Sassia (Sas-
sia) conradiana (Aldrich, 1885), this species cannot
be placed in that genus. Genus Sassia, as discussed by
Wrigley (1932), and used in MacNeil and Dockery
(1984), has a regular arrangement of varices spaced at
equal angular intervals, a feature not seen in the Rek-
law species; the lack of a bent-back canal, a wrinkled
or lirate columella also confirm the separation. The
subdued spiral ornamentation of the two Paris Basin
species Charonia (Sassia) formosum (Deshayes, 1865)
and Charonia (Sassia) columbrina (Lamarck, 1804)
indicates some similarity, although both those species
also have a bent canal. Palmer and Brann (1966, pp.
873-874) list four species of Ranella from the Paleo-
cene and Eocene of the eastern and southern United
States. None of these shows much similarity and in
fact both the Paleocene Ranella showalteri (Conrad,
1860) and Lower Eocene Ranella tuomeyi Aldrich,
1886, appear to belong in Sassia if Wrigley’s (1932)
diagnosis is followed. With reference to published fig-
ures and diagnoses the closest species would appear to
be Eutritonium (Epidromus) autopsis (Conrad, 1860).
This species has not been rediscovered fide Harris
74 BULLETIN 352
(1899, p. 66) and since neither locality or age is
known, Palmer and Brann (1966, p. 675) recommend-
ed the species should be disregarded. If the generic
characters described by Woodring are interpreted in a
loose sense this species fits well in Antillophos. Well-
preserved juvenile specimens show a faint carina or
line in the lower quarter of the last protoconch whorl
and the gradual development of numerous protractive
riblets. The basal columellar fold, the labial lirae and
posterior parietal-wall ridge are all present but very
weakly defined. The stromboid notch is only seen on
the two largest specimens and is very shallow. Very
confusingly, juvenile and young adult specimens of
this species have a form and ornament remarkably
similar to Weches and Stone City specimens of Strep-
tochetus limulus (Conrad, 1833b), only the conical,
smooth protoconch and lack of columella notch can
reliably distinguish the two taxa in the juvenile state.
More mature specimens of S. /imulus are easily distin-
guished by the squat form, the swollen subsutural col-
lar and concave ramp, the terminal fold of the colu-
mella, and the twisted canal.
Etymology.—Multi (Latin, many) lineatum (Latin,
lines), referring to the many fine spiral lines orna-
menting the whorls.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30557; para-
types: PRI 30558, 30559. Type locality: locality 4.
Material examined.—15 specimens, the largest 20
mm length, 8.0 mm width.
Genus BUCCINANOPS d Orbigny, 1841a, p. 434
Type species.—Buccinum cochlidum Dillwyn, 1817
(non Kiener, 1834), by subsequent designation (Gray,
1847a, p. 139). Recent, Brazil to Patagonia.
Diagnosis.—Shell bucciniform, usually thick and
robust in appearance. Spire never greater than one-
third shell height. Columella bears pronounced termi-
nal fold. Internal sculpture almost always lacking. Ex-
ternal sculpture usually simple. Parietal callus usually
expanded onto body whorl but never thick. Anterior
canal relatively wide and elongate. Sutures often en-
amelled. (After Allmon, 1990)
Remarks.—The genus is known from the Eocene
onward.
‘*Buccinanops’’ ellipticum reklawensis,
new subspecies
Plate 15, figures 14-15
Description.—Shell smooth, fusiform in shape,
whorls shouldered, those of the spire slightly convex,
body whorl strongly convex. Callus thick with an an-
terior swelling on the columella and typically extend-
ing over most of the spire. Longitudinal plications in
spire weak to absent. A faint band below the suture
shows sigmoidal lines of growth. Basal groove wide,
margined above by a narrow band and occurring just
below the center of the body whorl. The wide groove
runs up to the siphonal fasciole and has an obsolete
medial depression there corresponding to a thickening
of the shell within the outer lip. An obsolete depres-
sion is present on the lower margin of the callus.
Remarks.—The Reklaw subspecies can be distin-
guished from Buccinanops ellipticum (Whitfield,
1865), a Lower Eocene species, by its more globose
outline, the more prominently shouldered whorls and
the basal groove occurring just below the center of the
body whorl, rather than in the lower third as in B.
ellipticum s.s. A similar, although slenderer species of
Buccinanops occurs in abundance on the Little Brazos
River at a locality which has been interpreted as being
deposited in a high marsh environment with marine
grasses. The fact that the genus is relatively uncom-
mon in other localities where a marine or lagoonal
environment is inferred suggests that the Reklaw spe-
cies may have favored a similar habitat. Allmon,
(1990, pp. 56-59) considered the placement of B. el-
lipticum to be problematical and probably not even in
the family Nassariidae, no doubt partially due to the
lack of the terminal columellar fold.
Etymology.—Referring to the Reklaw Formation
where the species occurs.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30410. Type lo-
cality: locality 20.
Material examined.—16 specimens, the largest:
26.0 mm length, 14.5 mm width.
Genus BULLIA Gray, 1834, p. 596, pl. 37, fig. 8
Type species.—Bullia semiplicata Gray, 1834, by
monotypy. Recent, off the coast of West Africa.
Original diagnosis.—**Animal without eyes; tenta-
cles long and slender. Foot greatly expanded, and bifid
behind. Shell ovate or turrited; spire more or less acu-
minated, sutures enamelled; inner lip excavated in the
middle, callus posteriorly; aperture oval, moderate.
(Gray, 1853, p. 112)
Remarks.—The genus is known from The Eocene
onwards.
Bullia altilis harrisi Palmer in Price, 1928
Plate 15, figures 1—2
Bullia altile harrisi Palmer in Price, 1928, p. 29, pl. 7, fig. 7, 11,
12S
Bullia altilis harrisi Palmer, 1937, p. 290, pl. 39, figs. 2, 3; Palmer
and Brann, 1966, p. 543.
“Bullia”’ altilis (Conrad, 1832b). Allmon, 1990, p. 57.
Original description.—*‘Shell small, irregular in
shape, flattened ventrally, protruded to the left, the an-
terior notch as in B. altilis; spire is usually depressed
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 75
and enveloped in the callus; the callus spreads poste-
riorly and laterally and covers the greater portion of
the shell; usually three distinct, large nodes or bumps
occur, one on the inner lip just above the middle, one
on the dorsal side of the body whorl and one laterally
in the middle, left portion of the body whorl. Many
specimens have the tri-nodular character developed
strongly and the spire so enveloped in the callus that
the true generic identity of the form is obscured. There
are specimens which show the anterior notch and
groove of Bullia.”” (Palmer in Price, 1928, p. 29)
Remarks.—Two worn specimens were obtained
which appear to be the above species. The species is
known from the Queen City formation which adjoins
the Reklaw formation on the Colorado River, near
Smithville, Bastrop County, Texas. Allmon (1990, p.
58) considers that the Bullia altilis complex belongs
to an undescribed genus, possibly in the Olividae, An-
cillinae. The analysis necessary to confirm this how-
ever is not performed here, and the genus is left where
it has been placed previously.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 360; paratypes:
PRI 356, 357. Type locality: Gazely Creek, Colorado
River, near Smithville, Texas. Range: Reklaw and
Queen City formations of Texas. Figured specimen:
PRI 33127 from location 20.
Material examined.—Two specimens, the largest
18.0 mm length, 14.0 mm width.
Family FASCIOLARIIDAE Gray, 1850b, p. 67
Subfamily FUSININAE Swainson, 1840, p. 76
Genus FALSIFUSUS Grabau, 1904, pp. 80-81
Type species.—Fusus meyeri Aldrich, 1886, by orig-
inal designation. Lower Eocene, Sabine Group of Al-
abama.
Original diagnosis.—*‘Shell fusiform with long and
slender spire and a canal of about the same length.
Protoconch merging into the whorls on the conch, no
sharp demarkation being apparent. The first two
whorls of the protoconch are generally smooth, the
apical one minute, gradually increasing in size. The
three to four whorls which constitute the apical series
form a rather narrow cone. Third whorl with five
closely crowded, more or less oblique riblets, which
are in part gently concave forward. These after the
completion of the third, or sometimes an additional
whorl, quickly merge into the normal whorls of the
conch. A basal carina usually marks the ribbed whorls
of the apical series, this carina appearing just above
the suture. Whorls of the conch as in Fusus.”’ (Grabau,
1904, pp. 80-81)
Remarks.—Falsifusus was created for shells of fu-
soid form and a paucispiral protoconch of Pleurotoma
type. The genus is known from the Upper Cretaceous
to Recent.
Falsifusus ottonis (Aldrich, 1886)
Plate 16, figures 9-10
Fusus meyerit Aldrich, 1886, p. 21 in part, pl. 3, fig. 12.
Fusus ottonis Aldrich, 1897, p. 6 new name for F. meyeri.
Falsifusus meyeri (Aldrich). Grabau, 1904, p. 81, pl. 17, fig. 9.
Falsifusus ottonis (Aldrich). Wenz, 1943, p. 1260, fig. 1390.
Original description.—‘‘Shell elongate fusiform,
spire slender, acute; whorls fourteen; surface at the
spire and body whorl with seven longitudinal folds,
which are spirally arranged, crossed by raised rounded
striae, generally seven in number, rather distant, the
central one making a sharp carina on the center of each
whorl, with erect longitudinal tubercles at the inter-
sections; spaces between striae showing only lines of
growth; canal very long, spirally striate with alternate
raised lines; lines of growth very numerous and almost
obsolete; mouth small, oblique-ovate; outer lip in-
curved, smooth. Locality: lower bed, Woods Bluff Al-
abama, Matthews Landing, Alabama.” (Aldrich, 1887,
p. 21)
Remarks.—On average the Reklaw specimens have
fewer whorls and seven to nine spiral lines (most com-
monly eight) as against seven on those from the Sa-
binian Stage. The development of the longitudinal
folds is a variable character and ranges from being
obsolete to being so prominent as to cause the sutural
line to be wavy. In one juvenile specimen the canal is
one and a third the length of the spire and body whorl
combined. This species, with minor variations, has
been recognized from the Midway Group of Alabama
to the Sabinian Stage, the present occurrence extend-
ing the range to the start of the Claibornian Stage.
Type information.—Holotype: USNM 638756. Type
locality: Woods Bluff, Tombigbee river, Clarke Coun-
ty, Alabama. Range: Midway, Sabine to Claiborne.
Figured Reklaw specimen: PRI 30447, from locality
21.
Material examined.—151 specimens, the largest 50
mm.
Genus FUSINUS Rafinesque, 1815, p. 145
Type species.—Murex colus Linnaeus, 1758, by
monotypy. Recent, Indo-Pacific.
Diagnosis.—Shell large, spindle-shaped. Proto-
conch of one and a half whorls, usually smooth or with
the last half whorl with axial riblets, terminated by a
varix. Whorls convex, with spiral lines and usually
with collabral ribs that disappear on the lower part of
the body whorl. Body whorl with moderate to long
neck and unnotched beak. Aperture ovate, gutter pres-
ent, canal open, straight and generally twisted. Outer
76 BULLETIN 352
lip serrate at edge, lirate within, edge of inner lip con-
tinuous along parietal wall. Columella weakly con-
cave, folds absent, terminated in the adult by a parietal
ridge.
Remarks.—The genus is well represented from the
Miocene upwards in the Gulf and Atlantic coastal
plains, and is widely distributed in warm waters today.
Fusinus claibornica, new species
Plate 16, figures 15—16
Description.—Shell large, whorls eight to nine, nu-
cleus minute, protoconch of two and a half whorls, the
last half whorl starting with faint spiral lines, then
gradually developing faint collabral lines. Spire with
nine to 11 rounded ribs per whorl that are overriden
by many flat-topped spiral lines and smaller interme-
diate ones. Three large spiral lines dominate the sculp-
ture of the early whorls and are situated below an in-
distinct shoulder, occupying a little less than half the
whorl. Most lines tend to become subequal in size on
the later whorls but some intermediate threads still oc-
cur. On the body whorl the entire spiral and collabral
sculpture is much more subdued while on the beak it
is more prominent again with the spirals alternating in
size. Aperture ovate, widely and weakly channeled
above, outer lip serrate and with widely spaced lirae
within. Columella weakly excavate, terminated below
by a ridge, canal twisted. Parietal wall forming a large
umbilicus in the adult, very small in the juvenile, the
left hand side margined by a prominent siphonal fas-
ciole.
Remarks.—It is possible that two very closely re-
lated species are at hand as two individuals have a
slightly greater apical angle and about one more costa
per whorl. Whether this represents two species or the
variation within one must wait for the discovery of
further specimens. The species closest to F. claibor-
nica is Fusinus nexilis Dall, 1890, from the Miocene
Tampa Silex beds at Ballast Point, Tampa Bay, Florida.
This occurrence of Fusinus s.s in the Eocene of North
America is interesting, as it places the earliest Amer-
ican representative at a similar time to the earliest Eu-
ropean ones, found in the Eocene of the London,
Hampshire, and Paris Basins. Most European repre-
sentatives are closer to the type species of the genus,
Fusinus colus (Linnaeus, 1758), with its very slender
shape and extremely long canal than are the American
species. One European species that appears more re-
lated to the American ones is Fusus valenciennesti
(Grateloup, 1840), from the Miocene of Bordeaux,
France.
Etymology.—Noting the first Claibornian represen-
tative of Fusinus.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30399; paratype:
PRI 30400, a juvenile. Type locality: locality 20. Para-
type from locality 4.
Material examined.—14 specimens, the largest
complete 50 mm length, 22 mm width. One large in-
complete specimen is estimated to have been about
145 mm in length.
Subfamily PERISTERNIINAE Tryon, 1881, p. 47
Genus LATIRUS Montfort, 1810, p. 531
Type species.—Latirus aurantiacus Montfort, 1810,
(=Murex gibbulus Gmelin, 1791) by original desig-
nation. Recent, Australia and Fiji.
Diagnosis.—Shell solid fusiform. Whorls with
broad solid collabral costae and overriding spiral lines
or ribs. Body whorl greater than half the total length,
neck short. Aperture ovate, columella straight with
faint folds, canal moderate in length, siphonal fasciole
prominent margining an umbilical slit. Outer lip lirate
within, basal notch absent.
Remarks.—The prominent siphonal fasciole margin-
ing a small umbilicus is not usually present on Clai-
bornian representatives of Latirus s.s. except on ma-
ture and gerontic individuals. Only on Latirus moorei
Gabb, 1860 has it been noted as a well developed fea-
ture. The genus is very common in the Paleogene of
the Gulf and Atlantic coastal plains, 37 species having
been reported. The genus is known from the Upper
Cretaceous to Recent.
Subgenus POLYGONA Schumacher, 1817, p. 241
Type species.—Polygona fusiformis Schumacher,
1817, by original designation. Recent, Florida and the
West Indies.
Diagnosis.—Protoconch conical, nucleus squat.
Shell slender, whorls carinate and ramped. Aperture
long and narrow, posterior channel formed by the pa-
rietal ridge, constricted below to a slightly emarginate
canal. Siphonal fasciole high and narrow, columella
with three folds.
Remarks.—Most of the Claibornian and Jacksonian
species of Latirus are probably referable to this sub-
genus. The subgenus is known from the Upper Cre-
taceous to Recent.
Latirus (Polygona) traceyi, new species
Plate 16, figures 3—4
Description.—Shell small, solid. Whorls nine, pro-
toconch smooth and conical, of about four whorls, the
final half turn with fine arcuate riblets, nucleus swol-
len. Whorls convex, ornamented with seven nodular
costae per whorl and three prominent spiral lines caus-
ing the whorls to be tricarinate. The uppermost spiral
is very weak on early whorls but slowly increases in
EOcENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE G/T)
strength to become equal to the other two. The inter-
stices between the main spirals with fine lines of many
sizes ranging down to the microscopic, the interstice
between the suture and uppermost spiral with two to
four larger lines. Body whorl with 11 larger spiral lines
and many small ones that decrease in strength towards
the base. Aperture ovate, outer lip strongly lirate with-
in, edge fluted by the large spiral lines, gutter formed
by a thick deposit of callus. Columella straight with
three weak folds, canal moderate in size, bent and
twisted, siphonal fasciole weak, umbilicus a chink or
absent.
Remarks.—Two species are quite closely related:
Latirus sexcostatus Johnson, 1899, from the Landrum
Member of the Cook Mountain Formation and Latirus
(Polygona) vokesae Allen, 1970, from the Saline Bay-
ou Member of the Cook Mountain Formation in Lou-
isiana. Latirus (P.) traceyi is distinguished from L. (P.)
vokesae by the protoconch possessing only half a turn
of riblets rather than two turns, a stronger spiral sculp-
ture and slenderer profile. Latirus sexcostatus has six
costae per whorl, only two prominent spiral lines, a
smooth and shining surface and generally more sub-
dued spiral sculpture.
Etymology.—The species is named in honor of
Steve Tracey, a worker on the English Tertiary Mol-
lusca, for the many productive discussions and for the
loan of much English material.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30401; paratype:
PRI 30402. Type locality: locality 4.
Material examined.—Eight specimens, the largest
13.0 mm length.
Genus TEREBRIFUSUS Conrad, 1865a, p. 28
Type species.—Buccinum amoenum Conrad, 1833b,
by monotypy. Claibornian Eocene of the United States.
Diagnosis.—Shell small to medium, fusiform, spire
high, somewhat coeleoconoid. Protoconch whorls
smooth, rounded. Whorls convex, with prominent lon-
gitudinal costae and spiral lines, sutures impressed.
Body whorl large, aperture long, posterior gutter, canal
short and deeply notched, siphonal fasciole present.
Columella straight, with numerous folds, inner lip
smooth.
Remarks.—The genus is restricted to the Eocene of
North America.
Terebrifusus multiplicatus (H. C. Lea, 1841)
Plate 16, figures 11—12
Terebra multiplicata H. C. Lea, 1841, p. 101, pl. 1, fig. 19; 1849,
p. 106; Harris, 1895c, p. 29; Pace 1902, p. 110.
Mitra (Terebrifusus) multiplicatus (H. C. Lea). de Gregorio, 1890,
p. 77, pl. 5, fig. 65 copy H. C. Lea.
Terebrifusus multiplicatus (H. C. Lea). Palmer, 1937, p. 308, pl. 53,
figs. 3, 8, 11, 14; pl. 88, fig. 4 type; Brann and Kent, 1960, p.
854; Palmer and Brann, 1966, p. 950; Knight, Hodgkinson,
Knight, Reid, Lindveit, Lindveit, and Offeman, 1977, p. 18, 33
Remarks.—The Reklaw specimen is slightly slen-
derer that the later Claibornian specimens and shows
the fine intermediate spiral lines between the major
ones on the later whorls that is characteristic of 7.
multiplicatus. The major difference distinguishing the
Reklaw species is the almost complete absence of the
columellar plications, their place being taken by den-
ticle-like swellings at the edge of the columella. Ex-
amination of numerous specimens of the species from
the Lower Claiborne shows the strength of the plicae
to be quite variable; specimens range with columellar
plications that are almost absent to those that are very
prominent.
Type information.—Lectotype: ANSP 13160. Type
locality: Claiborne Bluff, Alabama River, Alabama.
Figured Reklaw specimen: PRI 30539, from location
20.
Material examined.—One specimen, 8.2 mm length.
Genus MAZZALINA Conrad, 1860, p. 295
Type species.—Mazzalina pyrula Conrad, 1860, by
monotypy. Eocene, United States.
Diagnosis.—Shell small to large, inflated and usu-
ally short. Whorls flat or concave-convex, carinated
below the suture, surface smooth or with fine spiral
lines, stronger basally. Body whorl very large and in-
flated with a somewhat twisted canal and small si-
phonal fasciole. Aperture pear-shaped, notched above
and constricted below at the start of a moderately long
wide canal that is bent to the left. Outer lip thin, pro-
socline, inside smooth or plicate. Columella strongly
concave above, smooth or with folds, below bent to
the left.
Remarks.—The genus is close to Bulbifusus Conrad,
1865a, but Harris (1894, p. 165-166) shows that the
two genera are probably synonymous on the basis of
a large collection from the Eocene of Arkansas. Wenz
(1944) reports the genus as ranging from the Upper
Cretaceous to the Eocene and probably also the Mio-
cene. Cossmann (1901a, p. 52), placing a rather wider
interpretation on the genus, has it ranging to the Re-
cent in the Philippines.
Mazzalina conica, new species
Plate 16, figures 5—6
Description.—Shell medium in size, spire short and
cyrtoconoid. Whorls five (nuclear whorls not known),
convex, Carinate, with a prominent ramp that progres-
sively increases in size and angle, suture channeled.
Early whorls tuberculated below the carina, later ones
lose the vertical ornament and possess spiral lines that
increase in size with growth. Body whorl very large
78 BULLETIN 352
and smooth, base with prominent spiral lines. Aperture
ovate, notched above, outer lip lirate within, columella
smooth, excavated, canal short, reflected and slightly
emarginate.
Remarks.—The cyrtoconoid profile, convex whorls
and prominent carina on the spire whorls can imme-
diately distinguish this species from Mazzalina inurata
(Conrad, 1833a). This species is also no closer to the
Sabinian Stage representative Mazzalina plena (A\-
drich, 1886), a species that Harris (1899) regarded as
a slight variation from the Claiborne and Jackson
forms.
Etymology.—The name conica (Latin, cone), refers
to the shape of the spire.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30403. Type lo-
cality: locality 14.
Material examined.—Two specimens, the largest
17.0 mm length, 11 mm width.
Genus SURCULITES Conrad, 1865d, p. 213
Type species.—Surculites annosa Conrad, 1865d, by
original designation. Eocene, Shark River Formation,
Shark River, New Jersey.
Original diagnosis.—*‘Turrited, spire elongated;
whorls angulated above the middle, with an impressed
revolving line above the suture; whole surface marked
with fine, revolving, wrinkled lines, becoming large
and distinct towards the base.’ (Conrad, 1865d, p.
213)
Remarks.—Prior to Glibert (1938, p. 99) who placed
Surculites in the Galeodidae, the genus had always
been assigned in the Turridae. Wrigley (1939, pp. 281—
283), after an analysis, concluded that the earlier as-
signment of Surculites to the Turridae was incorrect,
and that the genus probably should be placed some-
where between the families Fusinidae and Buccinidae.
Powell (1966) agreed with Wrigley’s analysis. Wenz
(1943), Gardner (1945), Korobkov (1954), Palmer and
Brann (1966), and Squires (1987), have continued to
place the genus under the Turridae. I find Wrigley’s
argument convincing and follow his and Powell’s as-
signment. The genus Surculites, is confined to the Eo-
cene of Europe and North America.
Surculites lapillus, new species
Plate 16, figures 7-8
Description.—Shell large for the genus, fusiform
and with a conical spire. Whorls eight and a half to
nine, protoconch of two and a half to three smooth
whorls, rapidly increasing in size. Adult sculpture with
a broad rounded keel, a concave shoulder which is
produced into a vertical flange and which borders the
strongly channeled suture. Spire whorls concave below
the shoulder which causes a slight carination to be-
come apparent by the body whorl. Adult ornament of
crowded spiral and longitudinal lines, the spiral lines
alternating in size above the shoulder, stronger below
it. The weaker spiral lines have a tendency to be du-
plex in character, the space between the lines covered
with collabral lines, the intersections with the spiral
lines forming nodes and having a strikingly tessellated
appearance. Aperture elongate-triangular, notched pos-
teriorly. Inner lip with a weak anterior callus deposit,
canal long and obscurely twisted anti-clockwise, an-
terior notch shallow. The genus is known from the
Eocene through the Miocene.
Remarks.—This is a very distinctive species whose
closest analog seems to be Surculites cabezi Gardner,
1945 from the Weches Formation of Texas and the
Laredo Formation of Mexico. The present species is
distinguished by its more elongate form, the rounded
shoulder and finely beaded ornamentation.
Etymology.—The specific name /apillus (Latin,
bead), refers to the beaded surface of the whorls at the
intersections of the lines.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30406; paratype:
PRI 30407, a juvenile. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—Five specimens, two large
ones (the holotype 33.0 mm length), 15.0 mm width,
one juvenile with a perfectly preserved protoconch and
two fragments.
Genus CLAVILITHES Swainson, 1840, p. 77
Type species.—Clavilithes longchaeus Lamarck,
1803, by subsequent designation (Grabau, 1904, p.
105). Eocene of England and France.
Original diagnosis.—‘*‘Unequally fusiform, the
body whorl and spire being conic, and the canal sud-
denly contracted and attenuated; terminal whorls pap-
illary; inner lip thick; pillar smooth’ (Swainson, 1840,
p. 304).
Remarks.—Clavilithes is rather uncommon in the
Stone City and Cook Mountain Formations of East
Texas, its place seemingly taken by the closely similar
genus Papillina Conrad, 1855. Papillina can be distin-
guished from Clavilithes by its spinose periphery and
higher multispiral protoconch. The genus is known
from the Paleocene to Pliocene.
Clavilithes parvetorbis, new species
Plate 17, figures 1—2
Description.—Shell fusiform, spire coeloconoidal,
whorls 12 in adult, first one or possibly two nuclear
whorls missing from all available material. First extant
whorl smooth and rounded, the next one with riblets
that are crossed after a quarter of a whorl by seven
spiral lines. The next six whorls have about seven
rounded longitudinal folds per whorl, concave above
EOCENE MOLLuscs OF TEXAS: GARVIE 79
spiral lines. By the eighth whorl the folds have become
obsolete and later whorls have smooth and almost ver-
tical sides. Sutures deeply impressed, shoulder prom-
inent and margined below by an impressed spiral line,
the remainder of the spire whorls with faint to obso-
lescent spirals. Body whorl bicarinate, beak long and
straight, columella moderately excavated. Aperture
long, elliptical and with a prominent channel which is
margined below with a strong line; a prominent notch
is formed where this line meets the suture. Area below
the body whorl carination with five spiral lines to the
end of the beak.
Remarks.—This species has close affinities with
Clavilithes texanus Harris, 1895a. That latter species
has a straight-sided spire with more subdued spiral
lines, a prominent rounded carina, and a well-defined
subsutural excavation. The species bears a remarkable
resemblance to several European species, in particular
to Clavilithes scalaris (Lamarck, 1816). From the il-
lustrations alone, the greatest resemblance might be to
C. scalaris, but a hand comparison with specimens of
Clavilithes britannicus Wrigley, 1927 from the Barton
beds of England shows that species to be a closer
match. On the Reklaw specimens the sutures are more
deeply channeled, and have a slightly less acute angle;
otherwise the specimens are practically indistinguish-
able. The author hesitates, however, to describe this as
a species or subspecies of a European form without
further study and more material, especially of a form
such as Clavilithes which has relatively few distin-
guishing morphological characteristics. It is therefore
named as a distinct species here.
Etymology.—tThe specific name par (Latin, like) ve-
torbis (latin, old world), refers to the close resem-
blance to many old world species of Clavilithes.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30408; paratype:
PRI 30409, a juvenile. Type locality: locality 21.
Material examined.—28 specimens, the largest es-
sentially complete: 87.0 mm length, 30.0 mm width.
One large broken specimen is estimated to have been
120 mm in length.
Clavilithes? acus, new species
Plate 16, figures 13—14
Description.—Whorls 13, protoconch multispiral,
smooth, narrowly conical of five whorls; transition to
teleoconch marked by a strong varix. Teleoconch
whorls margined by a swollen collar, constricted be-
low, coarsely vertically nodular with seven nodules on
early whorls, ten on the body whorl, the nodules be-
coming obsolete towards the subsutural collar. Surface
ornamented by flat spiral bands, stronger and often du-
plex on later whorls, occasional intermediate weaker
lines, all crossed by minutely scabrous growth lines
which form a shallow “‘turrid-like’’ notch over the
rounded carina. Aperture long, columella long and
straight with a thick, smooth callus deposit.
Remarks.—This is a puzzling species which in the
early teleoconch stage resembles Clavilithes kenne-
dyanus Harris, 1895a, from the Weches Formation, but
lacks the mammillated protoconch of that and other
species of Clavilithes. The multispiral conical proto-
conch also precludes an assignment to Fusinus Raf-
inesque, 1815, or Falsifusus Grabau, 1904, to which a
certain resemblance is also apparent. Harris’s (1895Sa)
drawing of C. kennedyanus shows a specimen in
which the early ribbed stage gives way fairly rapidly
to a smooth stage; in my experience that transition is
fairly gradual in Weches specimens and C. kennedyan-
us resembles a smooth variant of C.? acus; the “turrid-
like“ growth lines are also apparent on C. kennedyan-
us although to a lesser degree. Despite the similarity
to Clavilithes, the protoconch is atypical of Clavilithes
s.s. and the lower part of the aperture shows no con-
striction as is also typical in that genus. The aperture
and canal in fact are very Fusinus-like and C.? acus
combines characters of the two genera. I can find noth-
ing similar described in the literature.
Etymology.—The name acus (Latin, needle), notes
that feature of the protoconch.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 33107. Type lo-
cality: locality 4. Paratype: PRI 30398, from locality
20.
Material examined.—Four specimens, three juve-
nile. The largest (the holotype) 50.4 mm long.
Genus LEVIFUSUS Conrad, 1865a, p. 17
Type species.—Fusus trabeatus Conrad, 1833a, by
subsequent designation (Cossmann, 1901b, p. 14). Eo-
cene of the United States.
Diagnosis.—Shell medium in size to large; proto-
conch conical, of one and one half to two smooth,
conical whorls; teleoconch whorls carinated, the carina
with serrations or spines; ramp concave, below the ca-
rina cylindrical or weakly inflated; sculpture of fine
spiral lines that are stronger on the basal part of the
body whorl; axial sculpture weak or absent, sometimes
with low folds; body whorl often with a lower serrated
keel; aperture oval, smooth, outer lip lirate within; ca-
nal long and somewhat twisted.
Remarks.—Levifusus ranges from the Paleocene
(doubtfully Upper Cretaceous) to the Eocene. It is a
common component of the Gulf Coast Paleogene, over
30 species being recognised. The genus has been used
in a very wide sense, to include forms such as Levi-
fusus prepagoda Palmer, 1937, with its coeloconoidal
spire, strong axial sculpture on the early whorls and a
80 BULLETIN 352
Busycon-like protoconch, and forms such as the
strongly spinose Levifusus spiniger Conrad, 1848.
Levifusus? serrae, new species
Plate 18, figures 4—5
Description.—Shell small, broadly fusiform, of up
to seven and one-quarter whorls. Protoconch conical,
of three to three and one half rounded whorls, the first
two to two and one half smooth, last one with arcuate
riblets. Spire whorls strongly carinate with a serrated
keel, the rounded tips of which are the extension of
low folds, the folds becoming obsolete above the su-
ture and continuing down to the suture below. On the
body whorl the folds continue to the second carina
where nodes are formed at the intersections. Suture
impressed, shoulder concave with eight to nine strong
spiral cords. Below the keel are similar cords, increas-
ing in strength as they approach the anterior canal.
Outer lip thin, aperture pyriform; anterior canal long
and bent slightly to the left, constricted at its initiation
and emarginate towards the base.
Remarks.—With the exception of the protoconch,
this species closely resembles the early whorls of Lev-
ifusus spiniger Conrad, 1848, from the Oligocene of
Mississippi. L. spiniger has a protoconch of two
smooth whorls, weaker spiral lines, and the whorls are
lower. This probably indicates all species of L.? serrae
found so far are juveniles. I am indebted to David
Dockery for pointing out the relationship to L. spini-
ger. Confusingly, this species appears close to several
turrids, in particular Clinura calliope (Brocchi, 1814)
(cf. Pinna and Spezia, 1978, pl. 31, figs. 2, 2a), a spe-
cies from the Neogene of Crete. This species is, how-
ever, much larger, and Clinura Bellardi, 1875, has a
polygyrate, narrowly conical protoconch, the later
whorls cancellate, a smooth shoulder area, and a sinus
with the apex very near to the suture. The type of
protoconch seen in L.? serrae is also exhibited in sev-
eral other turrid genera, for instance the New Zealand
genus Tahusyrinx Powell, 1942. I have doubtfully as-
signed the species to Levifusus, as the protoconch is
unlike any other Levifusus species I am aware of.
Etymology.—tThe specific name serrae (Latin, saw),
refers to the saw-tooth character of the keel.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30467; para-
types: PRI 30468, 30469. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—2\ specimens, the largest:
10.5 mm length, 5.4 mm width.
Family MELONGENIDAE Gill, 1867, p. 145
Subfamily MELONGENINAE Gill, 1867, p. 145
Genus CORNULINA Conrad, 1853a, p. 321
Type species.—Cornulina armigera Conrad, 1833a,
by subsequent designation (Fisher, 1884, p. 621). Eo-
cene of the Paris Basin and England.
Diagnosis.—Shell short-fusiform to globose, with
two rows of spines on the body whorl; columella
rounded; siphonal fasciole prominent and ridged; canal
strongly bent to the left; labrum with three teeth, two
of them very small.
Remarks.—Cornulina is restricted to the Eocene of
the Americas, Africa and Europe.
Cornulina minax dockeryi, new subspecies
Plate 17, figures 3—6
Description.—Shell medium sized to large, heavy;
spire short, most of the ornamentation covered with a
thin coat of callus; body whorl short, the upper and
lower carinae with a row of short spines, equal-sized
in the adult, in the juvenile the lower carina is a noded
cord; spiral ornamentation weak on the body whorl,
stronger below on the base; aperture large, rounded,
channeled posteriorly; columella rounded, slightly ex-
cavated; siphonal fasciole prominent; canal short and
bent to the left.
Remarks.—This Reklaw subspecies is differentiated
from Cornulina minax by its lower form, smaller
spines, and more subdued spiral ornamentation. The
species Cornulina armigera (Conrad, 1833a) exhibits
few characters that can be used to differentiate the var-
ious races in the Sabinian and Claibornian stages in
the American Eocene. Typically the Sabinian forms
are more spinose and high-spired than the Claibornian
forms, particularly in the adult shell. Both forms were
originally grouped together under C. armigera but
Palmer and Brann (1966) split the Sabinian, Cook
Mountain Formation and Gosport Sand species, indi-
cating they should be differentiated. The Sabinian spe-
cies are certainly differentiable for in addition to the
characters mentioned above it can be noted that the
basal spiral lines evenly decrease in strength anteriorly
and the upper row of spines is continued over the mid-
section of the body whorl as low folds. None of the
specimens from the Cook Mountain or Gosport Sand
formations shows that feature. With regard to the split-
ting of the Cook Mountain and Gosport Sand speci-
mens I can find no character that can consistently sep-
arate them; a large number of individuals from the
Stone City Formation exhibit a range of variation that
includes those typified by the Gosport Sand form and
in fact also approaches closely the Jacksonian species,
Cornulina dalli (Harris, 1894). Dockery (1980) has
separated the Sabinian stock under Cornulina minax
compressa. This latter species occurs in the Bashi,
Nanafalia and Pendleton formations of Alabama, Mis-
sissippi and Texas. This species is differentiated pri-
marily by the whorls impinging on the previous row
of spines, a strong spiral groove below the lower row
of spines and further grooves of decreasing strength
EocENE MOLLuSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE $1
towards the base. I do not believe that the first char-
acter can be used in differentiation as it is seen widely
throughout the group. The holotype shows low folds
continuing below the spines, and that feature together
with the basal grooves of decreasing strength, relate it
to Cornulina minax (Solander, 1776), rather than C.
armigera. The compressed form and other characters,
however, do warrant its separation as a distinct sub-
species of C. minax. The adult Reklaw specimens are
rather worn but can still be assigned under C. minax.
The juvenile specimens, one of them perfectly pre-
served, are very different from the juveniles of the
Cook Mountain and Gosport Sand formations and
show the folds under the row of spines very well. The
juveniles of C. armigera and its subspecies all lack the
lower row of spines, a character developed in the adult
form. The European species C. minax is a high-spired
species that has a slight subsutural swelling at all
stages of growth but does not have the later whorls
encroaching on the earlier ones. The differences be-
tween the species are more apparent in the juveniles,
the profile approaches that of a spinose Cornulina dalli
cetavia Palmer, 1947, rather than one of the C. armi-
gera varieties. Juveniles of C. minax from the Brack-
lesham beds of England are very close to juvenile Rek-
law specimens of C. minax dockeryi with the exception
of the coarser basal lines of C. minax.
Etymology.—In honor of David Dockery of the
Mississippi Bureau of Geology.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30411, from lo-
cality 4. :
Material examined.—Eight specimens, the largest
40 mm length, 30 mm maximum diameter.
Genus SYCOSTOMA Cox, 1931, p. 291
Type species.—Fusus bulbiformis Lamarck, 1803,
by original designation. Eocene of the Paris Basin and
England. Cox (1931) replaced Sycum by Sycostoma.
Sycum Bayle, 1880, is itself a new name for Leiostoma
Swainson, 1840, the original diagnosis of which is giv-
en below.
Original diagnosis.—*‘Equally fusiform, but ventri-
cose in the middle; shell entirely smooth, almost pol-
ished; inner lip thickened and vitreous; base of the
pillar very straight. Fossil only.”” (Swainson, 1840, p.
308)
Remarks.—The genus is known from the Upper
Cretaceous to the Oligocene.
Sycostoma texana, new species
Plate 17, figures 13-14
Description.—Shell medium in size, spire coelocon-
oid, whorls nine, shouldered, the shoulder profile level
on the spire, becoming a shallow depression by the
body whorl. Suture impressed and with impressions of
four or five spiral lines below it. Body whorl large,
inflated, and with a few spiral lines on the base which
curve into a weak siphonal fasciole. Aperture oval-
elongate, outer lip smooth within except for a few
widely spaced impressed striae in the upper half. Col-
umellar lip smooth with a coating of callus and with
a slight anterior swelling which leads into a short
slightly recurved canal.
Remarks.—The only other species referred to this
genus in the Eocene of the Gulf and Atlantic coastal
plains is Sycostoma americanae Palmer, 1937, from
the Lisbon Formation of Alabama; that species has a
greatly enlarged body whorl and has a prominent
shoulder. The common species Neptunea enterogram-
ma Gabb, 1869, which Palmer (1937, p. 323-324) also
assigned to Sycostoma, is now assigned to Bolis Gard-
ner, 1939. This latter genus can be distinguished by
the straight-sided adult whorls, the channeled suture
and more prominent callus. The Reklaw species is clos-
er to the Paris Basin species Sycostoma pyrus bulbi-
formis Lamarck, 1803, and can be distinguished from
it by the expanded body whorl and the impressed su-
ture.
Etymology.—Noting the first discovery of the genus
in Texas.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30414. Type lo-
cality: locality 20.
Material examined.—One specimen, 30.0 mm
length, 16.0 mm width.
Genus MICHELA Gardner, 1945, p. 230
Type species.—Levifusus trabeatoides Harris,
1895a, by original designation. Lower Claiborne of the
western Gulf province.
Original diagnosis.—*‘Protoconch of three smooth
and two sculptured whorls, ... [initial turn] for the
most part submerged. Spiral sculpture introduced from
the beginning of the fourth whorl; posterior spiral out-
lining the shoulder ... Spire terraced, the shoulder a
steep ramp . . . axial sculpture confined in the genotype
to the earlier whorls; entire surface of conch spirally
lirate ... Outer lip flaring, ... strongly and closely
wrinkled within, from the commissure to the entrance
of the anterior canal ... Anterior canal of moderate
length, twisted backward slightly and nasute at its ex-
tremity . . . pillar not plicate . . .”’ (modified after Gard-
ner, 1945, p. 230).
Remarks.—Gardner essentially distinguishes this
genus from the very closely allied Levifusus, by the
larger protoconch of one less turn, the wrinkled inner
lip and the absence of a fold on the columella. Powell
(1966, p. 145) considered the original placement in the
Turridae to be incorrect for much the same reasons that
82 BULLETIN 352
Wrigley (1939, pp. 281-283) transferred Surculites
from the Turridae. The genus is restricted to the Eocene.
Michela trabeatoides carinata, new subspecies
Plate 17, figures 15-17
Description.—Whorls six, shoulder smooth or with
only faint spiral striae on the early whorls of the spire,
later whorls with prominent spiral lines. Spire whorls
carinate, the periphery crenulated, with two to three
larger lines crowding the carina and crossed by lon
gitudinal folds which run from the uppermost line to
the lower suture, retral sinus in the lower third of the
shoulder. Suture more deeply impressed than in Mich-
ela trabeatoides (Harris, 1895a). Body whorl tricari-
nate, the lowest one faint and rounded. Labrum smooth
within; canal longer than in the type and somewhat
twisted.
Remarks.—This variety is larger than Michela tra-
beatoides (Harris, 1895a) s.s. that ranges from the
Weches through the Cook Mountain formations; the
Reklaw form keeps the carination on the body whorl.
One large fragment of this species shows no trace of
crenules on the body whorl, is strongly bicarinate and
covered with spiral lines alternating in size.
Etymology: The name carinata (Latin, keeled), re-
fers to the prominent carinated keel on this species.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30327; paratype:
PRI 30416. Type locality: locality 18.
Material examined.—26 specimens, the largest 30.0
mm length, 17.0 mm width. One large fragment mea-
sured ca, 42 mm in width,
Genus STREPSIDURA Swainson, 1840, p. 90, 308
Type species.—Strepsidura costata Swainson, 1840,
by original designation. Eocene of England, France
and Belgium.
a
Original diagnosis. Equally fusiform, but the ba-
sal portion of the pillar turned inwardly, with a sharp
fold at the base of the aperture; shell costated and sub-
coronated; body whorl ventricose.”’ (Swainson, 1840,
p. 308)
Remarks.—The genus is known trom the Eocene to
Oligocene.
Strepsidura harrisi Givens and Garvie, 1994
’Bulbifusus inuratus Conrad, Heilprin, 1891, p, 396 in part (not
Fusus inuratus Conrad, 1833a, p. 291),
Strepsidura ficus (Gabb), Harris, 1895a, p. 71, pl. 7, fig. 1; Aldrich,
1895, p. 64, pl. 3, figs. 1, la
’Strepsidura ficus (Gabb), Palmer, 1937, p. 308, pl. 47, fig. 4 (copy
pl. 7, fig. | in Harris, 1895a).
Strepsidura ficus? (Gabb) or subsp. Palmer and Brann, 1966, p, 922
923 (not Whimeya ficus Gabb, 1864, pp, 104, 224, fig. 216).
Strepsidura harrisi Givens and Garvie, 1994, pp, 6-10, pl. 1, figs.
1-6
“Shell of medium size, thin-
walled, pyriform, with nearly conical spire about one-
sixth the total height of the shell and roundly inflated
body whorl; whorls about six, including at least four
teleoconch whorls, separated by abutting sutures that
Original description.
are slightly sinuous around costae; spire whorls an-
gulate, with uniformly sloping to slightly concave
ramp, sculptured by narrow costae overridden by
weaker spiral cords; spiral cord midway between su-
tures enlarged to form shoulder carina, which is noded
at intersections with costae; two enlarged cords at pos-
terior margin of whorl form the subsutural collar,
which is minutely noded where crossed by costae; cos-
tae and shoulder suppressed on side of body whorl but
retained on ramp area and neck; growth line profile
nearly straight and vertical on side of body whorl,
slightly prosocline on ramp area, aperture elongate-
oval, sharply constricted anteriorly to form siphonal
canal and gradually narrowed posteriorly to form ex-
halent channel, outer lip thin and smooth within; inner
lip with moderately thick parietal and columella callus,
which is sharply limited abapically; columella with
prominent fold at start of siphonal canal; a second
much weaker and apparently vestigial fold is some-
times present posterior to the prominent fold, siphonal
canal moderately long, twisted, oblique, deeply
notched; siphonal fasciole strong, limited posteriorly
by a sharp keel.”’ (Givens and Garvie, 1994, pp. 6—
10)
Remarks.—Similar forms occur in the Tejon Eocene
of California, in particular from Grapevine Canyon.
The Californian forms tend to be a litthe broader, are
slightly more excavated on the shoulder and have
weaker ribs. Palmer and Brann (1965, p. 922-923)
conjectured that the Californian and Texas species
might be conspecific; Givens and Garvie (1994),
showed this not to be the case. A very similar species
of Strepsidura has been found in the Queen City For-
mation on the Colorado River, Bastrop County, Texas
and is now lost. There is also an undescribed species
of Strepsidura that | have found in the Seguin For-
mation in Texas,
Type information.—Holotype: UT-TMM 939TX1;
paratype: PRI 33114. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—11 specimens, the largest 20.0
mm length, 12.5 mm width.
Family BUCCINIDAE Rafinesque, 1815, p. 145
Genus LAEVIBUCCINUM Conrad, 1865a, p. 21
Type species.—Buccinum prorsum Conrad, 1833b,
by monotypy. Eocene, upper Claiborne Group, United
States.
Diagnosis. —Protoconch smooth, multispiral with
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVII 83
depressed nucleus. Whorls rapidly enlarging, convex,
suture deeply impressed. Sculpture of regularly spaced
spiral lines. Body whorl large, more than half the total
length with short spirally lirate base. Aperture elon-
gate, somewhat emarginate anteriorly, basal notch
wide and shallow. Labral profile parasigmoidal, some-
what thickened and lirate. Columella smooth, concave
and slightly twisted.
Remarks.—Five species of Laevibuccinum are
known from the Eocene of the Gulf and Atlantic coast-
al plains. The genus is restricted to the Paleocene and
Eocene of North America.
Laevibuccinum lineatum Heilprin, 1881
Plate 17, figures 7—8
Laevibuccinum lineatum Heilprin, 1881, p. 371, pl. 20, fig. 5, Harris;
1896, p. 97, pl. 9, fig. 15; 1899, p, 52, pl. 6, fig. 12; Palmer, 1937,
pl. 44, fig. 3, 4.
Original Description.—‘Shell fusiform, of about
seven convex volutions which are throughout their
whole extent covered by fine but distinct revolving
lines; aperture slightly exceeding the spire in length,
subcaniculate anteriorly; columella greatly arcuate;
outer lip striate within.” (Heilprin, 1881, p. 371)
Remarks.—This species ranges from the Midwayan
to the Sabinian stage. The primary difference between
L. lineatum and the type L. prorsum, is that the latter
has a smooth body whorl midsection. It is interesting
that L. lineatum is now known to range into the lowest
Claiborne strata with no observable change in char-
acter.
Type information.—Holotype lost. Lectotype and
remaining specimens: ANSP 30554. Type locality:
Claiborne Bluff, Alabama River, Alabama. Figured
Reklaw specimen: PRI 30412, from locality 4.
Material examined.—114 specimens, the largest:
20.0 mm length, 7.6 mm width.
Genus EURYOCHETUS Cossmann, 1896a, p. 35
Type species.—Buccinum cylindraceum Deshayes,
1865. Eocene of the Paris Basin.
Diagnosis.—Shell small, thin-shelled, elongate,
whorls convex. Protoconch bulbous, multispiral, and
not deviated. Whorls convex, fairly rapidly expanding
and covered with fine impressed spiral lines. Suture
deeply impressed, body whorl very large, about half
the length of the shell. Aperture narrow, ending in a
short, hardly constricted, truncated canal. Outer lip
thin, slightly parasigmoidal, interior smooth. Columel-
la smooth, almost straight with a narrow channel be-
tween two weak folds.
Remarks.—This is an uncommon genus which is re-
stricted to the Eocene of Europe and North America.
Palmer in Palmer and Brann (1966) doubtfully rec-
ognized one species Laevibuccinum (Euryochetus?)
harrisi (Aldrich, 1897) from Woods Bluff, Hatchetig
bee Formation of Alabama, where Aldrich reported it
as common. Palmer regarded it as a subgenus of Lae
vibuccinum Conrad, 1865a, but I prefer to give it full
generic status following Cossmann and Wenz. /. punk
fatum is easily distinguished from the somewhat sim
ilar shaped Laevibuccinum lineatum Garvie, n.sp., by
the more acute spire, the high multispiral protoconch,
the punctate character of the spiral lines, and the ob
solete, hardly constricted canal, The genus is restricted
to the Eocene of Europe and North America.
Euryochetus punctatum, new species
Plate 16, figures 1-2
Description.—Shell medium in size, slender.
Whorls ten, protoconch conical of four and a half
whorls, the transition to the adult marked by a low
varix. Early whorls rounded, later ones tending to flat-
ten out below the suture. Surface of spire covered with
spiral lines, coarse below the suture, punctate and Ac
teon-like over the remainder, The entire surface finely
polished and almost glazed. Base of body whorl with
large flat-topped spirals. Aperture elongate, notched,
outer lip sharp and expanded, edge thickened within
and possessing weak posterior lirae. Columella con
cave, with one very low swelling on the midsection
and a weaker one below an almost indistinguishable
channel, Anterior canal very short and slightly twisted,
basal notch small and shallow.
Remarks.—This shell was very difficult to place and
but for the protoconch would have been placed under
Parvisipho Cossmann, 1889, That genus, which Coss-
mann includes under his family Chrysodismidae, ts
part of a group of buccinids with protoconchs having
a papillate, deviated nucleus. One other characteristic
of Euryochetus is the channel between two columellar
folds; that character is seen very weakly in EF. punc-
tatum. So far as | can determine only one other bue-
cinid genus has punctate spiral lines and that ts the
deep water genus Charitodoron Tomlin, 1932, off the
coast of South Africa. The main feature distinguishing
that genus is the proportionately smaller aperture.
Etymology.—Referring to the ornament of punctate
spiral lines.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30413, Type lo-
cality: locality 4.
Material examined.—One specimen, 23.0 mm
length, 8.3 mm width.
Subfamily PPEUDOLIVINAE Swainson,
1840, p. 82
Genus PSEUDOLIVA Swainson, 1840, p. 82
Type species.—Buccinum plumbeum Dillwyn, 1817,
by original designation, Recent off the coast of West
Africa.
84 BULLETIN 352
Original Diagnosis.—*‘Shell thick, oval, oliviform,
ventricose; spire very short; base with two parallel
grooves, one of which forms a notch at the base of the
outer lip; suture slightly channeled; inner lip very
thick, and turning inwards; aperture with an internal
canal. Connects the Turbinellidae with the Volutidae.“
(Swainson, 1840, p. 306)
Remarks.—The genus ranges from the Upper Cre-
taceous to Recent, where is is known by one species
from West Africa today.
Pseudoliva cf. santander Gardner, 1945
Plate 18, figures 1—3
Pseudoliva santander Gardner, 1945, pp. 195-196, pl. 22. fig. 24;
Dockery, 1980, p. 104-105, pl. 3 figs. LA, 1B, 2, 3A, 3B.
Original description.—‘‘Shell large, rudely conic,
the outline obscured by excess callus. Early whorls
lost, and characters of adolescent largely concealed by
the enveloping body, but probably similar in a general
way to that of P. vetusta (Conrad). Body relatively
large, heavy, broadly inflated, shouldered in the adult;
callus thick, deposited along the suture of the final
whorl, overtopping the spire in many individuals.
Sculpture other than incremental, obsolete or undevel-
oped even on the area in front of the pseudoliva
groove. Aperture relatively short and narrow, oblique-
ly elliptical. Callus pad at posterior commissure thick-
ly spread from the suture to the groove, distorting the
posterior portion of the body and the outer lip; a nar-
row and fairly deep channel between the pad and the
labral margin. Pseudolivar groove narrow and deep.
Anterior fasciole corrugated by the growth lines,
broadly U-shaped terminally. Umbilicus keeled at the
margin apparently closed by the reverted callus.”
(Gardner, 1945, pp. 195-196)
Remarks.—The Reklaw specimens are not as
strongly shouldered as in typical P. santander, a spe-
cies from the lower and middle horizon of the Laredo
Formation of Mexico, but agree well in the remaining
characters. In particular, in the heavy deposit of callus,
the oblique elliptical apertural shape, the keeled mar-
gin to the umbilical depression, the distinct channel
between the outer lip and the labral margin, these spec-
imens match Gardner’s species. Of the various races
of Pseudoliva vetusta, perhaps the Lower Eocene,
Woods Bluff and Middle Eocene specimens from the
Weches Formation of 14.4 km. E. of Jewett, Leon
County, Texas, approach these most closely. With such
a variable form the exact placement is to some degree
arbitrary, but after examining an extensive suite of ma-
terial, P. santander appears the closest species. Gard-
ner (1934) conjectured that P. santander has an um-
bilicus closed by the callus, but even on the smallest
specimens which have very little callus deposit the
umbilicus is absent; in any case that feature has not
been taken to be of much value in separating the va-
rieties of P. vetusta. The best specimen, a juvenile,
shows fine ribbing on the first three adult whorls and
fine spiral lines on the next whorl. Juvenile and me-
dium-sized specimens have an obliquely compressed
form very similar to Pseudoliva nana Gardner, 1945.
The Reklaw specimens may to some extent be distin-
guished by their more globose form, by the almost
complete effacement of the suture, and by the protrac-
tive outer lip. Very similar forms also occur in the
Stone City Member of the Cook Mountain Formation,
in Rocky Branch Creek, Burleson County, Texas at the
base of the formation.
Type information.—Holotype: USNM 497256. Type
locality: given as USGS Sta. 13685 (H-9), Los Alda-
mas, 1.5 km. E. of El Barrio, in San Juan, Nuevo Leon,
Mexico (middle part of the Laredo formation). Figured
Reklaw specimens: PRI 30418, 30419, from locality
20.
Genus SIPHONALIA A. Adams, 1863b, p. 202
Type species.—Buccinum cassidariaeformis Reeve,
1846, by subsequent designation (Cossmann, 1889, p.
149). Recent, seas around Japan.
Diagnosis.—Shell moderate to large in size, low
and inflated. Protoconch small and inclined to the axis
of the shell. Whorls convex, often ramped and cari-
nate, suture impressed. Sculpture with collabral costae
or nodules and fine spiral lines. Body whorl large, the
sculpture effervescent towards the base. Siphonal fas-
ciole distinct, canal bent strongly to the left and shal-
lowly notched. Aperture large, ovate, with posterior
gutter, outer lip thin, lirate within; columella smooth
and excavated.
Remarks.—Wenz (1944) reports the genus widely
distributed but with few species. In the Paleogene of
the Gulf coastal plain ten species have been described;
the genus is also common in the early Tertiary of the
Pacific coast. Several species listed by Palmer and
Brann (1966) under “Siphonalia’ do not seem to
come close to the type, which is a squat, carinate shell
with a strongly bent canal. Cossmann (1901a) lists a
number of species of quite variable character under the
genus, a range that could include the Gulf Coast spe-
cies assigned to Siphonalia. The genus ranges from the
Upper Cretaceous to Recent.
Siphonalia cf. plummeri Palmer, 1937
Plate 17, figures 9-10
“Siphonalia”’ plummeri Palmer, 1937, p. 318, pl. 45, figs. 3, 4;
Brann and Kent, 1960, p. 800.
Original description.—*‘Shell small; whorls round-
EOCENE MOLLuscs OF TEXAS: GARVIE 85
ed, three or four; nucleus of four or five whorls, first
two smooth, minute, last three with conspicuous lon-
gitudinal ribs; the sculpture of the post-nuclear whorls
begins abruptly with a large longitudinal fold and spi-
ral ribs; the surface of the shell is covered with fine
spiral threads, with a finer intervening line; there are
thirteen, longitudinal folds on an imperfect adult shell;
the holotype has nine longitudinal folds but is an im-
mature shell; short anterior canal; labrum crenate with-
in.” (Palmer, 1937, p. 318)
Remarks.—tThe holotype of S. cf: plummeri is a ju-
venile of 7 mm length and 4 mm width and gives a
misleading impression of the adult form of the shell;
Palmer, (1937, p. 318) notes one of the paratypes has
a height of 21 mm. Palmer’s species is from the Wech-
es Formation of Texas. The Reklaw species differs
from S. cf. plummeri in the following minor characters;
possessing about one more fold per whorl, being slen-
derer, and usually lacking the fine intermediate line
between the primary spiral lines. These differences
seem relatively minor and more material will have to
be collected before it is known whether these differ-
ences are constant.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 3092. Type lo-
cality: Colorado River at Smithville, Bastrop County,
Texas. Figured Reklaw specimen: PRI 30420, from lo-
cality 20.
Superfamily VOLUTOIDEA Rafinesque,
1815, p. 19
Family VOLUTIDAE, Fleming, 1822, p. 490
Subfamily ATHLETINAE Pilsbry and Olsson,
1954, p. 15
Genus VOLUTOCORBIS Dall, 1890, p. 75
Type species.—Volutilithes limopsis Conrad, 1860,
by original designation. Paleocene, Porter’s Creek For-
mation of Alabama.
Diagnosis.—Shell resembling Volutilithes, but more
slender and without a coronated shoulder; the sculp-
ture is reticulate, and nodose or prickly at the inter-
sections; the sutural sinus is less evident than in Vol-
utilithes, and the suture is sometimes channeled.
Remarks.—According to Rehder (1969) the genus
ranges from the Paleocene to Recent. Four members
of the species are recognized today, all from deep wa-
ter off the South African coast. Specimens of Voluto-
corbis are generally uncommon in fossil deposits, ex-
cept paradoxically in the Reklaw, where they are abun-
dant.
Volutocorbis stenzeli (Plummer, 1933)
Plate 18, figures 14—15
Plejonia (Volutocorbis) stenzeli Plummer, 1933, p. 813, pl. 9, figs.
1218:
Volutocorbis stenzeli Plummer. Palmer, 1937, p. 384, pl. 59, figs. 1,
2, copies Plummer.
Diagnosis.—First three whorls smooth, next two
ribbed, remainder cancellate. 40 longitudinal ribs on
the body whorl; transverse ribs about equal in strength
to the longitudinal ribs. Apical angle 64°, altitude 20
mm, maximum diameter 10 mm. (After Plummer,
1933, p. 384)
Revised Description.—Whorls seven and a half,
protoconch of three and a half smooth whorls, the first
minute and almost flush with the next. Adult sculpture
starts with two longitudinal costae followed half a
whorl later by two transverse ribs at the upper and
lower sutures; these are nodular where they cross the
longitudinal ribs. At about whorl five a medial fine
transverse line develops which rapidly increases in size
to become another rib. Later whorls develop further
transverse ribs above the lower suture so that the pen-
ultimate whorl has four large nodular ribs. Transverse
ribs are larger than the longitudinal ones; body whorl
crossed by about 23 longitudinal ribs and minute
growth lines, two to three columellar folds present,
callus visible as a thin wide deposit, outer lip with 13
tubercles.
Remarks.—Some specimens develop the third and
fourth longitudinal ribs in the reverse order. Some
specimens show a smaller superior columellar fold.
Apical angle varies between 60° and 65°. Volutocorbis
limopsis (Conrad, 1860) has a similar protoconch,
equally sized spiral ribs, and vertically flattened tu-
bercles. The longer aperture and straighter spire profile
of the Reklaw specimens are very distinctive. The ge-
nus persists in Texas until at least the upper Cook
Mountain Formation (Landrum and Wheelock mem-
bers) as the author has a few specimens from Alabama
Bluff, Trinity River, and from the Little Brazos River,
Texas. V. stenzeli has only been found in the Marquez
Member in Milam, Bastrop, and Caldwell Counties,
Texas.
Type information.—Syntypes: Plummer collection,
TBEG P5381, P14165. Type locality: TBEG 28-T-9,
dump at the site of old Copper prospect, 4.5 miles NE
of Harwood, Caldwell Co., Texas. Figured specimen:
PRI 30421, from locality 20.
Material examined.—250+ specimens, the largest:
16.0 mm length, 7.5 mm width.
Genus ATHLETA Conrad, 1853b, p. 449
Type species.—Voluta rarispina Lamarck, 1811, by
subsequent designation (Dall, 1890, p. 75). Miocene
of Europe.
Diagnosis.—Shell fusiform, spire about one-fifth to
one-third the height of the shell. Smooth protoconch
of one and a half to four and a half whorls followed
86 BULLETIN 352
by a ribbed stage of a half to a quarter whorl and a
cancellate stage between one to one and a half whorls.
Teleoconch shouldered, longitudinally costate or
ribbed, often spinose at the shoulder; below the shoul-
der the spiral lines are numerous. Aperture ovate, inner
lip with two to three folds, outer lip often denticulate,
siphonal canal wide, shallow, slightly recurved, beak
long.
Remarks.—The genus is known from the Eocene to
Miocene.
Athleta petrosus smithii Fisher and Rodda, 1964
Plate 18, figures 6—9
Athleta petrosus smithii Fisher and Rodda, in Fisher, Rodda and
Dietrich, 1964, p. 43 +, pl. 8, figs. 8, 9; pl. 11, figs. 1-5
Athleta petrosus smithii Fisher and Rodda. Palmer and Brann, 1966,
p. 515-516.
Original description.—**Shell small, medium-sized,
whorls eight to ten, protoconch two and seven-eighths
to four and a quarter smooth whorls, next quarter to
half with longitudinal riblets. Later whorls with a nod-
ed shoulder and a noded subsutural ridge, the two sep-
arated by a poorly defined ramp. On the larger speci-
mens the shoulder nodes increase in size to become
small transversely-pointing spines which are at the ter-
mination of low longitudinal folds. Body whorl round-
ed in small specimens, straight in larger ones, beak
sharply constricted into a spirally lirate neck. Aperture
straight, obliquely inclined, two columellar folds,
slight siphonal fasciole present.” (Fisher and Rodda,
in Fisher, Rodda and Dietrich, 1964, p. 43)
Remarks.—200 specimens were used to measure
various characters such as length, spire angle, diame-
ter/length, number of columellar folds, etc. and these
noted for each specimen and plotted graphically. De-
spite the fact that two intermixed species of Athleta
seemed to be present, no consistent set of characters
could be found to reliably separate the groups. The
species displays a wider variation of characters than is
indicated in Fisher er al. (1964); in particular when the
number of ribs on the body whorl is plotted against
the length, the specimens generally separate into two
groups for large specimens and overlap for the smaller
ones. The first variety displays the typical profile of
Athleta petrosus (Conrad, 1833a) s.s. from the Weches
through the Gosport Sand formations, with the upward
pointing spines, a spire angle of 58°—65° and usually
a moderate to heavy amount of callus deposit from
whorl seven onwards. The other group tends to have
a more subdued profile, a spire angle of 51°—60°, a
smaller shoulder ramp, cancellate ornament and miss-
ing or weak folds or spines. No consistent set of char-
acters could be found in either the juvenile specimens
or the spire of the adult specimens which could con-
sistently distinguish the two groups throughout all
stages of growth. In the first group, the adult spinose
sculpture may develop in specimens as small as 15 mm
and is present in all specimens of 20 mm or larger.
About 60% of all specimens have a moderate amount
of callus deposit, 20% showing prominent denticles on
the outer lip. These characters are not dependent on
the growth stage of the specimen, being displayed on
specimens as small as 5 mm. For very small specimens
of 5-7 mm, or four to five whorls, a separation into
two stocks is again apparent; those with a high pro-
toconch of three and a half to four whorls, coarse lon-
gitudinal folds and lack of transverse lirae on the body
whorl, and those with a more squat protoconch of three
and an eighth to three and three-quarters whorls,
shoulder rarely present and a more uniform cancellate
ornament. The high protoconch group can be correlat-
ed with the spinose adult form but only in general
terms. It is possible that these specimens contain two
species, the descendants of the stocks of Athleta tuo-
meyi Conrad, 1853b from the Paleocene and Lower
Eocene, and Athleta petrosus (Conrad, 1833a), that
have not become sufficiently differentiated to separate
them taxonomically. Alternatively this might be a case
of sexual dimorphism.
Type information.—Holotype: TBEG 35288. Type
locality: bluff on Ridge Creek, 6.2 m. West of Smith-
ville, Bastrop County, Texas; locality 6 (=TBEG lo-
cality no. 11-T-7). Figured specimens: PRI 30422—
30424, from locations 20.
Material examined.—400+, the largest 34 mm
length, 19 mm width, spire angle 57°—73°.
Family HARPIDAE Bronn, 1849, p. 469
Genus CRYPTOCHORDA Morch, 1858, p. 43
Type species.—Buccinum stromboides Hermanns,
1781, by monotypy. Eocene of England and France.
Diagnosis.—Shell fusiform, not high, smooth. Pro-
toconch rounded with four smooth whorls. Whorls
rounded, body whorl large and inflated, basally con-
stricted to a short neck, siphonal fasciole weak. Ap-
erture elongate with posterior gutter, anterior notch
deep. Outer lip thickened, almost straight. Columella
without folds, curved several times, anteriorly reach-
ing below the labrum, columellar callus thinly cover-
ing the ventral surface and most of the spire.
Remarks.—The genus is relatively rare and restrict-
ed to the Paleogene of North America and Europe.
Four Claibornian species are known and one from the
Eocene of California.
Cryptochorda? sp.
Plate 18, figure 16
Remarks.—Several fragments of the outer lip of a
Cryptochorda were obtained, all of them associated
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 87
with a large mass of worn coral. The differences be-
tween this species and other Claibornian ones indicate
a less robust species with a thinner spread of enamel.
The base of the body whorl has five to seven im-
pressed spiral lines, a feature also seen in some spec-
imens of Cryptochorda eureia Stenzel and Turner,
1940, from the Weches Formation of Texas.
Material examined.—Five fragments, the largest 25
mm length, comprising the lip and part of the body
whorl, from locality 20. Figured specimen: PRI 33129.
Family OLIVIDAE Latrielle, 1825, p. 198
Genus ANCILLA Lamarck, 1799, p. 70
Type species.—Voluta ampla Gmelin, 1791, by
monotypy. Living in the Indo-Pacific.
Diagnosis.—Shell elongate, ovoid-fusiform; sutures
usually externally covered with callus; surface smooth,
often polished. Aperture long, broader anteriorly, with
a slight anterior notch, outer lip sharp, smooth within;
columella slightly twisted, with fine folds; anterior part
of the aperture with a callus deposit.
Remarks.—Wenz (1943) lists Ancilla ranging ques-
tionably from the Cretaceous (Senonian) to recent. The
genus is well known, and common in the Sabinian and
Claibornian stages of the Gulf coastal plain. The genus
s.l. is ranges from the Upper Cretaceous to Recent.
Subgenus OLIVULA Conrad, 1832b, p. 25
Type species.—Ancilla (Olivula) staminea (Conrad,
1832b), by subsequent designation (Cossmann, 1899b,
p. 70). Sabinian and Claibornian stages of the south-
eastern United States.
Diagnosis.—Shell medium to large in size; elon-
gate, spire short; suture somewhat channeled; subsu-
tural collar heavy, covered by callus that extends over
the upper margin of the preceeding whorl; aperture
very long, somewhat expanded anteriorly; outer lip
straight or weakly convex, posteriorly abruptly bent
towards the body. Ancillid band broad, fasciolar band
divided into two bands by a spiral line; fasciolar
groove deep.
Remarks.—Olivula is an Eocene genus restricted to
North America.
Ancilla (Olivula) staminea reklawensis,
new subspecies
Plate 19, figures 15-16
Description.—Shell medium in size, elongate,
weakly inflated; spire whorls covered with a thin even
coat of callus which spreads from the apertural region
to the previous or earlier whorl; collar with a groove
on the upper third to one quarter; sculpture of very
subdued ornamentation of longitudinal lines and spiral
striae.
Remarks.—Lower Eocene forms of Ancilla (O.)
staminea have a thick development of the callus and
only one groove in the anterior enamel band; the body
whorl ornamentation is very similar to that of Middle
Claibornian forms of A. (O.) staminea. The labial de-
velopment of the Reklaw subspecies is more closely
allied to the middle Eocene representatives of A. (O.)
staminea, which have two grooves on the enamel
band, more prominent body whorl ornamentation and
a higher and less callus covered spire. Specimens of
A. (O.) staminea from St. Maurice, Louisiana show the
greatest similarity to the Reklaw material.
Etymology.—Referring to the formation.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30425; paratype:
PRI 30426. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—225 specimens, the largest:
17.4 mm length, 6.2 mm width.
Superfamily CANCELLARIOIDEA Gray,
1853, p. 130
Family CANCELLARIDAE Forbes and Hanley,
1853, p. 360
Genus ADMETULA Cossmann, 1889, p. 224
Type species.—Cancellaria evulsa (Solander, 1776),
by original designation. Bartonian Eocene of England.
Diagnosis.—Shell inflated, not umbilicated, with
varices and cancellate ornament; protoconch paucis-
piral, prominent, flattened; aperture oval, outer lip lir-
ate within corresponding to the last varix; beak slighty
twisted and bent to the left, not notched; labial deposit
thin; columella with three oblique folds, the lowest
weaker and not as oblique as the upper two.
Remarks.—The genus is known from the Upper
Cretaceous to the Pliocene.
Admetula irregularis, new species
Plate 19, figures 1—2
Description.—Shell small and squat, of five and a
half whorls. Protoconch of two and a half smooth
rounded whorls, nucleus minute, transition to final
adult sculpture is via a cancellate ornament of a quarter
whorl. Adult sculpture of 12 to 13 oblique costae
which vary irregularly in size from thin raised lines to
thick varices, these are overridden by five spiral lines
on the spire and 11 or 12 on the body whorl, the in-
tersections with the smaller costae nodular. Whorls
strongly contracted at the suture making the sutural
diameter less than that of the previous whorl. Aperture
ovate, outer lip curving smoothly to the base and lirate
within. Columella with plications, the two uppermost
stronger and terminating abruptly abaperturally, the
lower plication marking the start of a short unnotched
canal. Edge of inner lip margining a deep depression.
88 BULLETIN 352
Remarks.—Two similar species are Admetula torti-
plica (Conrad, 1865a) and Admetula parilis (Palmer,
1937), both from the Middle Claibornian. A. tortiplica
is more elongate and has one more spiral line on the
spire and the columellar plications develop gradually
from the two uppermost revolving ribs; A. parilis is
shorter, has stronger spiral lines and has weaker vari-
ces. All the specimens at hand are probably juvenile
but are still readily distinguished by the smaller size
and irregular ornamentation; the largest specimen (the
holotype) has a medial spiral thread between spiral
lines on the body whorl. Several similar Cancellaridae
from the Claibornian have a similar irregular sculpture
but none so pronounced as A. irregularis.
Etymology.—Referring to the irregularly sized cos-
tae.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30427; para-
types: PRI 30428. Type locality: locality 4.
Material examined.—15 specimens, the largest 4.5
mm length, 2.8 mm width.
Genus TRIGONOSTOMA Blainville, 1827, p. 652
Type species.—Delphinula trigonostoma Lamarck,
1822, by monotypy. Recent in the Indo-Pacific.
Diagnosis.—Shell globose to high, whorls more or
less loosely wound; shoulder wide and concave; ap-
erture trigonal and bent to the right; widely umbilicate,
siphonal fasciole strong; columella with two or three
plications.
Remarks.—Genus Trigonostoma ranges from the
Lower Eocene to Recent. Recent species of the genus
are temperate to tropical in distribution.
Subgenus VENTRILIA Jousseaume, 1887, p. 194
Type species.—Ventrilia ventrilia Jousseaume, 1887
(= Cancellaria tenera Philippi, 1848), by monotypy.
Recent, in the Caribbean.
Diagnosis.—Whorls carinate, closely coiled, suture
channeled or deeply impressed, the diameter less than
the carina of the previous whorl; umbilicus well de-
veloped, margined by a broad siphonal fasciole; peri-
stome continuous, channeled below; columella con-
cave with two weak folds, partially resorbed at um-
bilical edge.
Remarks.—Ventrilia is known from the Eocene to
Recent.
Trigonostoma (Ventrilia) herbae, new species
Plate 19, figures 3—4
Description.—Shell small, slender for the genus.
Protoconch of two and a half smooth whorls, flattened
at the apex, nucleus minute, last nuclear whorl greatly
expanded. Adult sculpture up to five and a half smooth
convex whorls which carry microscopic widely spaced
spiral striae, slightly more prominent on the lower part
of the whorls. Shoulder prominent, smoothly concave,
the keel thickened and with 12 to 14 bladelike costae
on each whorl, the upper ends of which are rounded,
bent back and projecting well above the shoulder; on
the shoulder the upper ends of the costae meet the
suture almost tangentially. Aperture ovately triangular,
inner lip with two columellar folds that are margined
below by a swelling on the columella, labrum with
obscure denticles, umbilicus small.
Remarks.—A few specimens have the costae thick-
ened to such a degree that they can be considered var-
ices. The nearest relatives are Trigonostoma panones
(Harris, 1895a) from the Weches Formation, and 7ri-
gonostoma sabinetownensis LeBlank, 1942 from the
Hatchetigbee Formation. Unfortunately the holotype of
T. sabinetownensis is lost; based on the published fig-
ures and text by LeBlank; 7. sabinetownensis has
sharp costae, is smaller, and has only two columellar
folds, while 7. panones has three columellar folds,
thickened costae that are nodular above the keel, and
is altogether a broader shell. In 7. (V.) herbae the cos-
tae and growth lines on the shoulder meet almost tan-
gentially while in 7. panones they meet at ca. 45°.
Trigonostoma gemmatum (Conrad, 1833a), a more dis-
tantly related species, also has the costae meeting the
suture almost tangentially. The high spire of this spe-
cies and lack of strong spiral ornament place this spe-
cies rather doubtfully in Ventrilia; most American Eo-
cene cancellarids require a revison for proper place-
ment but that is outside the scope of this report.
Etymology.—The name herbae (Latin, blade), refers
to the blade-like costae.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30429; para-
types: PRI 30430, 30431. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—92 specimens, the largest: 8.5
mm length.
Trigonostoma (Ventrilia) elegantissima,
new species
Plate 19, figures 7-8
Description.—Shell small, slender, of up to six and
three-quarter whorls. Protoconch of two and a half to
two and three-quarter smooth inflated whorls, nucleus
minute. Adult whorls with 17 to 21 strong costae, flut-
ed above and projecting a little above the convex
shoulder. About six spiral ribs on the spire and 11 on
the body whorl. Sharp prominent nodes are developed
where the spiral ribs cross the costae. Aperture trian-
gular, labrum with seven denticles, inner lip with two
folds, a denticle on the lower margin and above with
two spiral rows of denticles on the callus correspond-
ing in position to the nodes beneath. Length of um-
bilical area more than half the apertural length.
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 89
Remarks.—This species has affinities with Trigo-
nostoma panones smithvillensis (Harris, 1895a), Tri-
gonostoma panones juniperum (Harris, 1895a) and
Trigonostoma penrosei (Harris, 1895a), and may be
ancestral to all of them. 7. penrosei also has nodular
ribs, but three plications on the columella, 10 to 11
ribs and three spiral lines. Unfortunately the holotype
of T. penrosei is so damaged that only the published
figures can be relied upon. Both 7. harrisi and T. jun-
iperum have an obtuse shoulder angulation, but not as
acute as in 7. (V.) elegantissima, and both have a dif-
ferent apertural profile. The distinctive features of 7.
(V.) elegantissima are the concave profile of the lower
portion of the body whorl and the very crisp and nod-
ular ornamentation.
Etymology.—The name elegantissima (Latin, most
elegant), refers to the very elegant form of this species.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30432. Type lo-
cality: locality 20.
Material examined.—Nine specimens, the largest:
9.0 mm length.
Trigonostoma (Ventrilia) jonesae, new species
Plate 19, figures 5—6
Description.—Shell small, whorls seven, proto-
conch of two smooth whorls, the apex flattened and
the nucleus depressed and minute. Adult whorls with
a rounded shoulder and 14 to 15 costae per whorl of
which four per whorl are developed into varices.
Whorls crossed by numerous irregularly spaced spiral
lines tending to become obsolete above the carina. On
the body whorl the ribs are smaller, regularly spaced
and crossed at right angles by low undulations on the
umbilical margin, the undulations formed by the pos-
terior end of the thickened longitudinal costae. Aper-
ture suboval, labrum thickened within and with seven
spiral lirae. Inner lip with two folds and a lower cren-
ulation. Umbilicus small.
Remarks.—The closest relative to this species is Tri-
gonostoma panones smithvillensis (Harris, 1895a)
from the Weches Formation, but that species has no
secondary sculpture, has a more rounded shoulder and
keel, and a very much larger protoconch. T. (V.) jo-
nesae combines characters common to species of both
Sveltia, Jousseaume, 1887, and Trigonostoma. Sveltia
alveata (Conrad, 1833b) from the upper Claiborne
Group, of which T. (V.) jonesae is a probable ancestor,
has a similar shape, protoconch and body whorl or-
namentation, but the ornament of the spire is more
regular in shape and shows none of the varices char-
acteristic of the Reklaw species. Trigonostoma s.s has
a channeled suture and a triangular aperture, the base
of which is a posterior gutter placed well away from
the suture and is reflected to the right. Species of Svel-
tia s.s. have an obliquely elongated aperture, im-
pressed sutures and a flaring outer lip. In 7. (V.) jo-
nesae the lip is moderately flaring, the base is reflected
and an impressed suture is contained within a weak
gutter. Most species assigned to Trigonostoma in the
Claibornian Eocene do not have the base of the aper-
ture reflected to the left, or the channeled sutures typ-
ical of that genus.
Etymology.—This species is named in honor of Dr.
Carol Jones, formerly of the Academy of Natural Sci-
ences, Philadelphia.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30433; paratype:
PRI 30434, a juvenile. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—Five specimens, the largest:
10.0 mm length.
Family MITRIDAE Swainson,
1831, pls. 49, 50, 54"
Subfamily CYLINDROMITRINAE Cossmann,
1899, p. 152
Genus VOLVARIELLA Fisher, 1883, p. 553
Type species.—Volvaria lamarcki Deshayes, 1865,
by monotypy. Eocene of the Paris Basin.
Diagnosis.—*‘Shell small, 7-15 mm, cylindrical
and slender, spire short and conical, with almost five
whorls; nuclear whorls are smooth and flat. Sculptured
with numerous and finely punctate spiral striae. Ap-
erture longer than the spire, straight, slightly flaring
anteriorly; columella with 2 anteriorly placed folds.”
(Cernohorsky, 1970, p. 64).
Remarks.—Cerohorsky (1970), stated that the ge-
nus Volvariella is probably related to Cylindites J. de
C. Sowerby, 1824, a genus within the family Acteon-
idae. As one characteristic of the opisthobranch family
Acteonidae is a heterostrophic nucleus, a specimen of
Volvariella milamensis, n. sp. was carefully broken
and the nucleus examined. The nucleus was found to
be dextral and in fact quite similar to that of Ancilla
Lamarck, 1799. On this evidence the genus is kept
within the Mitridae where it had been placed by pre-
vious authors. The genus is restricted to the Eocene of
Europe and North America.
Volvariella milamensis, new species
Plate 19, figures 11—12
Description.—Protoconch of two and a half to three
whorls, loosely coiled. Whorls three through six are
partially immersed in the later whorls. Body whorl
punctate, columella with three folds and above that a
swelling that dies out as it revolves into the aperture.
The first and third folds continue revolving into the
' Nomen transl. Adams, A. and Adams, H, 1853 (ex Mitranae)
90 BULLETIN 352
aperture while the second becomes obsolete and merg-
es into the upper one. Spire angle of 77° to 90°.
Remarks.—This species is similar to Volvariella
gabbiana Harris, 1895a, and could have been assigned
there but for the larger number of columellar folds, its
spire angle of 115° and its non-punctate surface. An-
other species related to this one is Volvariella reticu-
lata Johnson, 1899; its spire angle is ca. 60°. Two
specimens show traces of violet color banding colla-
bral with the growth lines.
Etymology.—The specific name refers to the occur-
rence in Milam County.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30435; para-
types: PRI 30436, 30437. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—17 specimens: the largest 10.0
mm length, 3.0 mm width.
Superfamily CONOIDEA Rafinesque, 1815, p. 19
Family CONIDAE Rafinesque, 1815, p. 19
Genus CONUS Linneaus, 1758, p. 712
Type species.—Conus marmoreus Linneaus, 1758,
by subsequent designation (Children, 1823). Recent in
the Indo-Pacific.
Diagnosis.—Shell usually solid, thick-shelled, in the
form of an inverse cone with straight or concave sides.
Spire usually low, later whorls enveloping earlier ones
below the suture, ornament above smooth or with rows
of nodules, below with spiral lines. Siphonal fasciole
strong, smooth or with spiral lines. Aperture thin, elon-
gate, parallel, sometimes a little wider anteriorly, ex-
tending most of the length of the shell. Outer lip thin,
sharp, top with anal sinus. Columella straight, poste-
rior gutter present, earlier whorls partially resorbed.
Remarks.—Conus s.s. is known from the Pliocene
to Recent. The genus is primarily tropical in distribu-
tion.
Subgenus LITHOCONUS Morch, 1852, p. 66
Type species.—Conus millepunctatus Lamarck,
1822, by subsequent designation (Cossmann, 1889, p.
232). Recent in the Indo-Pacific.
Diagnosis.—Shell moderate to large in size. Spire
concave to flat, or very low. Protoconch globular, with
blunt nucleus. Above the shoulder, whorls weakly con-
cave, smooth or with fine spiral striae; sutures im-
pressed. Below shoulder, body whorl smooth, basally
with spiral lines, and wide impressed anal depression,
siphonal fasciole present. Aperture wider below. An-
teriorly weakly notched. Outer lip prosocyrt.
Remarks.—Wenz (1943) gives the range of Litho-
conus questionably from the Cretaceous (Senonian), to
Recent.
Conus (Lithoconus) nocens, new species
Plate 19, figures 9-10
Description.—Shell small, protoconch of two and
one-half smooth whorls. Spire whorls with five or six
spiral lines. Below the carina early whorls ornamented
with weak oblique nodules, later ones smooth. Body
whorl a straight cone, smooth, base with strong punc-
tate, crowded spiral lines. Columella terminated with
a strong, very oblique fold, siphonal fasciole weak.
Remarks.—Four characters in combination serve to
distinguish this species from Conus (Lithoconus) saur-
idens Conrad, 1833b, the common cone from the Cook
Mountain Formation: the flat sides, the sharp unridged
carina, the coarse, strong, spiral basal lines, and the
lack of strong growth lines on the ramp. The growth
lines on Cook Mountain specimens generate a char-
acteristic reticulated pattern on the ramp where they
cross the spiral lines. As Palmer (1937, p. 461) has
already noted, the height and shape of the spire in this
species is so variable as to preclude use of that feature
in a definite determination. I have a large collection of
cones from the Weches Formation where the common
species is also referred to C. (L.) nocens. These spec-
imens show a slightly rounded carina, giving the whorl
profile a weakly sinuous profile but still far closer to
the type than is C. (L.) sauridens. The largest Weches
specimens of C. (L.) nocens tend to have obsolescent
basal spiral lines on the abapertural side but keep them
adaperturally. Larger Cook Mountain specimens of C.
(L.) sauridens develop a strong, swollen siphonal fas-
ciole, whereas C. (L.) nocens does not. The system-
atics of the Middle Claibornian cones is badly in need
of revision; at least another three well characterized
species can be recognised aside from C. (L.) sauridens.
Etymology.—The specific name 1s a play on the type
locality, ““Devil’s Eye’’.
Type information.—Holotype: UT-TMM 84822;
paratype: UT-TMM 84823. Type locality: locality 11.
Holotype length, 20.0 mm.
Material examined.—Two Reklaw specimens, 25
Weches specimens, 100+ Cook Mountain specimens.
Family TURRIDAE H. and A. Adams,
1858, p. 614"
Subfamily TURRICULINAE Powell, 1942, p. 29
Genus TURRICULA Schumacher, 1817, p. 217
Type species.—Turricula flammea Schumacher,
1817, by monotypy. Recent from the Indo-Pacific.
'S Swainson (1840) has been credited with the definition of the
name Turridae although he uses the name Pleurotomidae. H. and A.
Adams (1858) use Turrinae in the first page of the index of volume
1 to refer to Turritidae and Turritinae on p. 87. On p. 246, they note
a new suborder established by Dr. Gray on the basis of anatomical
characters; in volume 2, p. 614, the names Turridae and Turrinae are
formally established.
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE |
Diagnosis.—Shell fusiform, usually shouldered,
carinate, with a long, straight or slightly bent, narrow
canal. Sculpture varying from smooth to strong spirals,
often nodular where crossed by growth lines. Proto-
conch of two to two and one-half smooth whorls. Anal
sinus on the shoulder slope, moderately deep, wide and
U-shaped; outer lip thin.
Remarks.—Powell (1966) has Turricula ranging
from the Eocene to Recent. Turricula s.l. appears to
occur in the Upper Cretaceous of the Gulf Coast.
Turricula sp.
Plate 19, figures 13-14
Description.—Shell small, moderately inflated.
Whorls with subsutural collar, concave ramp, jutting
carina and constricted below; body whorl broadly
rounded. Ornament of numerous spiral lines; with
weak folds below the carina on early whorls; elongated
riblets on the subsutural collar generated by the growth
lines, stronger on later whorls. Columella straight and
smooth.
Remarks.—The one specimen found of this genus
is missing the protoconch, and part of the outer lip and
canal. Palmer and Brann (1966) list five species of
Turricula from the Paleocene and Eocene of the Gulf
Coastal Plain; none of these shows much similarity to
the present species. This species is remarkably similar
to Turricula planetica (Edwards, 1856), from the Eo-
cene Bracklesham and Barton beds of southern En-
gland, and can be distinguished from that species by
the lower position of the carina, the more prominently
defined collar, and the noded character of the whorls
below the carina on the early whorls.
Material examined.—One specimen, 22 mm length.
Location 20, unit EF Figured specimen: PRI 30560.
Genus SURCULOMA Casey, 1904, p. 153
Type species.—Pleurotoma tabulata Conrad, 1833b,
by original designation. Middle Eocene, Gosport Sand
Formation of Alabama.
Original diagnosis.—**. . . the small paucispiral em-
bryo is very nearly the same in general form [to Am-
blyacrum, Cossmann, 1889]... In Surculoma the beak
is rather slender and somewhat abruptly formed below
the convexity of the body whorl, the ribs large and
few in number, the spire whorls always more or less
angulate in profile at the periphery and the sculpture
invariably consists of minute and very close-set spiral
lines.** (Casey, 1904, p. 153)
Subgenus VOLUTAPEX, new subgenus
Type species.—Surculoma calantica Harris, 1937,
herein.
Diagnosis.—Shells like Surculoma but with a blunt-
ly mammilate nucleus, spiral striation most obvious
anteriorly. Ribbing typically having a vertically
pinched appearance, thus producing whorls or a more
or less carinated aspect. (after Harris, 1937, p. 55)
Remarks.—Harris (1937, p. 55) proposed Volutapex
as a section of Surculoma; the latter taxon defined as
a subgenus of Turricula, and thus Volutapex had then
no formal taxonomic status. Palmer and Brann (1966)
use Volutapex as a subgenus and list eight species un-
der that taxon, but do not give a diagnosis or figure of
the type species so the taxonomic status remained un-
changed. Powell (1966) briefly discusses Volutapex
but does not believe it deserves more than sectional
significance. In my experience, the Claibornian species
assigned to Volutapex form a natural group and should
be given more than sectional status. Harris, 1937, notes
Surculoma calantica Harris, 1937, may be regarded as
typical and includes four other species in the section;
the Reklaw species described in the next section fits
readily in Harris’s group. The group appears restricted
to the Eocene of the Gulf Coast.
Surculoma (Volutapex) imbricata, new species
Plate 20, figure 14
Description.—Shell medium sized, elongate fusi-
form. Whorls ten, protoconch obtuse, blunt and mam-
millate, of one smooth volution; the remaining whorls
strongly carinate and possessing a sharp keel. Shoulder
concave with indications of a faint subsutural collar,
profile convex below the keel, six to eight longitudinal
folds per whorl, strong below and fading out below
the collar. Surface ornamented with numerous close-
set, sharp, collabral striae and irregular, spiral lines,
both obsolescent on the shoulder; below the keel a few
stronger spirals. Where the spiral lines cross the lon-
gitudinal ones a minute muricate ornament is devel-
oped that is stronger on the shoulder. Base of the body
whorl with stronger spiral lines which alternate in size
on the beak. Aperture ovate, outer lip sharp, incurved
and smooth within. Columella long and slightly twist-
ed, siphonal fasciole variable in strength. Umbilical
depression usually present.
Remarks.—The strength of the siphonal fasciole is
quite variable; thin-shelled specimens have a very
weak fasciole and almost no umbilical depression,
thicker specimens have a prominent, strongly twisted
fasciole, and a larger depression; in one case the um-
bilical depression is developed into a small false um-
bilicus. A close representative is Surculoma penrosei
(Harris, 1937). The Reklaw specimens have a more
prominently imbricated ornament, much more angular
whorls, a concave shoulder and are generally shorter.
Etymology.—tThe specific name imbricata notes the
imbricate character of the whorls.
92 BULLETIN 352
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30460; para-
types: PRI 30461-30463. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—140 + specimens, the largest:
28.0 mm length, 10.3 mm width.
Genus LYROSURCULA Casey, 1904, p. 156
Type species.—Lyrosurcula elegans Casey, 1904, by
subsequent designation (Powell, 1942, p. 16). Claibor-
nian Eocene of the United States.
Diagnosis.—Shell with multispiral conical proto-
conch, initially smooth then with widely spaced ar-
cuate riblets. Teleoconch whorls with large fasciolar
surface, spirally lirate throughout, with axial ornament
of angular, large, barely inflated costae separated by
regular depressions that are strong below the fasciolar
surface, and weak or obsolete above. Aperture and ca-
nal long, columella straight and smooth.
Remarks.—The teleoconch sculpture is very distinc-
tive but usually poorly described. A common character
of shells is a regular arrangement of nodes, or spines,
superimposed on a regularly conical spire; the genus
Lyrosurcula has an unusual arrangement where regu-
larly arranged, radially depressed areas, or dimples, are
seen instead of nodes or spines. The genus is known
only from the Eocene of the Gulf Coast.
Lyrosurcula cf. vaughani (Harris, 1895a)
Plate 20, figures 16-17
Pleurotoma vaughani Harris, 1895a, p. 57, pl. 4, fig. 8.
Lyrosurcula vaughani (Harris). Casey, 1904, p. 157; Harris, 1937,
p. 82, pl. 13, fig. 38; fig. 39; Brann and Kent, 1960, p. 516; Palmer
and Brann, 1966, p. 746.
Remarks.—Two juveniles are assigned to this spe-
cies. L. vaughani ranges from the Weches Formation
to the Upper Cook Mountain Formation. The only dif-
ferences observed are the more pointed protoconch
and generally sharper spiral ornamentation of the Rek-
law specimens. More material will have to be discov-
ered before it can be determined whether these differ-
ences are significant or not.
Type information.—Holotype: TBEG 35616, from
the Weches Formation. Type locality: banks of Colo-
rado River at Smithville, Bastrop County, Texas. Fig-
ured Reklaw specimen: PRI 33130.
Genus PYRAMIMITRA Conrad, 1865a, p. 28
Type species.—Mitra terebraeformis Conrad, 1848,
by monotypy. Gosport Sand Formation of Alabama.
Diagnosis.—Shell small, slender. Protoconch mul-
tispiral, initially smooth, later longitudinally costate,
nucleus small. Whorls feebly convex, with impressed
suture and longitudinal ribs and spiral lines. Body
whorl one-third to one-half the total height, convex
and with short neck. Aperture small, canal short and
bent. Columella short, straight, with one to two folds.
Remarks.—The genus is known from the Eocene
and Oligocene of North America and Europe.
Subgenus PETRAFIXIA Cossmann, 1901b, p. 127
Type species.—Fusus koeneni Cossmann and Lam-
bert, 1884, by monotypy. Estampes Oligocene of
France.
Diagnosis.—Shell very small. Body whorl about
one-half of the total height. Outer lip thin, smooth in-
side. Columella with one fold at the beginning of the
canal.
Remarks.—To date Petrafixia is known only from
the Oligocene of Europe
Pyramimitra (Petrafixia) eocenica, new species
Plate 20, figures 8-9
Description.—Shell very small, slender. Whorls six
and one-half to seven; protoconch of three and one-
half whorls, the first two and one-half smooth, rounded
and with a subsutural line, the last with well developed
longitudinal riblets. Adult whorls smooth and polished,
sculptured with six longitudinal ribs per whorl and
three spiral lines of about equal strength, one below
the suture and two in the mid-section of the whorl, the
ribs more prominent where they cross the ribs. Some
specimens have a fine, intermediate spiral stria below
the subsutural line. Occasionally a fourth rib is uncov-
ered by the succeeding whorl. Suture moderately im-
pressed, becoming strongly so by the final whorl;
growth lines widely arcuate with the base of the sinus
on the second line. Body whorl with seven or eight
spiral lines and six or seven more on the base. Aper-
ture elliptical, outer lip thin, smooth within; columella
very short and straight, sharply terminated on the left
and bounded below by a very weak fold. Canal short,
twisted and bent to the left.
Remarks.—This species is easily distinguished from
its closest relative Pyramimitra terebraeformis (Con-
rad, 1848), by the differing spiral sculpture and the
lack of two columellar plications. Conrad (1848), orig-
inally places P. terebraeformis under Mitra, due no
doubt to its mitrid proportions and strong columellar
folds; in 1865 he creates the monotypic genus Pyra-
mimitra for it. In 1901b Cossmann creates the family
Pyramimitridae to include Pyramimitra s.s. and one
subgenus Petrafixia. Excepting Wenz (1943), who
places it in the Buccinidae; other authors, viz. Palmer
(1937), Harris and Palmer (1946), Palmer and Brann
(1966), and Dockery (1977), follow Cossmann in his
placement. Cossmann (1901b, p. 125) gives a synopsis
of what he regarded as the evolution of Pyramimitra
in which Petrafixia is the evolutionary descendant of
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 93
Pyramimitra s.s. in a line which terminated in Pisa-
nella Koenen, 1865. It appears more probable that Pe-
trafixia is the ancestor and the Oligocene species P.
(P.) koeneni in France is a separate offshoot. I have
collected specimens of a Pyramimitra from the Wech-
es Formation at Burleson Bluff, on the Brazos River,
which are intermediate in character between P. (P.)
eocenica and P. terebraeformis, which make the pro-
posed development more plausible. The Reklaw spe-
cies has an anal notch on the upper part of the whorl,
which suggests that the genus belongs in the Turridae
rather than the Buccinidae. It might be argued that the
notch is of a similar character to that seen in Surculites
Conrad, 1865d, a genus which Wrigley (1939) re-
moved from the Turridae and placed in the neighbor-
hood of the Fusinidae and Buccinidae. Wrigley’s ar-
gument centered on the fact that the so-called notch
on Surculites is dependent on the size of the carina,
essentially straight on the early whorls, and increas-
ingly sinuous on later ones. This is not the case in P.
(P.) eocenica and to a lesser extent in the undescribed
Weches species; in these species an anal notch is ob-
served immediately after the protoconch. The proto-
conch too, is more typical of some Turridae, with the
early, smooth whorls and the later, ribbed ones, rather
than of a Buccinid family member. Several genera
such as Microsurcula Casey, 1904 and Lyrosurcula
Casey, 1904, have a very similar protoconch, and in
the case of Microsurcula a similar apical sculpture too.
Harris (1937) places Microsurcula as a subgenus of
Raphitoma Bellardi, 1847, but following Powell
(1966), it probably deserves full generic rank in the
Turriculinae. In conclusion, the U-shaped sinus on the
shoulder slope, type of protoconch and general simi-
larity of the spire to Microsurcula, justify the trans-
ference of Pyramimitra to the Turriculinae. Even
though P. terebraeformis and the closely related Pyr-
amimitra quadralirata Dockery, 1977, do not show a
definite turrid notch, the close taxonomic relationship
to P. (P.) eocenica and short time interval between the
species also justifies their transference to the Turricu-
linae. Powell (1966, pl. 7) illustrates several genera
showing similarities to Pyramimitra, of which Turri-
drupa Hedley, 1922 appears particularly close.
Etymology.—The name eocenica notes the first re-
ported occurrence of Petrafixia in the Eocene.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30464; paratype:
PRI 30465. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—Five specimens, the largest
(broken) 3.1 mm in length.
Genus PLEUROFUSIA de Gregorio, 1890, p. 34
Type species.—Pleurotoma longirostropis de Gre-
gorio, 1890, by original designation. Middle Eocene,
Gosport Sand Formation of Alabama.
Diagnosis.—Shell moderate to fairly large in size;
protoconch paucispiral, smooth, last quarter turn with
arcuate riblets; spire high; sculpture of coarse ribs ov-
erriden by strong spiral cords; sinus broad, shallow,
with the apex closer to the periphery than the suture;
anterior canal long and unnotched.
Remarks.—This genus is restricted to the Eocene
and Oligocene of Europe, and North and South Amer-
ica.
Pleurofusia? huppertzi (Harris, 1895a)
Plate 20, figures 21—22
Pleurofusia huppertzi Harris, 1895a, p. 58, pl. 4, fig. 9.
Turricula (Pleurofusia?) huppertzi (Harris). Harris, 1937, p. 52, pl.
10, fig. 9.
Pleurofusia? huppertzi (Harris). Palmer and Brann, 1966, p. 829;
Knight, Hodgkinson, Knight, Reid, Lindveit, Lindveit, and Offeman,
1977, p. 24.
Original description Size and general form as in-
dicated in the figure; whorls 11, one and two smooth,
three to ten somewhat inflated submedially, longitudi-
nally costae obtuse, most prominent submedially, almost
vanishing on the subsutural portions of the whorls, be-
coming short and nodular on the upper whorls, promi-
nently spirally striate, the striae often irregular and way-
ing on the medial portions of the whorls; body whorl
costate and spirally striate, striae becoming of alternate
strength on the beak.” (Harris, 1895a, p. 58)
Remarks.—The Reklaw specimens are more elon-
gate and the nodular costation is less prominent on the
later whorls than in P. huppertzi s.s., otherwise the
specimens are very similar. The protoconch however,
is not typical of Pleurofusia, in which it is described
as blunt, paucispiral and smooth except for a few axial
riblets on the last one-quarter turn. The present spec-
imens have a conical protoconch of four turns, the nu-
cleus minute and blunt, the first three smooth and
rounded-carinate below the middle, and the last turn
with axial riblets and a subsutural line that slowly in-
creases in strength. The Reklaw species of P. huppertzi
could be the immediate ancestor of Pleurofusia clai-
barena Harris, 1937 from the Gosport Sand Formation
of Alabama; this latter species has a similar profile and
the same number of nodulations per whorl. One spec-
imen with a worn apex has much more subdued or-
namentation, particularly so on the shoulder slope and
is very much closer to the type; no intermediate forms
have been discovered yet. The species ranges from the
Reklaw to the Weches Formation, Middle Eocene of
Texas.
Type information.—Holotype: TBEG 35618. Type
locality: locality 8. Figured Reklaw specimen: PRI
30505.
94 BULLETIN 352
Material examined.—350+ specimens, the largest
(incomplete): 38 mm length, 9.9 mm width.
Genus LEPTOSURCULA Casey, 1904, p. 57
Type species.—Pleurotoma beadata Harris, 1895a,
by monotypy. Middle Eocene, Weches Formation of
Texas.
Original description.—‘In this genus the form is
very slender, fusiform, the canal very long, the aper-
ture and canal together being about half as long as the
entire shell. The embryo is relatively very large, higher
than wide, conical and composed of five or six pol-
ished whorls, the lower whorls gradually acquiring
close-set longitudinal riblets, and then equally gradu-
ally the spiral lyrae. The type is the very isolated P.
beadata Harris, of the Texas Eocene, a slender and
much elongated species, with a long slender and ta-
pering beak. The series of small rounded close-set
nodules forming the subsutural collar, are completely
independent of the relatively large and oblique costae,
which are less than half as numerous. the strong even
lyrae are a particular feature.”’ (Casey, 1904, p. 57)
Remarks.—To date this genus is only known from
the type. It ranges from the Weches Formation to the
Cook Mountain Formation of Texas.
Leptosurcula carinata, new species
Plate 20, figure 23
Description.—Shell small, protoconch of about four
smooth, submedially carinated whorls, axially ribbed
and spirally striate. Adult whorls medially carinated,
with a duplex, beaded, raised subsutural line, and a
concave shoulder with fine spiral lines and costate be-
low, the costae overriden by coarser lines. Retral sinus
an asymmetrical U with the apex closer to the periph-
ery than the carina. Body whorl less costate than the
preceding and ornamented with regular spiral lines
which decrease slowly in strength towards the base.
Canal long and strongly twisted.
Remarks.—One broken specimen was obtained,
split longitudinally but showing sufficient characters
for description. This is only the second species to be
assigned to Leptosurcula. The broad U-shaped sinus
occupying most of the shoulder slope indicates that the
ancestor of the genus is perhaps to be found within
the Turriculinae, perhaps near Turricula Schumacher,
1817. Harris (1937) placed the genus in the family
Raphitomidae, subfamily Clavinae, so the discovery of
this new species supports Powell’s placement of Lep-
tosurcula in the Turriculinae. The carinate whorls,
weak shoulder ornamentation and smaller and more
conical protoconch will distinguish the Reklaw species
from the type, L. beadata.
Etymology.—Noting the prominently carinated
whorls which differ from the type.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30466. Type lo-
cality: locality 4.
Material examined.—One specimen, 6.7 mm length.
Genus EOSURCULA Casey, 1904, p. 145
Type species.—Pleurotoma moorei Gabb, 1860, by
subsequent designation (Vokes, 1939, p. 118). Middle
Eocene, Weches and Cook Mountain formations of
Texas.
Original diagnosis.—**The embryo in Eosurcula is
much narrower than in Protosurcula, strongly elevated
and smooth throughout, the subsutural collar smaller
and less developed, the fasciolar surface thence
obliquely ascending but straight in profile or nearly so
to the obtusely angulate periphery, on and below
which the spirals become coarser. The aperture and
canal nearly as in Protosurcula. .. .” (Casey, 1904, p.
145)
Remarks.—The genus is known from the Gulf Coast
Eocene and doubtfully also the California Eocene.
Eosurcula moorei reklawensis, new subspecies
Plate 20, figures 18—20
Description.—Shell large, elongate, fusiform in
shape. Whorls nine to ten, protoconch high, of three
and one-half smooth whorls, apex flattened and the
nucleus minute. Adult whorls carinate, with numerous
spiral lines, stronger on the subsutural collar and ca-
rina, weaker on the concave shoulder, alternating in
size below the carina and on the body whorl. Except-
ing the shoulder area, the spiral lines are crossed by
numerous close-set longitudinal lines. Small beads oc-
cur at the intersections of the spiral and longitudinal
lines. Length of aperture and canal together half the
length of the shell.
Remarks.—This subspecies is the most elongate of
all the E. moorei group and is further distinguished by
the absence of apical tubercles and the presence of
beaded surface ornamentation.
Etymology.—The specific name notes the Reklaw
Formation where the species is found.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30470; para-
types: PRI 30471, 30472. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—150 + specimens, the largest
complete: 19 mm length, 5 mm width. Broken speci-
mens indicate an original size to 40 mm length.
Genus TROPISURCULA Casey, 1904, p. 153
Type species.—Pleurotoma (Drillia) caseyi (A\-
drich, 1903b), by subsequent designation (Harris,
1937, p. 57). Red Bluff Oligocene of Mississippi.
Original diagnosis.—‘‘The shell in this genus is
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 95
small in size, of slender form, with moderately elon-
gate and slender beak and narrow, closely-coiled, mul-
tispiral embryo, which is higher than wide, and per-
fectly smooth and polished throughout. The ribs are
about equal in number to those of Pleurofusia but cul-
minate in transverse prominences at the summit of an
angulate median periphery, and sometimes become
gradually feebler on the larger whorls. The spiral lines
are subequal amongst themselves, relatively rather
coarse but low, and very close-set throughout.” (Cas-
ey, 1904, p. 153)
Remarks.—The genus is often confused with Sur-
culoma Casey, 1904, and indeed the adult sculpture of
many of the Tertiary Gulf coast species is remarkably
similar. The blunt, mammilate apex and paucispiral
protoconch of Surculoma (most species now separated
out under Volutapex (Harris), can distinguish species
of that genus from Tropisurcula. The genus is known
from the Eocene of the northern hemisphere.
Subgenus TROPISURCULA s:s.
Tropisurcula (Tropisurcula) milamensis,
new species
Plate 21, figures 1—2
Description.—Shell small, fusiform, with short
beak. Whorls 10 to 11, protoconch bluntly conical, of
three to three and one-quarter smooth, polished
whorls. Adult whorls with five or six oblique, nodose
ribs, obsolete below the collar. Subsutural collar large,
rounded, and wavy due to the prominent development
of the ribs on the previous whorls. Surface with spiral
lines, one medial line causing the whorls to be acutely
carinated, another weaker one above the carination and
a third above the lower suture. Fasciolar surface with
fine striae. On later whorls, intermediate lines develop,
becoming subequal in size particularly so below the
carina. Body whorl with ribs absent at the initiation of
the beak where the lines are stronger again. Sinus a
broad open V, occupying the entire fasciolar surface.
Aperture long, rounded, trapezoidal, outer lip thin and
lirate within. Columella smooth, oblique and reflected.
Aperture and canal two-fifths the length of the shell.
Remarks.—This species is closest to Tropisurcula
planus n. sp. but has a shorter aperture and canal, and
coarser ornamentation. The closest described species
is Tropisurcula caseyi (Aldrich, 1903b) from the Red
Bluff Oligocene of Mississippi. The Reklaw specimens
are more elongate, have finer lines on the shoulder and
coarser ones below, no well-defined keel, and stronger,
more widely-spaced costae.
Etymology.—The specific name refers to the first
discovery in Milam County, Texas.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30478; para-
types: PRI 30479-30482. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—400+ specimens, the largest
10.0 mm length, 3.0 mm width.
Subgenus EODRILLIA Casey, 1904, p. 159
Type species.—Pleurotoma depygis Conrad, 1833b,
by subsequent designation (Cossmann, 1906, p. 223).
Eocene, Gosport Sand Formation of Alabama.
Diagnosis.—Shell smooth or finely spirally striate;
protoconch conical, smooth, of three to three and one-
half whorls; ribs well developed and not crossing the
fasciolar surface; sinus broadly U-shaped, the center
near the middle of the fasciolar surface; subsutural col-
lar prominent; aperture short, canal very short.
Remarks.—Powell (1966, p. 45) places Eodrillia in
synonymy of Eopleurotoma Cossmann, 1899, but the
multispiral protoconch, strong subsutural collar and
prominent rounded nodules separate that taxon well.
Palmer and Brann (1966, p. 645) consider Cossmann’s
selection of Pleurotoma depygis as the type unfortu-
nate, as a unique specimen of P. depygis still needs to
be selected from the type lot of about 20 specimens.
Harris (1937, p. 37), believed both the types of P.
depygis and Pleurotoma nuperus Conrad, 1833b were
contained in that type lot, which he noted represents
the larger part of the Conrad Eopleurotoma collection.
It appears that P. depygis as figured in Harris (1937,
pl. 6, figs. 18-19, pl. 7, figs. 1-2) does represent a
Eopleurotoma species with its long narrow flexuous
ribs, and the apex of the V-shaped anal sinus just
above the peripheral nodules. The problem is that Cas-
ey (1904, pp. 159-160) included P. depygis, which he
synonymized with Drillia laevis Conrad, 1865a. This
latter species is a nomen nudum as it only appears in
Casey’s list of species; other typical species mentioned
by Casey include Pleurotoma texana Conrad, 1865a,
and Pleurotoma lonsdali 1. Lea, 1833, both now in-
cluded in Eodrillia by Palmer and Brann (1966). The
remainder of Casey’s species are turrids figured by de
Gregorio and since lost, although from the figures they
also appear to be in Eodrillia. Moore (1962, p. 68)
reported the type of D. /aevis missing. Amongst Kath-
erine Palmer’s personal papers, however, is a photo-
graph of D. laevis with the word “type” written on it;
this photograph shows a specimen which appears to
be identical to P. lonsdali. (These papers are now in
the archives of The Paleontological Research Institu-
tion, Ithaca, NY.) It seems fairly clear that Conrad him-
self regarded P. depygis as a drillid as he includes P.
lonsdali in synonymy. The best conclusion is that P.
depygis is an Eodrillia as listed by Palmer and Brann
(1966, p. 645), but that the figures and specimens
shown by Harris are not Conrad’s P. depygis. Genus
96 BULLETIN 352
Eodrillia seems hardly deserving of full generic rank,
as the same type of protoconch, nodular ribs and anal
sinus are also seen in Tropisurcula. If forms like Eo-
drillia texanopsis (Harris, 1895a), with the long beak
and canal, are also accepted as belonging to this taxon
then the break between them and smoother forms of
Tropisurcula planus is negligible indeed.
Tropisurcula (Eodrillia) planus, new species
Plate 21, figures 3—4
Description.—Shell small, fusiform with conical
spire. Whorls nine and one-half; protoconch bluntly
conical, of three and one-half to four smooth whorls.
Adult whorls with six or seven rounded, oblique, no-
dose ribs, obsolete on the concave fasciolar surface.
Suture wavy due to the prominent development of the
ribs on the shoulder; subsutural collar thickened,
sometimes duplex. Surface with numerous revolving
lines, finer and more closely set on the fasciolar sur-
face, larger and more widely spaced below. A feeble
carina is formed with the first of the larger spiral lines
positioned just above the whorls’ maximum diameter.
On the body whorl the most prominent line ends at
the initiation of the canal, the other lines being more
closely set towards the anterior end. Sinus broadly
V-shaped, occupying most of the shoulder area. Ap-
erture elongate-oval, outer lip thin and smooth within.
Columella smooth and bent to the left. Aperture and
canal together make up half the length of the shell.
Remarks.—This species is close to Tropisurcula
(Eodrillia) texanopsis (Harris, 1895a), but may be dis-
tinguished by the shorter apex, the lack of polished
whorls, the slight medial carination and multispiral,
blunt protoconch. T. (E.) planus can be separated from
other Tropisurcula species by its more elongate form,
almost obsolete carination, and generally more sub-
dued ornamentation.
Etymology.—The specific name planus (Latin, flat),
refers to the smooth, flat shoulder.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30473; para-
types: PRI 30474-30477. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—350+ species, the largest 15.0
mm length, 5.0 mm width.
Tropisurcula (Eodrillia) grandis, new species
Plate 21, figures 5-6
Description.—Shell broadly fusiform. Whorls nine
and one-half; protoconch conical of three and one-half
to four smooth whorls. Whorls with seven or eight
prominent, rounded, nodular costae; a concave sub-
sutural collar made wavy due to the costae on the pre-
vious whorl, and fine spiral lines almost obsolete on
the collar. The lines are a little stronger and more
widely spaced on the lower half of the whorls, strong
on the beak. Anal sinus a broad V with the rounded
apex in the center of the fasciolar slope. Aperture elon-
gate, columella long, smooth, bent weakly to the left.
Remarks.—This Reklaw species resembles Tropi-
surcula (Eodrillia) planus n.sp. more closely than any
other, and is distinguished from that species by its larg-
er spiral angle, greater size and the strongly wavy sub-
sutural collar formed by the strong costae. T. (E.)
grandis lacks the short aperture and beak, and strong
polish of Tropisurcula (Eodrillia) texana (Conrad,
1865a) from the Cook Mountain Formation, and the
other previously described Eodrillia species. Several
specimens do show a slight polish on the whorls.
Etymology.—Referring to the relatively large size of
this species.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30478; paratype:
PRI 30553. Type locality: locality 4.
Material examined.—Nine specimens, the largest:
16.9 mm long, 3.8 mm greatest diameter.
Genus PROTOSURCULA Casey, 1904, p. 144
Type species.—Surcula gabbi Conrad, 1865a, by
original designation. Middle Eocene of Texas.
Original diagnosis.—‘In this genus and Eosurcula
there is no trace of ribbing, and the moderately large
species comprising them may be considered allied
more closely to the Cochlespira group than any other;
the embryo in both is conical or conoidal and multi-
spiral, and, in Protosurcula this is generally very large
and with conspicuous longitudinal riblets on the lower
whorls. The collar below the suture is cariniform and
the long fasciolar surface between it and the obtuse
periphery is broadly concave and with fine spiral lines;
below the periphery the spiral lyrae are rather coarse.
The columella is straight and generally simple, though
sometimes having strong plicae above the middle. The
spire tapers evenly to the apex and the beak is slender
and frequently very long, the aperture and the long
canal combined being much larger than the remainder
of the shell in gabbi which is assumed to be the type.”
(Casey, 1904, p. 144)
Remarks.—Protosurcula to date is known from the
Claiborne of the Gulf Coast and Northern Mexico.
Protosurcula? aurora, new species
Plate 21, figures 7-8
Description.—Shell large, fusiform. Whorls 12; pro-
toconch bluntly conical, of four and three-quarters to
five whorls, nucleus inflated and partially immersed,
first one-half whorl deviated, the first three and one-
half whorls smooth, shining and carinated below the
middle, the succeeding whorls slowly developing
widely spaced arcuate riblets and numerous spiral
lines. The spiral lines continue and become part of the
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 97
adult ornamentation whereas the riblets abruptly cease
above the medial carination, the lower part continuing
as a slowly vanishing crenulated keel. Adult whorls
with a rounded carina that migrates from a submedial
to a medial position and a collar that becomes pro-
gressively more crenulate. Surface covered with nu-
merous spiral lines, larger on the collar and on the
central carination. Body whorl coarsely spirally striate
and with finer intermediate lines. Aperture ovate, col-
umella long and straight.
Remarks.—This species is obviously directly in the
phylogenetic line of Protosurcula tenuirostris Casey,
1904 from the Weches Formation, and Protosurcula
gabbi (Conrad, 1865a) from the Cook Mountain and
Laredo formations. The adult shell profile has stayed
fairly constant throughout the development of the ge-
nus whereas the protoconch has changed radically. In
P.? aurora the anterior part of the protoconch resem-
bles the later adult sculpture and no demarcation is
discernible. The Weches species P. tenuirostris 1s
higher and lacks the spiral striation of the Reklaw spe-
cies. Well-preserved specimens of P. gabbi sometimes
show a multispiral highly conical protoconch topped
by three to four whorls forming a minute vertical pil-
lar. Specimens labelled ““P. gabbi” from St. Maurice,
Louisiana and from the Lewis House, 5.3 km east of
Alto, Cherokee County, Texas, all in the Academy of
Natural Sciences, Philadelphia, show some of the rib-
bing continuing on to the later whorls and having a
more crenulated collar; these specimens appear to be
in an intermediate stage of development between P. ?
aurora and P. gabbi.
Etymology.—tThe specific name aurora (Latin,
dawn), notes the first known occurrence of the Pro-
tosurcula stock.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30483; para-
types: PRI 30484-30487. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—200+ specimens, the largest
complete one: 34 mm length, 9.5 mm width. One bro-
ken specimen measures 13.5 mm width.
Subfamily TURRINAE Swainson, 1840, p. 154'°
Genus CORONIA de Gregorio, 1890, p. 23
Type species.—Pleurotoma acutirostra (Conrad,
1834) (= Pleurotoma childreni 1. Lea, 1833), by sub-
sequent designation (Palmer and Brann, 1966, p. 607).
Eocene, Gosport Sand Formation of Alabama.
Original diagnosis.—*‘Testa turriculata; anfractibus
angularis, carina granulosa vel crenulata, ornatis, saepe
etiam aliis duabis costis spiralibus, cariniformibus,
laeigatis (ex quibus antica inter carinam et suturam
anticam, postica inter carinam et suturam posticam sita
'e = Pleurotominae Swainson, cf. McLean, 1971.
est) praeditis; rima potius profunda, angulosa vel su-
bangulosa in carina vel in ejus proximitata incisa.”’ (de
Gregorio, 1890, p. 23)
Translation.—Shell turriculate, whorls angular, spi-
ral sculpture strongest near the carina; carina crenulate
or nodular, often defined with a duplex crenulated spi-
ral line; sinus broad and not too deep, situated on the
carina; sutures deeply impressed.
Remarks.—The genus is known from the Eocene of
the Gulf Coast.
Coronia taylori, new species
Plate 19, figures 17—19
Description.—Shell small, whorls 10 to 11, proto-
conch high, of three and one-half to three and three-
quarters whorls, the first one and one-half smooth, the
remainder with fine riblets that are initially arcuate and
becoming progressively more acute and finally pro-
tractive. Nucleus minute and partially immersed. Spire
whorls submedially carinated, defined by an elevated
band of regular squarish nodules. Suture deeply im-
pressed, margined below with a strong cord; below
that a concavity that initially contains one spiral line,
with increasing age to up to nine or 10. Below the
concavity is a keel, below that two strong lines, the
lower one margining the suture. Body whorl with
strong subequal spiral lines that decrease in size below
the middle. Aperture elongate-oval, with a gutter and
long, straight canal bent slightly to the left.
Remarks.—tThis appears to be the ancestor of Co-
ronia genitiva Casey, 1904 from the Weches and Cook
Mountain formations in Texas, to which it bears a
close resemblance. The specimens can be separated
into two groups on the type of protoconch, which in
one group is slightly higher and has more widely
spaced riblets than the other. The difference however,
is not considered significant enough even for subspe-
cific rank and may indicate sexual dimorphism in the
species. A few specimens show the peripheral keel
tending towards a duplex character, as in Coronia chil-
dreni (I. Lea, 1833). The Coronia group, comprising
C. childreni, Coronia margaritosa (Casey, 1904) and
C. genitiva, seems over-differentiated, the primary fea-
ture of all being the strong keel, which has one strong
line above it and two below. The Reklaw species can
be separated from the above-mentioned group of three
by the combination of the nodules on the spire which
occur conspicuously below the middle of the whorl,
the stronger carina and spiral lines, and the smaller
protoconch.
Etymology.—The specific name refers to Joe Taylor
Creek where the species is abundant.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30561; para-
types: PRI 30562-30566. Type locality: locality 20.
98 BULLETIN 352
Material examined.—250+ specimens, the largest
21 mm in length, 5.0 mm width.
Coronia cf. margaritosa (Casey, 1904)
Plate 20, figures 10—11
Gemmula margaritosa Casey, 1904, p. 135; Harris, 1937, p. 16, pl.
2, fig. 14, 15, 17, figs. 16, 8
?Coronia margaritosa (Casey). Gardner, 1945, p. 240, pl. 27, fig. 7
Coronia margaritosa (Casey). Dockery, 1980, p. 126, pl. 41, fig. 7
Original description.—‘*Whorls with two rather
widely spaced separated carinae below the suture, em-
bryo relatively small in size, somewhat higher than
wide, with three smooth spiral whorls, gradually in-
creasing as usual, and two whorls covered with coarse
and rather widely spaced riblets; peripheral duplex ca-
rina not strongly elevated, the space between it and the
lower and larger of the subsutural carinae about twice
as wide as the peripheral band and having two spiral
threads and sometimes three other smaller ones in ad-
dition; space below the periphery with several spiral
carinules; shell rather large, the beak straight but
somewhat feebly, obliquely swollen towards tip;
length of the aperture and canal together nearly two-
fifths the length of the shell. Length of a specimen
having nine body whorls 27 mm; width 7.8 mm Lower
Claiborne Eocene of Smithville, Texas ** (Casey, 1904,
p. 135)
Remarks.—Only one specimen was obtained of this
species. It is most closely allied to C. margaritosa but
also shows affinities with Coronia genitiva (Casey,
1904). Juvenile specimens of C. margaritosa from the
type locality at Smithville are very similar, but with
increasing age the duplex subsutural carina becomes
larger than the crenulated medial carina, giving a
wholly different aspect to the shell. This specimen is
close to that figured by Harris (1937, pl. 2, no. 14), a
species from the lower Claiborne of Hickory, Missis-
sippi. The species is reported from the Weches, Cook
Mountain and Laredo formations in Texas, Mississippi
and Mexico.
Type information.—Holotype: USNM 494348. Type
locality: Smithville, Bastrop County, Texas. Figured
Reklaw specimen: PRI 33186, from locality 4.
Material examined.—One specimen, 9 mm in
length.
Genus HESPERITURRIS Gardner, 1945, p. 237
Type species.—Turris nodocarinatus Gabb, 1860,
by monotypy. Claibornian Eocene of Texas.
Original diagnosis.—*‘Shell rather small or of mod-
erate dimensions, slender, multispiral, the body rather
abruptly constricted into the short anterior canal. Pro-
toconch of genotype of five to five and one-half
whorls, the initial turn minute and largely immersed,
the three to three and one-half succeeding whorls
smooth, shining, broadly rounded, and increasing rath-
er rapidly in diameter, the final whorl in whole or part
axially costate, the costae feebly arcuate. Sculpture
elaborate, entire conch spirally lirate; peripheral and
sutural collar noded, the peripheral nodes protractive,
commonly confined to the peripheral area and obsolete
towards the aperture. Posterior fasciole moderately
wide, depressed. Sinus broadly U-shaped, moderately
deep, the axis running closer to the periphery than to
the posterior suture.”” (Gardner, 1945, p. 237)
Remarks.—To date five species or subspecies of this
Eocene genus have been recognized, two of them re-
stricted so far to Mexico.
Hesperiturris nodocarinatus crassus,
new subspecies
Plate 20, figures 1—3
Description.—Shell narrow, fusiform; protoconch
bluntly conical, of three and one-half to four whorls,
initially smooth, the last one-half to three-quarters
whorl with widely spaced arcuate riblets. Nucleus
moderately swollen and partially immersed. Adult
whorls carinate below the middle and with a moder-
ately swollen subsutural collar. Surface ornamentation
of about 20 small collabral folds, most prominent on
the carina, slightly less so on the collar and obsolete
below the carina. The entire surface covered with spi-
ral lines which increase in strength as they approach
the lower suture. Body whorl with strong spiral lines
increasing in strength on the beak. Sinus moderately
deep (similar to H. nodocarinatus s.s.). Columella
slightly oblique, canal long and bent to the left.
Remarks.—tThe difficulty of placing members of the
H. nodocarinatus stock was commented on by Harris
(1937, p. 34) and the assignment of these specimens
to a subspecies of that is made primarily to emphasize
its relationship to Hesperiturris nodocarinatus (Gabb,
1860), even though it may deserve full specific rank.
The same wide variation of characters seen in H. no-
docarinatus s.8. is also observed in the Reklaw spec-
imens. The whorl profile ranges from almost flat to
strongly carinate and the strength of the longitudinal
folds ranges from strong to almost obsolete, particu-
larly on the later whorls. The characters that are rela-
tively constant and that can be used to differentiate the
subspecies are the smaller swollen protoconch, the
stronger spiral lines and the longitudinal folds, which
persist between the medial carina and the subsutural
collar. Hesperiturris nodocarinatus enstrictus (Harris,
1895a) from the Weches Formation has characters in-
termediate between the Reklaw Formation and Cook
Mountain Formation species. A probable ancestor is
Eopleurotoma cainei (Harris, 1899) from the Sabinian
EocENE MOLLuscs OF TEXAS: GARVIE 99
stage, this species has the ribs more constant in
strength, more evenly rounded whorls and stronger
spiral lines.
Etymology.—The subspecific name crassus (Latin,
coarse), notes the rougher ornamentation of this spe-
cies.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30449; para-
types: PRI 30450-30453. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—400+ specimens, the largest
21.5 mm length, 7.0 mm width.
Hesperiturris? monilis, new species
Plate 20, figures 12-13
Description.—Shell solid, very small. Whorls eight.
Protoconch conical of about four whorls, initially
smooth, the last one to one and one-quarter whorls
with fine riblets; nucleus swollen and partially im-
mersed. Sculpture consists of a submedial row of ax-
ially elongated beads (16 to 18 on the body whorl), a
crenulated subsutural beaded line with each bead cor-
responding to a submedial one, and one, rarely two,
fine lines between the two rows of crenulation. A fur-
ther smaller line borders the lower suture. Body whorl
with four prominent lines beneath the strongly beaded
spiral, occasional fine intermediate lines occur. Sinus
a broad U, the center near the top of the submedial
beads. Aperture elongate-oval with a prominent gutter;
outer lip sharp, inside smooth, columella straight and
smooth, callus deposit absent; canal twisted, moderate
in size, bent and slightly emarginate, basally notched.
Remarks.—There seems to be nothing closely relat-
ed to this species; superficially it might be taken to be
a species of Coronia. The protoconch of H.? monilis
with its widely spaced arcuate riblets and the broadly
U-shaped sinus place it closer to Hesperiturris rather
than Coronia, whose protoconch has numerous very
fine riblets and a sinus which is a broad V with a
rounded apex. The relationship of H.? monilis to H.
nodocarinatus s.s. is also made clearer by an exami-
nation of Hesperiturris nodocarinatus enstrictus (Har-
ris, 1895). This species from the Weches at Smithville
has characters intermediate in development between
H.?monilis and H. carinatus s.s. from the Cook Moun-
tain Formation. Another more distantly related species,
that has a similar development of axially elongated
nodes, is Hesperiturris amichel Gardner, 1945, from
the Laredo Formation of Mexico. There is no known
descendant of H.? monilis in the later Claibornian, but
the sculpture of Coronia? nodulina bunkerensis (Har-
ris, 1937) suggests a relationship.
Etymology.—The name monilis (Latin, necklace),
notes the similarity to a string of beads.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30454; para-
types: PRI 30455, 30456. Type locality: locality 4.
Material examined.—45 specimens, the largest 8.7
mm length.
Hesperiturris? monilis levae, new subspecies
Plate 20, figure 15
Description.—Shell solid, very small; whorls eight,
spire strongly cyrtoconoid. Protoconch conical of
about four whorls, initially smooth, the last one to one
and one-quarter whorls with fine riblets; nucleus swol-
len and partially immersed. Sculpture consists of a
submedial row of weakly arcuate beads (22—26 on the
body whorl), a crenulated subsutural beaded line with
each bead corresponding to a submedial one, and one,
rarely two, fine lines between the two rows of crenu-
lation. A further smaller line borders the lower suture.
Body whorl with four lines beneath the beaded spiral,
occasional fine intermediate lines occur. Sinus a broad
U, the center near the top of the submedial beads. Ap-
erture elongate-oval with a prominent gutter; outer lip
sharp, inside smooth, columella straight and smooth,
callus deposit absent; canal twisted, moderate in size,
bent and slightly emarginate, basally strongly notched.
Remarks.—This species is distinguished from mon-
ilis s.s. by its highly cyrtoconoid spire, more subdued
ornamentation and more prominent anterior notch.
Etymology.—The subspecific name Jevae (Latin,
smooth) notes the smooth ornamentation.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30448. Type lo-
cality: locality 20.
Material examined.—Two specimens, the largest:
6.0 mm length, 2.2 mm width.
Subfamily BORSONIINAE Bellardi, 1875a, p. 20
Genus BATHYTOMA Harris and Burrows,
LSO1 pHs
Type species.—Murex cataphractus Brocchi, 1814,
by monotypy. Eocene and Oligocene of the Paris Ba-
sin, France.
Diagnosis.—Shell small, solid, biconical. Proto-
conch conical, of one and one-half to three and one-
half whorls, the apex smooth and pointed; the last
whorl with arcuate riblets. Adult sculpture of closely
spaced, spiral cords overriden by axial growth lines
causing the spirals to be beaded. Whorls usually with
a beaded carina and concave shoulder. Outer lip thin-
edged, sometimes lirate within; sinus a broad, open V
with a narrow U at the apex which is on the peripheral
carina. Columella usually with distinct, oblique, sub-
medial fold, canal short and shallowly notched.
Remarks.—The genus is widely represented in the
Eocene of the U.S., and it occurs today in deep water
in the Caribbean. In Europe it persisted until the Plio-
cene. In India and the Far East it ranges from the Oli-
gocene to Recent times. The Claibornian species re-
100 BULLETIN 352
ferred to Bathytoma are very similar to Glyptotoma
Casey, 1904; Harris (1937), regarded Bathytoma as a
subgenus of the latter. Glyptotoma has a columella
with a distinct ridge that splits into two or three strong
folds, and also a strongly lirate outer lip.
Bathytoma cf. nonplicata Harris, 1937
Plate 20, figures 4—5
Bathytoma nonplicata Harris, 1937, p. 23, pl. 3, figs. 25, 25a; Brann
and Kent, 1960, p. 118; Palmer and Brann, 1966, p. 525.
Original description.—*‘Form broad-turrited as fig-
ured; first embryonic whorl very minute, remaining
three rapidly expanding and showing faint vertical rib-
bing below; subsutural band with pronounced beading,
followed below by two to four crenulated spirals; pe-
ripheral duplex spiral pronounced, showing below one
or two beaded spirals; body whorl anterior to the car-
ination showing about fifteen beaded spirals, coarse at
first but becoming finer and less beaded on the beak;
lip within, with about eight rather fine but sharply de-
fined spirals; columella entirely smooth.” (Harris,
93H p: 23)
Remarks.—tThe Reklaw species differs from B. non-
plicata s.s. from the Cook Mountain Formation by the
slightly weaker ornamentation, the gradual develop-
ment of the ribbing on the protoconch, and a variable
number of lirations within the outer lip; the number or
lirations vary between zero and nine. The constant dif-
ferences are considered great enough for separating the
material. Gardner (1945, p. 248), regarded Glyptotoma
as a subgenus of Scobinella Conrad, 1847, but the re-
lationship seems closer to Bathytoma, as Powell (1966,
p. 65) also noted. The relationship is also reinforced
by observing that several of the Reklaw specimens
show indications of three columellar folds under
oblique lighting. The lack of lirations within the outer
lip in the latter genus should not be used as a distin-
guishing character, as the discussion of Grant and Gale
(1931, pp. 543-544) indicates.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 2048a; paratype:
PRI 2048b. Figured Reklaw specimen: PRI 30457,
from locality 4.
Material examined.—40 Reklaw specimens, the
largest: 8.5 mm length, 3.2 mm width.
Genus DOMENGINELLA Vokes, 1939, p. 121
Type species.—Turris claytonensis Gabb, 1864, p.
83, by original designation. Domengine Eocene, Cal-
ifornia.
Diagnosis.—Shell small, biconical, with moderately
tall spire and gradually tapering body whorl ending in
a short un-notched anterior canal. Adult sculpture with
a prominent subsutural ridge, a concave shoulder with
five beaded spirals and below that prominently beaded
spiral cords. Outer lip lirate, columella smooth.
Remarks.—Vokes (1939) noted the great similarity
of all features of this genus to Scobinella Conrad,
1847, except for the columella of Domenginella,
which is smooth. Originally several species from the
English Eocene were referred to this genus but modern
authors have referred them elsewhere leaving T. clay-
tonensis as the only species until now.
Domenginella ridgei, new species
Plate 20, figures 6—7
Description.—Shell moderate in size, solid, biconi-
cal. Whorls seven and three-quarters to eight, proto-
conch of four and one-half whorls, smooth and round-
ed except for the last whorl which is sculptured with
widely spaced riblets. Adult sculpture of a smooth du-
plex subsutural collar, a concave sinus area with four
spiral striae and obscurely crenate collabral growth
threads. Below that, initially two and later three cren-
ulated spirals, below that a narrowly excavated area.
Body whorl and beak with up to 20 prominent beaded
spirals, progressively weaker towards the base; inter-
stitial weaker spirals sometimes present. Aperture
quadrilateral, labrum with widely separated thin lirae,
columella anteriorly marked by a low wide swelling,
marking the beginning of a short canal. Two basal spi-
rals continue into the aperture very indistinctly.
Remarks.—This is the first record of this West coast
genus in the Gulf Coast Tertiary. A similar Gulf coast
genus is Moniliopsis Conrad, 1865a, but that genus
differs by the lack of plications on the labrum, a very
narrow shoulder area, and lack of beaded ornamenta-
tion. The closest Claibornian species is the Reklaw
clavid, Bathytoma cf. nonplicata n.sp.
Etymology.—Noting the occurrence in Ridge Creek.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30458; paratype:
PRI 30459. Type locality: locality 4.
Material examined.—Three specimens, two juve-
niles and a large broken adult with only the last two
whorls remaining.
Subfamily CLAVINAE Casey, 1904, p. 125
Genus MICRODRILLIA Casey, 1903, p. 276
Type species.—Pleurotoma cossmanni Meyer,
1887a, by subsequent designation (Cossmann, 1906,
p. 223). Upper Eocene, Moodys Branch Formation of
Mississippi.
Original diagnosis.—*‘They are all very small and
characterized by a well-developed, multispiral, closely
coiled embryo, having one to three of its basal whorls
costulate, few body whorls which are wholly devoid
of costae but spirally carinate, the rostral sinus rela-
tively large, circularly rounded and close to the suture,
EOCENE MOLLuSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 101
the aperture oblique, columellar callus, with or without
plications, and the canal short or obsolete.’ (Casey,
1903, p. 276)
Remarks.—The Paleogene Microdrillia species are
unnecessarily split; intergrades certainly exist between
many of the Texas Claibornian Eocene populations
when large samples are considered. To correctly de-
termine the relationships a revision of all the Paleo-
gene species should be conducted with sufficient sam-
ples of each. That is outside the range of this report.
It is possible four species of Microdrillia exist in the
Reklaw deposits; two are assigned with some confi-
dence near existing taxa. Given the range of variation
seen in these two, and knowing the variation in the
Cook Mountain and Stone City species, it would be
pointless to define the other two without more mate-
rial. The genus is widely distributed from the Eocene
to Recent.
Microdrillia rostratula Casey, 1903
Plate 21, figures 12-13
Microdrillia rostratula Casey, 1903, p. 277; Aldrich, 1921, p. 7;
Palmer and Brann, 1966, p. 770, pl. 5, figs. 7, 8.
Original description.—*‘Base of shell distinctly ros-
trate; body whorls about four in number. Form stout,
the spire whorls short, about three times as wide as
long, with a sub-duplex subsutural collar and three
other single carinae, the fasciolar surface with two fine
revolving threads; beak short and broad; lines of
growth strongly marked; embryo well developed as
usual higher than wide, ovulate at tip, with three
smooth and two costate whorls. length 5.7 mm, width
2.3 mm Lignitic Eocene. Wood’s Bluff Horizon.”
(Casey, 1903, p. 277)
Remarks.—This Reklaw species is very similar to
M. rostratula from the Sabinian Eocene. The two fine
revolving threads on the fasciolar surface are a little
lower, the intermediate, spiral lirae on the body whorl
are weak to absent, and the protoconch riblets are finer
than in the Wood’s Bluff species, but the differences
are not considered significant enough even for subspe-
cific rank.
Type information.—Lectotype: USNM 481550.
Type locality: Choctaw Corner, Clarke County, Ala-
bama. Range: lower Eocene, Bashi Member (type), Sa-
bine stage, Alabama; Reklaw Formation, Texas. Fig-
ured Reklaw specimen: PRI 30567, from locality 20.
Material examined.—48 specimens, the largest: 6.6
mm length, 2.7 mm width.
Microdrillia aff. robustula Casey, 1903
Plate 21, figures 14-15
Microdrillia robustula Casey, 1903, p. 277; Harris, 1937, p. 93, p.
14, figs. 38, 39, 48, 48a; Brann and Kent, 1960, p. 554, Palmer
and Brann, 1966, p. 769. (Not p. 555, No. 2615c= M. infans
(Meyer) ? var. Harris.)
Original description.—**Embryo as wide as high,
obtusely oval at tip, with three smooth and two cos-
tulate whorls; subsequent whorls four in number, each
with one subsutural and three other equal carinae; fas-
ciolar surface without a revolving thread. Length 5.6
mm, width 2.25 mm. Lower Claiborne Eocene, St.
Maurice La.” (Casey, 1903, p. 277)
Remarks.—The Reklaw specimens can be separated
into two groups, the first shorter with one and one-
quarter to one and a half whorls of the final protoconch
whorls ribbed, and the second group with a full two
final protoconch whorls ribbed and quite elongate.
Both groups have somewhat stronger spiral sculpture
than M. robustula s.s. and have the lowest of the three
lirae just above the lower suture. Several Reklaw spec-
imens show one or more fasciolar threads, all other
characters being similar. In my experience a large
enough sample of any particular Microdrillia species
always includes some specimens displaying this fea-
ture, so it is not considered to be of specific impor-
tance.
Type information.—Syntype: USNM 481559. Fig-
ured Reklaw specimen: PRI 33110, from locality 20.
Material examined.—14 specimens, the largest: 6.5
mm long.
Microdrillia sp.
Plate 21, figures 20-21
Remarks.—One of the remaining species, quite dif-
ferent from the two preceding described species, is fig-
ured here. Protoconch with three and one-half smooth
whorls and one finely costulate one. Primary spire
sculpture is dominated by two lines, a subsutural one
and a slightly stronger submedial line. The form is
rather similar to Microdrillia harrisi (Aldrich, 1895a)
from the Cook Mountain Formation, but it lacks the
columellar plaits and labial lirae.
Material examined.—Two specimens, from locality
4. Figured specimen: PRI 30568, 6.8 mm length.
Genus SPIROTROPIS Sars, 1878, p. 242
Type species.—Pleurotoma? carinatum Philippi,
1844a, by monotypy. Recent in Scandinavian seas.
Diagnosis.—Shell of moderate size, thin, fusiform,
with strongly carinated whorls and a short, straight,
un-notched anterior canal. Protoconch of about one
and one-half to two smooth whorls ending in a sharp,
medial carination. Adult sculpture initially with a few
weak, peripheral nodes, then smooth and moderately
to strongly carinate. Anal sinus U-shaped occupying
most of the shoulder slope. Outer lip smooth within,
thin and prominently swept forward. Columella nar-
102 BULLETIN 352
row, smooth and bent, plicae absent, callus deposit
thin.
Remarks.—According to Powell (1942), the distri-
bution of this genus includes Scandinavia, the North
Atlantic, Mediterranean and Canary Islands, mostly in
deep water. The genus also occurs in the Miocene to
Pleistocene in Europe and the Eocene of the West
Coast of North America where it is represented by two
species: Spirotropis (Antiplanes) cf. bulimoides (Dall,
1919) and Spirotropis (Antiplanes) perversa fernan-
doensis (English, 1914).
Spirotropis claibornica, new species
Plate 21, figures 16—17
Description.—Shell very small, whorls seven and
one-half. Protoconch of one smooth, inflated whorl
followed by one-quarter whorl that is sharply medially
carinated; nucleus inflated and flattened. Adult whorls
with a rounded carina, initially in the medial position
and becoming increasingly higher on later whorls. The
first one-half whorl coarsely costate beneath the carina,
otherwise smooth except for obsolescent, spiral lines
and an almost imperceptible irregular, collabral thick-
ening of the shell. Suture impressed, margined by an
impressed line, anal sinus U-shaped with the base
slightly nearer the periphery than the suture. Body
whorl abruptly constricted to a short, straight neck.
Aperture pyriform, outer lip smooth within, unfortu-
nately broken, but growth lines show it to have been
produced forward with the edge almost straight until
the start of the neck where it swings back sharply.
Columella smooth, bent to the right and moderately
twisted. The parietal edge curves into the aperture an-
teriorly and then out again to meet the start of the outer
lip.
Remarks.—This assignment is the first occurrence
of this genus in the Gulf coast. The shoulder is higher
than in other members of the genus, but the smooth
whorls, large globose protoconch, initially costate
whorl, shape of the sinus, and shape of the outer lip
is the same as Spirotropis s.s. Three similar genera
occurring in the Gulf coast are: Orthosurcula Casey,
1904, which has a similar keel but also a prominent
collar and a conical multispiral protoconch; Cochles-
pira Casey, 1904, which is represented in the Claibor-
nian by Cochlespira engonata Conrad, 1865a, has a
similar protoconch, is much more sharply carinated,
lacks all axial sculpture, has a notched canal and a
narrow false umbilicus; subgenus Volutapex n. sub-
gen., of Surculoma has a mammilate protoconch with
the tip bulbous and asymmetrical, whorls submedially
carinate over the entire conch and a different shaped
anal sinus. Powell (1966) notes the presence of a col-
umellar fold in Volutapex but this is an error. Within
the known Claibornian genera Spirotropis appears to
be near Volutapex which suggests a closer relationship
than is indicated by their assignment to date in differ-
ent subfamilies. Grant and Gale (1931, p. 547) have
noted the relationship of Spirotropis to Turricula
Schumacher, 1817, a genus to which Harris (1937) and
Palmer and Brann (1966), assign Surculoma as a sub-
genus.
Etymology.—Noting the first occurrence of this ge-
nus in the Claibornian.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30488. Type lo-
cation: locality 4.
Material examined.—1| specimen, 7 mm length, 2.6
mm. width.
Subfamily CLATHURELLINAE H. and A. Adams,
1858, p. 654
Genus EOCYTHARA, new genus
Type species.—Eocythara texana, 0. sp.
Generic Diagnosis.—Protoconch of about three and
one-quarter whorls, the first one to one and one-quarter
smooth, the remainder with fine protractive riblets.
Adult sculpture of longitudinal rounded costae, spiral
lines and a surface which is minutely imbricated or
“frosted’’. Sinus moderately deep, V-shaped, weakly
sinuous near the suture. Aperture long with two callus
pads on the interior, marking each end of the sinus.
Columella straight, smooth and angled to the left. Out-
er lip sharp, convex below the middle and with a weak
stromboid notch. Basal notch not present or only ob-
scurely so.
Remarks.—This genus is evidently the precursor of
Eoclathurella Casey, 1904, and many of the Miocene
clathurids of which Pachycythara Woodring, 1928,
and Pyrgocythara Woodring, 1928, are representa-
tives, are known from the Caribbean basin and Florida.
The genus Raphitoma Bellardi, 1847, to which Eocy-
thara bears a superficial resemblance, is thinner-
shelled, has a shallow sinus and a long tapering canal.
Most closely allied to Eocythara are the two similar
genera Adelocythara Woodring, 1928, and Pachycy-
thara Woodring, 1928. Both of these genera have
smaller protoconchs of up to two and one-half whorls
which show a few fine or obscure protractive riblets
on the last one-quarter turn. The protoconch of Eocy-
thara, in contrast, has the last two to two and one-
quarter whorls more prominently sculptured, a much
shorter canal, and a deep anal notch margined with
strong callus build-up. An incipient stromboid notch
is also seen in Platycythara Woodring, 1928, while the
imbricate or “frosted” surface is a feature also com-
mon to Pachycythara and Pyrgocythara. Dockery (in
MacNeil and Dockery, 1984, pp. 216-217) assigns
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 103
four species to Clathurella Carpenter, 1857, from the
Oligocene of Mississippi. This genus is lirate or den-
ticulate on both the labrum and inner lip, has subcar-
inated whorls, possesses no stromboid notch, has the
axial ribs conspicuously weaker on the fasciolar slope,
and has a twisted siphonal canal. The type species of
Clathurella is a solid shell, with a ‘‘frosted”’ or mi-
nutely pustulose surface, a condition not noted by
Dockery in the Mississippi specimens. The earliest
clathurellid known to date from the Gulf coast is
Eoclathurella Casey, 1904 from the Upper Eocene of
Louisiana. Species of this genus are very small, have
axial and spiral sculpture of similar strength, but with
weaker spirals present on the fasciolar area, and a pli-
cate inner lip. Clathurellids are uncommon but cannot
be called rare, numerous specimens having been col-
lected by the author from both the Weches and Cook
Mountain formations in Texas; most of them show
characters intermediate between the Reklaw forms and
the Upper Eocene and Oligocene forms.
Etymology.—The generic name eo- (Latin, early),
cythara (Latin, harp), denotes a probable ancestor of
many of the Neogene Cythara stock.
Eocythara texana, new species
Plate 21, figures 9-11
Description.—Shell small; protoconch as in the ge-
neric description, whorls about six and one-half. Adult
whorls with 10 to 11 rounded sigmoid ribs and crisp
spiral lines, three to four on the spire whorls and 15
or more on the body whorl. Basal lines more indistinct,
the entire surface of the whorl secondarily covered
with minute longitudinal and spiral striae, the inter-
sections forming minute pustules. Aperture long, outer
lip sharp and thickened within, sinus broadly V-sha-
ped, occupying most of the shoulder area. Inner lip
and columella straight with a few of the spiral lines
crossing medially into the aperture. Canal weakly flar-
ing below.
Remarks.—Nothing similar to this is known in the
Paleogene of the New World; the frosted surface,
smooth canal and labrum and large fasciolar surface
free of spiral sculpture will distinguish this species
from others. In the Miocene of Jamaica Adelocythara
primolevis Woodring, 1928 is quite similar on the
spire, although as noted above the aperture and canal
of species in this genus are different.
Etymology.—The specific name notes the occur-
rence in Texas.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30489; para-
types: PRI 30490-30493. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—140+ specimens, the largest:
6.6 mm length, 2.6 mm width.
Eocythara lineata, new species
Plate 21, figures 18-19
Description.—Shell very small, protoconch of three
rounded whorls, rapidly expanding, densely sculptured
with fine arcuate riblets, the tip enrolled. Adult whorls
rounded with axial ribs and spiral lines, the lines weak-
er above the mid-section of the whorl, on the body
whorl an intermediate stria may occur. Collabral
growth lines densely regular and raised, more promi-
nently on later whorls. Aperture narrow, outer lip thin-
edged, thickened periodically by the ribs, columella
straight or slightly excavate, canal short and slightly
emarginate.
Remarks.—The species differs principally from
Eocythara texana n. sp. in having spiral lines over the
entire adult shell, a shorter form and weaker, imbri-
cated, surface ornament, only developing on the sec-
ond adult whorl. In many ways the species resembles
Raphitoma (Microsurcula) nucleola Casey, 1904, from
the Middle Eocene of Louisiana, the type species of
Microsurcula, suggesting that the root stocks of Eocy-
thara and Microsurcula are very close. Species be-
longing to subgenus Microsurcula are more elongate,
have carinated whorls, a subsutural collar, a concave
shoulder, and on the shoulder, ribs of reverse curvature
from that on the body whorl. R. (M.) nucleola is atyp-
ical of most species assigned to Microsurcula, in its
short, rounded form, but may still be separated on the
basis of the above characters. Another similar species
is Eoclathurella obesula Casey, 1904, from the Upper
Eocene Jackson Group, which has the same type and
strength of ribs and spiral lines; this species, however,
lacks any trace of “‘frosting”’, is strongly lirate or den-
ticulate within the aperture, and has a smaller proto-
conch that is widely ribbed on the final turn.
Etymology.—tThe specific name /ineata (Latin, line),
refers to the spiral lines covering the entire adult
whorls.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30494; paratype:
PRI 30495. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—Six specimens, the largest 3.9
mm length.
Genus VARICOBELA Casey, 1904, p. 162
Type species.—Strombus smithii Aldrich, 1885, by
original designation. Red Bluff Oligocene of Missis-
sippl.
Revised description.—Shell of moderate size, thick
and inflated, with regularly rounded whorls. Proto-
conch large, broadly conical, of three or four whorls,
initially smooth, the last whorl with a reticulate pat-
tern. Sculpture of narrow, obliquely sigmoid ribs, fine
spiral lines, and occasional varices. Aperture half the
104 BULLETIN 352
length of the shell, oblique; canal short and narrow;
inner lip smooth; labrum thickened and smooth.
Remarks.—Dockery (in MacNeil and Dockery,
1984, p. 198) assigns this genus to the Turriculine be-
cause of Casey’s comparison of the protoconch to that
of Pseudotoma and Powell’s (1969, p. 382) synony-
mizing that latter genus with Acamptogenotia Rover-
eto, 1899. Powell (1969, p. 143) expresses doubt that
the genus is a turrid and considers it better placed in
the Buccinoidea. The genus appears to be restricted to
the Eocene and Oligocene of the Gulf coast.
Varicobela filum, new species
Plate 21, figures 22—23
Description.—Shell small; whorls six; protoconch
of three to three and one-half broadly conical whorls,
initially smooth, the last half whorl with gradually de-
veloping reticulate sculpture that merges imperceptibly
into the adult. Teleoconch whorls with 14 to 17 sig-
moid ribs, becoming slightly weaker as they approach
the deeply impressed sutures; terminal varix present
with usually one or two more on previous whorls; si-
nus very broad, shallow, situated just below the suture,
marginally stronger on earlier whorls. Spiral sculpture
of regularly spaced thin lines and an intermediate
weaker line between each pair; where the spirals cross
the axials the sculpture is nodose; on the spire and
above the point of greatest inflation on the body whorl
the intermediate lines are centrally placed, on the low-
er portion of the body whorl the line migrates to a
posterior position and on the beak to a central position
again. Over-running the major sculpture are exceed-
ingly fine and close-set collabral threads. Aperture
elongate, labrum smooth, thickened into the interior
beneath the terminal varix; prominent anal notch, mar-
gined on the labrum by a weak swelling; columella
excavated; callus wash thin, showing some of the un-
derlying spiral lines; canal straight; siphonal fasciole
present but very weak.
Remarks.—Two species of Varicobela have been
described previously, Varicobela smithii (Aldrich,
1885), and Varicobela aldrichi Dockery, 1984, both
from the Oligocene of Mississippi. Both of these are
larger, have a straight to coeleoconoidal spire rather
than the cyrtoconoid shape of V. filum, and lack the
close-set collabral threads of V. filum. Both macro- and
micro-sculpture show much similarity with the two
Eocythara species described previously and the aper-
tural features are similar, excepting that V. filum lacks
an anal notch. The lack of an anterior notch, weak
sinus, and generally similar sculpture to the Eocythara
species have caused the assignment here to the Turri-
dae.
Etymology.—The name filum (Latin, thread), refers
to the micro collabral sculpture.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30569; paratype:
PRI 33074. Type locality: locality 4.
Material examined.—Six specimens, the largest
complete (the holotype), 8.8 mm length.
Subfamily DAPHNELLINAE Casey, 1904, p. 126
Genus RAPHITOMA Bellardi, 1847, p. 538
Type species.—Pleurotoma hystrix Cristofori and
Jan, 1832, by subsequent designation (Monterosato,
1875, p. 72). Pliocene of Italy.
Diagnosis.—*‘Shell of medium size, spire moder-
ately high; whorls rounded, sculpture usually in both
directions forming a reticulate pattern of raised lines;
aperture varying from two-fifths to a half the length
of the shell, ovate, outer lip slightly thickened, with at
some growth stages a row of very fine denticulations
on the inner lip, lip rounding back posteriorly to a
moderately deep, usually not reinforced posterior
notch close to the suture, inner lip not thickened, col-
umella usually somewhat flexuous, anterior canal not
wide, usually sharply defined but not very short, often
notched behind.” (Grant and Gale, 1931, p. 609)
Remarks.—Powell (1942, p. 125), who only rec-
ognizes Raphitoma from the Pliocene to Recent, gives
a short discussion on the validity of type species P.
hystrix. Wenz (1944, p. 1452), who also regards Sur-
cula as a subgenus of Raphitoma, has it ranging from
the Eocene to Recent; Davies (1971, p. 391) gives the
Geologic range of Raphitoma as Paleocene to Recent.
The two Reklaw species possess a multispiral proto-
conch similar in nature to P. hystrix rather than to the
modern representative of that species, separated under
the name Raphitoma pseudohystrix Sykes,1906, which
has a paucispiral and globular protoconch.
Subgenus MICROSURCULA Casey, 1904, p. 154
Type species.—Microsurcula nucleola Casey, 1904,
by original designation. Middle Eocene of Louisiana.
Original diagnosis.—*‘Shell very small, of juvenile
aspect. Protoconch relatively large, conical, multispir-
al, closely-coiled and with about five whorls, initially
smooth, the last one to three with fine arcuate longi-
tudinal riblets. The periphery is more or less obtusely
swollen, the ribs small and numerous, reduced in size
and reversed in curvature on the broad fasciolar sur-
face, generally attaining the suture or small subsutural
collar above. The canal is rather tapering in form,
straight, moderate in length, and together with the ap-
erture about half as long as the shell.’” (Casey, 1904,
p. 154)
EocENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 105
Raphitoma (Microsurcula) georgei reklawensis,
new subspecies
Plate 22, figures 1—2
Description.—This subspecies is more elongate than
R. (M.) georgei s.s., has a subsutural collar, and an
almost medial carination of the whorls. On the shoul-
der of the body whorl are spiral lines that alternate in
size, and the protoconch is coarsely ribbed.
Remarks.—Raphitoma (Microsurcula) georgei (Har-
ris, 1899) is from the Lower Eocene Hatchetigbee For-
mation of Alabama.
Etymology.—The subspecific name notes the occur-
rence in the Reklaw Formation.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30496; paratype:
PRI 30497. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—Four specimens, the largest:
3.9 mm length, 1.5 mm width.
Raphitoma (Microsurcula) bastropensis,
new species
Plate 22, figures 3—4
Description.—Shell very small, solid. Protoconch of
about three and one-half whorls, the last whorl with
widely spaced riblets. Subsutural collar visible on pro-
toconch and first adult whorl. Surface obscurely opal-
escent, ornament of 15 to 16 longitudinal ribs per
whorl and numerous spiral lines. On the fasciolar sur-
face the lines barely override the axials whereas on the
carina and below they do so strongly, forming weak
nodes at the intersections. Sinus a shallow U occupy-
ing all of the shoulder slope. Aperture quadrilateral,
outer lip thin, smooth within. Columella straight, no
discernible callus; canal short and slightly twisted.
Remarks.—This_ species differs from Raphitoma
(Microsurcula) iuventae n.sp. in its squat form and
about two to three more ribs per whorl. The probable
descendant is “‘Pleurotoma (Bela)”’ rebeccae Harris
1895a from the Weches Formation, from which it dif-
fers in having a wider form, lack of a subsutural raised
line, and wider and more even spiral lines. Harris
(1895a, p. 64) originally places “‘P. (B.)"’ rebeccae
under section Bela Gray, 1847b, first as a subgenus of
Pleurotoma and later (Harris 1937, p. 79) as a sub-
genus of Raphitoma. Palmer and Brann (1966, p. 839)
reinstate Harris’s original placement. According to
Powell ( 1966, p. 97-98), Bela has a small protoconch,
initially smooth, the last whorl with spiral rows of tu-
bercles; its teleoconch whorls have axial folds that do
not cross the shoulder slope, and densely spirally stri-
ated whorls. The protoconch, overall whorl sculpture,
and sinus make the present placement more likely.
Etymology.—Noting the occurrence in Bastrop
County, Texas.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30498; paratype:
PRI 30499. Type locality: locality 4.
Material examined.—Seven specimens, the largest
4 mm length.
Raphitoma (Microsurcula) iuventae, new species
Plate 22, figures 5—6
Description.—Shell small, fusiform. Whorls six to
seven, protoconch bluntly conical of four rounded
whorls, the first three smooth and the last with widely
spaced, oblique riblets that increase in size and merge
without break into the adult longitudinal folds. Adult
whorls medially carinated, with an impressed suture
which is margined below by a large, rounded line. Spi-
ral lines cover the entire whorls and are a little stronger
on the carina. Whorls with eight to nine oblique folds,
obsolete on the collar and on the body whorl at the
start of the canal. Sinus deeply U-shaped, occupying
the entire shoulder slope. Aperture subovate, outer lip
thin. Anterior canal long, oblique and slightly rostrate.
Remarks.—On some specimens only the upper por-
tion of the shoulder is smooth and there are strong
lines on the lower part, close to an as yet undescribed
species from the Middle Claibornian in the Stone City
Beds of Texas. The gradual change seen from juvenile
to adult sculpture appears to be unique in the Micro-
surcula species, in outline the species otherwise re-
sembles Raphitoma (Microsurcula) intacta (Casey,
1903) from the Oligocene of Mississippi; the proto-
conch and early whorls alone distinguish the two spe-
cies. The sculpture is also similar to that of a juvenile
Surculoma but the protoconch is different; in general
the aspect is that of a juvenile shell but no larger ones,
or even fragments have been found in the Reklaw.
Etymology.—The specific name iuventae (Latin,
young), refers to the juvenile aspect of the shell.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30500; para-
types: PRI 30501—30504. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—51 specimens, the largest: 6.0
mm width, 2.2 mm width.
Superfamily ARCHITECTONICOIDEA
Taylor and Sohl, 1962, p. 10
Family MATHILDIDAE Dall, 1889c, p. 144
Genus GEGANIA Jeffreys, 1884, p. 365
Type species.—Gegania pinguis Jeffreys, 1884, by
monotypy. Recent from Cape Modego, Eastern Atlan-
tic.
Diagnosis.—Shell small, coeleoconoidal, nucleus
blunt, immersed and partially covered. Whorls bluntly
carinate, with deeply impressed sutures; sculpture of
spiral lines and fine oblique growth-lines. Body whorl
larger than the remainder, base inflated. Aperture es-
106 BULLETIN 352
sentially circular, almost holostomatous, outer lip
oblique, columella smooth, straight or feebly concave,
inner lip callus partially covering the umbilicus.
Remarks.—The genus ranges from the Upper Cre-
taceous to Recent.
Gegania antiquata texana (Palmer, 1937)
Plate 10, figures 1—2
Tuba (Littorina) antiquata Conrad. Heilprin, 1891, p. 400
Tuba antiquata texana Palmer, 1937, p. 92, pl. 9, figs. 8,9; Brann
and Kent, 1960, pp. 886-887.
Gegania texana (Palmer). Gardner, 1945, p. 150
Gegania antiquata texana (Palmer). Palmer and Brann (1966), p.
698.
Original diagnosis.—*‘Shell large, spire high for the
species; whorls six; nucleus typical; sculpture of the
post-nuclear whorls consists of four strong primary
ribs, the first and fourth smaller than the two middle
ribs; two, middle, spiral lines increasing in size making
the whorls of the spire bicarinate; three to six, fine
thread-like, spiral ribs occur between the primary ribs;
all crossed by longitudinal threads which at the inter-
sections form a node; below the strong bicarination of
the body whorl nine to eleven, spiral ribs occur to the
base; one or more, spiral threads alternate with the
primary series.”’ (Palmer, 1937, p. 92)
Remarks.—One small specimen was obtained which
appears to be specifically identical to Gegania anti-
quata texana from the Weches Formation of Texas and
Mexico. The only differences noted between this spec-
imen and typical texana s.s are the more elongated
form, finer revolving sculpture and a larger proto-
conch.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 2473. Figured
specimen: PRI 30550, from locality 4.
Material examined.—One specimen.
Genus MATHILDA Semper, 1865, p. 330
Type species.—Turbo quadricarinata Brocchi,
1814, by original designation. Tertiary of northern It-
aly.
Revised diagnosis.—Shell medium-sized, turrited,
slender. Protoconch heterostrophic, not immersed.
Sculpture of rounded whorls with strong spiral sculp-
ture and axial threads. Base flat to arched, aperture
ovate, entire, basal lip everted. Columella smooth,
non-plicate.
Remarks.—The genus ranges from the Upper Cre-
taceous to Recent.
Mathilda (Mathilda) cf. retisculpta aldrichi
Palmer, 1937
Mathilda retisculpta aldrichi Palmer, 1937, p. 87, pl. 9, figs. 11, 14.
Original description.—*‘Shell medium in size, elon-
gate; nucleus heterostrophic consisting of three whorls,
first whorl minute, last whorl enlarged; post nuclear
whorls coarsely ornamented with spiral lines and lon-
gitudinal ribs, which at their intersections form nodes.
There are five spiral ribs on the whorls of the spire
and ten spiral ribs on the body whorl. The longitudinal
ribs become obscure at about the sixth spiral rib on
the body whorl. The remaining spiral ribs on the body
whorl are not nodose. The aperture is ovate.”’ (Palmer,
19375)p. o7)
Remarks.—This specimen closely resembles M. r.
aldrichi. In addition to the four nodose ribs of Palmer’s
subspecies, the Reklaw specimen has three very small
ribs below the suture. On the body whorl of M. r.
aldrichi the longitudinal ribs are nearly effaced by
about the sixth spiral rib while in this species they
remain visible and continue as fine threads. Were it
not for its elevated mathildid nucleus, Mathilda reti-
sculpta (Meyer and Aldrich, 1886) and the subspecies
M. retisculpta aldrichi would be more readily placed
in Acrocoelum Cossmann, 1888, which is also in the
Mathildidae. A very similar species from the Paris Ba-
sin 1s Acrocoelum bouryi Cossmann, 1888.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 2742; paratype:
PRI 2741. Type locality: Orangeburg, South Carolina.
Range: McBean Formation. Figured Reklaw specimen:
PRI 33104, from locality 4.
Material Examined.—3 specimens, the largest com-
plete: 7.1 mm length, 2.5 mm maximum diameter; one
fragment with 4.8 mm maximum diameter.
Mathilda (Mathilda) cf. claibornensis
Aldrich, 1887
Plate 10, figure 17
Mathilda claibornensis Aldrich, 1887, p. 83; Palmer, 1937, p. 88,
pl. 9, fig. 1 copy Aldrich.
Tuba (Mathilda) claibornensis Aldrich. Aldrich, 1895b, p. 15, pl. 1,
fig. 7.
Original description.—*‘Shell very minute, embry-
onic whorls three, and placed as usual in the genus,
the adult whorls (but three remaining in the type) with
three rounded smooth ring-like bands, the intervening
spaces having impressed longitudinal lines which do
not pass over the bands. Locality: Claiborne Ferrugi-
nous Sand. Very rare, but the second species known
from this famous deposit.” (Aldrich, 1887, p. 83)
Remarks.—Two small fragments were obtained that
are doubtfully referred to M. (M.) claibornensis. Ap-
parently Palmer (1937, pl. 9, fig. 1) had only the one
juvenile shell; the three strong ribs are diagnostic of
this species however, and stay relatively constant in
strength on succeeding whorls. The species is common
at certain levels at the Stone City Member type locality
and may reach lengths of 5 mm.
EOcENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 107
Figured Specimen.—PRI 30415, from locality 20.
Type information.—Holotype: USNM 638864. Type
locality: Claiborne Bluff, Alabama River, Monroe
County, Alabama.
Material examined.—Two broken specimens, the
largest 4.1 mm in width, with only the body whorl and
half the previous whorl remaining.
Subgenus ECHINIMATHILDA Sohl, 1960, p. 131
Type species.—Mathilda (Echinimathilda) corona
Sohl, 1960, by original designation. Upper Cretaceous,
Ripley and Owl Creek Formations of Mississippi.
Original diagnosis.—*Small- to medium-sized tur-
riculate shells with a partially submerged and deviated
protoconch; whorls shouldered; sides rounded; sculp-
ture of nodose to spiny spiral lirae and ribbons; colu-
mella lip reflected.” (Sohl, 1960, p. 131)
Remarks.—Prior to this report the subgenus was re-
stricted to the Upper Cretaceous.
Mathilda (Echinimathilda?) cribraea, new species
Plate 10, figures 5—7
Description.—Protoconch one and three-quarter to
two bulbous whorls, set at an angle of 45° from the
shell axis, immersed to a level at the base of the nu-
clear whorl. Adult sculpture begins abruptly and con-
sists of up to seven shouldered whorls, the shoulder
becoming progressively more acute, later whorls with
an angle approximating 90°, rounded below. Spire
whorls with five to six spiral lines below the shoulder,
crossed by numerous weaker longitudinal lines, the in-
tersections of the two forming prominent nodes, body
whorl with 10 or 11 spiral lines. On the base of the
body whorl the spiral lines continue undiminished,
while the longitudinal lines become fine threads. Ap-
erture almost elliptical in shape, outer lip thin, colu-
mella lip thickened and slightly reflected.
Remarks.—Under the microscope the sculpture is
seen to be a regular and finely cancellated pattern. The
nearest Tertiary analogue to this species seems to be
Mathilda retisculpta (Meyer and Aldrich, 1886) from
the Cook Mountain Formation of Mississippi. I have
also found the subgenus in the Upper Cretaceous
Kemp Clay Formation in Texas. The protoconch in M.
(E.) cribraea is not immersed to the same degree as
the type species of the subgenus. As this is a primary
character in the definition of the subgenus this Tertiary
species is assigned here with some hesitation; in all
other respects it is very close to the type species, M.
(E.) corona. A few individuals do not show the shoul-
der carina becoming progressively more acute, but that
feature by itself does not seem to warrant further tax-
onomic separation.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30329; paratype:
PRI 30330. Type locality: locality 4.
Etymology.—The specific name cribraea (Latin,
sieve), refers to the mesh-like ornamentation of the
whorls.
Material examined.—Thirty specimens, the largest:
4.3 mm in length, 1.8 mm in width.
Subgenus FIMBRIATELLA Sacco, 1895, p. 37
Type species.—Cerithium fimbriatum Michelotti,
1847, by original designation. Miocene (Tortonian) of
northern Italy.
Diagnosis.—Shell small, high; whorls carinate with
spiral and axial sculpture, the intersections usually no-
dose; base flat with spiral threads, margined by a du-
plex spiral line, aperture oval to subquadrate, base
weakly rostrate.
Remarks.—The genus ranges from the Paleocene to
Pliocene.
Mathilda (Fimbriatella) iugum, new species
Plate 10, figures 8—9
Description.—Shell small, whorls six and a half,
protoconch large, of two and a half smooth heteros-
trophic whorls set at an angle of about 30° from the
shell axis. Spire whorls with four spiral lines, one de-
fining the medial carina and two more, one above and
one below quartering the whorls, and a weaker sub-
sutural one; spirals intersected regularly with longitu-
dinal lines that are nodular at their intersections. Base
smooth or with obsolete spiral threads, flat, margined
by a duplex line; aperture circular, columella concave
and slightly thickened.
Remarks.—This species appears to have no close
analogs in the Gulf coast Paleogene. To date the sub-
genus Fimbriatella has not been reported outside Eu-
rope where it is found from the Paleocene to the Plio-
cene, although Sohl (1960, p. 129) has remarked on
the similarity of several Cretaceous Gulf coast species
to this subgenus. Of those species I believe Mathilda
(Mathilda) ripleyana Wade, 1926 is close enough to
the type of subgenus Fimbriatella to be placed there.
Sacco (1895, pp. 36-38) placed seven species in Fim-
briatella of which Mathilda (Fimbriatella) filogranata
Sacco, a nomen nudum from the Doderlein collection,
is very close to M. (F.) iugum, differing primarily in
possessing one extra spiral line on the shoulder; the
type species of the subgenus M. (F.) fimbriatum is a
little further removed with its more rounded whorls
and prominent quadrate-shaped aperture.
Etymology.—Noting both the creek where it was
found and the ridged whorls, ivgum (Latin: ridge).
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 33080, 2.1 mm
length; paratype: PRI 33089. Type locality: locality 4.
108 BULLETIN 352
Material examined.—Eight specimens, the largest
the holotype.
Genus GLYPTOZARIA Iredale, 1924, p. 248
Type species.—Turritella opulenta Hedley, 1907, by
monotypy. Recent off Australia near Sydney.
Diagnosis.—Shell turriculate, whorls moderately
rounded, with spiral lines and co-marginal axial ribs.
Protoconch heterostrophic. Aperture ovate, with weak
gutter.
Remarks.—lIredale defined the genus to draw atten-
tion to recent Australian turritellid specimens without
a sinus in the outer lip; he also noted the occurrence
of a fossil species in the Australian Eocene. Excepting
the type, the genus is represented by two Recent spe-
cies from Australian waters, Glyptozaria columaria
Cotton and Woods, 1935, and Glyptozaria euglypta
(Iredale, 1929). Wenz (1939, p. 653) follows Iredale,
and places the genus in the Turritellidae, probably
without knowledge of the protoconch. Cotton (1959,
p. 358) moves it to the Turritellopsinae, a subfamily
known to have a deviated but often immersed proto-
conch. MacPherson and Gabriel (1962, p. 99) place it
in the present family, the Mathildidae.
Glyptozaria americana, new species
Plate 10, figures 12-14
Description.—Shell small, eight to ten whorls, pro-
toconch heterostrophic, large, of two and a half smooth
whorls, set at an angle of about 45° to the shell axis,
junction with teleoconch whorls abrupt, delimited with
an oblique rib. Spire whorls rounded, ornamented with
six spiral lines, the strength and interlineal distance
increasing from the upper to lower suture; the spiral
lines crossed by numerous axial threads, forming a
regular reticulate pattern, the intersections beaded.
Body whorl with ten spiral lines, the sutural one the
largest, the four or five basal ones closer together, the
axial threads also-weaker basally. Aperture ovate, out-
er lip thin, sometimes lirate within, carinate at the end
of every rib; columella thickened, excavated and
slightly reflected, slight emargination at the anterior
end.
Remarks.—This species is unique in the North
American Eocene although the Caribbean species
Mathilda plexita Dall, 1896b, known from the Oligo-
cene? to the Miocene? of Trinidad and Jamaica, is sim-
ilar. That species has more prominently inflated
whorls, four to six equally spaced spiral lines on the
spire, an umbilical chink, and a more circular aperture.
The basal spiral lines and concave columella of M.
plexita probably means this species should also be as-
signed to Glyptozaria. In the North American Eocene,
specimens of Scalina trapaquara Harris, 1895a that
lack the protoconch may superficially resemble G.
americana but the presence of basal spirals will sep-
arate the two. This species really points out the neces-
sity of knowing the character of the protoconch, as
without that knowledge the species would almost cer-
tainly have been assigned within the Scalidae.
Etymology.—Referring to the first occurrence in
North America.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 33078, 4.8 mm
length; paratype: PRI 33079. Type locality: locality 4.
Material examined.—Two specimens, the largest
7.5 mm.
Family ARCHITECTONICIDAE Gray,
1850b, p. 64
Genus PPEUDOMALAXIS Fisher, 1885, p. 714
Type species.—Bifrontia zanclaea (Philippi, 1844a),
by monotypy. Recent in the Mediterranean and off the
Madeira Islands.
Diagnosis.—Shell planispiral, base weakly concave,
whorls only lightly in contact or free, rim flat. Sculp-
ture smooth, or with weak spiral or radial lines. Edge
with crenulated cords, usually parallel to the axis but
sometimes angulated. Aperture quadrilateral, edge
sharp.
Remarks.—The genus ranges from the upper Cre-
taceous to Recent. Recent species are tropical or sub-
tropical in distribution, and inhabit deeper waters.
Pseudomalaxis reklawensis, new species
Plate 10, figures 18—20
Description.—Shell medium-sized, to seven volu-
tions. Whorls slightly concave on the upper and lower
surfaces, the body whorl with vertical sides. Proto-
conch of about two smooth rounded whorls, the nu-
cleus sunken and visible on the base, a fine cord dif-
ferentiating it from the adult whorls. Whorls smooth
above with prominent prosocline growth lines, suture
impressed and bounded above by a large beaded cord,
below with a similar cord. The lines of growth start at
right angles to the sutures, then curve back at the mid-
dle of the whorl. Both upper and lower surfaces show
very fine spiral striae. Aperture simple and rounded-
quadrate in profile.
Remarks.—The closest species is Pseudomalaxis
texana (Aldrich, 1911) from the Weches Formation,
from which it may be distinguished by the lack of
tuberculated rows in the center of the whorls and only
a single beaded chord on the periphery. Both Pseu-
domalaxis rotella (Lea, 1833) from the Gosport Sand
Formation, and Pseudomalaxis plummerae Palmer,
1937, from the Stone City beds are smooth, but are
much smaller, without beading, and in the case of P.
plummerae the final portion of the last whorl is bent
EocENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 109
out of the plane of coiling. This species is common in
the Reklaw deposits, in contrast to the Weches and
Cook Mountain Formations where species belonging
to this genus are very rare.
Etymology.—Referring to the Reklaw Formation.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30336; paratype:
PRI 30337. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—110 specimens, the largest 1.1
mm thickness, 9.0 mm maximum diameter.
Pseudomalaxis? acuta, new species
Plate 10, figures 21—23
Description.—Shell medium in size (outer whorl
missing), more robust than Pseudomalaxis reklawensis
n.sp. Whorls flattened above and sharply concave be-
low, the outer rim at an angle of 45° to the upper
surface of the body whorl. The upper surface shows
the faintest of revolving striae and has the suture
bounded by a thick ribbed cord. The basal surface is
smooth and shows radial wrinkles at the suture. The
basal suture 1s bounded by a smaller cord than the one
on the upper surface and this cord is margined by a
ribbed line, the space between the cord and the line
showing a few revolving striae.
Remarks.—This species has affinities with the Low-
er Eocene species Pseudomalaxis verrili (Aldrich,
1886); the latter, however, lacks the beaded ribs bor-
dering the upper and lower edges of the body whorl.
Another undescribed Pseudomalaxis? species occurs
in the Wheelock Member of the Cook Mountain For-
mation in Texas; that species also has an acutely an-
gled outer whorl, but is otherwise very smooth. None
of these species fits very well within Pseudomalaxis
s.l.; the genus Mangonuia Mestayer, 1930, would pos-
sibly be a better assignment but more material is first
necessary for examination.
Etymology.—The specific name acuta (Latin,
sharp), refers to the acute angular rim of this species.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30291. Type lo-
cality: locality 20.
Material examined.—One specimen, 5.1 mm in
maximum diameter.
Genus ARCHITECTONICA Roding, 1798, p. 78
Type species.—Trochus perspectivus Linnaeus,
1758, by subsequent designation (Gray, 1847, p. 151).
Recent in the Indo-Pacific.
Diagnosis.—Shell solid, umbilicate. Outline subdis-
coidal to depressed-conic. First whorl of protoconch
inverted, only the final smooth inflated volution visible
on the apical surface. Whorls numerous, regularly in-
creasing in size. Periphery rounded or carinate. Sculp-
ture usually of spiral cords, which may be beaded.
Aperture elliptical to subquadrate. Outer lip thin and
sharp.
Remarks.—Recent species are few in number and
restricted to warmer waters; the animals are carnivo-
rous On sea anemones and corals. The genus is known
from the Upper Cretaceous.
Subgenus STELLAXIS Dall 1892, p. 323
Type species.—Solarium alveatum Conrad, 1833a,
by original designation. Upper Claibornian Gosport
Sand Formation of Alabama.
Diagnosis.—Shell moderately large or large; spire
smooth, suture impressed, margined above by a few
spiral lines or grooves; keel sharply carinate; beneath
smooth or weakly spirally striate, keel margined by a
strong line; umbilicus wide, stellate; aperture rounded-
rhombohedral.
Remarks.—The subgenus is known from the Paleo-
cene and Eocene of North America.
Architectonica (Stellaxis) reklawensis, new species
Plate 11, figures 1—2
Description.—Shell large, subconical, of seven and
three-eights to eight whorls. Protoconch of one and a
half smooth whorls, later whorls smooth and convex
below the suture and concave above it, the body whorl
acutely carinated. Suture impressed and margined
above with two revolving lines, the larger one defining
the sutural edge. The first one to two adult whorls with
indistinct radial wrinkles below the suture. Base
smooth, or with spiral striae, convex near the umbili-
cus, and concave near the periphery, which is mar-
gined by a strong line. The umbilicus has strong ra-
diating lines of growth which form weak folds at the
umbilical carina. The interior profile of the whorl is
subcylindrical with a posterior excavated area mar-
gined by a crenulated revolving line in the upper quar-
ter.
Remarks.—tThis species is intermediate in position
between Architectonica sylvaerupis (Harris, 1897a)
and Architectonica alveata (Conrad, 1833a). A. syl-
vaerupis, a Lower Eocene species from the Hatchetig-
bee Formation, lacks the ventral line margining the
carina and the umbilical margin is wrinkled rather than
folded. Specimens of A. a/veata from the Weches For-
mation in Texas differ in having more regular and larg-
er radial umbilical folds and a tendency for the sub-
sutural lines to become effaced at an early stage of
growth. The Reklaw specimens keep the prominent
subsutural lines at all growth stages. A characteristic
of the later A. alveata group is the line in the center
of the cylindrical umbilical area, prominently crenu-
lated in those from the Jackson group; in the Weches
specimens the line is in the lower third and in the
110 BULLETIN 352
Reklaw specimens in the lower fifth. Palmer and
Brann (1966, p. 499), separated the Jackson and Wech-
es A. alveata specimens into unnamed subspecies. The
folds on the first one to two adult whorls and the
smooth upper surface are a characteristic of subgenus
Psilaxsis Woodring, 1928, but the base lacks the chan-
nel margining the umbilical tubercles.
Etymology.—The specific name refers to the for-
mation where the species is found.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30339; paratype:
PRI 30340. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—17 specimens, the largest (in-
complete), 10.0 mm height, 28.6 mm maximum di-
ameter.
Subgenus PATULAXIS Dall, 1892, p. 32:
Type species.—Solarium scrobiculatum Conrad,
1833b, by original designation. Eocene, Upper Clai-
bornian Gosport Sand Formation of Alabama.
Diagnosis.—Shell dorsally flattened, with funnel-
shaped umbilicus and no umbilical rib, umbilical ca-
rina with tubercles; radial and spiral sculpture usually
feeble or obsolete; periphery sharp, thin; suture usually
crenulated.
Remarks.—The subgenus is known from the Upper
Cretaceous to Eocene.
Architectonica (Patulaxis?) fimbriaea, new species
Plate 11, figures 3—5
Description.—Shell moderately elevated, flattened
at the apex, the early whorls flat and depressed below
the crenulated sutures. Later whorls increasingly flush
with the suture, slightly sinuous in profile. Suture im-
pressed, margined above by a broad elevated band
which is regularly radially ribbed, above that a smaller
revolving line and above that another larger crenulated
one. The remaining surface covered with smaller flat-
tened lines that are weakly noded where crossed by
the sinuous growth lines, the growth lines increasing
in size towards the suture above forming strong wrin-
kles, the intermediate subsutural line usually larger
again. Base with concave body whorl, two spiral lines
margining the crenulated periphery and many weaker
ones that decrease in size with distance from the keel.
Umbilicus wide, margin noded, whorls convex within.
Aperture rounded rhombohedral.
Remarks.—The concave whorls, at least twice as
wide as high, the ribbed cord under the suture and the
smooth concave keel place this species in subgenus
Patulaxis. The shape is between that of Architectonica
scrobiculata and Architectonica scrobiculata hicoria
Palmer, 1937, both from the Cook Mountain Forma-
tion. A. scrobiculata is more elevated, smooth or al-
most so, and the sutural lines are developed as swell-
ings. The coarse noded sculpture is distinctive and will
distinguish the new species from the two latter species.
Palmer (1937, p. 171) noted Patulaxis is represented
in the Arrialoor Cretaceous of India with Solarium
arctense Stoliczka, 1868; A. (P.?) fimbriaea is closer
to the Indian species than to A. scrobiculata and its
varieties.
Etymology.—The specific name fimbriaea (Latin,
fringe), refers to the radial wrinkles fringing the suture.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30341. Type lo-
cality: locality 20.
Material examined.—Three specimens, the largest:
8.0 mm width, 16.2 mm maximum diameter.
Subgenus GRANOSOLARIUM Sacco, 1892, p. 59
Type species.—Solarium millegranum Lamarck,
1822, by original designation. Middle and Upper Mio-
cene of the Piedmont of Italy.
Diagnosis.—Shell with upper portion of whorl con-
vex, lower part concave, peripheral keel sharp. Dorsal
surface ornamented by beaded spiral lines of various
strengths. Ventrally ornamented with spiral lines, ex-
cavated in front of the keel; umbilicus large, margin
with nodes or coarse crenulations.
Remarks.—The subgenus ranges from the Upper
Cretaceous to Recent.
Architectonica (Granosolarium) aldrichi caterva,
new subspecies
Plate 11, figures 6-8
Description.—This species is similar enough to Ar-
chitectonica (Granosolarium) aldrichi (Dall, 1892)
from the Middle Eocene Weches Formation to be re-
garded as a subspecies, but is distinguished by its gen-
erally coarser sculpture. The basal ornamentation of
three revolving spiral ribs and two lines of strong um-
bilical tubercles is similar to A. (G.) aldrichi, except
that in the Reklaw material the inner row of tubercles
is larger than the outer one and less numerous, in a
ratio of about 1:3. Instead of three broad flat spirals
and three threads margining the umbilical carina there
are four broad fiat spirals, the innermost one being the
largest. On the upper surface the spiral lines are broad-
er and become smooth on the body whorl, but the
number of lines is the same as in A. (G.) aldrichi s.s.
Etymology.—The subspecific name caterva (Latin,
crowd), refers to the crowded character of the spiral
lines.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30338. Type lo-
cality: locality 20.
Material examined.—17 specimens, the largest 3.4
mm thickness, 7.1 mm maximum diameter.
EocENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 111
Architectonica (Granosolarium) geminicostata,
new species
Plate 11, figures 9-10
Description.—Shell medium sized, of six and three-
quarters whorls, cyrtoconoid in shape and acute on the
margin. The whorls of the upper surface are weakly
sinuous in profile, the concavity above the suture with
two strong lines and the larger whorls developing a
weaker intermediate line and generally with four to
five smaller lines above that. Early whorls strongly
beaded, the beading tending to become obsolete on the
body whorl in large specimens. Area between the lines
with regular microscopic oblique striae visible only
under the microscope. Keel defined by a strong line.
Base excavated near the margin and crossed by spiral
lines that increase in strength towards the umbilicus,
the final three generally crenulated, the area within the
umbilicus showing two further crenulated ribs, the
three ribs dividing the whorl area into thirds. Lines of
growth within the umbilicus nearly vertical to the up-
permost rib where they then swing obliquely forward.
Remarks.—A. (G.) geminicostata resembles the mid-
dle Claibornian representative, Architectonica (Gra-
nosolarium) meekana Gabb, 1860 from the Stone City
beds and the Cook Mountain Formation; both species
are quite variable in form. On some specimens the
lines on the upper surface coalesce to form a broad
band; spiral striae or thin lines may appear on both
upper and basal surfaces; the strengths of the various
lines may vary considerably within the group. Char-
acters which are constant are the three lines on the
base under the suture and the two crenulated ribs with-
in the umbilicus. This last feature does not seem to be
duplicated in any other Architectonica sp. within the
Claibornian of the Gulf Coastal plain. On the dorsal
surface A. (G.) geminicostata can be differentiated
from A. (G.) meekana and subspecies by the more
equal-sized spiral lines with the much weaker beading.
Etymology.—tThe specific name gemini- (Latin,
twins), costata (Latin, rib), refers to the pair of ribs in
the umbilicus.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30342; paratype:
PRI 30343. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—S9 specimens, the largest 7.5
mm width, 18.0 mm maximum diameter.
Genus TRIMALAXIS, new genus
Type species.—Omalaxis singleyi Aldrich, 1890,
herein. Claibornian Eocene of Texas.
Diagnosis.—Shell small to very small, protoconch
heterostrophic, ornamented with faint collabral lines,
transition to teleoconch as in other Architectonicidae.
Teleoconch whorls barely in contact, sutural depres-
sion deep, strongly tricarinate with one central periph-
eral carina, one each on the upper and lower whorl
surfaces, intracarinal area smooth or with faint growth
lines or threads.
Remarks.—Omalaxis Deshayes, 1830, was defined
for a group of shells with multicarinate whorls, basally
rounded, the last whorl usually somewhat free and
bent out of the plane of coiling. Wenz (1944) places
the genus questionably in family Omalaxidae and
notes the protoconch was not heterostrophic, unlike
that of Trimalaxis. Bieler (1984), in his revision of the
genus Pseudomalaxis, notes that the Eocene species of
Omalaxis from the Paris Basin have orthostrophic pro-
toconchs, and should be represented by a separate fam-
ily, the Omalaxidae; the recent species assigned to
Omalaxis he transfers to Pseuodomalaxis; he regards
Omalaxis singleyi though, as belonging to an unde-
scribed genus in the family Architectonicidae. In the
genus Pseudomalaxis one other species, Pseudomalax-
is (Spirolaxis) cornuammonis (Melvill and Standen,
1903), also has a sharp peripheral carina, but in that
species the whorls form a wide open spiral and are
bent out of the plane of coiling. Recent species of Spi-
rolaxis Monterosato, 1913, are differentiated from spe-
cies of Pseudomalaxis s.s, not only by the open whorls
but also by their very different operculums. Trimalaxis
is apparently an offshoot of Pseuwdomalaxis where the
teleoconch whorls are derived from the latter by a ro-
tation about the apertural axis by 45°; the remaining
teleoconch characters between the two are very simi-
lar. The generally close relationship to Pseudomalaxis
is also noted by the very similar protoconch whorls.
Trimalaxis ora, new species
Plate 11, figures 11-12
Description.—Three and a quarter whorls; nuclear
whorls two and a quarter, deviated, initially smooth,
gradually developing pronounced riblets. A strong
flange ends the nuclear whorls that on the basal surface
is folded back over itself. Postnuclear whorls with
three strong, square-topped carinal cords overridden
by growth lines that regularly increase in size as they
approach the outer two carinae and there form nodes
at the intersections with the cords. Whorls strongly
concave between the peripheral carina and the two ad-
joining ones, convex on the upper and lower surfaces,
in contact at the central carina only. Aperture square-
ovate, feebly oblique towards the basal side.
Remarks.—This species is distinguished from 77i-
malaxis singleyi (Aldrich, 1890) by the strongly con-
cave whorl area adjoining the periphery, the smooth
peripheral carina, and different apertural shape. The
type and all other Middle Claibornian specimens ex-
amined have a crenulated peripheral carina. Palmer
112 BULLETIN 352
and Brann (1966) report only the one species 7. sin-
glei, from a single location in Lee County, Texas. The
author has found the genus to be uncommon but wide-
ly distributed in the Cook Mountain and Weches For-
mations of Texas.
Etymology.—Noting the prominent peripheral rim
of this species.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30344. Type lo-
cality: locality 4.
Material examined.—One specimen, 1.8 mm max-
imum diameter.
Family TEREBRIDAE Morch, 1852, p. 74
Subfamily TEREBRINAE Morch, 1852, p. 74
Genus HASTULA H. and A. Adams, 1853, p. 225
Type species.—Terebra strigillata Linnaeus, 1758,
by subsequent designation (Cossmann, 1896b, p. 53).
Recent in the Indo-Pacific.
Diagnosis.—Whorls high, smooth; axial crenula-
tions below the suture, or slender ribs not developed
into nodes; no spiral sculpture except for a subsutural
groove; siphonal fasciole margined by a line; colu-
mella simple, straight, produced anteriorly; outer lip
sharp, almost straight.
Remarks.—Bratcher and Cernohorsky (1987) mono-
graph the recent Terebridae and conclude, that “‘It is
impossible to devise groupings based on shell char-
acters alone, where there is little or no doubt as to
which group a species belongs’’. They recognize just
four genera, including Hastula. The closely similar ge-
nus Terebra Bruguiére, 1789, is also found in the Eo-
cene. Terebra can be separated by its usually larger
size, relatively small last whorl, columella not elon-
gated, aperture squarish-ovate, and sculpture often
with strong spiral and/or axial riblets. The genus rang-
es from the Eocene to Recent.
Subgenus HASTULA s:s.
Hastula (Hastula) milamensis, new species
Plate 22, figures 7—8
Description.—Shell very small, high, of eight and
one-half whorls. Protoconch of four whorls with the
suture margined above and below by a faint line, first
three and three-quarter whorls rounded, the last cylin-
drical and of smaller diameter than the preceding.
Adult whorls with a swollen subsutural band, exca-
vated below and with subsutural folds that tend to be
nodose below the suture, the folds stronger on early
whorls. Columella smooth and straight on the midsec-
tion, anteriorly twisted and with a shallow notch. Si-
phonal fasciole indistinct and margined by a line or
groove.
Remarks.—This is close to Hastula houstonia (Har-
ris, 1895a) from the Cook Mountain Formation, dif-
fering from it by the straighter whorls, much weaker
ornamentation and the larger more conical protoconch.
The body whorl is also noticeably more rounded than
on the Reklaw species.
Etymology.—The specific name notes the occur-
rence in Milam County, Texas.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30506; paratype:
PRI 30507, 30508. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—115 specimens, the largest:
8.3 mm length, 2.1 mm width.
Subgenus BULBIHASTULA, new subgenus
Type species.—Hastula (Bulbihastula) ampulla.
Diagnosis.—Whorls weakly to moderately convex,
broadly excavated below the suture, no subsutural spi-
ral band. Ornament of prominent, longitudinal folds
and little or no spiral ornament. Aperture a little longer
than in Hastula s.s. and with a weak siphonal fasciole
margined by a line, no columellar folds, anterior end
feebly notched.
Remarks.—This subgenus would appear to include
species such as: Terebra (Myurella) basterot Nyst,
1843, several subspecies of Hastula striata (Basterot,
1825), Hastula benoisti (Peyrot, 1932), and a common
but so far undescribed species from the Cook Moun-
tain Formation in Texas. On the above basis the sub-
genus would range from the Eocene to the Mocene.
Hastula (Bulbihastula) ampulla, new species
Plate 22, figures 9-10
Description.—Whorls eight to nine, protoconch
conical, of three and one-half smooth whorls, slightly
heterostrophic, the height and greatest diameter equal.
Whorls moderately inflated, with 15 to 21 longitudinal
ribs that run the entire length of the whorl, and tend
to become nodose above the subsutural excavation.
Columella excavated above and bent towards the short,
wide canal. Anterior notch very shallow.
Remarks.—Specimens of Terebra (Myurella) bas-
terot Nyst, 1843, from the Miocene of northern Italy,
which were examined at the Natural History Museum,
London are similar, have a different protoconch, but
the same number of very laterally compressed straight
whorls, and a subsutural line not crossing the ribs. The
subsutural line is absent or obsolete in the Reklaw
specimens but the type of sculpture and apertural
shape are very similar. There appear to be no North
American species close enough for a meaningful com-
Parison.
Etymology.—The specific name ampulla (Latin,
vase), refers to the shape of the body whorl.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30509; para-
types: PRI 30510-30513. Type locality: locality 20.
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 113
Material examined.—130+ specimens, the largest:
8.0 mm length, 2.7 mm width.
Hastula (Bulbihastula) longifera, new species
Plate 22, figures 11—12
Description.—Shell long, narrow, of nine and one-
half slightly convex whorls, subsutural excavation
slight to non-existent. Protoconch of three and one-half
smooth whorls, higher than wide, nucleus minute and
heterostrophic. Adult ornament of numerous low lon-
gitudinal folds becoming obsolete below. Columella
smooth, straight posteriorly and somewhat abruptly
bent below. Anterior notch very small and shallow.
Remarks.—This species can be separated from Has-
tula (Bulbihastula) ampulla by its almost straight sided
whorls, and more numerous axial riblets, which be-
come weaker on the lower portion of the whorls. An-
other similar species is ‘“‘Hastula’’ venusta (Lea,
1833), which is shorter, has minute spiral striae be-
tween the ribs, and a more oblique columella.
Etymology.—The name longifera (Latin, lines), re-
fers to the longitudinal ribs on the whorls.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30514; para-
types: PRI 30515, 30516. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—13 specimens, the largest: 9.7
mm length, 2.2 mm width.
Subclass EUTHYNEURA Spengel, 1881, p. 372
Order CEPHALASPIDEA Fisher, 1883, p. 550
Superfamily CYLICHNIDOIDEA H. and A.
Adams, 1854, p. 9
Family CYLICHNIDAE H. and A. Adams,
1854, p. 9
Genus MNESTIA H. and A. Adams, 1854, p. 10
Type species.—Bulla marmorata A. Adams, 1849,
by subsequent designation (Cossmann, 1895, p. 99).
Recent in the Philippines.
Diagnosis.—Shell ovately cylindrical, transversely
striated, the lines stronger, and wider apart at the ends;
spire conspicuous, immersed in the deep umbilicus at
the apex; aperture narrow, acuminately produced, both
above and below; outer lip solid; columella short, con-
cave, and reflected against the basal whorl.
Remarks.—The genus ranges from the Eocene to
Recent.
Mnestia rotunda, new species
Plate 22, figures 17-18
Description.—Shell small, thin. Shape oval,
smoothly rounded above and below, body whorl below
the apex minutely truncate. Surface with spiral striae
on the base and a few on the apical end. Umbilicus
small and partially obscured by the outer lip, which
thickens ridge-like at the edge as it meets the colu-
mella. Aperture thin above and medially, wider below
and bent prominently to the left.
Remarks.—Easily separated from other forms due
to its more rounded form; far nearer to the type of the
genus than are any of the other American Eocene rep-
resentatives. The common species, Mnestia dekayi
(Lea, 1833) from the Cook Mountain Formation, is
conical, tapering posteriorly. This occurrence extends
the lower range of the genus to the Reklaw Formation
from the Cook Mountain Formation.
Etymology.—The name rotunda (Latin, globular),
notes the very inflated form of this species.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30517; paratype:
PRI 30518. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—19 specimens, the largest: 2.6
mm length, 1.1 mm width.
Mnestia confusa, new species
Plate 22, figures 13-14
Description.—Shell very small, asymmetrically el-
liptical or ovate, maximum diameter submedial. Ap-
erture curved, wider below and bent to the left both
above and below, slightly reflected below. Outer lip
smoothly curved below, straightening out above, ex-
cept for a slight thickening where its meets the anterior
portion of the margin at the lower umbilicus. Surface
smooth with faint spiral lines on the base of the body
whorl and fainter ones below the apex, medial area
with microscopic longitudinal lines of growth.
Remarks.—This species approaches Bulla s.s. in
shape, particularly the recent Bulla eburnea Dall,
1881, of Florida and the West Indies. It can be distin-
guished from Mnestia rotunda n.sp. by its shorter and
more globose shape and the asymmetrical shape of the
body whorl. The species also has characteristics of the
genus Abderospira Dall, 1896a, in the apertural shape.
Etymology.—The specific name confusa (Latin,
confused), refers to the resemblance to genus Bulla.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30519. Type lo-
cality: locality 4.
Material examined.—24 specimens: the largest 2.5
mm length, 0.8 mm width.
Family RETUSIDAE Thiele, 1925, p. 106
Genus VOLVULELLA Newton, 1891, p. 268
Type species.—Bulla acuminata Bruguiére, 1792,
by subsequent designation (A. Adams, 1862). Recent,
European seas.
Revised diagnosis.—Shells small, tapering, ovate or
subcylindrical; aperture narrow, elongate, rounded ba-
sally and extending the entire length of the shell. There
is no columellar lamella or other apertural dentition.
At its apical end the aperture bends over the apex of
114 BULLETIN 352
the shell, and the parietal wall here forms a spine
which completely covers the apex, so that only the
final whorl is visible (after Harry, 1967, p. 134).
Remarks.—Palmer (1937, pp. 492—495) recognizes
seven species of Volvulella from the Claibornian Eo-
cene; these were reassigned to Rhizorus Montfort,
1810 by Palmer and Brann (1966). Harry (1967, pp.
133-135) shows that Rhizorus cannot be used as a
substitute, so Volvulella must be reinstated. Montfort’s
species would appear to apply to shells similar to
Mnestia. The genus ranges from the Paleocene to Re-
cent.
Volvulella reklawensis, new species
Plate 22, figures 15-16
Description.—Shell small. Anteriorly subconical,
straight-sided below the maximum diameter, anterior
lip prominently protruding from a rear view. Posterior
end drawn out into a channeled spire. Outer lip almost
straight medially, thin above, thickening greatly below.
Inner lip thickened, reflected partially over the small
umbilicus; anterior edge of the outer lip duplex, then
splitting, the edges bounding each edge of the umbil-
icus. Below, the aperture flares widely and forms an
incipient fold. Surface medially smooth, with spiral
lines on each end and a few short obscure longitudinal
lines.
Remarks.—The closest species is Volvulella loisae
Palmer, 1937, from which it can be separated by the
more tapering extremities, and the narrower aperture
which is anteriorly bent to the left. Another similar,
slender species is Volvulella conradiana (Gabb, 1860)
which is more cylindrical with a shorter posterior
spine. The rotund Volvulella minutissima (Gabb, 1860)
also exhibits the duplex character of the basal edge but
to a far lesser degree. This occurrence extends the low-
er range of the genus from the Middle to the Lower
Claibornian.
Etymology.—The specific name refers to the for-
mation in which it occurs.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30520. Type lo-
cality: locality 20.
Material examined.—Four specimens, the largest:
2.9 mm length, 1.0 mm width.
Genus RETUSA Brown, 1827, pl. 38, figs. 5, 6
Type species.—Retusa crassa Montague, 1803, by
original designation. Recent off the coast of Great Brit-
ain.
Diagnosis.—Shell small, cylindrical-pyriform, spire
low, sunken or involute. Aperture half the total length
of the shell, posteriorly narrow, anteriorly flaring. Col-
umellar fold weak to absent. Last whorl smooth, or
with fine spiral striae, labrum usually opistocline at
suture.
Remarks.—Zilch (1959, p. 45) gives the range of
Retusa as Jurassic to Recent.
Subgenus CYLICHNINA Monterosato, 1884, p. 143
Type species.—Cylichnina laevisculpta, Granata,
1877, by original designation. Recent in the western
Mediterranean.
Diagnosis.—Shell small to very small; cylindrical
to ovate; spire depressed, previous whorls not visible;
body whorl posteriorly rounded, usually anteriorly spi-
rally striate, sometimes entirely so; aperture narrow,
long, higher than the apex; columella excavated, usu-
ally with a fold.
Remarks.—Palmer (1937, p. 479), Gardner (1945,
p. 265), and most authors prior to 1952 regard Cyli-
chnina as a subgenus of Cylichna, Lovén, 1846. Since
Eames (1952), authors have regarded Cylichnina as a
subgenus of Retusa.
Retusa (Cylichnina) notata, new species
Plate 22, figures 19-20
Description.—Shell small, ovate-cylindrical. Sur-
face covered with fine spiral striae which are more
prominent on both ends; medially the lines are less
conspicuous but double in number due to intermediate
striae. Outer lip thin, sharp and almost straight. Inner
lip thickened below the small umbilicus, thinning
gradually posteriorly and abruptly anteriorly at the
junction with the outer lip. Aperture long, slightly con-
stricted at the posterior third of the body whorl, wider
below and bent to the left. Under the microscope the
thickened labial ridge is seen to have minute transverse
lirae on the summit.
Remarks.—This species has close affinities with
both Retusa (Cylichnina) galba (Conrad, 1833a) and
Retusa (Cylichnina) kellogii (Gabb, 1860), but can be
distinguished from both of the preceding by the more
slender outline, the smoothly rounded posterior end
rather than the flat top of those species, and the lirate
labial ridge. The Sabinian species Retusa sylvaerupis
(Harris, 1899) is slightly conical, wider than R. (C.)
notata and has a columellar depression with incipient
folds on either side.
Etymology.—The name notata (Latin, markings),
refers to the spiral lines covering the entire surface of
the whorls.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30521; para-
types: PRI 30522, 30523. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—Eight specimens: the largest 6
mm length, 1.8 mm width.
EOCENE MOLLuSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 115
Retusa (Cylichnina) cf. adamski Palmer, 1937
Plate 22, figures 21—22
Cylichnina adamski Palmer, 1937, p. 482, pl. 75, figs. 22, 23; Brann
and Kent, 1960, p. 301; Knight, Hodgkinson, Knight, Reid, Lind-
veit, Lindveit, and Offeman, 1977, p. 20.
Retusa (Cylichnina) adamski Palmer and Brann, 1966, p. 877.
Original description.—*‘Shell small; perforate; pos-
terior end truncated; sides of the shell nearly parallel;
aperture narrow posteriorly; columellar callus has a
twist or fold which varies with specimens—on some
specimens only a trace is seen—back of the twist is a
groove; surface smooth except for a few microscopic
spiral lines anteriorly.”” (Palmer, 1937, p. 482)
Remarks.—The Reklaw specimens are slightly slen-
derer than typical R. (C.) adamski s.s.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 3388. Figured
Reklaw specimen: PRI 30551, from locality 4.
Material examined.—Six Reklaw specimens, nu-
merous Cook Mountain ones.
Family RINGICULIDAE Philippi, 1853, p. 190
Genus RINGICULA Deshayes, 1838, p. 342
Type species.—Auricula ringens Lamarck, 1804, by
subsequent designation (Gray, 1847a, p. 140). Eocene
of the Paris Basin.
Revised diagnosis.—Shell small, oval to globose,
spire moderate in extent. Protoconch heterostrophic,
deviated, nucleus partially immersed. Whorls inflated,
ornament usually of punctate spiral striae, suture im-
pressed. Aperture auriform, contracted above, notched
basally. Outer lip varicose, dentate; labrum thickened,
toothed above; columella with two folds, the lower one
defining the basal edge.
Remarks.—The genus ranges from the Upper Cre-
taceous to the present where it is abundantly repre-
sented in temperate and tropical waters, usually at
depths of over 50 fathoms. The animals are reported
to be carnivorous on polychaete worms and forami-
nifera.
Ringicula trapaquara Harris, 1895a
Plate 22, figures 23-24
Ringicula trapaquara Harris, 1895a, p. 53, pl. 3, fig. 7; Aldrich,
1897, p. 8, pl. 2, fig. 7; Gardner, 1933, p. 211; Palmer, 1937, p.
476, pl. 73, fig. 8; Palmer and Brann, 1966, p. 884; Knight, Hodg-
kinson, Knight, Reid, Lindveit, Lindveit, and Offeman, 1977, p.
Hil.
Original description.—‘‘Whorls five; whorls one,
two and three nearly or quite smooth; four with a well
marked subsutural line and fainter ones over the whorl
surface; body whorl striate spirally, labrum very much
thickened and crenulate within, labial callosity very
pronounced, the labial plicae strong and ascending rap-
idly over the body whorl.”’ (Harris, 1895a, p. 53)
Remarks.—The Reklaw specimens of R. trapaquara
s.s. are somewhat thinner shelled, develop the spiral
ornament earlier and show less development of callus
than R. trapaquara s.s from the type locality. The
number of spiral lines is the same in specimens from
the Cook Mountain Formation and the Reklaw For-
mation, although in the latter group, the lines are
smaller and more regularly spaced. The strength of the
spiral ornament appears to be of little importance as a
differentiating character in specimens of R. trapaquara
from the Stone City Member of the Cook Mountain,
as the spiral ornament ranges from being quite smooth
to strongly striate. Several specimens from Ridge
Creek are altogether more elongate, exhibiting more
pronounced labial callosity than the remainder and
might represent a new species; these specimens came
from a thin sandy lens within an area where the clay
is quite black, has an almost waxy consistency, and is
otherwise quite featurless. No other molluscs were
found in this area. Until more specimens are collected
it is not known if this represents a distinct group.
Type information.—Holotype: TBEG 35572. Type
locality: San Antonio Ferry, Burleson County, Texas.
Range: Middle Eocene, Stone City beds. Figured Rek-
law specimen: PRI 30524, from locality 14.
Material examined.—34 specimens, the largest: 2.4
mm length.
Family PHILINIDAE Gray, 1850b, p. 94
Genus PHILINE Ascanius, 1772, p. 331
Type species.—Bulla aperta, Linnaeus, 1767, by
monotypy. Recent seas of the British Isles.
Diagnosis.—Shell thin, fragile, loosely enrolled;
spire small, often hidden; body whorl smooth or spi-
rally striate, greatly expanded anteriorly; outer lip
rounded.
Remarks.—Philine species are carnivorous on small
molluscs below the sea bed, usually at moderate
depths. The genus ranges from the Upper Cretaceous
to Recent.
Philine sp.
Plate 22, figure 25
Remarks.—Two specimens of this genus were ob-
tained; they are very similar to Philine (Megistostoma)
gabbianum (Stoliczka, 1868) from the Middle Eocene
of California. The almost complete example is embed-
ded and somewhat flattened, in a block of matrix hid-
ing the apertural view. The posterior view outline is
closely similar to that of P. (M.) gabbianum, the sur-
face is smooth with spiral threads, closely spaced near
the apex becoming more widely spaced and duplex in
character towards the anterior; edge of the outer lip at
the apex is thickened. An apical fragment was also
116 BULLETIN 352
obtained which may represent this species. Two spe-
cies are reported from the Gulf Coast Eocene, Philine
alabamensis Aldrich, 1897, from the Sabinian Eocene
at Wood’s Bluff and Philine (Megistostoma) dockeryi
Allen, 1970, from the Moody’s Branch Upper Eocene
of Mississippi; P. alabamensis has fine, zigzag spiral
lines and P. (M.) dockeryi has much stronger spiral
sculpture which becomes less crowded towards the apex.
Figured specimen: PRI 30404, from locality 4.
Material examined.—Two specimens, the figured
specimen 19 mm length.
Superfamily ACTEONOIDEA Cernohorsky,
1972, p. 203
Family ACTEONIDAE d’Orbigny, 1842b, p. 106
Genus ACTEON Montfort, 1810, p. 314
Type species.—Voluta tornatilis Linnaeus, 1758, by
original designation. Recent in European seas.
Diagnosis.—Shell usually small to very small, pro-
file ovate to elliptical in shape. Protoconch usually not
entirely visible, the tip enrolled. Whorls rounded, suture
impressed, sometimes channeled; sculpture of punctate
spiral lines. Aperture long, contracted above, basally
expanded and rounded. Outer lip thin, labrum with one
fold which is the continuation of the basal edge.
Remarks.—Acteonids are regarded as the most
primitive living opisthobranchs; the group is world-
wide in distribution in temperate and tropical waters
in moderate depths; the animals are carnivorous on
polychaete worms. The genus is widely distributed
form the Upper Cretaceous to Recent.
Acteon pomilis punctatus I. Lea, 1833
Plate 22, figures 28-29
Acteon punctatus 1. Lea, 1833, p. 111, pl. 4, fig. 96; H.C. Lea. 1849,
p. 95; de Gregorio 1890, p. 165, pl. 16, fig. 21 copy Meyer, fig.
22 copy Lea; Harris 1895c, p. 37, not Tornatella punctata Fér-
ussac, 1823 (in: 1819-1832), p. 112 (= T. sulcata Gmelin); not
d’Orbigny in Sagra (1842c), p. 230.
Acteon punctatus I. Lea. Conrad, 1865a, p. 34; 1866a, p. 9; Meyer,
1885, p. 468; Dall, 1892, p. 14 in part; Cossmann, 1893, p. 48 as
Actoean, Cossmann, 1895, p. 46.
Acteon inflatior Meyer, 1886, p. 78, pl. 2, fig. 31; Cossmann, 1893,
p. 48.
Actaeonida (Rictaxsis) punctatus (1. Lea). Cossmann, 1895, p. 52.
Acteon pomilis punctatus 1. Lea. Palmer, 1937, p. 499, pl. 74, figs.
25, 29, 31, 35, 36; pl. 90, fig. 2; Brann and Kent, 1960, p. 24;
Palmer and Brann, 1966, p. 482; Knight, Hodgkinson, Knight,
Reid, Lindveit, Lindveit, and Offeman, 1977, p. 10, p. 28.
Original Description.—**Shell ovately conical,
transversely and closely furrowed; furrows closely set
with punctures; substance of the shell rather thick;
spire rather elevated, pointed; suture somewhat im-
pressed; columella with one fold; whorls five; mouth
narrow, about three-fifths the length of the shell; outer
lip thickened about the middle. Length 7—20ths,
Breadth .2 of an inch.” (I. Lea, 1833, p. 111)
Remarks.—The Reklaw specimens appear to differ
in very few respects from A. p. punctatus as developed
in the Stone City and Landrum members of the Cook
Mountain Formation. The shell is slightly more elon-
gate, possesses flat-topped ribs and has a weaker, more
oblique columellar fold. Even though these differences
are constant, they are within the range of variability
of the species as exhibited by specimens in the Weches
through Gosport Sand formations, and thus not de-
serving of separate taxonomic rank. Specimens as-
signed to the species A. pomilis punctatus show a
steady development of more rounded ribs throughout
Claibornian times, a sequence that ends with Acteon
annectens Meyer, 1885.
Type information.—Holotype: ANSP 5537. Holo-
type Acteon inflator Meyer, 1886: USNM 638840.
Type locality: Claiborne Bluff, Alabama river, Gosport
Sand Formation. Figured Reklaw specimen: PRI
30525, from locality 4.
Material examined.—30 specimens, the largest: 5.5
mm length, 3.0 width.
Genus SEMIACTEON Cossmann, 1889, p. 304
Type species.—Tornatella sphericulus Deshayes,
1864, by original designation. Lutetian Eocene of the
Paris Basin.
Original Diagnosis.—**Coquille ombiliquée, glob-
uleuse, 2 embryon obtus et mamillé, a ouverture en-
tiére et arrondie; labre épais, avec un bourrelet obso-
léte a l’extérieur; columelle droite, un peu renflée au
milieu, se terminant en point a sa jonction avec le bord
antérieur. Type: Tornatella spaericula, Desh.” Trans-
lation: Shell umbilicated, inflated; protoconch obtuse
and mammilate; aperture entire, rounded; outer lip sharp;
with an obsolete callus pad; columella straight, a weak
fold in the middle, terminated anteriorly at the base.
Remarks.—The strong collabral lines forming a can-
cellate ornament and the shorter anteriorly rounded ap-
erture can also be used to distinguish this genus from
Acteon §.s.. Semiacteon has not hitherto been reported
outside of Europe where it is represented by a few
species ranging from the Eocene to the Miocene. A
similar genus is Kleinacteon Vokes, 1939, which was
placed doubtfully in the Acteonidae by Vokes due to
the ‘smooth, somewhat naticoid” nucleus. MacNeil
(in MacNeil and Dockery, 1984, p. 230) places Klein-
acteon in the Acteonidae, surmising that Vokes may
have failed to recognize the obscurely heterostophic
nature of the nucleus. If the nucleus is heterostrophic
there appears to be no essential difference between
Semiacteon and Kleinacteon.
EOCENE MOLLuSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 117
Semiacteon texanum, new species
Plate 22, figures 26—27
Description.—Shell small, elongate, of about five
whorls. Protoconch large, tip enrolled and not visible.
Sculpture of fine, flat-topped spiral lines of equal
strength, spaced somewhat wider apart on the subsu-
tural ramp, crossed by fine, longitudinal threads form-
ing a cancellate pattern. Where the threads cross the
spirals they bend sharply forward so the entire pattern
is slightly offset from thread to thread. Aperture elon-
gate-ovate with a slight spout, outer lip sharp, straight
at the mid-section, and considerably thickened behind
the rim. Columella thickened at the base of the body
whorl into an obtuse incipient fold that decreases in
strength as it spirals into the aperture. Umbilical chink
present.
Remarks.—The sculpture is similar to that of spe-
cies of Acteon s.s. but the latter have wide flat ribs
with narrow interstices whose longitudinal threads are
only visible within the grooves, thus generating a
punctate pattern. The present sculpture, apertural shape
and weak fold on the columella assign the species to
Semiacteon. In the acteonids examined from the Clai-
borne Group two types of protoconchs occur; the first
is smaller, about half the size of the second, having
the initial heterostrophic turn rising above the remain-
ing part of the protoconch and forming a blunt conical
profile; the second is much larger and has the initial
turn fully immersed. I believe these two groups de-
serve at least subgeneric rank. The paratypes of A.
idoneus in the Academy of Natural Sciences in Phil-
adelphia, belong to the taxon possessing the second
type of protoconch, and indeed is the same type as
Semiacteon (=Kleinacteon). The most similar species
is Semiacteon puteatus (MacNeil, 1984) from the Mint
Spring Oligocene of Mississippi; that species can be
differentiated by the more rounded whorls, thinner spi-
ral ribs, and prominent anterior spout.
Etymology.—The name refers to the occurrence in
Texas.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 33078. Type lo-
cality: locality 4.
Material examined.—Two specimens: the largest
(the holotype) 4.5 mm length.
Order ENTOMOTAENIATA Cossmann,
1896b, p. 5
Superfamily PYRAMIDELLOIDEA Gray,
1840, p. 152
Family PYRAMIDELLIDAE Gray, 1840, p. 152
Genus PYRAMIDELLA Lamarck, 1799, p. 76
Type species.—Trochus dolabratus Linnaeus, 1758,
by original designation. Recent off the coast of Florida
and the West Indies.
Diagnosis.—Shell elongate-conic, whorls increasing
regularly in size; two or three folds on the columella.
The shell is usually strongly polished and porcella-
neous in luster (after Dall and Bartsch, 1909, p. 8).
Remarks.—The distribution is world wide with
many species ectoparasitic or carnivorous on poly-
chaete worms, coelenterates and molluscs. The genus
ranges from Paleocene to Recent. As Dall and Bartsch
(1904) note, their grouping of the family Pyramidel-
lidae is in many respects only a practical and conve-
nient one. This has led to a somewhat artificial place-
ment of the Reklaw specimens since species described
herein often have some characters belonging to more
than one subgenus. For convenience, however, their
division of the group has been followed. The genus
and the subgenera treated here are known throughout
the Tertiary and are worldwide in distribution.
Subgenus SYRNOLA A. Adams, 1860, p. 405
Type species.—Syrnola gracillima A. Adams,
1860a, by original designation. Recent off the coast of
Korea.
Diagnosis.—Shell slender, medium sized; one col-
umellar fold, shell not umbilicated; surface marked by
fine lines of growth and microscopic spiral lines, axial
sculpture lacking; protoconch heteroscopic, nucleus
central, exsert; postnuclear whorls increasing regularly
in size.
Pyramidella (Syrnola) pirum, new species
Plate 23, figures 1—2
Description.—Shell small and slender. Whorls 10,
protoconch of one and one-half whorls at right angles
to the shell axis and partially immersed in the suc-
ceeding whorl. Adult whorls smooth, straight-sided or
feebly concave below the deeply impressed suture and
curving smoothly inward to the lower suture. The
strength of the sutural depression varies with age, later
whorls being more strongly impressed, generating a
prominently rounded lower whorl profile. Body whorl
prominently rounded below a slight basal keel, outer
lip smooth within, aperture tear-drop shaped, inner lip
reflected below and uniting with a basal columellar
fold. Small umbilical depression present.
Remarks.—This species most closely approaches
Pyramidella (Cossmannica) perexilis (Conrad, 1865a),
from the Cook Mountain and Gosport Sand forma-
tions, but is much smaller and is placed in section
Syrnola instead of Cossmannica due to the lack of a
second columellar fold. None of the specimens shows
even a trace of a second fold.
Etymology.—The specific name pirum (Latin, pear),
refers to the pear-shaped aperture.
118 BULLETIN 352
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30526; para-
types: PRI 30527, 30528. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—21 specimens, the largest: 3.5
mm length, 0.7 mm width.
Subgenus COSSMANNICA Dall and Bartsch,
1904, p. 6
Type species.—Pyramidella clandestina Deshayes,
1861, by original designation. Eocene (Cuisian and
Thanetian) of the Paris Basin.
Diagnosis.—Columellar folds two; shell not umbil-
icated, surface polished, marked by fine lines of
growth and microscopic spiral striations; basal fasciole
absent; aperture suboval (after Dall and Bartsch, 1909,
p. 10).
Remarks.—Dall and Bartsch separated this subge-
nus from Syrnola solely on the basis of the suboval
shape of the apertural.
Pyramidella (Cossmannica) perexilis (Conrad,
1865a)
Plate 23, figures 3—4
Obeliscus perexilis Conrad, 1865a, p. 28.
Odostomia perexilis (Conrad). de Gregorio, 1890, p. 157, pl. 15.
Syrnola perexilis (Conrad). Dall, 1892, p. 247.
Pyramidella perexilis (Conrad). Palmer, 1937, p. 75 in part, pl. 7,
figs. 4, 5, 21; Palmer and Brann, 1966, p. 869; Knight, Hodgkin-
son, Knight, Reid, Lindveit, Lindveit, and Offeman, 1977, p. 20,
Original description.—**Subulate, polished; volu-
tions fourteen; sides straight above and rounded at
base; suture deeply channeled; body whorl with slight-
ly concave sides; columella with a prominent plait
uniting with the labial deposit.”’ (Conrad, 1865a, p. 28)
Remarks.—The Reklaw specimens are very close to
P. (C.) perexilis s.s. from the Middle Claibornian, dif-
fering mainly in the less prominent contraction of the
body whorl above the suture. They possess a well-
defined second fold that starts within the aperture; a
few specimens show one to three spiral lirae within
the outer lip. An extremely common species in the
Reklaw deposits, outnumbering the other Pyramidella
spp. by at least 10:1.
Type information.—Holotype: ANSP 1567. Type
locality: Claiborne Bluff, Monroe County, Alabama.
Range lower Claibornian in Texas to upper Claibor-
nian in Alabama. Figured Reklaw specimen: PRI
30529, from locality 20.
Material examined.—197 specimens, the largest:
7.0 mm length, 1.7 mm width.
Pyramidella (Cossmannica) filamentosa,
new species
Plate 23, figures 7—8
Description.—Shell small, to ten whorls. Proto-
conch heterostrophic of one and a half whorls, 50%
immersed in the succeeding whorl. Spire conical,
whorls straight-sided to feebly excavated medially, and
carinated above the impressed suture. Surface polished
with fine lines of growth and ultramicroscopic spiral
lines. Body whorl angulated medially, smoothly
rounded basally. Outer lip sharp and where fractured
showing a few lirae internally. Columella with one
strong fold with a weaker one below at a more acute
angle ending at a labial swelling.
Remarks.—Where most of the labial area has been
broken, a microscopic umbilicus may be visible, but
since no specimens with a complete labrum show that
feature, the species has been assigned to subgenus
Cossmannica, instead of the umbilicated subgenus
Ulfa. The characters place this species close to Pyr-
amidella (Ulfa) chavani Palmer, 1937, from the
McBean and Gosport Sand formations, although that
is a stouter species which is umbilicated and has stron-
ger spiral striations on the base.
Etymology.—The specific name filamentosa (Latin,
filament), refers to the microscopic spiral lines on the
surface.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30530; para-
types: PRI 30531-30534. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—27 specimens, the largest: 4.4
mm length, 1.1 mm width.
Pyramidella (Cossmannica) tundrae, new species
Plate 23, figures 5—6
Description.—Shell small, whorls 12, spire cyrto-
conoid and usually somewhat bent near the posterior
end. Protoconch of one and one-quarter to one and
one-half heterostrophic whorls, 50% immersed in the
succeeding whorl. Adult whorls straight-sided to ex-
cavated, polished, and with a narrow shoulder giving
the whorls a stepped appearance. Aperture ovate, outer
lip thin and with a few lirae within, columella with
one large fold and a small one anteriorly. Inner lip
strongly reflected, umbilicus minute to closed.
Remarks.—This is a very variable species, particu-
larly with regard to the size of the shoulder and the
subsutural angulation. Some specimens have an almost
smooth profile while others are prominently stepped.
A few specimens have the whorls stepped to such a
degree as to give the appearance of a medial furrow.
A characteristic feature is the rounded and bent spire.
Pyramidella (Longchaeus) larvata Conrad, 1833b, a
similar species from the Gosport Sand, has a larger
spiral angle, straight to convex whorls, and more
prominently impressed sutures. Even though the lec-
totype of P. (L.) larvata is uniplicate, Palmer (1937,
p. 72) places the species in Longchaeus, because other
specimens do show three columellar plicae, although
two of them very weakly. One specimen shows the
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 119
second fold weakly duplex but as the remaining char-
acters are the same the species is left in Cossmannica.
Etymology.—Referring to the smooth, featureless
character of the whorls.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30405; para-
types: PRI 30439-30412. Type locality locality 20.
Material examined.—95 specimens, the largest (the
holotype) 5.2 mm length.
Pyramidella (Cossmannica) tundrae zigguratum,
new subspecies
Plate 23, figures 9-10
Description.—Shell very small, whorls six, cyrto-
conoid, solid. Protoconch largely immersed, nucleus
not visible. Adult whorls smooth or with ultra-micro-
scopic spiral striae, shouldered and moderately exca-
vated medially. Body whorl moderately expanded ba-
sally, below that gently carinate. Aperture subquadrate;
columella sturdy, straight with two folds, the upper
one strong, the lower much weaker and at a greater
angle to the axis.
Remarks.—The strongly cyrtoconoid profile and
stepped concave whorls seem unique to the Pyrami-
dellidae. The most closely related species is P. (C.)
tundrae s.s., from which it differs by an accentuation
of the concave sides of the whorls, more prominently
stepped whorls and the carinate body whorl. Some
specimens of P. (C.) tundrae do approach these but no
intermediate examples connecting them were found.
Etymology.—Noting the resemblance to a ziggurat
with the stepped sides.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30479. Type lo-
cality: locality 4.
Material examined.—Four specimens, the largest:
1.2 mm length.
Genus ODOSTOMIA Fleming, 1817, p. 76
Type species.—Turbo plicatus Montague, 1803, by
subsequent designation (Gray, 1847a, p. 159). Recent
off the British Isles.
Diagnosis.—Shell small to very small, high, coni-
cal. Protoconch low, considerably immersed. Whorls
usually smooth, occasionally with spiral sculpture. Ap-
erture not holostomatous; labrum sometimes lirate;
columella concave with one strong fold. Sometimes
umbilicated.
Remarks.—The genus is known from the Upper
Cretaceous to Recent.
Subgenus DOLIELLA Monterosato, 1880, p. 73
Type species.—Odostomia (Doliella) nitens Jeffreys,
1870, by subsequent designation (Dall and Bartsch,
1909, p. 15). Recent in the Mediterranean off Sicily.
Diagnosis.—Postnuclear whorls sculptured similar-
ly throughout, no varices present, shell polished with
no axial sculpture, spiral sculpture consisting of a more
or less conspicuous spiral ridge.
Remarks.—The subgenus ranges from the Eocene
to Recent.
Odostomia (Doliella?) ova, new species
Plate 23, figures 11-12
Description.—Whorls five and a half, nucleus glo-
bose, the tip immersed. Whorls straight-sided with a
slightly swollen subsutural ridge. Suture impressed.
Body whorl basally carinated; below the carina sloping
in a straight line to the anterior part of the aperture.
One strong columellar fold, outer lip usually lirate
within but not extending to the edge; umbilicus small
and partly covered by the inner lip.
Remarks.—This species seems to be unique in the
Claibornian. The closest described species is perhaps
Odostomia (Evalea) melanella (Lea, 1833), from the
McBean and Gosport Sand formations, with which it
shares smooth outer whorls, microscopic striations,
and lirations within the outer lip that die out before
the edge. The Reklaw species is much smaller, more
elongate, more prominently carinate at the base of the
body whorl, and has a swollen subsutural ridge.
Etymology.—Noting the ovate apertural shape.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30536; paratype:
PRI 30537. Type locality: locality 4.
Material examined.—25 specimens, the largest: 2.5
mm length.
Odostomia spp.
Remarks.—At least two other species of Odostomia
appear to be present, all very small in size and may
be juvenile; the largest is about | mm in length. The
most common species seems assignable to subgenus
Heida Dall and Bartsch, 1904; it shows a continuous
peristome, an almost channeled base and no apparent
sculpture. The only Tertiary species showing any sim-
ilarity is Odostomia (Odostomia) aff. angularis Dall
and Bartsch, 1904.
Material examined.—1\3 specimens, the largest: 1
mm length.
Subfamily TURBONILLINAE Bronn, 1849
Genus TURBONILLA Risso, 1826, p. 224
Type species.—Turbonilla plicatula Risso, 1826, by
subsequent designation (Dall and Bartsch, 1903, p.
269). Pliocene of Italy.
Revised diagnosis.—Shell very elevated, with
prominent longitudinal ribs, sometimes also with spiral
Ornamentation; suture strongly impressed; aperture
rounded-rhombohedral; columella with a single low
120 BULLETIN 352
plication which is either not visible, or is only just
visible within the aperture. Protoconch heterostrophic,
considerably elevated.
Remarks.—The genus is known from the Eocene to
Recent.
Turbonilla cf. neglecta Meyer
Plate 23, figure 18
Turbonilla neglecta Meyer, 1886, p. 69, pl. 1, figs. 4, 4a; de Gre-
gorio, 1890, p. 159, pl. 15, figs. 31, 32 copy Meyer; Cossmann,
1893, p. 24; 1912, p. 279; Palmer, 1937, p. 81, pl. 8, figs. 4, 11,
copies Meyer; Palmer and Brann, 1966, p. 973; Knight, Hodgkin-
son, Knight, Reid, Lindveit, Lindveit, and Offeman, 1977, p. 33.
Original description.—““Subulate; whorls flattened,
closely covered with broad and distinct transverse ribs,
ending rather abruptly on the last whorl and leaving
the base smooth; aperture subquadrilangular, longer
than broad; inner lip twisted, thus forming an obtuse
fold at some distance from the sharp outer lip; cren-
ulate within by a few distant elevated spiral lines.”
(Meyer, 1886, p. 69)
Remarks.—Several broken specimens that can pro-
visionally be assigned to 7. neglecta were obtained.
One specimen shows the inner lip extended tongue-
like to the left of the columella, a feature only poorly
displayed by Meyer’s figure of the species. At least
three separate axially costate Turbonilla species exist
in the Claibornian and would need a thorough revision
to place them correctly. Unfortunately Meyer’s holo-
type is lost, fide Palmer (1937, p. 81).
Type information.—Syntypes: USNM 638821,
638822. Figured Reklaw specimen: PRI 30540, from
locality 4.
Material examined.—Two specimens, the largest:
1.7 mm length.
Subgenus PTYCHEULIMELLA Sacco, 1892, p. 59
Type species.—Tornatella pyramidata Deshayes,
1833a, by original designation. Recent in the eastern
Mediterranean.
Original diagnosis.—‘‘Testa turrito-pyramidata.
Anfractus planulati, ultimus saepe plus minusque
subangulatus. Apertura ovato-quadrangula vel
rhomboidis. Columella supernae, depressae, trans-
verse uniplicata.”” (Sacco, 1892, p. 59) Translation:
Shell turrited; whorls smooth, the last whorl often
more or less angulated; aperture ovate-quadrilateral
or rhomboidal; columella excavated, one oblique
fold.
Remarks.—Dall and Bartsch (1904), in their syn-
opsis of the genus, also noted the presence of at most,
microscopic spiral sculpture, the absence of a basal
keel and the presence of feeble axial ribs on the early
whorls. Wenz (1939) places Ptycheulimella under Eu-
limella, Gray, 1847a. The genus is known from the
Eocene to Recent.
Turbonilla (Ptycheulimella) meta, new species
Plate 23, figures 13—15
Description.—Shell small, whorls 13. Protoconch of
two and a half smooth whorls, strongly heterostrophic
with the angle of inclination at ca. 120° and projecting
well outside the profile of the spire. First three adult
whorls with numerous, faint, backward curving riblets,
more prominent posteriorly. Whorls polished and on
post-ribbed stage straight-sided and excavated below
the deeply impressed suture. The surface shows faint
lines of growth that are occasionally developed into
obsolete swellings. Aperture trapezoidal, labrum
smooth, columella with one strong fold at the base;
umbilical depression present.
Remarks.—This species has affinities with Turbon-
illa (Ptycheulimella) clinensis (Aldrich, 1921) from the
Lower Eocene of Gregg’s Landing, Alabama, but that
is an altogether stouter species with a rounded spire
and the columellar fold placed nearer the base.
Etymology.—tThe specific name meta (Latin, target),
refers to the nuclear whorls jutting outside the axial
profile of the later whorls.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 30541; para-
types: PRI 30542-30545. Type locality: locality 20.
Material examined.—65 specimens, the largest: 4.5
mm length, 1.0 mm width.
Subgenus PYRGISCUS Philippi, 1841, p. 50
Type species.—Melania rufa Philippi, 1836, by orig-
inal designation. Recent, Gulf of Gascoyne in the
Mediterranean.
Diagnosis.—Shell without a basal keel; spiral sculp-
ture always present, whose strength is stronger than
microscopic in character. Whorls not strongly shoul-
dered.
Remarks.—The subgenus ranges from the Eocene
to Recent.
Turbonilla (Pyrgiscus) sp.
Plate 23, figures 16—17
Remarks.—One small fragment was obtained of a
turrited shell that is similar to Turbonilla (Pyrgiscus)
agrestis (Aldrich, 1911), from the Lower Eocene
Hatchetigbee Formation. The present specimen has
one spiral line per whorl less than 7. (P.) agrestis and
there is a tendency for the lines to become nodular
where they cross over the axial folds.
Type information.—Figured specimen: PRI 30480,
from locality 20.
Material examined.—One specimen, 2.0 mm length.
EOcENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 121
Order NOTASPIDEA Fisher, 1883, p. 571
Superfamily UMBRACULOIDEA Odhner,
Fe yas 115)
Family UMBRACULIDAE Dall, 1889c, p. 88
Genus UMBRACULUM Schumacher, 1817, p. 177
Type species.—Umbrella chinensis Martini, 1784 (=
Patella sinica Gmelin, 1791 by monotypy). Recent,
seas off China.
Diagnosis.—Shell moderate to large, ovate; surface
with concentric growth lines and sometimes also radial
lines; protoconch small, almost central, dextral; inte-
rior with radial lines from the apex to the concentric
muscle scar.
Remarks.—In the fossil state the closely similar ge-
nus Tylodina Rafinesque, 1814, can be distinguished
by its sinistrally coiled nucleus. Umbraculum is known
from the Eocene to Recent.
Umbraculum tomaculum, new species
Plate 23, figures 25-26
Description.—Shell medium-sized, ovate in outline,
low-conical in profile. Protoconch anterior to the lon-
gitudinal midsection, dextral, with a bulbous nucleus
followed by about one-eighth of a turn that is set
asymmetrically on the adult shell at an angle of about
22° to the longitudinal axis. Apex central, sculpture of
numerous fine, radial, flattened lines and comarginal
growth resting stages; the entire ornament very sub-
dued. Inner surface porcellaneous and smooth with a
few faint radial undulations. Muscle scar very faint
except posteriorly, obsolescent towards the anterior
(broken) end.
Remarks.—Palmer and Brann (1966, p. 1010) list
three Umbraculum species from the Lower Eocene
Hatchetigbee, Lisbon, and Upper Eocene Moody’s
Branch formations. The genus is probably much more
common than indicated but the flat circular shell does
not favour its preservation. I have specimens from the
the Weches and Cook Mountain formations, which are
all fairly similar and also are similar to the common
Jackson Umbraculum planulatum (Conrad, 1854).
These species are almost entirely concentrically sculp-
tured, have a well-defined entire muscle scar, and when
preserved show a closely coiled protoconch. The Rek-
law species is higher, primarily radially sculptured on
the dorsal surface, and on the holotype shows a some-
what elongated “sausage like” protoconch lying on
the surface with the apical end apparently dextrally
coiled. A possibly related species is Eosinica elevata
(Aldrich, 1903), from the Lower Eocene Sabinian
Stage; Zilch (1959, p. 60) places Eosinica doubtfully
in the Umbraculidae (questionably in the Patellidae).
Eosinica elevaia is moderately high, primarily radially
sculptured, and has a smooth interior and a crenulated
margin. Eosinica also occurs in the Cook Mountain
Formation, Erickson (1982) described an Acmaea (?)
sp. nov. 1, which almost certainly belongs to this ge-
nus although the protoconch is missing; Acmaea has
an inflated, non-spiral protoconch.
Etymology.—Noting the protoconch shape.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 33075; paratype:
PRI 33077. Type locality: locality 21.
Material examined.—Two specimens, the holotype
12.7 mm actual length, 13.5 mm width. Estimating
from previous growth lines, the unbroken length
would be almost 18 mm.
Class CEPHALOPODA Cuvier, 1797, p. 378
Subclass COLEOIDEA Bather, 1888, p. 302
Order SEPIIDA Zittel, 1895, p. 445
Suborder MYOPSINA dOrbigny, 1839, p. 220
Family SEPIIDAE Kerferstein, 1866, p. 1441
Subfamily BELOSAEPIINAE Naef, 1921, p. 536
Genus BELOSAEFPIA Voltz, 1830, p. 23
Type species.—Beloptera sepioidea Blainville,
1825, by original designation. Eocene of France.
Diagnosis.—Phragmocone bent, semiconical, later-
ally flattened; exterior dorsally coarsely granular; in-
terior smooth with transverse laminae, an elliptical
ventral siphuncle, terminating in a solid beak bent in
the dorsal direction; dorsal base of beak expanded into
an elevated callus, ventral base of beak connected to
a semicircular plate expanded posteriorly over part of
the rostrum, and anteriorly connecting to the lateral
margins of the shell.
Remarks.—The genus ranges from the Paleocene to
the Upper Eocene and is cosmopolitan in distribution.
Belosaepia penna, new species
Plate 23, figures 27—28
Description.—Shell rounded, beak bent sharply for-
ward almost at a 90° angle, lip lost. Ventral plate thin,
wide and winglike, bent upward at the ends and with
longitudinal ridges in groups of five or six on the upper
surface and terminating in a crenate edge; below with
shorter and more prominent ridges, every fifth or sixth
one larger. Dorsal surface under the tip roughly rugose,
and with large pimples; the remainder of the dorsal
surface finely rugose. Cavity with worn chamber out-
lines, initially round, then greatly expanding latero-
ventrally; anterior upper inside surface flattened with
the upper and lower margins thickened into lateral
ridges. Outer surface of the phragmocone chambers
finely ridged with wrinkled radial and spiral lines giv-
ing a rasp-like appearance.
122 BULLETIN 352
Remarks.—tThis species is distinct from all other
American species of Belosaepia in several features,
including the wrinkled surface of the ventral plate, the
sharp bend in the rostrum, and the smoothly rounded
profile below; other species are also more flattened
ventrally. One unique specimen appears to show the
remnants of four inner chambers, and thus shows the
character of the rugose outer surface; its inner surface
is apparently smooth. The shape of the cavity with the
impressed lines, expanding strongly in the ventral di-
rection, over the inner edge of the ventral plate and
laterally, indicates that the phragmocone must have
initially expanded in a ventral direction past the plate
and a little in the direction of the beak, and then back
towards the rostrum. One species from the Cuisian of
the Paris Basin appears related, Belosaepia tricarinata
(Watelet, 1851); this species also has a strongly bent
beak and coarsely ribbed ventral plate; it can be dis-
tinguished by the strongly crescent-shaped ventral
plate, larger size and stronger ornamentation on the
dorsal side of the rostrum.
Etymology.—The specific name penna (Latin,
wing), notes the thin, wide character of the ventral
plate.
Type information.—Holotype: PRI 33130. Type lo-
cality: locality 20.
Material examined.—75 specimens, the largest: 10
mm from the center to the tip of the ventral plate, 13
mm height from the middle of the ventral plate to the
base.
Subclass NAUTILODEA Agassiz, 1847, p. 246
Order NAUTILIDAE Agassiz, 1847, p. 246
Superfamily NAUTILOIDEA de Blainville, 1825
Family HERCOGLOSSIDAE Spath, 1927, p. 22
Genus ANGULITHES Montfort, 1808, p. 7
Type species.—Nautilus triangulithes Montfort,
1802, by original designation. Upper Cretaceous of
France.
Diagnosis.—**Conch very involute, generally com-
pressed, whorl sides slightly convex, strongly conver-
gent, venter narrowly rounded to angular. Suture mod-
erately sinuous with a narrowly rounded ventral sad-
dle, a broad lateral lobe, a narrow, rounded saddle, and
a small lobe on the umbilical shoulder. Siphuncle small
and located near the dorsum.” (Kummel, 1956, p.
454-455)
Remarks.—The genus has been reported from En-
gland, India, Senegal, Somalia, the only New World
occurrence being from the Reklaw.
Angulithes elliotti (Stenzel, 1940)
Plate 23, figures 30-31
Deltoidnautilus elliotti Stenzel, 1940, p. 759-764, pl. 38, figs. 1-6,
pl. 39, figs. 1, 2, text figs. 123(2), 124(2).
Angulithes elliotti (Stenzel, 1940). Kummel 1956, p. 35-456; Palmer
and Brann, 1965, p. 372-373.
Description.—Shell involute, large and thick. Cross
section of early whorls truncate-triangular, becoming
gradually high-triangular with a sharply rounded ven-
ter. Ornamentation absent except for growth lines and
very indistinct wavy raised spirals best developed near
the umbilicus. Lateral zones very long and gently
curved or flat, converging towards the venter at an
angle of 48°. Septa closely spaced and convex; si-
phuncle slightly less than one-quarter of the distance
from the dorsum, siphuncle collar tubular and long.
Ventral saddle the largest, and prominently rounded-
triangular, lateral lobe broad and gently curved; lateral
saddle relatively deep and narrow lying a short dis-
tance from the umbilical shoulder, a medium sized
lobe on the narrow perforate umbilicus; dorsum with
a broad lobe.
Remarks.—One additional specimen found in a
sandy lens in Ridge Creek.
Type information.—Holotype: TBEG 20901. Type
locality: locality 6.
Family ATURIIDAE Hyatt, 1894"
Genus ATURIA Bronn, 1838, p. 1122
Type species.—Nautilus aturi Basterot, 1825, by
subsequent designation (Hermannsen, 1846, p. 90).
Miocene of southwestern France.
Diagnosis.—Shell involute, compressed, cross sec-
tion initially triangular-oval, becoming subrectangular
by the last whorl. Early whorls widest at or near the
umbilical shoulder, becoming widest in the vicinity of
the lateral zones. Umbilical shoulder not well defined,
umbilical area one-ninth to one-eighth of whorl height.
Lateral zones gently curved, in the last whorl nearly
parallel medially, converging at an angle of 29° to 32°
from the middle to the broadly evenly rounded venter.
Septa convex, siphon narrow and funicular. Sutures
slightly wavy across the venter, a small, narrow saddle
at the corner of the base of the rapidly tapering and
pinched lateral lobe; lateral saddle evenly rounded.
Remarks.—The genus is known from the Paleocene
to the Miocene.
'7 Kummel in Moore (1964) cites Chapman (1857) as author of the
family name Aturiidae. Extensive search has failed to locate this
reference. Aturinae Hyatt, 1894, cited in Kummel (1956), is used
nomen transl. Aturiidae herein.
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 12
Aturia turneri, Stenzel, 1940
Plate 23, figures 29—30
Aturia (Brazaturia) turneri Stenzel 1940, pp. 732, 766, 770, pl. 41,
figs. 1-6, text-figs. 125 (2), 126 (7).
Aturia turneri Stenzel. Stenzel (1942), Cephalopoda cards Nos. 27a,
27b, figs. 1-5, text-figs. 125 (2), 126 (7); Miller, 1947, p. 108, pl.
72, figs. 1-5; Kummel, 1956, pp. 343, 468; Palmer and Brann,
1965, p. 375.
Description.—Shell involute, compressed, and flat
lenticular in shape; cross section of body whorl sub-
rectangular. Early whorls widest at or near the umbil-
ical shoulder, but last preserved whorl widest in the
region from the vicinity of the umbilical shoulder to
the middle of the lateral zones. Umbilical shoulder and
area as in the genus. Lateral zones are only gently
curved in the earlier whorls and converge at an angle
of about 29° ; lateral zones of the last preserved whorl
gently curved and nearly parallel from the vicinity of
the umbilical shoulder to their middle, but converging
at an angle of 32° from their middle on towards the
venter; venter broadly and evenly rounded. Sutures
slightly wavy across venter; a small narrow saddle at
>)
the ventral corner of the base of the lateral lobe; lateral
lobes rapidly tapering and pinched in at the point
which is recurved dorsally; lateral saddle broadly
arched.
Remarks.—Several small fragments and two larger
ones discovered, most extremely pressure distorted.
One partial clay mold shows the characteristic suture
pattern well and another large portion of the body
whorl has the lateral zones converging at an angle of
about 30° and also shows a deep and well-rounded
hyponomic sinus. Small nautiloid cephalopods are not
at all rare in the unctuous dark clays in the Reklaw,
particularly at Joe Taylor Branch, but they are almost
always small, thin-shelled, very fragile, and tend to be
destroyed at the moment of discovery. Another small
species of nautiloid, which is very globose, and pos-
sibly a Eutrephorceras sp., is not uncommon at Joe
Taylor Branch, but no specimen complete enough for
description has been recovered.
Type information.—Holotype: TBEG 20905. Type
locality: locality 6.
REFERENCES CITED
Abbott, R. T.
1974. American Seashells. 2nd. Edition. Van Nostrand Reinhold
Company, New York, 663 pp., 24 pls.
Adams, A.
1849. in Sowerby, G. B. II, Thesaurus Conchyliorum or mono-
graphs of genera of shells. vol. 2, pt. 10, pp. 157-168,
pls. 117-125, 31b, 118 bis.
1853. in H. Adams, and A. Adams, The genera of recent Mol-
lusca arranged according to their organization. London.
vol. 1: parts 1-8, pp. 1-256, pls. 1-32.
1860a. On some new genera and species of Mollusca from Ja-
pan. Annals and Magazine of Natural History, vol. 3, pt.
34, pp. 299-303, pt. 45, pp. 405-413.
1860b. Mollusca Japonica: New species of Odostomia. Annals
and Magazine of Natural History, ser. 3, vol. 6, pp. 109—
113.
1862. On Some New Species of Cylichnidae, Bullidae, and Phil-
idinae, from the Seas of China and Japan. Annals and
Magazine of Natural History, ser. 3, vol. 9, pp.150—161.
1863a. On the genera and species of Liotiinae found in Japan.
Proceedings of the Zoological Society of London, vol. 30,
pp. 71-76.
1863b. On the Japanese species of Siphonalia, a proposed new
species of gasteropodus Mollusca. Annals and Magazine
of Natural History, ser. 3, vol. 11, pp. 202—206.
1864. On some new Genera and Species of Mollusca from the
Seas of China and Japan. Annals and Magazine of Natural
History, ser. 3, vol. 13, pp. 307-310.
Adams, C. B.
1852. Catalog of shells collected at Panama, with notes on syn-
onymy, station, and habitat &c. Annals of the Lyceum of
Natural History of New York, vol. 5, pp. 229-549.
Adams, H., and Adams, A.
1853-1858. The genera of recent Mollusca arranged according
to their organization. London. vol. |: parts 1-8, pp. 1—
256, pls. 1-32 (1853); vol. 1: parts 9-15, pp. 257-484,
pls. 33-60. vol. 2: parts 16-18, pp. 1-72, pls. 61-72
(1854); vol. 2: parts 19-24, pp. 93-285, pls. 73-96 (1855)
vol. 2: parts 25-28, pp. 286—412, pls. 97-112 (1856); vol.
2: parts 29-32, pp. 413-540, pls. 113-128; vol. 3: parts
33-35, pp. 541-661, pls. 129-138 (1858).
Afshar, F.
1969. Taxonomic revision of the Superspecific Groups in the
Cretaceous and Cenozoic Tellinidae. Geological Society
of America, memoir no. 119, pp. 1-215, pls. 1-45.
Agassiz, L.
1847. Nomenclatoris zoologici index universalis, continens
nomina systematica classium, ordinum, familiarium et ge-
nerum animalium omnium, tam viventium quam fossilium
&c. Soloduri. pp. i—vili, 1-393.
Aldrich, T. H.
1885. Notes on the Tertiary of Alabama and Mississippi, with
descriptions of new species. Cincinnati Society of Natural
History, Journal vol. 8, no. 2, pp. 145-153, pls. 2, 3 5 in
part.
1886. Preliminary report on the Tertiary fossils of Alabama and
Mississippi. Part I. pp. 15—60, pls. 1—6, tables 1—10, in:
Smith, E. A., Geological Survey of Alabama, Bulletin no.
1, 85 pp., 9 pls.
1887. Notes on Tertiary fossils, with description of new species.
Cincinnati Society of Natural History, Journal, vol. 10,
no. 2, pp. 78-83, | fig.
1890. A new Eocene fossil from Texas. Nautilus, vol. 4, no. 3,
pp. 25.
1895. New or little known Tertiary Mollusca from Alabama and
Texas. Bulletins of American Paleontology, vol. 1, no. 2,
30 pp., 5 pls.
1897. Notes on Eocene Mollusca with descriptions of some new
124 BULLETIN 352
species. Bulletins of American Paleontology, vol. 2, no.
8, 26 pp., 5 pls.
1903a. New species of Eocene fossils from the Lignitic of Al-
abama. Nautilus, vol. 17, no. 2, pp. 19-20, 2 figs.
1903b. New species of Tertiary Molluscs from Alabama, Mis-
sissippi and Florida. Nautilus, vol. 16, no. 9, pp. 97-101,
pls. 3-4.
1910. New Eocene fossils from the southern states. Nautilus,
vol. 24, pp. 73-75, pl. 4.
1911. New Eocene fossils from the southern Gulf states. Bul-
letins of American Paleontology, vol. 5, no. 22, pp. 1-24,
pls. 1-5.
1921. New Eocene species from Alabama. Bulletins of Ameri-
can Paleontology, vol. 9, no. 37, 32 pp., 3 pls.
Allen, J. E.
1968. New species of Sepiidae (Mollusca, Cephalopoda) from
the Eocene of the Gulf coast. Tulane Studies in Geology,
vol. 6, no. 1, pp. 33-38, 2 pls.
1970. New species of Eocene Mollusca from the Gulf Coast.
Tulane Studies in Geology, vol. 8, no. 2, pp. 69-98, pls.
1-2.
Allmon, W.D.
1990. Review of the Bullia Group (Gastropoda: Nassariidae)
with comments on its evolution, biogeography, and phy-
logeny. Bulletins of American Paleontology, vol. 99, no.
335, pp. 1-179, 15 pls.
Anton, H. E.
1839. Verzeichnis der Conchylien welche sich in der Sammlung
von H. E. Anton befinden. Herausgegeben von dem Be-
sitzer. Halle. pp. i-xvi, 1-110.
Ascanius, P.
1772. Philine quadripartita, Et forut obekant sjo-krok, afteck-
nadt och beskriftvet. Kungliga Svenska Vetenskapsaka-
demiens Handlingar, vol. 33, pp. 329-331, pl. 10.
Baker, H. B.
1956. Familial names in land operculates. Nautilus, vol. 70, pp.
28-31.
Bannahan, A. R.
1950. Foraminifera and Peleoecology of a Portion of the Mar-
quez Member, Reklaw Formation (Middle Eocene) in
Bastrop County, Texas. Unpublished MA Thesis, Univer-
sity of Texas at Austin, pp. 1-59, 2 pls.
Barry, J. O. and LeBlank, R. E.
1942. Lower Eocene faunal units of Louisiana. Geological Sur-
vey of Louisiana, Bulletin, no. 23, 208 pp., 19 pls., 6 text
figs., 2 tab.
Bartsch, P.
1911. The recent and fossil Mollusks of the Genus Cerithiopsis
from the West Coast of America. Proceedings of the Unit-
ed States National Museum, vol. 40, no. 1823, pp. 327—
367, pls. 36-41.
1917. A monograph of West American Melanellid Molluscs.
Proceedings of the United States National Museum, vol.
53, no. 2207, pp. 295-356, pls. 34-49.
Basterot, B. de
1825. Description géologique du Bassin Tertiaire du sud-ouest
de la France, premiére partie, comprenant les observations
générales sur les Mollusques fossiles, et la description
particuliére de ceux qu’on rencontre dans ce bassin. Mu-
séum National d’ Histoire Naturelle, Mémoire, tome 2, pp.
1-100, pls. 1-7.
Bather, F. A.
1888. Shell-growth in Cephalopoda (Siphonopoda). Annals and
Magazine of Natural History, no. 4, pp. 298-310.
Bayan, J. F. F.
1873. Etudes faites dans la Collection de l’Ecole des Mines sur
des Fossiles nouveaux ou mal connus. Fasc. 2, pp. 81—
164. Paris.
Bayle, E.
1880. Liste rectification de quelques noms de genera et d’es-
peces. Journal de Conchyliologie, vol. 28, pp. 240.
Bellardi, L.
1872-1888. I Molluschi dei terreni terziarii del Piemonte e della
Liguria. Memorie della (Reale) Accademia delle Scienze.
Torino. Pt.. 1, Cephalopoda, Pteropoda, Heteropoda, Gas-
teropoda (Muricidae et Tritoniidae). Ser. 2, tom. 27, pp.
1-264, pls. 1-15 (1872); Pt.. 2, Gasteropoda (Pleurotom-
idae). Ser. 2, Tom. 29, pp. 1-364, pls. 1-9 (1877); Pt.. 3,
Gasteropoda (Buccinidae, Cyclopsidae, Purpuridae, Cor-
alliophilidae, Olividae). Ser. 2, tom. 34, pp. 1-253, pls.
1-12 (1882); Pt.. 4, Fasciolaridae e Turbinellidae. Ser. 2,
tom. 37, pp. 1—62, pls. 2 (1884); Pt.. 5, Mitridae. Ser. 2,
tom. 38, pp. 1-85, pls. 1-2, pp. 1-67, pls. 3—4 (1887):
Pt. 5, Mitridae (fine). Sert. 2, tom. 39, pp.1—48, pls. 5-6
(1888).
1847. Monographie delle Pleurotome fossili de Piemonde. Me-
morie della (Reale) Accademia della Scienze di Torino,
Memorie, ser. 2, tom. 9, pp. 531—650, 4 pls.
1875a. Novae Pleurotomidarum Pedemontii et Liguriae fossi-
lium dispositionis prodromus. Bollettino Societa Mala-
cologica Italiana, vol. 1, pp. 16-24.
1875b. Monographia della Nuculidi Trovate Finora nei Terreni
Terziari del Piemonte e della Liguria. Annuario del Reale
Liceo Gioberti di Torino, nell Anno scolastico 1874—
1875, Torino. 32 pp., 1 pl.
Bernard, F. R.
1974. Septibranchs of the eastern Pacific (Bivalvia Anomalo-
desmata). Allen Hancock Foundation, Monographs in
Marine Biology, no. 8, pp. 1-279, pls. 1-33.
Beurlen, K.
1944. Beitrage zur Stammesgeschichte der Muscheln. Bayeris-
che Akademie der Wissenschaften, Sitzungsberichte, no.
1-2, pp. 133-145.
Bieler, R.
1984. Die Gattungen der Architectonicidae (Gastropoda: “‘Het-
erogastropoda”’) Allgemeines und Teil 1: Pseudomalaxis.
Archiv ftir Molluskenkunde, vol. 115, pp. 53-103, pls. 1-5.
Blainville, H. M. D. de
1814. Mémoire sur les classifications méthodiques des animaux
mollusques, et établissement d’une nouvelle consideration
pour y parvenir. Extraits des Procées-Verbaux des Sé-
ances, Société Philomathique de Paris, pp. 175—180.
1816-1830. Dictionnaire des Sciences Naturelles ... Nouvelle
édition, &c. 60 vols. and atlas of plates. vol. 32, pp. 1—
567 (1824): vol. 56, pp. 1-546 (1828).
1825-1827. Manuel de Malacologie et Conchyliologie, &c. Paris
and Strasbourg. vol. 1, pp. viii + 1-647 (1825); vol. 2,
pp. 649-664, 87 pls. (1827).
Born, I. yon.
1778. I. a Born ... Index Rerum naturalium Musei Caesarei
Vindobonensis Pars Inia Testacea—Verzeichniss, &c.
Vindobonae. pp. i—xlii, 1-478, 1 pl.
Bory de Saint Vincent, J. B. G. M
1832-1836. Expedition Scientifique de Morée. 3 vol and Atlas.
Paris.
Bosc, L. A. G.
1816-1819. Nouveau Dictionnaire d'Histoire Naturelle. Deter-
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 125
ville, Paris. vol. 1: pp. 1-592; vol. 5: pp. 1-614; vol. 7:
pp. 1-586: vol. 15: pp. 1-550.
Bouvier, E. L.
1887. Systeme nerveux, morphologie générale et classification
des Gastéropodes prosobranches. Annales des Sciences
Naturelles, vol. 7, pp. i-ili, 1-510, pls. 1-19.
Bowdich, T. E.
1822. Elements of Conchology, including the fossil genera and
animals. Paris and London. Pt. 1: Univalves, 79 pp., 19
pls., pt. 2: Bivalves and Multivalves, 40 pp., 8 pls.
Bowles, E. O.
1939. Eocene and Paleocene Turritellidae of the Atlantic and
Gulf Coastal Plain of North America. Journal of Paleon-
tology, vol. 13, no. 3, pp. 267—336, pls. 31-34.
Boury, E. de
1887a. Etude sur les sous-genres de Scalidae du Bassin de Paris.
Paris. Part I. 143 pp.
1887b. Description des Scalidae nouveaux des couches éocénes
du Bassin de Paris et révision de quelques especes mal
connues. 86 pp. Paris.
1890. Etude critique des Scalidae miocénes et pliocénes d’ Italie.
Bollettino Societa Malacologica Italiana, vol. 15, pp. 81—
213, pl. 4.
1909. Catalogue des sous-genres de Scalidae. Journal de Con-
chyliologie, vol. 57, pp. 255-258. Paris.
1910. étude sur les sous-genres de Scalidae, vivants et fossiles.
Part Il. Monographies des Gyroscala (I). Part Il. Mono-
graphie des Circuloscala. Journal de Conchyliologie, vol.
62, pp. 212-260, 4 figs.
1913. Observations sur quelques éspéces ou sous-genres de
Scalidae. Journal de Conchyliologie, vol. 61, pp. 65—112.
Paris.
Brann, D. C., and Kent, L. S.
1960. Catalogue of the type and figured specimens in the Pa-
leontological Research Institution. Bulletins of American
Paleontology, vol. 40, no. 184, 996 pp., 1 pl.
Bratcher, T. and Cernohorsky, W. O. :
1987. Living Terebras of the World. Melbourne. 240 pp., 68 pls.
Bretsky, S. S.
1976. Evolution and classification of the Lucinidae (Mollusca;
Bivalvia). Palaeontographica Americana, vol. 8, no. 56,
337 pp., 16 pls.
Brocchi, G. B.
1814. Conchiologia Fossile Subapennina con Osservazioni Geo-
logiche sugli Appennini e sul suolo adjacente con travole.
Milan. vol. 1: General discussion, 240 pp.; vol. 2: Dis-
cussion of fossils, pp. 241-712, 16 pls.
Broderip, W. J. and Sowerby, G. B. II.
1829. Observations on new or interesting Mollusca contained
for the most part in the Museum of the Zoological Soci-
ety. Zoological Journal, vol. 4, pp. 359-379, | pl.
Bronn, H. E.
1831. Ergebnisse meiner naturhistorischGconomischen Reisen
durch die Schweitz, Italien und Siidfrankreich in den Jah-
ren 1824-27. 2 vols., Heidelberg and Leipzig. 832 + 32
pp., 12 illust.
1835-1838 Lethaea geonostica oder Abbildung und Beschrei-
bung der fiir die Gebirgsformationen bezeichnendsten
Versteinerungen. Stuttgart. Bd. 1, pp. 1-768 (1835-1837);
Bd. 2, pp. 769-1346, 48 pls. (1838).
1849. Handbuch der Geschichte der Natur. vol. 3, pt. 3: Index
Palaeontologicus, Stuttgart. 976 pp.
1862. Dr. H. G. Bronn’s Klassen und Ordnungen des Thier-
Reichs. Bd. 3, Abth. 1. Kopflose Weichthiere (Malacozoa
Acephala). pp. 1-518, pls. 1-44; Abth. 2. Kopftragende
Weichthiere (Malacozoa Cephalopora), pp. 521—1500, pls.
45-136.
Brown, A. P., and Pilsbry, H. A.
1911. Fauna of the Gatun Formation, Isthmus of Panama. Pro-
ceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila-
delphia, vol. 63, pp. 336-373, pls. 22-29, 3 figs.
Brown, T.
1827. Illustrations of the conchology of Great Britain and Ire-
land. First edition. Edinburgh and London. pp. i—viii, 52
pls., with interleaved text of fly-leaves.
Bruguiere, J. G.
1789-1816. Encyclopédie methodique ou par ordre de matiéres,
Histoire naturelle des Vers, de Mollusques. Pls. 391—488
by Lamarck [ed.]. pp. 1-344 (1789); Atlas pls. 1-189
(1791); pp. 345-758 (1792); pp. 190-286 (1797); pp. 287—
390 (1798); pp. 391-488 (1816).
Bush, K.
1897. Revision of the marine gastropods referred to Cyclostre-
ma, Adeorbis, Vitrinella, and related genera with descrip-
tions of some new genera and species belonging to the
Atlantic fauna of America. Transactions of the Connecti-
cut Academy of Arts and Sciences, vol. 10, pp. 94—144.
Call, R. E.
1891. The Geology of Crowley’s Ridge. Geological Survey Ar-
kansas, Annual Report, vol. 2, 223 pp., 8 pls.
Carpenter, P. P.
1857. Catalogue of the Collection of Mazatlan Shells in the British
Museum collected by Frederick Reigen. 552 pp. London.
Casey, T. L.
1903. Notes on the Conrad collection of Vicksburg fossils, with
descriptions of new species. Proceedings of the Academy
of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, vol. 55, pp. 261—283.
1904. Notes on the Pleurotomidae with descriptions of some
new genera and species. Transactions of the St. Louis
Academy of Sciences, vol. 14, no. 5, pp. 123-170.
Cernohorsky, W. O.
1970. Systematics of the Families Mitridae and Volumitridae
(Mollusca. Gastropoda). Bulletin of the Auckland Institute
and Museum, no. 8., 1x + 190 pp., 18 pls.
1972. Marine shells of the Pacific. vol. 2,411 pp., 68 pls. Pacific
Publications, Sydney.
Chavyan, A.
1969. Systematic descriptions. in Treatise on Invertebrate Pale-
ontology. R. C. Moore, ed., pt. N, vol. 2 of 3, Mollusca
6, Bivalvia.
Chemnitz, J. H.
1784. in Martini, F. H. W., Neues systematisches Conchylien-
Cabinet [Bd. 1—3] geordnet und beschrieben von F. H. W.
martini (fortgesetzt [Bd. 4—11] durch J. H. Chemnitz, [Bd.
12] G. H. Schubert .... A. Wagner, &c. 12 Bd.
Children, J. G.
1823. Lamarck’s Genera of Shells, translated from the French.
Quarterly Journal of Literature, Science and the Arts, vol.
16, pp. 49-79, pls. S—6.
Chistikoy, S. D.
1975. Some problems in scaphopod taxonomy. in Molluscs,
their systematic, evolution and significance in nature. I.M.
Likharev, ed., pp. 18-21. Academy of Science, Leningrad
(In Russian).
Clark, W. B. and Martin, G. C.
1901. The Eocene Deposits of Maryland. Geological Survey
Maryland, pp. 1-331, pls. 1-54.
BULLETIN 352
Clark, W.
1851.
On the Classification of the British Marine Testaceous
Mollusca. Annals and Magazine of Natural History, vol.
7, pp. 469-481.
Collins, E. W.
1980.
The Reklaw formation of East Texas. in Perkins, B. F and
Hobday, D. K. eds., Middle Eocene coastal plain and
nearshore deposits of East Texas, a field guide to the
Queen City Formation and related papers. SEPM, Gulf
Coast, Guidebook, pp. 67—70.
Conrad, T. A.
1831.
1832-1835.
1834.
1845.
1847.
1848.
1853a.
1853b.
1856.
Descriptions of fifteen new species of recent and three of
fossil shells, chiefly from the coast of the United States.
Journal of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadel-
phia, vol. 6, pp. 256-268, pl. 11.
Fossil shells of the Tertiary formations of North
America, illustrated by figures drawn on stone by T. A.
Conrad. vol. 1, no. 1, pp. i-viii, 9-20 (1832a); vol. 1 no.
2, pp. 21—28, pls. 7-14 (1832b); vol. 1, no. 3, pp. 29-38
(1833a); vol. 1, no. 4, pp. 39-46 (1833b); vol. 1, Nos. 3—
4, pp. 29-56, pls. 15-18 (1835).
On some new fossils and recent shells of the United
States. American Journal of Science, Ist. ser., vol. 23, no.
2, art. 17, pp. 339-346.
Appendix: Catalogue of the fossil shells of the Tertiary
formation of the United States by Timothy A. Conrad. pp.
1-8. in Morton, S. G., Synopsis of the organic remains
of the Cretaceous group of the United States. pp. 1-84,
19 pls. Philadelphia.
Descriptions of the eight new fossil shells of the United
States. Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences
of Philadelphia, vol. 2, no. 6, pp. 173-175.
Observations on the Eocene formation, and description of
one hundred and five new fossils of that period from the
vicinity of Vicksburg, Mississippi; with an appendix: (De-
scriptions of new Eocene fossils [from South Carolina] in
the cabinet of Lardner Vanuxem). Proceedings of the
Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, vol. 3, pp.
280-296. Appendix, pp. 297-299.
Observations on the Eocene formations, and descriptions
of one hundred and five new fossils from that period, from
the vicinity of Vicksburg, Mississippi; with an appendix.
Journal of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadel-
phia, 2nd. ser., vol. 1, pp. 111-134, pls. 11-14.
Notes on shells. Proceedings of the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia, vol. 6, pp. 320-321.
Synopsis of the genera Cassidula Humph. and of a pro-
posed new genus Athleta. Preceedings of the Academy of
Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. 1853, vol. 6, pp. 448—
449,
in Wailes, B. L. C., Report on the agriculture and Ge-
ology of Mississippi .. . Jackson, Mississippi, 371 pp., 17
pls. Fossils of the Vicksburg Eocene beds. Described by
T. A. Conrad, pp. 287: Fossil Testacea of the Tertiary
green-sand and marl-bed of Jackson, Miss. Determined
and named by T. A. Conrad, 289 pp., pls. 14-17.
Descriptions of fossil shells from the Eocene and Miocene
formations of California. Report of explorations and sur-
veys to ascertain a route for a railroad from the Missis-
sippi River to the Pacific Ocean. Pacific Railroad Report,
vol. 5, pp. 320-329, pls. 2-9.
Observations of the Eocene deposits of Jackson, Missis-
sippi, with descriptions of thirty-four new species of shells
1860.
1865a.
1865b.
1865c.
1865d.
1866a.
1866b.
1867.
1872.
and corals. Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sci-
ences of Philadelphia, 1855, vol. 7, pp. 257-263.
Descriptions of some new species of Cretaceous and Eo-
cene fossils of Mississippi and Alabama. Journal of the
Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, 2nd. ser.,
vol. 4, pt. 3, pp. 275-289, pls. 46-47.
Catalogue of the Eocene and Oligocene Testacea of the
United States. American Journal of Conchology, vol. 1,
no. 1, pp. 1-35, corrections pp. 190+(2).
Descriptions of new Eocene shells from Enterprise Mis-
sissippi. American Journal of Conchology, vol. 1, no. 2,
pp. 137-141, pls. 10-11.
Descriptions of new Eocene shells, and references with
figures to published species. American Journal of Con-
chology, vol. 1, no. 3, pp. 210-212, pls. 20-21 in part.
Descriptions of five new species of older Eocene shells
from Shark River, Monmouth Co., N.J. American Journal
of Conchology, vol. 1, no. 3, pp. 213-215, pls. 20-21 in
part.
Check list of invertebrate fossils of North America. Eo-
cene and Oligocene. Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collec-
tions, vol. 7, no. 200, pp. 1—41.
Further observations of Mr. Gabb’s Paleontology of Cal-
ifornia. American Journal of Conchology, vol. 2, no. 2,
pp. 97—100.
Descriptions of new Miocene shells. American Journal of
Conchology, vol. 3, no. 2, pp. 186-187.
Descriptions and illustrations of genera of shells. Pro-
ceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila-
delphia, vol. 24, pp. 50-55, pls. 1-2.
Cooper, J. G.
1894.
1896.
Catalogue of Californian fossils. Parts 2—5. California
State Mining Bureau, Bulletin, vol. 4, 65 pp., 6 pls.
On some new Cretaceous and (Eocene?) Mollusca of Cal-
ifornia. Proceedings of the California Academy of (Nat-
ural) Sciences, ser. 2, vol. 6, no. 24, pp. 330-337, pls.
47-48.
Cossmann, A. E. M.
1887-1913.
Catalogue illustré des coquilles fossiles de ? éocene
des Environs de Paris. Annales de la Société Royale Ma-
lacologique de Belgique. Pelecypodes. Tom. 22, ser. 4,
tom. 3, pp. 3-214, pls. 1-8 (1887); Scaphopodes et Gas-
teropodes. Tom. 23, ser. 4, tom. 3, pp. 3-324, pls. 1-12
(1888); Scaphopodes et Gasteropodes. Tom. 24, ser. 4,
tom. 4, pp. 3-381, pls. 1-12 (1889); Appendix no. 1, tom.
28, pp. 1-18, text figs (1893a); Appendix no. 2, tom. 31,
pp. 3-94, pls. 1-3 (1896a); Appendix no. 3, tom. 36, pp.
9-110, pls. 2-7 (1901a—1902); Appendix no. 4, tom. 41,
pp. 186-286, pls. 6-10 (1906a); Appendix no. 5, tom. 49,
pp. 19-238, pls. 1-8 (1913).
1893b. Notes complémentaires sur la faune éocénique de |’ Al-
abama. Annales de Géologie et de Paléontologie. Paler-
mo, Turin. Livr. 12, 51 pp., 2 pls.
1895-1925. Essais de Paléoconchologie comparée. Paris, pri-
vate, 13 livraisons. Livr. 1, 159 pp., 7 pls. (1895); Livr.
2, 179 pp., 8 pls. (1896b); Livr. 3, 201 pp. 8 pls. (1899);
Livr. 4, 293 pp., 10 pls. (1901b); Livr. 5, 215 pp., 9 pls.
(1903); Livr. 6, 151 pp., 9 pls. (1904); Livr. 7, 261 pp.,
14 pls. (1906b); Livr. 8, 248 pp., 4 pls. (1909); Livr. 9,
215 pp., 10 pls. (1912); Livr. 10, 292 pp., 12 pls. (1916);
Livr. 11, 388 pp., 11 pls. (1918); Livr. 12, 549 pp., 6 pls.
(1921); Livr. 13, 345 pp., 11 pls. (1925).
Cossmann, A. E. M., and Lambert, J.
1884.
Etude Paléontologique et Stratigraphique sur le Terrain
oligocéne marin aux environs d’Estampes. Mémoires de
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE D7,
la Société Géologique de France, Ser. 3, vol. 3, no. 1, pp.
1-187, pls. 1-6.
Cossmann, A. E. M. and Martin, K.
1914. in Martin, K., Die Fauna des Oberoligocans von Nang-
gulan auf Java. Sammlung des Geologischen Reichs-
mueums in Leiden.
Peyrot, A.
1932. in Cossmann, M., and Peyrot, A. 1909-1935. Conchol-
ogie néogénique de |’ Aquitaine. Actes de la Société Lin-
néenne de Bordeaux, vol. 84, fasc. 1, pp. 5-128, pls. 7—
10.
Cossmann, A. E. M., and Pissarro, G.
1910-1913. Iconographie complete des Coquilles Fossiles de
Eocene des Environs de Paris. Tome 2, pp. 1—20, pls.
1-SS.
Costa, E. M. da
1776. Elements of Conchology or, an introduction to the knowl-
edge of shells. London. 318 pp., 7 pls.
1778. Historia naturalis testaceorum Britanniae or the British
Conchology containing the descriptions and other partic-
ulars of the Natural History of shells of Great Britain and
Ireland. 254 pp., 17 pls., index.
Cotton, B. C.
1959. South Australian Mollusca. Archeogastropoda. Handbook
of the Flora and Fauna of South Australia, W. L. Hawkes,
Adelaide. pp. 1—449, 215 figs.
Cotton, B. C. and Woods, N. H.
1935. The correlation of recent and fossil Turritellidae of
Southern Australia. Records of the South Australian Mu-
seum, vol. 5, pp. 369-387, 9 figs.
Couthouy, J. P.
1839. Monograph on the family Osteodesmacea. Boston Journal
of Natural History, vol. 2, no. 2, pp. 129-189, | pl.
Cox, L. R.
1930. The fossil fauna of the Samana Range and some neigh-
bouring areas. Pt. 8: The Mollusca of the Haingu Shales.
Memoirs Geological Survey India, Paleontographica In-
dica, n.s., vol. 15, pp. 129-222, pls. 17-22.
1931. Sycostoma, a renamed genus of lower Tertiary gastropoda.
Proceedings of the Malacological Society of London, vol.
19, pp. 291.
Systematic descriptions. in Treatise on Invertebrate Pale-
ontology. R. C. Moore ed., pt. I, Mollusca 1, Mollusca-
General Features Scaphopoda Amphineura Monoplaco-
phora Gastropoda-General Features Archeogastropoda
and some (mainly Paleozoic) Caenogastropoda and Opis-
thobranchia.
Cox, L. R., and Knight, J. B.
1960. Systematic descriptions. in Treatise on Invertebrate Pale-
ontology. R. C. Moore ed., pt. I, Mollusca 1, Mollusca-
General Features Scaphopoda Amphineura Monoplaco-
phora Gastropoda-General Features Archeogastropoda
and some (mainly Paleozoic) Caenogastropoda and Opis-
thobranchia..
Cristofori, J., and Jan, G.
1960.
1832. Catalogus in IV sectiones divisus rerum naturalium in mu-
seo extantium Josephi de Cristofori et Georgii Jan. Mil-
ano. Sect. 2, part 1, 16 pp.
Curry, D.
1965. The English Paleogene pteropods. Proceedings of the
Malacological Society of London, vol. 36, pp. 357-371,
1 pl.
1981. Pteropods Eocénes de la Tuilerie de Gan (Pyrénees-At-
lantiques) et de quelques autres Localités du SW de la
France. Cahiers de Micropaléontologie, vol. 4, pp. 35—44,
1 pl.
Cuvier, G.
1797.
Tableau élémentaire de I’histoire naturelle des Animaux.
Paris. pp. i-xvi, 1-710, 14 pls.
Dall, W. H.
1881.
1886.
1889a.
1889b.
1889c.
1890-1903.
1896a.
1896b.
1899.
Reports on the results of dredging under the supervision
of Alexander Agassiz, in the Gulf of Mexico (1877-78)
and the Caribbean Sea (1879-80) by the U.S. Survey
Steamer “Blake’’, Lieut. Commander C.P. Sigsbee,
U.S.N. and Commander J. R. Bartlett U.S.N., command-
ing. Preliminary report on the Mollusca. Bulletin of the
Museum of Comparative Zoology, Harvard College, vol.
9, no. 2, pp. 33-144.
Reports on the results of dredging under the supervision
of Alexander Agassiz, in the Gulf of Mexico (1877-78)
and the Caribbean Sea (1879-80) by the U.S. Survey
Steamer “‘Blake’’, Lieut. Commander C.P. Sigsbee,
U.S.N. and Commander J. R. Bartlett U.S.N., command-
ing. XXX. Report on the Mollusca. Part 1, Brachiopoda
and Pelecypoda. Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative
Zoology, Harvard College, vol. 12, no. 6, pp. 171-318,
pls. 1-9.
On the hinge of Pelecypods and its development with an
attempt towards a better subdivision of the group. Amer-
ican Journal of Science, vol. 38, no. 3, pp. 445-462.
Reports on the results of dredging under the supervision
of Alexander Agassiz, in the Gulf of Mexico (1877-78)
and the Caribbean Sea (1879-80) by the U.S. Survey
Steamer “‘Blake’’, Lieut. Commander C.P. Sigsbee,
U.S.N. and Commander J. R. Bartlett U.S.N., command-
ing. XXIX. Report on the Mollusca.. Part Il: Gastropoda
and Scaphopoda. Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative
Zoology, Harvard College, vol. 18, pp. 1-492, 13 pls.
A preliminary catalogue of the shell-bearing marine mol-
lusks and brachiopods of the southeastern coast of the
United States, with illustrations of many of the species.
Bulletin of the United States National Museum, no. 37,
pp. 1-232, pls. 1-95.
Contributions to the Tertiary fauna of Florida, with
especial reference to the Miocene Silex-beds of Tampa
and the Pliocene beds of the Caloosahatchie River. Trans.
Transactions of the Wagner Free Institute of Science of
Philadelphia, vol. 3. Part 1: Pulmonata, opistobranchiate
and orthodont gastropods. pp. 1—200, pls. 1-12 (1890);
Part 2: Streptodont and other gastropods. pp. 201-473,
pls. 13-22 (1892); Part 3: A new classification of the pe-
lecypoda. pp. 475-570 (1895); Part 4: I. Prionodesmacea:
Nucula to Julia. Il. Teleodesmacea: Teredo to Ervillia. pp.
571-948, pls. 23-36 (1898); Part 5: Teleodesmacea con-
cluded. pp. 949-1217, pls. 37—47 (1900), Part 6: Con-
cluding part. pp. 1219-1645, pls. 48—60 (1903).
Diagnosis of new Tertiary fossils from the southern Unit-
ed States. Proceedings of the United States National Mu-
seum, vol. 18, no. 1035, pp. 21—46.
Descriptions of Tertiary Fossils from the Antillean Re-
gion. Proceedings of the United States National Museum,
vol. 19, no. 1110, pp. 303-331, pls. 27—30.
Synopsis of the Recent and Tertiary Leptonacea of North
America and the West Indies. Proceedings of the United
States National Museum, vol. 21, no. 1177, pp. 871-897,
pls. 87-88.
in Dall, W. H., and Bartsch, P., The Pyramidellid Mol-
128 BULLETIN 352
lusks of the Oregonian Faunal Area. United States Na-
tional Museum Proceedings, vol. 33, no. 1574.
1909a. Report on a collection of shells from Peru, with a sum-
mary of the littoral marine Mollusca of the Peruvian zoo-
logical province. Proceedings of the United States Na-
tional Museum, vol. 37, no. 1704, pp. 147-294, pls. 20—
28.
1909b. Contributions to the Tertiary paleontology of the Pacific
coast. I. The Miocene of Astoria and Coos Bay, Oregon.
United States Geological Survey Professional Paper 59,
148 pp., 23 pls. Appendices 1—13, pp. 149-216, index pp.
263-278.
1915. A monograph of the molluscan fauna of the Orthaulax
pugnax zone of the Oligocene of Tampa, Florida. Bulletin
of the United States National Museum, no. 90, 173 pp.,
26 pls.
1919. Descriptions of new species of mollusks of the family
Turritidae from the west coast of America and adjacent
regions. Proceedings of the United States National Mu-
seum, vol. 56, no. 2288, pp. 1-86, pls. 1-24.
1924. Notes on molluscan nomenclature. Proceedings of the Bi-
ological Society of Washington, vol. 37, pp. 87-90.
Dall, W. H., and Bartsch, P.
1903. Pyramidellidae and stratigraphy of the marine Pliocene
and Pleistocene of San Pedro, California. Memoirs of the
California Academy of Sciences, vol. 3, pp. 269-285, pls.
1—2, pl. 4, fig. 14.
1904. Synopsis of the genera, subgenera and sections of the
family Pyramidellidae. Proceedings of the Biological So-
ciety of Washington, vol. 17, pp. 1-16.
1907. The Pyramidellid Mollusks of the Oregonian Faunal Area.
United States National Museum Proceedings, vol. 33, no.
1574, pp. 491-534, pls. 44—48.
1909. A Monograph of the West American Pyramidellid Mol-
lusks. Bulletin of the United States National Museum 68,
pp.1—258, pls. 1—30.
Dana, J. D.
1895. Manual of Geology. Boston. 4th. ed., 1087 pp., illust.,
maps, text figs.
Darte, N. H., Stephenson, L. W., Gardner, J. A.
1932. Geologic map of Texas. (preliminary edition). U.S. Geo-
logical Survey, Washington, DC.
Davis, K. E.
1961. The foraminiferal and lithologic characteristics of the
Reklaw formation of Leon, Robertson and Milam Coun-
ties, Texas. Unpublished Master’s thesis, Texas A & M
University, College Station, Texas, 97 pp., 23 figs.
Deshayes, G. -P.
1824a-1832a. Descriptions des Cogquilles fossiles des environs
de Paris. Tome I. Conchiféres. pp. 1-80 (1824a); pp. 81—
170 (1825a); pp. 171-238 (1829); pp. 239-322 (1830);
pp. 323-392 (1832a);
1833a. Mollusques par M. Deshayes. in Bory de Saint Vincent,
J. B. G. M, Expedition Scientifique de Morée. vol. 3, pt.
1 and Atlas, sect. 1, pp. 209.
1824b—-1835. Descriptions des Coquilles fossiles des environs de
Paris. Tome II. Gastropodes. pp. 1-80 (1824b); pp. 81-
146 (1825b); pp. 147-290 (1832b); pp. 291-426 (1833b);
pp. 427-498 (1834a); pp. 499-780 (1835a).
1856-1866. Descriptions des Animaux sans vertébres décou-
verts dans le bassin de Paris pour servir de supplément a
la description des coquilles Fossiles des environs de Paris,
comprenent une revue générale de toutes les espéces ac-
tuellement connues. Paris, 3 vol. text, 2 vol. atlas. vol. 1.
Text: pp. 1-80; atlas: pls. 1-10 (1856); vol. 1. Text: pp.
81-392; atlas: pls. 11-49 (1857); vol. 1. Text: pp. 393—
704; atlas: pls. 50-87 (1858); vol. 1. Text: pp. 705-912
(1860); vol. 2. Text: pp. 1-432; atlas: pls. 1-26 (1861);
vol. 2. Text: pp. 433-640; atlas: pls. 27-39 (1862); vol.
2. Text: pp. 641-920; atlas: pls. 40-62 (1863); vol. 2.
Text: pp. 921-968 (1864); vol. 3. Text: pp. 1-658; atlas
vol. 2: pls. 63-107 (1865); vol. 3. Text: Index (1866).
Deussen, A.
1924. Geology of the Coastal Plain of Texas west of the Brazos
River. United States Geological Survey, Professional Pa-
per 126-D, 145 pp., 35 pls.
Dickerson, R.E.
1913. Fauna of the Eocene at Marysville Buttes, California.
University of California Publications in Geological Sci-
ences, Bulletin, vol. 7, no. 12, pp. 257-298, pls. 11-14.
Dillwyn, L. W.
1817. A descriptive catalog of Recent shells, arranged according
to the Linnean method; with particular attention to the
synonymy. vol. 1, pp. i-x1i, 1-580; vol. 2, pp. 581-1092.
Dockery, D. T. II.
1977. Mollusca of the Moodys Branch Formation, Mississippi.
Mississippi Geological Survey, Bulletin 120, 212 pp., 27
pls.
1980. The invertebrate macropaleontology of Clarke County,
Mississippi. Mississippi Geological Survey, Bulletin 122,
387 pp., 82 pls., 36 figs.
1984. in MacNeil, F. S. and Dockery, D. T. II., Lower Oli-
gocene Gastropoda, Scaphopoda, and Cephalopoda of the
Vicksburg Group of Mississippi. Mississippi Geological
Survey, Bulletin 124, pp. 1-415, 72 pls.
1993. The Streptoneuran gastropods, exclusive of the Stenog-
lossa, of the Coffee Sand (Campanian) of northeastern
Mississippi. Mississippi Geological Survey, Bulletin 129,
pp. 1-190, 42 pls.
Dumble, E. T.
1890. First Annual Report of the Geological Survey of Texas,
1889. pp. 1-410, figs. map. Austin.
1892. Report on the Brown Coal and Lignite of Texas. Geolog-
ical Survey of Texas. pp. 1—243, figs., map. Austin.
Dumeril, A. M. C.
1806. Zoologie analytique, ou méthode naturelle de classifica-
tion des Animaux. Paris, pp. 1-344.
Dunker, W.
1853. Neue Mytilacean. Zeitschrift ftir Malakozodlogie, vol. 10,
pp. 82-92.
Dunlap, J. B. jr.
1955. The Geology of the area bordering the Brazos river in
southeastern Milam and northeastern Burleson Counties,
Texas. Unpublished Master’s thesis, Texas A&M Univer-
sity, College Station, Texas, 91 pp., 32 figs.
Eames, F. E.
1952. A contribution to the study of the Eocene in Western Pa-
kistan and Western India. C: The description of the Sca-
phopoda and Gastropoda from standard sections in the
Rakhi Nala and Zinda Pir areas of the Western Punjab
and in the Kohat District. Philosophical Transactions of
the Royal Sociery of London, Ser. B. Biological Sciences,
no. 631, vol. 236, pp. 1-168, pls. 1-6.
Elisor, A. C.
1929. Correlation of the Claiborne of east Texas with the Claiborne
of Louisiana. Bulletin of the American Association of Petro-
leum Geologists, no. 13, pp. 1335-1346, 2 figs., | pl.
Edwards, F. E.
1856. A Monograph of the Eocene Mollusca, or descriptions of
EOcENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 129
shells from the older Tertiaries of England. Part tii. Pros-
obranchia. Monograph of the Palaeontographical Society,
vol. 1, pp. 181-240, pls. 24-26.
1866. in Lowry, J. W., Etheridge, R. E., and Edwards, F. E.
Chart of the characteristic British Tertiary fossils, strati-
graphically arranged.
Edwards, H. M.
1845-1849. Recherches anatomiques et zoologiques faites pen-
dant un voyage sur les c6tes de la Scilie et sur divers du
littoral de la France, par Mm. H. M. Edwards ... A. de
Quatrefages .. . et E. Blanchard, &c. 3 pts. Tome 9: Note
sur la classification naturelle des Mollusques Gastéropo-
des. Annales des Sciences Naturelles, Paris. Zoologie. Ser.
3, vol. 9, pp. 102-112. (1848).
Emerson, W. K.
1962. A classification of the Scaphopod molluscs. Journal of
Paleontology, vol. 36, no. 3, pp. 461—482, pls. 76-80,
figs, 1—2.
English, W. A.
1914. The Fernando Group near Newhall, California. University
of California Publications in Geological Sciences, vol. 8,
no. 8, pp. 203-218, pl. 23.
Erickson, R. J.
1982. The gastropod fauna of the Wheelock Member, Cook
Mountain formation (Middle Eocene) of East Texas. Un-
published Master’s thesis. Louisiana State University, Bat-
on Rouge, Louisiana, 274 pp., 11 pls.
Feérussac, A. E. J. P. J. F. d’A. de
1822. Tableaux systematiques des animaux mollusques. pp. i—
xlviii, 1-114 pp. Paris and London.
Férussac, A. E. J. P. J. F. d’A. de, and d’Orbigny, A. D.
1839. Histoire naturelle générale et particuli¢ére des Céphalo-
podes Acétabuliféres vivants et fossils Ouvrage
commence par MM. de Férussac et A. d’Orbigny et con-
tinué par A. d’Orbigny. pp. i-lvi, 1-361; Atlas: 96 pp,
144 pls. Paris
Férrusac, J. B. L. d’A. de
1819-1832. Histoire naturelle générale et particulére des Moll-
usques terrestres et fluuviatiles ... Oeuvre posthume de
M. le Baron J. B. L. d’ Audebard de Férussac . . .. continué
mis en ordre, et publié. vol. 1, Nos. 1-28, 128 pp., 162
pls..
Finlay, H. J., and Marwick, J.
1937. The Wangoloan and associated molluscan faunas of Kai-
tangata Green Island subdivision. New Zealand Geologi-
cal Survey, Paleontological Bulletin 15, pp. 1—140, pls.
1-17.
Fischer, P. H.
1880-1887. Manuel de Conchyliologie et des Paléontologie
Conchyiologique ou Histoire Naturelle des Mollusques
vivantes et Fossiles. Paris. Part 1, pp. 1-112 (1880); parts
2-3, pp. 113-304 (1881); part 4, pp. 305-416, pls. 1-3
(1882); parts 5—6, pp. 417-608, pl. 13 (1883); part 7, pp.
609-688, pls. 4-7, 12 (1884); parts 8-9, pp. 689-896,
pls. 8-11, 14 (1885); part 10, pp. 897-1008, pl. 16 (1886);
part 11, pp. 1009-1369, pl. 15, 17—12 (1887).
Fisher, W. L.
1961. Stratigraphic names in the Midway and Wicox Groups of
the Gulf Coastal Plain. University of Texas Publications,
Report of Investigations, no. 44, pp. 263-295.
Fisher, W. L. Rodda, P. U., and Dietrich, J. W.
1964. The evolution of Athleta petrosa stock (Eocene, Gastrop-
oda) of Texas. University of Texas Publications, no. 6413,
117 pp., 11 pls.
Fleming, J.
1817. New Edinburgh Encyclopaedia [D. Brewster, Ed.]. (1813-—
1831) Vols. 1-18 text, vols. 19-20 pls. Philadelphia. Con-
chology. in vol. 7, pt. 12, pp. 55-107, pls. 203-206
1822. The Philosophy of Zoology: or a general view of the
structure, functions, and classifications of Animals. Paris
and London. vol. 1, pp. 1—432, 5 pls.; vol. 2, pp. 1-618.
1828. A history of British animals, exhibiting the descriptive
characters and systematical arrangement of the genera and
species of quadrupeds, birds, reptiles, fishes and Radiata
of the United Kingdom. Edinburgh. pp. 1—S4.
Forbes, E.
1838. Malacologie Monensis. A catalogue of the Mollusca in-
habiting the Isle of Man and the neighboring sea. Edin-
burgh. 63 pp., 3 pl.
Forbes, I., and Hanley, S. C.
1848-1853. A history of British Mollusca and their shells. Lon-
don. vol. 1, pp. i-Ixxx, 1-477, pls. A-O, 1-34 (1848);
vol. 2, pp. i—viii, 1-557, pls. P-PU, AA-NN, 35-74, 77-79
(1850); vol. 3, pp.i-x, 1-616, pls. EE-ZZ, 75-76, 80-94D
(1851); vol. 4, pp. i-vi, 1-301, pls. W, MM, AAA-SSS,
94-133 (1853).
Forney, P.L., and Nitecki, M.
1976. The Type Fossil Molluscs (Hydrolitha, Polyplacophora,
Scaphopoda, Monoplacophora and Gastropoda) in the
Field Museum. Fieldiana Geology, vol. 36, pp. 1-240.
Furon, R., and Soyer, R.
1947. Catalogue des Fossiles Tertiaires du Bassin de Paris.
Guides Techniques du Naturaliste. Paris. vol. 6, pp. 1—
240, pls. 1-32.
Gabb, W. M.
1860. Descriptions of new species of American Tertiary and
Cretaceous fossils. Journal of the Academy of Natural
Sciences of Philadelphia, 2nd. ser., vol. 4, pt. 4, pp. 375—
406, pls. 67—69.
1864. Description of the Cretaceous fossils. California Geological
Survey, Paleontology, vol. 1, sect. 4, pp. 57-243, pls. 9-32.
1869. Cretaceous and Tertiary fossils. California Geological
Survey, Paleontology, vol. 2, 299 pp., 36 pls.
Gardner, J.
1923. New species of Mollusca from the Eocene deposits of
southwestern Texas. United States Geological Survey Pro-
fessional Paper 131-D, pp. 109-115, pls. 29-33.
1924. in Deussen, A, Geology of the Coastal Plain of Texas
west of the Brazos River. United States Geological Survey
Professional Paper 126.
1926. The nomenclature of the supraspecific groups of Corbula
in the lower Miocene of Florida. Nautilus, vol. 40, no. 2,
pp. 41-47.
1927. New species of Molluscs from the Eocene of Texas. Jour-
nal of the Washington Academy of Sciences, vol. 17, no.
14, pp. 362-383, figs. 1-44.
1932. in Darte, N. H., Stephenson, L. W., and Gardner, J.
A., Geologic map of Texas (preliminary edition). U.S.
Geological Survey, Washington, DC.
1933. The Midway group of Texas, including a chapter on the
coral fauna by Thomas Wayland Vaughan and Willis Par-
kinson Popenoe. University of Texas Bulletin, 3301, 403
pp., 28 pls., 4 text figs.
1939. Notes on fossils from the Eocene of the Gulf Province.
United States Geological Survey Professional Paper
193-B, pp. 17-44, pls. 1-8.
1943. Mollusca from the Miocene and lower Pliocene of Vir-
ginia and North Carolina Part I. Pelecypoda, United States
130 BULLETIN 352
Geological Survey Professional Paper 199-A, pp. 1-178,
pls. 1-23.
1945. Mollusca from the Tertiary formations of northeastern
Mexico. Geological Society of America Memoir 11, 332
pp., 28 pls., map, 6 tab., | fig.
1947. The Molluscan fauna of the Alum Bluff Group of Florida,
pt. 8, United States Geological Survey Professional Paper
142-H, pp. 493-656, pls. 52-62.
1951. Two new guide fossils from the Tallahatta formation of
the southeastern United States. Journal of the Washington
Academy of Sciences, vol. 41, no. 1, pp. 8-12.
1957. Little Stave Creek—A Paleoecologic Study. in Ladd, H.
S., ed., Treatise of Marine Ecology and Paleoecology. vol.
2: Paleoecology. Geological Society of America Memoir
67, pp. 573-S88.
Gardner, J., and Bowles, E. O.
1939. The Venericardia planicosta group in the Gulf Province.
United States Geological Survey Professional Paper
189-F pp. 141-215, pls. 33-46.
Gill, T.
1867. On the genus Fulgar and its allies. American Journal of
Conchology, vol. 3, pp. 141-152, 1 fig.
Givens, C. R. and Garvie, C. L.
1994. Strepsidura ficus (Gabb) of Harris (1895), Eocene, Texas:
Not Conspecific with Whitneya ficus Gabb (1864), Eo-
cene, California (Gastropoda, Volutidae). Journal of Pa-
leontology, vol. 68, no. 2, pp. 274-278, 10 figs.
Glibert, M.
1938. Faune Malacologique des Sables de Wemmel. II. Gastro-
podes, Scaphopodes, Céphalopodes. Institute Royale des
Sciences Naturelles de Belgique, Mémoire, no. 85, 190
pp.. 4 pls.
1962a. Les Archeogastropoda Fossiles du Cénozoique étranger
des Collections de L'Institute Royale des Sciences Natu-
relles de Belgique. Institute Royale des Sciences Naturel-
les de Belgique, Mémoire, 10th. ser., fasc. 68, 131 pp.
1962b. Les Mesogastropoda Fossiles du Cénozoique étranger
des Collections de L Institute Royale des Sciences Natu-
relles de Belgique. Institute Royale des Sciences Naturel-
les de Belgique, Mémoire, 10th. ser., fasc. 69, 305 pp.
Glibert, M, and Poel, L. van de
1965. Les Bivalvia Fossiles du Cénozoique étranger des Collec-
tions de L'Institute Royale des Sciences Naturelles de Bel-
gique. II. Pteroconchida, Colloconchida et Isofilbranchia.
Institute Royale des Sciences Naturelles de Belgique, Mé-
moire, 2nd. ser., fasc. 78, 105 pp.
Gmelin, J. F.
1791. Systema Naturae per Regia Tria Naturae. 13th. ed. Leip-
zig. pt. 1, pp. 1517-2224.
Golikov, A., and Starobogatovy, Y. I.
1975. Systematics of Prosobranch Gastropods. Pt. 7. Malaco-
logia, vol. 15, pp. 185-232.
Gould, A. A.
1841. Report on the invertebrata of Massachusetts comprising
the Mollusca, Crustacea, Annelida, and Radiata. Pt. 7: In-
vertebrata. Zoological and Botanical Survey of Massa-
chusetts, pp. i-ix, 1-370, 14 pls.
Grabau, A. W.
1904. Phylogeny of Fusus and its allies. Smithsonian Miscella-
neous Collections, vol. 44, no. 1417, 192 pp., 18 pls.
Granata, G.
1877. in Raymondo-Granata, G., Sul Cirropterum semilunare
Sars e del nuvo sottogenero Monophorus. vol. 3, 7 pp., |
pl.
Grant, U. S., and Gale, H. R.
1931. Catalogue of the marine Pliocene and Pleistocene Mol-
lusca of California and adjacent regions. Memoirs San
Diego Society of Natural History, vol. 1, 1036 pp., 32 pls.
Grateloup, J. P. S. de
1840-1847. Conchyliologie Fossile des terraines Tertiaires du
bassin de |’ Adour (Environs de Dax), Bordeaux. Tome 1:
Univalves, Atlas, xx + 12 pp., 48 pls.
Gray, J. E.
1824. Shells. in Sabine, E., Kirby, W., Gray, J. E., Konig, C.,
and Brown, R., A supplement to the appendix of Captain
Parry’s voyage for the discovery of a North-West Passage
in the years 1819-20. Containing an account of the sub-
jects of natural history. pp. 181—310, 5 pls. in Parry, W.
E., Journal of a voyage for the discovery of a North-West
Passage from the Atlantic to the Pacific ... 1819-20 &c.
1834. Alphabetical list of the figures of Mollusca in “Griffiths”
Cuvier, pp. 595-601, in Griffith, E., and Pidgeon, E..,
Mollusca and Radiata, in Griffith, E., The Animal King-
dom arranged by the Baron Cuvier with supplementary
additions to each order. London. pp. 601, 43 pls.
1840. Synopsis of the contents of the British Museum. 42nd.
ed., British Museum (London). 370 pp.
1842. Synopsis of the contents of the British Museum. 44th. ed.,
British Museum (London). 308 pp.
1847a. A list of the genera of Recent Mollusca, their synonyms
and types. Proceedings of the Zoological Society of Lon-
don, pt. 15, pp. 129-219.
1847b. On the classification of British Mollusca, by Dr. W.
Leach. Annals and Magazine of Natural History, vol. 20,
pp. 267-273.
1850. in Gray, M. E., 1850. Figures of Molluscous Animals
selected from various authors. vol. 4: Explanation of
plates and list of genera.
1853a. (Leach MS) Molluscorum Britanniae synopsis. A syn-
opsis of the Mollusca of Great Britain, arranged according
to their natural affinities and anatomical structure. [Edited
from the author’s proofs and MS by J. E. Gray.] London.
Text xli, 376 pp., 13 pls.
1853b. On the division of ctendobrancheous gasteropodous
Mollusca into larger groups and families. Annals and
Magazine of Natural History, ser. 2, vol. 11, pp. 124-133.
1857. The guide to the systematical distribution of Mollusca in
the British Museum. Pt. I]. Annals and Magazine of Nat-
ural History, ser. 2, vol 19.
Gray, M. E.
1850. Figures of Molluscous Animals selected from various au-
thors. vol. 4: Explanation of plates and list of Genera.
London. pp. 1—219.
Gregorio, A. de
1880. Fauna di San Giovanni Illarione (Parisiano) Monographia.
Parte Ia: Cefalopoda e Gastropodi. Palermo. Fasc. 1, pp.
i-xxvii, 1-106, 8 pls.
1884. Intorno ad alcure nuove cochliglie mioeniche da Sicilia.
Naturalista Siciliano, Giornale di Scienze Naturali, vol. 3,
no. 4, pp. 119-120.
1890. Monographie de la Faune éocénique de |’ Alabama et sur-
tout de celle de Claiborne de |’étage Parisien (Horizon a
Venericardia planicosta Lamk.). Annales de Géologique
et de Paléontologie. Palermo: Livr. 7, 8, 316 pp., 46 pls.
Griffith, E.
1834. in Griffith, E., and Pidgeon, E. The Animal Kingdom
arranged by the Baron Cuvier with supplementary addi-
tions to each order. London. 601 pp., 43 pls.
EoOcENE MOLLuSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 131
Guevara, E. H., and Garcia, R.
1972. Depositional Systems and Oil-Gas reservoirs in the Queen
City Formation (Eocene), Texas. Bureau of Economic Ge-
ology, Geological Circular 72—4, pp. 1—22.
Guilding, L.
1834. Observations on Naticinae and Dentalium, two genera of
Molluscous animals. Transactions of the Linnaean Society
of London (for 1831), vol. 17, pp. 29-36.
Haller, B.
1988. Die Morphologie der Prosobranchia. Morphologischer
Jahrbiicher, vol. 14, pp. 54-169.
Hanna, M. A.
1927. Expedition of the California Academy of Sciences to the
Gulf of California. Geology and Paleontology. (1921)
Proceedings of the California Academy of (Natural) Sci-
ences, vol. 16, ser. 4, no. 6, pp. 137-157, pl. 3.
Harasewych M. G., and Jensen, R. H.
1979. Review of the subgenus Prerynotus (Gastropoda: Muri-
cidae) in the western Atlantic. Nemouria, no. 22, pp. 1—
16, 19 text figs.
Hardenbol, J.
1994. Sequence stratigraphic calibration of Paleocene and Low-
er Eocene continental margin deposits in NW Europe and
the US Gulf Coast with the ocean chronostratigraphic rec-
ord. GFF (Geologiska Foereningen Foerhandlinger, Stock-
holm), vol. 116, pt. 1, pp. 49-51.
Harris, G. D.
1890. The genus Terebellum in the American Tertiaries. Amer-
ican Geologist, vol. 5, pp. 319.
1894. The Tertiary Geology of Southern Arkansas. Arkansas
Geological Survey, Annual Report for 1892, vol. 2, 207
pp.. 7 pls.
1895. New and otherwise interesting Tertiary Mollusca from
Texas. Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences
of Philadelphia, vol. 47, pp. 45-88, pls. 1-9.
1895a. in Dana, J. D., Manual of Geology. 4th. ed., Boston.
1087 pp.. .
1895b. Claiborne fossils. Bulletins of American Paleontology,
vol. 1, no. 1, 52 pp., pl. 1.
1896. The Midway stage. Bulletins of American Paleontology,
vol. 1, no. 4, 156 pp., 15 pls.
1897a. New and otherwise interesting Eocene Mollusca from the
Gulf States. Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences
of Philadelphia, vol. 48, pp. 470—482, pls. 18-23.
1897b. The Lignitic stage. Part I: Stratigraphy and Pelecypoda.
Bulletins of American Paleontology, vol. 2, no. 9, 102
pp.. 14 pls.
1899. The Lignitic stage. Part Il: Scaphopoda, Gastropoda, Pter-
opoda and Cephalopoda. Bulletins of American Paleon-
tology, vol. 3, no. 11, 128 pp., 12 pls.
1919. Pelecypoda of the St. Maurice and Claiborne stages. Bul-
letins of American Paleontology, vol. 6, no. 31, 268 pp.,
59 pls.
1920. The genera Lutetia and Alveinus. Palaeontographica
Americana, vol. 1, no. 2, pp. 3-14, pl. 17, text figs. 1-8.
1937. Turrid illustrations. Palaeontographica Americana, vol. 2,
no. 7, 122 pp., 14 pls.
1946. in Harris, G. D., and Palmer, K. V. W., 1946-1947.
The Mollusca of the Jackson Eocene of the Mississippi
Embayment (Sabine river to the Alabama river). Bulletins
of American Paleontology, vol. 30, no. 117.
Harris, G. D. and Palmer, K. V. W.
1946-1947. The Mollusca of the Jackson Eocene of the Missis-
sippi Embayment (Sabine river to the Alabama river).
Bulletins of American Paleontology, vol. 30, no. 117, 564
pp., 65 pls Part I. Bivalves and bibliography for parts I
and II. G. D. Harris, 206 pp., 25 pls. (1946); Part II. Uni-
valves and index. K. V. W. Palmer, pp. 207-563, pls. 26—
56, 62-64; pls. 57-61 by G. D. Harris (1947).
Harris, G. F.
1897. Catalogue of Tertiary Molluscs in the department of Ge-
ology. British Museum (Natural History). I. Australasian
Tertiary Mollusca. London. pp. i-xxvi, 1-404, pls. 1-8.
Harris, G. F., and Burrows, H. W.
1891. The Eocene and Oligocene beds of the Paris Basin. Lon-
don. pp i—vili, 1-129.
Harry, H. W.
1967. A Review of the Living Tectibranch Snails of the Genus
Volvulella, with Descriptions of a New Subgenus and
Species from Texas. Veliger, vol. 10, no. 2, pp. 133-147,
19 figs.
Haszprunar, G.
1988. On the origin and evolution of major gastropod groups,
with special reference to the Streptoneura. Journal of Mol-
luscan Studies, vol. 54, pp. 367—441.
Heaslip, W. G.
1968. Cenozoic evolution of the Alticostate Venericards in the
Gulf and East Coastal North America. Palaeontographica
Americana, vol. 6, no. 39, pp. 1-135 29 pls.
Hedley, C.
1902. Scientific results of the trawling expedition of H.M.C.S.
“Thetis”, Mollusca. Memoir 4, pt. 5, pp. 285-324.
1907. The Results of Deep-Sea Investigations in the Tasman
Sea. 3: Mollusca from Eighty Fathoms off Narrabeen,
Sydney, N.S.W. Records of the Australian Museum, vol.
6, no. 4, pp. 283-304, pls.54—S6.
1922. A revision of the Australian Turridae. Records of the Aus-
tralian Museum, vol. 13, pp. 213-359, pls. xli—Ivi.
Heilprin, A.
1879. On some new Eocene fossils from the Claiborne marine
formation of Alabama. Proceedings of the Academy of
Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, vol. 31, pp. 211-216,
pl. 13.
1881. On some new lower Eocene Mollusca from Clarke Co.,
Ala., with some points as to their stratigraphic positions
of the beds containing them. Proceedings of the Academy
of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. 1880, vol. 32, pp.
364-375, pl. 20.
1891. The Eocene Mollusca of the state of Texas. Proceedings
of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia.
1890, vol. 42, pp. 393-406.
Henderson, J. B.
1920. A monograph of the East American Scaphopod mollusks.
Bulletin of the United States National Museum, no. 111,
177 pp., 20 pls.
Hermanns, J.
1781. Erster Brief iiber einige Conchylien. Der Naturforscher.
Halle. vol. 16, pp. SO—-S6, Tab. 2.
Hermannsen, A. N.
1846-1852. Indicus generum malacozoorum primordia. vol. 1,
text: 637 pp. (1846-1847); vol. 2, text: 717 pp. (1847—
1849); supplement, 140 pp. (1852).
Hickman, C. S.
1976. Bathyl Gastropods of the family Turridae in the early Oli-
gocene Keasey Formation in Oregon, with a review of
some deep-water genera in the Paleocene of the Eastern
Pacific. Bulletins of American Paleontology, vol. 70, no.
292, pp. 1-119, 7 pls.
132 BULLETIN 352
Hinds, R. B.
1843. Description of new species of Neaera, from the collection
of Sir Edward Belcher, C. B. Proceedings of the Zoolog-
ical Society of London, pt. 11, pp. 75-79.
1845. The Zoology of the voyage of H.M.S. Sulphur under the
command of Captain Sir Edward Belcher, R.N., C.B.,
ER.G:S. etc. during the years 1836—42. vol. 2: Mollusca.
London. pp. i-iv, 1-72, 21 pls.
Hodgkinson, K. A.
1974. Stone City and Cook Mountain (Middle Eocene) Scapho-
pods from Southwest Texas. University of Kansas Pale-
ontological Contributions, pap. 70, 25 pp., 8 pls.
Hodgkinson, K. A., Garvie, C. L., and Bé, A. W. H.
1992. Eocene Euthecostomatous Pteropoda (Gastropoda) of the
Gulf and Eastern Coasts of North America. Bulletins of
American Paleontology, vol. 103, no. 341, pp.1—62, pls.
1-13.
Hodson, F.
1927. in Hodson, F., and Hodson, H. K. Some Venezuelan and
Caribbean Mollusks. Bulletins of American Paleontology,
vol. 13, no. 49, pp. 1-150, pls. 1-40.
Houbrick, R .S.
1977. Reevaluation and New Description of the Genus Bittium
(Cerithiidae).The Veliger, vol. 20, no. 2, pp. 101-106, 1
pl.
1980. Review of the Deep-Sea Genus Argyropeza (Gastropoda:
Prosobranchia: Cerithidae). Smithsonian Contributions to
Zoology, no. 321, pp. 1-30, 12 figs.
Hulings, N. C.
1955. An investigation of the benthic invertebrate fauna from
the shallow waters of the Texas coast. Unpublished M.A.
Thesis, Texas Christian University, Fort Worth. 87 pp., 12
pls.
Hussey, K. M.
1949. Louisiana Cane River Eocene Foraminifera. Journal of
Paleontology, vol. 23, no. 2, pp. 109-144.
1951. Two lower Claiborne index fossils. Cushman Foundation
for Foraminiferal Research Contribution, vol. 2, pt. 1, pp.
19-20.
Hyatt, A.
1894. Phylogeny of an acquired characteristic. Proceedings of
the American Philosophical Society, vol. 32, pp. 349—
647, pls. 1-14.
Imbrie, J. and Newell, N. D. [eds.]
1964. Approaches to Paleoecology. Wiley, New York. 432 pp.
Iredale, T.
1915. A commentary on Suter’s ‘Manual of New Zealand Mol-
lusca”’. Transactions and Proceedings of the New Zealand
Institute, vol. 47, pp. 417-497.
1916. On two editions of Dumeril’s Zoologie Analytique. Pro-
ceedings of the Malacological Society of London, vol. 12,
pp. 79-84.
1924. Results from Roy Bell’s molluscan collections. Proceed-
ings of the Linnean Society of New South Wales, vol. 49,
pp. 179-278, pls. 33-36.
1929. Mollusca from the continental shelf of Eastern Australia.
Records of the Australian Museum, vol. 17, pp.157—189,
pls. 38-41.
1930. More notes on the marine Mollusca of New South Wales.
Records of the Australian Museum, vol. 17, pp. 384—407,
pls. 62-65.
Jeffreys, J. G.
1870. Mediterranean Molluscs. Annals and Magazine of Natural
History, ser. 4, vol. 6, pp. 65-86, 457—458
1881. On the mollusca procured during the Lightning and Por-
cupine expeditions, 1868-70. Proceedings of the Zoolog-
ical Society of London, part 3, pp. 693-724.
1884. On the mollusca procured during the Lightning and Por-
cupine expeditions, 1868-70. Proceedings of the Zoolog-
ical Society of London. pp. 111-149, 341-372.
Jeletzki, J. A.
1966. Comparative morphology, phylogeny and classification of
fossil Coleodea. University of Kansas Paleontological
Contributions, Mollusca, art. 7, pp.1—162, 24 pls., 15 figs.
Johnson, C. W.
1899. New and interesting species in the “Isaac Lea Collection
of Eocene Mollusca”. Proceedings of the Academy of
Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, vol. 51, pp. 71-82, pls.
1-2.
Jousseaume, F. P.
1887. La famille des Cancellariidae. Le Naturaliste, ann. 9, 2nd.
ser., pp. 155-157, 163, 192-194, 213-214, 221-223.
Jukes-Brown, A. J.
1908. On the genera of Veneridae represented in the Cretaceous
and older Tertiary deposits. Proceedings of the Malaco-
logical Society of London, vol. 8, no. 3, pp. 148-177, 2
text figs., pl. 6.
Kabat, A. R.
1991. The classification of the Naticidae (Mollusca: Gastropo-
da): review and analysis of the supraspecific taxa. Bulletin
of the Museum of Comparative Zoology, vol. 152, no. 7,
pp. 417-449.
Keen, A. M.
1969. Systematic descriptions. in Treatise on Invertebrate Pale-
ontology. R. C. Moore, ed., pt. N, vol. 2 of 3, Mollusca
6, Bivalvia. pp. N491—N952.
1971. Sea Shells of Tropical West America. 2nd. ed., Stanford
University Press, Stanford, California. 1064 pp.
Keen, A. M. and Bentson, H.
1944. Check list of California Tertiary marine Mollusca. Geo-
logical Society of America, Special Paper no. 56, 280 pp.
Kerferstein, W.
1862-1866. in Bronn, H. G., Klassen und Ordnungen das-
Thierreichs. Band 3: Malacozoa. pp. 1—1500, figs.
Kiener, L. -C.
1834. Species générale et iconographie des Coquilles vivantes.
Mémoires du Muséum d Histoire Naturelle. Paris, livr. 1—
5, nouv. tome 3, 512 pp.
Knight, J. E., Hodgkinson, K. A., Knight S. A., Reid, T. G.,
Lindveit, G., Lindveit, F., and Offeman, I. D.
1977. Fossils & Locations of the Claiborne Group (Eocene) of
Texas. A Symposium Conducted at Brazosport Museum
of Natural Science. Texas Paleontology Series, pub. no.
1. Houston Gem and Mineral Society, 57 pp., 6 pls.
Knudsen, J.
1967. The deep-sea Bivalvia. Scientific Reports of the John
Murray Expedition, vol. 11, pp. 237-343.
Kobelt, W.
1876-1881. Illustriertes Conchylienbuch. vol. 1, pt. 1, pp. 1-48,
pls. 1-10 (1876); vol. 1, pt. 2, pp. 49-64 (1877); vol. 1,
pt. 3, pp. 65-88; pt. 4, pp. 89-104, pt. 5, pp. 105-144
(1878); vol. 2, pts. 6-8, pp. 145-254 (1879); vol. 2, pt.
9, pp. 265-312 (1880); vol. 2, pts. 10-11, pp. 313-391,
pls. 91-112 (1881).
1891. in Martini F. H. W., Systematisches Conchylien-Cabinet
von Martini und Chemnitz. Neu herausgegeben und ver-
vollstandigt von H. C. Kuster (nach dessen Tod fortgesetzt
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 13
von ... W. Kobelt und H. C. Weinkauff). 11 Bd. and Index.
Bd. 8, pt. 2: Die Gattung Arca L., pp. 1—30, pls. 1—49.
Koenen, A. von
1865. Die Fauna der unteroligocane Tertiarschichten von
Helmstadt bei Braunschweig. Zeitschrift der Deutschen
Geologischen Gesellschaft, vol. 17, pp. 459-534, 702—
706.
Korobkoy, I. A.
1954. Spravochnik i metodicheskoe Rudovodstvo po tretichnym
mollyuskam plastinchatozhabernye. [In Russian. Hand-
book on and systematic guide to the Tertiary Molluscs. ]}
Gosud. Nachno-tech. Isedov. Nefi. Gorno-toplivnoi lit-ry,
Leningradskoi Otdelenie, 444 pp., 96 pls.
Kuckenthal, W. and Krumbach, T.
1925. Handbuch der Zoologie, eine Naturgeschichte der Stam-
me des Tierreiches. Fiinfter Band. Soenogastres. Mollus-
ca. Echinodermata. pp. 1-275, 349 figs. Berlin and Leip-
zig.
Kummel, B.
1956. Post-Triassic nautiloid Genera. Bulletin of the Museum of
Comparative Zoology, Harvard College, vol. 114, no. 7,
pp. 324-494, 28 pls., 35 figs.
Kosuge, S.
1966. On the family Triphoridae of the late Mr. Hosoya’s shell
collection deposited in the Yokohama City Museum. Sci-
ence Reports of the Yokohama Museum, no. 9, pp. 144—
152.
Ladd, H. S. [ed.]
1957. Treatise of Marine Ecology and Paleoecology. vol. 2: Pa-
leoecology. Geological Society of America Memoir 67,
pp. 1—1077.
Lamarck, J. B. P. A. de M. de
1799. Prodrome d’une nouvelle classification des coquilles. Mé-
moires de la Société d’ Histoire Naturelle de Paris, vol. 1,
pp. 63-91.
1801. Systéme des Animaux sans vertébres ou tableau general
des classes, des ordres et des genres de ces Animaux.
Paris, 432 pp.
1802-1809. Mémoire sur les Fossiles des environs de Paris,
comprenant la détermination des espéces qui apartiennent
aux Animaux marines sans vertebres, et dont la plupart
sont figurés dans le collection des vélins du Museum. An-
nales du Muséum National d’Histoire Naturelles. Paris.
vol. 1, pp. 299-312, 383-391, 474-478 (1802); vol. 2,
pp. 57—64, 163-169, 217-227, 315-321, 385-391 (1803);
vol. 3, pp. 163-170, 266-274, 343-352, 436-441. vol. 4,
pp. 46-55, 105-115, 212-222, 289-298, 429-436. vol.
5, pp. 28-36, 91-98, 179-188, 237-245, 349-357 (1804);
vol. 6, pp. 117-126, 214-228, pls. 1-4, pp. 337-345,
407-415 (1805); vol. 7, pp. 53-62, 130-139, 231-244,
419-430, pls. S—7; vol. 8, pp. 77-79, 156-166, 347-355,
383-388, 461—469, pls. 8-14 (1806); vol. 9, pp. 236-240,
399-401, pls. 15-20 (1807); vol. 12, pp. 456-459, pls.
21-24 (1808); vol. 14, pp. 374-375, pls. 25-28 (1809).
1811. Sur la détermination des espéces parmi les Animaux sans
vertébres, et particuliérement parmi les Mollusques tes-
tacés. Annales du Muséum National d’ Histoire Naturelles.
Paris. vol. 17, pp. 54-80.
1812. Extrait du Cours de Zoologie du Muséum d'Histoire Na-
turelle sur les Animaux invertébrés, présentant la distri-
bution et la classification de ces Animaux, les caractéres
des principales divisions, et une simple liste des genres,
a l’usage de ceux qui suivent ce cours. 128 pp. Paris.
1815-1822. Histoire naturelle des Animaux sans vertébres pre-
eS)
sentant les charactéres généraux et particuliers de ces An-
imaux, leur distribution, leurs classes, leurs famillies,
leurs genres, et la citation des principales espéces qui s’y
rapportent, &c. 7 vols. Paris. vol. 5, 612 pp. (1818); vol.
6, 323 pp. (1819); vol. 7, 711 pp. (1822).
1816. in Bruguiére, J. G., Encyclopédie Méthodique ou par
ordre de Matiéres ... . Histoire Naturelle des Vers.
Langdon, D. W. Jr.
1886. Observations on the Tertiary of Mississippi and Alabama
with descriptions of new species. American Journal of
Science, vol. 131, 3rd. ser, vol. 31, no. 181, art. 20, pp.
202-209.
Latrielle, P. A.
1825. Familes naturelles du Regne Animale, exposées succin-
tement et dans un ordre analytique avec l’indication de
leur genres. Paris. 570 pp.
Lea, H. C.
1849. Catalogue of the Tertiary Testacea of the United States.
Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phil-
adelphia. vol. 4, pp. 95-107.
Lea, I.
1833. Contributions to geology. Philadelphia, 227 pp., 6 pls.
Leach, W. E.
1819. The classification of the British Mollusca. Journal de Phy-
sique, de Chimie et d’Histoire Naturelle, vol. 88.
LeBlanc, R. J.
1942. in Barry, J. O., and LeBlanc, R. J., Lower Eocene fau-
nal units of Louisiana. Geological Survey of Louisiana,
Bulletin, no. 23, 208 pp., 19 pls., 6 text figs., 2 tab.
Link, H. F.
1806-1808. Beschreibung der Naturlichen-Sammlung der Univ-
ersitat zu Rostock. Abt. 2—3.VII. Mollusken. pp. 82—160
(1806); Abt. 4. Fossile tiberbleibsel organischer Korper,
sogenannte Versteinerungen. pp. 6-23 (1807); Abt. 6.
Nachtrage und Verbesserungen. pp. 33-37 (1808).
Linnaeus, C.
1758. Systema naturae per regna tria naturae. 10th. ed. vol. 1;
Regnum animale. Stockholm, pp. 1-824.
1767. Systema naturae per regna tria naturae. 12th. ed., vol. 1,
pts. 1-2, Regnum Animale. Stockholm, pp. 1—1327.
Lovén, S. L.
1847. Index Molluscorum litora Scandivavia occidentalia habi-
tatium. Malacozoologica Gfersigt af Kongelige Veten-
skaps-Akademiens Forhandlingar, pp. 175-199, pls. 2—6.
Lowry, J. W., Etheridge, R. E. and Edwards, F. E.
1866. Chart of the characteristic British Tertiary fossils, strati-
graphically arranged. London. 4 pls., 800 figs.
Lyth, A. L. Jr.
1949. Reklaw formation in western Bastrop County, Texas. Un-
published Master’s thesis. University of Texas at Austin,
96 pp., 4 pls.
Marincovich, L. N. Jr.
1977. Cenozoic Naticidae (Mollusca, Gastropoda) of the North-
eastern Pacific. Bulletins of American Paleontology, vol.
70, no. 294, pp. 169-494, pls. 17-42.
Martin, K.
1914. Die Fauna des Oberoligocins von Nanggulan auf Java.
Sammlung des Geologischen Reichsmuseums in Leiden,
vol. 2, pt. 4, pp. 107-178, 8 pls.
Martini, F. H. W.
1769-1829. Neues systematisches Conchylien-Cabinet [Bd. 1—
3] geordnet und beschrieben von F H. W. martini (fort-
gesetzt [Bd. 4—11] durch J. H. Chemnitz, [Bd. 12] G. H.
Schubert .... A. Wagner, &c. 12 Bd. Bd. 8. pp. 12 + 1-
134 BULLETIN 352
356, pls. 1-68 (1784); Bd. 12. pp. 1-xii, 1-196, pls. 1—
237 (1829).
1837-1906. Systematisches Conchylien-Cabinet von Martini
und Chemnitz. Neu herausgegeben und vervollstandigt
von H. C. Kuster (nach dessen Tod fortgesetzt von... W.
Kobelt und H. C. Weinkauff). 11 Bd. and Index. Bd. 5,
pt. 3: Die Gattung Cypraea und Ovula. pp. 1-29, pls. 1-
53 (1881); Bd. 8, pt. 2: Die Gattung Arca L., pp. 1—30,
pls. 1-49 (1891).
Marwick, J.
1924. The Tertiary and Recent Naticidae and Naricidae of New
Zealand. Transactions and Proceedings of the New Zea-
land Institute, vol. 55, pp. 545-579, pls. 55—64.
MacNeil, F. S.
1937. The systematic position of the pelecypod genus Trinacria.
Journal of the Washington Academy of Sciences, vol. 27,
pt. 11, pp. 452-458, text fig.
MacNeil, F. S. and Dockery, D. T. III
1984. Lower Oligocene Gastropoda, Scaphopoda, and Cephal-
opoda of the Vicksburg Group in Mississippi. Mississippi
Geological Survey, Bulletin 124, pp. 1-415, 72 pls.
McLean, J. H.
1971. A Revised Classification of the Family Turridae, with a
Proposal of New Subfamilies, Genera, and Subgenera.
Veliger, vol. 14, no. 1, pp. 114—130, 4 pls.
McPherson, J. H., and Gabriel, C. J.
1962. Marine Molluscs of Victoria. Melbourne. pp. 1-475, 486
figs.
Meek, F. B.
1864. Check lists of the Invertebrate fossils of North America.
Miocene. Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections, no.
183, pp. 1-32.
Melville J. C., and Standen, R.
1901. The Mollusca of the Persian Gulf, Gulf of Oman, and
Arabian Sea, as evidenced mainly through the Collections
of Mr. F W. Townsend, 1893-1900; with Descriptions of
New Species. Proceedings of the Zoological Society of
London, vol. 2, pp. 327—400, pls. 21—24.
1903. Descriptions of sixty-eight new Gastropoda from the Per-
sian Gulf, Gulf of Oman, and North Arabian Sea, dredged
by Mr. F W. Townsend, of the Indo-European Telegraph
Service. Annals and Magazine of Natural History, ser. 7,
vol. 12, pp. 289-324, pls. 20-23.
Menard, G. de la
1807. Mémoire sur un nouveau genre de la famille des soleno-
ides. Annales du Muséum d’ Histoire Naturelle, Paris, vol.
9, pp. 135-136, pl. 12.
Meyer, O.
1885. The genealogy and the age of the species of the southern
Old-Tertiary. Part I. American Journal of Science, vol.
129, 3rd. ser., vol. 29, no. 174, pp. 457—468.
1886. Part II. Contributions to the Eocene paleontology of Al-
abama and Mississippi. Geological Survey of Alabama
Bulletin no. 1, pp. 61—85, pl. 1-3.
1887a. Beitrag zur Kenntnis der Fauna des Altteriaérs von Mis-
sissippi und Alabama. Senkenbergische Natiirforscher Ge-
sellschaft in Frankfurt am Main, 22 pp., 2 pls.
1887b. On invertebrates from the Eocene of Mississippi and Al-
abama. Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences
of Philadelphia. vol. 39, pp. 51—56, pl. 3.
Meyer, O., and Aldrich, T. H.
1886. The Tertiary fauna of Newton and Wautubbee, Mississip-
pi. Journal of the Cinncinnati Society of Natural History,
vol. 9, no. 2, pp. 40—S0, 64, pl. 2.
Mestayer, M. K.
1930. Notes on New Zealand Mollusca no. 5. Transactions and
Proceedings of the New Zealand Institute, vol. 61, pp.
144-146, pl. 26.
Michelotti, G.
1847. Descriptions des Fossiles des Terrains Mioceénes de |’ Italie
septentrionale, &c. Naturrkundige Verhandelingen van de
Bataafsche Hollandsche Maaschappye der Wetenschappen
te Haarlem, verz. 2, deel. 3, no. 2, 408 pp., 17 pls.
Miller, A. K.
1947. Tertiary Nautiloids of the Americas. Geological Society
of America Memoir 26, 234 pp., 100 pls., 30 figs.
Miller, C.
1879. Die Binnenmollusken von Equador. (Schluss). Malako-
zoologische Blaetter, neue ser., vol. 1, pp. 111—203, pls.
4-15.
Moll, F.
1941. Ubersicht iiber die Teredinen des Museums fiir Naturkun-
de zu Berlin. Sitzungsberichte der Gesellschaft Naturfor-
schender Freunde zu Berlin, pp. 152-225.
Montague, G.
1803-1808. Testacea Britannica: an account of all the shells
hitherto discovered in Britain. London. pp. i-xl, 1—606,
pls. 1-16 (1803); Suppl., pp. 1-v, 1-183, pls. 17-30
(1808).
Montfort, D. de
1802. Histoire naturelle, générale et particuliére des Mollusques,
Animaux sans vertébres et sang blank; &c. Paris. vol. 4,
pp. 1-376, pls. 42-50.
1808-1810. Conchyliogie systematique et classification métho-
diques des coquilles. Paris. vol. 1: Coquilles univalves,
cloisonnées, pp. 1—409, pls. 1-100 (1808); vol. 2: Co-
quilles univalves, non cloisonnees, pp. 1—676, figs. 1-161
(1810).
Monterosato, J. I. di
1875. Note intorno d alcuni articole di conchiologia mediterran-
ae pubdlicati nel Jahrbicher der deutschen malakozoolo-
gischen Gesellschaft dal Signor H. C. Weinkauff e dal
Dott. Kobelt. Bollettino Societa Malacologica Italiana,
vol. 1, pp. 68-73.
1880. Conchiglie della zona abissi. Bollettino Societa Malacol-
ogica Italiana, vol. 6, pp. 50-82.
1883. Conchigle Littorali Mediterranee. Naturalistica Siciliano,
no. 3, pp. 87—100.
1884. Nomenclature generica e specifica di alcure conchiglie
mediterranee. Palermo. 152 pp.
1913. Note on the genus Pseudomalaxis, Fisher, and descripions
of a new species and sub-genus. Proceedings of the Mal-
acological Society of London, vol. 10, no. 6, pp. 362—
363, fig.
Moore, E. J.
1962. Conrad’s Cenozoic fossil marine mollusk type specimens
at the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Pro-
ceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Phila-
delphia, vol. 114, no. 2, pp. 23—120.
1983. Tertiary Marine Pelecypods of California and Baja Cali-
fornia: Nuculidae through Malleidae. United States Geo-
logical Survey Professional Paper 1228-A, 108 pp., 27
pls.
Moore, R. C., editor.
1960. Treatise on Invertebrate Paleontology. Part I, Mollusca 1,
Mollusca-General Features Scaphopoda Amphineura
Monoplacophora Gastropoda-General Features Archeo-
gastropoda and some (mainly Paleozoic) Caenogastropo-
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE 13
da and Opisthobranchia. Geological Society of America,
pp. i-xxili + I1-1351, 261 figs.
1964. Treatise on Invertebrate Paleontology. Part K, Mollusca
3, Cephalopoda-General Features Endoceratoidea-Actin-
oceratoidea-Nautiloidea Bactritoidea. Geological Society
of America, pp. i-xxvill + K1-K519, 361 figs.
1969. Treatise on Invertebrate Paleontology. Part. N, Mollusca
6, Bivalvia, vols. 1-2 of 3. Geological Society of Amer-
ica, pp. NI-N952, 621 figs.
1971. Treatise on Invertebrate paleontology. Part N, vol. 3 of 3,
Mollusca 6, Bivalvia. Geological Society of America, pp.
N953-N1124, 153 figs.
Morch, O. A. L.
1852. Catalogue conchyliorum quae reliquit D’ Alphonso
d’Aguirra et Gadea Comes de Yoldi regis Daniae eubi-
culariorum princeps, ordis dannebrogici in prima classe
& ordinis caroli tertii eques. Pt. 1: 170 pp., pt. 2: 74 pp.
Hafniae.
1857. Fortegnelse over Gronlands Bloddyr. Tilloeg nr. 4. in
Rink, H. J., Groenland geographisk og statistik beskrevet.
2 vol., Copenhagen, pp. 75—100
1858. Note sur le genre Volutharpa, Fisher. Journal de Conchy-
liologie, vol. 7, pp. 40—44.
1875. Synopsis molluscorum marinorum Indiarum occidentalum
imprimis insularum danicarum. Malakozoodlogische Blat-
ter, vol. 22, pp. 142-184.
Morton, S. G.
1834. Synopsis of the organic remains of the Cretaceous group
of the United States. Philadelphia. pp. 1-84, 19 pls.
Naef, A.
1921. Das System der dibranchiaten Cephalopoden und die
mediterranean Arten derselben. Mitteilungen aus der
Zoologische Station zu Neapel, Berlin. vol. 22, pp. 527—
542.
Natland, M. L.
1957. Paleoecology of West Coast Tertiary Sediments. in Ladd,
H. S., ed., Treatise of Marine Ecology and Paleoecology.
vol. 2: Paleoecology. Geological Society of America
Memoir 67, pp. 543-572.
Nelms, K. C.
1979. Sedimentology and Faunal Analysis of a marginal marine
section, the Stone City member (Middle Eocene), Crock-
ett formation, Burleson County, Texas. Unpublished Mas-
ter’s thesis. Texas &M University, College Station, Texas.
189 pp.
Neumayr, M.
1883. Zur Morphology des Bivalvenschlosses. Sitzungsberichte
der Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften. Mathe-
matische-Naturwissenschaftlichen Klasse, Abh. 1, vol. 88,
no. 1, pp. 385-418, 2 pls.
Newell, N. D.
1965. Classification of the Bivalvia. American Museum Novi-
tates, no. 2206, pp. 1-25, 3 figs.
Newton, R. B.
1891. Systematic list of the Frederick E. Edwards collection of
British Oligocene and Eocene Mollusca in the British Mu-
seum (Natural History). British Museum (Natural Histo-
ry), pp. 1-365.
1922. Eocene Mollusca from Nigeria. Nigeria Geological Sur-
vey, Bulletin 3, pp. 1-114, pls. I-11.
Nuttall, C. P. and Cooper, J.
1973. : oasis Reade ON ere a eT Re ee ee 40
Locality 11.
13. External view of a left valve, X2.3. Specimen attached to a hard indurated sandstone. Texas Memorial Museum specimen
(TMM 84819).
GCaryocorbulajmarquezensis sew. SPeCleS) iis) ay ede renee eerste ose ded eee eee 41
Locality 20.
15,16. External and internal views of a right valve, the holotype, x8 (PRI 30300).
17,18. External and internal views of a left valve, a paratype, *8 (PRI 30303).
BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY, VOLUME 111 PLATE 7
BULLETINS OF AMERICAN PALEONTOLOGY, VOLUME I11 PLATE 8
Figure
1-5.
11-12.
16-17.
18.
EOCENE MOLLUSCS OF TEXAS: GARVIE
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 8
INQEDEORLALD (PETOLGGISSS WY FLESES” aaacbeosb ss ooossoucnmesoAobondoonobdenogddauamooenseD
Locality 20.
1,2. External and internal views of a right valve, the holotype, *8 (PRI 30305).
3,4. External and internal views of a left valve, a paratype, *8 (PRI 30306).
5. View of a double valve, a paratype, X8 (PRI 30307).
MU OMODERLES Dey ceric. cuarroys ails col sees] serist 2 slem et) Fl isity ea ran eo) ay Fede ies etic ators ahs shaspaepssnleursy eutapie yer coterie Shaden ep ate isis se ey eehle 8 -ayep sey eens
Locality 7.
6. External view of a double valve specimen, *6 (PRI 30487). Specimen attached to block of matrix.
L Lae (URN 41) TAHT) WOW GOSSES: so cadens hooegmeobone ou mo oun seen ones as och seocHnA os
Locality 7.
7. External view of a free juvenile valve, a paratype, *11 (PRI 33090).
8. View of a free pallet, a paratype, *15 (PRI 33091).
9. External view of an adult valve, a paratype, X6 (PRI 33092). Specimen attached to end of tube.
10. External view of tube, split to show pallets in situ, holotype, 11 (PRI 33125).
IA NDR AN TNE Ck (ATTA NewS ene! INNS oncoaanspocdconesccgausondonuneecsunpoDddouneuoed
Locality 4.
11,12. Lateral and umbo views of a double valve ‘“‘clay mold” specimen, *2.3 (PRI 33096).
PMV CLUCOLMION TLISONUUNG) \Clensalexd Gardnel me uenta eke re ie) es hh eRe esl net aie lomeh ee cteres renee oI Ne enn iene
Locality 4.
13,14. External and internal views of a right valve, 21 (PRI 33099).
auCocnlodesmai(Cochlodesma)iovalismnewrSpecies:... -- 52 |) ace ae ie es <= ee | ene iene eee
Locality 4.
15. External view of a right valve, the holotype, 5 (PRI 33097).
(GCardiomyaifredsmithi; new SpeGieSace mete) @ ons aie coe = oe Soa wo een URIs Ae one eps Bee eh Eee
Locality 20.
16,17. External and internal views of a left valve, the holotype, x13 (PRI 30482).
i GCLDTEOS DS ch 61. 0.5 Oe ONS & OOO GO OMA Dea aro De GIS ERATOR Ba. Os nC Oren as Cea miemEte Loiciclicho ait morcietaioara
Locality 7.
18. External view of a right valve, X7 (PRI 30538). Specimen attached to matrix.
149
42
150 BULLETIN 352
EXPLANATION OF PLATE 9
Figure Page
|. View of a section a very fossiliferous sandy, weakly indurated lens
Locality 20,
POP NANA ON ATAL MDD LA Ce MLIIN, Goa On OU oO pon nanoGAnoodundooOnOOOrHuOonnodanonbonnaAgs 46
Locality 4.
2. View of the holotype, *2.6 (PRI 30313),
3=5). Cadulias (7) Bisissura; NEW SPECIES: aco wie « we ace) egerayy @ autres ole lebeurme nie ran eR tenn Mens Nen eaten i Reatemee: ietattar eek ase eae ae 46
Locality 4,
3. Side view of the holotype, *12 (PRI 30314),
4,5. Views of the anterior and posterior cross-sections of the holotype, * 22.
Om Gadulng (Polyschides) cha suvcoarcuarus (Gabba keira +) asus soe creme ne eee nee erenen ie cee ale i-th ec eee 47
Locality 7,
6, Side view of a specimen from locality 2 (PRI 33121),
T= BE OIST OOM RFACIIES, NEW sSDECIOS) yi cicis cays) ail sive 1 ad eleayala, «i opnicarty hw puetiape evousnel a + eus @)sucueO ger lalie ces Mela ae a ae 45
Locality 4,
7. Side view of the holotype, *4 (PRI 30310).
8. View of the posterior cross-section of the holotype.
S=10) (Lintorina (Prostnenodor) COsasciata, MCW SPECIES) sicis ate sce el +10 rile eligiinite we eiesiene ners ie ited metre ieee ts keels sitet ieli